Remark: Bold type = generated by slave device.
Fig 8. Write mode (output)
S A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 0 A
slave address
START condition R/W
acknowledge
from slave
002aah349
P7 P6 1
data 1
A
acknowledge
from slave
SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SDA A
acknowledge
from slave
write to port
data output from port
tv(Q)
P5
data 2
DATA 2 VALID
P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 P7 P6 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0
P5
0
tv(Q)
DATA 1 VALID
P5 output voltage
Itrt(pu)
IOH
P5 pull-up output current
td(rst)
INT
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 9 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
8.3 Reading from a port (Input mode)
The port must have been previously written to logic 1, which is the condition after
power-on reset. To enter the Read mode the master (microcontroller) addresses the slave
device and sets the last bit of the address byte to logic 1 (address byte read). The slave
will acknowledge and then send the data byte to the master. The master will NACK and
then send the STOP condition or ACK and read the input register again.
The read of any pin being used as an output will indicate HIGH or LOW depending on the
actual state of the pin.
If the data on the input port changes faster than the master can read, this data may be
lost. The DATA 2 and DATA3 are lost because these data did not meet the setup time and
hold time (see Figure 9).
Simple code for Read mode:
...
Remark: Bold type = generated by slave device.
8.4 Power-on reset
When power is applied to VDD, an internal Power-On Reset (POR) holds the
PCF8574/74A in a reset condition until VDD has reached VPOR. At that point, the reset
condition is released and the PCF8574/74A registers and I2C-bus/SMBus state machine
will initialize to their default states of all I/Os to inputs with weak current source to VDD.
Thereafter VDD must be lowered below VPOR and back up to the operation voltage for
power-on reset cycle.
A LOW-to-HIGH transition of SDA while SCL is HIGH is defined as the STOP condition (P). Transfer of data can be stopped at
any moment by a STOP condition. When this occurs, data present at the last acknowledge phase is valid (output mode). Input
data is lost.
Fig 9. Read mode (input)
S A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 1 A
slave address
START condition R/W acknowledge
from slave
002aah383
data from port
A
acknowledge
from master
SDA 1
no acknowledge
from master
read from
port
data at
port
data from port
DATA 1
DATA 4
INT
DATA 4
DATA 2
DATA 3
P
STOP
condition
tv(INT) trst(INT)
th(D) tsu(D)
trst(INT)
DATA 1
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 10 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
8.5 Interrupt output (INT)
The PCF8574/74A provides an open-drain output (INT) which can be fed to a
corresponding input of the microcontroller (see Figure 10). As soon as a port input is
changed, the INT will be active (LOW) and notify the microcontroller.
An interrupt is generated at any rising or falling edge of the port inputs. After time tv(Q), the
signal INT is valid.
The interrupt will reset to HIGH when data on the port is changed to the original setting or
data is read or written by the master.
In the Write mode, the interrupt may be reset (HIGH) on the rising edge of the
acknowledge bit of the address byte and also on the rising edge of the write to port pulse.
The interrupt will always be reset (HIGH) on the falling edge of the write to port pulse (see
Figure 8).
The interrupt is reset (HIGH) in the Read mode on the rising edge of the read from port
pulse (see Figure 9).
During the interrupt reset, any I/O change close to the read or write pulse may not
generate an interrupt, or the interrupt will have a very short pulse. After the interrupt is
reset, any change in I/Os will be detected and transmitted as an INT.
At power-on reset all ports are in Input mode and the initial state of the ports is HIGH,
therefore, for any port pin that is pulled LOW or driven LOW by external source, the
interrupt output will be active (output LOW).
Fig 10. Application of multiple PCF8574/74As with interrupt
002aad634
VDD
MICROCONTROLLER
INT
PCF8574
INT
PCF8574
INT
device 1 device 2
PCF8574A
INT
device 16
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 11 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
9. Characteristics of the I2C-bus
The I2C-bus is for 2-way, 2-wire communication between different ICs or modules. The
two wires are a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). Both lines must be
connected to a positive supply via a pull-up resistor when connected to the output stages
of a device. Data transfer may be initiated only when the bus is not busy.
9.1 Bit transfer
One data bit is transferred during each clock pulse. The data on the SDA line must remain
stable during the HIGH period of the clock pulse as changes in the data line at this time
will be interpreted as control signals (see Figure 11).
9.1.1 START and STOP conditions
Both data and clock lines remain HIGH when the bus is not busy. A HIGH-to-LOW
transition of the data line while the clock is HIGH is defined as the START condition (S). A
LOW-to-HIGH transition of the data line while the clock is HIGH is defined as the STOP
condition (P) (see Figure 12).
9.2 System configuration
A device generating a message is a ‘transmitter’; a device receiving is the ‘receiver’. The
device that controls the message is the ‘master’ and the devices which are controlled by
the master are the ‘slaves’ (see Figure 13).
Fig 11. Bit transfer
mba607
data line
stable;
data valid
change
of data
allowed
SDA
SCL
Fig 12. Definition of START and STOP conditions
mba608
SDA
SCL
P
STOP condition
S
START condition
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 12 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
9.3 Acknowledge
The number of data bytes transferred between the START and the STOP conditions from
transmitter to receiver is not limited. Each byte of eight bits is followed by one
acknowledge bit (see Figure 14). The acknowledge bit is an active LOW level (generated
by the receiving device) that indicates to the transmitter that the data transfer was
successful.
A slave receiver which is addressed must generate an acknowledge after the reception of
each byte. Also a master must generate an acknowledge after the reception of each byte
that has been clocked out of the slave transmitter. The device that wants to issue an
acknowledge bit has to pull down the SDA line during the acknowledge clock pulse, so
that the SDA line is stable LOW during the HIGH period of the acknowledge bit related
clock pulse; set-up and hold times must be taken into account.
A master receiver must signal an end of data to the transmitter by not generating an
acknowledge on the last byte that has been clocked out of the slave. In this event, the
transmitter must leave the data line HIGH to enable the master to generate a STOP
condition.
Fig 13. System configuration
002aaa966
MASTER
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER
SLAVE
RECEIVER
SLAVE
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
MASTER
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER
SDA
SCL
I2C-BUS
MULTIPLEXER
SLAVE
Fig 14. Acknowledgement on the I2C-bus
002aaa987
S
START
condition
1 2 8 9
clock pulse for
acknowledgement
not acknowledge
acknowledge
data output
by transmitter
data output
by receiver
SCL from master
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 13 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
10. Application design-in information
10.1 Bidirectional I/O expander applications
In the 8-bit I/O expander application shown in Figure 15, P0 and P1 are inputs, and
P2 to P7 are outputs. When used in this configuration, during a write, the input (P0 and
P1) must be written as HIGH so the external devices fully control the input ports.
The desired HIGH or LOW logic levels may be written to the ports used as outputs (P2 to
P7). If 10 A internal output HIGH is not enough current source, the port needs external
pull-up resistor. During a read, the logic levels of the external devices driving the input
ports (P0 and P1) and the previous written logic level to the output ports (P2 to P7) will be
read.
The GPIO also has an interrupt line (INT) that can be connected to the interrupt logic of
the microcontroller. By sending an interrupt signal on this line, the remote I/O informs the
microprocessor that there has been a change of data on its ports without having to
communicate via the I2C-bus.
10.2 How to read and write to I/O expander (example)
In the application example of PCF8574 shown in Figure 15, the microcontroller wants to
control the P3 switch ON and the P7 LED ON when the temperature sensor P0 changes.
1. When the system power on:
Core Processor needs to issue an initial command to set P0 and P1 as inputs and
P[7:2] as outputs with value 1010 00 (LED off, MP3 off, camera on, audio off,
switch off and latch off).
2. Operation:
When the temperature changes above the threshold, the temperature sensor signal
will toggle from HIGH to LOW. The INT will be activated and notifies the ‘core
processor’ that there have been changes on the input pins. Read the input register.
If P0 = 0 (temperature sensor has changed), then turn on LED and turn on switch.
3. Software code:
//System Power on
// write to PCF8574 with data 1010 0011b to set P[7:2] outputs and P[1:0] inputs
<0100 0000> <1010 0011> //Initial setting for PCF9574
Fig 15. Bidirectional I/O expander application
002aah384
VDD
temperature sensor
battery status
control for latch
control for switch
control for audio
control for camera
control for MP3
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
VDD
SDA
SCL
INT
A0
A1
A2
CORE
PROCESSOR
VDD
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 14 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
while (INT == 1); //Monitor the interrupt pin. If INT = 1 do nothing
//When INT = 0 then read input ports
<1010 0010> //Read PCF8574 data
If (P0 == 0) //Temperature sensor activated
{
// write to PCF8574 with data 0010 1011b to turn on LED (P7), on Switch (P3)
and keep P[1:0] as input ports.
<0100 0000> <0010 1011> // Write to PCF8574
}
10.3 High current-drive load applications
The GPIO has a minimum guaranteed sinking current of 10 mA per bit at 5 V. In
applications requiring additional drive, two port pins may be connected together to sink up
to 20 mA current. Both bits must then always be turned on or off together. Up to five pins
can be connected together to drive 80 mA, which is the device recommended total limit.
Each pin needs its own limiting resistor as shown in Figure 16 to prevent damage to the
device should all ports not be turned on at the same time.
10.4 Migration path
NXP offers newer, more capable drop-in replacements for the PCF8574/74A in newer
space-saving packages.
PCA9670 replaces the interrupt output of the PCA9674 with hardware reset input to retain
the maximum number of addresses and the PCA9672 replaces address A2 of the
PCA9674 with hardware reset input to retain the interrupt but limit the number of
addresses.
Fig 16. High current-drive load application
002aah385
VDD
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
VDD
SDA
SCL
INT
A0
A1
A2
CORE
PROCESSOR
VDD
LOAD
Table 6. Migration path
Type number I2C-bus
frequency
Voltage range Number of
addresses
per device
Interrupt Reset Total package
sink current
PCF8574/74A 100 kHz 2.5 V to 6 V 8 yes no 80 mA
PCA8574/74A 400 kHz 2.3 V to 5.5 V 8 yes no 200 mA
PCA9674/74A 1 MHz Fm+ 2.3 V to 5.5 V 64 yes no 200 mA
PCA9670 1 MHz Fm+ 2.3 V to 5.5 V 64 no yes 200 mA
PCA9672 1 MHz Fm+ 2.3 V to 5.5 V 16 yes yes 200 mA
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 15 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
11. Limiting values
12. Thermal characteristics
Table 7. Limiting values
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
VDD supply voltage 0.5 +7 V
IDD supply current - 100 mA
ISS ground supply current - 100 mA
VI input voltage VSS 0.5 VDD + 0.5 V
II input current - 20 mA
IO output current - 25 mA
Ptot total power dissipation - 400 mW
P/out power dissipation per output - 100 mW
Tj(max) maximum junction temperature - 125 C
Tstg storage temperature 65 +150 C
Tamb ambient temperature operating 40 +85 C
Table 8. Thermal characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Typ Unit
Rth(j-a) thermal resistance from junction
to ambient
SO16 package 115 C/W
SSOP20 package 136 C/W
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 16 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
13. Static characteristics
[1] The power-on reset circuit resets the I2C-bus logic at VDD < VPOR and sets all I/Os to logic 1 (with current source to VDD).
Table 9. Static characteristics
VDD = 2.5 V to 6 V; VSS = 0 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Supply
VDD supply voltage 2.5 - 6.0 V
IDD supply current operating mode; VDD = 6 V; no load;
VI = VDD or VSS; fSCL = 100 kHz
- 40 100 A
Istb standby current standby mode; VDD = 6 V; no load;
VI = VDD or VSS
- 2.5 10 A
VPOR power-on reset voltage VDD = 6 V; no load; VI = VDD or VSS [1]- 1.3 2.4 V
Input SCL; input/output SDA
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0.5 - +0.3VDD V
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD - VDD + 0.5 V
IOL LOW-level output current VOL = 0.4 V 3 - - mA
IL leakage current VI = VDD or VSS 1 - +1 A
Ci input capacitance VI = VSS - - 7 pF
I/Os; P0 to P7
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0.5 - +0.3VDD V
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD - VDD + 0.5 V
IIHL(max) maximum allowed input current
through protection diode
VI VDD or VI VSS - - 400 A
IOL LOW-level output current VOL = 1 V; VDD = 5 V 10 25 - mA
IOH HIGH-level output current VOH = VSS 30 - 300 A
Itrt(pu) transient boosted pull-up current HIGH during acknowledge (see
Figure 8); VOH = VSS; VDD = 2.5 V
- 1 - mA
Ci input capacitance - - 10 pF
Co output capacitance - - 10 pF
Interrupt INT (see Figure 8)
IOL LOW-level output current VOL = 0.4 V 1.6 - - mA
IL leakage current VI = VDD or VSS 1 - +1 A
Select inputs A0, A1, A2
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0.5 - +0.3VDD V
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD - VDD + 0.5 V
ILI input leakage current pin at VDD or VSS 250 - +250 nA
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 17 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
14. Dynamic characteristics
[1] All the timing values are valid within the operating supply voltage and ambient temperature range and refer to VIL and VIH with an input
voltage swing of VSS to VDD.
Table 10. Dynamic characteristics
VDD = 2.5 V to 6 V; VSS = 0 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
I2C-bus timing[1] (see Figure 17)
fSCL SCL clock frequency - - 100 kHz
tBUF bus free time between a STOP and
START condition
4.7 - - s
tHD;STA hold time (repeated) START condition 4 - - s
tSU;STA set-up time for a repeated START condition 4.7 - - s
tSU;STO set-up time for STOP condition 4 - - s
tHD;DAT data hold time 0 - - ns
tVD;DAT data valid time - - 3.4 s
tSU;DAT data set-up time 250 - - ns
tLOW LOW period of the SCL clock 4.7 - - s
tHIGH HIGH period of the SCL clock 4 - - s
tr rise time of both SDA and SCL signals - - 1 s
tf fall time of both SDA and SCL signals - - 0.3 s
Port timing (see Figure 8 and Figure 9)
tv(Q) data output valid time CL 100 pF - - 4 s
tsu(D) data input set-up time CL 100 pF 0 - - s
th(D) data input hold time CL 100 pF 4 - - s
Interrupt INT timing (see Figure 9)
tv(INT) valid time on pin INT from port to INT;
CL 100 pF
- - 4 s
trst(INT) reset time on pin INT from SCL to INT;
CL 100 pF
- - 4 s
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 18 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
Rise and fall times refer to VIL and VIH.
Fig 17. I2C-bus timing diagram
002aab175
protocol
START
condition
(S)
bit 7
MSB
(A7)
bit 6
(A6)
bit 0
(R/W)
acknowledge
(A)
STOP
condition
(P)
SCL
SDA
tHD;STA tSU;DAT tHD;DAT
tBUF tf
tSU;STA tLOW tHIGH
tVD;ACK tSU;STO
1 / fSCL
tr
tVD;DAT
0.3 × VDD
0.7 × VDD
0.3 × VDD
0.7 × VDD
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 19 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
15. Package outline
Fig 18. Package outline SOT38-4 (DIP16)
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT38-4
95-01-14
03-02-13
MH
c
(e 1 )
ME
A
L
seating plane
A1
w M
b1
b2
e
D
A2
Z
16
1
9
8
E
pin 1 index
b
0 5 10 mm
scale
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm (0.01 inch) maximum per side are not included.
UNIT A
max.
1 2 b1
(1) (1) (1)
b2 c D E e M Z
L H
mm
DIMENSIONS (inch dimensions are derived from the original mm dimensions)
A
min.
A
max. b
max.
e1 ME w
1.73
1.30
0.53
0.38
0.36
0.23
19.50
18.55
6.48
6.20
3.60
3.05
2.54 7.62 0.254
8.25
7.80
10.0
8.3
4.2 0.51 3.2 0.76
inches 0.068
0.051
0.021
0.015
0.014
0.009
1.25
0.85
0.049
0.033
0.77
0.73
0.26
0.24
0.14
0.12
0.1 0.3 0.01
0.32
0.31
0.39
0.33
0.17 0.02 0.13 0.03
DIP16: plastic dual in-line package; 16 leads (300 mil) SOT38-4
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 20 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
Fig 19. Package outline SOT162-1 (SO16)
UNIT
A
max. A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E(1) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm
inches
2.65 0.3
0.1
2.45
2.25
0.49
0.36
0.32
0.23
10.5
10.1
7.6
7.4
1.27
10.65
10.00
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.4 8
0
o
o
0.25 0.1
DIMENSIONS (inch dimensions are derived from the original mm dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) maximum per side are not included.
1.1
0.4
SOT162-1
8
16
w M
bp
D
detail X
Z
e
9
1
y
0.25
075E03 MS-013
pin 1 index
0.1 0.012
0.004
0.096
0.089
0.019
0.014
0.013
0.009
0.41
0.40
0.30
0.29
0.05
1.4
0.055
0.419
0.394
0.043
0.039
0.035
0.016
0.01
0.25
0.01 0.004
0.043
0.016
0.01
X
θ
A
A1
A2
HE
Lp
Q
E
c
L
v M A
(A 3 )
A
0 5 10 mm
scale
SO16: plastic small outline package; 16 leads; body width 7.5 mm SOT162-1
99-12-27
03-02-19
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 21 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
Fig 20. Package outline SOT266-1 (SSOP20)
UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E(1) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 0.15
0
1.4
1.2
0.32
0.20
0.20
0.13
6.6
6.4
4.5
4.3
0.65 1 0.2
6.6
6.2
0.65
0.45
0.48
0.18
10
0
o
0.13 0.1 o
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.20 mm maximum per side are not included.
0.75
0.45
SOT266-1 MO-152
99-12-27
03-02-19
w M
θ
A
A1
A2
bp
D
HE
Lp
Q
detail X
E
Z
e
c
L
v M A
X
(A 3 )
A
y
0.25
1 10
20 11
pin 1 index
0 2.5 5 mm
scale
SSOP20: plastic shrink small outline package; 20 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT266-1
A
max.
1.5
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 22 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
16. Handling information
All input and output pins are protected against ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) under
normal handling. When handling ensure that the appropriate precautions are taken as
described in JESD625-A or equivalent standards.
17. Soldering of SMD packages
This text provides a very brief insight into a complex technology. A more in-depth account
of soldering ICs can be found in Application Note AN10365 “Surface mount reflow
soldering description”.
17.1 Introduction to soldering
Soldering is one of the most common methods through which packages are attached to
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), to form electrical circuits. The soldered joint provides both
the mechanical and the electrical connection. There is no single soldering method that is
ideal for all IC packages. Wave soldering is often preferred when through-hole and
Surface Mount Devices (SMDs) are mixed on one printed wiring board; however, it is not
suitable for fine pitch SMDs. Reflow soldering is ideal for the small pitches and high
densities that come with increased miniaturization.
17.2 Wave and reflow soldering
Wave soldering is a joining technology in which the joints are made by solder coming from
a standing wave of liquid solder. The wave soldering process is suitable for the following:
• Through-hole components
• Leaded or leadless SMDs, which are glued to the surface of the printed circuit board
Not all SMDs can be wave soldered. Packages with solder balls, and some leadless
packages which have solder lands underneath the body, cannot be wave soldered. Also,
leaded SMDs with leads having a pitch smaller than ~0.6 mm cannot be wave soldered,
due to an increased probability of bridging.
The reflow soldering process involves applying solder paste to a board, followed by
component placement and exposure to a temperature profile. Leaded packages,
packages with solder balls, and leadless packages are all reflow solderable.
Key characteristics in both wave and reflow soldering are:
• Board specifications, including the board finish, solder masks and vias
• Package footprints, including solder thieves and orientation
• The moisture sensitivity level of the packages
• Package placement
• Inspection and repair
• Lead-free soldering versus SnPb soldering
17.3 Wave soldering
Key characteristics in wave soldering are:
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 23 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
• Process issues, such as application of adhesive and flux, clinching of leads, board
transport, the solder wave parameters, and the time during which components are
exposed to the wave
• Solder bath specifications, including temperature and impurities
17.4 Reflow soldering
Key characteristics in reflow soldering are:
• Lead-free versus SnPb soldering; note that a lead-free reflow process usually leads to
higher minimum peak temperatures (see Figure 21) than a SnPb process, thus
reducing the process window
• Solder paste printing issues including smearing, release, and adjusting the process
window for a mix of large and small components on one board
• Reflow temperature profile; this profile includes preheat, reflow (in which the board is
heated to the peak temperature) and cooling down. It is imperative that the peak
temperature is high enough for the solder to make reliable solder joints (a solder paste
characteristic). In addition, the peak temperature must be low enough that the
packages and/or boards are not damaged. The peak temperature of the package
depends on package thickness and volume and is classified in accordance with
Table 11 and 12
Moisture sensitivity precautions, as indicated on the packing, must be respected at all
times.
Studies have shown that small packages reach higher temperatures during reflow
soldering, see Figure 21.
Table 11. SnPb eutectic process (from J-STD-020D)
Package thickness (mm) Package reflow temperature (C)
Volume (mm3)
< 350 350
< 2.5 235 220
2.5 220 220
Table 12. Lead-free process (from J-STD-020D)
Package thickness (mm) Package reflow temperature (C)
Volume (mm3)
< 350 350 to 2000 > 2000
< 1.6 260 260 260
1.6 to 2.5 260 250 245
> 2.5 250 245 245
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 24 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
For further information on temperature profiles, refer to Application Note AN10365
“Surface mount reflow soldering description”.
18. Soldering of through-hole mount packages
18.1 Introduction to soldering through-hole mount packages
This text gives a very brief insight into wave, dip and manual soldering.
Wave soldering is the preferred method for mounting of through-hole mount IC packages
on a printed-circuit board.
18.2 Soldering by dipping or by solder wave
Driven by legislation and environmental forces the worldwide use of lead-free solder
pastes is increasing. Typical dwell time of the leads in the wave ranges from
3 seconds to 4 seconds at 250 C or 265 C, depending on solder material applied, SnPb
or Pb-free respectively.
The total contact time of successive solder waves must not exceed 5 seconds.
The device may be mounted up to the seating plane, but the temperature of the plastic
body must not exceed the specified maximum storage temperature (Tstg(max)). If the
printed-circuit board has been pre-heated, forced cooling may be necessary immediately
after soldering to keep the temperature within the permissible limit.
18.3 Manual soldering
Apply the soldering iron (24 V or less) to the lead(s) of the package, either below the
seating plane or not more than 2 mm above it. If the temperature of the soldering iron bit is
less than 300 C it may remain in contact for up to 10 seconds. If the bit temperature is
between 300 C and 400 C, contact may be up to 5 seconds.
MSL: Moisture Sensitivity Level
Fig 21. Temperature profiles for large and small components
001aac844
temperature
time
minimum peak temperature
= minimum soldering temperature
maximum peak temperature
= MSL limit, damage level
peak
temperature
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 25 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
18.4 Package related soldering information
[1] For SDIP packages, the longitudinal axis must be parallel to the transport direction of the printed-circuit
board.
[2] For PMFP packages hot bar soldering or manual soldering is suitable.
Table 13. Suitability of through-hole mount IC packages for dipping and wave soldering
Package Soldering method
Dipping Wave
CPGA, HCPGA - suitable
DBS, DIP, HDIP, RDBS, SDIP, SIL suitable suitable[1]
PMFP[2] - not suitable
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 26 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
19. Soldering: PCB footprints
Fig 22. PCB footprint for SOT162-1 (SO16); reflow soldering
DIMENSIONS in mm
P1 Ay By D1 D2 Gy Hy
11.200 6.400 2.400 0.700
C
0.800 10.040 8.600
Gx
11.450 sot162-1_fr
Hx
1.270 11.900
SOT162-1
solder land
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of SO16 package
Gy By Ay
C
Hy
Hx
Gx
P1
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
P2
(0.125) (0.125)
D2 (4x) D1
P2
1.320
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 27 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
Fig 23. PCB footprint for SOT266-1 (SSOP20); reflow soldering
DIMENSIONS in mm
P1 Ay By D1 D2 Gy Hy
7.200 4.500 1.350 0.400
C
0.600 6.900 5.300
Gx
7.450 sot266-1_fr
Hx
0.650 7.300
SOT266-1
solder land
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of SSOP20 package
P2
0.750
P2
Gy
C
Hy
(0.125)
By Ay
(0.125)
Hx
Gx
D2 (4x) P1 D1
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 28 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
20. Abbreviations
Table 14. Abbreviations
Acronym Description
CDM Charged-Device Model
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
I/O Input/Output
I2C-bus Inter IC bus
ESD ElectroStatic Discharge
FF Flip-Flop
GPIO General Purpose Input/Output
HBM Human Body Model
IC Integrated Circuit
LED Light Emitting Diode
LP Low-Pass
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
POR Power-On Reset
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 29 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
21. Revision history
Table 15. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
PCF8574_PCF8574A v.5 20130527 Product data sheet - PCF8574 v.4
Modifications: • The format of this data sheet has been redesigned to comply with the new identity
guidelines of NXP Semiconductors.
• Legal texts have been adapted to the new company name where appropriate.
• Electrical parameter letter-symbols and their definitions are updated to conform to NXP
presentation standards.
• Section 1 “General description”: updated
• Section 2 “Features and benefits”:
– third bullet item: appended “with non-overvoltage tolerant I/O held to VDD with 100 A
current source”
– added (new) fourth and seventh bullet items
– added sixth bullet item: “Total package sink capability of 80 mA”
– ninth bullet changed from “(10 A maximum)” to “(2.5 A typical)”
– deleted (old) 11th, 12th and 13th bullet items
• Added (new) eighth bullet item “Mobile devices”
• Table 1 “Ordering information”:
– Type number corrected from “PCF8574T” to “PCF8574/3”
– Type number corrected from “PCF8574AT” to “PCF8574AT/3”
– Type number corrected from “PCF8574TS” to “PCF8574TS/3”
– Type number corrected from “PCF8574ATS” to “PCF8574ATS/3”
• Added Section 4.1 “Ordering options”
• Figure 4 “Pin configuration for SO16”: updated type numbers (appended “/3”)
• Figure 5 “Pin configuration for SSOP20”: updated type numbers (appended “/3”)
• Section 6.2 “Pin description”: combined DIP16, SO16 and SSOP20 pin descriptions into
one table (Table 3)
• Section 7 “Functional description” reorganized
• Section 7.1 “Device address”, first paragraph, fourth sentence: appended “so they must be
externally held HIGH or LOW”
• Table 4 “PCF8574 address map” updated: added column for 7-bit hexadecimal address
without R/W
• Table 5 “PCF8574A address map” updated: added column for 7-bit hexadecimal address
without R/W
• Section 8.1 “Quasi-bidirectional I/Os”: re-written and placed before Section 8.4 “Power-on
reset”
• added Section 8.2 “Writing to the port (Output mode)”
• added Section 8.3 “Reading from a port (Input mode)”
• Figure 9 “Read mode (input)”: changed symbol “tps” to “tsu”
• Section 8.4 “Power-on reset” re-written
• Section 8.5 “Interrupt output (INT)” re-written
• Figure 10 “Application of multiple PCF8574/74As with interrupt” updated: changed
device 16 from “PCF8574” to “PCF8574A”
• Section 9.3 “Acknowledge”, first paragraph, third sentence re-written.
• Added Section 10 “Application design-in information”
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 30 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
Modifications: (continued) • Table 7 “Limiting values”:
– changed parameter description for symbol II from “DC input current” to “input current”
– changed parameter description for symbol IO from “DC output current” to “output
current”
– changed parameter description for symbol ISS from “supply current” to “ground supply
current”
– changed symbol “PO” to “P/out”
– added Tj(max) limits
• Added Section 12 “Thermal characteristics”
• Table 9 “Static characteristics”:
– table title changed from “DC characteristics” to “Static characteristics”
– sub-section “I/Os; P0 to P7”: changed parameter description for symbol Itrt(pu)
from “transient pull-up current” to “transient boosted pull-up current”
– moved sub-section “Port timing” to Table 10 “Dynamic characteristics”
– sub-section “Interrupt INT”: moved sub-sub-section “Timing” to Table 10 “Dynamic
characteristics”
• Table 10 “Dynamic characteristics”:
– sub-section “I2C-bus timing”: deleted symbol/parameter “tSW, tolerable spike width on
bus”
– sub-section “Port timing”: changed symbol/parameter from “tpv, output data valid time”
to “tv(Q), data output valid time”
– sub-section “Port timing”: changed symbol/parameter from “tsu, input data set-up time”
to “tsu(D), data input set-up time”
– sub-section “Port timing”: changed symbol/parameter from “th, input data hold time”
to “th(D), data input hold time”
– sub-section “Interrupt INT”: changed parameter description for symbol tv(INT)
from “INT output valid time” to “valid time on pin INT”
– sub-section “Interrupt INT”: changed parameter description for symbol trst(INT)
from “INT reset delay time” to “reset time on pin INT”
• Added Section 19 “Soldering: PCB footprints”
PCF8574 v.4
(9397 750 10462)
20021122 Product specification - PCF8574 v.3
PCF8574 v.3
(9397 750 09911)
20020729 Product specification - PCF8574 v.2
PCF8574 v.2
(9397 750 01758)
19970402 Product specification - PCF8574_PCF8574A v.1
PCF8574_PCF8574A v.1
(9397 750 70011)
199409 Product specification - -
Table 15. Revision history …continued
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 31 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
22. Legal information
22.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
22.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
22.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
PCF8574_PCF8574A All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 27 May 2013 32 of 33
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
Translations — A non-English (translated) version of a document is for
reference only. The English version shall prevail in case of any discrepancy
between the translated and English versions.
22.4 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
I2C-bus — logo is a trademark of NXP B.V.
23. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
NXP Semiconductors PCF8574; PCF8574A
Remote 8-bit I/O expander for I2C-bus with interrupt
© NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 27 May 2013
Document identifier: PCF8574_PCF8574A
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
24. Contents
1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.1 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7.1 Device address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7.1.1 Address maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
8 I/O programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.1 Quasi-bidirectional I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.2 Writing to the port (Output mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 8
8.3 Reading from a port (Input mode) . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.4 Power-on reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.5 Interrupt output (INT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
9 Characteristics of the I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.1 Bit transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.1.1 START and STOP conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.2 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.3 Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
10 Application design-in information . . . . . . . . . 13
10.1 Bidirectional I/O expander applications . . . . . 13
10.2 How to read and write to I/O expander
(example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
10.3 High current-drive load applications . . . . . . . . 14
10.4 Migration path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
11 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
12 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
13 Static characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
14 Dynamic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
15 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
16 Handling information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
17 Soldering of SMD packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
17.1 Introduction to soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
17.2 Wave and reflow soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
17.3 Wave soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
17.4 Reflow soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
18 Soldering of through-hole mount packages . 24
18.1 Introduction to soldering through-hole mount
packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
18.2 Soldering by dipping or by solder wave . . . . . 24
18.3 Manual soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
18.4 Package related soldering information. . . . . . 25
19 Soldering: PCB footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
20 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
21 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
22 Legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
22.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
22.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
22.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
22.4 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
23 Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
24 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1. General description
The LPC408x/7x is an ARM Cortex-M4 based digital signal controller for embedded
applications requiring a high level of integration and low power dissipation.
The ARM Cortex-M4 is a next generation core that offers system enhancements such as
low power consumption, enhanced debug features, and a high level of support block
integration. The ARM Cortex-M4 CPU incorporates a 3-stage pipeline, uses a Harvard
architecture with separate local instruction and data buses as well as a third bus for
peripherals, and includes an internal prefetch unit that supports speculative branching.
The ARM Cortex-M4 supports single-cycle digital signal processing and SIMD
instructions. A hardware floating-point processor is integrated in the core for several
versions of the part.
The LPC408x/7x adds a specialized flash memory accelerator to accomplish optimal
performance when executing code from flash. The LPC408x/7x is targeted to operate at
up to 120 MHz CPU frequency.
The peripheral complement of the LPC408x/7x includes up to 512 kB of flash program
memory, up to 96 kB of SRAM data memory, up to 4032 byte of EEPROM data memory,
External Memory controller (EMC), LCD, Ethernet, USB Device/Host/OTG, an SPI Flash
Interface (SPIFI), a General Purpose DMA controller, five UARTs, three SSP controllers,
three I2C-bus interfaces, a Quadrature Encoder Interface, four general purpose timers,
two general purpose PWMs with six outputs each and one motor control PWM, an
ultra-low power RTC with separate battery supply and event recorder, a windowed
watchdog timer, a CRC calculation engine and up to 165 general purpose I/O pins.
The analog peripherals include one eight-channel 12-bit ADC, two analog comparators,
and a DAC.
The pinout of LPC408x/7x is intended to allow pin function compatibility with the
LPC24xx/23xx as well as the LPC178x/7x families.
2. Features and benefits
Functional replacement for LPC23xx/24xx and LPC178x/7x family devices.
ARM Cortex-M4 core:
ARM Cortex-M4 processor, running at frequencies of up to 120 MHz.
ARM Cortex-M4 built-in Memory Protection Unit (MPU) supporting eight regions.
ARM Cortex-M4 built-in Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC).
Hardware floating-point unit (not all versions).
Non-maskable Interrupt (NMI) input.
LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 MCU; up to 512 kB flash, 96 kB SRAM;
USB Device/Host/OTG; Ethernet; LCD; EMC; SPIFI
Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 Product data sheet
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 2 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
JTAG and Serial Wire Debug (SWD), serial trace, eight breakpoints, and four watch
points.
System tick timer.
System:
Multilayer AHB matrix interconnect provides a separate bus for each AHB master.
AHB masters include the CPU, and General Purpose DMA controller. This
interconnect provides communication with no arbitration delays unless two masters
attempt to access the same slave at the same time.
Split APB bus allows for higher throughput with fewer stalls between the CPU and
DMA. A single level of write buffering allows the CPU to continue without waiting for
completion of APB writes if the APB was not already busy.
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) module supports real-time trace.
Boundary scan for simplified board testing.
Memory:
512 kB on-chip flash program memory with In-System Programming (ISP) and
In-Application Programming (IAP) capabilities. The combination of an enhanced
flash memory accelerator and location of the flash memory on the CPU local
code/data bus provides high code performance from flash.
Up to 96 kB on-chip SRAM includes:
64 kB of main SRAM on the CPU with local code/data bus for high-performance
CPU access.
Two 16 kB peripheral SRAM blocks with separate access paths for higher
throughput. These SRAM blocks may be used for DMA memory as well as for
general purpose instruction and data storage.
Up to 4032 byte on-chip EEPROM.
LCD controller, supporting both Super-Twisted Nematic (STN) and Thin-Film
Transistors (TFT) displays.
Dedicated DMA controller.
Selectable display resolution (up to 1024 768 pixels).
Supports up to 24-bit true-color mode.
External Memory Controller (EMC) provides support for asynchronous static memory
devices such as RAM, ROM and flash, as well as dynamic memories such as single
data rate SDRAM.
Eight channel General Purpose DMA controller (GPDMA) on the AHB multilayer
matrix that can be used with the SSP, I2S, UART, CRC engine, Analog-to-Digital and
Digital-to-Analog converter peripherals, timer match signals, GPIO, and for
memory-to-memory transfers.
Serial interfaces:
Quad SPI Flash Interface (SPIFI) with four lanes and up to 40 MB per second.
Ethernet MAC with MII/RMII interface and associated DMA controller. These
functions reside on an independent AHB.
USB 2.0 full-speed dual port device/host/OTG controller with on-chip PHY and
associated DMA controller.
Five UARTs with fractional baud rate generation, internal FIFO, DMA support, and
RS-485/EIA-485 support. One UART (UART1) has full modem control I/O, and one
UART (USART4) supports IrDA, synchronous mode, and a smart card mode
conforming to ISO7816-3.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 3 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Three SSP controllers with FIFO and multi-protocol capabilities. The SSP
interfaces can be used with the GPDMA controller.
Three enhanced I2C-bus interfaces, one with a true open-drain output supporting
the full I2C-bus specification and Fast-mode Plus with data rates of 1 Mbit/s, two
with standard port pins. Enhancements include multiple address recognition and
monitor mode.
I2S (Inter-IC Sound) interface for digital audio input or output. It can be used with
the GPDMA.
CAN controller with two channels.
Digital peripherals:
SD/MMC memory card interface.
Up to 165 General Purpose I/O (GPIO) pins depending on the packaging, with
configurable pull-up/down resistors, open-drain mode, and repeater mode. All
GPIOs are located on an AHB bus for fast access and support Cortex-M4
bit-banding. GPIOs can be accessed by the General Purpose DMA Controller. Any
pin of ports 0 and 2 can be used to generate an interrupt.
Two external interrupt inputs configurable as edge/level sensitive. All pins on port 0
and port 2 can be used as edge sensitive interrupt sources.
Four general purpose timers/counters, with a total of eight capture inputs and ten
compare outputs. Each timer block has an external count input. Specific timer
events can be selected to generate DMA requests.
Quadrature encoder interface that can monitor one external quadrature encoder.
Two standard PWM/timer blocks with external count input option.
One motor control PWM with support for three-phase motor control.
Real-Time Clock (RTC) with a separate power domain. The RTC is clocked by a
dedicated RTC oscillator. The RTC block includes 20 bytes of battery-powered
backup registers, allowing system status to be stored when the rest of the chip is
powered off. Battery power can be supplied from a standard 3 V lithium button cell.
The RTC will continue working when the battery voltage drops to as low as 2.1 V.
An RTC interrupt can wake up the CPU from any reduced power mode.
Event Recorder that can capture the clock value when an event occurs on any of
three inputs. The event identification and the time it occurred are stored in
registers. The Event Recorder is located in the RTC power domain and can
therefore operate as long as there is RTC power.
Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT). Windowed operation, dedicated internal
oscillator, watchdog warning interrupt, and safety features.
CRC Engine block can calculate a CRC on supplied data using one of three
standard polynomials. The CRC engine can be used in conjunction with the DMA
controller to generate a CRC without CPU involvement in the data transfer.
Analog peripherals:
12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) with input multiplexing among eight pins,
conversion rates up to 400 kHz, and multiple result registers. The 12-bit ADC can
be used with the GPDMA controller.
10-bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) with dedicated conversion timer and DMA
support.
Two analog comparators.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 4 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Power control:
Four reduced power modes: Sleep, Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down.
The Wake-up Interrupt Controller (WIC) allows the CPU to automatically wake up
from any priority interrupt that can occur while the clocks are stopped in
Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep power-down modes.
Processor wake-up from Power-down mode via any interrupt able to operate
during Power-down mode (includes external interrupts, RTC interrupt, PORT0/2
pin interrupt, and NMI).
Brownout detect with separate threshold for interrupt and forced reset.
On-chip Power-On Reset (POR).
Clock generation:
Clock output function that can reflect the main oscillator clock, IRC clock, RTC
clock, CPU clock, USB clock, or the watchdog timer clock.
On-chip crystal oscillator with an operating range of 1 MHz to 25 MHz.
12 MHz Internal RC oscillator (IRC) trimmed to 1 % accuracy that can optionally be
used as a system clock.
An on-chip PLL allows CPU operation up to the maximum CPU rate without the
need for a high-frequency crystal. May be run from the main oscillator or the
internal RC oscillator.
A second, dedicated PLL may be used for USB interface in order to allow added
flexibility for the Main PLL settings.
Versatile pin function selection feature allows many possibilities for using on-chip
peripheral functions.
Unique device serial number for identification purposes.
Single 3.3 V power supply (2.4 V to 3.6 V). Temperature range of 40 C to 85 C.
Available as LQFP208, TFBGA208, TFBGA180, LQFP144, TFBGA80, and LQFP80
package.
3. Applications
Communications:
Point-of-sale terminals, web servers, multi-protocol bridges
Industrial/Medical:
Automation controllers, application control, robotics control, HVAC, PLC, inverters,
circuit breakers, medical scanning, security monitoring, motor drive, video intercom
Consumer/Appliance:
Audio, MP3 decoders, alarm systems, displays, printers, scanners, small
appliances, fitness equipment
Automotive:
After-market, car alarms, GPS/fleet monitors
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 5 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
4. Ordering information
Table 1. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
LPC4088
LPC4088FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC4088FET208 TFBGA208 plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 208 balls; body
15 15 0.7 mm
SOT950-1
LPC4088FET180 TFBGA180 thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls SOT570-3
LPC4088FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC4078
LPC4078FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC4078FET208 TFBGA208 plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 208 balls; body
15 15 0.7 mm
SOT950-1
LPC4078FET180 TFBGA180 thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls SOT570-3
LPC4078FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC4078FBD80 LQFP80 plastic low-profile quad package; 80 leads; body 12 12 1.4 mm SOT315-1
LPC4078FBD100 LQFP100 plastic low profile quad flat package; 100 leads; body 14 14 1.4 mm SOT407-1
LPC4076
LPC4076FET180 TFBGA180 thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls SOT570-3
LPC4076FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC4074
LPC4074FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC4074FBD80 LQFP80 plastic low-profile quad package; 80 leads; body 12 12 1.4 mm SOT315-1
LPC4072
LPC4072FET80 TFBGA80 plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 80 balls SOT1328-1
LPC4072FBD80 LQFP80 plastic low-profile quad package; 80 leads; body 12 12 1.4 mm SOT315-1
Table 2. Ordering options
Type number
Flash (kB)
SRAM (kB)
EEPROM (B)
EMC bus
width (bit)
LCD
Ethernet
USB
UART
QEI
SD/MMC
Comparator
FPU
Package
LPC4088
LPC4088FBD208 512 96 4032 32 yes yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP208
LPC4088FET208 512 96 4032 32 yes yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes TFBGA208
LPC4088FET180 512 96 4032 16 yes yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes TFBGA180
LPC4088FBD144 512 96 4032 8 yes yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP144
LPC4078
LPC4078FBD208 512 96 4032 32 no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP208
LPC4078FET208 512 96 4032 32 no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes TFBGA208
LPC4078FET180 512 96 4032 16 no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes TFBGA180
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 6 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
LPC4078FBD144 512 96 4032 8 no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP144
LPC4078FBD100 512 96 4032 - no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP100
LPC4078FBD80 512 96 4032 - no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP80
LPC4076
LPC4076FET180 256 80 2048 16 no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes TFBGA180
LPC4076FBD144 256 80 2048 8 no yes H/O/D 5 yes yes yes yes LQFP144
LPC4074
LPC4074FBD144 128 40 2048 - no no D 4 no no no no LQFP144
LPC4074FBD80 128 40 2048 - no no D 4 no no no no LQFP80
LPC4072
LPC4072FET80 64 24 2048 - no no D 4 no no no no TFBGA80
LPC4072FBD80 64 24 2048 - no no D 4 no no no no LQFP80
Table 2. Ordering options …continued
Type number
Flash (kB)
SRAM (kB)
EEPROM (B)
EMC bus
width (bit)
LCD
Ethernet
USB
UART
QEI
SD/MMC
Comparator
FPU
Package
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 7 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
5. Block diagram
(1) Not available on all parts.
Fig 1. Block diagram
SRAM
96/80/
40/24 kB
ARM
CORTEX-M4
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE
EMULATION
TRACE MODULE
FLASH
ACCELERATOR
FLASH
512/256/128/64 kB
GPDMA
CONTROLLER
I-code
bus
D-code
bus
system
bus
AHB TO
APB
BRIDGE 0
HIGH-SPEED
GPIO AHB TO
APB
BRIDGE 1
4032 B/
2048 B
EEPROM
CLOCK
GENERATION,
POWER CONTROL,
SYSTEM
FUNCTIONS
clocks and
controls
JTAG
interface
debug
port
SSP0/2
USART4(1)
UART2/3
SYSTEM CONTROL
2 x ANALOG COMPARATOR(1)
SSP1
UART0/1
I2C0/1
CAN 0/1
TIMER 0/1
WINDOWED WDT
12-bit ADC
PWM0/1
PIN CONNECT
GPIO INTERRUPT CONTROL
RTC
BACKUP REGISTERS
EVENT RECORDER
32 kHz
OSCILLATOR
APB slave group 1
APB slave group 0
RTC POWER DOMAIN
LPC408x/7x
master
ETHERNET(1)
master
USB
DEVICE/
HOST(1)/OTG(1)
master
002aag491
slave slave
CRC
slave
SPIFI
slave slave slave
slave
EMC(1) ROM
slave slave
LCD(1)
slave
MULTILAYER AHB MATRIX
I2C2
TIMER2/3
DAC
I2S
QUADRATURE ENCODER(1)
MOTOR CONTROL PWM
MPU FPU(1)
SD/MMC(1)
= connected to GPDMA
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 8 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
6. Pinning information
6.1 Pinning
Fig 2. Pin configuration (LQFP208)
Fig 3. Pin configuration (LQFP144)
Fig 4. Pin configuration (LQFP100)
LPC408x/7x
156
53
104
208
157
105
1
52
002aag732
LPC408x/7x
108
37
72
144
109
73
1
36
002aag735
LPC407x
50
1
25
75
51
26
76
100
002aah638
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 9 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 5. Pin configuration (LQFP80)
Fig 6. Pin configuration (TFBGA208)
40
1
20
60
41
21
61
80
002aag865
LPC408x/7x
002aag733
LPC408x/7x
Transparent top view
ball A1
index area
U
T
R
P
N
M
K
H
L
J
G
F
E
D
C
A
B
2 4 6 8 10 12
13
14
15 17
16
1 3 5 7 9 11
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 10 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
6.2 Pin description
I/O pins on the LPC408x/7x are 5 V tolerant and have input hysteresis unless otherwise
indicated in the table below. Crystal pins, power pins, and reference voltage pins are not
5 V tolerant. In addition, when pins are selected to be ADC inputs, they are no longer 5 V
tolerant and the input voltage must be limited to the voltage at the ADC positive reference
pin (VREFP).
All port pins Pn[m] are multiplexed, and the multiplexed functions appear in Table 3 in the
order defined by the FUNC bits of the corresponding IOCON register up to the highest
used function number. Each port pin can support up to eight multiplexed functions.
IOCON register FUNC values which are reserved are noted as “R” in the pin configuration
table.
Fig 7. Pin configuration (TFBGA180)
Fig 8. Pin configuration (TFBGA80)
002aag734
LPC408x/7x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
ball A1
index area
P
N
M
L
K
J
G
E
H
F
D
C
B
A
Transparent top view
002aah684
LPC4072FET80
Transparent top view
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
ball A1
index area
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 11 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Table 3. Pin description
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
P0[0] to P0[31] I/O Port 0: Port 0 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 0 pins depends
upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P0[0] 94 U15 M10 66 46 37 J9 [3] I; PU I/O P0[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CAN_RD1 — CAN1 receiver input.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for UART0.
P0[1] 96 T14 N11 67 47 38 J10 [3] I; PU I/O P0[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CAN_TD1 — CAN1 transmitter output.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for UART0.
P0[2] 202 C4 D5 141 98 79 A2 [3] I; PU I/O P0[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for UART0.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
P0[3] 204 D6 A3 142 99 80 A1 [3] I; PU I/O P0[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for UART0.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 12 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[4] 168 B12 A11 116 81 - - [3] I; PU I/O P0[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_RX_SCK — I2S Receive clock. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the
signal SCK in the I2S-bus specification.
I CAN_RD2 — CAN2 receiver input.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O CMP_ROSC — Comparator relaxation oscillator for 555
timer applications.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[0] — LCD data.
P0[5] 166 C12 B11 115 80 - - [3] I; PU I/O P0[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_RX_WS — I2S Receive word select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the
signal WS in the I2S-bus specification.
O CAN_TD2 — CAN2 transmitter output.
I T2_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP_RESET — Comparator reset.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[1] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 13 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[6] 164 D13 D11 113 79 64 A7 [3] I; PU I/O P0[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_RX_SDA — I2S Receive data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the
signal SD in the I2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 0.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
I/O CMP_ROSC — Comparator relaxation oscillator for 555
timer applications.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[8] — LCD data.
P0[7] 162 C13 B12 112 78 63 A8 [4] I; IA I/O P0[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_TX_SCK — I2S transmit clock. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the
signal SCK in the I2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial Clock for SSP1.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 1.
I RTC_EV0 — Event input 0 to Event Monitor/Recorder.
I CMP_VREF — Comparator reference voltage.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[9] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 14 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[8] 160 A15 C12 111 77 62 A10 [4] I; IA I/O P0[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_TX_WS — I2S Transmit word select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the
signal WS in the I2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 2.
I RTC_EV1 — Event input 1 to Event Monitor/Recorder.
I CMP1_IN[3] — Comparator 1, input 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[16] — LCD data.
P0[9] 158 C14 A13 109 76 61 A9 [4] I; IA I/O P0[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_TX_SDA — I2S transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the
signal SD in the I2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 3.
I RTC_EV2 — Event input 2 to Event Monitor/Recorder.
I CMP1_IN[2] — Comparator 1, input 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[17] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 15 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[10] 98 T15 L10 69 48 39 K9 [3] I; PU I/O P0[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for UART2.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[5] — LCD data.
P0[11] 100 R14 P12 70 49 40 K10 [3] I; PU I/O P0[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for UART2.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
P0[12] 41 R1 J4 29 - - - [5] I; PU I/O P0[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_PPWR2 — Port Power enable signal for USB port 2.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
I ADC0_IN[6] — A/D converter 0, input 6. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 16 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[13] 45 R2 J5 32 - - - [5] I; PU I/O P0[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_UP_LED2 — USB port 2 GoodLink LED indicator. It
is LOW when the device is configured (non-control
endpoints enabled), or when the host is enabled and has
detected a device on the bus. It is HIGH when the device
is not configured, or when host is enabled and has not
detected a device on the bus, or during global suspend. It
transitions between LOW and HIGH (flashes) when the
host is enabled and detects activity on the bus.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
I ADC0_IN[7] — A/D converter 0, input 7. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
P0[14] 69 T7 M5 48 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P0[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_HSTEN2 — Host Enabled status for USB port 2.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O USB_CONNECT2 — SoftConnect control for USB port 2.
Signal used to switch an external 1.5 k resistor under
software control. Used with the SoftConnect USB feature.
P0[15] 128 J16 H13 89 62 47 F9 [3] I; PU I/O P0[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPIFI_IO[2] — Data bit 0 for SPIFI.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 17 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[16] 130 J14 H14 90 63 48 F8 [3] I; PU I/O P0[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPIFI_IO[3] — Data bit 0 for SPIFI.
P0[17] 126 K17 J12 87 61 46 F10 [3] I; PU I/O P0[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPIFI_IO[1] — Data bit 0 for SPIFI.
P0[18] 124 K15 J13 86 60 45 G10 [3] I; PU I/O P0[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPIFI_IO[0] — Data bit 0 for SPIFI.
P0[19] 122 L17 J10 85 59 - - [3] I; PU I/O P0[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O SD_CLK — Clock output line for SD card interface.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[13] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 18 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[20] 120 M17 K14 83 58 - - [3] I; PU I/O P0[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Can
also be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
I/O SD_CMD — Command line for SD card interface.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[14] — LCD data.
P0[21] 118 M16 K11 82 57 - - [3] I; PU I/O P0[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
O SD_PWR — Power Supply Enable for external SD card
power supply.
O U4_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART4.
I CAN_RD1 — CAN1 receiver input.
I/O U4_SCLK — USART 4 clock input or output in
synchronous mode.
P0[22] 116 N17 L14 80 56 44 H10 [6] I; PU I/O P0[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
I/O SD_DAT[0] — Data line 0 for SD card interface.
O U4_TXD — Transmitter output for USART4 (input/output
in smart card mode).
O CAN_TD1 — CAN1 transmitter output.
O SPIFI_CLK — Clock output for SPIFI.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 19 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[23] 18 H1 F5 13 9 - - [5] I; PU I/O P0[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[0] — A/D converter 0, input 0. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
I/O I2S_RX_SCK — Receive Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK
in the I2S-bus specification.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 0.
P0[24] 16 G2 E1 11 8 - - [5] I; PU I/O P0[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[1] — A/D converter 0, input 1. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
I/O I2S_RX_WS — Receive Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the
signal WS in the I2S-bus specification.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 1.
P0[25] 14 F1 E4 10 7 7 D1 [5] I; PU I/O P0[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[2] — A/D converter 0, input 2. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
I/O I2S_RX_SDA — Receive data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the
signal SD in the I2S-bus specification.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 20 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P0[26] 12 E1 D1 8 6 6 D2 [7] I; PU I/O P0[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[3] — A/D converter 0, input 3. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
O DAC_OUT — D/A converter output. When configured as
the DAC output, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
P0[27] 50 T1 L3 35 25 - - [8] I I/O P0[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2C0_SDA — I2C0 data input/output. (This pin uses a
specialized I2C pad).
I/O USB_SDA1 — I2C serial data for communication with an
external USB transceiver.
P0[28] 48 R3 M1 34 24 - - [8] I I/O P0[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2C0_SCL — I2C0 clock input/output (this pin uses a
specialized I2C pad.
I/O USB_SCL1 — I2C serial clock for communication with an
external USB transceiver.
P0[29] 61 U4 K5 42 29 22 J3 [9] I I/O P0[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_D+1 — USB port 1 bidirectional D+ line.
I EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
P0[30] 62 R6 N4 43 30 23 K3 [9] I I/O P0[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_D1 — USB port 1 bidirectional D line.
I EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
P0[31] 51 T2 N1 36 - - - [9] I I/O P0[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_D+2 — USB port 2 bidirectional D+ line.
P1[0] to P1[31] I/O Port 1: Port 1 is a 32 bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 1 pins depends
upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 21 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[0] 196 A3 B5 136 95 76 A3 [3] I; PU I/O P1[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD0 — Ethernet transmit data 0 (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 1.
I/O SSP2_SCK — Serial clock for SSP2.
P1[1] 194 B5 A5 135 94 75 B4 [3] I; PU I/O P1[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD1 — Ethernet transmit data 1 (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 3.
I/O SSP2_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP2.
P1[2] 185 D9 B7 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD2 — Ethernet transmit data 2 (MII interface).
O SD_CLK — Clock output line for SD card interface.
O PWM0[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 1.
P1[3] 177 A10 A9 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD3 — Ethernet transmit data 3 (MII interface).
I/O SD_CMD — Command line for SD card interface.
O PWM0[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 2.
P1[4] 192 A5 C6 133 93 74 B5 [3] I; PU I/O P1[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TX_EN — Ethernet transmit data enable (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 2.
I/O SSP2_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 22 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[5] 156 A17 B13 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TX_ER — Ethernet Transmit Error (MII interface).
O SD_PWR — Power Supply Enable for external SD card
power supply.
O PWM0[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 3.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP1_IN[1] — Comparator 1, input 1.
P1[6] 171 B11 B10 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_TX_CLK — Ethernet Transmit Clock (MII
interface).
I/O SD_DAT[0] — Data line 0 for SD card interface.
O PWM0[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 4.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP0_IN[3] — Comparator 0, input 3.
P1[7] 153 D14 C13 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_COL — Ethernet Collision detect (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[1] — Data line 1 for SD card interface.
O PWM0[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 5.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP1_IN[0] — Comparator 1, input 0.
P1[8] 190 C7 B6 132 92 73 C5 [3] I; PU I/O P1[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_CRS (ENET_CRS_DV) — Ethernet Carrier Sense
(MII interface) or Ethernet Carrier Sense/Data Valid (RMII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 1.
I/O SSP2_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 23 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[9] 188 A6 D7 131 91 72 A4 [3] I; PU I/O P1[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD0 — Ethernet receive data 0 (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 0.
P1[10] 186 C8 A7 129 90 71 A5 [3] I; PU I/O P1[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD1 — Ethernet receive data 1 (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 0.
P1[11] 163 A14 A12 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD2 — Ethernet Receive Data 2 (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[2] — Data line 2 for SD card interface.
O PWM0[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 6.
P1[12] 157 A16 A14 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD3 — Ethernet Receive Data (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[3] — Data line 3 for SD card interface.
I PWM0_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM0, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O CMP1_OUT — Comparator 1, output.
P1[13] 147 D16 D14 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RX_DV — Ethernet Receive Data Valid (MII
interface).
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 24 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[14] 184 A7 D8 128 89 70 C6 [3] I; PU I/O P1[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RX_ER — Ethernet receive error (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP0_IN[0] — Comparator 0, input 0.
P1[15] 182 A8 A8 126 88 69 B6 [3] I; PU I/O P1[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RX_CLK (ENET_REF_CLK) — Ethernet Receive
Clock (MII interface) or Ethernet Reference Clock (RMII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
P1[16] 180 D10 B8 125 87 - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
O I2S_TX_MCLK — I2S transmit master clock.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP0_IN[1] — Comparator 0, input 1.
P1[17] 178 A9 C9 123 86 - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O ENET_MDIO — Ethernet MIIM data input and output.
O I2S_RX_MCLK — I2S receive master clock.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I CMP0_IN[2] — Comparator 0, input 2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 25 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[18] 66 P7 L5 46 32 25 K4 [3] I; PU I/O P1[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_UP_LED1 — It is LOW when the device is
configured (non-control endpoints enabled), or when the
host is enabled and has detected a device on the bus. It is
HIGH when the device is not configured, or when host is
enabled and has not detected a device on the bus, or
during global suspend. It transitions between LOW and
HIGH (flashes) when the host is enabled and detects
activity on the bus.
O PWM1[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 1 output.
I T1_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
P1[19] 68 U6 P5 47 33 26 J4 [3] I; PU I/O P1[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_TX_E1 — Transmit Enable signal for USB port 1
(OTG transceiver).
O USB_PPWR1 — Port Power enable signal for USB port 1.
I T1_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1.
O MC_0A — Motor control PWM channel 0, output A.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial clock for SSP1.
O U2_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 26 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[20] 70 U7 K6 49 34 27 J5 [3] I; PU I/O P1[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_TX_DP1 — D+ transmit data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 2 output.
I QEI_PHA — Quadrature Encoder Interface PHA input.
I MC_FB0 — Motor control PWM channel 0 feedback input.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[6] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
P1[21] 72 R8 N6 50 35 - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_TX_DM1 — D transmit data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 3 output.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
I MC_ABORT — Motor control PWM, active low fast abort.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[7] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[11] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 27 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[22] 74 U8 M6 51 36 28 K5 [3] I; PU I/O P1[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_RCV1 — Differential receive data for USB port 1
(OTG transceiver).
I USB_PWRD1 — Power Status for USB port 1 (host power
switch).
O T1_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 0.
O MC_0B — Motor control PWM channel 0, output B.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
O LCD_VD[8] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[12] — LCD data.
P1[23] 76 P9 N7 53 37 29 H5 [3] I; PU I/O P1[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_RX_DP1 — D+ receive data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 4 output.
I QEI_PHB — Quadrature Encoder Interface PHB input.
I MC_FB1 — Motor control PWM channel 1 feedback input.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[9] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[13] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 28 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[24] 78 T9 P7 54 38 30 J6 [3] I; PU I/O P1[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_RX_DM1 — D receive data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 5 output.
I QEI_IDX — Quadrature Encoder Interface INDEX input.
I MC_FB2 — Motor control PWM channel 2 feedback input.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[14] — LCD data.
P1[25] 80 T10 L7 56 39 31 K6 [3] I; PU I/O P1[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_LS1 — Low Speed status for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O USB_HSTEN1 — Host Enabled status for USB port 1.
O T1_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 1.
O MC_1A — Motor control PWM channel 1, output A.
O CLKOUT — Selectable clock output.
O LCD_VD[11] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[15] — LCD data.
P1[26] 82 R10 P8 57 40 32 H6 [3] I; PU I/O P1[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_SSPND1 — USB port 1 Bus Suspend status (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 6 output.
I T0_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
O MC_1B — Motor control PWM channel 1, output B.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O LCD_VD[12] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[20] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 29 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[27] 88 T12 M9 61 43 - - [3] I; PU I/O P1[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_INT1 — USB port 1 OTG transceiver interrupt (OTG
transceiver).
I USB_OVRCR1 — USB port 1 Over-Current status.
I T0_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
O CLKOUT — Selectable clock output.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[13] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[21] — LCD data.
P1[28] 90 T13 P10 63 44 35 J8 [3] I; PU I/O P1[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_SCL1 — USB port 1 I2C serial clock (OTG
transceiver).
I PWM1_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 0.
O T0_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
O MC_2A — Motor control PWM channel 2, output A.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[14] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[22] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 30 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P1[29] 92 U14 N10 64 45 36 K8 [3] I; PU I/O P1[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_SDA1 — USB port 1 I2C serial data (OTG
transceiver).
I PWM1_CAP1 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 1.
O T0_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
O MC_2B — Motor control PWM channel 2, output B.
O U4_TXD — Transmitter output for USART4 (input/output
in smart card mode).
O LCD_VD[15] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[23] — LCD data.
P1[30] 42 P2 K3 30 21 18 J2 [5] I; PU I/O P1[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_PWRD2 — Power Status for USB port 2.
I USB_VBUS — Monitors the presence of USB bus power.
This signal must be HIGH for USB reset to occur.
I ADC0_IN[4] — A/D converter 0, input 4. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
I/O I2C0_SDA — I2C0 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad.
O U3_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART3.
P1[31] 40 P1 K2 28 20 17 H2 [5] I; PU I/O P1[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_OVRCR2 — Over-Current status for USB port 2.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial Clock for SSP1.
I ADC0_IN[5] — A/D converter 0, input 5. When configured
as an ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be
disabled.
I/O I2C0_SCL — I2C0 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 31 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[0] to P2[31] I/O Port 2: Port 2 is a 32 bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 1 pins depends
upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P2[0] 154 B17 D12 107 75 60 B10 [3] I; PU I/O P2[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 1 output.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_PWR — LCD panel power enable.
P2[1] 152 E14 C14 106 74 59 B8 [3] I; PU I/O P2[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 2 output.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_LE — Line end signal.
P2[2] 150 D15 E11 105 73 58 B9 [3] I; PU I/O P2[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 3 output.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[3] — Trace data, bit 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_DCLK — LCD panel clock.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 32 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[3] 144 E16 E13 100 70 55 C10 [3] I; PU I/O P2[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 4 output.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[2] — Trace data, bit 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_FP — Frame pulse (STN). Vertical synchronization
pulse (TFT).
P2[4] 142 D17 E14 99 69 54 C9 [3] I; PU I/O P2[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 5 output.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[1] — Trace data, bit 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_ENAB_M — STN AC bias drive or TFT data enable
output.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 33 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[5] 140 F16 F12 97 68 53 D10 [3] I; PU I/O P2[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 6 output.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Can
also be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[0] — Trace data, bit 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_LP — Line synchronization pulse (STN). Horizontal
synchronization pulse (TFT).
P2[6] 138 E17 F13 96 67 52 E8 [3] I; PU I/O P2[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I PWM1_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 0.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
O U2_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART2.
O TRACECLK — Trace clock.
O LCD_VD[0] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[4] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 34 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[7] 136 G16 G11 95 66 51 D9 [3] I; PU I/O P2[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CAN_RD2 — CAN2 receiver input.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O SPIFI_CS — Chip select output for SPIFI.
O LCD_VD[1] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[5] — LCD data.
P2[8] 134 H15 G14 93 65 50 E9 [3] I; PU I/O P2[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CAN_TD2 — CAN2 transmitter output.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for UART2.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[2] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[6] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 35 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[9] 132 H16 H11 92 64 49 E10 [3] I; PU I/O P2[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_CONNECT1 — USB1 SoftConnect control. Signal
used to switch an external 1.5 k resistor under the
software control. Used with the SoftConnect USB feature.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for UART2.
I U4_RXD — Receiver input for USART4.
I/O ENET_MDIO — Ethernet MIIM data input and output.
- R — Function reserved.
I LCD_VD[3] — LCD data.
I LCD_VD[7] — LCD data.
P2[10] 110 N15 M13 76 53 41 H9 [10] I; PU I/O P2[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This
pin includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
A LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW forces the on-chip
boot loader to take over control of the part after a reset and
go into ISP mode.
I EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
I NMI — Non-maskable interrupt input.
P2[11] 108 T17 M12 75 52 - - [10] I; PU I/O P2[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This
pin includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
I EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
I/O SD_DAT[1] — Data line 1 for SD card interface.
I/O I2S_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK
in the I2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_CLKIN — LCD clock.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 36 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[12] 106 N14 N14 73 51 - - [10] I; PU I/O P2[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This
pin includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
I EINT2 — External interrupt 2 input.
I/O SD_DAT[2] — Data line 2 for SD card interface.
I/O I2S_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the
signal WS in the I2S-bus specification.
O LCD_VD[4] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[3] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[8] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[18] — LCD data.
P2[13] 102 T16 M11 71 50 - - [10] I; PU I/O P2[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This
pin includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
I EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
I/O SD_DAT[3] — Data line 3 for SD card interface.
I/O I2S_TX_SDA — Transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the
signal SD in the I2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[5] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[9] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[19] — LCD data.
P2[14] 91 R12 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS2 — LOW active Chip Select 2 signal.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 37 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[15] 99 P13 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS3 — LOW active Chip Select 3 signal.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
I T2_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 1.
P2[16] 87 R11 P9 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CAS — LOW active SDRAM Column Address
Strobe.
P2[17] 95 R13 P11 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_RAS — LOW active SDRAM Row Address Strobe.
P2[18] 59 U3 P3 - - - - [6] I; PU I/O P2[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CLK[0] — SDRAM clock 0.
P2[19] 67 R7 N5 - - - - [6] I; PU I/O P2[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CLK[1] — SDRAM clock 1.
P2[20] 73 T8 P6 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS0 — SDRAM chip select 0.
P2[21] 81 U11 N8 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS1 — SDRAM chip select 1.
P2[22] 85 U12 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS2 — SDRAM chip select 2.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 0.
P2[23] 64 U5 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS3 — SDRAM chip select 3.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 38 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[24] 53 P5 P1 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE0 — SDRAM clock enable 0.
P2[25] 54 R4 P2 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE1 — SDRAM clock enable 1.
P2[26] 57 T4 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE2 — SDRAM clock enable 2.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
O T3_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 0.
P2[27] 47 P3 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE3 — SDRAM clock enable 3.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP0.
O T3_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 1.
P2[28] 49 P4 M2 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM0 — Data mask 0 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
P2[29] 43 N3 L1 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM1 — Data mask 1 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
P2[30] 31 L4 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM2 — Data mask 2 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 39 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P2[31] 39 N2 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P2[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM3 — Data mask 3 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 3.
P3[0] to P3[31] I/O Port 3: Port 3 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 3 pins depends
upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P3[0] 197 B4 D6 137 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[0] — External memory data line 0.
P3[1] 201 B3 E6 140 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[1] — External memory data line 1.
P3[2] 207 B1 A2 144 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[2] — External memory data line 2.
P3[3] 3 E4 G5 2 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[3] — External memory data line 3.
P3[4] 13 F2 D3 9 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[4] — External memory data line 4.
P3[5] 17 G1 E3 12 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[5] — External memory data line 5.
P3[6] 23 J1 F4 16 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[6] — External memory data line 6.
P3[7] 27 L1 G3 19 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[7] — External memory data line 7.
P3[8] 191 D8 A6 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[8] — External memory data line 8.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 40 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P3[9] 199 C5 A4 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[9] — External memory data line 9.
P3[10] 205 B2 B3 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[10] — External memory data line 10.
P3[11] 208 D5 B2 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[11] — External memory data line 11.
P3[12] 1 D4 A1 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[12] — External memory data line 12.
P3[13] 7 C1 C1 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[13] — External memory data line 13.
P3[14] 21 H2 F1 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[14] — External memory data line 14.
P3[15] 28 M1 G4 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[15] — External memory data line 15.
P3[16] 137 F17 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[16] — External memory data line 16.
O PWM0[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 1.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
P3[17] 143 F15 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[17] — External memory data line 17.
O PWM0[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 2.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
P3[18] 151 C15 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[18] — External memory data line 18.
O PWM0[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 3.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 41 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P3[19] 161 B14 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[19] — External memory data line 19.
O PWM0[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 4.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
P3[20] 167 A13 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[20] — External memory data line 20.
O PWM0[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 5.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
P3[21] 175 C10 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[21] — External memory data line 21.
O PWM0[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 6.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Can
also be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
P3[22] 195 C6 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[22] — External memory data line 22.
I PWM0_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM0, channel 0.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
P3[23] 65 T6 M4 45 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[23] — External memory data line 23.
I PWM1_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 0.
I T0_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
P3[24] 58 R5 N3 40 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[24] — External memory data line 24.
O PWM1[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 1.
I T0_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 42 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P3[25] 56 U2 M3 39 27 - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[25] — External memory data line 25.
O PWM1[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 2.
O T0_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
P3[26] 55 T3 K7 38 26 - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[26] — External memory data line 26.
O PWM1[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 3.
O T0_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
I STCLK — System tick timer clock input. The maximum
STCLK frequency is 1/4 of the ARM processor clock
frequency CCLK.
P3[27] 203 A1 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[27] — External memory data line 27.
O PWM1[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 4.
I T1_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0.
P3[28] 5 D2 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[28] — External memory data line 28.
O PWM1[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 5.
I T1_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1.
P3[29] 11 F3 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[29] — External memory data line 29.
O PWM1[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 6.
O T1_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 43 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P3[30] 19 H3 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[30] — External memory data line 30.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable
signal for UART1.
O T1_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 1.
P3[31] 25 J3 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P3[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[31] — External memory data line 31.
- R — Function reserved.
O T1_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 2.
P4[0] to P4[31] - I/O Port 4: Port 4 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 4 pins depends
upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P4[0] 75 U9 L6 52 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[0] — External memory address line 0.
P4[1] 79 U10 M7 55 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[1] — External memory address line 1.
P4[2] 83 T11 M8 58 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[2] — External memory address line 2.
P4[3] 97 U16 K9 68 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[3] — External memory address line 3.
P4[4] 103 R15 P13 72 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[4] — External memory address line 4.
P4[5] 107 R16 H10 74 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[5] — External memory address line 5.
P4[6] 113 M14 K10 78 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[6] — External memory address line 6.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 44 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P4[7] 121 L16 K12 84 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[7] — External memory address line 7.
P4[8] 127 J17 J11 88 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[8] — External memory address line 8.
P4[9] 131 H17 H12 91 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[9] — External memory address line 9.
P4[10] 135 G17 G12 94 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[10] — External memory address line 10.
P4[11] 145 F14 F11 101 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[11] — External memory address line 11.
P4[12] 149 C16 F10 104 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[12] — External memory address line 12.
P4[13] 155 B16 B14 108 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[13] — External memory address line 13.
P4[14] 159 B15 E8 110 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[14] — External memory address line 14.
P4[15] 173 A11 C10 120 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[15] — External memory address line 15.
P4[16] 101 U17 N12 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[16] — External memory address line 16.
P4[17] 104 P14 N13 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[17] — External memory address line 17.
P4[18] 105 P15 P14 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[18] — External memory address line 18.
P4[19] 111 P16 M14 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[19] — External memory address line 19.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 45 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P4[20] 109 R17 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[20] — External memory address line 20.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use
a specialized I2C pad).
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial Clock for SSP1.
P4[21] 115 M15 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[21] — External memory address line 21.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
P4[22] 123 K14 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[22] — External memory address line 22.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for UART2.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
P4[23] 129 J15 - - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[23] — External memory address line 23.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for UART2.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
P4[24] 183 B8 C8 127 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_OE — LOW active Output Enable signal.
P4[25] 179 B9 D9 124 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_WE — LOW active Write Enable signal.
P4[26] 119 L15 K13 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS0 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 0.
P4[27] 139 G15 F14 - - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS1 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 46 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P4[28] 170 C11 D10 118 82 65 B7 [3] I; PU I/O P4[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS2 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 2.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[6] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[2] — LCD data.
P4[29] 176 B10 B9 122 85 68 A6 [3] I; PU I/O P4[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS3 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 3.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 1.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not
use a specialized I2C pad).
O LCD_VD[7] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[11] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[3] — LCD data.
P4[30] 187 B7 C7 130 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS0 — LOW active Chip Select 0 signal.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O CMP0_OUT — Comparator 0, output.
P4[31] 193 A4 E7 134 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P4[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS1 — LOW active Chip Select 1 signal.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 47 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P5[0] to P5[4] I/O Port 5: Port 5 is a 5-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 5 pins depends
upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P5[0] 9 F4 E5 6 - - - [3] I; PU I/O P5[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[24] — External memory address line 24.
I/O SSP2_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP2.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 2.
P5[1] 30 J4 H1 21 - - G1 [3] I; PU I/O P5[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[25] — External memory address line 25.
I/O SSP2_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP2.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 3.
P5[2] 117 L14 L12 81 - - - [11] I I/O P5[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP2_SCK — Serial clock for SSP2. When using this pin,
the SSP2 bit rate is limited to 1 MHz.
O T3_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 2.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2C0_SDA — I2C0 data input/output (this pin uses a
specialized I2C pad that supports I2C Fast Mode Plus).
P5[3] 141 G14 G10 98 - - - [11] I I/O P5[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP2_SSEL — Slave select for SSP2. When using this
pin, the SSP2 bit rate is limited to 1 MHz.
- R — Function reserved.
I U4_RXD — Receiver input for USART4.
I/O I2C0_SCL — I2C0 clock input/output (this pin uses a
specialized I2C pad that supports I2C Fast Mode Plus.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 48 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
P5[4] 206 C3 C4 143 100 - - [3] I; PU I/O P5[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U0_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART0.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 3.
O U4_TXD — Transmitter output for USART4 (input/output
in smart card mode).
JTAG_TDO (SWO) 2 D3 B1 1 1 1 B2 [3] O Test Data Out for JTAG interface. Also used as Serial wire
trace output.
JTAG_TDI 4 C2 C3 3 2 2 B1 [3] I Test Data In for JTAG interface.
JTAG_TMS
(SWDIO)
6 E3 C2 4 3 3 C2 [3] I Test Mode Select for JTAG interface. Also used as Serial
wire debug data input/output.
JTAG_TRST 8 D1 D4 5 4 4 C1 [3] I Test Reset for JTAG interface.
JTAG_TCK
(SWDCLK)
10 E2 D2 7 5 5 D3 [3] I Test Clock for JTAG interface. This clock must be slower
than 1 /6 of the CPU clock (CCLK) for the JTAG interface
to operate. Also used as serial wire clock.
RESET 35 M2 J1 24 17 14 G3 [12] I External reset input with 20 ns glitch filter. A LOW-going
pulse as short as 50 ns on this pin resets the device,
causing I/O ports and peripherals to take on their default
states, and processor execution to begin at address 0.
This pin also serves as the debug select input. LOW level
selects the JTAG boundary scan. HIGH level selects the
ARM SWD debug mode.
RSTOUT 29 K3 H2 20 14 11 F1 [3] O Reset status output. A LOW output on this pin indicates
that the device is in the reset state for any reason. This
reflects the RESET input pin and all internal reset sources.
RTC_ALARM 37 N1 H5 26 - - - [13] O RTC controlled output. This is a 1.8 V pin. It goes HIGH
when a RTC alarm is generated.
RTCX1 34 K2 J2 23 16 13 F2 [14]
[15]
I Input to the RTC 32 kHz ultra-low power oscillator circuit.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 49 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
RTCX2 36 L2 J3 25 18 15 G2 [14]
[15]
O Output from the RTC 32 kHz ultra-low power oscillator
circuit.
USB_D2 52 U1 N2 37 - - - [9] I/O USB port 2 bidirectional D line.
VBAT 38 M3 K1 27 19 16 H1 I RTC power supply: 3.3 V on this pin supplies power to the
RTC.
VDD(REG)(3V3) 26,
86,
174
H4,
P11,
D11
G1,
N9, E9
18,
60,
121
13, 42,
84
34, 67 K7, C7 S 3.3 V regulator supply voltage: This is the power supply for
the on-chip voltage regulator that supplies internal logic.
VDDA 20 G4 F2 14 10 8 E3 S Analog 3.3 V pad supply voltage: This can be connected to
the same supply as VDD(3V3) but should be isolated to
minimize noise and error. This voltage is used to power the
ADC and DAC. Tie this pin to 3.3 V if the ADC and DAC
are not used.
VDD(3V3) 15,
60,
71,
89,
112,
125,
146,
165,
181,
198
G3,
P6,
P8,
U13,
P17,
K16,
C17,
B13,
C9, D7
E2,
L4,
K8,
L11,
J14,
E12,
E10,
C5
41,
62,
77,
102,
114,
138
28, 54,
71, 96
21, 42,
56, 77
K2,
H7,
D8,
C4
S 3.3 V supply voltage: This is the power supply voltage for
I/O other than pins in the VBAT domain.
VREFP 24 K1 G2 17 12 10 E1 S ADC positive reference voltage: This should be the same
voltage as VDDA, but should be isolated to minimize noise
and error. The voltage level on this pin is used as a
reference for ADC and DAC. Tie this pin to 3.3 V if the
ADC and DAC are not used.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 50 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] PU = internal pull-up enabled (for VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.3 V, pulled up to 3.3 V); IA = inactive, no pull-up/down enabled; F = floating; floating pins, if not used, should be tied to ground
or power to minimize power consumption.
[2] I = Input; O = Output; G = Ground; S = Supply.
[3] 5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[4] 5 V tolerant standard pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis. This pad can
be powered by VBAT.
[5] 5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and analog input. When configured as a ADC input, digital section of the pad is disabled.
[6] 5 V tolerant fast pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[7] 5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O with TTL levels and hysteresis and analog output function. When configured as the DAC output, digital section of the pad is disabled.
[8] Open-drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O pad, compatible with I2C-bus 400 kHz specification. It requires an external pull-up to provide output functionality. When power is switched off, this
pin connected to the I2C-bus is floating and does not disturb the I2C lines. Open-drain configuration applies to all functions on this pin.
VSS 33,
63,
77,
93,
114,
133,
148,
169,
189,
200
L3, T5,
R9,
P12,
N16,
H14,
E15,
A12,
B6, A2
H4,
P4,
L9,
L13,
G13,
D13,
C11,
B4
44,
65,
79,
103,
117,
139
31, 55,
72, 97
24, 43,
57, 78
H4,
G8,
G9,
B3
G Ground: 0 V reference for digital IO pins.
VSSREG 32,
84,
172
D12,
K4,
P10
H3,
L8,
A10
22,
59,
119
15, 41,
83
33, 66 J7, F3 G Ground: 0 V reference for internal logic.
VSSA 22 J2 F3 15 11 9 E2 G Analog ground: 0 V power supply and reference for the
ADC and DAC. This should be the same voltage as VSS,
but should be isolated to minimize noise and error.
XTAL1 44 M4 L2 31 22 19 J1 [14]
[16]
I Input to the oscillator circuit and internal clock generator
circuits.
XTAL2 46 N4 K4 33 23 20 K1 [14]
[16]
O Output from the oscillator amplifier.
DNC - - - - - 12 - Do not connect.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, comparator pins) and Table 5 (EMC pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Pin LQFP100
Pin LQFP80
Pin TFBGA80
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 51 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[9] Not 5 V tolerant. Pad provides digital I/O and USB functions. It is designed in accordance with the USB specification, revision 2.0 (Full-speed and Low-speed mode only).
[10] 5 V tolerant pad with 5 ns glitch filter providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[11] Open-drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O pad, compatible with I2C-bus 1 MHz specification. It requires an external pull-up to provide output functionality. When power is switched off, this
pin connected to the I2C-bus is floating and does not disturb the I2C lines. Open-drain configuration applies to all functions on this pin.
[12] 5 V tolerant pad with 20 ns glitch filter providing digital I/O function with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[13] This pad can be powered from VBAT.
[14] Pad provides special analog functionality. A 32 kHz crystal oscillator must be used with the RTC. An external clock (32 kHz) can’t be used to drive the RTCX1 pin.
[15] If the RTC is not used, these pins can be left floating.
[16] When the main oscillator is not used, connect XTAL1 and XTAL2 as follows: XTAL1 can be left floating or can be grounded (grounding is preferred to reduce susceptibility to
noise). XTAL2 should be left floating.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 52 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7. Functional description
7.1 Architectural overview
The ARM Cortex-M4 includes three AHB-Lite buses: the system bus, the I-code bus, and
the D-code bus. The I-code and D-code core buses are faster than the system bus and
are used similarly to Tightly Coupled Memory (TCM) interfaces: one bus dedicated for
instruction fetch (I-code) and one bus for data access (D-code). The use of two core
buses allows for simultaneous operations if concurrent operations target different devices.
The LPC408x/7x use a multi-layer AHB matrix to connect the ARM Cortex-M4 buses and
other bus masters to peripherals in a flexible manner that optimizes performance by
allowing peripherals that are on different slaves ports of the matrix to be accessed
simultaneously by different bus masters.
7.2 ARM Cortex-M4 processor
The ARM Cortex-M4 processor is running at frequencies of up to 120 MHz. The processor
executes the Thumb-2 instruction set for optimal performance and code size, including
hardware division, single-cycle multiply, and bit-field manipulation. A Memory Protection
Unit (MPU) supporting eight regions is included.
7.3 ARM Cortex-M4 Floating Point Unit (FPU)
Remark: The FPU is available on parts LP4088/78/76.
The FPU supports single-precision floating-point computation functionality in compliance
with the ANSI/IEEE Standard 754-2008. The FPU provides add, subtract, multiply, divide,
multiply and accumulate, and square root operations. It also performs a variety of
conversions between fixed-point, floating-point, and integer data formats.
7.4 On-chip flash program memory
The LPC408x/7x contain up to 512 kB of on-chip flash program memory. A new two-port
flash accelerator maximizes performance for use with the two fast AHB-Lite buses.
7.5 EEPROM
The LPC408x/7x contains up to 4032 byte of on-chip byte-erasable and
byte-programmable EEPROM data memory.
7.6 On-chip SRAM
The LPC408x/7x contain a total of up to 96 kB on-chip SRAM data memory. This includes
64 kB main SRAM, accessible by the CPU and DMA controller on a higher-speed bus,
and up to two additional 16 kB peripheral SRAM blocks situated on a separate slave port
on the AHB multilayer matrix.
This architecture allows CPU and DMA accesses to be spread over three separate RAMs
that can be accessed simultaneously.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 53 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.7 Memory Protection Unit (MPU)
The LPC408x/7x have a Memory Protection Unit (MPU) which can be used to improve the
reliability of an embedded system by protecting critical data within the user application.
The MPU allows separating processing tasks by disallowing access to each other's data,
disabling access to memory regions, allowing memory regions to be defined as read-only
and detecting unexpected memory accesses that could potentially break the system.
The MPU separates the memory into distinct regions and implements protection by
preventing disallowed accesses. The MPU supports up to eight regions each of which can
be divided into eight subregions. Accesses to memory locations that are not defined in the
MPU regions, or not permitted by the region setting, will cause the Memory Management
Fault exception to take place.
7.8 Memory map
Table 4. LPC408x/7x memory usage and details
Address range General Use Address range details and description
0x0000 0000 to
0x1FFF FFFF
On-chip non-volatile
memory
0x0000 0000 to 0x0007 FFFF For devices with 512 kB of flash memory.
0x0000 0000 to 0x0003 FFFF For devices with 256 kB of flash memory.
0x0000 0000 to 0x0001 FFFF For devices with 128 kB of flash memory.
0x0000 0000 to 0x0000 FFFF For devices with 64 kB of flash memory.
On-chip SRAM 0x1000 0000 to 0x1000 FFFF For devices with 64 kB of main SRAM.
0x1000 0000 to 0x1000 7FFF For devices with 32 kB of main SRAM.
0x1000 0000 to 0x1000 3FFF For devices with 16 kB of main SRAM.
Boot ROM 0x1FFF 0000 to 0x1FFF 1FFF 8 kB Boot ROM with flash services.
0x2000 0000 to
0x3FFF FFFF
On-chip SRAM
(typically used for
peripheral data)
0x2000 0000 to 0x2000 1FFF Peripheral SRAM - bank 0 (first 8 kB)
0x2000 2000 to 0x2000 3FFF Peripheral SRAM - bank 0 (second 8 kB)
0x2000 4000 to 0x2000 7FFF Peripheral SRAM - bank 1 (16 kB)
AHB peripherals 0x2008 0000 to 0x200B FFFF See Figure 9 for details
0x4000 0000 to
0x7FFF FFFF
APB Peripherals 0x4000 0000 to 0x4007 FFFF APB0 Peripherals, up to 32 peripheral blocks of
16 kB each.
0x4008 0000 to 0x400F FFFF APB1 Peripherals, up to 32 peripheral blocks of
16 kB each.
0x8000 0000 to
0xDFFF FFFF
Off-chip Memory via
the External Memory
Controller
Four static memory chip selects:
0x8000 0000 to 0x83FF FFFF Static memory chip select 0 (up to 64 MB)
0x9000 0000 to 0x93FF FFFF Static memory chip select 1 (up to 64 MB)
0x9800 0000 to 0x9BFF FFFF Static memory chip select 2 (up to 64 MB)
0x9C00 0000 to 0x9FFF FFFF Static memory chip select 3 (up to 64 MB)
Four dynamic memory chip selects:
0xA000 0000 to 0xAFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 0 (up to 256 MB)
0xB000 0000 to 0xBFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 1 (up to 256 MB)
0xC000 0000 to 0xCFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 2 (up to 256 MB)
0xD000 0000 to 0xDFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 3 (up to 256 MB)
0xE000 0000 to
0xE00F FFFF
Cortex-M4 Private
Peripheral Bus
0xE000 0000 to 0xE00F FFFF Cortex-M4 related functions, includes the NVIC
and System Tick Timer.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 54 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
The LPC408x/7x incorporate several distinct memory regions, shown in the following
figures. Figure 9 shows the overall map of the entire address space from the user
program viewpoint following reset. The interrupt vector area supports address remapping.
The AHB peripheral area is 2 MB in size, and is divided to allow for up to 128 peripherals.
The APB peripheral area is 1 MB in size and is divided to allow for up to 64 peripherals.
Each peripheral of either type is allocated 16 kB of space. This allows simplifying the
address decoding for each peripheral.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 55 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
(1) Not available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 4.
Fig 9. LPC408x/7x memory map
0x4000 4000
0x4000 8000
0x4000 C000
0x4001 0000
0x4001 8000
0x4002 0000
0x4002 8000
0x4002 C000
0x4003 4000
0x4003 0000
0x4003 8000
0x4003 C000
0x4004 0000
0x4004 4000
0x4004 8000
0x4004 C000
0x4005 C000
0x4006 0000
0x4008 0000
0x4002 4000
0x4001 C000
0x4001 4000
0x4000 0000
APB1 peripherals
0x4008 0000
0x4008 8000
0x4008 C000
0x4009 0000
0x4009 4000
0x4009 8000
0x4009 C000
0x400A 0000
0x400A 4000
0x400A 8000
0x400A C000
0x400B 0000
0x400B 4000
0x400B 8000
0x400B C000
0x400C 0000
0x400F C000
0x4010 0000
SSP0
DAC
timer 2
timer 3
UART2
UART3
USART4(1)
I2C2
1 - 0 reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SSP2
I2S
11
12
reserved
motor control PWM
reserved
30 - 17 reserved
13
14
15
16
31 system control
reserved
EMC 4 x static chip select(1)
EMC 4 x dynamic chip select(1)
reserved
private peripheral bus
0 GB
0.5 GB
4 GB
1 GB
0x1FFF 0000
0x2000 0000
0x2000 8000
0x2008 0000
0x2200 0000
0x200A 0000
0x2400 0000
0x2800 0000
0x4000 0000
0x4008 0000
0x4010 0000
0x4200 0000
0x4400 0000
0x8000 0000
0xA000 0000
0xE000 0000
0xE010 0000
0xFFFF FFFF
reserved
reserved
reserved
SPIFI data
reserved
reserved
APB0 peripherals
0xE004 0000
AHB peripherals
APB1 peripherals
peripheral SRAM bit-band
alias addressing
peripheral bit-band alias addressing
0x2000 4000
0x2000 2000
LPC408x/7x
QEI(1)
SD/MMC(1)
APB0 peripherals
WWDT
timer 0
timer 1
UART0
UART1
reserved
reserved
CAN AF RAM
CAN common
CAN1
CAN2
CAN AF registers
PWM0
I2C0
RTC/event recorder
+ backup registers
GPIO interrupts
pin connect
SSP1
ADC
22 - 19 reserved
I2C1
31 - 24 reserved
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
23
PWM1
8 kB boot ROM
0x0000 0000
0x0000 0400
active interrupt vectors
+ 256 words
I-code/D-code
memory space
002aag736
reserved 0x1FFF 2000
0x2900 0000
reserved
reserved
0x2008 0000
0x2008 4000
0x2008 8000
0x2008 C000
0x200A 0000
0x2009 C000
AHB peripherals
LCD(1)
USB(1)
Ethernet(1)
0 GPDMA controller
1
2
3
CRC engine 0x2009 0000 4
0x2009 4000
5
GPIO 0x2009 8000
EMC registers
6
7
0x0000 0000
0x0001 0000
0x0002 0000
0x0004 0000
0x0008 0000
0x1000 0000
0x1000 4000
0x1000 8000
0x1001 0000
64 kB on- chip flash (LPC4072)
128 kB on- chip flash (LPC4074)
256 kB on-chip flash (LPC4076)
512 kB on-chip flash (LPC4078)
reserved
16 kB main SRAM (LPC4072)
32 kB main SRAM (LPC4074)
64 kB main SRAM (LPC4088/78/76)
16 kB peripheral SRAM1 (LPC4088/78)
8 kB peripheral SRAM0 (LPC4074/72)
16 kB peripheral SRAM0 (LPC4088/78/76)
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 56 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.9 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)
The NVIC is an integral part of the Cortex-M4. The tight coupling to the CPU allows for low
interrupt latency and efficient processing of late arriving interrupts.
7.9.1 Features
• Controls system exceptions and peripheral interrupts.
• On the LPC408x/7x, the NVIC supports 40 vectored interrupts.
• 32 programmable interrupt priority levels, with hardware priority level masking.
• Relocatable vector table.
• Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).
• Software interrupt generation.
7.9.2 Interrupt sources
Each peripheral device has one interrupt line connected to the NVIC but may have several
interrupt flags. Individual interrupt flags may also represent more than one interrupt
source.
Any pin on port 0 and port 2 regardless of the selected function can be programmed to
generate an interrupt on a rising edge, a falling edge, or both.
7.10 Pin connect block
The pin connect block allows selected pins of the microcontroller to have more than one
function. Configuration registers control the multiplexers to allow connection between the
pin and the on-chip peripherals.
Peripherals should be connected to the appropriate pins prior to being activated and prior
to any related interrupts being enabled. Activity of any enabled peripheral function that is
not mapped to a related pin should be considered undefined.
Most pins can also be configured as open-drain outputs or to have a pull-up, pull-down, or
no resistor enabled.
7.11 External Memory Controller (EMC)
Remark: The EMC is available for parts LPC4088/78/76. Supported memory size and
type and EMC bus width vary for different packages (see Table 2). The EMC pin
configuration for each part is shown in Table 5.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 57 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
The LPC408x/7x EMC is an ARM PrimeCell MultiPort Memory Controller peripheral
offering support for asynchronous static memory devices such as RAM, ROM, and flash.
In addition, it can be used as an interface with off-chip memory-mapped devices and
peripherals. The EMC is an Advanced Microcontroller Bus Architecture (AMBA) compliant
peripheral.
7.11.1 Features
• Dynamic memory interface support including single data rate SDRAM.
• Asynchronous static memory device support including RAM, ROM, and flash, with or
without asynchronous page mode.
• Low transaction latency.
• Read and write buffers to reduce latency and to improve performance.
• 8/16/32 data and 16/20/26 address lines wide static memory support.
• 16 bit and 32 bit wide chip select SDRAM memory support.
• Static memory features include:
– Asynchronous page mode read
– Programmable Wait States
– Bus turnaround delay
– Output enable and write enable delays
– Extended wait
• Four chip selects for synchronous memory and four chip selects for static memory
devices.
• Power-saving modes dynamically control EMC_CKE and EMC_CLK outputs to
SDRAMs.
• Dynamic memory self-refresh mode controlled by software.
• Controller supports 2048 (A0 to A10), 4096 (A0 to A11), and 8192 (A0 to A12) row
address synchronous memory parts. That is typical 512 MB, 256 MB, and 128 MB
parts, with 4, 8, 16, or 32 data bits per device.
• Separate reset domains allow the for auto-refresh through a chip reset if desired.
Note: Synchronous static memory devices (synchronous burst mode) are not supported.
Table 5. External memory controller pin configuration
Parts Data bus pins Address bus
pins
Control pins
SRAM SDRAM
LPC4088FBD208
LPC4088FET208
LPC4078FBD208
LPC4078FET208
EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC4088FET180
LPC4078FET180
LPC4076FET180
EMC_D[15:0] EMC_A[19:0] EMC_BLS[1:0],
EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[1:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[1:0],
EMC_DQM[1:0]
LPC4088FBD144
LPC4078FBD144
LPC4076FBD144
EMC_D[7:0] EMC_A[15:0] EMC_BLS[3:2],
EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
not available
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 58 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.12 General purpose DMA controller
The GPDMA is an AMBA AHB compliant peripheral allowing selected peripherals to have
DMA support.
The GPDMA enables peripheral-to-memory, memory-to-peripheral,
peripheral-to-peripheral, and memory-to-memory transactions. The source and
destination areas can each be either a memory region or a peripheral and can be
accessed through the AHB master. The GPDMA controller allows data transfers between
the various on-chip SRAM areas and supports the SD/MMC card interface, all SSPs, the
I2S, all UARTs, the A/D Converter, and the D/A Converter peripherals. DMA can also be
triggered by selected timer match conditions. Memory-to-memory transfers and transfers
to or from GPIO are supported.
7.12.1 Features
• Eight DMA channels. Each channel can support an unidirectional transfer.
• 16 DMA request lines.
• Single DMA and burst DMA request signals. Each peripheral connected to the DMA
Controller can assert either a burst DMA request or a single DMA request. The DMA
burst size is set by programming the DMA Controller.
• Memory-to-memory, memory-to-peripheral, peripheral-to-memory, and
peripheral-to-peripheral transfers are supported.
• Scatter or gather DMA is supported through the use of linked lists. This means that
the source and destination areas do not have to occupy contiguous areas of memory.
• Hardware DMA channel priority.
• AHB slave DMA programming interface. The DMA Controller is programmed by
writing to the DMA control registers over the AHB slave interface.
• One AHB bus master for transferring data. The interface transfers data when a DMA
request goes active.
• 32-bit AHB master bus width.
• Incrementing or non-incrementing addressing for source and destination.
• Programmable DMA burst size. The DMA burst size can be programmed to more
efficiently transfer data.
• Internal four-word FIFO per channel.
• Supports 8, 16, and 32-bit wide transactions.
• Big-endian and little-endian support. The DMA Controller defaults to little-endian
mode on reset.
• An interrupt to the processor can be generated on a DMA completion or when a DMA
error has occurred.
• Raw interrupt status. The DMA error and DMA count raw interrupt status can be read
prior to masking.
7.13 CRC engine
The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) generator with programmable polynomial settings
supports several CRC standards commonly used. To save system power and bus
bandwidth, the CRC engine supports DMA transfers.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 59 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.13.1 Features
• Supports three common polynomials CRC-CCITT, CRC-16, and CRC-32.
– CRC-CCITT: x16 + x12 + x5 + 1
– CRC-16: x16 + x15 + x2 + 1
– CRC-32: x32 + x26 + x23 + x22 + x16 + x12 + x11 + x10 + x8 + x7 + x5 + x4 + x2 + x + 1
• Bit order reverse and 1’s complement programmable setting for input data and CRC
sum.
• Programmable seed number setting.
• Supports CPU PIO or DMA back-to-back transfer.
• Accept any size of data width per write: 8, 16 or 32-bit.
– 8-bit write: 1-cycle operation
– 16-bit write: 2-cycle operation (8-bit x 2-cycle)
– 32-bit write: 4-cycle operation (8-bit x 4-cycle)
7.14 LCD controller
Remark: The LCD controller is available on parts LPC4088.
The LCD controller provides all of the necessary control signals to interface directly to a
variety of color and monochrome LCD panels. Both STN (single and dual panel) and TFT
panels can be operated. The display resolution is selectable and can be up to 1024 768
pixels. Several color modes are provided, up to a 24-bit true-color non-palettized mode.
An on-chip 512-byte color palette allows reducing bus utilization (i.e. memory size of the
displayed data) while still supporting a large number of colors.
The LCD interface includes its own DMA controller to allow it to operate independently of
the CPU and other system functions. A built-in FIFO acts as a buffer for display data,
providing flexibility for system timing. Hardware cursor support can further reduce the
amount of CPU time needed to operate the display.
7.14.1 Features
• AHB master interface to access frame buffer.
• Setup and control via a separate AHB slave interface.
• Dual 16-deep programmable 64-bit wide FIFOs for buffering incoming display data.
• Supports single and dual-panel monochrome Super Twisted Nematic (STN) displays
with 4-bit or 8-bit interfaces.
• Supports single and dual-panel color STN displays.
• Supports Thin Film Transistor (TFT) color displays.
• Programmable display resolution including, but not limited to: 320 200, 320 240,
640 200, 640 240, 640 480, 800 600, and 1024 768.
• Hardware cursor support for single-panel displays.
• 15 gray-level monochrome, 3375 color STN, and 32 K color palettized TFT support.
• 1, 2, or 4 bits-per-pixel (bpp) palettized displays for monochrome STN.
• 1, 2, 4, or 8 bpp palettized color displays for color STN and TFT.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 60 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• 16 bpp true-color non-palettized, for color STN and TFT.
• 24 bpp true-color non-palettized, for color TFT.
• Programmable timing for different display panels.
• 256 entry, 16-bit palette RAM, arranged as a 128 32-bit RAM.
• Frame, line, and pixel clock signals.
• AC bias signal for STN, data enable signal for TFT panels.
• Supports little and big-endian, and Windows CE data formats.
• LCD panel clock may be generated from the peripheral clock, or from a clock input
pin.
7.15 Ethernet
Remark: The Ethernet block is available on parts LPC4088/78/76.
The Ethernet block contains a full featured 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet MAC
designed to provide optimized performance through the use of DMA hardware
acceleration. Features include a generous suite of control registers, half or full duplex
operation, flow control, control frames, hardware acceleration for transmit retry, receive
packet filtering and wake-up on LAN activity. Automatic frame transmission and reception
with scatter-gather DMA off-loads many operations from the CPU.
The Ethernet block and the CPU share the ARM Cortex-M4 D-code and system bus
through the AHB-multilayer matrix to access the various on-chip SRAM blocks for
Ethernet data, control, and status information.
The Ethernet block interfaces between an off-chip Ethernet PHY using the Media
Independent Interface (MII) or Reduced MII (RMII) protocol and the on-chip Media
Independent Interface Management (MIIM) serial bus.
7.15.1 Features
• Ethernet standards support:
– Supports 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s PHY devices including 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX,
100 Base-FX, and 100 Base-T4.
– Fully compliant with IEEE standard 802.3.
– Fully compliant with 802.3x Full Duplex Flow Control and Half Duplex back
pressure.
– Flexible transmit and receive frame options.
– Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) frame support.
• Memory management:
– Independent transmit and receive buffers memory mapped to shared SRAM.
– DMA managers with scatter/gather DMA and arrays of frame descriptors.
– Memory traffic optimized by buffering and pre-fetching.
• Enhanced Ethernet features:
– Receive filtering.
– Multicast and broadcast frame support for both transmit and receive.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 61 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
– Optional automatic Frame Check Sequence (FCS) insertion with Circular
Redundancy Check (CRC) for transmit.
– Selectable automatic transmit frame padding.
– Over-length frame support for both transmit and receive allows any length frames.
– Promiscuous receive mode.
– Automatic collision back-off and frame retransmission.
– Includes power management by clock switching.
– Wake-on-LAN power management support allows system wake-up: using the
receive filters or a magic frame detection filter.
• Physical interface:
– Attachment of external PHY chip through standard MII or RMII interface.
– PHY register access is available via the MIIM interface.
7.16 USB interface
Remark: The USB Device/Host/OTG controller is available on parts LPC4088/78/76. The
USB Device-only controller is available on part LPC4074/72.
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a 4-wire bus that supports communication between a
host and one or more (up to 127) peripherals. The host controller allocates the USB
bandwidth to attached devices through a token-based protocol. The bus supports hot
plugging and dynamic configuration of the devices. All transactions are initiated by the
host controller.
See Section 13.1 for details on typical USB interfacing solutions.
7.16.1 USB device controller
The device controller enables 12 Mbit/s data exchange with a USB host controller. It
consists of a register interface, serial interface engine, endpoint buffer memory, and a
DMA controller. The serial interface engine decodes the USB data stream and writes data
to the appropriate endpoint buffer. The status of a completed USB transfer or error
condition is indicated via status registers. An interrupt is also generated if enabled. When
enabled, the DMA controller transfers data between the endpoint buffer and the USB
RAM.
7.16.1.1 Features
• Fully compliant with USB 2.0 Specification (full speed).
• Supports 32 physical (16 logical) endpoints with a 4 kB endpoint buffer RAM.
• Supports Control, Bulk, Interrupt and Isochronous endpoints.
• Scalable realization of endpoints at run time.
• Endpoint Maximum packet size selection (up to USB maximum specification) by
software at run time.
• Supports SoftConnect and GoodLink features.
• While USB is in the Suspend mode, the LPC408x/7x can enter one of the reduced
power modes and wake up on USB activity.
• Supports DMA transfers with all on-chip SRAM blocks on all non-control endpoints.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 62 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Allows dynamic switching between CPU-controlled and DMA modes.
• Double buffer implementation for Bulk and Isochronous endpoints.
7.16.2 USB host controller
The host controller enables full- and low-speed data exchange with USB devices attached
to the bus. It consists of register interface, serial interface engine and DMA controller. The
register interface complies with the Open Host Controller Interface (OHCI) specification.
7.16.2.1 Features
• OHCI compliant
• Two downstream ports
• Supports per-port power switching
7.16.3 USB OTG controller
USB OTG is a supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification that augments the capability of
existing mobile devices and USB peripherals by adding host functionality for connection to
USB peripherals.
The OTG Controller integrates the host controller, device controller, and a master-only I2C
interface to implement OTG dual-role device functionality. The dedicated I2C interface
controls an external OTG transceiver.
7.16.3.1 Features
• Fully compliant with On-The-Go supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification, Revision
1.0a.
• Hardware support for Host Negotiation Protocol (HNP).
• Includes a programmable timer required for HNP and Session Request Protocol
(SRP).
• Supports any OTG transceiver compliant with the OTG Transceiver Specification
(CEA-2011), Rev. 1.0.
7.17 SD/MMC card interface
Remark: The SD/MMC card interface is available on parts LPC4088/78/76.
The Secure Digital and Multimedia Card Interface (MCI) allows access to external SD
memory cards. The SD card interface conforms to the SD Multimedia Card Specification
Version 2.11.
7.17.1 Features
• The MCI provides all functions specific to the SD/MMC memory card. These include
the clock generation unit, power management control, and command and data
transfer.
• Conforms to Multimedia Card Specification v2.11.
• Conforms to Secure Digital Memory Card Physical Layer Specification, v0.96.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 63 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Can be used as a multimedia card bus or a secure digital memory card bus host. The
SD/MMC can be connected to several multimedia cards or a single secure digital
memory card.
• DMA supported through the GPDMA controller.
7.18 Fast general purpose parallel I/O
Device pins that are not connected to a specific peripheral function are controlled by the
GPIO registers. Pins may be dynamically configured as inputs or outputs. Separate
registers allow setting or clearing any number of outputs simultaneously. The value of the
output register may be read back as well as the current state of the port pins.
LPC408x/7x use accelerated GPIO functions:
• GPIO registers are accessed through the AHB multilayer bus so that the fastest
possible I/O timing can be achieved.
• Mask registers allow treating sets of port bits as a group, leaving other bits
unchanged.
• All GPIO registers are byte and half-word addressable.
• Entire port value can be written in one instruction.
• Support for Cortex-M4 bit banding.
• Support for use with the GPDMA controller.
Additionally, any pin on Port 0 and Port 2 providing a digital function can be programmed
to generate an interrupt on a rising edge, a falling edge, or both. The edge detection is
asynchronous, so it may operate when clocks are not present such as during Power-down
mode. Each enabled interrupt can be used to wake up the chip from Power-down mode.
7.18.1 Features
• Bit level set and clear registers allow a single instruction to set or clear any number of
bits in one port.
• Direction control of individual bits.
• All I/O default to inputs after reset.
• Pull-up/pull-down resistor configuration and open-drain configuration can be
programmed through the pin connect block for each GPIO pin.
7.19 12-bit ADC
The LPC408x/7x contain one ADC. It is a single 12-bit successive approximation ADC
with eight channels and DMA support.
7.19.1 Features
• 12-bit successive approximation ADC.
• Input multiplexing among eight pins.
• Power-down mode.
• Measurement range VSS to VREFP.
• 12-bit conversion rate: up to 400 kHz.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 64 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Individual channels can be selected for conversion.
• Burst conversion mode for single or multiple inputs.
• Optional conversion on transition of input pin or Timer Match signal.
• Individual result registers for each ADC channel to reduce interrupt overhead.
• DMA support.
7.20 10-bit DAC
The LPC408x/7x contain one DAC. The DAC allows to generate a variable analog output.
The maximum output value of the DAC is VREFP.
7.20.1 Features
• 10-bit DAC
• Resistor string architecture
• Buffered output
• Power-down mode
• Selectable output drive
• Dedicated conversion timer
• DMA support
7.21 Comparator
Remark: The comparator is available on parts LPC4088/7876.
Two embedded comparators are available to compare the voltage levels on external pins
or against internal voltages. Up to four voltages on external pins and several internal
reference voltages are selectable on each comparator. Additionally, two of the external
inputs can be selected to drive an input common on both comparators.
7.21.1 Features
• Up to five selectable external sources per comparator; fully configurable on either
positive or negative comparator input channels.
• 0.9 V internal band gap reference voltage selectable as either positive or negative
input on each comparator.
• 32-stage voltage ladder internal reference for selectable voltages on each
comparator; configurable on either positive or negative comparator input.
• Voltage ladder source voltage is selectable from an external pin or the 3.3 V analog
voltage supply.
• Voltage ladder can be separately powered down for applications only requiring the
comparator function.
• Relaxation oscillator circuitry output, for a 555 style timer operation.
• Individual comparator outputs can be connected to I/O pins.
• Separate interrupt for each comparator.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 65 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Edge and level comparator outputs connect to two timers allowing edge counting
while a level match has been asserted or measuring the time between two voltage trip
points.
7.22 UART0/1/2/3 and USART4
Remark: UART0/1/2/3 are available on all parts. USART4 is available on parts
LPC4088/78/76.
The LPC408x/7x contain five UARTs. In addition to standard transmit and receive data
lines, UART1 also provides a full modem control handshake interface and support for
RS-485/9-bit mode allowing both software address detection and automatic address
detection using 9-bit mode.
The UARTs include a fractional baud rate generator. Standard baud rates such as
115200 Bd can be achieved with any crystal frequency above 2 MHz.
7.22.1 Features
• Maximum UART data bit rate of 7.5 MBit/s.
• 16 B Receive and Transmit FIFOs.
• Register locations conform to 16C550 industry standard.
• Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1 B, 4 B, 8 B, and 14 B.
• Built-in fractional baud rate generator covering wide range of baud rates without a
need for external crystals of particular values.
• Auto-baud capability.
• Fractional divider for baud rate control, auto baud capabilities and FIFO control
mechanism that enables software flow control implementation.
• Support for RS-485/9-bit/EIA-485 mode and multiprocessor addressing.
• All UARTs have DMA support for both transmit and receive.
• UART1 equipped with standard modem interface signals. This module also provides
full support for hardware flow control (auto-CTS/RTS).
• USART4 includes an IrDA mode to support infrared communication.
• USART4 supports synchronous mode and a smart card mode conforming to
ISO7816-3.
7.23 SPIFI
The SPI Flash Interface allows low-cost serial flash memories to be connected to the ARM
Cortex-M4 processor with little performance penalty compared to parallel flash devices
with higher pin count.
The entire flash content is accessible as normal memory using byte, halfword, and word
accesses by the processor and/or DMA channels.
SPIFI provides sufficient flexibility to be compatible with common flash devices and
includes extensions to help insure compatibility with future devices.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 66 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.23.1 Features
• Quad SPI Flash Interface (SPIFI) interface to external flash.
• Transfer rates of up to SPIFI_CLK/2 bytes per second.
• Code in the serial flash memory can be executed as if it was in the CPU’s internal
memory space. This is accomplished by mapping the external flash memory directly
into the CPU memory space.
• Supports 1-, 2-, and 4-bit bidirectional serial protocols.
• Half-duplex protocol compatible with various vendors and devices.
• Supported by a driver library available from NXP Semiconductors.
7.24 SSP serial I/O controller
The LPC408x/7x contain three SSP controllers. The SSP controller is capable of
operation on a SPI, 4-wire SSI, or Microwire bus. It can interact with multiple masters and
slaves on the bus. Only a single master and a single slave can communicate on the bus
during a given data transfer. The SSP supports full duplex transfers, with frames of 4 bits
to 16 bits of data flowing from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master. In
practice, often only one of these data flows carries meaningful data.
7.24.1 Features
• Maximum SSP speed of 33 Mbit/s (master) or 10 Mbit/s (slave)
• Compatible with Motorola SPI, 4-wire Texas Instruments SSI, and National
Semiconductor Microwire buses
• Synchronous serial communication
• Master or slave operation
• 8-frame FIFOs for both transmit and receive
• 4-bit to 16-bit frame
• DMA transfers supported by GPDMA
7.25 I2C-bus serial I/O controllers
The LPC408x/7x contain three I2C-bus controllers.
The I2C-bus is bidirectional for inter-IC control using only two wires: a Serial Clock Line
(SCL) and a Serial Data Line (SDA). Each device is recognized by a unique address and
can operate as either a receiver-only device (e.g., an LCD driver) or a transmitter with the
capability to both receive and send information (such as memory). Transmitters and/or
receivers can operate in either master or slave mode, depending on whether the chip has
to initiate a data transfer or is only addressed. The I2C is a multi-master bus and can be
controlled by more than one bus master connected to it.
7.25.1 Features
• All I2C-bus controllers can use standard GPIO pins with bit rates of up to 400 kbit/s
(Fast I2C-bus). The I2C0-bus interface uses special open-drain pins with bit rates of
up to 400 kbit/s.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 67 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• The I2C-bus interface supports Fast-mode Plus with bit rates up to 1 Mbit/s for I2C0
using pins P5[2] and P5[3].
• Easy to configure as master, slave, or master/slave.
• Programmable clocks allow versatile rate control.
• Bidirectional data transfer between masters and slaves.
• Multi-master bus (no central master).
• Arbitration between simultaneously transmitting masters without corruption of serial
data on the bus.
• Serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates to communicate via
one serial bus.
• Serial clock synchronization can be used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and
resume serial transfer.
• The I2C-bus can be used for test and diagnostic purposes.
• Both I2C-bus controllers support multiple address recognition and a bus monitor
mode.
7.26 I2S-bus serial I/O controllers
The LPC408x/7x contain one I2S-bus interface. The I2S-bus provides a standard
communication interface for digital audio applications.
The I2S-bus specification defines a 3-wire serial bus using one data line, one clock line,
and one word select signal. The basic I2S connection has one master, which is always the
master, and one slave. The I2S interface on the LPC408x/7x provides a separate transmit
and receive channel, each of which can operate as either a master or a slave.
7.26.1 Features
• The interface has separate input/output channels each of which can operate in master
or slave mode.
• Capable of handling 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit word sizes.
• Mono and stereo audio data supported.
• The sampling frequency can range from 16 kHz to 48 kHz (16, 22.05, 32, 44.1,
48) kHz.
• Configurable word select period in master mode (separately for I2S input and output).
• Two 8 word FIFO data buffers are provided, one for transmit and one for receive.
• Generates interrupt requests when buffer levels cross a programmable boundary.
• Two DMA requests, controlled by programmable buffer levels. These are connected
to the GPDMA block.
• Controls include reset, stop and mute options separately for I2S input and I2S output.
7.27 CAN controller and acceptance filters
The LPC408x/7x contain one CAN controller with two channels.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 68 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial communications protocol which efficiently
supports distributed real-time control with a very high level of security. Its domain of
application ranges from high-speed networks to low cost multiplex wiring.
The CAN block is intended to support multiple CAN buses simultaneously, allowing the
device to be used as a gateway, switch, or router between two of CAN buses in industrial
or automotive applications.
Each CAN controller has a register structure similar to the NXP SJA1000 and the PeliCAN
Library block, but the 8-bit registers of those devices have been combined in 32-bit words
to allow simultaneous access in the ARM environment. The main operational difference is
that the recognition of received Identifiers, known in CAN terminology as Acceptance
Filtering, has been removed from the CAN controllers and centralized in a global
Acceptance Filter.
7.27.1 Features
• Two CAN controllers and buses.
• Data rates to 1 Mbit/s on each bus.
• 32-bit register and RAM access.
• Compatible with CAN specification 2.0B, ISO 11898-1.
• Global Acceptance Filter recognizes 11-bit and 29-bit receive identifiers for all CAN
buses.
• Acceptance Filter can provide FullCAN-style automatic reception for selected
Standard Identifiers.
• FullCAN messages can generate interrupts.
7.28 General purpose 32-bit timers/external event counters
The LPC408x/7x include four 32-bit timer/counters.
The timer/counter is designed to count cycles of the system derived clock or an
externally-supplied clock. It can optionally generate interrupts, generate timed DMA
requests, or perform other actions at specified timer values, based on four match
registers. Each timer/counter also includes two capture inputs to trap the timer value when
an input signal transitions, optionally generating an interrupt.
7.28.1 Features
• A 32-bit timer/counter with a programmable 32-bit prescaler.
• Counter or timer operation.
• Two 32-bit capture channels per timer, that can take a snapshot of the timer value
when an input signal transitions. A capture event may also generate an interrupt.
• Four 32-bit match registers that allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
• Up to four external outputs corresponding to match registers, with the following
capabilities:
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 69 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
– Set LOW on match.
– Set HIGH on match.
– Toggle on match.
– Do nothing on match.
• Up to two match registers can be used to generate timed DMA requests.
7.29 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
The LPC408x/7x contain two standard PWMs.
The PWM is based on the standard Timer block and inherits all of its features, although
only the PWM function is pinned out on the LPC408x/7x. The Timer is designed to count
cycles of the system derived clock and optionally switch pins, generate interrupts or
perform other actions when specified timer values occur, based on seven match registers.
The PWM function is in addition to these features, and is based on match register events.
The ability to separately control rising and falling edge locations allows the PWM to be
used for more applications. For instance, multi-phase motor control typically requires
three non-overlapping PWM outputs with individual control of all three pulse widths and
positions.
Two match registers can be used to provide a single edge controlled PWM output. One
match register (PWMMR0) controls the PWM cycle rate, by resetting the count upon
match. The other match register controls the PWM edge position. Additional single edge
controlled PWM outputs require only one match register each, since the repetition rate is
the same for all PWM outputs. Multiple single edge controlled PWM outputs will all have a
rising edge at the beginning of each PWM cycle, when an PWMMR0 match occurs.
Three match registers can be used to provide a PWM output with both edges controlled.
Again, the PWMMR0 match register controls the PWM cycle rate. The other match
registers control the two PWM edge positions. Additional double edge controlled PWM
outputs require only two match registers each, since the repetition rate is the same for all
PWM outputs.
With double edge controlled PWM outputs, specific match registers control the rising and
falling edge of the output. This allows both positive going PWM pulses (when the rising
edge occurs prior to the falling edge), and negative going PWM pulses (when the falling
edge occurs prior to the rising edge).
7.29.1 Features
• LPC408x/7x has two PWM blocks with Counter or Timer operation (may use the
peripheral clock or one of the capture inputs as the clock source).
• Seven match registers allow up to 6 single edge controlled or 3 double edge
controlled PWM outputs, or a mix of both types. The match registers also allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 70 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Supports single edge controlled and/or double edge controlled PWM outputs. Single
edge controlled PWM outputs all go high at the beginning of each cycle unless the
output is a constant low. Double edge controlled PWM outputs can have either edge
occur at any position within a cycle. This allows for both positive going and negative
going pulses.
• Pulse period and width can be any number of timer counts. This allows complete
flexibility in the trade-off between resolution and repetition rate. All PWM outputs will
occur at the same repetition rate.
• Double edge controlled PWM outputs can be programmed to be either positive going
or negative going pulses.
• Match register updates are synchronized with pulse outputs to prevent generation of
erroneous pulses. Software must ‘release’ new match values before they can become
effective.
• May be used as a standard 32-bit timer/counter with a programmable 32-bit prescaler
if the PWM mode is not enabled.
7.30 Motor control PWM
The LPC408x/7x contain one motor control PWM.
The motor control PWM is a specialized PWM supporting 3-phase motors and other
combinations. Feedback inputs are provided to automatically sense rotor position and use
that information to ramp speed up or down. An abort input is also provided that causes the
PWM to immediately release all motor drive outputs. At the same time, the motor control
PWM is highly configurable for other generalized timing, counting, capture, and compare
applications.
The maximum PWM speed is determined by the PWM resolution (n) and the operating
frequency f: PWM speed = f/2n (see Table 6).
7.31 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI)
Remark: The QEI is available on parts LPC4088/78/76.
A quadrature encoder, also known as a 2-channel incremental encoder, converts angular
displacement into two pulse signals. By monitoring both the number of pulses and the
relative phase of the two signals, the user can track the position, direction of rotation, and
velocity. In addition, a third channel, or index signal, can be used to reset the position
counter. The quadrature encoder interface decodes the digital pulses from a quadrature
encoder wheel to integrate position over time and determine direction of rotation. In
addition, the QEI can capture the velocity of the encoder wheel.
7.31.1 Features
• Tracks encoder position.
Table 6. PWM speed at operating frequency 120 MHz
PWM resolution PWM speed
6 bit 1.875 MHz
8 bit 0.468 MHz
10 bit 0.117 MHz
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 71 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Increments/decrements depending on direction.
• Programmable for 2 or 4 position counting.
• Velocity capture using built-in timer.
• Velocity compare function with “less than” interrupt.
• Uses 32-bit registers for position and velocity.
• Three position compare registers with interrupts.
• Index counter for revolution counting.
• Index compare register with interrupts.
• Can combine index and position interrupts to produce an interrupt for whole and
partial revolution displacement.
• Digital filter with programmable delays for encoder input signals.
• Can accept decoded signal inputs (clk and direction).
• Connected to APB.
7.32 ARM Cortex-M4 system tick timer
The ARM Cortex-M4 includes a system tick timer (SYSTICK) that is intended to generate
a dedicated SYSTICK exception at a 10 ms interval. In the LPC408x/7x, this timer can be
clocked from the internal AHB clock or from a device pin.
7.33 Windowed WatchDog Timer (WWDT)
The purpose of the watchdog is to reset the controller if software fails to periodically
service it within a programmable time window.
7.33.1 Features
• Internally resets chip if not periodically reloaded during the programmable time-out
period.
• Optional windowed operation requires reload to occur between a minimum and
maximum time period, both programmable.
• Optional warning interrupt can be generated at a programmable time prior to
watchdog time-out.
• Enabled by software but requires a hardware reset or a watchdog reset/interrupt to be
disabled.
• Incorrect feed sequence causes reset or interrupt if enabled.
• Flag to indicate watchdog reset.
• Programmable 24-bit timer with internal prescaler.
• Selectable time period from (Tcy(WDCLK) 256 4) to (Tcy(WDCLK) 224 4) in
multiples of Tcy(WDCLK) 4.
• The Watchdog Clock (WDCLK) source is a dedicated watchdog oscillator, which is
always running if the watchdog timer is enabled.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 72 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.34 RTC and backup registers
The RTC is a set of counters for measuring time when system power is on, and optionally
when it is off. The RTC on the LPC408x/7x is designed to have extremely low power
consumption, i.e. less than 1 A. The RTC will typically run from the main chip power
supply conserving battery power while the rest of the device is powered up. When
operating from a battery, the RTC will continue working down to 2.1 V. Battery power can
be provided from a standard 3 V lithium button cell.
An ultra-low power 32 kHz oscillator will provide a 1 Hz clock to the time counting portion
of the RTC, moving most of the power consumption out of the time counting function.
The RTC includes a calibration mechanism to allow fine-tuning the count rate in a way
that will provide less than 1 second per day error when operated at a constant voltage and
temperature.
The RTC contains a small set of backup registers (20 bytes) for holding data while the
main part of the LPC408x/7x is powered off.
The RTC includes an alarm function that can wake up the LPC408x/7x from all reduced
power modes with a time resolution of 1 s.
7.34.1 Features
• Measures the passage of time to maintain a calendar and clock.
• Ultra low power design to support battery powered systems.
• Provides Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Day of Month, Month, Year, Day of Week, and
Day of Year.
• Dedicated power supply pin can be connected to a battery or to the main 3.3 V.
• Periodic interrupts can be generated from increments of any field of the time registers.
• Backup registers (20 bytes) powered by VBAT.
• RTC power supply is isolated from the rest of the chip.
7.35 Event monitor/recorder
The event monitor/recorder allows recording of tampering events in sealed product
enclosures. Sensors report any attempt to open the enclosure, or to tamper with the
device in any other way. The event monitor/recorder stores records of such events when
the device is powered only by the backup battery.
7.35.1 Features
• Supports three digital event inputs in the VBAT power domain.
• An event is defined as a level change at the digital event inputs.
• For each event channel, two timestamps mark the first and the last occurrence of an
event. Each channel also has a dedicated counter tracking the total number of events.
Timestamp values are taken from the RTC.
• Runs in VBAT power domain, independent of system power supply. The
event/recorder/monitor can therefore operate in Deep power-down mode.
• Very low power consumption.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 73 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
• Interrupt available if system is running.
• A qualified event can be used as a wake-up trigger.
• State of event interrupts accessible by software through GPIO.
7.36 Clocking and power control
7.36.1 Crystal oscillators
The LPC408x/7x include four independent oscillators. These are the main oscillator, the
IRC oscillator, the watchdog oscillator, and the RTC oscillator.
Following reset, the LPC408x/7x will operate from the Internal RC oscillator until switched
by software. This allows systems to operate without any external crystal and the boot
loader code to operate at a known frequency.
See Figure 10 for an overview of the LPC408x/7x clock generation.
Fig 10. LPC408x/7x clock generation block diagram
MAIN PLL0
IRC oscillator
main oscillator
(osc_clk)
CLKSRCSEL
(system clock select)
sysclk
pll_clk
CCLKSEL
(CPU clock select)
002aag737
pll_clk
ALT PLL1
CPU CLOCK
DIVIDER
alt_pll_clk
cclk
PERIPHERAL
CLOCK DIVIDER
pclk
EMC
CLOCK DIVIDER
emc_clk
sysclk
alt_pll_clk
pll_clk
USBCLKSEL
(USB clock select)
USB
CLOCK DIVIDER
usb_clk
sysclk
LPC408x/7x
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 74 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.36.1.1 Internal RC oscillator
The IRC may be used as the clock that drives the PLL and subsequently the CPU. The
nominal IRC frequency is 12 MHz. The IRC is trimmed to 1 % accuracy over the entire
voltage and temperature range.
Upon power-up or any chip reset, the LPC408x/7x use the IRC as the clock source.
Software may later switch to one of the other available clock sources.
7.36.1.2 Main oscillator
The main oscillator can be used as the clock source for the CPU, with or without using the
PLL. The main oscillator also provides the clock source for the alternate PLL1.
The main oscillator operates at frequencies of 1 MHz to 25 MHz. This frequency can be
boosted to a higher frequency, up to the maximum CPU operating frequency, by the main
PLL. The clock selected as the PLL input is PLLCLKIN. The ARM processor clock
frequency is referred to as CCLK elsewhere in this document. The frequencies of
PLLCLKIN and CCLK are the same value unless the PLL is active and connected. The
clock frequency for each peripheral can be selected individually and is referred to as
PCLK. Refer to Section 7.36.2 for additional information.
7.36.1.3 RTC oscillator
The RTC oscillator provides a 1 Hz clock to the RTC and a 32 kHz clock output that can
be output on the CLKOUT pin in order to allow trimming the RTC oscillator without
interference from a probe.
7.36.1.4 Watchdog oscillator
The Watchdog Timer has a dedicated oscillator that provides a 500 kHz clock to the
Watchdog Timer that is always running if the Watchdog Timer is enabled. The Watchdog
oscillator clock can be output on the CLKOUT pin in order to allow observe its frequency.
In order to allow Watchdog Timer operation with minimum power consumption, which can
be important in reduced power modes, the Watchdog oscillator frequency is not tightly
controlled. The Watchdog oscillator frequency will vary over temperature and power
supply within a particular part, and may vary by processing across different parts. This
variation should be taken into account when determining Watchdog reload values.
Within a particular part, temperature and power supply variations can produce up to a
17 % frequency variation. Frequency variation between devices under the same
operating conditions can be up to 30 %.
7.36.2 Main PLL (PLL0) and Alternate PLL (PLL1)
PLL0 (also called the Main PLL) and PLL1 (also called the Alternate PLL) are functionally
identical but have somewhat different input possibilities and output connections. These
possibilities are shown in Figure 10. The Main PLL can receive its input from either the
IRC or the main oscillator and can potentially be used to provide the clocks to nearly
everything on the device. The Alternate PLL receives its input only from the main oscillator
and is intended to be used as an alternate source of clocking to the USB. The USB has
timing needs that may not always be filled by the Main PLL.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 75 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Both PLLs are disabled and powered off on reset. If the Alternate PLL is left disabled, the
USB clock can be supplied by PLL0 if everything is set up to provide 48 MHz to the USB
clock through that route. The source for each clock must be selected via the CLKSEL
registers and can be further reduced by clock dividers as needed.
PLL0 accepts an input clock frequency from either the IRC or the main oscillator. If only
the Main PLL is used, then its output frequency must be an integer multiple of all other
clocks needed in the system. PLL1 takes its input only from the main oscillator, requiring
an external crystal in the range of 10 to 25 MHz. In each PLL, the Current Controlled
Oscillator (CCO) operates in the range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz, so there are additional
dividers to bring the output down to the desired frequencies. The minimum output divider
value is 2, insuring that the output of the PLLs have a 50 % duty cycle.
If the USB is used, the possibilities for the CPU clock and other clocks will be limited by
the requirements that the frequency be precise and very low jitter, and that the PLL0
output must be a multiple of 48 MHz. Even multiples of 48 MHz that are within the
operating range of the PLL are 192 MHz and 288 MHz. Also, only the main oscillator in
conjunction with the PLL can meet the precision and jitter specifications for USB. It is due
to these limitations that the Alternate PLL is provided.
The alternate PLL accepts an input clock frequency from the main oscillator in the range
of 10 MHz to 25 MHz only. When used as the USB clock, the input frequency is multiplied
up to a multiple of 48 MHz (192 MHz or 288 MHz as described above).
7.36.3 Wake-up timer
The LPC408x/7x begin operation at power-up and when awakened from Power-down
mode by using the 12 MHz IRC oscillator as the clock source. This allows chip operation
to resume quickly. If the main oscillator or the PLL is needed by the application, software
will need to enable these features and wait for them to stabilize before they are used as a
clock source.
When the main oscillator is initially activated, the wake-up timer allows software to ensure
that the main oscillator is fully functional before the processor uses it as a clock source
and starts to execute instructions. This is important at power on, all types of reset, and
whenever any of the aforementioned functions are turned off for any reason. Since the
oscillator and other functions are turned off during Power-down mode, any wake-up of the
processor from Power-down mode makes use of the wake-up Timer.
The wake-up timer monitors the crystal oscillator to check whether it is safe to begin code
execution. When power is applied to the chip, or when some event caused the chip to exit
Power-down mode, some time is required for the oscillator to produce a signal of sufficient
amplitude to drive the clock logic. The amount of time depends on many factors, including
the rate of VDD(3V3) ramp (in the case of power on), the type of crystal and its electrical
characteristics (if a quartz crystal is used), as well as any other external circuitry (e.g.,
capacitors), and the characteristics of the oscillator itself under the existing ambient
conditions.
7.36.4 Power control
The LPC408x/7x support a variety of power control features. There are four special
modes of processor power reduction: Sleep mode, Deep-sleep mode, Power-down mode,
and Deep power-down mode. The CPU clock rate may also be controlled as needed by
changing clock sources, reconfiguring PLL values, and/or altering the CPU clock divider
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 76 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
value. This allows a trade-off of power versus processing speed based on application
requirements. In addition, the peripheral power control allows shutting down the clocks to
individual on-chip peripherals, allowing fine tuning of power consumption by eliminating all
dynamic power use in any peripherals that are not required for the application. Each of the
peripherals has its own clock divider which provides even better power control.
The integrated PMU (Power Management Unit) automatically adjusts internal regulators
to minimize power consumption during Sleep, Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down modes.
The LPC408x/7x also implement a separate power domain to allow turning off power to
the bulk of the device while maintaining operation of the RTC and a small set of registers
for storing data during any of the power-down modes.
7.36.4.1 Sleep mode
When Sleep mode is entered, the clock to the core is stopped. Resumption from the Sleep
mode does not need any special sequence other than re-enabling the clock to the ARM
core.
In Sleep mode, execution of instructions is suspended until either a Reset or interrupt
occurs. Peripheral functions continue operation during Sleep mode and may generate
interrupts to cause the processor to resume execution. Sleep mode eliminates dynamic
power used by the processor itself, memory systems and related controllers, and internal
buses.
The DMA controller can continue to work in Sleep mode and has access to the peripheral
RAMs and all peripheral registers. The flash memory and the main SRAM are not
available in Sleep mode, they are disabled in order to save power.
Wake-up from Sleep mode will occur whenever any enabled interrupt occurs.
7.36.4.2 Deep-sleep mode
In Deep-sleep mode, the oscillator is shut down and the chip receives no internal clocks.
The processor state and registers, peripheral registers, and internal SRAM values are
preserved throughout Deep-sleep mode and the logic levels of chip pins remain static.
The output of the IRC is disabled but the IRC is not powered down to allow fast wake-up.
The RTC oscillator is not stopped because the RTC interrupts may be used as the
wake-up source. The PLL is automatically turned off and disconnected. The clock divider
registers are automatically reset to zero.
The Deep-sleep mode can be terminated and normal operation resumed by either a
Reset or certain specific interrupts that are able to function without clocks. Since all
dynamic operation of the chip is suspended, Deep-sleep mode reduces chip power
consumption to a very low value. Power to the flash memory is left on in Deep-sleep
mode, allowing a very quick wake-up.
Wake-up from Deep-sleep mode can initiated by the NMI, External Interrupts EINT0
through EINT3, GPIO interrupts, the Ethernet Wake-on-LAN interrupt, Brownout Detect,
an RTC Alarm interrupt, a USB input pin transition (USB activity interrupt), a CAN input
pin transition, or a Watchdog Timer time-out, when the related interrupt is enabled.
Wake-up will occur whenever any enabled interrupt occurs.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 77 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
On wake-up from Deep-sleep mode, the code execution and peripherals activities will
resume after four cycles expire if the IRC was used before entering Deep-sleep mode. If
the main external oscillator was used, the code execution will resume when 4096 cycles
expire. PLL and clock dividers need to be reconfigured accordingly.
7.36.4.3 Power-down mode
Power-down mode does everything that Deep-sleep mode does but also turns off the
power to the IRC oscillator and the flash memory. This saves more power but requires
waiting for resumption of flash operation before execution of code or data access in the
flash memory can be accomplished.
When the chip enters Power-down mode, the IRC, the main oscillator, and all clocks are
stopped. The RTC remains running if it has been enabled and RTC interrupts may be
used to wake up the CPU. The flash is forced into Power-down mode. The PLLs are
automatically turned off and the clock selection multiplexers are set to use the system
clock sysclk (the reset state). The clock divider control registers are automatically reset to
zero. If the Watchdog timer is running, it will continue running in Power-down mode.
On the wake-up of Power-down mode, if the IRC was used before entering Power-down
mode, it will take IRC 60 s to start-up. After this four IRC cycles will expire before the
code execution can then be resumed if the code was running from SRAM. In the
meantime, the flash wake-up timer then counts 12 MHz IRC clock cycles to make the
100 s flash start-up time. When it times out, access to the flash will be allowed. Users
need to reconfigure the PLL and clock dividers accordingly.
7.36.4.4 Deep power-down mode
The Deep power-down mode can only be entered from the RTC block. In Deep
power-down mode, power is shut off to the entire chip with the exception of the RTC
module and the RESET pin.
To optimize power conservation, the user has the additional option of turning off or
retaining power to the 32 kHz oscillator. It is also possible to use external circuitry to turn
off power to the on-chip regulator via the VDD(REG)(3V3) pins and/or the I/O power via the
VDD(3V3) pins after entering Deep Power-down mode. Power must be restored before
device operation can be restarted.
The LPC408x/7x can wake up from Deep power-down mode via the RESET pin or an
alarm match event of the RTC.
7.36.4.5 Wake-up Interrupt Controller (WIC)
The WIC allows the CPU to automatically wake up from any enabled priority interrupt that
can occur while the clocks are stopped in Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down modes.
The WIC works in connection with the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC). When
the CPU enters Deep-sleep, Power-down, or Deep power-down mode, the NVIC sends a
mask of the current interrupt situation to the WIC. This mask includes all of the interrupts
that are both enabled and of sufficient priority to be serviced immediately. With this
information, the WIC simply notices when one of the interrupts has occurred and then it
wakes up the CPU.
The WIC eliminates the need to periodically wake up the CPU and poll the interrupts
resulting in additional power savings.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 78 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.36.5 Peripheral power control
A power control for peripherals feature allows individual peripherals to be turned off if they
are not needed in the application, resulting in additional power savings.
7.36.6 Power domains
The LPC408x/7x provide two independent power domains that allow the bulk of the
device to have power removed while maintaining operation of the RTC and the backup
registers.
On the LPC408x/7x, I/O pads are powered by VDD(3V3), while VDD(REG)(3V3) powers the
on-chip voltage regulator which in turn provides power to the CPU and most of the
peripherals.
Depending on the LPC408x/7x application, a design can use two power options to
manage power consumption.
The first option assumes that power consumption is not a concern and the design ties the
VDD(3V3) and VDD(REG)(3V3) pins together. This approach requires only one 3.3 V power
supply for both pads, the CPU, and peripherals. While this solution is simple, it does not
support powering down the I/O pad ring “on the fly” while keeping the CPU and
peripherals alive.
The second option uses two power supplies; a 3.3 V supply for the I/O pads (VDD(3V3)) and
a dedicated 3.3 V supply for the CPU (VDD(REG)(3V3)). Having the on-chip voltage regulator
powered independently from the I/O pad ring enables shutting down of the I/O pad power
supply “on the fly” while the CPU and peripherals stay active.
The VBAT pin supplies power only to the RTC domain. The RTC requires a minimum of
power to operate, which can be supplied by an external battery. The device core power
(VDD(REG)(3V3)) is used to operate the RTC whenever VDD(REG)(3V3) is present. There is no
power drain from the RTC battery when VDD(REG)(3V3) is available and VDD(REG)(3V3) >
VBAT.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 79 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.37 System control
7.37.1 Reset
Reset has four sources on the LPC408x/7x: the RESET pin, the Watchdog reset,
Power-On Reset (POR), and the BrownOut Detection (BOD) circuit. The RESET pin is a
Schmitt trigger input pin. Assertion of chip Reset by any source, once the operating
voltage attains a usable level, starts the Wake-up timer (see description in
Section 7.36.3), causing reset to remain asserted until the external Reset is de-asserted,
the oscillator is running, a fixed number of clocks have passed, and the flash controller
has completed its initialization.
When the internal Reset is removed, the processor begins executing at address 0, which
is initially the Reset vector mapped from the boot block. At that point, all of the processor
and peripheral registers have been initialized to predetermined values.
Fig 11. Power distribution
REAL-TIME CLOCK
BACKUP REGISTERS
REGULATOR
32 kHz
OSCILLATOR
POWER
SELECTOR
ULTRA-LOW
POWER
REGULATOR
RTC POWER DOMAIN
MAIN POWER DOMAIN
002aag738
RTCX1
VBAT
(typical 3.0 V)
VDD(REG)(3V3)
(typical 3.3 V)
RTCX2
VDD(3V3)
VSS
to memories,
peripherals,
oscillators,
PLLs
to core
to I/O pads
ADC
DAC
ADC POWER DOMAIN
VDDA
VREFP
VSSA
LPC408x/7x
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 80 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.37.2 Brownout detection
The LPC408x/7x include 2-stage monitoring of the voltage on the VDD(REG)(3V3) pins. If this
voltage falls below 2.2 V (typical), the BOD asserts an interrupt signal to the Vectored
Interrupt Controller. This signal can be enabled for interrupt in the Interrupt Enable
Register in the NVIC in order to cause a CPU interrupt; if not, software can monitor the
signal by reading a dedicated status register.
The second stage of low-voltage detection asserts reset to inactivate the LPC408x/7x
when the voltage on the VDD(REG)(3V3) pins falls below 1.85 V (typical). This reset prevents
alteration of the flash as operation of the various elements of the chip would otherwise
become unreliable due to low voltage. The BOD circuit maintains this reset down below
1 V, at which point the power-on reset circuitry maintains the overall reset.
Both the 2.2 V and 1.85 V thresholds include some hysteresis. In normal operation, this
hysteresis allows the 2.2 V detection to reliably interrupt, or a regularly executed event
loop to sense the condition.
7.37.3 Code security (Code Read Protection - CRP)
This feature of the LPC408x/7x allows user to enable different levels of security in the
system so that access to the on-chip flash and use of the JTAG and ISP can be restricted.
When needed, CRP is invoked by programming a specific pattern into a dedicated flash
location. IAP commands are not affected by the CRP.
There are three levels of the Code Read Protection.
CRP1 disables access to chip via the JTAG and allows partial flash update (excluding
flash sector 0) using a limited set of the ISP commands. This mode is useful when CRP is
required and flash field updates are needed but all sectors can not be erased.
CRP2 disables access to chip via the JTAG and only allows full flash erase and update
using a reduced set of the ISP commands.
Running an application with level CRP3 selected fully disables any access to chip via the
JTAG pins and the ISP. This mode effectively disables ISP override using P2[10] pin, too.
It is up to the user’s application to provide (if needed) flash update mechanism using IAP
calls or call reinvoke ISP command to enable flash update via UART0.
7.37.4 APB interface
The APB peripherals are split into two separate APB buses in order to distribute the bus
bandwidth and thereby reducing stalls caused by contention between the CPU and the
GPDMA controller.
CAUTION
If level three Code Read Protection (CRP3) is selected, no future factory testing can be
performed on the device.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 81 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
7.37.5 AHB multilayer matrix
The LPC408x/7x use an AHB multilayer matrix. This matrix connects the instruction
(I-code) and data (D-code) CPU buses of the ARM Cortex-M4 to the flash memory, the
main (32 kB) static RAM, and the Boot ROM. The GPDMA can also access all of these
memories. Additionally, the matrix connects the CPU system bus and all of the DMA
controllers to the various peripheral functions.
7.37.6 External interrupt inputs
The LPC408x/7x include up to 30 edge sensitive interrupt inputs combined with one level
sensitive external interrupt input as selectable pin function. The external interrupt input
can optionally be used to wake up the processor from Power-down mode.
7.37.7 Memory mapping control
The Cortex-M4 incorporates a mechanism that allows remapping the interrupt vector table
to alternate locations in the memory map. This is controlled via the Vector Table Offset
Register contained in the NVIC.
The vector table may be located anywhere within the bottom 1 GB of Cortex-M4 address
space. The vector table must be located on a 128 word (512 byte) boundary because the
NVIC on the LPC408x/7x is configured for 128 total interrupts.
7.38 Debug control
Debug and trace functions are integrated into the ARM Cortex-M4. Serial wire debug and
trace functions are supported in addition to a standard JTAG debug and parallel trace
functions. The ARM Cortex-M4 is configured to support up to eight breakpoints and four
watch points.
8. Limiting values
Table 7. Limiting values
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
VDD(3V3) supply voltage (3.3 V) external rail 2.4 3.6 V
VDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply voltage (3.3 V) 2.4 3.6 V
VDDA analog 3.3 V pad supply voltage 0.5 +4.6 V
Vi(VBAT) input voltage on pin VBAT for the RTC 0.5 +4.6 V
Vi(VREFP) input voltage on pin VREFP 0.5 +4.6 V
VIA analog input voltage on ADC related
pins
0.5 +5.1 V
VI input voltage 5 V tolerant digital
I/O pins;
VDD(3V3) 2.4V
[2] 0.5 +5.5 V
VDD(3V3) 0 V 0.5 +3.6 V
other I/O pins [2][3] 0.5 VDD(3V3) +
0.5
V
IDD supply current per supply pin - 100 mA
ISS ground current per ground pin - 100 mA
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 82 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] The following applies to the limiting values:
a) This product includes circuitry specifically designed for the protection of its internal devices from the damaging effects of excessive
static charge. Nonetheless, it is suggested that conventional precautions be taken to avoid applying greater than the rated
maximum.
b) Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified. All voltages are with respect to VSS unless
otherwise noted.
[2] Including voltage on outputs in 3-state mode.
[3] Not to exceed 4.6 V.
[4] The maximum non-operating storage temperature is different than the temperature for required shelf life which should be determined
based on the required shelf lifetime. Please refer to the JEDEC spec for further details.
[5] Human body model: equivalent to discharging a 100 pF capacitor through a 1.5 k series resistor.
Ilatch I/O latch-up current (0.5VDD(3V3)) < VI
< (1.5VDD(3V3));
Tj < 125 C
- 100 mA
Tstg storage temperature non-operating [4] 65 +150 C
Ptot(pack) total power dissipation (per package) based on package
heat transfer, not
device power
consumption
- 1.5 W
VESD electrostatic discharge voltage human body
model; all pins
[5]- 4000 V
Table 7. Limiting values …continued
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 83 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
9. Thermal characteristics
The average chip junction temperature, Tj (C), can be calculated using the following
equation:
(1)
• Tamb = ambient temperature (C),
• Rth(j-a) = the package junction-to-ambient thermal resistance (C/W)
• PD = sum of internal and I/O power dissipation
Tj = Tamb + PD Rthj – a
Table 8. Thermal characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified;
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Tj(max) maximum junction
temperature
- - 125 C
Table 9. Thermal resistance (LQFP packages)
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified.
Thermal resistance value (C/W): ±15 %
LQFP80 LQFP144 LQFP208
ja
JEDEC (4.5 in 4 in)
0 m/s 41 31 27
1 m/s 35 28 25
2.5 m/s 32 26 24
Single-layer (4.5 in 3 in)
0 m/s 61 43 35
1 m/s 47 35 31
2.5 m/s 43 33 29
jc 7.8 9.2 10.5
jb 11.6 13.5 15.2
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 84 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Table 10. Thermal resistance value (TFBGA packages)
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified.
Thermal resistance value (C/W): ±15 %
TFBGA180 TFBGA208
ja
JEDEC (4.5 in 4 in)
0 m/s 47 43
1 m/s 39 37
2.5 m/s 35 33
8-layer (4.5 in 3 in)
0 m/s 39 37
1 m/s 35 33
2.5 m/s 31 30
jc 8.5 7.4
jb 13 16
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 85 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
10. Static characteristics
Table 11. Static characteristics
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max Unit
Supply pins
VDD(3V3) supply voltage (3.3 V) external rail [2] 2.4 3.3 3.6 V
VDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply voltage
(3.3 V)
2.4 3.3 3.6 V
VDDA analog 3.3 V pad supply
voltage
[3] 2.7 3.3 3.6 V
Vi(VBAT) input voltage on pin
VBAT
[4] 2.1 3.0 3.6 V
Vi(VREFP) input voltage on pin
VREFP
[3] 2.7 3.3 VDDA V
IDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply current
(3.3 V)
active mode; code
while(1){}
executed from flash; all
peripherals disabled
PCLK = CCLK/4
CCLK = 12 MHz; PLL
disabled
[5][6]- 7.5 - mA
CCLK = 120 MHz; PLL
enabled
[5][7]- 56 - mA
active mode; code
while(1){}
executed from flash; all
peripherals enabled;
PCLK = CCLK/4
CCLK = 12 MHz; PLL
disabled
[5][6] 14 -
CCLK = 120 MHz; PLL
enabled
[5][7] 120 - mA
Sleep mode [5][8]- 5.5 - mA
Deep-sleep mode [5][9] - 550 1200 A
Power-down mode [5][9] - 280 600 A
IBAT battery supply current RTC running;
part powered down;
VDD(REG)(3V3) =0 V;
Vi(VBAT) = 3.0 V;
VDD(3V3) = 0 V.
[10] -
1 9 A
part powered;
VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.3 V;
Vi(VBAT) = 3.0 V
[11] <10 nA
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 86 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Standard port pins, RESET
IIL LOW-level input current VI = 0 V; on-chip pull-up
resistor disabled
- 0.5 10 nA
IIH HIGH-level input
current
VI = VDD(3V3); on-chip
pull-down resistor
disabled
- 0.5 10 nA
VI input voltage pin configured to provide
a digital function
[15][16]
[17]
0 - 5.0 V
VO output voltage output active 0 - VDD(3V3) V
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7VDD(3V3)- - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(3V3) V
Vhys hysteresis voltage 0.4 - - V
VOH HIGH-level output
voltage
IOH = 4 mA VDD(3V3)
0.45
- - V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOL = 4 mA - - 0.45 V
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(3V3) 0.4 V 4 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 4 - - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
VOH = 0 V [18]- - 50 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
VOL = VDD(3V3) [18]- - 60 mA
Ipd pull-down current VI = 5 V 10 50 150 A
Ipu pull-up current VI = 0 V 15 50 85 A
VDD(3V3) < VI < 5 V 0 0 0 A
I2C-bus pins (P0[27] and P0[28])
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7VDD(3V3)- - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(3V3) V
Vhys hysteresis voltage - 0.05
VDD(3V3)
- V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOLS = 3 mA - - 0.4 V
ILI input leakage current VI = VDD(3V3) [19]- 2 4 A
VI = 5 V - 10 22 A
USB pins
IOZ OFF-state output
current
0 V < VI < 3.3 V [20]- - 10 A
VBUS bus supply voltage [20]- - 5.25 V
VDI differential input
sensitivity voltage
(D+) (D) [20] 0.2 - - V
Table 11. Static characteristics …continued
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max Unit
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 87 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] Typical ratings are not guaranteed. The values listed are at room temperature (25 C), nominal supply voltages.
[2] For USB operation 3.0 V VDD((3V3) 3.6 V. Guaranteed by design.
[3] VDDA and VREFP should be tied to VDD(3V3) if the ADC and DAC are not used.
[4] The RTC typically fails when Vi(VBAT) drops below 1.6 V.
[5] VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.3 V; Tamb = 25 C for all power consumption measurements.
[6] Boost control bits in the PBOOST register set to 0x0 (see LPC408x/7x User manual).
[7] Boost control bits in the PBOOST register set to 0x3 (see LPC408x/7x User manual).
[8] IRC running at 12 MHz; main oscillator and PLL disabled; PCLK = CCLK/4.
[9] BOD disabled.
[10] On pin VBAT; VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = VDDA = 0; Tamb = 25 C.
[11] On pin VBAT; VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = VDDA = 3.3 V; Tamb = 25 C.
[12] All internal pull-ups disabled. All pins configured as output and driven LOW. VDD(3V3) = 3.3 V; Tamb = 25 C.
[13] VDDA = 3.3 V; Tamb = 25 C.
[14] Vi(VREFP) = 3.3 V; Tamb = 25 C.
[15] Including voltage on outputs in 3-state mode.
[16] VDD(3V3) supply voltages must be present.
[17] 3-state outputs go into 3-state mode in Deep power-down mode.
[18] Allowed as long as the current limit does not exceed the maximum current allowed by the device.
[19] To VSS.
[20] 3.0 V VDD(3V3) 3.6 V.
VCM differential common
mode voltage range
includes VDI range [20] 0.8 - 2.5 V
Vth(rs)se single-ended receiver
switching threshold
voltage
[20] 0.8 - 2.0 V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage for
low-/full-speed
RL of 1.5 k to 3.6 V [20]- - 0.18 V
VOH HIGH-level output
voltage (driven) for
low-/full-speed
RL of 15 k to GND [20] 2.8 - 3.5 V
Ctrans transceiver capacitance pin to GND [20]- - 20 pF
Oscillator pins (see Section 13.2)
Vi(XTAL1) input voltage on pin
XTAL1
0.5 1.8 1.95 V
Vo(XTAL2) output voltage on pin
XTAL2
0.5 1.8 1.95 V
Vi(RTCX1) input voltage on pin
RTCX1
0.5 - 3.6 V
Vo(RTCX2) output voltage on pin
RTCX2
0.5 - 3.6 V
Table 11. Static characteristics …continued
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max Unit
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 88 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
10.1 Power consumption
Conditions: BOD disabled.
Fig 12. Deep-sleep mode: Typical regulator supply current IDD(REG)(3V3) versus
temperature
Conditions: BOD disabled.
Fig 13. Power-down mode: Typical regulator supply current IDD(REG)(3V3) versus
temperature
temperature (°C)
-40 -15 10 35 60 85
002aah051
0.7
1.1
1.5
0.3
VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.6 V
3.3 V
3.0 V
2.4 V
IDD(REG)(3V3)
(mA)
temperature (°C)
-40 -15 10 35 60 85
002aah052
300
600
900
0
VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.6 V
3.3 V
3.0 V
2.4 V
IDD(REG)(3V3)
(μA)
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 89 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Conditions: VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDDA = VDD(3V3) = 0; VBAT = 3.0 V.
Fig 14. Part powered off: Typical battery supply current (IBAT) versus temperature
002aah074
temperature (°C)
-40 -15 10 35 60 85
0.8
1.6
0.4
1.2
2.0
0
IBAT
(μA)
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 90 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
10.2 Peripheral power consumption
The supply current per peripheral is measured as the difference in supply current between
the peripheral block enabled and the peripheral block disabled in the PCONP register. All
other blocks are disabled and no code is executed. Measured on a typical sample at
Tamb = 25 C. The peripheral clock was set to PCLK = CCLK/4 with CCLK = 12 MHz,
48 MHz, and 120 MHz.
The combined current of several peripherals running at the same time can be less than
the sum of each individual peripheral current measured separately.
Table 12. Power consumption for individual analog and digital blocks
Tamb = 25 C; VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = VDDA = 3.3 V; PCLK = CCLK/4.
Peripheral Conditions Typical supply current in mA
12 MHz[1] 48 MHz[1] 120 MHz[2]
Timer0 0.01 0.06 0.15
Timer1 0.02 0.07 0.16
Timer2 0.02 0.07 0.17
Timer3 0.01 0.07 0.16
Timer0 + Timer1 + Timer2 + Timer3 0.07 0.28 0.67
UART0 0.05 0.19 0.45
UART1 0.06 0.24 0.56
UART2 0.05 0.2 0.47
UART3 0.06 0.23 0.56
USART4 0.07 0.27 0.66
UART0 + UART1 + UART2 + UART3 +
USART4
0.29 1.13 2.74
PWM0 + PWM1 0.08 0.31 0.75
Motor control PWM 0.04 0.15 0.36
I2C0 0.01 0.03 0.08
I2C1 0.01 0.03 0.1
I2C2 0.01 0.03 0.08
I2C0 + I2C1 + I2C2 0.02 0.1 0.26
SSP0 0.03 0.1 0.26
SSP1 0.02 0.11 0.27
DAC 0.3 0.31 0.33
ADC (12 MHz clock) 1.51 1.61 1.7
Comparator 0.01 0.03 0.06
CAN1 0.11 0.44 1.08
CAN2 0.1 0.4 0.98
CAN1 + CAN2 0.15 0.59 1.44
DMA PCLK = CCLK 1.1 4.27 10.27
QEI 0.02 0.11 0.28
GPIO 0.4 1.72 4.16
LCD 0.99 3.84 9.25
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 91 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] Boost control bits in the PBOOST register set to 0x0 (see LPC178x/7x User manual UM10470).
[2] Boost control bits in the PBOOST register set to 0x3 (see LPC178x/7x User manual UM10470).
I2S 0.04 0.18 0.46
EMC 0.82 3.17 7.63
RTC 0.01 0.01 0.05
USB + PLL1 0.62 0.97 1.67
Ethernet PCENET bit set
to 1 in the
PCONP register
0.54 2.08 5.03
Table 12. Power consumption for individual analog and digital blocks …continued
Tamb = 25 C; VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = VDDA = 3.3 V; PCLK = CCLK/4.
Peripheral Conditions Typical supply current in mA
12 MHz[1] 48 MHz[1] 120 MHz[2]
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 92 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
10.3 Electrical pin characteristics
Conditions: VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = 3.3 V; standard port pins.
Fig 15. Typical HIGH-level output voltage VOH versus HIGH-level output source current
IOH
Conditions: VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = 3.3 V; standard port pins.
Fig 16. Typical LOW-level output current IOL versus LOW-level output voltage VOL
IOH (mA)
0 8 16 24
002aaf112
2.8
2.4
3.2
3.6
VOH
(V)
2.0
T = 85 °C
25 °C
−40 °C
VOL (V)
0 0.2 0.4 0.6
002aaf111
5
10
15
IOL
(mA)
0
T = 85 °C
25 °C
−40 °C
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 93 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Conditions: VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = 3.3 V; standard port pins.
Fig 17. Typical pull-up current Ipu versus input voltage VI
Conditions: VDD(REG)(3V3) = VDD(3V3) = 3.3 V; standard port pins.
Fig 18. Typical pull-down current Ipd versus input voltage VI
0 1 2 3 4 5
002aaf108
−30
−50
−10
10
Ipu
(μA)
−70
T = 85 °C
25 °C
−40 °C
VI (V)
002aaf109
VI (V)
0 1 2 3 4 5
10
70
50
30
90
Ipd
(μA)
−10
T = 85 °C
25 °C
−40 °C
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 94 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11. Dynamic characteristics
11.1 Flash memory
[1] Number of program/erase cycles.
[2] Programming times are given for writing 256 bytes from RAM to the flash. Data must be written to the flash
in blocks of 256 bytes.
[1] EEPROM clock frequency = 375 kHz. Programming/erase times increase with decreasing EEPROM clock
frequency.
Table 13. Flash characteristics
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Nendu endurance [1] 10000 100000 - cycles
tret retention time powered 10 - - years
unpowered 20 - - years
ter erase time sector or multiple
consecutive sectors
95 100 105 ms
tprog programming
time
[2] 0.95 1 1.05 ms
Table 14. EEPROM characteristics
Tamb = 40 C to +85C; VDD(REG)(3V3) = 2.7 V to 3.6 V.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
fclk clock frequency 200 375 400 kHz
Nendu endurance 100000 500000 - cycles
tret retention time powered 10 - - years
unpowered 10 - - years
ter erase time 64 bytes [1]- 1.8 - ms
tprog programming
time
64 bytes [1]- 1.1 - ms
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 95 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.2 External memory interface
Table 15. Dynamic characteristics: Static external memory interface
CL = 30 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter[1] Conditions[1] Min Typ Max Unit
Read cycle parameters[2]
tCSLAV CS LOW to address
valid time
RD1 3.3 4.3 6.1 ns
tCSLOEL CS LOW to OE
LOW time
RD2 [3] 2.4 + Tcy(clk)
WAITOEN
3.1 + Tcy(clk)
WAITOEN
4.2 + Tcy(clk)
WAITOEN
ns
tCSLBLSL CS LOW to BLS
LOW time
RD3; PB = 1 [3] 2.7 3.5 4.9 ns
tOELOEH OE LOW to OE
HIGH time
RD4 [3] (WAITRD
WAITOEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 2.2
(WAITRD
WAITOEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 2.8
(WAITRD
WAITOEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 3.8
ns
tam memory access
time
RD5 [4][3] (WAITRD
WAITOEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 9.6
(WAITRD
WAITOEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 13.2
(WAITRD
WAITOEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 20.2
ns
th(D) data input hold time RD6 [5][3] 5.0 7.2 10.7 ns
tCSHBLSH CS HIGH to BLS
HIGH time
PB = 1 2.7 3.4 4.9 ns
tCSHOEH CS HIGH to OE
HIGH time
[3] 2.4 3.1 4.2 ns
tOEHANV OE HIGH to address
invalid time
[3] 0.77 1.2 1.86 ns
tdeact deactivation time RD7 [3] 3.3 4.3 6.1 ns
Write cycle parameters[2]
tCSLAV CS LOW to address
valid time
WR1 3.3 4.3 6.1 ns
tCSLDV CS LOW to data
valid time
WR2 3.4 4.8 6.6 ns
tCSLWEL CS LOW to WE
LOW time
WR3; PB =1 [3] 2.6 + Tcy(clk)
(1 + WAITWEN)
3.3 + Tcy(clk)
(1 + WAITWEN)
4.6 + Tcy(clk)
(1 + WAITWEN)
ns
tCSLBLSL CS LOW to BLS
LOW time
WR4; PB = 1 [3] 2.7 3.5 4.9 ns
tWELWEH WE LOW to WE
HIGH time
WR5; PB =1 [3] (WAITWR
WAITWEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 2.3
(WAITWR
WAITWEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 2.8
(WAITWR
WAITWEN + 1)
Tcy(clk) 3.8
ns
tBLSLBLSH BLS LOW to BLS
HIGH time
PB = 1 [3] (WAITWR
WAITWEN + 3)
Tcy(clk) 2.8
(WAITWR
WAITWEN + 3)
Tcy(clk) 3.5
(WAITWR
WAITWEN + 3)
Tcy(clk) 5.0
ns
tWEHDNV WE HIGH to data
invalid time
WR6; PB =1 [3] 3.1 + Tcy(clk) 4.3 + Tcy(clk) 5.8 + Tcy(clk) ns
tWEHEOW WE HIGH to end of
write time
WR7; PB = 1 [6][3] Tcy(clk) 2.6 Tcy(clk) 3.4 Tcy(clk) 4.6 ns
tBLSHDNV BLS HIGH to data
invalid time
PB = 1 3.4 4.8 6.6 ns
tWEHANV WE HIGH to
address invalid time
PB = 1 [3] 3.0 + Tcy(clk) 3.8 + Tcy(clk) 5.3 + Tcy(clk) ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 96 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] Parameters are shown as RDn or WDn in Figure 19 as indicated in the Conditions column.
[2] Parameters specified for 40 % of VDD(3V3) for rising edges and 60 % of VDD(3V3) for falling edges.
[3] Tcy(clk) = 1/EMC_CLK (see LPC408x/7x User manual).
[4] Latest of address valid, EMC_CSx LOW, EMC_OE LOW, EMC_BLSx LOW (PB = 1).
[5] After End Of Read (EOR): Earliest of EMC_CSx HIGH, EMC_OE HIGH, EMC_BLSx HIGH (PB = 1), address invalid.
[6] End Of Write (EOW): Earliest of address invalid, EMC_CSx HIGH, EMC_BLSx HIGH (PB = 1).
tdeact deactivation time WR8; PB = 0; PB =
1
[3] 3.3 4.3 6.1 ns
tCSLBLSL CS LOW to BLS
LOW
WR9; PB = 0 [3] 2.7 + Tcy(clk)
(1 + WAITWEN)
3.5 + Tcy(clk)
(1 + WAITWEN)
4.9 + Tcy(clk)
(1 + WAITWEN)
ns
tBLSLBLSH BLS LOW to BLS
HIGH time
WR10; PB = 0 [3] (WAITWR
WAITWEN + 3)
Tcy(clk) 2.8
(WAITWR
WAITWEN + 3)
Tcy(clk) 3.5
(WAITWR
WAITWEN + 3)
Tcy(clk) 5.0
ns
tBLSHEOW BLS HIGH to end of
write time
WR11; PB = 0 [6][3] 3.3 + Tcy(clk) 4.4 + Tcy(clk) 6.1 + Tcy(clk) ns
tBLSHDNV BLS HIGH to data
invalid time
WR12; PB = 0 [3] 3.4 + Tcy(clk) 4.8 + Tcy(clk) 6.6 + Tcy(clk) ns
Table 15. Dynamic characteristics: Static external memory interface …continued
CL = 30 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter[1] Conditions[1] Min Typ Max Unit
Fig 19. External static memory read/write access (PB = 0)
RD1
RD5
RD2
WR2
WR9
WR12
WR10 WR11
RD5
RD5
RD6
WR8
WR1
EOR EOW
RD7
RD4
EMC_Ax
EMC_CSx
EMC_OE
EMC_BLSx
EMC_WE
EMC_Dx
002aag214
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 97 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 20. External static memory read/write access (PB =1)
RD1 WR1
EMC_Ax
WR8
WR4
WR8
EMC_CSx
RD2
RD7
RD7
RD4 EMC_OE
EMC_BLSx
EMC_WE
RD5
WR2 WR6
RD5
RD5
RD5
RD6
RD3
EOR EOW
EMC_Dx
WR3 WR5 WR7
002aag215
Fig 21. External static memory burst read cycle
RD5 RD5 RD5 RD5
EMC_Ax
EMC_CSx
EMC_OE
EMC_BLSx
EMC_WE
EMC_Dx
002aag216
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 98 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] Refers to SDRAM clock signal EMC_CLKx.
[2] CLKDLY = CLKOUTnDLY, where n = 0, 1.
[3] The data input set-up time has to be selected with the following margin:
tsu(D) + delay time of feedback clock SDRAM access time board delay time 0.
[4] The data input hold time has to be selected with the following margin:
th(D) + SDRAM access time board delay time delay time of feedback clock 0.
Table 16. Dynamic characteristics: Dynamic external memory interface, read strategy bits (RD bits) = 00
CL = 30 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit
Common to read and write cycles
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time [1] 12.5 - - ns
td(SV) chip select valid delay time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.8
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.5
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.1
ns
th(S) chip select hold time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.0
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.1
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.5
ns
td(RASV) row address strobe valid delay time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.8
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.6
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.1
ns
th(RAS) row address strobe hold time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.8
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.9
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.0
ns
td(CASV) column address strobe valid delay time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.7
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.4
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.9
ns
th(CAS) column address strobe hold time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.8
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.0
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.2
ns
td(WV) write valid delay time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.2
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.1
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 6.0
ns
th(W) write hold time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.6
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.67
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.7
ns
td(AV) address valid delay time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.4
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.6
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 6.8
ns
th(A) address hold time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.1
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.4
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.8
ns
Read cycle parameters
tsu(D) data input set-up time [3] (FBCLKDLY +
1) 0.25 + 4.1
(FBCLKDLY +
1) 0.25 + 2.3
(FBCLKDLY +
1) 0.25 0.9
ns
th(D) data input hold time [4] (FBCLKDLY +
1) 0.25 + 4.0
(FBCLKDLY +
1) 0.25 + 4.7
(FBCLKDLY +
1) 0.25 + 5.8
ns
Write cycle parameters
td(QV) data output valid delay time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.9
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.4
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 7.8
ns
th(Q) data output hold time [2] (CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.1
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.2
(CLKDLY + 1)
0.25 1.4
ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 99 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] Refers to SDRAM clock signal EMC_CLKx.
[2] The data input set-up time has to be selected with the following margin:
tsu(D) + delay time of feedback clock SDRAM access time board delay time 0.
[3] The data input hold time has to be selected with the following margin:
th(D) + SDRAM access time - board delay time - delay time of feedback clock 0.
Table 17. Dynamic characteristics: Dynamic external memory interface, read strategy bits (RD bits) = 01
CL = 30 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit
Common to read and write cycles
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time [1] 12.5 - - ns
td(SV) chip select valid delay time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.9
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 6.7
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 10.4
ns
th(S) chip select hold time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.2
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.1
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.8
ns
td(RASV) row address strobe valid delay time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.9
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 6.8
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 10.4
ns
th(RAS) row address strobe hold time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.3
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.3
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.3
ns
td(CASV) column address strobe valid delay
time
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.8
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 6.7
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 10.2
ns
th(CAS) column address strobe hold time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.2
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.2
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.1
ns
td(WV) write valid delay time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.1
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 7.1
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 10.9
ns
th(W) write hold time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.5
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.6
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.8
ns
td(AV) address valid delay time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.5
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 7.7
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 11.9
ns
th(A) address hold time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.0
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.8
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.5
ns
Read cycle parameters
tsu(D) data input set-up time [2] (FBCLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.1
(FBCLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.3
(FBCLKDLY + 1)
0.25 0.9
ns
th(D) data input hold time [3] (FBCLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.0
(FBCLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 4.7
(FBCLKDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.8
ns
Write cycle parameters
td(QV) data output valid delay time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 5.9
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 8.7
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 13.1
ns
th(Q) data output hold time (CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 1.0
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 2.0
(CMDDLY + 1)
0.25 + 3.9
ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 100 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] The programmable delay blocks are controlled by the EMCDLYCTL register in the EMC register block. All
delay times are incremental delays for each element starting from delay block 0. See the LPC408x/7x user
manual for details.
Fig 22. Dynamic external memory interface signal timing
002aah129
EMC_CLKn Tcy(clk)
delay = 0
EMC_DYCSn,
EMC_RAS,
EMC_CAS,
EMC_WE,
EMC_CKEOUTn,
EMC_A[22:0],
EMC_DQMOUTn
th(Q)
tsu(D) th(D)
EMC_D[31:0]
write
EMC_D[31:0]
read
td(QV)
td(xV) th(x)
Table 18. Dynamic characteristics: Dynamic external memory interface programmable
clock delays
CL = 30 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V.Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
td delay time Programmable delay block 0 (CMDDLY
or CLKOUTnDLY bit 0 = 1)
[1] 0.1 0.2 ns
Programmable delay block 1 (CMDDLY
or CLKOUTnDLY bit 1 = 1)
[1] 0.2 0.5 ns
Programmable delay block 2 (CMDDLY
or CLKOUTnDLY bit 2 = 1)
[1] 0.5 1.3 ns
Programmable delay block 3 (CMDDLY
or CLKOUTnDLY bit 3 = 1)
[1] 1.2 2.9 ns
Programmable delay block 4 (CMDDLY
or CLKOUTnDLY bit 4 = 1)
[1] 2.4 6.0 ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 101 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.3 External clock
[1] Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.
[2] Typical ratings are not guaranteed. The values listed are at room temperature (25 C), nominal supply
voltages.
11.4 Internal oscillators
[1] Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.
[2] Typical ratings are not guaranteed. The values listed are at room temperature (25 C), nominal supply
voltages.
11.5 I/O pins
[1] Applies to standard port pin. For details, see the LPC408x/7x IBIS model available on the NXP website.
Table 19. Dynamic characteristic: external clock (see Figure 40)
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; VDD(3V3) over specified ranges.[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[2] Max Unit
fosc oscillator frequency 1 - 25 MHz
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time 40 - 1000 ns
tCHCX clock HIGH time Tcy(clk) 0.4 - - ns
tCLCX clock LOW time Tcy(clk) 0.4 - - ns
tCLCH clock rise time - - 5 ns
tCHCL clock fall time - - 5 ns
Fig 23. External clock timing (with an amplitude of at least Vi(RMS) = 200 mV)
tCHCL tCLCX
tCHCX
Tcy(clk)
tCLCH
002aaa907
Table 20. Dynamic characteristic: internal oscillators
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; 2.7 V VDD(3V3) 3.6 V.[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[2] Max Unit
fosc(RC) internal RC oscillator
frequency
- 11.88 12 12.12 MHz
fi(RTC) RTC input frequency - - 32.768 - kHz
Table 21. Dynamic characteristic: I/O pins[1]
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; VDD(3V3) over specified ranges.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
tr rise time pin configured as
output
3.0 - 5.0 ns
tf fall time pin configured as
output
2.5 - 5.0 ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 102 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.6 SSP interface
[1] The minimum clock cycle time, and therefore the maximum frequency of the SSP in master mode, is limited
by the pin electronics to the value given. The SSP block should not be configured to generate a clock faster
than that. At and below the maximum frequency, Tcy(clk) = (SSPCLKDIV (1 + SCR) CPSDVSR) / fmain.
The clock cycle time derived from the SPI bit rate Tcy(clk) is a function of the main clock frequency fmain, the
SSP peripheral clock divider (SSPCLKDIV), the SSP SCR parameter (specified in the SSP0CR0 register),
and the SSP CPSDVSR parameter (specified in the SSP clock prescale register).
[2] Tamb = 40 C to 85 C; VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V.
[3] Tcy(clk) = 12 Tcy(PCLK). The maximum clock rate in slave mode is 1/12th of the PCLK rate.
[4] Tamb = 25 C; VDD(3V3) = 3.3 V.
Table 22. Dynamic characteristics: SSP pins in SPI mode
CL = 10 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
SSP master
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time full-duplex
mode
[1] 30 - ns
when only
transmitting
30 - ns
tDS data set-up time in SPI mode [2] 14.8 - ns
tDH data hold time in SPI mode [2] 2 - ns
tv(Q) data output valid time in SPI mode [2] - 6.3 ns
th(Q) data output hold time in SPI mode [2] 2.4 - ns
SSP slave
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time [3] 100 - ns
tDS data set-up time in SPI mode [3][4] 14.8 - ns
tDH data hold time in SPI mode [3][4] 2 - ns
tv(Q) data output valid time in SPI mode [3][4] - 6.3 ns
th(Q) data output hold time in SPI mode [3][4] 2.4 - ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 103 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 24. SSP master timing in SPI mode
Fig 25. SSP slave timing in SPI mode
SCK (CPOL = 0)
MOSI
MISO
Tcy(clk)
tDS tDH
tv(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
th(Q)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
MOSI
MISO
tDS tDH
DATA VALID DATA VALID
th(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
tv(Q)
CPHA = 1
CPHA = 0
002aae829
SCK (CPOL = 0)
MOSI
MISO
Tcy(clk)
tDS tDH
tv(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
th(Q)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
MOSI
MISO
tDS tDH
tv(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
th(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
CPHA = 1
CPHA = 0
002aae830
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 104 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.7 I2C-bus
[1] See the I2C-bus specification UM10204 for details.
[2] Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.
[3] tHD;DAT is the data hold time that is measured from the falling edge of SCL; applies to data in transmission
and the acknowledge.
[4] A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (with respect to the
VIH(min) of the SCL signal) to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
[5] Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF.
[6] The maximum tf for the SDA and SCL bus lines is specified at 300 ns. The maximum fall time for the SDA
output stage tf is specified at 250 ns. This allows series protection resistors to be connected in between the
SDA and the SCL pins and the SDA/SCL bus lines without exceeding the maximum specified tf.
[7] In Fast-mode Plus, fall time is specified the same for both output stage and bus timing. If series resistors
are used, designers should allow for this when considering bus timing.
[8] The maximum tHD;DAT could be 3.45 s and 0.9 s for Standard-mode and Fast-mode but must be less than
the maximum of tVD;DAT or tVD;ACK by a transition time (see UM10204). This maximum must only be met if
the device does not stretch the LOW period (tLOW) of the SCL signal. If the clock stretches the SCL, the
data must be valid by the set-up time before it releases the clock.
[9] tSU;DAT is the data set-up time that is measured with respect to the rising edge of SCL; applies to data in
transmission and the acknowledge.
[10] A Fast-mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system but the requirement tSU;DAT =
250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period
of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next
data bit to the SDA line tr(max) + tSU;DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode I2C-bus
specification) before the SCL line is released. Also the acknowledge timing must meet this set-up time.
Table 23. Dynamic characteristic: I2C-bus pins[1]
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C.[2]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
fSCL SCL clock
frequency
Standard-mode 0 100 kHz
Fast-mode 0 400 kHz
Fast-mode Plus 0 1 MHz
tf fall time [4][5][6][7] of both SDA and
SCL signals
Standard-mode
- 300 ns
Fast-mode 20 + 0.1 Cb 300 ns
Fast-mode Plus - 120 ns
tLOW LOW period of
the SCL clock
Standard-mode 4.7 - s
Fast-mode 1.3 - s
Fast-mode Plus 0.5 - s
tHIGH HIGH period of
the SCL clock
Standard-mode 4.0 - s
Fast-mode 0.6 - s
Fast-mode Plus 0.26 - s
tHD;DAT data hold time [3][4][8] Standard-mode 0 - s
Fast-mode 0 - s
Fast-mode Plus 0 - s
tSU;DAT data set-up
time
[9][10] Standard-mode 250 - ns
Fast-mode 100 - ns
Fast-mode Plus 50 - ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 105 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.8 I2S-bus interface
[1] CCLK = 100 MHz; peripheral clock to the I2S-bus interface PCLK = CCLK / 4. I2S clock cycle time Tcy(clk) =
1600 ns, corresponds to the SCK signal in the I2S-bus specification.
Fig 26. I2C-bus pins clock timing
002aaf425
tf
70 %
SDA 30 %
tf
70 %
30 %
S
70 %
30 %
70 %
30 %
tHD;DAT
SCL
1 / fSCL
70 %
30 %
70 %
30 %
tVD;DAT
tHIGH
tLOW
tSU;DAT
Table 24. Dynamic characteristics: I2S-bus interface pins
CL = 10 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
common to input and output
tr rise time [1] - 6.7 ns
tf fall time [1] - 8.0 ns
tWH pulse width HIGH on pins I2S_TX_SCK and
I2S_RX_SCK
[1] 25 - -
tWL pulse width LOW on pins I2S_TX_SCK and
I2S_RX_SCK
[1] - 25 ns
output
tv(Q) data output valid time on pin I2S_TX_SDA; [1] - 6 ns
input
tsu(D) data input set-up time on pin I2S_RX_SDA [1] 5 - ns
th(D) data input hold time on pin I2S_RX_SDA [1] 2 - ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 106 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.9 LCD
Remark: The LCD controller is available on parts LPC4088.
Fig 27. I2S-bus timing (transmit)
Fig 28. I2S-bus timing (receive)
002aag202
I2S_TX_SCK
I2S_TX_SDA
I2S_TX_WS
Tcy(clk) tf tr
tWH tWL
tv(Q)
tv(Q)
002aag203
Tcy(clk) tf tr
tWH
tsu(D) th(D)
tsu(D) tsu(D)
tWL
I2S_RX_SCK
I2S_RX_SDA
I2S_RX_WS
Table 25. Dynamic characteristics: LCD
CL = 10 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
fclk clock frequency on pin LCD_DCLK - 50 MHz
td(QV) data output valid delay time - 12 ns
th(Q) data output hold time 0.5 - ns
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 107 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.10 SD/MMC
Remark: The SD/MMC card interface is available on parts LPC4088/78/76.
The LCD panel clock is shown with the default polarity. The clock can be inverted via the IPC bit in
the LCD_POL register. Typically, the LCD panel uses the falling edge of the LCD_DCLK to sample
the data.
Fig 29. LCD timing
002aah325
LCD_DCLK
td(QV)
Tcy(clk)
th(Q)
LCD_VD[n]
Table 26. Dynamic characteristics: SD/MMC
CL = 10 pF, Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, VDD(3V3) = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
fclk clock frequency on pin SD_CLK; data transfer mode - 25 MHz
on pin SD_CLK; identification mode 25 MHz
tsu(D) data input set-up
time
on pins SD_CMD, SD_DAT[3:0] as
inputs
6 - ns
th(D) data input hold time on pins SD_CMD, SD_DAT[3:0] as
inputs
6 - ns
td(QV) data output valid
delay time
on pins SD_CMD, SD_DAT[3:0] as
outputs
- 23 ns
th(Q) data output hold
time
on pins SD_CMD, SD_DAT[3:0] as
outputs
3.5 - ns
Fig 30. SD/MMC timing
002aag204
SD_CLK
SD_DATn (O)
SD_DATn (I)
td(QV)
tsu(D) th(D)
Tcy(clk)
th(Q)
SD_CMD (O)
SD_CMD (I)
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 108 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
11.11 SPIFI
12. Characteristics of the analog peripherals
12.1 ADC electrical characteristics
Table 27. Dynamic characteristics: SPIFI
Tamb = 40 C to 85 C; 3.0 V VDD(3V3) 3.6 V; CL = 30 pF. Values guaranteed by design.
Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time 11.8 - ns
tDS data set-up time 4.8 - ns
tDH data hold time 0 - ns
tv(Q) data output valid time - 8.8 ns
th(Q) data output hold time 3 - ns
Fig 31. SPIFI timing
SPIFI_SCK
SPIFI data out
SPIFI data in
Tcy(clk)
tDS tDH
tv(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
th(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
002aah409
Table 28. 12-bit ADC characteristics
VDDA = 2.7 V to 3.6 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified.[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
VIA analog input voltage 0 - VDDA V
12-bit resolution; 400 kSamples/sec
ED differential linearity
error
[2][3][4] - - 1 LSB
EL(adj) integral non-linearity [2][5] - - 6 LSB
EO offset error [2][6] - - 5 LSB
EG gain error [2][7] - - 5 LSB
ET absolute error [2][8]- - <8 LSB
fclk(ADC) ADC clock frequency - - 12.4 MHz
fc(ADC) ADC conversion
frequency
[9]- - 400 kHz
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 109 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] VDDA and VREFP should be tied to VDD(3V3) if the ADC and DAC are not used.
[2] Conditions: VSSA = 0 V, VDDA = 3.3 V.
[3] The ADC is monotonic, there are no missing codes.
[4] The differential linearity error (ED) is the difference between the actual step width and the ideal step width.
See Figure 32.
[5] The integral non-linearity (EL(adj)) is the peak difference between the center of the steps of the actual and
the ideal transfer curve after appropriate adjustment of gain and offset errors. See Figure 32.
[6] The offset error (EO) is the absolute difference between the straight line which fits the actual curve and the
straight line which fits the ideal curve. See Figure 32.
[7] The gain error (EG) is the relative difference in percent between the straight line fitting the actual transfer
curve after removing offset error, and the straight line which fits the ideal transfer curve. See Figure 32.
[8] The absolute error (ET) is the maximum difference between the center of the steps of the actual transfer
curve of the non-calibrated ADC and the ideal transfer curve. See Figure 32.
[9] In single-conversion mode.
[10] See Figure 33.
[11] 8-bit resolution is achieved by ignoring the lower four bits of the ADC conversion result.
Cia analog input
capacitance
- - 5 pF
Rvsi voltage source
interface resistance
[10]- - 1 k
8-bit resolution[11]; 1.16 MSamples/sec
ED differential linearity
error
[2][3][4] - 1 - LSB
EL(adj) integral non-linearity [2][5] - 1 - LSB
EO offset error [2][6] - 1 - LSB
EG gain error [2][7] - 1 - LSB
ET absolute error [2][8]- - <1.5 LSB
fclk(ADC) ADC clock frequency - - 36 MHz
fc(ADC) ADC conversion
frequency
[9]- - 1.16 MHz
Cia analog input
capacitance
- - 5 pF
Rvsi voltage source
interface resistance
[10]- - 1 k
Table 28. 12-bit ADC characteristics …continued
VDDA = 2.7 V to 3.6 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified.[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 110 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve.
(2) The ideal transfer curve.
(3) Differential linearity error (ED).
(4) Integral non-linearity (EL(adj)).
(5) Center of a step of the actual transfer curve.
Fig 32. 12-bit ADC characteristics
002aaf436
4095
4094
4093
4092
4091
(2)
(1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4090
(5)
(4)
(3)
1 LSB
(ideal)
code
out
VREF P - VSS
4096
offset
error
EO
gain
error
EG
offset error
EO
VIA (LSBideal)
1 LSB =
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 111 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
12.2 DAC electrical characteristics
The values of resistor components Rcmp and Rsw vary with temperature and input voltage and are
process-dependent.
Fig 33. ADC interface to pins ADC0_IN[n]
Table 29. ADC interface components
Component Range Description
Rcmp 90 to 300 Switch-on resistance for the comparator input switch. Varies
with temperature, input voltage, and process.
Rsw 500 to 2 k Switch-on resistance for channel selection switch. Varies with
temperature, input voltage, and process.
C1 110 fF Parasitic capacitance from the ADC block level.
C2 80 fF Parasitic capacitance from the ADC block level.
C3 1.6 pF Sampling capacitor.
LPC408x/7x
AD0[n]
110 fF 80 fF Cia
1.6 pF
Rvsi
Rsw
500 Ω - 2 kΩ
Rcmp
90 Ω - 300 Ω
VSS VEXT
002aah275
ADC
COMPARATOR
BLOCK
C1
C3
C2
Table 30. 10-bit DAC electrical characteristics
VDDA = 2.7 V to 3.6 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
ED differential linearity
error
- 1 - LSB
EL(adj) integral non-linearity - 1.5 - LSB
EO offset error - 0.6 - %
EG gain error - 0.6 - %
CL load capacitance - - 200 pF
RL load resistance 1 - - k
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 112 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
12.3 Comparator electrical characteristics
[1] CL = 10 pF; results from measurements on silicon samples over process corners and over the full temperature range Tamb = -40 C to
+85 C.
[2] Input hysteresis is relative to the reference input channel and is software programmable.
Table 31. Comparator characteristics
VDDA= 3.0 V and Tamb = 25 C unless noted otherwise.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Static characteristics
IDD supply current - 55 - A
VIC common-mode input voltage 0 - VDDA V
DVO output voltage variation 0 - VDDA V
Voffset offset voltage VIC = 0.1 V - 4 to +4.2 - mV
VIC = 1.5 V - 2 - mV
VIC = 2.8 V - 2.5 mV
Dynamic characteristics
tstartup start-up time nominal process - 4 - s
tPD propagation delay HIGH to LOW; VDDA = 3.3 V;
VIC = 0.1 V; 50 mV overdrive input [1] 122 130 142 ns
VIC = 0.1 V; rail-to-rail input [1] 173 189 233 ns
VIC = 1.5 V; 50 mV overdrive input [1] 101 108 119 ns
VIC = 1.5 V; rail-to-rail input [1] 114 127 162 ns
VIC = 2.9 V; 50 mV overdrive input [1] 123 134 143 ns
VIC = 2.9 V; rail-to-rail input [1] 79 91 120 ns
tPD propagation delay LOW to HIGH; VDDA = 3.3 V;
VIC = 0.1 V; 50 mV overdrive input [1] 221 232 254 ns
VIC = 0.1 V; rail-to-rail input [1] 59 63 68 ns
VIC = 1.5 V; 50 mV overdrive input [1] 183 229 249 ns
VIC = 1.5 V; rail-to-rail input [1] 147 174 213 ns
VIC = 2.9 V; 50 mV overdrive input [1] 171 192 216 ns
VIC = 2.9 V; rail-to-rail input [1] 235 305 450 ns
Vhys hysteresis voltage positive hysteresis; VDDA = 3.0 V;
VIC = 1.5 V
[2] - 5, 10, 20 - mV
Vhys hysteresis voltage negative hysteresis; VDDA = 3.0 V;
VIC = 1.5 V
[2] - 5, 10, 20 - mV
Rlad ladder resistance - - 1.034 - M
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 113 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
[1] Maximum values are derived from worst case simulation (VDDA = 2.6 V; Tamb = 85 C; slow process
models).
[2] Settling time applies to switching between comparator and ADC channels.
[1] Measured on typical silicon samples with a 2 kHz input signal and overdrive < 100 V. Power switched off
to all analog peripherals except the comparator.
Table 32. Comparator voltage ladder dynamic characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
ts(pu) power-up settling
time
to 99% of voltage
ladder output
value
[1]- - 30 s
ts(sw) switching settling
time
to 99% of voltage
ladder output
value
[1]
[2]
- - 15 s
Table 33. Comparator voltage ladder reference static characteristics
VDDA = 3.3 V; Tamb = -40 C to + 85C.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max[1] Unit
EV(O) output voltage error Internal VDDA supply
decimal code = 00 0 0 0 %
decimal code = 08 0.45 0.5 0.55 %
decimal code = 16 0.99 1.1 1.21 %
decimal code = 24 1.26 1.4 1.54 %
decimal code = 30 1.35 1.5 1.65 %
decimal code = 31 1.35 1.5 1.65 %
EV(O) output voltage error External VDDCMP
supply
decimal code = 00 0 0 0 %
decimal code = 08 0.44 0.4 0.36 %
decimal code = 16 0.18 0.2 0.22 %
decimal code = 24 0.45 0.5 0.55 %
decimal code = 30 0.54 0.6 0.66 %
decimal code = 31 0.45 0.5 0.55 %
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 114 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
13. Application information
13.1 Suggested USB interface solutions
Remark: The USB controller is available as a device/Host/OTG controller on parts
LPC4088 and LPC4078/76 and as device-only controller on parts LPC4074/72.
Fig 34. USB interface on a self-powered device
LPC40xx
USB-B
connector
USB_D+
USB_CONNECT
SoftConnect switch
USB_DVBUS
VSS
VDD(3V3)
R1
1.5 kΩ
RS = 33 Ω
002aah267
RS = 33 Ω
USB_UP_LED
Fig 35. USB interface on a bus-powered device
LPC40xx
VDD(3V3)
R1
1.5 kΩ
R2
USB_UP_LED
002aah268
USB-B
connector
USB_D+
USB_DVBUS
VSS
RS = 33 Ω
RS = 33 Ω
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 115 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 36. USB OTG port configuration: port 1 OTG dual-role device, port 2 host
USB_UP_LED1
USB_D+1
USB_D-1
USB_PWRD2
USB_SDA1
USB_SCL1
RSTOUT
15 kΩ 15 kΩ
LPC408x/7x
USB-A
connector
Mini-AB
connector
33 Ω
33 Ω
33 Ω
33 Ω
VDD
VDD
VDD
USB_UP_LED2
VDD
USB_OVRCR2
LM3526-L
ENA
IN
5 V
OUTA
FLAGA
VDD
D+
DVBUS
USB_PPWR2
USB_D+2
USB_D-2
002aah269
R7
R4 R5 R6
R1 R2 R3 R4
R8
USB_INT1
RESET_N
ADR/PSW
SPEED
SUSPEND
OE_N/INT_N
SCL
SDA
INT_N
VBUS
ID
DP
DM
ISP1302
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 116 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 37. USB OTG port configuration: VP_VM mode
USB_TX_DP1
USB_TX_DM1
USB_RCV1
USB_RX_DP1
USB_RX_DM1
USB_SCL1
USB_SDA1
SPEED
ADR/PSW
SDA
SCL
RESET_N
INT_N
VP
VM
SUSPEND
OE_N/INT_N
SE0_VM
DAT_VP
RCV
VBUS
ID
DP
DM
LPC408x/7x
ISP1302
USB MINI-AB
connector
33 Ω
33 Ω
002aah270
USB_TX_E1
RSTOUT
VDD
VDD
USB_INT1
USB_UP_LED1
VDD
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 117 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 38. USB host port configuration: port 1 and port 2 as hosts
USB_UP_LED1
USB_D+1
USB_D-1
USB_PWRD1
USB_PWRD2
15 kΩ
15 kΩ 15 kΩ
15 kΩ
LPC408x/7x
USB-A
connector
USB-A
connector
33 Ω
33 Ω
33 Ω
33 Ω
002aah271
VDD
USB_UP_LED2
VDD
USB_OVRCR1
USB_OVRCR2
USB_PPWR1
LM3526-L
ENA
ENB
IN
5 V
FLAGA
OUTA
OUTB
FLAGB
VDD
VDD
D+
DD+
DVBUS
VBUS
USB_PPWR2
USB_D+2
USB_D-2
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 118 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
13.2 Crystal oscillator XTAL input and component selection
The input voltage to the on-chip oscillators is limited to 1.8 V. If the oscillator is driven by a
clock in slave mode, it is recommended that the input be coupled through a capacitor with
Ci = 100 pF. To limit the input voltage to the specified range, choose an additional
capacitor to ground Cg which attenuates the input voltage by a factor Ci/(Ci + Cg). In slave
mode, a minimum of 200 mV(RMS) is needed.
Fig 39. USB device port configuration: port 1 host and port 2 device
USB_UP_LED1
USB_D+1
USB_D-1
USB_PWRD1
15 kΩ 15 kΩ
LPC408x/7x
USB-A
connector
USB-B
connector
33 Ω
33 Ω
33 Ω
33 Ω
002aah272
VDD
USB_UP_LED2
USB_CONNECT2
VDD
VDD
USB_OVRCR1
USB_PPWR1
LM3526-L
ENA
IN
5 V
FLAGA
OUTA
VDD
D+
DD+
DVBUS
USB_D+2
USB_D-2
VBUS VBUS
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
VSSIO,
VSSCORE
Fig 40. Slave mode operation of the on-chip oscillator
LPC40xx
XTAL1
Ci
100 pF
Cg
002aah273
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 119 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
In slave mode the input clock signal should be coupled by means of a capacitor of 100 pF
(Figure 40), with an amplitude between 200 mV(RMS) and 1000 mV(RMS). This
corresponds to a square wave signal with a signal swing of between 280 mV and 1.4 V.
The XTALOUT pin in this configuration can be left unconnected.
External components and models used in oscillation mode are shown in Figure 41 and in
Table 34 and Table 35. Since the feedback resistance is integrated on chip, only a crystal
and the capacitances CX1 and CX2 need to be connected externally in case of
fundamental mode oscillation (the fundamental frequency is represented by L, CL and
RS). Capacitance CP in Figure 41 represents the parallel package capacitance and should
not be larger than 7 pF. Parameters FOSC, CL, RS and CP are supplied by the crystal
manufacturer.
Fig 41. Oscillator modes and models: oscillation mode of operation and external crystal
model used for CX1/CX2 evaluation
Table 34. Recommended values for CX1/CX2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external
components parameters): low frequency mode
Fundamental oscillation
frequency FOSC
Crystal load
capacitance CL
Maximum crystal
series resistance RS
External load
capacitors CX1/CX2
1 MHz to 5 MHz 10 pF < 300 18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF < 300 39 pF, 39 pF
30 pF < 300 57 pF, 57 pF
5 MHz to 10 MHz 10 pF < 300 18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF < 200 39 pF, 39 pF
30 pF < 100 57 pF, 57 pF
10 MHz to 15 MHz 10 pF < 160 18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF < 60 39 pF, 39 pF
15 MHz to 20 MHz 10 pF < 80 18 pF, 18 pF
002aah274
LPC40xx
XTALIN XTALOUT
CX1 CX2
XTAL
= CL CP
RS
L
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 120 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
13.3 XTAL Printed-Circuit Board (PCB) layout guidelines
The crystal should be connected on the PCB as close as possible to the oscillator input
and output pins of the chip. Take care that the load capacitors Cx1, Cx2, and Cx3 in case of
third overtone crystal usage have a common ground plane. The external components
must also be connected to the ground plane. Loops must be made as small as possible in
order to keep the noise coupled in via the PCB as small as possible. Also parasitics
should stay as small as possible. Smaller values of Cx1 and Cx2 should be chosen
according to the increase in parasitics of the PCB layout.
13.4 Standard I/O pin configuration
Figure 42 shows the possible pin modes for standard I/O pins with analog input function:
• Digital output driver: Open-drain mode enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Pull-up enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Pull-down enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Repeater mode enabled/disabled
• Analog input
The default configuration for standard I/O pins is input with pull-up enabled. The weak
MOS devices provide a drive capability equivalent to pull-up and pull-down resistors.
Table 35. Recommended values for CX1/CX2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external
components parameters): high frequency mode
Fundamental oscillation
frequency FOSC
Crystal load
capacitance CL
Maximum crystal
series resistance RS
External load
capacitors CX1, CX2
15 MHz to 20 MHz 10 pF < 180 18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF < 100 39 pF, 39 pF
20 MHz to 25 MHz 10 pF < 160 18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF < 80 39 pF, 39 pF
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 121 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
13.5 Reset pin configuration
13.6 Reset pin configuration for RTC operation
Under certain circumstances, the RTC may temporarily pause and lose fractions of a
second during the rising and falling edges of the RESET signal.
Fig 42. Standard I/O pin configuration with analog input
PIN
VDD VDD
ESD
VSS
ESD
strong
pull-up
strong
pull-down
VDD
weak
pull-up
weak
pull-down
open-drain enable
output enable
repeater mode
enable
pull-up enable
pull-down enable
data output
data input
analog input
select analog input
002aaf272
pin configured
as digital output
driver
pin configured
as digital input
pin configured
as analog input
Fig 43. Reset pin configuration
VSS
reset
002aaf274
VDD
VDD
VDD
Rpu ESD
ESD
20 ns RC
GLITCH FILTER
PIN
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 122 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
To eliminate the loss of time counts in the RTC due to voltage swing or ramp rate of the
RESET signal, connect an RC filter between the RESET pin and the external reset input.
Fig 44. Reset input with RC filter
002aag552
External
RESET input
10 kΩ
0.1 μF
RESET pin
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 123 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
14. Package outline
Fig 45. Package outline SOT459-1 (LQFP208)
UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c E(1) e HE L Lp v w y Z θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 0.15
0.05
1.45
1.35
0.25
0.27
0.17
0.20
0.09
28.1
27.9 0.5
30.15
29.85
1.43
1.08
7
0
o
1 0.12 0.08 0.08 o
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included.
0.75
0.45
SOT459-1 136E30 MS-026 00-02-06
03-02-20
D(1)
28.1
27.9
HD
30.15
29.85
Z E
1.43
1.08
D
pin 1 index
e bp
θ
E
A A1
Lp
detail X
L
(A 3 )
B
52
c
HD
bp
HE
A2
v M B
D
ZD
A
ZE
e
v M A
X
1
208
157
156
105
104
53
y
w M
w M
0 5 10 mm
scale
LQFP208; plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 x 28 x 1.4 mm SOT459-1
A
max.
1.6
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 124 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 46. Package outline SOT950-1 (TFBGA208)
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION
ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT950-1 - - -
SOT950-1
06-06-01
06-06-14
UNIT A
max
mm 1.2 0.4
0.3
0.8
0.6
15.1
14.9
15.1
14.9 0.8 12.8 0.15 0.08 0.1
A1
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
TFBGA208: plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 208 balls; body 15 x 15 x 0.7 mm
0 5 10 mm
scale
A2 b
0.5
0.4
D E e e1 e2
12.8
v w y
0.12
y1
C
y1 C y
X
b
ball A1
index area
e2
e1
e
e
∅ v M C A B
∅ w M C
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
K
G
L
J
M
N
P
R
U
T
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
ball A1
index area
D B A
E
detail X
A
A2
A1
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 125 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 47. Package outline SOT570-3 (TFBGA180)
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION
ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT570-3
SOT570-3
08-07-09
10-04-15
UNIT
mm
max
nom
min
1.20
1.06
0.95
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.50
0.45
0.40
12.1
12.0
11.9
12.1
12.0
11.9
0.8 10.4 0.15 0.12
A
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
TFBGA180: thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls
0 5 10 mm
scale
A1 A2
0.80
0.71
0.65
b D E e e1
10.4
e2 v w
0.05
y y1
0.1
ball A1
index area
D B A
E
C
y1 C y
X
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
K
G
L
J
M
N
P
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
b
e2
e1
e
e
1/2 e
1/2 e
∅ v M C A B
∅ w M C
ball A1
index area
detail X
A
A2
A1
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 126 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 48. Package outline SOT486-1 (LQFP144)
UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c E(1) e HE L Lp v w y Z θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 0.15
0.05
1.45
1.35
0.25
0.27
0.17
0.20
0.09
20.1
19.9 0.5
22.15
21.85
1.4
1.1
7
0
o
1 0.2 0.08 0.08 o
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included.
0.75
0.45
SOT486-1 136E23 MS-026
00-03-14
03-02-20
D(1) (1) (1)
20.1
19.9
HD
22.15
21.85
Z E
1.4
1.1
D
0 5 10 mm
scale
e bp
θ
E
A1
A
Lp
detail X
L
(A 3 )
B
c
bp
HE A2
HD v M B
D
ZD
A
ZE
e
v M A
X
y
w M
w M
A
max.
1.6
LQFP144: plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 x 20 x 1.4 mm SOT486-1
108
109
pin 1 index
73
72
37
1
144
36
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 127 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 49. Package outline SOT407-1 (LQFP100)
UNIT
A
max. A1 A2 A3 bp c E(1) e HE L Lp v w y Z θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 1.6 0.15
0.05
1.45
1.35
0.25
0.27
0.17
0.20
0.09
14.1
13.9
0.5
16.25
15.75
1.15
0.85
7
0
o
1 0.2 0.08 0.08 o
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included.
0.75
0.45
SOT407-1 136E20 MS-026
00-02-01
03-02-20
D(1) (1) (1)
14.1
13.9
HD
16.25
15.75
Z E
1.15
0.85
D
bp
e
θ
E
A1
A
Lp
detail X
L
(A 3 )
B
25
c
HD
bp
HE A2
v M B
D
ZD
A
ZE
e
v M A
X
1
100
76
75 51
50
26
y
pin 1 index
w M
w M
0 5 10 mm
scale
LQFP100: plastic low profile quad flat package; 100 leads; body 14 x 14 x 1.4 mm SOT407-1
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 128 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 50. Package outline SOT315-1 (LQFP80)
UNIT
A
max. A1 A2 A3 bp c E(1) e HE L Lp v w y Z θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 1.6 0.16
0.04
1.5
1.3
0.25
0.27
0.13
0.18
0.12
12.1
11.9
0.5
14.15
13.85
1.45
1.05
7
0
o
1 0.2 0.15 0.1 o
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included.
0.75
0.30
SOT315-1 136E15 MS-026
00-01-19
03-02-25
D(1) (1) (1)
12.1
11.9
HD
14.15
13.85
Z E
1.45
1.05
D
bp
e
θ
E
A1
A
Lp
detail X
L
(A 3 )
B
20
c
HD
bp
HE A2
v M B
D
ZD
A
ZE
e
v M A
X
1
80
61
60 41
40
21
y
pin 1 index
w M
w M
0 5 10 mm
scale
LQFP80: plastic low profile quad flat package; 80 leads; body 12 x 12 x 1.4 mm SOT315-1
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 129 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 51. Package outline SOT1328-1 (TFBGA80)
Outline References
version
European
projection Issue date
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT1328-1
sot1328-1_po
12-05-07
12-06-14
Unit
mm
max
nom
min
1.15
1.00
0.90
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.45
0.40
0.35
7.1
7.0
6.9
7.1
7.0
6.9
0.65 5.85 0.15 0.08
A
Dimensions (mm are the original dimensions)
TFBGA80: plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 80 balls SOT1328-1
A1 A2
0.80
0.70
0.65
b D E e e1
5.85
e2 v w
0.05
y y1
0.1
0 5 mm
scale
ball A1
index area
ball A1
index area
D B A
E
detail X
A
A1
A2
C
y1 C y
X
e2
e
1/2 e
b
e1
e
1/2 e
Ø v C A B
Ø w C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 130 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
15. Soldering
Fig 52. Reflow soldering of the LQFP208 package
SOT459-1
DIMENSIONS in mm
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of LQFP208 package
Ax
Bx
Gx
Hy Gy
Hx
By Ay
P2 P1
D2 (8×) D1
(0.125)
P1 P2 Ax Ay Bx By C D1 D2 Gx Gy Hx Hy
sot459-1_fr
solder land
C
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
0.500 0.560 31.300 31.300 28.300 28.300 1.500 0.280 0.400 28.500 28.500 31.550 31.550
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 131 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 53. Reflow soldering of the TFBGA180 package
DIMENSIONS in mm
P SL SP SR Hx Hy
Hx
Hy
SOT570-3
solder land plus solder paste
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of TFBGA180 package
solder land
solder paste deposit
solder resist
P
P
SL
SP
SR
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
detail X
see detail X
sot570-3_fr
0.80 0.400 0.400 0.550 12.575 12.575
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 132 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 54. Reflow soldering of the LQFP144 package
SOT486-1
DIMENSIONS in mm
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of LQFP144 package
Ax
Bx
Gx
Hy Gy
Hx
By Ay
P2 P1
D2 (8×) D1
(0.125)
P1 P2 Ax Ay Bx By C D1 D2 Gx Gy Hx Hy
sot486-1_fr
solder land
C
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
0.500 0.560 23.300 23.300 20.300 20.300 1.500 0.280 0.400 20.500 20.500 23.550 23.550
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 133 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 55. Reflow soldering of the LQFP100 package
SOT407-1
DIMENSIONS in mm
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of LQFP100 package
Ax
Bx
Gx
Hy Gy
Hx
By Ay
P2 P1
D2 (8×) D1
(0.125)
P1 P2 Ax Ay Bx By C D1 D2 Gx Gy Hx Hy
sot407-1
solder land
C
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
0.500 0.560 17.300 17.300 14.300 14.300 1.500 0.280 0.400 14.500 14.500 17.550 17.550
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 134 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Fig 56. Reflow soldering of the LQFP80 package
SOT315-1
DIMENSIONS in mm
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of LQFP80 package
Ax
Bx
Gx
Hy Gy
Hx
By Ay
P2 P1
D2 (8×) D1
(0.125)
Ax Ay Bx By D1 D2 Gx Gy Hx Hy
15.300 15.300 12.300 12.300
P1
0.500
P2
0.560 0.280
C
1.500 0.400 12.500 12.500 15.550 15.550
sot315-1_fr
solder land
C
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 135 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
16. Abbreviations
Table 36. Abbreviations
Acronym Description
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter
AHB Advanced High-performance Bus
AMBA Advanced Microcontroller Bus Architecture
APB Advanced Peripheral Bus
BOD BrownOut Detection
CAN Controller Area Network
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DMA Direct Memory Access
EOP End Of Packet
ETM Embedded Trace Macrocell
GPIO General Purpose Input/Output
GPS Global Positioning System
HVAC Heating, Venting, and Air Conditioning
IRC Internal RC
IrDA Infrared Data Association
JTAG Joint Test Action Group
MAC Media Access Control
MIIM Media Independent Interface Management
OHCI Open Host Controller Interface
OTG On-The-Go
PHY Physical Layer
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PWM Pulse Width Modulator
RMII Reduced Media Independent Interface
SE0 Single Ended Zero
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SSI Serial Synchronous Interface
SSP Synchronous Serial Port
TCM Tightly Coupled Memory
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
USB Universal Serial Bus
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 136 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
17. Revision history
Table 37. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
LPC408X_7X v.3 20140501 Product data sheet - LPC408X_7X v.2
• Added TFBGA80 to features list.
• Added Section 11.11 “SPIFI”.
• Table 3:
– Added function SSP2_SCK to pin P5[2].
– Added function SSP2_SSEL to pin P5[3].
– Updated pin description of STCLK.
– 5 ns glitch filter changed to 10 ns for EINTx pins.
– LQFP80 pin 12 changed from P2[30] to DNC.
• Table 11: Added Table note 3 “VDDA and VREFP should be tied to VDD(3V3) if the ADC and
DAC are not used.”.
• Table 28: Added Table note 1 “VDDA and VREFP should be tied to VDD(3V3) if the ADC and
DAC are not used.”.
• Section 7.37.2 “Brownout detection”: Updated BOD interrupt and reset values.
• Table 15: Added typical specs.
• Table 16:
– Added typical specs
– Removed “All programmable delays EMCDLYCTL are bypassed” from table title.
• Table 17:
– Added typical specs
– Removed “All programmable delays EMCDLYCTL are bypassed” from table title.
• Table note 9 added in Table 28 “12-bit ADC characteristics”.
LPC408X_7X v.2 20130703 Product data sheet - LPC408X_7X v.1.1
• Added LQFP100 and TFBGA80.
• Table 3:
– Removed overbar from NMI.
– Added minimum reset pulse width of 50 ns to RESET pin.
– Updated Table note 14 for RTCX pins (32 kHz crystal must be used to operate RTC).
– Added boundary scan information to description for RESET pin.
• Table 11:
– Updated typ numbers for IDD(REG)(3V3) and IBAT.
– Added max values for deep sleep, power down, and deep PD for IBAT.
• Table 15, Table note 3: Changed Tcy(clk) = 1/CCLK to Tcy(clk) = 1/EMC_CLK.
• Table 21: Removed reference to RESET pin from Table note 1.
• Table 22:
– Removed Tcy(PCLK) spec; already given by the maximum chip frequency.
– Changed min clock cyle time for SSP slave from 120 to 100.
– Updated Table note 1 and Table note 3.
• Section 7.24.1 “Features”: Changed max speed for SSP master from 60 to 33.
• Updated EMC timing specs to CL = 30 pF in Table 15, Table 16, Table 17, and Table 18.
• SOT570-2 obsolete; replaced with SOT570-3.
LPC408X_7X v.1.1 20121114 Product data sheet - LPC408X_7X v.1
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 137 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Modifications: • Changed data sheet status to Product.
LPC408X_7X v.1 20120917 Objective data sheet - -
Table 37. Revision history …continued
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 138 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
18. Legal information
18.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
18.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
18.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 139 of 141
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
18.4 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
I2C-bus — logo is a trademark of NXP Semiconductors N.V.
19. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
LPC408X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 3 — 1 May 2014 140 of 141
continued >>
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
20. Contents
1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.1 Architectural overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.2 ARM Cortex-M4 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3 ARM Cortex-M4 Floating Point Unit (FPU). . . 52
7.4 On-chip flash program memory . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.5 EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.6 On-chip SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.7 Memory Protection Unit (MPU). . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.8 Memory map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.9 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) . 56
7.9.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.9.2 Interrupt sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.10 Pin connect block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.11 External Memory Controller (EMC). . . . . . . . . 56
7.11.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.12 General purpose DMA controller . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.12.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.13 CRC engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.13.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.14 LCD controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.14.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.15 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.15.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.16 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.16.1 USB device controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.16.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.16.2 USB host controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.16.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.16.3 USB OTG controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.16.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.17 SD/MMC card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.17.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.18 Fast general purpose parallel I/O . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.18.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.19 12-bit ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.19.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.20 10-bit DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.20.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.21 Comparator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.21.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.22 UART0/1/2/3 and USART4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.22.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.23 SPIFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.23.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.24 SSP serial I/O controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.24.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.25 I2C-bus serial I/O controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.25.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.26 I2S-bus serial I/O controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.26.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.27 CAN controller and acceptance filters . . . . . . 67
7.27.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.28 General purpose 32-bit timers/external event
counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.28.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.29 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.29.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.30 Motor control PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.31 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) . . . . . . . 70
7.31.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.32 ARM Cortex-M4 system tick timer . . . . . . . . . 71
7.33 Windowed WatchDog Timer (WWDT) . . . . . . 71
7.33.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.34 RTC and backup registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.34.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.35 Event monitor/recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.35.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.36 Clocking and power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.36.1 Crystal oscillators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.36.1.1 Internal RC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.36.1.2 Main oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.36.1.3 RTC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.36.1.4 Watchdog oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.36.2 Main PLL (PLL0) and Alternate PLL (PLL1) . 74
7.36.3 Wake-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.36.4 Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.36.4.1 Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.36.4.2 Deep-sleep mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.36.4.3 Power-down mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.36.4.4 Deep power-down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.36.4.5 Wake-up Interrupt Controller (WIC) . . . . . . . . 77
7.36.5 Peripheral power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.36.6 Power domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.37 System control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.37.1 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.37.2 Brownout detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.37.3 Code security (Code Read Protection - CRP) 80
NXP Semiconductors LPC408x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller
© NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 1 May 2014
Document identifier: LPC408X_7X
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
7.37.4 APB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.37.5 AHB multilayer matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.37.6 External interrupt inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.37.7 Memory mapping control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.38 Debug control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
9 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10 Static characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
10.1 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
10.2 Peripheral power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.3 Electrical pin characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
11 Dynamic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11.1 Flash memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11.2 External memory interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
11.3 External clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
11.4 Internal oscillators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
11.5 I/O pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
11.6 SSP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
11.7 I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
11.8 I2S-bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
11.9 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
11.10 SD/MMC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11.11 SPIFI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
12 Characteristics of the analog peripherals . . 108
12.1 ADC electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
12.2 DAC electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 111
12.3 Comparator electrical characteristics . . . . . . 112
13 Application information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.1 Suggested USB interface solutions . . . . . . . 114
13.2 Crystal oscillator XTAL input and component
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13.3 XTAL Printed-Circuit Board (PCB) layout
guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.4 Standard I/O pin configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.5 Reset pin configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.6 Reset pin configuration for RTC operation . . 121
14 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
15 Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
16 Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
17 Revision history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
18 Legal information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
18.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
18.2 Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
18.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
18.4 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
19 Contact information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
20 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
1. Introduction
This document describes the functionality and electrical specifications of the
transceiver IC PN512.
The PN512 is a highly integrated transceiver IC for contactless communication at
13.56 MHz. This transceiver IC utilizes an outstanding modulation and demodulation
concept completely integrated for different kinds of contactless communication methods
and protocols at 13.56 MHz.
1.1 Different available versions
The PN512 is available in three versions:
• PN5120A0HN1/C2 (HVQFN32), PN5120A0HN/C2 (HVQFN40) and PN5120A0ET/C2
(TFBGA64), hereafter named as version 2.0
• PN512AA0HN1/C2 (HVQFN32) and PN512AA0HN1/C2BI (HVQFN32 with Burn In),
hereafter named as industrial version, fulfilling the automotive qualification stated in
AEC-Q100 grade 3 from the Automotive Electronics Council, defining the critical
stress test qualification for automotive integrated circuits (ICs).
• PN5120A0HN1/C1(HVQFN32) and PN5120A0HN/C1 (HVQFN40), hereafter named
as version 1.0
The data sheet describes the functionality for the industrial version and version 2.0. The
differences of the version 1.0 to the version 2.0 are summarized in Section 21. The
industrial version has only differences within the outlined characteristics and limitations.
2. General description
The PN512 transceiver ICs support 4 different operating modes
• Reader/Writer mode supporting ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE and FeliCa scheme
• Reader/Writer mode supporting ISO/IEC 14443B
• Card Operation mode supporting ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE and FeliCa scheme
• NFCIP-1 mode
Enabled in Reader/Writer mode for ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE, the PN512’s internal
transmitter part is able to drive a reader/writer antenna designed to communicate with
ISO/IEC 14443A/ MIFARE cards and transponders without additional active circuitry. The
receiver part provides a robust and efficient implementation of a demodulation and
PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 2 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
decoding circuitry for signals from ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE compatible cards and
transponders. The digital part handles the complete ISO/IEC 14443A framing and error
detection (Parity & CRC).
The PN512 supports MIFARE 1K or MIFARE 4K emulation products. The PN512 supports
contactless communication using MIFARE higher transfer speeds up to 424 kbit/s in both
directions.
Enabled in Reader/Writer mode for FeliCa, the PN512 transceiver IC supports the FeliCa
communication scheme. The receiver part provides a robust and efficient implementation
of the demodulation and decoding circuitry for FeliCa coded signals. The digital part
handles the FeliCa framing and error detection like CRC. The PN512 supports contactless
communication using FeliCa Higher transfer speeds up to 424 kbit/s in both directions.
The PN512 supports all layers of the ISO/IEC 14443B reader/writer communication
scheme, given correct implementation of additional components, like oscillator, power
supply, coil etc. and provided that standardized protocols, e.g. like ISO/IEC 14443-4
and/or ISO/IEC 14443B anticollision are correctly implemented.
In Card Operation mode, the PN512 transceiver IC is able to answer to a reader/writer
command either according to the FeliCa or ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE card interface
scheme. The PN512 generates the digital load modulated signals and in addition with an
external circuit the answer can be sent back to the reader/writer. A complete card
functionality is only possible in combination with a secure IC using the S2C interface.
Additionally, the PN512 transceiver IC offers the possibility to communicate directly to an
NFCIP-1 device in the NFCIP-1 mode. The NFCIP-1 mode offers different communication
mode and transfer speeds up to 424 kbit/s according to the Ecma 340 and ISO/IEC 18092
NFCIP-1 Standard. The digital part handles the complete NFCIP-1 framing and error
detection.
Various host controller interfaces are implemented:
• 8-bit parallel interface1
• SPI interface
• serial UART (similar to RS232 with voltage levels according pad voltage supply)
• I2C interface.
A purchaser of this NXP IC has to take care for appropriate third party patent licenses.
1. 8-bit parallel Interface only available in HVQFN40 package.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 3 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
3. Features and benefits
Highly integrated analog circuitry to demodulate and decode responses
Buffered output drivers for connecting an antenna with the minimum number of
external components
Integrated RF Level detector
Integrated data mode detector
Supports ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE
Supports ISO/IEC 14443 B Read/Write modes
Typical operating distance in Read/Write mode up to 50 mm depending on the
antenna size and tuning
Typical operating distance in NFCIP-1 mode up to 50 mm depending on the antenna
size and tuning and power supply
Typical operating distance in ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE card or FeliCa Card Operation
mode of about 100 mm depending on the antenna size and tuning and the external
field strength
Supports MIFARE 1K or MIFARE 4K emulation encryption in Reader/Writer mode
ISO/IEC 14443A higher transfer speed communication at 212 kbit/s and 424 kbit/s
Contactless communication according to the FeliCa scheme at 212 kbit/s and
424 kbit/s
Integrated RF interface for NFCIP-1 up to 424 kbit/s
S2C interface
Additional power supply to directly supply the smart card IC connected via S2C
Supported host interfaces
SPI up to 10 Mbit/s
I2C-bus interface up to 400 kBd in Fast mode, up to 3400 kBd in High-speed mode
RS232 Serial UART up to 1228.8 kBd, with voltage levels dependant on pin
voltage supply
8-bit parallel interface with and without Address Latch Enable
FIFO buffer handles 64 byte send and receive
Flexible interrupt modes
Hard reset with low power function
Power-down mode per software
Programmable timer
Internal oscillator for connection to 27.12 MHz quartz crystal
2.5 V to 3.6 V power supply
CRC coprocessor
Programmable I/O pins
Internal self-test
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 4 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
4. Quick reference data
[1] Supply voltages below 3 V reduce the performance in, for example, the achievable operating distance.
[2] VDDA, VDDD and VDD(TVDD) must always be the same voltage.
[3] VDD(PVDD) must always be the same or lower voltage than VDDD.
[4] Ipd is the total current for all supplies.
[5] IDD(PVDD) depends on the overall load at the digital pins.
[6] IDD(TVDD) depends on VDD(TVDD) and the external circuit connected to pins TX1 and TX2.
[7] During typical circuit operation, the overall current is below 100 mA.
[8] Typical value using a complementary driver configuration and an antenna matched to 40 between pins TX1 and TX2 at 13.56 MHz.
Table 1. Quick reference data
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
VDDA analog supply voltage VDD(PVDD) VDDA = VDDD = VDD(TVDD);
VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V
[1][2] 2.5 - 3.6 V
VDDD digital supply voltage
VDD(TVDD) TVDD supply voltage
VDD(PVDD) PVDD supply voltage [3] 1.6 - 3.6 V
VDD(SVDD) SVDD supply voltage VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V 1.6 - 3.6 V
Ipd power-down current VDDA= VDDD = VDD(TVDD) = VDD(PVDD) = 3 V
hard power-down; pin NRSTPD set LOW [4]- - 5 A
soft power-down; RF level detector on [4]- - 10 A
IDDD digital supply current pin DVDD; VDDD= 3 V - 6.5 9 mA
IDDA analog supply current pin AVDD; VDDA = 3 V, CommandReg register’s
RcvOff bit = 0
- 7 10 mA
pin AVDD; receiver switched off; VDDA = 3 V,
CommandReg register’s RcvOff bit = 1
- 3 5 mA
IDD(PVDD) PVDD supply current pin PVDD [5]- - 40 mA
IDD(TVDD) TVDD supply current pin TVDD; continuous wave [6][7][8]- 60 100 mA
Tamb ambient temperature HVQFN32, HVQFN40, TFBGA64 30 +85 C
lndustrial version:
Ipd power-down current VDDA= VDDD = VDD(TVDD) = VDD(PVDD) = 3 V
hard power-down; pin NRSTPD set LOW [4]- - 15 A
soft power-down; RF level detector on [4]- - 30 A
Tamb ambient temperature HVQFN32 40 - +90 C
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 5 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
5. Ordering information
Table 2. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
PN5120A0HN1/C2 HVQFN32 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
32 terminal; body 5 5 0.85 mm
SOT617-1
PN5120A0HN/C2 HVQFN40 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
40 terminals; body 6 6 0.85 mm
SOT618-1
PN512AA0HN1/C2 HVQFN32 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
32 terminal; body 5 5 0.85 mm
SOT617-1
PN512AA0HN1/C2BI HVQFN32 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
32 terminal; body 5 5 0.85 mm
SOT617-1
PN5120A0HN1/C1 HVQFN32 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
32 terminal; body 5 5 0.85 mm
SOT617-1
PN5120A0HN/C1 HVQFN40 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
40 terminals; body 6 6 0.85 mm
SOT618-1
PN5120A0ET/C2 TFBGA64 plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 64 balls SOT1336-1
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 6 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
6. Block diagram
The analog interface handles the modulation and demodulation of the analog signals
according to the Card Receiving mode, Reader/Writer mode and NFCIP-1 mode
communication scheme.
The RF level detector detects the presence of an external RF-field delivered by the
antenna to the RX pin.
The Data mode detector detects a MIFARE, FeliCa or NFCIP-1 mode in order to prepare
the internal receiver to demodulate signals, which are sent to the PN512.
The communication (S2C) interface provides digital signals to support communication for
transfer speeds above 424 kbit/s and digital signals to communicate to a secure IC.
The contactless UART manages the protocol requirements for the communication
protocols in cooperation with the host. The FIFO buffer ensures fast and convenient data
transfer to and from the host and the contactless UART and vice versa.
Various host interfaces are implemented to meet different customer requirements.
Fig 1. Simplified block diagram of the PN512
001aaj627
HOST
ANTENNA FIFO
BUFFER
ANALOG
INTERFACE
CONTACTLESS
UART SERIAL UART
SPI
I2C-BUS
REGISTER BANK
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 7 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Fig 2. Detailed block diagram of the PN512
001aak602
DVDD
NRSTPD
IRQ
MFIN
MFOUT
SVDD
OSCIN
OSCOUT
VMID AUX1 AUX2 RX TVSS TX1 TX2 TVDD
16 19 20 17 10, 14 11 13 12
DVSS
AVDD
SDA/NSS/RX EA I2C PVDD PVSS
24 32 1 2 5
D1/ADR_5
25
D2/ADR_4
26
D3/ADR_3
27
D4/ADR_2
28
D5/ADR_1/
SCK/DTRQ
29
D6/ADR_0/
MOSI/MX
30
D7/SCL/
MISO/TX
31
AVSS
3
6
23
7
8
9
21
22
4
15
18
FIFO CONTROL
MIFARE CLASSIC UNIT
STATE MACHINE
COMMAND REGISTER
PROGRAMABLE TIMER
INTERRUPT CONTROL
CRC16
GENERATION AND CHECK
PARALLEL/SERIAL
CONVERTER
SERIAL DATA SWITCH
TRANSMITTER CONTROL
BIT COUNTER
PARITY GENERATION AND CHECK
FRAME GENERATION AND CHECK
BIT DECODING BIT ENCODING
RANDOM NUMBER
GENERATOR
ANALOG TO DIGITAL
CONVERTER
I-CHANNEL
AMPLIFIER
ANALOG TEST
MULTIPLEXOR
AND
DIGITAL TO
ANALOG
CONVERTER
I-CHANNEL
DEMODULATOR
Q-CHANNEL
AMPLIFIER
CLOCK
GENERATION,
FILTERING AND
DISTRIBUTION
Q-CLOCK
GENERATION
OSCILLATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Q-CHANNEL
DEMODULATOR
AMPLITUDE
RATING
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
64-BYTE FIFO
BUFFER
CONTROL REGISTER
BANK
SPI, UART, I2C-BUS INTERFACE CONTROL
VOLTAGE
MONITOR
AND
POWER ON
DETECT
RESET
CONTROL
POWER-DOWN
CONTROL
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 8 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
7. Pinning information
7.1 Pinning
Fig 3. Pinning configuration HVQFN32 (SOT617-1)
Fig 4. Pinning configuration HVQFN40 (SOT618-1)
001aan212
PN512
Transparent top view
RX
SIGIN
SIGOUT
AVSS
NRSTPD AUX1
PVSS AUX2
DVSS OSCIN
DVDD OSCOUT
PVDD IRQ
A1 ALE
SVDD
TVSS
TX1
TVDD
TX2
TVSS
AVDD
VMID
A0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
8 17
7 18
6 19
5 20
4 21
3 22
2 23
1 24
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
terminal 1
index area
001aan213
PN512
AVSS
NRSTPD
SIGIN
AUX1
PVSS AUX2
DVSS OSCIN
DVDD OSCOUT
PVDD IRQ
A5 NWR
A4 NRD
A3 ALE
A2 NCS
SIGOUT
SVDD
TVSS
TX1
TVDD
TX2
TVSS
AVDD
VMID
RX
A1
A0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
10 21
9 22
8 23
7 24
6 25
5 26
4 27
3 28
2 29
1 30
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
terminal 1
index area
Transparent top view
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 9 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Fig 5. Pin configuration TFBGA64 (SOT1336-1)
aaa-005873
TFBGA64
Transparent top view
ball A1
index area
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 10 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
7.2 Pin description
Table 3. Pin description HVQFN32
Pin Symbol Type Description
1 A1 I Address Line
2 PVDD PWR Pad power supply
3 DVDD PWR Digital Power Supply
4 DVSS PWR Digital Ground
5 PVSS PWR Pad power supply ground
6 NRSTPD I Not Reset and Power Down: When LOW, internal current sinks are switched off, the
oscillator is inhibited, and the input pads are disconnected from the outside world. With
a positive edge on this pin the internal reset phase starts.
7 SIGIN I Communication Interface Input: accepts a digital, serial data stream
8 SIGOUT O Communication Interface Output: delivers a serial data stream
9 SVDD PWR S2C Pad Power Supply: provides power to the S2C pads
10 TVSS PWR Transmitter Ground: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
11 TX1 O Transmitter 1: delivers the modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier
12 TVDD PWR Transmitter Power Supply: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
13 TX2 O Transmitter 2: delivers the modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier
14 TVSS PWR Transmitter Ground: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
15 AVDD PWR Analog Power Supply
16 VMID PWR Internal Reference Voltage: This pin delivers the internal reference voltage.
17 RX I Receiver Input
18 AVSS PWR Analog Ground
19 AUX1 O Auxiliary Outputs: These pins are used for testing.
20 AUX2 O
21 OSCIN I Crystal Oscillator Input: input to the inverting amplifier of the oscillator. This pin is
also the input for an externally generated clock (fosc = 27.12 MHz).
22 OSCOUT O Crystal Oscillator Output: Output of the inverting amplifier of the oscillator.
23 IRQ O Interrupt Request: output to signal an interrupt event
24 ALE I Address Latch Enable: signal to latch AD0 to AD5 into the internal address latch
when HIGH.
25 to 31 D1 to D7 I/O 8-bit Bi-directional Data Bus.
Remark: An 8-bit parallel interface is not available.
Remark: If the host controller selects I2C as digital host controller interface, these pins
can be used to define the I2C address.
Remark: For serial interfaces this pins can be used for test signals or I/Os.
32 A0 I Address Line
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 11 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Table 4. Pin description HVQFN40
Pin Symbol Type Description
1 to 4 A2 to A5 I Address Line
5 PVDD PWR Pad power supply
6 DVDD PWR Digital Power Supply
7 DVSS PWR Digital Ground
8 PVSS PWR Pad power supply ground
9 NRSTPD I Not Reset and Power Down: When LOW, internal current sinks are switched off, the
oscillator is inhibited, and the input pads are disconnected from the outside world. With
a positive edge on this pin the internal reset phase starts.
10 SIGIN I Communication Interface Input: accepts a digital, serial data stream
11 SIGOUT O Communication Interface Output: delivers a serial data stream
12 SVDD PWR S2C Pad Power Supply: provides power to the S2C pads
13 TVSS PWR Transmitter Ground: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
14 TX1 O Transmitter 1: delivers the modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier
15 TVDD PWR Transmitter Power Supply: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
16 TX2 O Transmitter 2: delivers the modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier
17 TVSS PWR Transmitter Ground: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
18 AVDD PWR Analog Power Supply
19 VMID PWR Internal Reference Voltage: This pin delivers the internal reference voltage.
20 RX I Receiver Input
21 AVSS PWR Analog Ground
22 AUX1 O Auxiliary Outputs: These pins are used for testing.
23 AUX2 O
24 OSCIN I Crystal Oscillator Input: input to the inverting amplifier of the oscillator. This pin is
also the input for an externally generated clock (fosc = 27.12 MHz).
25 OSCOUT O Crystal Oscillator Output: Output of the inverting amplifier of the oscillator.
26 IRQ O Interrupt Request: output to signal an interrupt event
27 NWR I Not Write: strobe to write data (applied on D0 to D7) into the PN512 register
28 NRD I Not Read: strobe to read data from the PN512 register (applied on D0 to D7)
29 ALE I Address Latch Enable: signal to latch AD0 to AD5 into the internal address latch
when HIGH.
30 NCS I Not Chip Select: selects and activates the host controller interface of the PN512
31 to 38 D0 to D7 I/O 8-bit Bi-directional Data Bus.
Remark: For serial interfaces this pins can be used for test signals or I/Os.
Remark: If the host controller selects I2C as digital host controller interface, these pins
can be used to define the I2C address.
39 to 40 A0 to A1 I Address Line
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 12 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Table 5. Pin description TFBGA64
Pin Symbol Type Description
A1 to A5, A8,
B3, B4, B8, E1
PVSS PWR Pad power supply ground
A6 D4 I/O 8-bit Bi-directional Data Bus.
Remark: For serial interfaces this pins can be used for test signals or I/Os.
Remark: If the host controller selects I2C as digital host controller interface, these
pins can be used to define the I2C address.
A7 D2 I/O
B1 PVDD PWR Pad power supply
B2 A0 I Address Line
B5 D5 I/O 8-bit Bi-directional Data Bus.
Remark: For serial interfaces this pins can be used for test signals or I/Os.
Remark: If the host controller selects I2C as digital host controller interface, these
pins can be used to define the I2C address.
B6 D3 I/O
B7 D1 I/O
C1 DVDD PWR Digital Power Supply
C2 A1 I Address Line
C3 D7 I/O 8-bit Bi-directional Data Bus.
Remark: For serial interfaces this pins can be used for test signals or I/Os.
Remark: If the host controller selects I2C as digital host controller interface, these
pins can be used to define the I2C address.
C4 D6 I/O
C5 IRQ O Interrupt Request: output to signal an interrupt event
C6 ALE I Address Latch Enable: signal to latch AD0 to AD5 into the internal address latch
when HIGH.
C7, C8, D6, D8,
E6, E8, F7, G8,
H8
AVSS PWR Analog Ground
D1 DVSS PWR Digital Ground
D2 NRSTPD I Not Reset and Power Down: When LOW, internal current sinks are switched off,
the oscillator is inhibited, and the input pads are disconnected from the outside
world. With a positive edge on this pin the internal reset phase starts.
D3 to D5, E3 to
E5, F3, F4,
G1 to G6,
H1, H2, H6
TVSS PWR Transmitter Ground: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
D7 OSCOUT O Crystal Oscillator Output: Output of the inverting amplifier of the oscillator.
E2 SIGIN I Communication Interface Input: accepts a digital, serial data stream
E7 OSCIN I Crystal Oscillator Input: input to the inverting amplifier of the oscillator. This pin
is also the input for an externally generated clock (fosc = 27.12MHz).
F1 SVDD PWR S2C Pad Power Supply: provides power to the S2C pads
F2 SIGOUT O Communication Interface Output: delivers a serial data stream
F5 AUX1 O Auxiliary Outputs: These pins are used for testing.
F6 AUX2 O
F8 RX I Receiver Input
G7 VMID PWR Internal Reference Voltage: This pin delivers the internal reference voltage.
H3 TX1 O Transmitter 1: delivers the modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 13 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
H4 TVDD PWR Transmitter Power Supply: supplies the output stage of TX1 and TX2
H5 TX2 O Transmitter 2: delivers the modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier
H7 AVDD PWR Analog Power Supply
Table 5. Pin description TFBGA64
Pin Symbol Type Description
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 14 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8. Functional description
The PN512 transmission module supports the Read/Write mode for
ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE and ISO/IEC 14443 B using various transfer speeds and
modulation protocols.
PN512 transceiver IC supports the following operating modes:
• Reader/Writer mode supporting ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE and FeliCa scheme
• Card Operation mode supporting ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE and FeliCa scheme
• NFCIP-1 mode
The modes support different transfer speeds and modulation schemes. The following
chapters will explain the different modes in detail.
Note: All indicated modulation indices and modes in this chapter are system parameters.
This means that beside the IC settings a suitable antenna tuning is required to achieve the
optimum performance.
8.1 ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE functionality
The physical level communication is shown in Figure 7.
The physical parameters are described in Table 4.
Fig 6. PN512 Read/Write mode
001aan218
BATTERY
reader/writer
contactless card
MICROCONTROLLER
PN512 ISO/IEC 14443 A CARD
Fig 7. ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE Read/Write mode communication diagram
Table 6. Communication overview for ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE reader/writer
Communication
direction
Signal type Transfer speed
106 kBd 212 kBd 424 kBd
Reader to card (send
data from the PN512
to a card)
reader side
modulation
100 % ASK 100 % ASK 100 % ASK
bit encoding modified Miller
encoding
modified Miller
encoding
modified Miller
encoding
bit length 128 (13.56 s) 64 (13.56 s) 32 (13.56 s)
(1)
(2)
001aan219
PN512
ISO/IEC 14443 A CARD
ISO/IEC 14443 A
READER
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 15 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
The PN512’s contactless UART and dedicated external host must manage the complete
ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE protocol. Figure 8 shows the data coding and framing
according to ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE.
The internal CRC coprocessor calculates the CRC value based on ISO/IEC 14443 A
part 3 and handles parity generation internally according to the transfer speed. Automatic
parity generation can be switched off using the ManualRCVReg register’s ParityDisable
bit.
8.2 ISO/IEC 14443 B functionality
The PN512 reader IC fully supports international standard ISO 14443 which includes
communication schemes ISO 14443 A and ISO 14443 B.
Refer to the ISO 14443 reference documents Identification cards - Contactless integrated
circuit cards - Proximity cards (parts 1 to 4).
Remark: NXP Semiconductors does not offer a software library to enable design-in of the
ISO 14443 B protocol.
Card to reader
(PN512 receives data
from a card)
card side
modulation
subcarrier load
modulation
subcarrier load
modulation
subcarrier load
modulation
subcarrier
frequency
13.56 MHz/16 13.56 MHz/16 13.56 MHz/16
bit encoding Manchester
encoding
BPSK BPSK
Table 6. Communication overview for ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE reader/writer …continued
Communication
direction
Signal type Transfer speed
106 kBd 212 kBd 424 kBd
Fig 8. Data coding and framing according to ISO/IEC 14443 A
001aak585
ISO/IEC 14443 A framing at 106 kBd
8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data
odd
parity
odd
parity
start
odd
start bit is 1 parity
ISO/IEC 14443 A framing at 212 kBd, 424 kBd and 848 kBd
8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data
odd
parity
odd
parity
start
even
parity
start bit is 0
burst of 32
subcarrier clocks
even parity at the
end of the frame
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 16 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8.3 FeliCa reader/writer functionality
The FeliCa mode is the general reader/writer to card communication scheme according to
the FeliCa specification. The following diagram describes the communication on a
physical level, the communication overview describes the physical parameters.
The contactless UART of PN512 and a dedicated external host controller are required to
handle the complete FeliCa protocol.
8.3.1 FeliCa framing and coding
To enable the FeliCa communication a 6 byte preamble (00h, 00h, 00h, 00h, 00h, 00h)
and 2 bytes Sync bytes (B2h, 4Dh) are sent to synchronize the receiver.
The following Len byte indicates the length of the sent data bytes plus the LEN byte itself.
The CRC calculation is done according to the FeliCa definitions with the MSB first.
To transmit data on the RF interface, the host controller has to send the Len- and databytes
to the PN512's FIFO-buffer. The preamble and the sync bytes are generated by the
PN512 automatically and must not be written to the FIFO by the host controller. The
PN512 performs internally the CRC calculation and adds the result to the data frame.
Example for FeliCa CRC Calculation:
Fig 9. FeliCa reader/writer communication diagram
Table 7. Communication overview for FeliCa reader/writer
Communication
direction
FeliCa FeliCa Higher
transfer speeds
Transfer speed 212 kbit/s 424 kbit/s
PN512 card Modulation on reader side 8-30 % ASK 8-30 % ASK
bit coding Manchester Coding Manchester Coding
Bitlength (64/13.56) s (32/13.56) s
card PN512 Loadmodulation on card side > 12 % ASK > 12 % ASK
bit coding Manchester coding Manchester coding
2. PICC to PCD, > 12 % ASK loadmodulation
Manchester coded, baudrate 212 to 424 kbaud
1. PCD to PICC, 8-30 % ASK
Manchester coded, baudrate 212 to 424 kbaud
001aan214
PN512
FeliCa CARD
(PICC)
Felica READER
(PCD)
Table 8. FeliCa framing and coding
Preamble Sync Len n-Data CRC
00h 00h 00h 00h 00h 00h B2h 4Dh
Table 9. Start value for the CRC Polynomial: (00h), (00h)
Preamble Sync Len 2 Data Bytes CRC
00h 00h 00h 00h 00h 00h B2h 4Dh 03h ABh CDh 90h 35h
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 17 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8.4 NFCIP-1 mode
The NFCIP-1 communication differentiates between an active and a Passive
Communication mode.
• Active Communication mode means both the initiator and the target are using their
own RF field to transmit data.
• Passive Communication mode means that the target answers to an initiator command
in a load modulation scheme. The initiator is active in terms of generating the RF field.
• Initiator: generates RF field at 13.56 MHz and starts the NFCIP-1 communication
• Target: responds to initiator command either in a load modulation scheme in Passive
Communication mode or using a self generated and self modulated RF field for Active
Communication mode.
In order to fully support the NFCIP-1 standard the PN512 supports the Active and Passive
Communication mode at the transfer speeds 106 kbit/s, 212 kbit/s and 424 kbit/s as
defined in the NFCIP-1 standard.
Fig 10. NFCIP-1 mode
001aan215
BATTERY
initiator: active target:
passive or active
MICROCONTROLLER
PN512
BATTERY
MICROCONTROLLER
PN512
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 18 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8.4.1 Active communication mode
Active communication mode means both the initiator and the target are using their own
RF field to transmit data.
The contactless UART of PN512 and a dedicated host controller are required to handle
the NFCIP-1 protocol.
Note: Transfer Speeds above 424 kbit/s are not defined in the NFCIP-1 standard. The
PN512 supports these transfer speeds only with dedicated external circuits.
Fig 11. Active communication mode
Table 10. Communication overview for Active communication mode
Communication
direction
106 kbit/s 212 kbit/s 424 kbit/s 848 kbit/s 1.69 Mbit/s,
3.39 Mbit/s
Initiator Target According to
ISO/IEC 14443A
100 % ASK,
Modified
Miller Coded
According to FeliCa, 8-30 %
ASK Manchester Coded
digital capability to handle
Target Initiator this communication
host
NFC INITIATOR
powered to
generate RF field
1. initiator starts communication at
selected transfer speed
Initial command
response
2. target answers at
the same transfer speed
host NFC INITIATOR
powered for digital
processing
host
host
NFC TARGET
NFC TARGET
powered for
digital processing
powered to
generate RF field
001aan216
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 19 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8.4.2 Passive communication mode
Passive Communication mode means that the target answers to an initiator command in a
load modulation scheme. The initiator is active meaning generating the RF field.
The contactless UART of PN512 and a dedicated host controller are required to handle
the NFCIP-1 protocol.
Note: Transfer Speeds above 424 kbit/s are not defined in the NFCIP-1 standard. The
PN512 supports these transfer speeds only with dedicated external circuits.
Fig 12. Passive communication mode
Table 11. Communication overview for Passive communication mode
Communication
direction
106 kbit/s 212 kbit/s 424 kbit/s 848 kbit/s 1.69 Mbit/s,
3.39 Mbit/s
Initiator Target According to
ISO/IEC 14443A
100 % ASK,
Modified
Miller Coded
According to FeliCa, 8-30
% ASK Manchester Coded
digital capability to handle
this communication
Target Initiator According to
ISO/IEC 14443A
subcarrier load
modulation,
Manchester Coded
According to FeliCa, > 12 %
ASK Manchester Coded
host
NFC INITIATOR
powered to
generate RF field
1. initiator starts communication
at selected transfer speed
2. targets answers using
load modulated data
at the same transfer speed
host
NFC TARGET
powered for
digital processing
001aan217
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 20 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8.4.3 NFCIP-1 framing and coding
The NFCIP-1 framing and coding in Active and Passive Communication mode is defined
in the NFCIP-1 standard.
8.4.4 NFCIP-1 protocol support
The NFCIP-1 protocol is not completely described in this document. For detailed
explanation of the protocol refer to the NFCIP-1 standard. However the datalink layer is
according to the following policy:
• Speed shall not be changed while continuum data exchange in a transaction.
• Transaction includes initialization and anticollision methods and data exchange (in
continuous way, meaning no interruption by another transaction).
In order not to disturb current infrastructure based on 13.56 MHz general rules to start
NFCIP-1 communication are defined in the following way.
1. Per default NFCIP-1 device is in Target mode meaning its RF field is switched off.
2. The RF level detector is active.
3. Only if application requires the NFCIP-1 device shall switch to Initiator mode.
4. Initiator shall only switch on its RF field if no external RF field is detected by RF Level
detector during a time of TIDT.
5. The initiator performs initialization according to the selected mode.
8.4.5 MIFARE Card operation mode
Table 12. Framing and coding overview
Transfer speed Framing and Coding
106 kbit/s According to the ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE scheme
212 kbit/s According to the FeliCa scheme
424 kbit/s According to the FeliCa scheme
Table 13. MIFARE Card operation mode
Communication
direction
ISO/IEC 14443A/
MIFARE
MIFARE Higher transfer speeds
transfer speed 106 kbit/s 212 kbit/s 424 kbit/s
reader/writer
PN512
Modulation on
reader side
100 % ASK 100 % ASK 100 % ASK
bit coding Modified Miller Modified Miller Modified Miller
Bitlength (128/13.56) s (64/13.56) s (32/13.56) s
PN512 reader/
writer
Modulation on
PN512 side
subcarrier load
modulation
subcarrier load
modulation
subcarrier load
modulation
subcarrier
frequency
13.56 MHz/16 13.56 MHz/16 13.56 MHz/16
bit coding Manchester coding BPSK BPSK
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 21 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
8.4.6 FeliCa Card operation mode
9. PN512 register SET
9.1 PN512 registers overview
Table 14. FeliCa Card operation mode
Communication
direction
FeliCa FeliCa Higher
transfer speeds
Transfer speed 212 kbit/s 424 kbit/s
reader/writer
PN512
Modulation on reader side 8-30 % ASK 8-30 % ASK
bit coding Manchester Coding Manchester Coding
Bitlength (64/13.56) s (32/13.56) s
PN512 reader/
writer
Load modulation on PN512
side
> 12 % ASK load
modulation
> 12 % ASK load
modulation
bit coding Manchester coding Manchester coding
Table 15. PN512 registers overview
Addr
(hex)
Register Name Function
Page 0: Command and Status
0 PageReg Selects the register page
1 CommandReg Starts and stops command execution
2 ComlEnReg Controls bits to enable and disable the passing of Interrupt Requests
3 DivlEnReg Controls bits to enable and disable the passing of Interrupt Requests
4 ComIrqReg Contains Interrupt Request bits
5 DivIrqReg Contains Interrupt Request bits
6 ErrorReg Error bits showing the error status of the last command executed
7 Status1Reg Contains status bits for communication
8 Status2Reg Contains status bits of the receiver and transmitter
9 FIFODataReg In- and output of 64 byte FIFO-buffer
A FIFOLevelReg Indicates the number of bytes stored in the FIFO
B WaterLevelReg Defines the level for FIFO under- and overflow warning
C ControlReg Contains miscellaneous Control Registers
D BitFramingReg Adjustments for bit oriented frames
E CollReg Bit position of the first bit collision detected on the RF-interface
F RFU Reserved for future use
Page 1: Command
0 PageReg Selects the register page
1 ModeReg Defines general modes for transmitting and receiving
2 TxModeReg Defines the data rate and framing during transmission
3 RxModeReg Defines the data rate and framing during receiving
4 TxControlReg Controls the logical behavior of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2
5 TxAutoReg Controls the setting of the antenna drivers
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 22 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
6 TxSelReg Selects the internal sources for the antenna driver
7 RxSelReg Selects internal receiver settings
8 RxThresholdReg Selects thresholds for the bit decoder
9 DemodReg Defines demodulator settings
A FelNFC1Reg Defines the length of the valid range for the receive package
B FelNFC2Reg Defines the length of the valid range for the receive package
C MifNFCReg Controls the communication in ISO/IEC 14443/MIFARE and NFC
target mode at 106 kbit
D ManualRCVReg Allows manual fine tuning of the internal receiver
E TypeBReg Configure the ISO/IEC 14443 type B
F SerialSpeedReg Selects the speed of the serial UART interface
Page 2: CFG
0 PageReg Selects the register page
1 CRCResultReg Shows the actual MSB and LSB values of the CRC calculation
2
3 GsNOffReg Selects the conductance of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 for
modulation, when the driver is switched off
4 ModWidthReg Controls the setting of the ModWidth
5 TxBitPhaseReg Adjust the TX bit phase at 106 kbit
6 RFCfgReg Configures the receiver gain and RF level
7 GsNOnReg Selects the conductance of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 for
modulation when the drivers are switched on
8 CWGsPReg Selects the conductance of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 for
modulation during times of no modulation
9 ModGsPReg Selects the conductance of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 for
modulation during modulation
A TModeReg
TPrescalerReg
Defines settings for the internal timer
B
C TReloadReg Describes the 16-bit timer reload value
D
E TCounterValReg Shows the 16-bit actual timer value
F
Page 3: TestRegister
0 PageReg selects the register page
1 TestSel1Reg General test signal configuration
2 TestSel2Reg General test signal configuration and PRBS control
3 TestPinEnReg Enables pin output driver on 8-bit parallel bus (Note: For serial
interfaces only)
4 TestPin
ValueReg
Defines the values for the 8-bit parallel bus when it is used as I/O bus
5 TestBusReg Shows the status of the internal testbus
6 AutoTestReg Controls the digital selftest
Table 15. PN512 registers overview …continued
Addr
(hex)
Register Name Function
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 23 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.1.1 Register bit behavior
Depending on the functionality of a register, the access conditions to the register can vary.
In principle bits with same behavior are grouped in common registers. In Table 16 the
access conditions are described.
7 VersionReg Shows the version
8 AnalogTestReg Controls the pins AUX1 and AUX2
9 TestDAC1Reg Defines the test value for the TestDAC1
A TestDAC2Reg Defines the test value for the TestDAC2
B TestADCReg Shows the actual value of ADC I and Q
C-F RFT Reserved for production tests
Table 15. PN512 registers overview …continued
Addr
(hex)
Register Name Function
Table 16. Behavior of register bits and its designation
Abbreviation Behavior Description
r/w read and write These bits can be written and read by the -Controller. Since they
are used only for control means, there content is not influenced by
internal state machines, e.g. the PageSelect-Register may be
written and read by the -Controller. It will also be read by internal
state machines, but never changed by them.
dy dynamic These bits can be written and read by the -Controller.
Nevertheless, they may also be written automatically by internal
state machines, e.g. the Command-Register changes its value
automatically after the execution of the actual command.
r read only These registers hold bits, which value is determined by internal
states only, e.g. the CRCReady bit can not be written from
external but shows internal states.
w write only Reading these registers returns always ZERO.
RFU - These registers are reserved for future use.
In case of a PN512 Version version 2.0 (VersionReg = 82h) a
read access to these registers returns always the value “0”.
Nevertheless this is not guaranteed for future chips versions
where the value is undefined. In case of a write access, it is
recommended to write always the value “0”.
RFT - These registers are reserved for production tests and shall not be
changed.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 24 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2 Register description
9.2.1 Page 0: Command and status
9.2.1.1 PageReg
Selects the register page.
9.2.1.2 CommandReg
Starts and stops command execution.
Table 17. PageReg register (address 00h); reset value: 00h, 0000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UsePage Select 0 0 0 0 0 PageSelect
Access
Rights
r/w RFU RFU RFU RFU RFU r/w r/w
Table 18. Description of PageReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 UsePageSelect Set to logic 1, the value of PageSelect is used as register address A5
and A4. The LSB-bits of the register address are defined by the
address pins or the internal address latch, respectively.
Set to logic 0, the whole content of the internal address latch defines
the register address. The address pins are used as described in
Section 10.1 “Automatic microcontroller interface detection”.
6 to 2 - Reserved for future use.
1 to 0 PageSelect The value of PageSelect is used only if UsePageSelect is set to
logic 1. In this case it specifies the register page (which is A5 and A4
of the register address).
Table 19. CommandReg register (address 01h); reset value: 20h, 00100000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 RcvOff Power Down Command
Access
Rights
RFU RFU r/w dy dy dy dy dy
Table 20. Description of CommandReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 RcvOff Set to logic 1, the analog part of the receiver is switched off.
4 PowerDown Set to logic 1, Soft Power-down mode is entered.
Set to logic 0, the PN512 starts the wake up procedure. During this
procedure this bit still shows a 1. A 0 indicates that the PN512 is ready
for operations; see Section 16.2 “Soft power-down mode”.
Note: The bit Power Down cannot be set, when the command
SoftReset has been activated.
3 to 0 Command Activates a command according to the Command Code. Reading this
register shows, which command is actually executed (see Section 19.3
“PN512 command overview”).
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 25 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.3 CommIEnReg
Control bits to enable and disable the passing of interrupt requests.
Table 21. CommIEnReg register (address 02h); reset value: 80h, 10000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IRqInv TxIEn RxIEn IdleIEn HiAlertIEn LoAlertIEn ErrIEn TimerIEn
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 22. Description of CommIEnReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 IRqInv Set to logic 1, the signal on pin IRQ is inverted with respect to bit IRq in the
register Status1Reg. Set to logic 0, the signal on pin IRQ is equal to bit IRq.
In combination with bit IRqPushPull in register DivIEnReg, the default value
of 1 ensures, that the output level on pin IRQ is 3-state.
6 TxIEn Allows the transmitter interrupt request (indicated by bit TxIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
5 RxIEn Allows the receiver interrupt request (indicated by bit RxIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
4 IdleIEn Allows the idle interrupt request (indicated by bit IdleIRq) to be propagated to
pin IRQ.
3 HiAlertIEn Allows the high alert interrupt request (indicated by bit HiAlertIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
2 LoAlertIEn Allows the low alert interrupt request (indicated by bit LoAlertIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
1 ErrIEn Allows the error interrupt request (indicated by bit ErrIRq) to be propagated
to pin IRQ.
0 TimerIEn Allows the timer interrupt request (indicated by bit TimerIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 26 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.4 DivIEnReg
Control bits to enable and disable the passing of interrupt requests.
Table 23. DivIEnReg register (address 03h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IRQPushPull 0 0 SiginActIEn ModeIEn CRCIEn RFOnIEn RFOffIEn
Access
Rights
r/w RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 24. Description of DivIEnReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 IRQPushPull Set to logic 1, the pin IRQ works as standard CMOS output pad.
Set to logic 0, the pin IRQ works as open drain output pad.
6 to 5 - Reserved for future use.
4 SiginActIEn Allows the SIGIN active interrupt request to be propagated to pin IRQ.
3 ModeIEn Allows the mode interrupt request (indicated by bit ModeIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
2 CRCIEn Allows the CRC interrupt request (indicated by bit CRCIRq) to be
propagated to pin IRQ.
1 RfOnIEn Allows the RF field on interrupt request (indicated by bit RfOnIRq) to
be propagated to pin IRQ.
0 RfOffIEn Allows the RF field off interrupt request (indicated by bit RfOffIRq) to
be propagated to pin IRQ.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 27 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.5 CommIRqReg
Contains Interrupt Request bits.
Table 25. CommIRqReg register (address 04h); reset value: 14h, 00010100b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Set1 TxIRq RxIRq IdleIRq HiAlertIRq LoAlertIRq ErrIRq TimerIRq
Access
Rights
w dy dy dy dy dy dy dy
Table 26. Description of CommIRqReg bits
All bits in the register CommIRqReg shall be cleared by software.
Bit Symbol Description
7 Set1 Set to logic 1, Set1 defines that the marked bits in the register CommIRqReg
are set.
Set to logic 0, Set1 defines, that the marked bits in the register CommIRqReg
are cleared.
6 TxIRq Set to logic 1 immediately after the last bit of the transmitted data was sent out.
5 RxIRq Set to logic 1 when the receiver detects the end of a valid datastream.
If the bit RxNoErr in register RxModeReg is set to logic 1, bit RxIRq is only set
to logic 1 when data bytes are available in the FIFO.
4 IdleIRq Set to logic 1, when a command terminates by itself e.g. when the
CommandReg changes its value from any command to the Idle Command.
If an unknown command is started, the CommandReg changes its content to
the idle state and the bit IdleIRq is set. Starting the Idle Command by the
-Controller does not set bit IdleIRq.
3 HiAlertIRq Set to logic 1, when bit HiAlert in register Status1Reg is set. In opposition to
HiAlert, HiAlertIRq stores this event and can only be reset as indicated by bit
Set1.
2 LoAlertIRq Set to logic 1, when bit LoAlert in register Status1Reg is set. In opposition to
LoAlert, LoAlertIRq stores this event and can only be reset as indicated by bit
Set1.
1 ErrIRq Set to logic 1 if any error bit in the Error Register is set.
0 TimerIRq Set to logic 1 when the timer decrements the TimerValue Register to zero.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 28 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.6 DivIRqReg
Contains Interrupt Request bits
Table 27. DivIRqReg register (address 05h); reset value: XXh, 000X00XXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Set2 0 0 SiginActIRq ModeIRq CRCIRq RFOnIRq RFOffIRq
Access
Rights
w RFU RFU dy dy dy dy dy
Table 28. Description of DivIRqReg bits
All bits in the register DivIRqReg shall be cleared by software.
Bit Symbol Description
7 Set2 Set to logic 1, Set2 defines that the marked bits in the register
DivIRqReg are set.
Set to logic 0, Set2 defines, that the marked bits in the register
DivIRqReg are cleared
6 to 5 - Reserved for future use.
4 SiginActIRq Set to logic 1, when SIGIN is active. See Section 12.6 “S2C interface
support”. This interrupt is set when either a rising or falling signal edge
is detected.
3 ModeIRq Set to logic 1, when the mode has been detected by the Data mode
detector.
Note: The Data mode detector can only be activated by the AutoColl
command and is terminated automatically having detected the
Communication mode.
Note: The Data mode detector is automatically restarted after each RF
Reset.
2 CRCIRq Set to logic 1, when the CRC command is active and all data are
processed.
1 RFOnIRq Set to logic 1, when an external RF field is detected.
0 RFOffIRq Set to logic 1, when a present external RF field is switched off.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 29 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.7 ErrorReg
Error bit register showing the error status of the last command executed.
[1] Command execution will clear all error bits except for bit TempErr. A setting by software is impossible.
Table 29. ErrorReg register (address 06h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
WrErr TempErr RFErr BufferOvfl CollErr CRCErr ParityErr ProtocolErr
Access
Rights
r r r r r r r r
Table 30. Description of ErrorReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 WrErr Set to logic 1, when data is written into FIFO by the host controller
during the AutoColl command or MFAuthent command or if data is
written into FIFO by the host controller during the time between
sending the last bit on the RF interface and receiving the last bit on the
RF interface.
6 TempErr[1] Set to logic 1, if the internal temperature sensor detects overheating.
In this case, the antenna drivers are switched off automatically.
5 RFErr Set to logic 1, if in Active Communication mode the counterpart does
not switch on the RF field in time as defined in NFCIP-1 standard.
Note: RFErr is only used in Active Communication mode. The bits
RxFraming or the bits TxFraming has to be set to 01 to enable this
functionality.
4 BufferOvfl Set to logic 1, if the host controller or a PN512’s internal state machine
(e.g. receiver) tries to write data into the FIFO-bufferFIFO-buffer
although the FIFO-buffer is already full.
3 CollErr Set to logic 1, if a bit-collision is detected. It is cleared automatically at
receiver start-up phase. This bit is only valid during the bitwise
anticollision at 106 kbit. During communication schemes at 212 and
424 kbit this bit is always set to logic 1.
2 CRCErr Set to logic 1, if bit RxCRCEn in register RxModeReg is set and the
CRC calculation fails. It is cleared to 0 automatically at receiver
start-up phase.
1 ParityErr Set to logic 1, if the parity check has failed. It is cleared automatically
at receiver start-up phase. Only valid for ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE or
NFCIP-1 communication at 106 kbit.
0 ProtocolErr Set to logic 1, if one out of the following cases occur:
• Set to logic 1 if the SOF is incorrect. It is cleared automatically at
receiver start-up phase. The bit is only valid for 106 kbit in Active
and Passive Communication mode.
• If bit DetectSync in register ModeReg is set to logic 1 during
FeliCa communication or active communication with transfer
speeds higher than 106 kbit, the bit ProtocolErr is set to logic 1 in
case of a byte length violation.
• During the AutoColl command, bit ProtocolErr is set to logic 1, if
the bit Initiator in register ControlReg is set to logic 1.
• During the MFAuthent Command, bit ProtocolErr is set to logic 1,
if the number of bytes received in one data stream is incorrect.
• Set to logic 1, if the Miller Decoder detects 2 pulses below the
minimum time according to the ISO/IEC 14443A definitions.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 30 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.8 Status1Reg
Contains status bits of the CRC, Interrupt and FIFO-buffer.
Table 31. Status1Reg register (address 07h); reset value: XXh, X100X01Xb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RFFreqOK CRCOk CRCReady IRq TRunning RFOn HiAlert LoAlert
Access
Rights
r r r r r r r r
Table 32. Description of Status1Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 RFFreqOK Indicates if the frequency detected at the RX pin is in the range of
13.56 MHz.
Set to logic 1, if the frequency at the RX pin is in the range
12 MHz < RX pin frequency < 15 MHz.
Note: The value of RFFreqOK is not defined if the external RF
frequency is in the range from 9 to 12 MHz or in the range from
15 to 19 MHz.
6 CRCOk Set to logic 1, if the CRC Result is zero. For data transmission and
reception the bit CRCOk is undefined (use CRCErr in register
ErrorReg). CRCOk indicates the status of the CRC co-processor,
during calculation the value changes to ZERO, when the calculation is
done correctly, the value changes to ONE.
5 CRCReady Set to logic 1, when the CRC calculation has finished. This bit is only
valid for the CRC co-processor calculation using the command
CalcCRC.
4 IRq This bit shows, if any interrupt source requests attention (with respect
to the setting of the interrupt enable bits, see register CommIEnReg
and DivIEnReg).
3 TRunning Set to logic 1, if the PN512’s timer unit is running, e.g. the timer will
decrement the TCounterValReg with the next timer clock.
Note: In the gated mode the bit TRunning is set to logic 1, when the
timer is enabled by the register bits. This bit is not influenced by the
gated signal.
2 RFOn Set to logic 1, if an external RF field is detected. This bit does not store
the state of the RF field.
1 HiAlert Set to logic 1, when the number of bytes stored in the FIFO-buffer
fulfills the following equation:
Example:
FIFOLength = 60, WaterLevel = 4 HiAlert = 1
FIFOLength = 59, WaterLevel = 4 HiAlert = 0
0 LoAlert Set to logic 1, when the number of bytes stored in the FIFO-buffer
fulfills the following equation:
Example:
FIFOLength = 4, WaterLevel = 4 LoAlert = 1
FIFOLength = 5, WaterLevel = 4 LoAlert = 0
HiAlert = 64 – FIFOLength WaterLevel
LoAlert = FIFOLength WaterLevel
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 31 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.9 Status2Reg
Contains status bits of the Receiver, Transmitter and Data mode detector.
Table 33. Status2Reg register (address 08h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TempSensClear I2CForceHS 0 TargetActivated MFCrypto1On Modem State
Access
Rights
r/w r/w RFU dy dy r r r
Table 34. Description of Status2Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 TempSensClear Set to logic 1, this bit clears the temperature error, if the temperature
is below the alarm limit of 125 C.
6 I2CForceHS I2C input filter settings. Set to logic 1, the I2C input filter is set to the
High-speed mode independent of the I2C protocol. Set to logic 0, the
I2C input filter is set to the used I2C protocol.
5 - Reserved for future use.
4 TargetActivated Set to logic 1 if the Select command or if the Polling command was
answered. Note: This bit can only be set during the AutoColl
command in Passive Communication mode.
Note: This bit is cleared automatically by switching off the external
RF field.
3 MFCrypto1On This bit indicates that the MIFARE Crypto1 unit is switched on and
therefore all data communication with the card is encrypted.
This bit can only be set to logic 1 by a successful execution of the
MFAuthent Command. This bit is only valid in Reader/Writer mode
for MIFARE cards. This bit shall be cleared by software.
2 to 0 Modem State ModemState shows the state of the transmitter and receiver state
machines.
Value Description
000 IDLE
001 Wait for StartSend in register BitFramingReg
010 TxWait: Wait until RF field is present, if the bit TxWaitRF is
set to logic 1. The minimum time for TxWait is defined by the
TxWaitReg register.
011 Sending
100 RxWait: Wait until RF field is present, if the bit RxWaitRF is
set to logic 1. The minimum time for RxWait is defined by the
RxWaitReg register.
101 Wait for data
110 Receiving
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 32 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.10 FIFODataReg
In- and output of 64 byte FIFO-buffer.
9.2.1.11 FIFOLevelReg
Indicates the number of bytes stored in the FIFO.
Table 35. FIFODataReg register (address 09h); reset value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FIFOData
Access
Rights
dy dy dy dy dy dy dy dy
Table 36. Description of FIFODataReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 FIFOData Data input and output port for the internal 64 byte FIFO-buffer. The
FIFO-buffer acts as parallel in/parallel out converter for all serial data
stream in- and outputs.
Table 37. FIFOLevelReg register (address 0Ah); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FlushBuffer FIFOLevel
Access
Rights
w r r r r r r r
Table 38. Description of FIFOLevelReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 FlushBuffer Set to logic 1, this bit clears the internal FIFO-buffer’s read- and
write-pointer and the bit BufferOvfl in the register ErrReg immediately.
Reading this bit will always return 0.
6 to 0 FIFOLevel Indicates the number of bytes stored in the FIFO-buffer. Writing to the
FIFODataReg increments, reading decrements the FIFOLevel.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 33 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.12 WaterLevelReg
Defines the level for FIFO under- and overflow warning.
9.2.1.13 ControlReg
Miscellaneous control bits.
Table 39. WaterLevelReg register (address 0Bh); reset value: 08h, 00001000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 WaterLevel
Access
Rights
RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 40. Description of WaterLevelReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 0 WaterLevel This register defines a warning level to indicate a FIFO-buffer over- or
underflow:
The bit HiAlert in Status1Reg is set to logic 1, if the remaining number
of bytes in the FIFO-buffer space is equal or less than the defined
number of WaterLevel bytes.
The bit LoAlert in Status1Reg is set to logic 1, if equal or less than
WaterLevel bytes are in the FIFO.
Note: For the calculation of HiAlert and LoAlert see Table 31
Table 41. ControlReg register (address 0Ch); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TStopNow TStartNow WrNFCIDtoFIFO Initiator 0 RxLastBits
Access
Rights
w w dy r/w RFU r r r
Table 42. Description of ControlReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 TStopNow Set to logic 1, the timer stops immediately.
Reading this bit will always return 0.
6 TStartNow Set to logic 1 starts the timer immediately.
Reading this bit will always return 0.
5 WrNFCIDtoFIFO Set to logic 1, the internal stored NFCID (10 bytes) is copied into the
FIFO.
Afterwards the bit is cleared automatically
4 Initiator Set to logic 1, the PN512 acts as initiator, otherwise it acts as target
3 - Reserved for future use.
2 to 0 RxLastBits Shows the number of valid bits in the last received byte. If zero, the
whole byte is valid.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 34 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.14 BitFramingReg
Adjustments for bit oriented frames.
Table 43. BitFramingReg register (address 0Dh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
StartSend RxAlign 0 TxLastBits
Access
Rights
w r/w r/w r/w RFU r/w r/w r/w
Table 44. Description of BitFramingReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 StartSend Set to logic 1, the transmission of data starts.
This bit is only valid in combination with the Transceive command.
6 to 4 RxAlign Used for reception of bit oriented frames: RxAlign defines the bit position
for the first bit received to be stored in the FIFO. Further received bits are
stored at the following bit positions.
Example:
RxAlign = 0: the LSB of the received bit is stored at bit 0, the second
received bit is stored at bit position 1.
RxAlign = 1: the LSB of the received bit is stored at bit 1, the second
received bit is stored at bit position 2.
RxAlign = 7: the LSB of the received bit is stored at bit 7, the second
received bit is stored in the following byte at bit position 0.
This bit shall only be used for bitwise anticollision at 106 kbit/s in Passive
Communication mode. In all other modes it shall be set to logic 0.
3 - Reserved for future use.
2 to 0 TxLastBits Used for transmission of bit oriented frames: TxLastBits defines the
number of bits of the last byte that shall be transmitted. A 000 indicates
that all bits of the last byte shall be transmitted.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 35 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.1.15 CollReg
Defines the first bit collision detected on the RF interface.
Table 45. CollReg register (address 0Eh); reset value: XXh, 101XXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Values
AfterColl
0 CollPos
NotValid
CollPos
Access
Rights
r/w RFU r r r r r r
Table 46. Description of CollReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 ValuesAfterColl If this bit is set to logic 0, all receiving bits will be cleared after a
collision. This bit shall only be used during bitwise anticollision at
106 kbit, otherwise it shall be set to logic 1.
6 - Reserved for future use.
5 CollPosNotValid Set to logic 1, if no Collision is detected or the Position of the
Collision is out of the range of bits CollPos. This bit shall only be
interpreted in Passive Communication mode at 106 kbit or
ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE Reader/Writer mode.
4 to 0 CollPos These bits show the bit position of the first detected collision in a
received frame, only data bits are interpreted.
Example:
00h indicates a bit collision in the 32th bit
01h indicates a bit collision in the 1st bit
08h indicates a bit collision in the 8th bit
These bits shall only be interpreted in Passive Communication mode
at 106 kbit or ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE Reader/Writer mode if bit
CollPosNotValid is set to logic 0.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 36 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2 Page 1: Communication
9.2.2.1 PageReg
Selects the register page.
Table 47. PageReg register (address 10h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UsePage Select 0 0 0 0 0 PageSelect
Access
Rights
r/w RFU RFU RFU RFU RFU r/w r/w
Table 48. Description of PageReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 UsePage Select Set to logic 1, the value of PageSelect is used as register address A5
and A4. The LSB-bits of the register address are defined by the
address pins or the internal address latch, respectively.
Set to logic 0, the whole content of the internal address latch defines
the register address. The address pins are used as described in
Section 10.1 “Automatic microcontroller interface detection”.
6 to 2 - Reserved for future use.
1 to 0 PageSelect The value of PageSelect is used only, if UsePageSelect is set to
logic 1. In this case it specifies the register page (which is A5 and A4
of the register address).
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 37 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.2 ModeReg
Defines general mode settings for transmitting and receiving.
Table 49. ModeReg register (address 11h); reset value: 3Bh, 00111011b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSBFirst Detect Sync TxWaitRF RxWaitRF PolSigin ModeDetOff CRCPreset
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 50. Description of ModeReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 MSBFirst Set to logic 1, the CRC co-processor calculates the CRC with MSB
first and the CRCResultMSB and the CRCResultLSB in the
CRCResultReg register are bit reversed.
Note: During RF communication this bit is ignored.
6 Detect Sync If set to logic 1, the contactless UART waits for the value F0h before
the receiver is activated and F0h is added as a Sync-byte for
transmission.
This bit is only valid for 106 kbit during NFCIP-1 data exchange
protocol.
In all other modes it shall be set to logic 0.
5 TxWaitRF Set to logic 1 the transmitter in reader/writer or initiator mode for
NFCIP-1 can only be started, if an RF field is generated.
4 RxWaitRF Set to logic 1, the counter for RxWait starts only if an external RF field
is detected in Target mode for NFCIP-1 or in Card Communication
mode.
3 PolSigin PolSigin defines the polarity of the SIGIN pin. Set to logic 1, the
polarity of SIGIN pin is active high. Set to logic 0 the polarity of SIGIN
pin is active low.
Note: The internal envelope signal is coded active low.
Note: Changing this bit will generate a SiginActIRq event.
2 ModeDetOff Set to logic 1, the internal mode detector is switched off.
Note: The mode detector is only active during the AutoColl command.
1 to 0 CRCPreset Defines the preset value for the CRC co-processor for the command
CalCRC.
Note: During any communication, the preset values is selected
automatically according to the definition in the bits RxMode and
TxMode.
Value Description
00 0000
01 6363
10 A671
11 FFFF
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 38 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.3 TxModeReg
Defines the data rate and framing during transmission.
Table 51. TxModeReg register (address 12h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TxCRCEn TxSpeed InvMod TxMix TxFraming
Access
Rights
r/w dy dy dy r/w r/w dy dy
Table 52. Description of TxModeReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 TxCRCEn Set to logic 1, this bit enables the CRC generation during data
transmission.
Note: This bit shall only be set to logic 0 at 106 kbit.
6 to 4 TxSpeed Defines the bit rate while data transmission.
Value Description
000 106 kbit
001 212 kbit
010 424 kbit
011 848 kbit
100 1696 kbit
101 3392 kbit
110 Reserved
111 Reserved
Note: The bit coding for transfer speeds above 424 kbit is equivalent to
the bit coding of Active Communication mode 424 kbit (Ecma 340).
3 InvMod Set to logic 1, the modulation for transmitting data is inverted.
2 TxMix Set to logic 1, the signal at pin SIGIN is mixed with the internal coder
(see Section 12.6 “S2C interface support”).
1 to 0 TxFraming Defines the framing used for data transmission.
Value Description
00 ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE and Passive Communication mode
106 kbit
01 Active Communication mode
10 FeliCa and Passive communication mode 212 and 424 kbit
11 ISO/IEC 14443B
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 39 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.4 RxModeReg
Defines the data rate and framing during reception.
Table 53. RxModeReg register (address 13h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RxCRCEn RxSpeed RxNoErr RxMultiple RxFraming
Access
Rights
r/w dy dy dy r/w r/w dy dy
Table 54. Description of RxModeReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 RxCRCEn Set to logic 1, this bit enables the CRC calculation during reception.
Note: This bit shall only be set to logic 0 at 106 kbit.
6 to 4 RxSpeed Defines the bit rate while data transmission.
The PN512’s analog part handles only transfer speeds up to 424 kbit
internally, the digital UART handles the higher transfer speeds as well.
Value Description
000 106 kbit
001 212 kbit
010 424 kbit
011 848 kbit
100 1696 kbit
101 3392 kbit
110 Reserved
111 Reserved
Note: The bit coding for transfer speeds above 424 kbit is equivalent to
the bit coding of Active Communication mode 424 kbit (Ecma 340).
3 RxNoErr If set to logic 1 a not valid received data stream (less than 4 bits
received) will be ignored. The receiver will remain active.
For ISO/IEC14443B also RxSOFReq logic 1 is required to ignore a non
valid datastream.
2 RxMultiple Set to logic 0, the receiver is deactivated after receiving a data frame.
Set to logic 1, it is possible to receive more than one data frame. Having
set this bit, the receive and transceive commands will not terminate
automatically. In this case the multiple receiving can only be deactivated
by writing any command (except the Receive command) to the
CommandReg register or by clearing the bit by the host controller.
At the end of a received data stream an error byte is added to the FIFO.
The error byte is a copy of the ErrorReg register.
The behaviour for version 1.0 is described in Section 21 “Errata sheet”
on page 109.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 40 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.5 TxControlReg
Controls the logical behavior of the antenna driver pins Tx1 and Tx2.
1 to 0 RxFraming Defines the expected framing for data reception.
Value Description
00 ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE and Passive Communication
mode 106 kbit
01 Active Communication mode
10 FeliCa and Passive Communication mode 212 and 424 kbit
11 ISO/IEC 14443B
Table 54. Description of RxModeReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
Table 55. TxControlReg register (address 14h); reset value: 80h, 10000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
InvTx2RF
On
InvTx1RF
On
InvTx2RF
Off
InvTx1RF
Off
Tx2CW CheckRF Tx2RF
En
Tx1RF
En
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w w r/w r/w
Table 56. Description of TxControlReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 InvTx2RFOn Set to logic 1, the output signal at pin TX2 will be inverted, if driver TX2
is enabled.
6 InvTx1RFOn Set to logic 1, the output signal at pin TX1 will be inverted, if driver TX1
is enabled.
5 InvTx2RFOff Set to logic 1, the output signal at pin TX2 will be inverted, if driver TX2
is disabled.
4 InvTx1RFOff Set to logic 1, the output signal at pin TX1 will be inverted, if driver TX1
is disabled.
3 Tx2CW Set to logic 1, the output signal on pin TX2 will deliver continuously the
un-modulated 13.56 MHz energy carrier.
Set to logic 0, Tx2CW is enabled to modulate the 13.56 MHz energy
carrier.
2 CheckRF Set to logic 1, Tx2RFEn and Tx1RFEn can not be set if an external RF
field is detected. Only valid when using in combination with bit
Tx2RFEn or Tx1RFEn
1 Tx2RFEn Set to logic 1, the output signal on pin TX2 will deliver the 13.56 MHz
energy carrier modulated by the transmission data.
0 Tx1RFEn Set to logic 1, the output signal on pin TX1 will deliver the 13.56 MHz
energy carrier modulated by the transmission data.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 41 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.6 TxAutoReg
Controls the settings of the antenna driver.
Table 57. TxAutoReg register (address 15h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AutoRF
OFF
Force100
ASK
Auto
WakeUp
0 CAOn InitialRF
On
Tx2RFAut
oEn
Tx1RFAuto
En
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 58. Description of TxAutoReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 AutoRFOFF Set to logic 1, all active antenna drivers are switched off after the last
data bit has been transmitted as defined in the NFCIP-1.
6 Force100ASK Set to logic 1, Force100ASK forces a 100% ASK modulation
independent of the setting in register ModGsPReg.
5 AutoWakeUp Set to logic 1, the PN512 in soft Power-down mode will be started by
the RF level detector.
4 - Reserved for future use.
3 CAOn Set to logic 1, the collision avoidance is activated and internally the
value n is set in accordance to the NFCIP-1 Standard.
2 InitialRFOn Set to logic 1, the initial RF collision avoidance is performed and the bit
InitialRFOn is cleared automatically, if the RF is switched on.
Note: The driver, which should be switched on, has to be enabled by
bit Tx2RFAutoEn or bit Tx1RFAutoEn.
1 Tx2RFAutoEn Set to logic 1, the driver Tx2 is switched on after the external RF field
is switched off according to the time TADT. If the bits InitialRFOn and
Tx2RFAutoEn are set to logic 1, Tx2 is switched on if no external RF
field is detected during the time TIDT.
Note: The times TADT and TIDT are defined in the NFC IP-1 standard
(ISO/IEC 18092).
0 Tx1RFAutoEn Set to logic 1, the driver Tx1 is switched on after the external RF field
is switched off according to the time TADT. If the bit InitialRFOn and
Tx1RFAutoEn are set to logic 1, Tx1 is switched on if no external RF
field is detected during the time TIDT.
Note: The times TADT and TIDT are defined in the NFC IP-1 standard
(ISO/IEC 18092).
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 42 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.7 TxSelReg
Selects the sources for the analog part.
Table 59. TxSelReg register (address 16h); reset value: 10h, 00010000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 DriverSel SigOutSel
Access
Rights
RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 60. Description of TxSelReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 4 DriverSel Selects the input of driver Tx1 and Tx2.
Value Description
00 Tristate
Note: In soft power down the drivers are only in Tristate mode
if DriverSel is set to Tristate mode.
01 Modulation signal (envelope) from the internal coder
10 Modulation signal (envelope) from SIGIN
11 HIGH
Note: The HIGH level depends on the setting of InvTx1RFOn/
InvTx1RFOff and InvTx2RFOn/InvTx2RFOff.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 43 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
3 to 0 SigOutSel Selects the input for the SIGOUT Pin.
Value Description
0000 Tristate
0001 Low
0010 High
0011 TestBus signal as defined by bit TestBusBitSel in register
TestSel1Reg.
0100 Modulation signal (envelope) from the internal coder
0101 Serial data stream to be transmitted
0110 Output signal of the receiver circuit (card modulation signal
regenerated and delayed). This signal is used as data output
signal for SAM interface connection using 3 lines.
Note: To have a valid signal the PN512 has to be set to the
receiving mode by either the Transceive or Receive
command. The bit RxMultiple can be used to keep the PN512
in receiving mode.
Note: Do not use this setting in MIFARE mode. Manchester
coding as data collisions will not be transmitted on the
SIGOUT line.
0111 Serial data stream received.
Note: Do not use this setting in MIFARE mode. Miller coding
parameters as the bit length can vary.
1000-1011 FeliCa Sam modulation
1000 RX*
1001 TX
1010 Demodulator comparator output
1011 RFU
Note: * To have a valid signal the PN512 has to be set to the
receiving mode by either the Transceive or Receive
command. The bit RxMultiple can be used to keep the PN512
in receiving mode.
1100-1111 MIFARE Sam modulation
1100 RX* with RF carrier
1101 TX with RF carrier
1110 RX with RF carrier un-filtered
1111 RX envelope un-filtered
Note: *To have a valid signal the PN512 has to be set to the
receiving mode by either the Transceive or Receive
command. The bit RxMultiple can be used to keep the PN512
in receiving mode.
Table 60. Description of TxSelReg bits …continued
Bit Symbol Description
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 44 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.8 RxSelReg
Selects internal receiver settings.
9.2.2.9 RxThresholdReg
Selects thresholds for the bit decoder.
Table 61. RxSelReg register (address 17h); reset value: 84h, 10000100b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UartSel RxWait
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 62. Description of RxSelReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 UartSel Selects the input of the contactless UART
Value Description
00 Constant Low
01 Envelope signal at SIGIN
10 Modulation signal from the internal analog part
11 Modulation signal from SIGIN pin. Only valid for transfer
speeds above 424 kbit
5 to 0 RxWait After data transmission, the activation of the receiver is delayed for
RxWait bit-clocks. During this ‘frame guard time’ any signal at pin RX
is ignored. This parameter is ignored by the Receive command. All
other commands (e.g. Transceive, Autocoll, MFAuthent) use this
parameter. Depending on the mode of the PN512, the counter starts
different. In Passive Communication mode the counter starts with the
last modulation pulse of the transmitted data stream. In Active
Communication mode the counter starts immediately after the external
RF field is switched on.
Table 63. RxThresholdReg register (address 18h); reset value: 84h, 10000100b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MinLevel 0 CollLevel
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w RFU r/w r/w r/w
Table 64. Description of RxThresholdReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 4 MinLevel Defines the minimum signal strength at the decoder input that shall be
accepted. If the signal strength is below this level, it is not evaluated.
3 - Reserved for future use.
2 to 0 CollLevel Defines the minimum signal strength at the decoder input that has to be
reached by the weaker half-bit of the Manchester-coded signal to
generate a bit-collision relatively to the amplitude of the stronger half-bit.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 45 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.10 DemodReg
Defines demodulator settings.
Table 65. DemodReg register (address 19h); reset value: 4Dh, 01001101b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AddIQ FixIQ TPrescal
Even
TauRcv TauSync
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 66. Description of DemodReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 AddIQ Defines the use of I and Q channel during reception
Note: FixIQ has to be set to logic 0 to
enable the following settings.
Value Description
00 Select the stronger channel
01 Select the stronger and freeze the selected during communication
10 combines the I and Q channel
11 Reserved
5 FixIQ If set to logic 1 and the bits of AddIQ are set to X0, the reception is fixed to
I channel.
If set to logic 1 and the bits of AddIQ are set to X1, the reception is fixed to
Q channel.
NOTE: If SIGIN/SIGOUT is used as S2C interface FixIQ set to 1 and AddIQ
set to X0 is rewired.
4 TPrescalE
ven
If set to logic 0 the following formula is used to calculate fTimer of the
prescaler:
fTimer = 13.56 MHz / (2 * TPreScaler + 1).
If set to logic 1 the following formula is used to calculate fTimer of the
prescaler:
fTimer = 13.56 MHz / (2 * TPreScaler + 2).
(Default TPrescalEven is logic 0)
The behaviour for the version 1.0 is described in Section 21 “Errata
sheet” on page 109.
3 to 2 TauRcv Changes the time constant of the internal during data reception.
Note: If set to 00, the PLL is frozen during data reception.
1 to 0 TauSync Changes the time constant of the internal PLL during burst.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 46 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.11 FelNFC1Reg
Defines the length of the FeliCa Sync bytes and the minimum length of the received
packet.
Table 67. FelNFC1Reg register (address 1Ah); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FelSyncLen DataLenMin
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 68. Description of FelNFC1Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 FelSyncLen Defines the length of the Sync bytes.
Value Sync- bytes in hex
00 B2 4D
01 00 B2 4D
10 00 00 B2 4D
11 00 00 00 B2 4D
5 to 0 DataLenMin These bits define the minimum length of the accepted packet length:
DataLenMin * 4 data packet length
This parameter is ignored at 106 kbit if the bit DetectSync in register
ModeReg is set to logic 0. If a received data packet is shorter than the
defined DataLenMin value, the data packet will be ignored.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 47 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.12 FelNFC2Reg
Defines the maximum length of the received packet.
Table 69. FelNFC2Reg register (address1Bh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
WaitForSelected ShortTimeSlot DataLenMax
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 70. Description of FelNFC2Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 WaitForSelected Set to logic 1, the AutoColl command is only terminated
automatically when:
1. A valid command has been received after performing a valid
Select procedure according ISO/IEC 14443A.
2. A valid command has been received after performing a valid
Polling procedure according to the FeliCa specification.
Note: If this bit is set, no active communication is possible.
Note: Setting this bit reduces the host controller interaction in case
of a communication to another device in the same RF field during
Passive Communication mode.
6 ShortTimeSlot Defines the time slot length for Passive Communication mode at
424 kbit. Set to logic 1 a short time slot is used (half of the timeslot
at 212 kbit). Set to logic 0 a long timeslot is used (equal to the
timeslot for 212 kbit).
5 to 0 DataLenMax These bits define the maximum length of the accepted packet
length: DataLenMax * 4 data packet length
Note: If set to logic 0 the maximum data length is 256 bytes.
This parameter is ignored at 106 kbit if the bit DetectSync in
register ModeReg is set to logic 0. If a received packet is larger
than the defined DataLenMax value, the packet will be ignored.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 48 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.13 MifNFCReg
Defines ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE/NFC specific settings in target or Card Operating
mode.
Table 71. MifNFCReg register (address 1Ch); reset value: 62h, 01100010b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SensMiller TauMiller MFHalted TxWait
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 72. Description of MifNFCReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 5 SensMiller These bits define the sensitivity of the Miller decoder.
4 to 3 TauMiller These bits define the time constant of the Miller decoder.
2 MFHalted Set to logic 1, this bit indicates that the PN512 is set to HALT mode in
Card Operation mode at 106 kbit. This bit is either set by the host
controller or by the internal state machine and indicates that only the
code 52h is accepted as a request command. This bit is cleared
automatically by a RF reset.
1 to 0 TxWait These bits define the minimum response time between receive and
transmit in number of data bits + 7 data bits.
The shortest possible minimum response time is 7 data bits.
(TxWait=0). The minimum response time can be increased by the
number of bits defined in TxWait. The longest minimum response time
is 10 data bits (TxWait = 3).
If a transmission of a frame is started before the minimum response
time is over, the PN512 waits before transmitting the data until the
minimum response time is over.
If a transmission of a frame is started after the minimum response time
is over, the frame is started immediately if the data bit synchronization
is correct. (adjustable with TxBitPhase).
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 49 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.14 ManualRCVReg
Allows manual fine tuning of the internal receiver.
Remark: For standard applications it is not recommended to change this register settings.
Table 73. ManualRCVReg register (address 1Dh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 FastFilt
MF_SO
Delay
MF_SO
Parity
Disable
LargeBW
PLL
Manual
HPCF
HPFC
Access
Rights
RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 74. Description of ManualRCVReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 - Reserved for future use.
6 FastFilt
MF_SO
If this bit is set to logic 1, the internal filter for the Miller-Delay Circuit is
set to Fast mode.
Note: This bit should only set to logic 1, if Millerpulses of less than
400 ns Pulse length are expected. At 106 kBaud the typical value is
3 us.
5 Delay MF_SO If this bit is set to logic 1, the Signal at SIGOUT-pin is delayed, so that
in SAM mode the Signal at SIGIN must be 128/fc faster compared to
the ISO/IEC 14443A, to reach the ISO/IEC 14443A restrictions on the
RF-Field.
Note: This delay shall only be activated for setting bits SigOutSel to
(1110b) or (1111b) in register TxSelReg.
4 Parity Disable If this bit is set to logic 1, the generation of the Parity bit for
transmission and the Parity-Check for receiving is switched off. The
received Parity bit is handled like a data bit.
3 LargeBWPLL Set to logic 1, the bandwidth of the internal PLL used for clock
recovery is extended.
2 ManualHPCF Set to logic 0, the HPCF bits are ignored and the HPCF settings are
adapted automatically to the receiving mode. Set to logic 1, values of
HPCF are valid.
1 to 0 HPFC Selects the High Pass Corner Frequency (HPCF) of the filter in the
internal receiver chain
00 For signals with frequency spectrum down to 106 kHz.
01 For signals with frequency spectrum down to 212 kHz.
10 For signals with frequency spectrum down to 424 kHz.
11 For signals with frequency spectrum down to 848 kHz
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 50 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.2.15 TypeBReg
9.2.2.16 SerialSpeedReg
Selects the speed of the serial UART interface.
Table 75. TypeBReg register (address 1Eh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RxSOF
Req
RxEOF
Req
0 EOFSO
FWidth
NoTxSOF NoTxEOF TxEGT
Access
Rights
r/w r/w RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 76. Description of TypeBReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 RxSOFReq If this bit is set to logic 1, the SOF is required. A datastream starting
without SOF is ignored.
If this bit is cleared, a datastream with and without SOF is accepted.
The SOF will be removed and not written into the FIFO.
6 RxEOFReq If this bit is set to logic 1, the EOF is required. A datastream ending
without EOF will generate a Protocol-Error. If this bit is cleared, a
datastream with and without EOF is accepted. The EOF will be
removed and not written into the FIFO.
For the behaviour in version 1.0, see Section 21 “Errata sheet” on
page 109.
5 - Reserved for future use.
4 EOFSOFWidth If this bit is set to logic 1 and EOFSOFAdjust bit is logic 0, the SOF
and EOF will have the maximum length defined in ISO/IEC 14443B.
If this bit is cleared and EOFSOFAdjust bit is logic 0, the SOF and
EOF will have the minimum length defined in ISO/IEC 14443B.
If this bit is set to 1 and the EOFSOFadjust bit is logic 1 will result in
SOF low = (11etu 8 cycles)/fc
SOF high = (2 etu + 8 cycles)/fc
EOF low = (11 etu 8 cycles)/fc
If this bit is set to 0 and the EOFSOFAdjust bit is logic 1 will result in
an incorrect system behavior in respect to ISO specification.
For the behaviour in version 1.0, see Section 21 “Errata sheet” on
page 109.
3 NoTxSOF If this bit is set to logic 1, the generation of the SOF is suppressed.
2 NoTxEOF If this bit is set to logic 1, the generation of the EOF is suppressed.
1 to 0 TxEGT These bits define the length of the EGT.
Value Description
00 0 bit
01 1 bit
10 2 bits
11 3 bits
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 51 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Table 77. SerialSpeedReg register (address 1Fh); reset value: EBh, 11101011b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BR_T0 BR_T1
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 78. Description of SerialSpeedReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 5 BR_T0 Factor BR_T0 to adjust the transfer speed, for description see Section
10.3.2 “Selectable UART transfer speeds”.
3 to 0 BR_T1 Factor BR_T1 to adjust the transfer speed, for description see Section
10.3.2 “Selectable UART transfer speeds”.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 52 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3 Page 2: Configuration
9.2.3.1 PageReg
Selects the register page.
9.2.3.2 CRCResultReg
Shows the actual MSB and LSB values of the CRC calculation.
Note: The CRC is split into two 8-bit register.
Note: Setting the bit MSBFirst in ModeReg register reverses the bit order, the byte order is
not changed.
Table 79. PageReg register (address 20h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UsePageSelect 0 0 0 0 0 PageSelect
Access Rights r/w RFU RFU RFU RFU RFU r/w r/w
Table 80. Description of PageReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 UsePageSelect Set to logic 1, the value of PageSelect is used as register address A5
and A4. The LSB-bits of the register address are defined by the
address pins or the internal address latch, respectively.
Set to logic 0, the whole content of the internal address latch defines
the register address. The address pins are used as described in
Section 10.1 “Automatic microcontroller interface detection”.
6 to 2 - Reserved for future use.
1 to 0 PageSelect The value of PageSelect is used only if UsePageSelect is set to
logic 1. In this case, it specifies the register page (which is A5 and
A4of the register address).
Table 81. CRCResultReg register (address 21h); reset value: FFh, 11111111b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CRCResultMSB
Access Rights r r r r r r r r
Table 82. Description of CRCResultReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 CRCResultMSB This register shows the actual value of the most significant byte of
the CRCResultReg register. It is valid only if bit CRCReady in
register Status1Reg is set to logic 1.
Table 83. CRCResultReg register (address 22h); reset value: FFh, 11111111b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CRCResultLSB
Access Rights r r r r r r r r
Table 84. Description of CRCResultReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 CRCResultLSB This register shows the actual value of the least significant byte of
the CRCResult register. It is valid only if bit CRCReady in register
Status1Reg is set to logic 1.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 53 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.3 GsNOffReg
Selects the conductance for the N-driver of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 when the
driver is switched off.
Table 85. GsNOffReg register (address 23h); reset value: 88h, 10001000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CWGsNOff ModGsNOff
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 86. Description of GsNOffReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 4 CWGsNOff The value of this register defines the conductance of the output
N-driver during times of no modulation.
Note: The conductance value is binary weighted.
Note: During soft Power-down mode the highest bit is forced to 1.
Note: The value of the register is only used if the driver is switched
off. Otherwise the bit value CWGsNOn of register GsNOnReg is
used.
Note: This value is used for LoadModulation.
3 to 0 ModGsNOff The value of this register defines the conductance of the output
N-driver for the time of modulation. This may be used to regulate the
modulation index.
Note: The conductance value is binary weighted.
Note: During soft Power-down mode the highest bit is forced to 1.
Note: The value of the register is only used if the driver is switched
off. Otherwise the bit value ModGsNOn of register GsNOnReg is
used
Note: This value is used for LoadModulation.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 54 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.4 ModWidthReg
Controls the modulation width settings.
9.2.3.5 TxBitPhaseReg
Adjust the bitphase at 106 kbit during transmission.
Table 87. ModWidthReg register (address 24h); reset value: 26h, 00100110b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ModWidth
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 88. Description of ModWidthReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 ModWidth These bits define the width of the Miller modulation as initiator in Active
and Passive Communication mode as multiples of the carrier
frequency (ModWidth + 1/fc). The maximum value is half the bit
period.
Acting as a target in Passive Communication mode at 106 kbit or in
Card Operating mode for ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE these bits are
used to change the duty cycle of the subcarrier frequency.
The resulting number of carrier periods are calculated according to the
following formulas:
LOW value: #clocksLOW = (ModWidth modulo 8) + 1.
HIGH value: #clocksHIGH = 16-#clocksLOW.
Table 89. TxBitPhaseReg register (address 25h); reset value: 87h, 10000111b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RcvClkChange TxBitPhase
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 90. Description of TxBitPhaseReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 RcvClkChange Set to logic 1, the demodulator’s clock is derived by the external RF
field.
6 to 0 TxBitPhase These bits are representing the number of carrier frequency clock
cycles, which are added to the waiting period before transmitting
data in all communication modes. TXBitPhase is used to adjust the
TX bit synchronization during passive NFCIP-1 communication mode
at 106 kbit and in ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE card mode.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 55 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.6 RFCfgReg
Configures the receiver gain and RF level detector sensitivity.
Table 91. RFCfgReg register (address 26h); reset value: 48h, 01001000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RFLevelAmp RxGain RFLevel
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 92. Description of RFCfgReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 RFLevelAmp Set to logic 1, this bit activates the RF level detectors’ amplifier.
6 to 4 RxGain This register defines the receivers signal voltage gain factor:
Value Description
000 18 dB
001 23 dB
010 18 dB
011 23 dB
100 33 dB
101 38 dB
110 43 dB
111 48 dB
3 to 0 RFLevel Defines the sensitivity of the RF level detector, for description see
Section 12.3 “RF level detector”.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 56 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.7 GsNOnReg
Selects the conductance for the N-driver of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 when the
driver is switched on.
9.2.3.8 CWGsPReg
Defines the conductance of the P-driver during times of no modulation
Table 93. GsNOnReg register (address 27h); reset value: 88h, 10001000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CWGsNOn ModGsNOn
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 94. Description of GsNOnReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 4 CWGsNOn The value of this register defines the conductance of the output
N-driver during times of no modulation. This may be used to regulate
the output power and subsequently current consumption and
operating distance.
Note: The conductance value is binary weighted.
Note: During soft Power-down mode the highest bit is forced to 1.
Note: This value is only used if the driver TX1 or TX2 are switched on.
Otherwise the value of the bits CWGsNOff of register GsNOffReg is
used.
3 to 0 ModGsNOn The value of this register defines the conductance of the output
N-driver for the time of modulation. This may be used to regulate the
modulation index.
Note: The conductance value is binary weighted.
Note: During soft Power-down mode the highest bit is forced to 1.
Note: This value is only used if the driver TX1 or Tx2 are switched on.
Otherwise the value of the bits ModsNOff of register GsNOffReg is
used.
Table 95. CWGsPReg register (address 28h); reset value: 20h, 00100000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 CWGsP
Access
Rights
RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 96. Description of CWGsPReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 0 CWGsP The value of this register defines the conductance of the output
P-driver. This may be used to regulate the output power and
subsequently current consumption and operating distance.
Note: The conductance value is binary weighted.
Note: During soft Power-down mode the highest bit is forced to 1.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 57 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.9 ModGsPReg
Defines the driver P-output conductance during modulation.
[1] If Force100ASK is set to logic 1, the value of ModGsP has no effect.
9.2.3.10 TMode Register, TPrescaler Register
Defines settings for the timer.
Note: The Prescaler value is split into two 8-bit registers
Table 97. ModGsPReg register (address 29h); reset value: 20h, 00100000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 ModGsP
Access
Rights
RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 98. Description of ModGsPReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 0 ModGsP[1] The value of this register defines the conductance of the output
P-driver for the time of modulation. This may be used to regulate the
modulation index.
Note: The conductance value is binary weighted.
Note: During soft Power-down mode the highest bit is forced to 1.
Table 99. TModeReg register (address 2Ah); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TAuto TGated TAutoRestart TPrescaler_Hi
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 100. Description of TModeReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 TAuto Set to logic 1, the timer starts automatically at the end of the transmission
in all communication modes at all speeds or when bit InitialRFOn is set to
logic 1 and the RF field is switched on.
In mode MIFARE and ISO14443-B 106kbit/s the timer stops after the 5th
bit (1 startbit, 4 databits) if the bit RxMultiple in the register RxModeReg is
not set. In all other modes, the timer stops after the 4th bit if the bit
RxMultiple the register RxModeReg is not set.
If RxMultiple is set to logic 1, the timer never stops. In this case the timer
can be stopped by setting the bit TStopNow in register ControlReg to 1.
Set to logic 0 indicates, that the timer is not influenced by the protocol.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 58 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
6 to 5 TGated The internal timer is running in gated mode.
Note: In the gated mode, the bit TRunning is 1 when the timer is enabled
by the register bits. This bit does not influence the gating signal.
Value Description
00 Non gated mode
01 Gated by SIGIN
10 Gated by AUX1
11 Gated by A3
4 TAutoRestart Set to logic 1, the timer automatically restart its count-down from
TReloadValue, instead of counting down to zero.
Set to logic 0 the timer decrements to ZERO and the bit TimerIRq is set
to logic 1.
3 to 0 TPrescaler_Hi Defines higher 4 bits for TPrescaler.
The following formula is used to calculate fTimer if TPrescalEven bit in
Demot Reg is set to logic 0:
fTimer = 13.56 MHz/(2*TPreScaler+1).
Where TPreScaler = [TPrescaler_Hi:TPrescaler_Lo] (TPrescaler value
on 12 bits) (Default TPrescalEven is logic 0)
The following formula is used to calculate fTimer if TPrescalEven bit in
Demot Reg is set to logic 1:
fTimer = 13.56 MHz/(2*TPreScaler+2).
For detailed description see Section 15 “Timer unit”. For the behaviour
within version 1.0, see Section 21 “Errata sheet” on page 109.
Table 101. TPrescalerReg register (address 2Bh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TPrescaler_Lo
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 102. Description of TPrescalerReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 TPrescaler_Lo Defines lower 8 bits for TPrescaler.
The following formula is used to calculate fTimer if TPrescalEven bit in
Demot Reg is set to logic 0:
fTimer = 13.56 MHz/(2*TPreScaler+1).
Where TPreScaler = [TPrescaler_Hi:TPrescaler_Lo] (TPrescaler value
on 12 bits)
The following formula is used to calculate fTimer if TPrescalEven bit in
Demot Reg is set to logic 1:
fTimer = 13.56 MHz/(2*TPreScaler+2).
Where TPreScaler = [TPrescaler_Hi:TPrescaler_Lo] (TPrescaler value
on 12 bits)
For detailed description see Section 15 “Timer unit”.
Table 100. Description of TModeReg bits …continued
Bit Symbol Description
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 59 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.11 TReloadReg
Describes the 16-bit long timer reload value.
Note: The Reload value is split into two 8-bit registers.
Table 103. TReloadReg (Higher bits) register (address 2Ch); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TReloadVal_Hi
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 104. Description of the higher TReloadReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 TReloadVal_Hi Defines the higher 8 bits for the TReloadReg.
With a start event the timer loads the TReloadVal. Changing this
register affects the timer only at the next start event.
Table 105. TReloadReg (Lower bits) register (address 2Dh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TReloadVal_Lo
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 106. Description of lower TReloadReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 TReloadVal_Lo Defines the lower 8 bits for the TReloadReg.
With a start event the timer loads the TReloadVal. Changing this
register affects the timer only at the next start event.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 60 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.3.12 TCounterValReg
Contains the current value of the timer.
Note: The Counter value is split into two 8-bit register.
9.2.4 Page 3: Test
9.2.4.1 PageReg
Selects the register page.
Table 107. TCounterValReg (Higher bits) register (address 2Eh); reset value: XXh,
XXXXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCounterVal_Hi
Access
Rights
r r r r r r r r
Table 108. Description of the higher TCounterValReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 TCounterVal_Hi Current value of the timer, higher 8 bits.
Table 109. TCounterValReg (Lower bits) register (address 2Fh); reset value: XXh,
XXXXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCounterVal_Lo
Access
Rights
r r r r r r r r
Table 110. Description of lower TCounterValReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 TCounterVal_Lo Current value of the timer, lower 8 bits.
Table 111. PageReg register (address 30h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UsePageSelect 0 0 0 0 0 PageSelect
Access
Rights
r/w RFU RFU RFU RFU RFU r/w r/w
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 61 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Table 112. Description of PageReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 UsePageSelect Set to logic 1, the value of PageSelect is used as register address
A5 and A4. The LSB-bits of the register address are defined by the
address pins or the internal address latch, respectively.
Set to logic 0, the whole content of the internal address latch defines
the register address. The address pins are used as described in
Section 10.1 “Automatic microcontroller interface detection”.
6 to 2 - Reserved for future use.
1 to 0 PageSelect The value of PageSelect is used only if UsePageSelect is set to
logic 1. In this case, it specifies the register page (which is A5 and
A4 of the register address).
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 62 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.4.2 TestSel1Reg
General test signal configuration.
9.2.4.3 TestSel2Reg
General test signal configuration and PRBS control
Table 113. TestSel1Reg register (address 31h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - SAMClockSel SAMClkD1 TstBusBitSel
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 114. Description of TestSel1Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 4 SAMClockSel Defines the source for the 13.56 MHz SAM clock
Value Description
00 GND- Sam Clock switched off
01 clock derived by the internal oscillator
10 internal UART clock
11 clock derived by the RF field
3 SAMClkD1 Set to logic 1, the SAM clock is delivered to D1.
Note: Only possible if the 8bit parallel interface is not used.
2 to 0 TstBusBitSel Select the TestBus bit from the testbus to be propagated to SIGOUT.
Table 115. TestSel2Reg register (address 32h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TstBusFlip PRBS9 PRBS15 TestBusSel
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 116. Description of TestSel2Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 TstBusFlip If set to logic 1, the testbus is mapped to the parallel port by the
following order:
D4, D3, D2, D6, D5, D0, D1. See Section 20 “Testsignals”.
6 PRBS9 Starts and enables the PRBS9 sequence according ITU-TO150.
Note: All relevant registers to transmit data have to be configured
before entering PRBS9 mode.
Note: The data transmission of the defined sequence is started by the
send command.
5 PRBS15 Starts and enables the PRBS15 sequence according ITU-TO150.
Note: All relevant registers to transmit data have to be configured
before entering PRBS15 mode.
Note: The data transmission of the defined sequence is started by the
send command.
4 to 0 TestBusSel Selects the testbus. See Section 20 “Testsignals”
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 63 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.4.4 TestPinEnReg
Enables the pin output driver on the 8-bit parallel bus.
9.2.4.5 TestPinValueReg
Defines the values for the 7-bit parallel port when it is used as I/O.
Table 117. TestPinEnReg register (address 33h); reset value: 80h, 10000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RS232LineEn TestPinEn
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 118. Description of TestPinEnReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 RS232LineEn Set to logic 0, the lines MX and DTRQ for the serial UART are
disabled.
6 to 0 TestPinEn Enables the pin output driver on the 8-bit parallel interface.
Example:
Setting bit 0 to 1 enables D0
Setting bit 5 to 1 enables D5
Note: Only valid if one of serial interfaces is used.
If the SPI interface is used only D0 to D4 can be used. If the serial
UART interface is used and RS232LineEn is set to logic 1 only D0 to
D4 can be used.
Table 119. TestPinValueReg register (address 34h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UseIO TestPinValue
Access
Rights
r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 120. Description of TestPinValueReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 UseIO Set to logic 1, this bit enables the I/O functionality for the 7-bit parallel
port in case one of the serial interfaces is used. The input/output
behavior is defined by TestPinEn in register TestPinEnReg. The value
for the output behavior is defined in the bits TestPinVal.
Note: If SAMClkD1 is set to logic 1, D1 can not be used as I/O.
6 to 0 TestPinValue Defines the value of the 7-bit parallel port, when it is used as I/O. Each
output has to be enabled by the TestPinEn bits in register
TestPinEnReg.
Note: Reading the register indicates the actual status of the pins D6 -
D0 if UseIO is set to logic 1. If UseIO is set to logic 0, the value of the
register TestPinValueReg is read back.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 64 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.4.6 TestBusReg
Shows the status of the internal testbus.
9.2.4.7 AutoTestReg
Controls the digital selftest.
9.2.4.8 VersionReg
Shows the version.
Table 121. TestBusReg register (address 35h); reset value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TestBus
Access Rights r r r r r r r r
Table 122. Description of TestBusReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 TestBus Shows the status of the internal testbus. The testbus is selected by the
register TestSel2Reg. See Section 20 “Testsignals”.
Table 123. AutoTestReg register (address 36h); reset value: 40h, 01000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 AmpRcv EOFSO
FAdjust
- SelfTest
Access Rights RFT r/w RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 124. Description of bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 - Reserved for production tests.
6 AmpRcv If set to logic 1, the internal signal processing in the receiver chain is
performed non-linear. This increases the operating distance in
communication modes at 106 kbit.
Note: Due to the non linearity the effect of the bits MinLevel and
CollLevel in the register RxThreshholdReg are as well non linear.
5 EOFSOFAdjust If set to logic 0 and the EOFSOFwidth is set to 1 will result in the
Maximum length of SOF and EOF according to ISO/IEC14443B
If set to logic 0 and the EOFSOFwidth is set to 0 will result in the
Minimum length of SOF and EOF according to ISO/IEC14443B
If this bit is set to 1 and the EOFSOFwidth bit is logic 1 will result in
SOF low = (11 etu 8 cycles)/fc
SOF high = (2 etu + 8 cycles)/fc
EOF low = (11 etu 8 cycles)/fc
For the behaviour in version 1.0, see Section 21 “Errata sheet” on
page 109.
4 - Reserved for future use.
3 to 0 SelfTest Enables the digital self test. The selftest can be started by the selftest
command in the command register. The selftest is enabled by 1001.
Note: For default operation the selftest has to be disabled by 0000.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 65 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Table 125. VersionReg register (address 37h); reset value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Version
Access Rights r r r r r r r r
Table 126. Description of VersionReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 Version 80h indicates PN512 version 1.0, differences to version 2.0 are
described within Section 21 “Errata sheet” on page 109.
82h indicates PN512 version 2.0, which covers also the industrial
version.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 66 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.4.9 AnalogTestReg
Controls the pins AUX1 and AUX2
Table 127. AnalogTestReg register (address 38h); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AnalogSelAux1 AnalogSelAux2
Access Rights r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 128. Description of AnalogTestReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 4
3 to 0
AnalogSelAux1
AnalogSelAux2
Controls the AUX pin.
Note: All test signals are described in Section 20 “Testsignals”.
Value Description
0000 Tristate
0001 Output of TestDAC1 (AUX1), output of TESTDAC2 (AUX2)
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
0010 Testsignal Corr1
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
0011 Testsignal Corr2
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
0100 Testsignal MinLevel
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
0101 Testsignal ADC channel I
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
0110 Testsignal ADC channel Q
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
0111 Testsignal ADC channel I combined with Q
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
1000 Testsignal for production test
Note: Current output. The use of 1 k pull-down resistor on AUX is recommended.
1001 SAM clock (13.56 MHz)
1010 HIGH
1011 LOW
1100 TxActive
At 106 kbit: HIGH during Startbit, Data bit, Parity and CRC. At 212 and 424 kbit: High
during Preamble, Sync, Data and CRC.
1101 RxActive
At 106 kbit: High during databit, Parity and CRC.
At 212 and 424 kbit: High during data and CRC.
1110 Subcarrier detected
106 kbit: not applicable
212 and 424 kbit: High during last part of Preamble, Sync data and CRC
1111 TestBus-Bit as defined by the TstBusBitSel in register TestSel1Reg.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 67 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.4.10 TestDAC1Reg
Defines the testvalues for TestDAC1.
9.2.4.11 TestDAC2Reg
Defines the testvalue for TestDAC2.
9.2.4.12 TestADCReg
Shows the actual value of ADC I and Q channel.
Table 129. TestDAC1Reg register (address 39h); reset value: XXh, 00XXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 TestDAC1
Access
Rights
RFT RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 130. Description of TestDAC1Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 - Reserved for production tests.
6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 0 TestDAC1 Defines the testvalue for TestDAC1. The output of the DAC1 can be
switched to AUX1 by setting AnalogSelAux1 to 0001 in register
AnalogTestReg.
Table 131. TestDAC2Reg register (address 3Ah); reset value: XXh, 00XXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 TestDAC2
Access
Rights
RFU RFU r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w
Table 132. Description ofTestDAC2Reg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 6 - Reserved for future use.
5 to 0 TestDAC2 Defines the testvalue for TestDAC2. The output of the DAC2 can be
switched to AUX2 by setting AnalogSelAux2 to 0001 in register
AnalogTestReg.
Table 133. TestADCReg register (address 3Bh); reset value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADC_I ADC_Q
Access
Rights
Table 134. Description of TestADCReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 4 ADC_I Shows the actual value of ADC I channel.
3 to 0 ADC_Q Shows the actual value of ADC Q channel.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 68 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
9.2.4.13 RFTReg
10. Digital interfaces
10.1 Automatic microcontroller interface detection
The PN512 supports direct interfacing of hosts using SPI, I2C-bus or serial UART
interfaces. The PN512 resets its interface and checks the current host interface type
automatically after performing a power-on or hard reset. The PN512 identifies the host
interface by sensing the logic levels on the control pins after the reset phase. This is done
using a combination of fixed pin connections. Table 141 shows the different connection
configurations.
Table 135. RFTReg register (address 3Ch); reset value: FFh, 11111111b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Access
Rights
RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT
Table 136. Description of RFTReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 - Reserved for production tests.
Table 137. RFTReg register (address 3Dh, 3Fh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Access
Rights
RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT
Table 138. Description of RFTReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 - Reserved for production tests.
Table 139. RFTReg register (address 3Eh); reset value: 03h, 00000011b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Access
Rights
RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT RFT
Table 140. Description of RFTReg bits
Bit Symbol Description
7 to 0 - Reserved for production tests.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 69 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
[1] only available in HVQFN 40.
Table 141. Connection protocol for detecting different interface types
Pin Interface type
UART (input) SPI (output) I2C-bus (I/O)
SDA RX NSS SDA
I2C 0 0 1
EA 0 1 EA
D7 TX MISO SCL
D6 MX MOSI ADR_0
D5 DTRQ SCK ADR_1
D4 - - ADR_2
D3 - - ADR_3
D2 - - ADR_4
D1 - - ADR_5
Table 142. Connection scheme for detecting the different interface types
PN512 Parallel Interface Type Serial Interface Types
Separated Read/Write Strobe Common Read/Write Strobe
Pin Dedicated
Address Bus
Multiplexed
Address Bus
Dedicated
Address Bus
Multiplexed
Address Bus
UART SPI I2C
ALE 1 ALE 1 AS RX NSS SDA
A5[1] A5 0 A5 0 0 0 0
A4[1] A4 0 A4 0 0 0 0
A3[1] A3 0 A3 0 0 0 0
A2[1] A2 1 A2 1 0 0 0
A1 A1 1 A1 1 0 0 1
A0 A0 1 A0 0 0 1 EA
NRD[1] NRD NRD NDS NDS 1 1 1
NWR[1] NWR NWR RD/NWR RD/NWR 1 1 1
NCS[1] NCS NCS NCS NCS NCS NCS NCS
D7 D7 D7 D7 D7 TX MISO SCL
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 MX MOSI ADR_0
D5 D5 AD5 D5 AD5 DTRQ SCK ADR_1
D4 D4 AD4 D4 AD4 - - ADR_2
D3 D3 AD3 D3 AD3 - - ADR_3
D2 D2 AD2 D2 AD2 - - ADR_4
D1 D1 AD1 D1 AD1 - - ADR_5
D0 D0 AD0 D0 AD0 - - ADR_6
Remark: Overview on the pin behavior
Pin behavior Input Output In/Out
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 70 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.2 Serial Peripheral Interface
A serial peripheral interface (SPI compatible) is supported to enable high-speed
communication to the host. The interface can handle data speeds up to 10 Mbit/s. When
communicating with a host, the PN512 acts as a slave, receiving data from the external
host for register settings, sending and receiving data relevant for RF interface
communication.
An interface compatible with SPI enables high-speed serial communication between the
PN512 and a microcontroller. The implemented interface is in accordance with the SPI
standard.
The timing specification is given in Section 26.1 on page 117.
The PN512 acts as a slave during SPI communication. The SPI clock signal SCK must be
generated by the master. Data communication from the master to the slave uses the
MOSI line. The MISO line is used to send data from the PN512 to the master.
Data bytes on both MOSI and MISO lines are sent with the MSB first. Data on both MOSI
and MISO lines must be stable on the rising edge of the clock and can be changed on the
falling edge. Data is provided by the PN512 on the falling clock edge and is stable during
the rising clock edge.
10.2.1 SPI read data
Reading data using SPI requires the byte order shown in Table 143 to be used. It is
possible to read out up to n-data bytes.
The first byte sent defines both the mode and the address.
[1] X = Do not care.
Remark: The MSB must be sent first.
10.2.2 SPI write data
To write data to the PN512 using SPI requires the byte order shown in Table 144. It is
possible to write up to n data bytes by only sending one address byte.
Fig 13. SPI connection to host
001aan220
PN512
SCK
SCK
MOSI
MOSI
MISO
MISO
NSS
NSS
Table 143. MOSI and MISO byte order
Line Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 To Byte n Byte n + 1
MOSI address 0 address 1 address 2 ... address n 00
MISO X[1] data 0 data 1 ... data n 1 data n
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 71 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
The first send byte defines both the mode and the address byte.
[1] X = Do not care.
Remark: The MSB must be sent first.
10.2.3 SPI address byte
The address byte has to meet the following format.
The MSB of the first byte defines the mode used. To read data from the PN512 the MSB is
set to logic 1. To write data to the PN512 the MSB must be set to logic 0. Bits 6 to 1 define
the address and the LSB is set to logic 0.
10.3 UART interface
10.3.1 Connection to a host
Remark: Signals DTRQ and MX can be disabled by clearing TestPinEnReg register’s
RS232LineEn bit.
10.3.2 Selectable UART transfer speeds
The internal UART interface is compatible with an RS232 serial interface.
The default transfer speed is 9.6 kBd. To change the transfer speed, the host controller
must write a value for the new transfer speed to the SerialSpeedReg register. Bits
BR_T0[2:0] and BR_T1[4:0] define the factors for setting the transfer speed in the
SerialSpeedReg register.
The BR_T0[2:0] and BR_T1[4:0] settings are described in Table 10. Examples of different
transfer speeds and the relevant register settings are given in Table 11.
Table 144. MOSI and MISO byte order
Line Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 To Byte n Byte n + 1
MOSI address 0 data 0 data 1 ... data n 1 data n
MISO X[1] X[1] X[1] ... X[1] X[1]
Table 145. Address byte 0 register; address MOSI
7 (MSB) 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (LSB)
1 = read
0 = write
address 0
Fig 14. UART connection to microcontrollers
001aan221
PN512
RX
RX
TX
TX
DTRQ
DTRQ
MX
MX
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 72 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
[1] The resulting transfer speed error is less than 1.5 % for all described transfer speeds.
The selectable transfer speeds shown in Table 11 are calculated according to the
following equations:
If BR_T0[2:0] = 0:
(1)
If BR_T0[2:0] > 0:
(2)
Remark: Transfer speeds above 1228.8 kBd are not supported.
10.3.3 UART framing
Table 146. BR_T0 and BR_T1 settings
BR_Tn Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
BR_T0 factor 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
BR_T1 range 1 to 32 33 to 64 33 to 64 33 to 64 33 to 64 33 to 64 33 to 64 33 to 64
Table 147. Selectable UART transfer speeds
Transfer speed (kBd) SerialSpeedReg value Transfer speed accuracy (%)[1]
Decimal Hexadecimal
7.2 250 FAh 0.25
9.6 235 EBh 0.32
14.4 218 DAh 0.25
19.2 203 CBh 0.32
38.4 171 ABh 0.32
57.6 154 9Ah 0.25
115.2 122 7Ah 0.25
128 116 74h 0.06
230.4 90 5Ah 0.25
460.8 58 3Ah 0.25
921.6 28 1Ch 1.45
1228.8 21 15h 0.32
transfer speed 27.12 106
BR_T0 + 1 = -------------------------------
transfer speed 27.12 106
BR_T1 + 33
2BR_T0 – 1 -----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
=
Table 148. UART framing
Bit Length Value
Start 1-bit 0
Data 8 bits data
Stop 1-bit 1
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 73 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Remark: The LSB for data and address bytes must be sent first. No parity bit is used
during transmission.
Read data: To read data using the UART interface, the flow shown in Table 149 must be
used. The first byte sent defines both the mode and the address.
Write data: To write data to the PN512 using the UART interface, the structure shown in
Table 150 must be used.
The first byte sent defines both the mode and the address.
Table 149. Read data byte order
Pin Byte 0 Byte 1
RX (pin 24) address -
TX (pin 31) - data 0
(1) Reserved.
Fig 15. UART read data timing diagram
001aak588
SA
ADDRESS
RX
TX
MX
DTRQ
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 (1) SO
SA D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 SO
DATA
R/W
Table 150. Write data byte order
Pin Byte 0 Byte 1
RX (pin 24) address 0 data 0
TX (pin 31) - address 0
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 74 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Remark: The data byte can be sent directly after the address byte on pin RX.
Address byte: The address byte has to meet the following format:
(1) Reserved.
Fig 16. UART write data timing diagram
001aak589
SA
ADDRESS
RX
TX
MX
DTRQ
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 (1) SO SA D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 SO
SA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 (1) SO
DATA
ADDRESS
R/W
R/W
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 75 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
The MSB of the first byte sets the mode used. To read data from the PN512, the MSB is
set to logic 1. To write data to the PN512 the MSB is set to logic 0. Bit 6 is reserved for
future use, and bits 5 to 0 define the address; see Table 151.
10.4 I2C Bus Interface
An I2C-bus (Inter-IC) interface is supported to enable a low-cost, low pin count serial bus
interface to the host. The I2C-bus interface is implemented according to
NXP Semiconductors’ I2C-bus interface specification, rev. 2.1, January 2000. The
interface can only act in Slave mode. Therefore the PN512 does not implement clock
generation or access arbitration.
The PN512 can act either as a slave receiver or slave transmitter in Standard mode, Fast
mode and High-speed mode.
SDA is a bidirectional line connected to a positive supply voltage using a current source or
a pull-up resistor. Both SDA and SCL lines are set HIGH when data is not transmitted. The
PN512 has a 3-state output stage to perform the wired-AND function. Data on the I2C-bus
can be transferred at data rates of up to 100 kBd in Standard mode, up to 400 kBd in Fast
mode or up to 3.4 Mbit/s in High-speed mode.
If the I2C-bus interface is selected, spike suppression is activated on lines SCL and SDA
as defined in the I2C-bus interface specification.
See Table 171 on page 117 for timing requirements.
Table 151. Address byte 0 register; address MOSI
7 (MSB) 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (LSB)
1 = read
0 = write
reserved address
Fig 17. I2C-bus interface
001aan222
PN512
SDA
SCL
I2C
EA
ADR_[5:0]
PULL-UP
NETWORK
CONFIGURATION
WIRING
PULL-UP
NETWORK
MICROCONTROLLER
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 76 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.4.1 Data validity
Data on the SDA line must be stable during the HIGH clock period. The HIGH or LOW
state of the data line must only change when the clock signal on SCL is LOW.
10.4.2 START and STOP conditions
To manage the data transfer on the I2C-bus, unique START (S) and STOP (P) conditions
are defined.
• A START condition is defined with a HIGH-to-LOW transition on the SDA line while
SCL is HIGH.
• A STOP condition is defined with a LOW-to-HIGH transition on the SDA line while
SCL is HIGH.
The I2C-bus master always generates the START and STOP conditions. The bus is busy
after the START condition. The bus is free again a certain time after the STOP condition.
The bus stays busy if a repeated START (Sr) is generated instead of a STOP condition.
The START (S) and repeated START (Sr) conditions are functionally identical. Therefore,
S is used as a generic term to represent both the START (S) and repeated START (Sr)
conditions.
10.4.3 Byte format
Each byte must be followed by an acknowledge bit. Data is transferred with the MSB first;
see Figure 22. The number of transmitted bytes during one data transfer is unrestricted
but must meet the read/write cycle format.
Fig 18. Bit transfer on the I2C-bus
mbc621
data line
stable;
data valid
change
of data
allowed
SDA
SCL
Fig 19. START and STOP conditions
mbc622
SDA
SCL
P
STOP condition
SDA
SCL
S
START condition
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 77 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.4.4 Acknowledge
An acknowledge must be sent at the end of one data byte. The acknowledge-related clock
pulse is generated by the master. The transmitter of data, either master or slave, releases
the SDA line (HIGH) during the acknowledge clock pulse. The receiver pulls down the
SDA line during the acknowledge clock pulse so that it remains stable LOW during the
HIGH period of this clock pulse.
The master can then generate either a STOP (P) condition to stop the transfer or a
repeated START (Sr) condition to start a new transfer.
A master-receiver indicates the end of data to the slave-transmitter by not generating an
acknowledge on the last byte that was clocked out by the slave. The slave-transmitter
releases the data line to allow the master to generate a STOP (P) or repeated START (Sr)
condition.
Fig 20. Acknowledge on the I2C-bus
mbc602
S
START
condition
1 2 8 9
clock pulse for
acknowledgement
not acknowledge
acknowledge
data output
by transmitter
data output
by receiver
SCL from
master
Fig 21. Data transfer on the I2C-bus
msc608
Sr
or
P
SDA
Sr
P
SCL
STOP or
repeated START
condition
S
or
Sr
START or
repeated START
condition
1 2 3 - 8 9
ACK
9
ACK
1 2 7 8
MSB acknowledgement
signal from slave
byte complete,
interrupt within slave
clock line held LOW while
interrupts are serviced
acknowledgement
signal from receiver
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 78 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.4.5 7-Bit addressing
During the I2C-bus address procedure, the first byte after the START condition is used to
determine which slave will be selected by the master.
Several address numbers are reserved. During device configuration, the designer must
ensure that collisions with these reserved addresses cannot occur. Check the I2C-bus
specification for a complete list of reserved addresses.
The I2C-bus address specification is dependent on the definition of pin EA. Immediately
after releasing pin NRSTPD or after a power-on reset, the device defines the I2C-bus
address according to pin EA.
If pin EA is set LOW, the upper 4 bits of the device bus address are reserved by
NXP Semiconductors and set to 0101b for all PN512 devices. The remaining 3 bits
(ADR_0, ADR_1, ADR_2) of the slave address can be freely configured by the customer
to prevent collisions with other I2C-bus devices.
If pin EA is set HIGH, ADR_0 to ADR_5 can be completely specified at the external pins
according to Table 141 on page 69. ADR_6 is always set to logic 0.
In both modes, the external address coding is latched immediately after releasing the
reset condition. Further changes at the used pins are not taken into consideration.
Depending on the external wiring, the I2C-bus address pins can be used for test signal
outputs.
10.4.6 Register write access
To write data from the host controller using the I2C-bus to a specific register in the PN512
the following frame format must be used.
• The first byte of a frame indicates the device address according to the I2C-bus rules.
• The second byte indicates the register address followed by up to n-data bytes.
In one frame all data bytes are written to the same register address. This enables fast
FIFO buffer access. The Read/Write (R/W) bit is set to logic 0.
Fig 22. First byte following the START procedure
slave address 001aak591
bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 R/W
MSB LSB
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 79 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.4.7 Register read access
To read out data from a specific register address in the PN512, the host controller must
use the following procedure:
• Firstly, a write access to the specific register address must be performed as indicated
in the frame that follows
• The first byte of a frame indicates the device address according to the I2C-bus rules
• The second byte indicates the register address. No data bytes are added
• The Read/Write bit is 0
After the write access, read access can start. The host sends the device address of the
PN512. In response, the PN512 sends the content of the read access register. In one
frame all data bytes can be read from the same register address. This enables fast FIFO
buffer access or register polling.
The Read/Write (R/W) bit is set to logic 1.
Fig 23. Register read and write access
001aak592
S A 0 0
I2C-BUS
SLAVE ADDRESS
[A7:A0]
JOINER REGISTER
ADDRESS [A5:A0]
write cycle
0
(W) A DATA
[7:0]
[0:n]
[0:n]
[0:n]
A
P
S A 0 0
I2C-BUS
SLAVE ADDRESS
[A7:A0]
JOINER REGISTER
ADDRESS [A5:A0]
read cycle
optional, if the previous access was on the same register address
0
(W) A P
P
S
S start condition
P stop condition
A acknowledge
A not acknowledge
W write cycle
R read cycle
A
I2C-BUS
SLAVE ADDRESS
[A7:A0]
sent by master
sent by slave
DATA
[7:0]
1
(R) A
DATA
[7:0]
A
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 80 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.4.8 High-speed mode
In High-speed mode (HS mode), the device can transfer information at data rates of up to
3.4 Mbit/s, while remaining fully downward-compatible with Fast or Standard mode
(F/S mode) for bidirectional communication in a mixed-speed bus system.
10.4.9 High-speed transfer
To achieve data rates of up to 3.4 Mbit/s the following improvements have been made to
I2C-bus operation.
• The inputs of the device in HS mode incorporate spike suppression, a Schmitt trigger
on the SDA and SCL inputs and different timing constants when compared to
F/S mode
• The output buffers of the device in HS mode incorporate slope control of the falling
edges of the SDA and SCL signals with different fall times compared to F/S mode
10.4.10 Serial data transfer format in HS mode
The HS mode serial data transfer format meets the Standard mode I2C-bus specification.
HS mode can only start after all of the following conditions (all of which are in F/S mode):
1. START condition (S)
2. 8-bit master code (00001XXXb)
3. Not-acknowledge bit (A)
When HS mode starts, the active master sends a repeated START condition (Sr) followed
by a 7-bit slave address with a R/W bit address and receives an acknowledge bit (A) from
the selected PN512.
Data transfer continues in HS mode after the next repeated START (Sr), only switching
back to F/S mode after a STOP condition (P). To reduce the overhead of the master code,
a master links a number of HS mode transfers, separated by repeated START conditions
(Sr).
Fig 24. I2C-bus HS mode protocol switch
F/S mode HS mode (current-source for SCL HIGH enabled) F/S mode
001aak749
A A DATA A/A
(n-bytes + A)
S MASTER CODE Sr SLAVE ADDRESS R/W
HS mode continues
Sr SLAVE ADDRESS
P
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 81 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Fig 25. I2C-bus HS mode protocol frame
msc618
8-bit master code 0000 1xxx A
tH
t1
S
F/S mode
HS mode
If P then
F/S mode
If Sr (dotted lines)
then HS mode
1 6 7 8 9 1 6 7 8 9
1 2 to 5
2 to 5 2 to 5
6 7 8 9
SDA high
SCL high
SDA high
SCL high
tH
tFS
Sr Sr P
7-bit SLA R/W A n + (8-bit data + A/A)
= Master current source pull-up
= Resistor pull-up
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 82 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.4.11 Switching between F/S mode and HS mode
After reset and initialization, the PN512 is in Fast mode (which is in effect F/S mode as
Fast mode is downward-compatible with Standard mode). The connected PN512
recognizes the “S 00001XXX A” sequence and switches its internal circuitry from the Fast
mode setting to the HS mode setting.
The following actions are taken:
1. Adapt the SDA and SCL input filters according to the spike suppression requirement
in HS mode.
2. Adapt the slope control of the SDA output stages.
It is possible for system configurations that do not have other I2C-bus devices involved in
the communication to switch to HS mode permanently. This is implemented by setting
Status2Reg register’s I2CForceHS bit to logic 1. In permanent HS mode, the master code
is not required to be sent. This is not defined in the specification and must only be used
when no other devices are connected on the bus. In addition, spikes on the I2C-bus lines
must be avoided because of the reduced spike suppression.
10.4.12 PN512 at lower speed modes
PN512 is fully downward-compatible and can be connected to an F/S mode I2C-bus
system. The device stays in F/S mode and communicates at F/S mode speeds because a
master code is not transmitted in this configuration.
11. 8-bit parallel interface
The PN512 supports two different types of 8-bit parallel interfaces, Intel and Motorola
compatible modes.
11.1 Overview of supported host controller interfaces
The PN512 supports direct interfacing to various -Controllers. The following table shows
the parallel interface types supported by the PN512.
Table 152. Supported interface types
Supported interface types Bus Separated Address and
Data Bus
Multiplexed Address
and Data Bus
Separated Read and Write
Strobes (INTEL compatible)
control NRD, NWR, NCS NRD, NWR, NCS, ALE
address A0 … A3 [..A5*] AD0 … AD7
data D0 … D7 AD0 … AD7
Multiplexed Read and Write
Strobe (Motorola compatible)
control R/NW, NDS, NCS R/NW, NDS, NCS, AS
address A0 … A3 [..A5*] AD0 … AD7
data D0 … D7 AD0 … AD7
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 83 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
11.2 Separated Read/Write strobe
For timing requirements refer to Section 26.2 “8-bit parallel interface timing”.
11.3 Common Read/Write strobe
For timing requirements refer to Section 26.2 “8-bit parallel interface timing”
Fig 26. Connection to host controller with separated Read/Write strobes
001aan223
PN512
NCS
A0...A3[A5*]
D0...D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4*
A5*
address bus (A0...A3[A5*])
ALE
NRD
NWR
ADDRESS
DECODER
data bus (D0...D7)
high
not data strobe (NRD)
not write (NWR)
address bus
remark: *depending on the package type.
multiplexed address/data AD0...AD7)
PN512
NCS
D0...D7
ALE
NRD
NWR
ADDRESS
DECODER
low
low
high
high
high
low
address latch enable (ALE)
not read strobe (NRD)
not write (NWR)
non multiplexed
address
Fig 27. Connection to host controller with common Read/Write strobes
001aan224
PN512
NCS
A0...A3[A5*]
D0...D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4*
A5*
address bus (A0...A3[A5*])
ALE
NRD
NWR
ADDRESS
DECODER
Data bus (D0...D7)
high
not data strobe (NDS)
read not write (RD/NWR)
address bus
remark: *depending on the package type.
multiplexed address/data AD0...AD7)
PN512
NCS
D0...D7
ALE
NRD
NWR
ADDRESS
DECODER
low
low
high
high
low
low
address strobe (AS)
not data strobe (NDS)
read not write (RD/NWR)
non multiplexed
address
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 84 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
12. Analog interface and contactless UART
12.1 General
The integrated contactless UART supports the external host online with framing and error
checking of the protocol requirements up to 848 kBd. An external circuit can be connected
to the communication interface pins MFIN and MFOUT to modulate and demodulate the
data.
The contactless UART handles the protocol requirements for the communication
protocols in cooperation with the host. Protocol handling generates bit and byte-oriented
framing. In addition, it handles error detection such as parity and CRC, based on the
various supported contactless communication protocols.
Remark: The size and tuning of the antenna and the power supply voltage have an
important impact on the achievable operating distance.
12.2 TX driver
The signal on pins TX1 and TX2 is the 13.56 MHz energy carrier modulated by an
envelope signal. It can be used to drive an antenna directly using a few passive
components for matching and filtering; see Section 15 on page 96. The signal on pins TX1
and TX2 can be configured using the TxControlReg register; see Section 9.2.2.5 on
page 40.
The modulation index can be set by adjusting the impedance of the drivers. The
impedance of the p-driver can be configured using registers CWGsPReg and
ModGsPReg. The impedance of the n-driver can be configured using the GsNReg
register. The modulation index also depends on the antenna design and tuning.
The TxModeReg and TxSelReg registers control the data rate and framing during
transmission and the antenna driver setting to support the different requirements at the
different modes and transfer speeds.
[1] X = Do not care.
Table 153. Register and bit settings controlling the signal on pin TX1
Bit
Tx1RFEn
Bit
Force
100ASK
Bit
InvTx1RFOn
Bit
InvTx1RFOff
Envelope Pin
TX1
GSPMos GSNMos Remarks
0 X[1] X[1] X[1] X[1] X[1] CWGsNOff CWGsNOff not specified if RF is
switched off
1 0 0 X[1] 0 RF pMod nMod 100 % ASK: pin TX1
pulled to logic 0,
independent of the
InvTx1RFOff bit
1 RF pCW nCW
0 1 X[1] 0 RF pMod nMod
1 RF pCW nCW
1 1 X[1] 0 0 pMod nMod
1 RF_n pCW nCW
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 85 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
[1] X = Do not care.
The following abbreviations have been used in Table 153 and Table 154:
• RF: 13.56 MHz clock derived from 27.12 MHz quartz crystal oscillator divided by 2
• RF_n: inverted 13.56 MHz clock
• GSPMos: conductance, configuration of the PMOS array
• GSNMos: conductance, configuration of the NMOS array
• pCW: PMOS conductance value for continuous wave defined by the CWGsPReg
register
• pMod: PMOS conductance value for modulation defined by the ModGsPReg register
• nCW: NMOS conductance value for continuous wave defined by the GsNReg
register’s CWGsN[3:0] bits
• nMod: NMOS conductance value for modulation defined by the GsNReg register’s
ModGsN[3:0] bits
• X = do not care.
Remark: If only one driver is switched on, the values for CWGsPReg, ModGsPReg and
GsNReg registers are used for both drivers.
12.3 RF level detector
The RF level detector is integrated to fulfill NFCIP1 protocol requirements (e.g. RF
collision avoidance). Furthermore the RF level detector can be used to wake up the
PN512 and to generate an interrupt.
Table 154. Register and bit settings controlling the signal on pin TX2
Bit
Tx1RFEn
Bit
Force
100ASK
Bit
Tx2CW
Bit
InvTx2RFOn
Bit
InvTx2RFOff
Envelope
Pin
TX2
GSPMos GSNMos Remarks
0 X[1] X[1] X[1] X[1] X[1] X[1] CWGsNOff CWGsNOff not specified if
RF is switched
off
1 0 0 0 X[1] 0 RF pMod nMod -
1 RF pCW nCW
1 X[1] 0 RF_n pMod nMod
1 RF_n pCW nCW
1 0 X[1] X[1] RF pCW nCW conductance
always CW for
the Tx2CW bit
1 X[1] X[1] RF_n pCW nCW
1 0 0 X[1] 0 0 pMod nMod 100 % ASK: pin
TX2 pulled
to logic 0
(independent of
the
InvTx2RFOn/In
vTx2RFOff bits)
1 RF pCW nCW
1 X[1] 0 0 pMod nMod
1 RF_n pCW nCW
1 0 X[1] X[1] RF pCW nCW
1 X[1] X[1] RF_n pCW nCW
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 86 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
The sensitivity of the RF level detector is adjustable in a 4-bit range using the bits RFLevel
in register RFCfgReg. The sensitivity itself depends on the antenna configuration and
tuning.
Possible sensitivity levels at the RX pin are listed in the Table 154.
To increase the sensitivity of the RF level detector an amplifier can be activated by setting
the bit RFLevelAmp in register RFCfgReg to 1.
Remark: During soft Power-down mode the RF level detector amplifier is automatically
switched off to ensure that the power consumption is less than 10 A at 3 V.
Remark: With typical antennas lower sensitivity levels can provoke misleading results
because of intrinsic noise in the environment.
Note: It is recommended to use the bit RFLevelAmp only with higher RF level settings.
12.4 Data mode detector
The Data mode detector gives the possibility to detect received signals according to the
ISO/IEC 14443A/MIFARE, FeliCa or NFCIP-1 schemes at the standard transfer speeds
for 106 kbit, 212 kbit and 424 kbit in order to prepare the internal receiver in a fast and
convenient way for further data processing.
The Data mode detector can only be activated by the AutoColl command. The mode
detector resets, when no external RF field is detected by the RF level detector. The Data
mode detector could be switched off during the AutoColl command by setting bit
ModeDetOff in register ModeReg to 1.
Table 155. Setting of the bits RFlevel in register RFCfgReg (RFLevel amplifier deactivated)
V~Rx [Vpp] RFLevel
~2 1111
~1.4 1110
~0.99 1101
~0.69 1100
~0.49 1011
~0.35 1010
~0.24 1001
~0.17 1000
~0.12 0111
~0.083 0110
~0.058 0101
~0.041 0100
~0.029 0011
~0.020 0010
~0.014 0001
~0.010 0000
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 87 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Fig 28. Data mode detector
001aan225
HOST INTERFACES
RECEIVER
I/Q DEMODULATOR
REGISTERS
REGISTERSETTING
FOR THE
DETECTED MODE
DATA MODE DETECTOR
PN512 RX
NFC @ 106 kbit/s
NFC @ 212 kbit/s
NFC @ 424 kbit/s
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 88 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
12.5 Serial data switch
Two main blocks are implemented in the PN512. The digital block comprises the state
machines, encoder/decoder logic. The analog block comprises the modulator and
antenna drivers, the receiver and amplifiers. The interface between these two blocks can
be configured in the way, that the interfacing signals may be routed to the pins SIGIN and
SIGOUT. SIGIN is capable of processing digital NFC signals on transfer speeds above
424 kbit. The SIGOUT pin can provide a digital signal that can be used with an additional
external circuit to generate transfer speeds above 424 kbit (including 106, 212 and
424 kbit). Furthermore SIGOUT and SIGIN can be used to enable the S2C interface in the
card SAM mode to emulate a card functionality with the PN512 and a secure IC. A secure
IC can be the SmartMX smart card controller IC.
This topology allows the analog block of the PN512 to be connected to the digital block of
another device.
The serial signal switch is controlled by the TxSelReg and RxSelReg registers.
Figure 29 shows the serial data switch for TX1 and TX2.
12.6 S2C interface support
The S2C provides the possibility to directly connect a secure IC to the PN512 in order act
as a contactless smart card IC via the PN512. The interfacing signals can be routed to the
pins SIGIN and SIGOUT. SIGIN can receive either a digital FeliCa or digitized
ISO/IEC 14443A signal sent by the secure IC. The SIGOUT pin can provide a digital
signal and a clock to communicate to the secure IC. A secure IC can be the smart card IC
provided by NXP Semiconductors.
The PN512 has an extra supply pin (SVDD and PVSS as Ground line) for the SIGIN and
SIGOUT pads.
Figure 31 outlines possible ways of communications via the PN512 to the secure IC.
Fig 29. Serial data switch for TX1 and TX2
001aak593
INTERNAL
CODER
INVERT IF
InvMod = 1
DriverSel[1:0]
00
01
10
11
3-state
to driver TX1 and TX2
0 = impedance = modulated
1 = impedance = CW
1
INVERT IF
PolMFin = 0
MFIN
envelope
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 89 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Configured in the Secure Access Mode the host controller can directly communicate to
the Secure IC via SIGIN/SIGOUT. In this mode the PN512 generates the RF clock and
performs the communication on the SIGOUT line. To enable the Secure Access module
mode the clock has to be derived by the internal oscillator of the PN512, see bits
SAMClockSel in register TestSel1Reg.
Configured in Contactless Card mode the secure IC can act as contactless smart card IC
via the PN512. In this mode the signal on the SIGOUT line is provided by the external RF
field of the external reader/writer. To enable the Contactless Card mode the clock derived
by the external RF field has to be used.
The configuration of the S2C interface differs for the FeliCa and MIFARE scheme as
outlined in the following chapters.
Fig 30. Communication flows using the S2C interface
001aan226
CONTACTLESS UART
SERIAL SIGNAL SWITCH
FIFO AND STATE MACHINE
SPI, I2C, SERIAL UART
HOST CONTROLLER
PN512
SECURE CORE IC
SIGOUT
SIGIN
2. contactless
card mode
1. secure access
module (SAM) mode
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 90 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
12.6.1 Signal shape for Felica S2C interface support
The FeliCa secure IC is connected to the PN512 via the pins SIGOUT and SIGIN.
The signal at SIGOUT contains the information of the 13.56 MHz clock and the digitized
demodulated signal. The clock and the demodulated signal is combined by using the
logical function exclusive or.
To ensure that this signal is free of spikes, the demodulated signal is digitally filtered first.
The time delay for that digital filtering is in the range of one bit length. The demodulated
signal changes only at a positive edge of the clock.
The register TxSelReg controls the setting at SIGOUT.
The answer of the FeliCa SAM is transferred from SIGIN directly to the antenna driver.
The modulation is done according to the register settings of the antenna drivers.
The clock is switched to AUX1 or AUX2 (see AnalogSelAux).
Note: A HIGH signal on AUX1 and AUX2 has the same level as AVDD. A HIGH signal at
SIGOUT has the same level as SVDD. Alternatively it is possible to use pin D0 as clock
output if a serial interface is used. The HIGH level at D0 is the same as PVDD.
Note: The signal on the antenna is shown in principle only. In reality the waveform is
sinusoidal.
Fig 31. Signal shape for SIGOUT in FeliCa card SAM mode
Fig 32. Signal shape for SIGIN in SAM mode
001aan227
clock
signal on
SIGIN
signal on
antenna
001aan228
clock
demodulated
signal
signal on
SIGOUT
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 91 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
12.6.2 Waveform shape for ISO/IEC 14443A and MIFARE S2C support
The secure IC, e.g. the SmartMX is connected to the PN512 via the pins SIGOUT and
SIGIN.
The waveform shape at SIGOUT is a digital 13.56 MHz Miller coded signal with levels
between PVSS and PVDD derived out of the external 13.56 MHz carrier signal in case of
the Contactless Card mode or internally generated in terms of Secure Access mode.
The register TxSelReg controls the setting at SIGOUT.
Note: The clock settings for the Secure Access mode and the Contactless Card mode
differ, refer to the description of the bits SAMClockSel in register TestSel1Reg.
The signal at SIGIN is a digital Manchester coded signal according to the requirements of
the ISO/IEC 14443A with the subcarrier frequency of 847.5 kHz generated by the secure
IC.
Fig 33. Signal shape for SIGOUT in MIFARE Card SAM mode
Fig 34. Signal shape for SIGIN in MIFARE Card SAM mode
001aan229
1
0
bit
value RF
signal on
antenna
signal on
SIGOUT
0 1 0 0 1
001aan230
0
1
0
1 0 0 1
bit
value
signal on
antenna
signal on
SIGIN
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 92 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
12.7 Hardware support for FeliCa and NFC polling
12.7.1 Polling sequence functionality for initiator
1. Timer: The PN512 has a timer, which can be programmed in a way that it generates
an interrupt at the end of each timeslot, or if required an interrupt is generated at the
end of the last timeslot.
2. The receiver can be configured in a way to receive continuously. In this mode it can
receive any number of packets. The receiver is ready to receive the next packet
directly after the last packet has been received. This mode is active by setting the bit
RxMultiple in register RxModeReg to 1 and has to be stopped by software.
3. The internal UART adds one byte to the end of every received packet, before it is
transferred into the FIFO-buffer. This byte indicates if the received byte packet is
correct (see register ErrReg). The first byte of each packet contains the length byte of
the packet.
4. The length of one packet is 18 or 20 bytes (+ 1 byte Error-Info). The FIFO has a
length of 64 bytes. This means three packets can be stored in the FIFO at the same
time. If more than three packets are expected, the host controller has to empty the
FIFO, before the FIFO is filled completely. In case of a FIFO-overflow data is lost (See
bit BufferOvfl in register ErrorReg).
12.7.2 Polling sequence functionality for target
1. The host controller has to configure the PN512 with the correct polling response
parameters for the polling command.
2. To activate the automatic polling in Target mode, the AutoColl Command has to be
activated.
3. The PN512 receives the polling command send out by an initiator and answers with
the polling response. The timeslot is selected automatically (The timeslot itself is
randomly generated, but in the range 0 to TSN, which is defined by the Polling
command). The PN512 compares the system code, stored in byte 17 and 18 of the
Config Command with the system code received by the polling command of an
initiator. If the system code is equal, the PN512 answers according to the configured
polling response. The system code FF (hex) acts as a wildcard for the system code
bytes, i.e. a target of a system code 1234 (hex) answers to the polling command with
one of the following system codes 1234 (hex), 12FF (hex), FF34 (hex) or FFFF (hex).
If the system code does not match no answer is sent back by the PN512.
If a valid command is received by the PN512, which is not a Polling command, no
answer is sent back and the command AutoColl is stopped. The received packet is
stored in the FIFO.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 93 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
12.7.3 Additional hardware support for FeliCa and NFC
Additionally to the polling sequence support for the Felica mode, the PN512 supports the
check of the Len-byte.
The received Len-byte in accordance to the registers FelNFC1Reg and FelNFC2Reg:
DataLenMin in register FelNFC1Reg defines the minimum length of the accepted packet
length. This register is six bit long. Each bit represents a length of four bytes.
DataLenMax in register FelNFC2Reg defines the maximum length of the accepted
package. This register is six bit long. Each bit represents a length of four bytes. If set to
logic 1 this limit is ignored. If the length is not in the supposed range, the packet is not
transferred to the FIFO and receiving is kept active.
Example 1:
• DataLenMin = 4
– The length shall be greater or equal 16.
• DataLenMax = 5
– The length shall be smaller than 20. Valid area: 16, 17, 18, 19
Example 2:
• DataLenMin = 9
– The length shall be greater or equal 36.
• DataLenMax = 0
– The length shall be smaller than 256. Valid area: 36 to 255
12.7.4 CRC coprocessor
The following CRC coprocessor parameters can be configured:
• The CRC preset value can be either 0000h, 6363h, A671h or FFFFh depending on
the ModeReg register’s CRCPreset[1:0] bits setting
• The CRC polynomial for the 16-bit CRC is fixed to x16 + x12 + x5 + 1
• The CRCResultReg register indicates the result of the CRC calculation. This register
is split into two 8-bit registers representing the higher and lower bytes.
• The ModeReg register’s MSBFirst bit indicates that data will be loaded with the MSB
first.
Table 156. CRC coprocessor parameters
Parameter Value
CRC register length 16-bit CRC
CRC algorithm algorithm according to ISO/IEC 14443 A and ITU-T
CRC preset value 0000h, 6363h, A671h or FFFFh depending on the setting of the
ModeReg register’s CRCPreset[1:0] bits
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 94 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
13. FIFO buffer
An 8 64 bit FIFO buffer is used in the PN512. It buffers the input and output data stream
between the host and the PN512’s internal state machine. This makes it possible to
manage data streams up to 64 bytes long without the need to take timing constraints into
account.
13.1 Accessing the FIFO buffer
The FIFO buffer input and output data bus is connected to the FIFODataReg register.
Writing to this register stores one byte in the FIFO buffer and increments the internal FIFO
buffer write pointer. Reading from this register shows the FIFO buffer contents stored in
the FIFO buffer read pointer and decrements the FIFO buffer read pointer. The distance
between the write and read pointer can be obtained by reading the FIFOLevelReg
register.
When the microcontroller starts a command, the PN512 can, while the command is in
progress, access the FIFO buffer according to that command. Only one FIFO buffer has
been implemented which can be used for input and output. The microcontroller must
ensure that there are not any unintentional FIFO buffer accesses.
13.2 Controlling the FIFO buffer
The FIFO buffer pointers can be reset by setting FIFOLevelReg register’s FlushBuffer bit
to logic 1. Consequently, the FIFOLevel[6:0] bits are all set to logic 0 and the ErrorReg
register’s BufferOvfl bit is cleared. The bytes stored in the FIFO buffer are no longer
accessible allowing the FIFO buffer to be filled with another 64 bytes.
13.3 FIFO buffer status information
The host can get the following FIFO buffer status information:
• Number of bytes stored in the FIFO buffer: FIFOLevelReg register’s FIFOLevel[6:0]
• FIFO buffer almost full warning: Status1Reg register’s HiAlert bit
• FIFO buffer almost empty warning: Status1Reg register’s LoAlert bit
• FIFO buffer overflow warning: ErrorReg register’s BufferOvfl bit. The BufferOvfl bit
can only be cleared by setting the FIFOLevelReg register’s FlushBuffer bit.
The PN512 can generate an interrupt signal when:
• ComIEnReg register’s LoAlertIEn bit is set to logic 1. It activates pin IRQ when
Status1Reg register’s LoAlert bit changes to logic 1.
• ComIEnReg register’s HiAlertIEn bit is set to logic 1. It activates pin IRQ when
Status1Reg register’s HiAlert bit changes to logic 1.
If the maximum number of WaterLevel bytes (as set in the WaterLevelReg register) or less
are stored in the FIFO buffer, the HiAlert bit is set to logic 1. It is generated according to
Equation 3:
HiAlert = 64 – FIFOLength WaterLevel (3)
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 95 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
If the number of WaterLevel bytes (as set in the WaterLevelReg register) or less are
stored in the FIFO buffer, the LoAlert bit is set to logic 1. It is generated according to
Equation 4:
(4)
14. Interrupt request system
The PN512 indicates certain events by setting the Status1Reg register’s IRq bit and, if
activated, by pin IRQ. The signal on pin IRQ can be used to interrupt the host using its
interrupt handling capabilities. This allows the implementation of efficient host software.
14.1 Interrupt sources overview
Table 157 shows the available interrupt bits, the corresponding source and the condition
for its activation. The ComIrqReg register’s TimerIRq interrupt bit indicates an interrupt set
by the timer unit which is set when the timer decrements from 1 to 0.
The ComIrqReg register’s TxIRq bit indicates that the transmitter has finished. If the state
changes from sending data to transmitting the end of the frame pattern, the transmitter
unit automatically sets the interrupt bit. The CRC coprocessor sets the DivIrqReg
register’s CRCIRq bit after processing all the FIFO buffer data which is indicated by
CRCReady bit = 1.
The ComIrqReg register’s RxIRq bit indicates an interrupt when the end of the received
data is detected. The ComIrqReg register’s IdleIRq bit is set if a command finishes and
the Command[3:0] value in the CommandReg register changes to idle (see Table 158 on
page 101).
The ComIrqReg register’s HiAlertIRq bit is set to logic 1 when the Status1Reg register’s
HiAlert bit is set to logic 1 which means that the FIFO buffer has reached the level
indicated by the WaterLevel[5:0] bits.
The ComIrqReg register’s LoAlertIRq bit is set to logic 1 when the Status1Reg register’s
LoAlert bit is set to logic 1 which means that the FIFO buffer has reached the level
indicated by the WaterLevel[5:0] bits.
The ComIrqReg register’s ErrIRq bit indicates an error detected by the contactless UART
during send or receive. This is indicated when any bit is set to logic 1 in register ErrorReg.
LoAlert = FIFOLength WaterLevel
Table 157. Interrupt sources
Interrupt flag Interrupt source Trigger action
TimerIRq timer unit the timer counts from 1 to 0
TxIRq transmitter a transmitted data stream ends
CRCIRq CRC coprocessor all data from the FIFO buffer has been processed
RxIRq receiver a received data stream ends
IdleIRq ComIrqReg register command execution finishes
HiAlertIRq FIFO buffer the FIFO buffer is almost full
LoAlertIRq FIFO buffer the FIFO buffer is almost empty
ErrIRq contactless UART an error is detected
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 96 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
15. Timer unit
A timer unit is implemented in the PN512. The external host controller may use this timer
to manage timing relevant tasks. The timer unit may be used in one of the following
configurations:
• Time-out counter
• Watch-dog counter
• Stop watch
• Programmable one-shot
• Periodical trigger
The timer unit can be used to measure the time interval between two events or to indicate
that a specific event occurred after a specific time. The timer can be triggered by events
which will be explained in the following, but the timer itself does not influence any internal
event (e.g. A time-out during data reception does not influence the reception process
automatically). Furthermore, several timer related bits are set and these bits can be used
to generate an interrupt.
Timer
The timer has an input clock of 13.56 MHz (derived from the 27.12 MHz quartz). The timer
consists of two stages: 1 prescaler and 1 counter.
The prescaler is a 12-bit counter. The reload value for TPrescaler can be defined between
0 and 4095 in register TModeReg and TPrescalerReg.
The reload value for the counter is defined by 16 bits in a range of 0 to 65535 in the
register TReloadReg.
The current value of the timer is indicated by the register TCounterValReg.
If the counter reaches 0 an interrupt will be generated automatically indicated by setting
the TimerIRq bit in the register CommonIRqReg. If enabled, this event can be indicated on
the IRQ line. The bit TimerIRq can be set and reset by the host controller. Depending on
the configuration the timer will stop at 0 or restart with the value from register
TReloadReg.
The status of the timer is indicated by bit TRunning in register Status1Reg.
The timer can be manually started by TStartNow in register ControlReg or manually
stopped by TStopNow in register ControlReg.
Furthermore the timer can be activated automatically by setting the bit TAuto in the
register TModeReg to fulfill dedicated protocol requirements automatically.
The time delay of a timer stage is the reload value +1.
The definition of total time is: t = ((TPrescaler*2+1)*TReload+1)/13.56MHz or if
TPrescaleEven bit is set: t = ((TPrescaler*2+2)*TReload+1)/13.56MHz
Maximum time: TPrescaler = 4095,TReloadVal = 65535
=> (2*4095 +2)*65536/13.56 MHz = 39.59 s
Example:
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 97 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
To indicate 25 us it is required to count 339 clock cycles. This means the value for
TPrescaler has to be set to TPrescaler = 169.The timer has now an input clock of 25 us.
The timer can count up to 65535 timeslots of each 25 s. For the behaviour in version
1.0, see Section 21 “Errata sheet” on page 109.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 98 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
16. Power reduction modes
16.1 Hard power-down
Hard power-down is enabled when pin NRSTPD is LOW. This turns off all internal current
sinks including the oscillator. All digital input buffers are separated from the input pins and
clamped internally (except pin NRSTPD). The output pins are frozen at either a HIGH or
LOW level.
16.2 Soft power-down mode
Soft Power-down mode is entered immediately after the CommandReg register’s
PowerDown bit is set to logic 1. All internal current sinks are switched off, including the
oscillator buffer. However, the digital input buffers are not separated from the input pins
and keep their functionality. The digital output pins do not change their state.
During soft power-down, all register values, the FIFO buffer content and the configuration
keep their current contents.
After setting the PowerDown bit to logic 0, it takes 1024 clocks until the Soft power-down
mode is exited indicated by the PowerDown bit. Setting it to logic 0 does not immediately
clear it. It is cleared automatically by the PN512 when Soft power-down mode is exited.
Remark: If the internal oscillator is used, you must take into account that it is supplied by
pin AVDD and it will take a certain time (tosc) until the oscillator is stable and the clock
cycles can be detected by the internal logic. It is recommended for the serial UART, to first
send the value 55h to the PN512. The oscillator must be stable for further access to the
registers. To ensure this, perform a read access to address 0 until the PN512 answers to
the last read command with the register content of address 0. This indicates that the
PN512 is ready.
16.3 Transmitter power-down mode
The Transmitter Power-down mode switches off the internal antenna drivers thereby,
turning off the RF field. Transmitter power-down mode is entered by setting either the
TxControlReg register’s Tx1RFEn bit or Tx2RFEn bit to logic 0.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 99 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
17. Oscillator circuitry
The clock applied to the PN512 provides a time basis for the synchronous system’s
encoder and decoder. The stability of the clock frequency, therefore, is an important factor
for correct operation. To obtain optimum performance, clock jitter must be reduced as
much as possible. This is best achieved using the internal oscillator buffer with the
recommended circuitry.
If an external clock source is used, the clock signal must be applied to pin OSCIN. In this
case, special care must be taken with the clock duty cycle and clock jitter and the clock
quality must be verified.
18. Reset and oscillator start-up time
18.1 Reset timing requirements
The reset signal is filtered by a hysteresis circuit and a spike filter before it enters the
digital circuit. The spike filter rejects signals shorter than 10 ns. In order to perform a reset,
the signal must be LOW for at least 100 ns.
18.2 Oscillator start-up time
If the PN512 has been set to a Power-down mode or is powered by a VDDX supply, the
start-up time for the PN512 depends on the oscillator used and is shown in Figure 36.
The time (tstartup) is the start-up time of the crystal oscillator circuit. The crystal oscillator
start-up time is defined by the crystal.
The time (td) is the internal delay time of the PN512 when the clock signal is stable before
the PN512 can be addressed.
The delay time is calculated by:
(5)
The time (tosc) is the sum of td and tstartup.
Fig 35. Quartz crystal connection
001aan231
PN512
27.12 MHz
OSCOUT OSCIN
td
1024
27 s
= -------------- = 37.74 s
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 100 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
19. PN512 command set
The PN512 operation is determined by a state machine capable of performing a set of
commands. A command is executed by writing a command code (see Table 158) to the
CommandReg register.
Arguments and/or data necessary to process a command are exchanged via the FIFO
buffer.
19.1 General description
The PN512 operation is determined by a state machine capable of performing a set of
commands. A command is executed by writing a command code (see Table 158) to the
CommandReg register.
Arguments and/or data necessary to process a command are exchanged via the FIFO
buffer.
19.2 General behavior
• Each command that needs a data bit stream (or data byte stream) as an input
immediately processes any data in the FIFO buffer. An exception to this rule is the
Transceive command. Using this command, transmission is started with the
BitFramingReg register’s StartSend bit.
• Each command that needs a certain number of arguments, starts processing only
when it has received the correct number of arguments from the FIFO buffer.
• The FIFO buffer is not automatically cleared when commands start. This makes it
possible to write command arguments and/or the data bytes to the FIFO buffer and
then start the command.
• Each command can be interrupted by the host writing a new command code to the
CommandReg register, for example, the Idle command.
Fig 36. Oscillator start-up time
001aak596
tstartup td
tosc
t
device activation
oscillator
clock stable
clock ready
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 101 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
19.3 PN512 command overview
19.3.1 PN512 command descriptions
19.3.1.1 Idle
Places the PN512 in Idle mode. The Idle command also terminates itself.
19.3.1.2 Config command
To use the automatic MIFARE Anticollision, FeliCa Polling and NFCID3 the data used for
these transactions has to be stored internally. All the following data have to be written to
the FIFO in this order:
SENS_RES (2 bytes); in order byte 0, byte 1
NFCID1 (3 Bytes); in order byte 0, byte 1, byte 2; the first NFCID1 byte is fixed to 08h and
the check byte is calculated automatically.
SEL_RES (1 Byte)
polling response (2 bytes (shall be 01h, FEh) + 6 bytes NFCID2 + 8 bytes Pad + 2 bytes
system code)
NFCID3 (1 byte)
In total 25 bytes are transferred into an internal buffer.
The complete NFCID3 is 10 bytes long and consists of the 3 NFCID1 bytes, the 6 NFCID2
bytes and the one NFCID3 byte which are listed above.
To read out this configuration the command Config with an empty FIFO-buffer has to be
started. In this case the 25 bytes are transferred from the internal buffer to the FIFO.
Table 158. Command overview
Command Command
code
Action
Idle 0000 no action, cancels current command execution
Configure 0001 Configures the PN512 for FeliCa, MIFARE and NFCIP-1
communication
Generate RandomID 0010 generates a 10-byte random ID number
CalcCRC 0011 activates the CRC coprocessor or performs a self test
Transmit 0100 transmits data from the FIFO buffer
NoCmdChange 0111 no command change, can be used to modify the
CommandReg register bits without affecting the command,
for example, the PowerDown bit
Receive 1000 activates the receiver circuits
Transceive 1100 transmits data from FIFO buffer to antenna and automatically
activates the receiver after transmission
AutoColl 1101 Handles FeliCa polling (Card Operation mode only) and
MIFARE anticollision (Card Operation mode only)
MFAuthent 1110 performs the MIFARE standard authentication as a reader
SoftReset 1111 resets the PN512
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 102 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
The PN512 has to be configured after each power up, before using the automatic
Anticollision/Polling function (AutoColl command). During a hard power down (reset pin)
this configuration remains unchanged.
This command terminates automatically when finished and the active command is idle.
19.3.1.3 Generate RandomID
This command generates a 10-byte random number which is initially stored in the internal
buffer. This then overwrites the 10 bytes in the internal 25-byte buffer. This command
automatically terminates when finished and the PN512 returns to Idle mode.
19.3.1.4 CalcCRC
The FIFO buffer content is transferred to the CRC coprocessor and the CRC calculation is
started. The calculation result is stored in the CRCResultReg register. The CRC
calculation is not limited to a dedicated number of bytes. The calculation is not stopped
when the FIFO buffer is empty during the data stream. The next byte written to the FIFO
buffer is added to the calculation.
The CRC preset value is controlled by the ModeReg register’s CRCPreset[1:0] bits. The
value is loaded in to the CRC coprocessor when the command starts.
This command must be terminated by writing a command to the CommandReg register,
such as, the Idle command.
If the AutoTestReg register’s SelfTest[3:0] bits are set correctly, the PN512 enters Self
Test mode. Starting the CalcCRC command initiates a digital self test. The result of the
self test is written to the FIFO buffer.
19.3.1.5 Transmit
The FIFO buffer content is immediately transmitted after starting this command. Before
transmitting the FIFO buffer content, all relevant registers must be set for data
transmission.
This command automatically terminates when the FIFO buffer is empty. It can be
terminated by another command written to the CommandReg register.
19.3.1.6 NoCmdChange
This command does not influence any running command in the CommandReg register. It
can be used to manipulate any bit except the CommandReg register Command[3:0] bits,
for example, the RcvOff bit or the PowerDown bit.
19.3.1.7 Receive
The PN512 activates the receiver path and waits for a data stream to be received. The
correct settings must be chosen before starting this command.
This command automatically terminates when the data stream ends. This is indicated
either by the end of frame pattern or by the length byte depending on the selected frame
type and speed.
Remark: If the RxModeReg register’s RxMultiple bit is set to logic 1, the Receive
command will not automatically terminate. It must be terminated by starting another
command in the CommandReg register.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 103 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
19.3.1.8 Transceive
This command continuously repeats the transmission of data from the FIFO buffer and the
reception of data from the RF field. The first action is transmit and after transmission the
command is changed to receive a data stream.
Each transmit process must be started by setting the BitFramingReg register’s StartSend
bit to logic 1. This command must be cleared by writing any command to the
CommandReg register.
Remark: If the RxModeReg register’s RxMultiple bit is set to logic 1, the Transceive
command never leaves the receive state because this state cannot be cancelled
automatically.
19.3.1.9 AutoColl
This command automatically handles the MIFARE activation and the FeliCa polling in the
Card Operation mode. The bit Initiator in the register ControlReg has to be set to logic 0
for correct operation. During this command also the mode detector is active if not
deactivated by setting the bit ModeDetOff in the ModeReg register. After the mode
detector detects a mode, all the mode dependent registers are set according to the
received data. In case of no external RF field the command resets the internal state
machine and returns to the initial state but it will not be terminated. When the command
terminates the transceive command gets active.
During protocol processing the IRQ bits are not supported. Only the last received frame
will serve the IRQ’s. The treatment of the TxCRCEn and RxCRCEn bits is different to the
protocol. During ISO/IEC 14443A activation the enable bits are defined by the command
AutoColl. The changes cannot be observed at the register TXModeReg and RXModeReg.
After the Transceive command is active, the value of the register bit is relevant.
The FIFO will also receive the two CRC check bytes of the last command even if they
already checked and correct, if the state machine (Anticollision and Select routine) has to
not been executed and 106 kbit is detected.
During Felica activation the register bit is always relevant and is not overruled by the
command settings. This command can be cleared by software by writing any other
command to the CommandReg register, e.g. the idle command. Writing the same content
again to the CommandReg register resets the state machine.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 104 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
NFCIP-1 106 kbps Passive Communication mode:
The MIFARE anticollision is finished and the command has automatically changed to
Transceive. The FIFO contains the ATR_REQ frame including the start byte F0h. The bit
TargetActivated in the Status2Reg register is set to logic 1.
NFCIP-1 212/424 kbps Passive Communication mode:
The FeliCa polling command is finished and the command has automatically changed to
Transceive. The FIFO contains the ATR_REQ. The bit TargetActivated in the Status2Reg
register is set to logic 1.
NFCIP-1 106/212/424 kbps Active Communication mode:
This command is changing the automatically to the command Transceive. The FIFO
contains the ATR REQ The bit TargetActivated in the Status2Reg register is set to logic 0.
For 106 kbps only, the first byte in the FIFO indicates the start byte F0h and the CRC is
added to the FIFO.
Fig 37. Autocoll Command
NFCIP-1 106 kB aud
ISO14443-3
NPCIP-1 > 106 kB aud
FELICA
IDLE MODEO
MODE
detection
RXF
raming
MFHalted = 1
HALT
AC
nAC
SELECT
nSELECT
HLTA
AC
polling,
polling response
next frame
received
next frame
received
REQA, WUPA
READY
ACTIVE
WUPA
SELECT SELECT
READY*
ACTIVE*
TRANSCEIVE
wait for
transmit
next frame
received
J N
HLTA
REQA,
WUPA,
AC,
nAC,
SELECT,
nSELECT,
error
REQA,
AC,
nAC,
SELECT,
nSELECT,
HLTA
REQA,
WUPA,
nAC,
nSELECT,
HLTA,
error
REQA,
WUPA,
nAC,
nSELECT,
HLTA,
error
REQA,
WUPA,
AC,
SELECT,
nSELECT,
error
00 10
AC
aaa-001826
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 105 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
MIFARE (Card Operation mode):
The MIFARE anticollision is finished and the command has automatically changed to
transceive. The FIFO contains the first command after the Select. The bit TargetActivated
in the Status2Reg register is set to logic 1.
Felica (Card Operation mode):
The FeliCa polling command is finished and the command has automatically changed to
transceive. The FIFO contains the first command followed after the Poling by the FeliCa
protocol. The bit TargetActivated in the Status2Reg register is set to logic 1.
19.3.1.10 MFAuthent
This command manages MIFARE authentication to enable a secure communication to
any MIFARE Mini, MIFARE 1K and MIFARE 4K card. The following data is written to the
FIFO buffer before the command can be activated:
• Authentication command code (60h, 61h)
• Block address
• Sector key byte 0
• Sector key byte 1
• Sector key byte 2
• Sector key byte 3
• Sector key byte 4
• Sector key byte 5
• Card serial number byte 0
• Card serial number byte 1
• Card serial number byte 2
• Card serial number byte 3
In total 12 bytes are written to the FIFO.
Remark: When the MFAuthent command is active all access to the FIFO buffer is
blocked. However, if there is access to the FIFO buffer, the ErrorReg register’s WrErr bit is
set.
This command automatically terminates when the MIFARE card is authenticated and the
Status2Reg register’s MFCrypto1On bit is set to logic 1.
This command does not terminate automatically if the card does not answer, so the timer
must be initialized to automatic mode. In this case, in addition to the IdleIRq bit, the
TimerIRq bit can be used as the termination criteria. During authentication processing, the
RxIRq bit and TxIRq bit are blocked. The Crypto1On bit is only valid after termination of
the MFAuthent command, either after processing the protocol or writing Idle to the
CommandReg register.
If an error occurs during authentication, the ErrorReg register’s ProtocolErr bit is set to
logic 1 and the Status2Reg register’s Crypto1On bit is set to logic 0.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 106 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
19.3.1.11 SoftReset
This command performs a reset of the device. The configuration data of the internal buffer
remains unchanged. All registers are set to the reset values. This command automatically
terminates when finished.
Remark: The SerialSpeedReg register is reset and therefore the serial data rate is set to
9.6 kBd.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 107 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
20. Testsignals
20.1 Selftest
The PN512 has the capability to perform a digital selftest. To start the selftest the following
procedure has to be performed:
1. Perform a soft reset.
2. Clear the internal buffer by writing 25 bytes of 00h and perform the Config Command.
3. Enable the Selftest by writing the value 09h to the register AutoTestReg.
4. Write 00h to the FIFO.
5. Start the Selftest with the CalcCRC Command.
6. The Selftest will be performed.
7. When the Selftest is finished, the FIFO contains the following bytes:
Version 1.0 has a different Selftest answer, explained in Section 21.
Correct answer for VersionReg equal to 82h:
00h, EBh, 66h, BAh, 57h, BFh, 23h, 95h, D0h, E3h, 0Dh, 3Dh, 27h, 89h, 5Ch, DEh,
9Dh, 3Bh, A7h, 00h, 21h, 5Bh, 89h, 82h, 51h, 3Ah, EBh, 02h, 0Ch, A5h, 00h,
49h, 7Ch, 84h, 4Dh, B3h, CCh, D2h, 1Bh, 81h, 5Dh, 48h, 76h, D5h, 71h, 61h,
21h, A9h, 86h, 96h, 83h, 38h, CFh, 9Dh, 5Bh, 6Dh, DCh, 15h, BAh, 3Eh, 7Dh,
95h, 3Bh, 2Fh
20.2 Testbus
The testbus is implemented for production test purposes. The following configuration can
be used to improve the design of a system using the PN512. The testbus allows to route
internal signals to the digital interface. The testbus signals are selected by accessing
TestBusSel in register TestSel2Reg.
Table 159. Testsignal routing (TestSel2Reg = 07h)
Pins D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Testsignal sdata scoll svalid sover RCV_reset RFon,
filtered
Envelope
Table 160. Description of Testsignals
Pins Testsignal Description
D6 sdata shows the actual received data stream.
D5 scoll shows if in the actual bit a collision has been detected (106 kbit only)
D4 svalid shows if sdata and scoll are valid
D3 sover shows that the receiver has detected a stop condition
(ISO/IEC 14443A/ MIFARE mode only).
D2 RCV_reset shows if the receiver is reset
D1 RFon, filtered shows the value of the internal RF level detector
D0 Envelope shows the output of the internal coder
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 108 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
20.3 Testsignals at pin AUX
Table 161. Testsignal routing (TestSel2Reg = 0Dh)
Pins D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Testsignal clkstable clk27/8 clk27rf/8 clkrf13rf/4 clk27 clk27rf clk13rf
Table 162. Description of Testsignals
Pins Testsignal Description
D6 clkstable shows if the oscillator delivers a stable signal.
D5 clk27/8 shows the output signal of the oscillator divided by 8
D4 clk27rf/8 shows the clk27rf signal divided by 8
D3 clkrf13/4 shows the clk13rf divided by 4.
D2 clk27 shows the output signal of the oscillator
D1 clk27rf shows the RF clock multiplied by 2.
D0 clk13rf shows the RF clock of 13.56 MHz
Table 163. Testsignal routing (TestSel2Reg = 19h)
Pins D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Testsignal - TRunning - - - - -
Table 164. Description of Testsignals
Pins Testsignal Description
D6 - -
D5 TRunning TRunning stops 1 clockcycle after TimerIRQ is raised
D4 - -
D3 - -
D2 - -
D1 - -
D0 - -
Table 165. Testsignals description
SelAux Description for Aux1 / Aux2
0000 Tristate
0001 DAC: register TestDAC 1/2
0010 DAC: testsignal corr1
0011 DAC: testsignal corr2
0100 DAC: testsignal MinLevel
0101 DAC: ADC_I
0110 DAC: ADC_Q
0111 DAC: testsignal ADC_I combined with ADC_Q
1000 Testsignal for production test
1001 SAM clock
1010 High
1011 low
1100 TxActive
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 109 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Each signal can be switched to pin AUX1 or AUX2 by setting SelAux1 or SelAux2 in the
register AnalogTestReg.
Note: The DAC has a current output, it is recommended to use a 1 k pull-down
resistance at pins AUX1/AUX2.
20.4 PRBS
Enables the PRBS9 or PRBS15 sequence according to ITU-TO150. To start the
transmission of the defined datastream the command send has to be activated. The
preamble/Sync byte/start bit/parity bit are generated automatically depending on the
selected mode.
Note: All relevant register to transmit data have to be configured before entering PRBS
mode according ITU-TO150.
21. Errata sheet
This data sheet is describing the functionality for version 2.0 and the industrial version.
This chapter lists all differences from version 1.0 to version 2.0:
The value of the version in Section 9.2.4.8 is set to80h.
The behaviour ‘RFU’ for the register is undefined.
The answer to the Selftest (see Section 20.1) for version 1.0 (VersionReg equal to 80h):
00h, AAh, E3h, 29h, 0Ch, 10h, 29zhh, 6Bh,
76h, 8Dh, AFh, 4Bh, A2h, DAh, 76h, 99h
C7h, 5Eh, 24h, 69h, D2h, BAh, FAh, BCh
3Eh, DAh, 96h, B5h, F5h, 94h, B0h, 3Ah
4Eh, C3h, 9Dh, 94h, 76h, 4Ch, EAh, 5Eh
38h, 10h, 8Fh, 2Dh, 21h, 4Bh, 52h, BFh
4Eh, C3h, 9Dh, 94h, 76h, 4Ch, EAh, 5Eh
38h, 10h, 8Fh, 2Dh, 21h, 4Bh, 52h, BFh
FBh, F4h, 19h, 94h, 82h, 5Ah, 72h, 9Dh
BAh, 0Dh, 1Fh, 17h, 56h, 22h, B9h, 08h
Only the default setting for the prescaler (see Section 15 “Timer unit” on page 96): t =
((TPreScaler*2+1)*TReload+1)/13,56 MHz is supported. As such only the formula fTimer =
13,56 MHz/(2*PreScaler+1) is applicable for the TPrescalerHigh in Table 100 “Description
of TModeReg bits” on page 57 and TPrescalerLo in Table 101 “TPrescalerReg register
(address 2Bh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b” on page 58. As there is no option for the
prescaler available, also the TPrescalEven is not available Section 9.2.2.10 on page 45.
This bit is set to ‘RFU’.
1101 RxActive
1110 Subcarrier detected
1111 TstBusBit
Table 165. Testsignals description
SelAux Description for Aux1 / Aux2
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 110 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Especially when using time slot protocols, it is needed that the error flag is copied into the
status information of the frame. When using the RxMultiple feature (see Section 9.2.2.4
on page 39) within version 1.0 the protocol error flag is not included in the status
information for the frame. In addition the CRCOk is copied instead of the CRCErr. This
can be a problem in frames without length information e.g. ISO/IEC 14443-B.
The version 1.0 does not accept a Type B EOF if there is no 1 bit after the series of 0 bits,
as such the configuration within Section 9.2.2.15 “TypeBReg” on page 50 bit 4 for
RxEOFReq does not exist. In addition the IC only has the possibility to select the
minimum or maximum timings for SOF/EOF generation defined in ISO/IEC14443B. As
such the configuration possible in version 2.0 through the EOFSOFAdjust bit (see Section
9.2.4.7 “AutoTestReg” on page 64) does not exist and the configuration is limited to only
setting minimum and maximum length according ISO/IEC 14443-B, see Section 9.2.2.15
“TypeBReg” on page 50, bit 4.
22. Application design-in information
The figure below shows a typical circuit diagram, using a complementary antenna
connection to the PN512.
The antenna tuning and RF part matching is described in the application note “NFC
Transmission Module Antenna and RF Design Guide”.
Fig 38. Typical circuit diagram
AVDD TVDD
RX
VMID
supply
TX1
TVSS
TX2
DVSS
DVDD
DVDD
PVDD
SVDD
AVSS
IRQ
NRSTPD
R1
R2
L0
C0
C0
C2
C1
CRX
RQ
C1 RQ
C2
L0
Cvmid
001aan232
27.12 MHz
OSCIN OSCOUT
HOST
CONTROLLER
interface
PN512
antenna
Lant
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 111 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
23. Limiting values
24. Recommended operating conditions
Table 166. Limiting values
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
VDDA analog supply voltage 0.5 +4.0 V
VDDD digital supply voltage 0.5 +4.0 V
VDD(PVDD) PVDD supply voltage 0.5 +4.0 V
VDD(TVDD) TVDD supply voltage 0.5 +4.0 V
VDD(SVDD) SVDD supply voltage 0.5 +4.0 V
VI input voltage all input pins except pins SIGIN and
RX
VSS(PVSS) 0.5 VDD(PVDD) + 0.5 V
pin MFIN VSS(PVSS) 0.5 VDD(SVDD) + 0.5 V
Ptot total power dissipation per package; and VDDD in shortcut
mode
- 200 mW
Tj junction temperature - 125 C
VESD electrostatic discharge
voltage
HBM; 1500 , 100 pF;
JESD22-A114-B
- 2000 V
MM; 0.75 H, 200 pF;
JESD22-A114-A
- 200 V
Charged device model;
JESD22-C101-A
on all pins - 200 V
on all pins except SVDD in
TFBGA64 package
- 500 V
Industrial version:
VESD electrostatic discharge
voltage
HBM; 1500 , 100 pF;
JESD22-A114-B
- 2000 V
MM; 0.75 H, 200 pF;
JESD22-A114-A
- 200 V
Charged device model;
AEC-Q100-011
on all pins - 200 V
on all pins except SVDD - 500 V
Table 167. Operating conditions
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
VDDA analog supply voltage VDD(PVDD) VDDA = VDDD = VDD(TVDD);
VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V
[1][2] 2.5 - 3.6 V
VDDD digital supply voltage VDD(PVDD) VDDA = VDDD = VDD(TVDD);
VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V
[1][2] 2.5 - 3.6 V
VDD(TVDD) TVDD supply voltage VDD(PVDD) VDDA = VDDD = VDD(TVDD);
VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V
[1][2] 2.5 - 3.6 V
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 112 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
[1] Supply voltages below 3 V reduce the performance (the achievable operating distance).
[2] VDDA, VDDD and VDD(TVDD) must always be the same voltage.
[3] VDD(PVDD) must always be the same or lower voltage than VDDD.
25. Thermal characteristics
26. Characteristics
VDD(PVDD) PVDD supply voltage VDD(PVDD) VDDA = VDDD = VDD(TVDD);
VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V
[3] 1.6 - 3.6 V
VDD(SVDD) SVDD supply voltage VSSA = VSSD = VSS(PVSS) = VSS(TVSS) = 0 V 1.6 - 3.6 V
Tamb ambient temperature HVQFN32, HVQFN40, TFBGA64 30 - +85 C
Industrial version:
Tamb ambient temperature HVQFN32 40 - +90 C
Table 167. Operating conditions …continued
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Table 168. Thermal characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Package Typ Unit
Rthj-a Thermal resistance from
junction to ambient
In still air with exposed pad
soldered on a 4 layer Jedec PCB
In still air
HVQFN32 40 K/W
HVQFN40 35 K/W
TFBGA64 K/W
Table 169. Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Input characteristics
Pins A0, A1 and NRSTPD
ILI input leakage current 1 - +1 A
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD(PVDD)- - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(PVDD) V
Pin SIGIN
ILI input leakage current 1 - +1 A
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD(SVDD)- - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(SVDD) V
Pin ALE
ILI input leakage current 1 - +1 A
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD(PVDD)- - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(PVDD) V
Pin RX[1]
Vi input voltage 1 - VDDA +1 V
Ci input capacitance VDDA = 3 V; receiver active;
VRX(p-p) = 1 V; 1.5 V (DC)
offset
- 10 - pF
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 113 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Ri input resistance VDDA = 3 V; receiver active;
VRX(p-p) = 1 V; 1.5 V (DC)
offset
- 350 -
Input voltage range; see Figure 39
Vi(p-p)(min) minimum peak-to-peak input
voltage
Manchester encoded;
VDDA = 3 V
- 100 - mV
Vi(p-p)(max) maximum peak-to-peak input
voltage
Manchester encoded;
VDDA = 3 V
- 4 - V
Input sensitivity; see Figure 39
Vmod modulation voltage minimum Manchester
encoded; VDDA = 3 V;
RxGain[2:0] = 111b (48 dB)
- 5 - mV
Pin OSCIN
ILI input leakage current 1 - +1 A
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDDA - - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDDA V
Ci input capacitance VDDA = 2.8 V; DC = 0.65 V;
AC = 1 V (p-p)
- 2 - pF
Input/output characteristics
pins D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6 and D7
ILI input leakage current 1 - +1 A
VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD(PVDD)- - V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(PVDD) V
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDD(PVDD) = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VDD(PVDD)
0.4
- VDD(PVDD) V
VOL LOW-level output voltage VDD(PVDD) = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VSS(PVSS) - VSS(PVSS) +
0.4
V
IOH HIGH-level output current VDD(PVDD) = 3 V - - 4 mA
IOL LOW-level output current VDD(PVDD) = 3 V - - 4 mA
Output characteristics
Pin SIGOUT
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDD(SVDD) = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VDD(SVDD)
0.4
- VDD(SVDD) V
VOL LOW-level output voltage VDD(SVDD) = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VSS(PVSS) - VSS(PVSS) +
0.4
V
IOL LOW-level output current VDD(SVDD) = 3 V - - 4 mA
IOH HIGH-level output current VDD(SVDD) = 3 V - - 4 mA
Pin IRQ
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDD(PVDD) = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VDD(PVDD)
0.4
- VDD(PVDD) V
VOL LOW-level output voltage VDD(PVDD) = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VSS(PVSS) - VSS(PVSS) +
0.4
V
IOL LOW-level output current VDD(PVDD) = 3 V - - 4 mA
IOH HIGH-level output current VDD(PVDD) = 3 V - - 4 mA
Table 169. Characteristics …continued
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 114 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Pins AUX1 and AUX2
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDDD = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VDDD 0.4 - VDDD V
VOL LOW-level output voltage VDDD = 3 V; IO = 4 mA VSS(PVSS) - VSS(PVSS) +
0.4
V
IOL LOW-level output current VDDD= 3 V - - 4 mA
IOH HIGH-level output current VDDD= 3 V - - 4 mA
Pins TX1 and TX2
VOL LOW-level output voltage VDD(TVDD) = 3 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 32 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 0Fh
- - 0.15 V
VDD(TVDD) = 3 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 80 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 0Fh
- - 0.4 V
VDD(TVDD) = 2.5 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 32 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 0Fh
- - 0.24 V
VDD(TVDD) = 2.5 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 80 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 0Fh
- - 0.64 V
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDD(TVDD) = 3 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 32 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
VDD(TVDD)
0.15
- - V
VDD(TVDD) = 3 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 80 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
VDD(TVDD)
0.4
- - V
VDD(TVDD) = 2.5 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 32 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
VDD(TVDD)
0.24
- - V
VDD(TVDD) = 2.5 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 80 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
VDD(TVDD)
0.64
- - V
Industrial version:
VOL LOW-level output voltage VDD(TVDD) = 2.5 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 32 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
- - 0.18 V
VDD(TVDD) = 2.5 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 80 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
- - 0.44 V
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDD(TVDD) = 3 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 32 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
VDD(TVDD)
0.18
- - V
VDD(TVDD) = 3 V;
IDD(TVDD) = 80 mA;
CWGsP[5:0] = 3Fh
VDD(TVDD)
0.44
- - V
Output resistance for TX1/TX2,
Industrial Version:
ROP,01H High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 01h
123 180 261
Table 169. Characteristics …continued
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 115 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
ROP,02H High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 02h
61 90 131
ROP,04H High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 04h
30 46 68
ROP,08H High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 08h
15 23 35
ROP,10H High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 10h
7.5 12 19
ROP,20H High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 20h
4.2 6 9
ROP,3FH High level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsP = 3Fh
2 3 5
RON,10H Low level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsN = 10h
30 46 68
RON,20H Low level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsN = 20h
15 23 35
RON,40H Low level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsN = 40h
7.5 12 19
RON,80H Low level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsN = 80h
4.2 6 9
RON,F0H Low level output resistance TVDD = 3 V, VTX = TVDD -
100 mV, CWGsN = F0h
2 3 5
Current consumption
Ipd power-down current VDDA= VDDD = VDD(TVDD) =
VDD(PVDD) = 3 V
hard power-down; pin
NRSTPD set LOW
[2]- - 5 A
soft power-down; RF
level detector on
[2]- - 10 A
IDD(PVDD) PVDD supply current pin PVDD [3]- - 40 mA
IDD(TVDD) TVDD supply current pin TVDD; continuous wave [4][5][6]- 60 100 mA
IDD(SVDD) SVDD supply current pin SVDD [7]- - 4 mA
IDDD digital supply current pin DVDD; VDDD= 3 V - 6.5 9 mA
IDDA analog supply current pin AVDD; VDDA= 3 V,
CommandReg register’s
RcvOff bit = 0
- 7 10 mA
pin AVDD; receiver
switched off; VDDA = 3 V,
CommandReg register’s
RcvOff bit = 1
- 3 5 mA
Industrial version:
IDDD digital supply current pin DVDD; VDDD= 3 V - 6.5 9,5 mA
Table 169. Characteristics …continued
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 116 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
[1] The voltage on pin RX is clamped by internal diodes to pins AVSS and AVDD.
[2] Ipd is the total current for all supplies.
[3] IDD(PVDD) depends on the overall load at the digital pins.
[4] IDD(TVDD) depends on VDD(TVDD) and the external circuit connected to pins TX1 and TX2.
[5] During typical circuit operation, the overall current is below 100 mA.
[6] Typical value using a complementary driver configuration and an antenna matched to 40 between pins TX1 and TX2 at 13.56 MHz.
[7] IDD(SVDD) depends on the load at pin MFOUT.
Ipd power-down current VDDA= VDDD = VDD(TVDD) =
VDD(PVDD) = 3 V
hard power-down; pin
NRSTPD set LOW
[2]- - 15 A
soft power-down; RF
level detector on
[2]- - 30 A
Clock frequency
fclk clock frequency - 27.12 - MHz
clk clock duty cycle 40 50 60 %
tjit jitter time RMS - - 10 ps
Crystal oscillator
VOH HIGH-level output voltage pin OSCOUT - 1.1 - V
VOL LOW-level output voltage pin OSCOUT - 0.2 - V
Ci input capacitance pin OSCOUT - 2 - pF
pin OSCIN - 2 - pF
Typical input requirements
fxtal crystal frequency - 27.12 - MHz
ESR equivalent series resistance - - 100
CL load capacitance - 10 - pF
Pxtal crystal power dissipation - 50 100 W
Table 169. Characteristics …continued
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 117 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
26.1 Timing characteristics
Fig 39. Pin RX input voltage range
001aak012
VMID
0 V
Vmod
Vi(p-p)(max) Vi(p-p)(min)
13.56 MHz
carrier
Table 170. SPI timing characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
tWL pulse width LOW line SCK 50 - - ns
tWH pulse width HIGH line SCK 50 - - ns
th(SCKH-D) SCK HIGH to data input
hold time
SCK to changing
MOSI
25 - - ns
tsu(D-SCKH) data input to SCK HIGH
set-up time
changing MOSI to
SCK
25 - - ns
th(SCKL-Q) SCK LOW to data output
hold time
SCK to changing
MISO
- - 25 ns
t(SCKL-NSSH) SCK LOW to NSS HIGH
time
0 - - ns
Table 171. I2C-bus timing in Fast mode
Symbol Parameter Conditions Fast mode High-speed
mode
Unit
Min Max Min Max
fSCL SCL clock frequency 0 400 0 3400 kHz
tHD;STA hold time (repeated) START
condition
after this period,
the first clock pulse
is generated
600 - 160 - ns
tSU;STA set-up time for a repeated
START condition
600 - 160 - ns
tSU;STO set-up time for STOP condition 600 - 160 - ns
tLOW LOW period of the SCL clock 1300 - 160 - ns
tHIGH HIGH period of the SCL clock 600 - 60 - ns
tHD;DAT data hold time 0 900 0 70 ns
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 118 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
tSU;DAT data set-up time 100 - 10 - ns
tr rise time SCL signal 20 300 10 40 ns
tf fall time SCL signal 20 300 10 40 ns
tr rise time SDA and SCL
signals
20 300 10 80 ns
tf fall time SDA and SCL
signals
20 300 10 80 ns
tBUF bus free time between a STOP
and START condition
1.3 - 1.3 - s
Remark: The signal NSS must be LOW to be able to send several bytes in one data stream.
To send more than one data stream NSS must be set HIGH between the data streams.
Fig 40. Timing diagram for SPI
Fig 41. Timing for Fast and Standard mode devices on the I2C-bus
Table 171. I2C-bus timing in Fast mode …continued
Symbol Parameter Conditions Fast mode High-speed
mode
Unit
Min Max Min Max
001aaj634
tSCKL tSCKH tSCKL
tDXSH tSHDX tDXSH
tSLDX
tSLNH
MOSI
SCK
MISO
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
NSS
001aaj635
SDA
tf
SCL
tLOW tf
tSP tr
tHD;STA
tHD;DAT
tHD;STA
tr tHIGH
tSU;DAT
S Sr P S
tSU;STA
tSU;STO
tBUF
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 119 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
26.2 8-bit parallel interface timing
26.2.1 AC symbols
Each timing symbol has five characters. The first character is always 't' for time. The other
characters indicate the name of a signal or the logic state of that signal (depending on
position):
Example: tAVLL = time for address valid to ALE low
26.2.2 AC operating specification
26.2.2.1 Bus timing for separated Read/Write strobe
Table 172. AC symbols
Designation Signal Designation Logic Level
A address H HIGH
D data L LOW
W NWR or nWait Z high impedance
R NRD or R/NW or nWrite X any level or data
L ALE or AS V any valid signal or data
C NCS N NSS
S NDS or nDStrb and nAStrb, SCK
Table 173. Timing specification for separated Read/Write strobe
Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit
tLHLL ALE pulse width 10 - ns
tAVLL Multiplexed Address Bus valid to ALE low (Address Set Up Time) 5 - ns
tLLAX Multiplexed Address Bus valid after ALE low (Address Hold Time) 5 - ns
tLLWL ALE low to NWR, NRD low 10 - ns
tCLWL NCS low to NRD, NWR low 0 - ns
tWHCH NRD, NWR high to NCS high 0 - ns
tRLDV NRD low to DATA valid - 35 ns
tRHDZ NRD high to DATA high impedance - 10 ns
tDVWH DATA valid to NWR high 5 - ns
tWHDX DATA hold after NWR high (Data Hold Time) 5 - ns
tWLWH NRD, NWR pulse width 40 - ns
tAVWL Separated Address Bus valid to NRD, NWR low (Set Up Time) 30 - ns
tWHAX Separated Address Bus valid after NWR high (Hold Time) 5 - ns
tWHWL period between sequenced read/write accesses 40 - ns
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 120 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Remark: For separated address and data bus the signal ALE is not relevant and the
multiplexed addresses on the data bus don’t care.
For the multiplexed address and data bus the address lines A0 to A3 have to be
connected as described in chapter Automatic host controller Interface Type Detection.
26.2.2.2 Bus timing for common Read/Write strobe
Fig 42. Timing diagram for separated Read/Write strobe
001aan233
tLHLL
tCLWL
tLLWL
tWHWL tWLWH tWHWL
tWHDX
tRHDZ
tWLDV
tRLDV
tWHCH
tWHAX
tAVLL tLLAX
tAVWL
ALE
NCS
NWR
NRD
D0...D7 D0...D7
A0...A3
multiplexed
addressbus
A0...A3
SEPARATED ADDRESSBUS A0...A3
Table 174. Timing specification for common Read/Write strobe
Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit
tLHLL AS pulse width 10 - ns
tAVLL Multiplexed Address Bus valid to AS low (Address Set Up Time) 5 - ns
tLLAX Multiplexed Address Bus valid after AS low (Address Hold Time) 5 - ns
tLLSL AS low to NDS low 10 - ns
tCLSL NCS low to NDS low 0 - ns
tSHCH NDS high to NCS high 0 - ns
tSLDV,R NDS low to DATA valid (for read cycle) - 35 ns
tSHDZ NDS low to DATA high impedance (read cycle) - 10 ns
tDVSH DATA valid to NDS high (for write cycle) 5 - ns
tSHDX DATA hold after NDS high (write cycle, Hold Time) 5 - ns
tSHRX R/NW hold after NDS high 5 - ns
tSLSH NDS pulse width 40 - ns
tAVSL Separated Address Bus valid to NDS low (Hold Time) 30 - ns
tSHAX Separated Address Bus valid after NDS high (Set Up Time) 5 - ns
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 121 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Remark: For separated address and data bus the signal ALE is not relevant and the
multiplexed addresses on the data bus don’t care. For the multiplexed address and data
bus the address lines A0 to A3 have to be connected as described in Automatic
-Controller Interface Type Detection.
Fig 43. Timing diagram for common Read/Write strobe
SEPARATED ADDRESSBUS A0...A3
multiplexed
addressbus
A0...A3
ALE
tLHLL
tCLSL
R/NW
NDS
D0...D7 D0...D7
A0...A3
NCS
tSHCH
tRVSL tSHRX
tLLSL
tSLSH tSHSL
tAVLL
tLLAX
tSLDV, R
tSLDV, W tSHDX
tSHDZ
tSHAX
tAVSL
tSHSL
001aan234
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 122 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
27. Package information
The PN512 can be delivered in 3 different packages.
Table 175. Package information
Package Remarks
HVQFN32 8-bit parallel interface not supported
HVQFN40 Supports the 8-bit parallel interface
TFBGA64 Ball grid array facilitating development of an PCI compliant device
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 123 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
28. Package outline
Fig 44. Package outline package version (HVQFN32)
1 0.5
UNIT A1 b Eh e y
0.2
c
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 5.1
4.9
Dh
3.25
2.95
y1
5.1
4.9
3.25
2.95
e1
3.5
e2
3.5
0.30
0.18
0.05
0.00
0.05 0.1
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
SOT617-1 - - - MO-220 - - -
0.5
0.3
L
0.1
v
0.05
w
0 2.5 5 mm
scale
SOT617-1
HVQFN32: plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
32 terminals; body 5 x 5 x 0.85 mm
A(1)
max.
A
A1
c
detail X
e y1 C y
L
Eh
Dh
e
e1
b
9 16
32 25
24
17
8
1
X
D
E
C
B A
e2
terminal 1
index area
terminal 1
index area
01-08-08
02-10-18
1/2 e
1/2 e C A
C
v M B
w M
E(1)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are not included.
D(1)
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 124 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Fig 45. Package outline package version (HVQFN40)
Outline References
version
European
projection Issue date
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT618-1 MO-220
sot618-1_po
02-10-22
13-11-05
Unit
mm
max
nom
min
1.00 0.05 0.2 6.1 4.25 6.1
0.4
A(1)
Dimensions (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are not included.
HVQFN40: plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads;
40 terminals; body 6 x 6 x 0.85 mm SOT618-1
A1 b
0.30
c D(1) Dh E(1) Eh
4.10
e e1 e2 L v w
0.05
y
0.05
y1
0.1
0.85 0.02 0.21 6.0 4.10 6.0
0.80 0.00 0.18 5.9 3.95 5.9 3.95 0.3
4.25 0.5 4.5 4.5 0.5 0.1
e
e
1/2 e
1/2 e
y
terminal 1
index area
A
A1
c
L
Eh
Dh
b
11 20
40 31
30
10 21
1
D
E
terminal 1
index area
0 2.5 5 mm
scale
e1
C A
C
v B
w y1 C
C
e2
X
detail X
B A
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 125 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Fig 46. Package outline package version (TFBGA64)
Outline References
version
European
projection Issue date
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT1336-1 - - -
sot1336-1_po
12-06-19
12-08-28
Unit
mm
max
nom
min
1.15 0.35 0.45 5.6 5.6
4.55 0.15 0.1
A
Dimensions (mm are the original dimensions)
TFBGA64: plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 64 balls
A1 A2
0.80
1.00 0.30 0.70 0.40 5.5 5.5 0.65
b D E e e1
4.55
0.90 0.25 0.65 0.35 5.4 5.4
e2 v w
0.08
y y1
0.1
SOT1336-1
C
y1 C y
0 5 mm
scale
X
A
A2
A1
detail X
ball A1
index area
ball A1
index area
A
E
D B
e2
e
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
e1
e Ø v C A B
Ø w C
b
1/2 e
1/2 e
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 126 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
29. Abbreviations
30. Glossary
Modulation index — Defined as the voltage ratio (Vmax Vmin) / (Vmax + Vmin).
Load modulation index — Defined as the voltage ratio for the card
(Vmax Vmin) / (Vmax + Vmin) measured at the card’s coil.
Initiator — Generates RF field at 13.56 MHz and starts the NFCIP-1 communication.
Target — Responds to command either using load modulation scheme (RF field
generated by Initiator) or using modulation of self generated RF field (no RF field
generated by initiator).
31. References
[1] Application note — NFC Transmission Module Antenna and RF Design Guide
Table 176. Abbreviations
Acronym Description
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter
ASK Amplitude Shift keying
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CW Continuous Wave
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
EOF End of frame
HBM Human Body Model
I2C Inter-integrated Circuit
LSB Least Significant Bit
MISO Master In Slave Out
MM Machine Model
MOSI Master Out Slave In
MSB Most Significant Bit
NSS Not Slave Select
PCB Printed-Circuit Board
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PRBS Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence
RX Receiver
SOF Start Of Frame
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
TX Transmitter
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 127 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
32. Revision history
Table 177. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
PN512 v.4.5 20131217 Product data sheet - PN512 v.4.4
Modifications: • Typo corrected
PN512 v.4.4 20130730 Product data sheet - PN512 v.4.3
Modifications: • Value added in Table 166 “Limiting values”
• Change of descriptive title
PN512 v.4.3 20130507 Product data sheet - PN512 v.4.2
Modifications: • New type PN5120A0ET/C2 added
• Table 72 “Description of MifNFCReg bits”: description of TxWait updated
• Table 153 “Register and bit settings controlling the signal on pin TX1” and Table 153 “Register
and bit settings controlling the signal on pin TX1”: updated
• Table 166 “Limiting values”: VESD values added
PN512 v.4.2 20120828 Product data sheet - PN512 v.4.1
Modifications: • Table 123 “AutoTestReg register (address 36h); reset value: 40h, 01000000b”: description of
bits 4 and 5 corrected
PN512 v.4.1 20120821 Product data sheet - PN512 v.4.0
Modifications: • Table 124 “Description of bits”: description of bits 4 and 5 corrected
PN512 v.4.0 20120712 Product data sheet - PN512 v.3.9
Modifications: • Section 33.4 “Licenses”: updated
PN512 v.3.9 20120201 Product data sheet - PN512 v.3.8
Modifications: • Adding information on the different version in General description.
• Adding Section 21 “Errata sheet” on page 109 for explanation of differences between 1.0 and
2.0.
• Adding ordering information for version 1.0 and industrial version in Table 2 “Ordering
information” on page 5
• Adding the limitations and characteristics for the industrial version, see Table 1 “Quick
reference data” on page 4, Table 166 “Limiting values” on page 111, Table 1 “Quick reference
data” on page 4
• Referring to the Section 21 “Errata sheet” on page 109 within the following sections: Section
9.2.2.4 “RxModeReg” on page 39, Section 9.2.2.10 “DemodReg” on page 45, Section 9.2.2.15
“TypeBReg” on page 50, Section 9.2.3.10 “TMode Register, TPrescaler Register” on page 57,
Section 9.2.4.7 “AutoTestReg” on page 64, Section 9.2.4.8 “VersionReg” on page 64, Section
9.1.1 “Register bit behavior” on page 23, Section 15 “Timer unit” on page 96, Section 20
“Testsignals” on page 107;
• Update of command ‘Mem’ to ‘Configure’ and ‘RFU’ to ‘Autocoll’ in Table 158 “Command
overview” on page 101.
• Change of ‘Mem’ to ‘Configure’ in ‘Mem’ in Section 19.3.1.2 “Config command” on page 101
• Adding Autocoll in Section 19.3.1.9 “AutoColl” on page 103
PN512 v.3.8 20111025 Product data sheet - PN512 v.3.7
Modifications: • Table 168 “Characteristics”: unit of Pxtal corrected
111310 June 2005 Objective data sheet -
Modifications: • Initial version
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 128 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
33. Legal information
33.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
33.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
33.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 129 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the
product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this
document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
33.4 Licenses
33.5 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
I2C-bus — logo is a trademark of NXP B.V.
MIFARE — is a trademark of NXP B.V.
34. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Purchase of NXP ICs with ISO/IEC 14443 type B functionality
This NXP Semiconductors IC is ISO/IEC 14443 Type B
software enabled and is licensed under Innovatron’s
Contactless Card patents license for ISO/IEC 14443 B.
The license includes the right to use the IC in systems
and/or end-user equipment.
RATP/Innovatron
Technology
Purchase of NXP ICs with NFC technology
Purchase of an NXP Semiconductors IC that complies with one of the Near
Field Communication (NFC) standards ISO/IEC 18092 and ISO/IEC 21481
does not convey an implied license under any patent right infringed by
implementation of any of those standards.
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 130 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
35. Tables
Table 1. Quick reference data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Table 2. Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Table 3. Pin description HVQFN32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Table 4. Pin description HVQFN40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 5. Pin description TFBGA64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Table 6. Communication overview for
ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE reader/writer . . . . .14
Table 7. Communication overview for FeliCa
reader/writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Table 8. FeliCa framing and coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Table 9. Start value for the CRC Polynomial: (00h),
(00h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Table 10. Communication overview for Active
communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Table 11. Communication overview for Passive
communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Table 12. Framing and coding overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Table 13. MIFARE Card operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Table 14. FeliCa Card operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Table 15. PN512 registers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Table 16. Behavior of register bits and its designation. . .23
Table 17. PageReg register (address 00h); reset value:
00h, 0000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Table 18. Description of PageReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Table 19. CommandReg register (address 01h); reset
value: 20h, 00100000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Table 20. Description of CommandReg bits. . . . . . . . . . .24
Table 21. CommIEnReg register (address 02h); reset
value: 80h, 10000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Table 22. Description of CommIEnReg bits . . . . . . . . . . .25
Table 23. DivIEnReg register (address 03h); reset value:
00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Table 24. Description of DivIEnReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Table 25. CommIRqReg register (address 04h); reset
value: 14h, 00010100b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Table 26. Description of CommIRqReg bits . . . . . . . . . . .27
Table 27. DivIRqReg register (address 05h); reset
value: XXh, 000X00XXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table 28. Description of DivIRqReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table 29. ErrorReg register (address 06h); reset value:
00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Table 30. Description of ErrorReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Table 31. Status1Reg register (address 07h); reset
value: XXh, X100X01Xb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Table 32. Description of Status1Reg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Table 33. Status2Reg register (address 08h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Table 34. Description of Status2Reg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Table 35. FIFODataReg register (address 09h); reset
value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Table 36. Description of FIFODataReg bits . . . . . . . . . . .32
Table 37. FIFOLevelReg register (address 0Ah); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Table 38. Description of FIFOLevelReg bits. . . . . . . . . . .32
Table 39. WaterLevelReg register (address 0Bh); reset
value: 08h, 00001000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Table 40. Description of WaterLevelReg bits. . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 41. ControlReg register (address 0Ch); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 42. Description of ControlReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 43. BitFramingReg register (address 0Dh); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 44. Description of BitFramingReg bits . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 45. CollReg register (address 0Eh); reset
value: XXh, 101XXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 46. Description of CollReg bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 47. PageReg register (address 10h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 48. Description of PageReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 49. ModeReg register (address 11h); reset value:
3Bh, 00111011b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 50. Description of ModeReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 51. TxModeReg register (address 12h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 52. Description of TxModeReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 53. RxModeReg register (address 13h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 54. Description of RxModeReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 55. TxControlReg register (address 14h); reset
value: 80h, 10000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 56. Description of TxControlReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 57. TxAutoReg register (address 15h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 58. Description of TxAutoReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 59. TxSelReg register (address 16h); reset value:
10h, 00010000b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 60. Description of TxSelReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 61. RxSelReg register (address 17h); reset value:
84h, 10000100b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 62. Description of RxSelReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 63. RxThresholdReg register (address 18h);
reset value: 84h, 10000100b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 64. Description of RxThresholdReg bits . . . . . . . . 44
Table 65. DemodReg register (address 19h); reset
value: 4Dh, 01001101b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 66. Description of DemodReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 67. FelNFC1Reg register (address 1Ah); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 68. Description of FelNFC1Reg bits . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 69. FelNFC2Reg register (address1Bh); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 70. Description of FelNFC2Reg bits . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 71. MifNFCReg register (address 1Ch); reset
value: 62h, 01100010b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 72. Description of MifNFCReg bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 73. ManualRCVReg register (address 1Dh);
reset value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 74. Description of ManualRCVReg bits . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 75. TypeBReg register (address 1Eh); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 76. Description of TypeBReg bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 77. SerialSpeedReg register (address 1Fh);
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 131 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
reset value: EBh, 11101011b . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Table 78. Description of SerialSpeedReg bits . . . . . . . . .51
Table 79. PageReg register (address 20h); reset value:
00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 80. Description of PageReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 81. CRCResultReg register (address 21h); reset
value: FFh, 11111111b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 82. Description of CRCResultReg bits . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 83. CRCResultReg register (address 22h); reset
value: FFh, 11111111b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 84. Description of CRCResultReg bits . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 85. GsNOffReg register (address 23h); reset
value: 88h, 10001000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Table 86. Description of GsNOffReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Table 87. ModWidthReg register (address 24h); reset
value: 26h, 00100110b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Table 88. Description of ModWidthReg bits . . . . . . . . . . .54
Table 89. TxBitPhaseReg register (address 25h); reset
value: 87h, 10000111b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Table 90. Description of TxBitPhaseReg bits . . . . . . . . . .54
Table 91. RFCfgReg register (address 26h); reset
value: 48h, 01001000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Table 92. Description of RFCfgReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Table 93. GsNOnReg register (address 27h); reset
value: 88h, 10001000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Table 94. Description of GsNOnReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Table 95. CWGsPReg register (address 28h); reset
value: 20h, 00100000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Table 96. Description of CWGsPReg bits. . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Table 97. ModGsPReg register (address 29h); reset
value: 20h, 00100000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Table 98. Description of ModGsPReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Table 99. TModeReg register (address 2Ah); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Table 100. Description of TModeReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Table 101. TPrescalerReg register (address 2Bh); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Table 102. Description of TPrescalerReg bits . . . . . . . . . .58
Table 103. TReloadReg (Higher bits) register (address
2Ch); reset value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . .59
Table 104. Description of the higher TReloadReg bits . . .59
Table 105. TReloadReg (Lower bits) register (address
2Dh); reset value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . .59
Table 106. Description of lower TReloadReg bits . . . . . . .59
Table 107. TCounterValReg (Higher bits) register (address
2Eh); reset value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb . . . . . . .60
Table 108. Description of the higher TCounterValReg bits 60
Table 109. TCounterValReg (Lower bits) register (address
2Fh); reset value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb. . . . . . . .60
Table 110. Description of lower TCounterValReg bits . . . .60
Table 111. PageReg register (address 30h); reset value:
00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Table 112. Description of PageReg bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Table 113. TestSel1Reg register (address 31h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Table 114. Description of TestSel1Reg bits . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Table 115. TestSel2Reg register (address 32h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Table 116. Description of TestSel2Reg bits. . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 117. TestPinEnReg register (address 33h); reset
value: 80h, 10000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 118. Description of TestPinEnReg bits . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 119. TestPinValueReg register (address 34h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 120. Description of TestPinValueReg bits . . . . . . . . 63
Table 121. TestBusReg register (address 35h); reset
value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 122. Description of TestBusReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 123. AutoTestReg register (address 36h); reset
value: 40h, 01000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 124. Description of bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 125. VersionReg register (address 37h); reset
value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 126. Description of VersionReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 127. AnalogTestReg register (address 38h); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 128. Description of AnalogTestReg bits . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 129. TestDAC1Reg register (address 39h); reset
value: XXh, 00XXXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 130. Description of TestDAC1Reg bits . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 131. TestDAC2Reg register (address 3Ah); reset
value: XXh, 00XXXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 132. Description ofTestDAC2Reg bits. . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 133. TestADCReg register (address 3Bh); reset
value: XXh, XXXXXXXXb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 134. Description of TestADCReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 135. RFTReg register (address 3Ch); reset value:
FFh, 11111111b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 136. Description of RFTReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 137. RFTReg register (address 3Dh, 3Fh); reset
value: 00h, 00000000b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 138. Description of RFTReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 139. RFTReg register (address 3Eh); reset value:
03h, 00000011b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 140. Description of RFTReg bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 141. Connection protocol for detecting different
interface types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 142. Connection scheme for detecting the different
interface types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 143. MOSI and MISO byte order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 144. MOSI and MISO byte order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 145. Address byte 0 register; address MOSI . . . . . 71
Table 146. BR_T0 and BR_T1 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 147. Selectable UART transfer speeds . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 148. UART framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 149. Read data byte order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 150. Write data byte order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 151. Address byte 0 register; address MOSI . . . . . 75
Table 152. Supported interface types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 153. Register and bit settings controlling the
signal on pin TX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 154. Register and bit settings controlling the
signal on pin TX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 155. Setting of the bits RFlevel in register
RFCfgReg (RFLevel amplifier deactivated) . . . 86
Table 156. CRC coprocessor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 132 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
Table 157. Interrupt sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Table 158. Command overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Table 159. Testsignal routing (TestSel2Reg = 07h) . . . . .107
Table 160. Description of Testsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Table 161. Testsignal routing (TestSel2Reg = 0Dh) . . . .108
Table 162. Description of Testsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Table 163. Testsignal routing (TestSel2Reg = 19h) . . . . .108
Table 164. Description of Testsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Table 165. Testsignals description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Table 166. Limiting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 167. Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 168. Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 169. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 170. SPI timing characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Table 171. I2C-bus timing in Fast mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Table 172. AC symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 173. Timing specification for separated
Read/Write strobe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 174. Timing specification for common
Read/Write strobe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Table 175. Package information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Table 176. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Table 177. Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 133 of 136
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
36. Figures
Fig 1. Simplified block diagram of the PN512 . . . . . . . . .6
Fig 2. Detailed block diagram of the PN512 . . . . . . . . . .7
Fig 3. Pinning configuration HVQFN32 (SOT617-1) . . . .8
Fig 4. Pinning configuration HVQFN40 (SOT618-1) . . . .8
Fig 5. Pin configuration TFBGA64 (SOT1336-1) . . . . . . .9
Fig 6. PN512 Read/Write mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Fig 7. ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE Read/Write mode
communication diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Fig 8. Data coding and framing according to
ISO/IEC 14443 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Fig 9. FeliCa reader/writer communication diagram . . .16
Fig 10. NFCIP-1 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Fig 11. Active communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Fig 12. Passive communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Fig 13. SPI connection to host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Fig 14. UART connection to microcontrollers . . . . . . . . .71
Fig 15. UART read data timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Fig 16. UART write data timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Fig 17. I2C-bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Fig 18. Bit transfer on the I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Fig 19. START and STOP conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Fig 20. Acknowledge on the I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Fig 21. Data transfer on the I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Fig 22. First byte following the START procedure . . . . . .78
Fig 23. Register read and write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Fig 24. I2C-bus HS mode protocol switch . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Fig 25. I2C-bus HS mode protocol frame. . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Fig 26. Connection to host controller with separated
Read/Write strobes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Fig 27. Connection to host controller with common
Read/Write strobes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Fig 28. Data mode detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Fig 29. Serial data switch for TX1 and TX2 . . . . . . . . . . .88
Fig 30. Communication flows using the S2C interface. . .89
Fig 31. Signal shape for SIGOUT in FeliCa card SAM
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Fig 32. Signal shape for SIGIN in SAM mode . . . . . . . . .90
Fig 33. Signal shape for SIGOUT in MIFARE Card SAM
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Fig 34. Signal shape for SIGIN in MIFARE Card SAM
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Fig 35. Quartz crystal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Fig 36. Oscillator start-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fig 37. Autocoll Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Fig 38. Typical circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig 39. Pin RX input voltage range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig 40. Timing diagram for SPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig 41. Timing for Fast and Standard mode devices
on the I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig 42. Timing diagram for separated Read/Write
strobe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Fig 43. Timing diagram for common Read/Write strobe 121
Fig 44. Package outline package version (HVQFN32) .123
Fig 45. Package outline package version (HVQFN40) .124
Fig 46. Package outline package version (TFBGA64). .125
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 134 of 136
continued >>
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
37. Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Different available versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Quick reference data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
7 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
8.1 ISO/IEC 14443 A/MIFARE functionality . . . . . 14
8.2 ISO/IEC 14443 B functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
8.3 FeliCa reader/writer functionality . . . . . . . . . . 16
8.3.1 FeliCa framing and coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8.4 NFCIP-1 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
8.4.1 Active communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.4.2 Passive communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
8.4.3 NFCIP-1 framing and coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.4.4 NFCIP-1 protocol support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.4.5 MIFARE Card operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.4.6 FeliCa Card operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
9 PN512 register SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
9.1 PN512 registers overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
9.1.1 Register bit behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
9.2 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.2.1 Page 0: Command and status . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.2.1.1 PageReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.2.1.2 CommandReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.2.1.3 CommIEnReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.2.1.4 DivIEnReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
9.2.1.5 CommIRqReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
9.2.1.6 DivIRqReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
9.2.1.7 ErrorReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.2.1.8 Status1Reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.2.1.9 Status2Reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
9.2.1.10 FIFODataReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
9.2.1.11 FIFOLevelReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
9.2.1.12 WaterLevelReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
9.2.1.13 ControlReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
9.2.1.14 BitFramingReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
9.2.1.15 CollReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9.2.2 Page 1: Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
9.2.2.1 PageReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
9.2.2.2 ModeReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9.2.2.3 TxModeReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
9.2.2.4 RxModeReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9.2.2.5 TxControlReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
9.2.2.6 TxAutoReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
9.2.2.7 TxSelReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
9.2.2.8 RxSelReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9.2.2.9 RxThresholdReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9.2.2.10 DemodReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.2.2.11 FelNFC1Reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
9.2.2.12 FelNFC2Reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
9.2.2.13 MifNFCReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.2.2.14 ManualRCVReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.2.2.15 TypeBReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9.2.2.16 SerialSpeedReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9.2.3 Page 2: Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9.2.3.1 PageReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9.2.3.2 CRCResultReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9.2.3.3 GsNOffReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
9.2.3.4 ModWidthReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
9.2.3.5 TxBitPhaseReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
9.2.3.6 RFCfgReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
9.2.3.7 GsNOnReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
9.2.3.8 CWGsPReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
9.2.3.9 ModGsPReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9.2.3.10 TMode Register, TPrescaler Register . . . . . . 57
9.2.3.11 TReloadReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
9.2.3.12 TCounterValReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
9.2.4 Page 3: Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
9.2.4.1 PageReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
9.2.4.2 TestSel1Reg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.2.4.3 TestSel2Reg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.2.4.4 TestPinEnReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9.2.4.5 TestPinValueReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9.2.4.6 TestBusReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2.4.7 AutoTestReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2.4.8 VersionReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2.4.9 AnalogTestReg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.2.4.10 TestDAC1Reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.2.4.11 TestDAC2Reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.2.4.12 TestADCReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.2.4.13 RFTReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
10 Digital interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
10.1 Automatic microcontroller interface detection 68
10.2 Serial Peripheral Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.1 SPI read data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.2 SPI write data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.3 SPI address byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3 UART interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3.1 Connection to a host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PN512 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.5 — 17 December 2013
111345 135 of 136
continued >>
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
10.3.2 Selectable UART transfer speeds . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3.3 UART framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10.4 I2C Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.4.1 Data validity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.4.2 START and STOP conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.4.3 Byte format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.4.4 Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.4.5 7-Bit addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.4.6 Register write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.4.7 Register read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.4.8 High-speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10.4.9 High-speed transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10.4.10 Serial data transfer format in HS mode . . . . . 80
10.4.11 Switching between F/S mode and HS mode . 82
10.4.12 PN512 at lower speed modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11 8-bit parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11.1 Overview of supported host controller
interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11.2 Separated Read/Write strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
11.3 Common Read/Write strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
12 Analog interface and contactless UART . . . . 84
12.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
12.2 TX driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
12.3 RF level detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
12.4 Data mode detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
12.5 Serial data switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
12.6 S2C interface support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
12.6.1 Signal shape for Felica S2C interface support 90
12.6.2 Waveform shape for ISO/IEC 14443A and
MIFARE S2C support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.7 Hardware support for FeliCa and NFC polling 92
12.7.1 Polling sequence functionality for initiator. . . . 92
12.7.2 Polling sequence functionality for target . . . . . 92
12.7.3 Additional hardware support for FeliCa and
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12.7.4 CRC coprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
13 FIFO buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
13.1 Accessing the FIFO buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
13.2 Controlling the FIFO buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
13.3 FIFO buffer status information . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
14 Interrupt request system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
14.1 Interrupt sources overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
15 Timer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
16 Power reduction modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
16.1 Hard power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
16.2 Soft power-down mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
16.3 Transmitter power-down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
17 Oscillator circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
18 Reset and oscillator start-up time . . . . . . . . . 99
18.1 Reset timing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
18.2 Oscillator start-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
19 PN512 command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
19.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
19.2 General behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
19.3 PN512 command overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
19.3.1 PN512 command descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 101
19.3.1.1 Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
19.3.1.2 Config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
19.3.1.3 Generate RandomID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
19.3.1.4 CalcCRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
19.3.1.5 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
19.3.1.6 NoCmdChange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
19.3.1.7 Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
19.3.1.8 Transceive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
19.3.1.9 AutoColl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
19.3.1.10 MFAuthent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
19.3.1.11 SoftReset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
20 Testsignals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
20.1 Selftest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
20.2 Testbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
20.3 Testsignals at pin AUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
20.4 PRBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
21 Errata sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
22 Application design-in information. . . . . . . . . 110
23 Limiting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
24 Recommended operating conditions . . . . . . 111
25 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
26 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
26.1 Timing characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
26.2 8-bit parallel interface timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
26.2.1 AC symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
26.2.2 AC operating specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
26.2.2.1 Bus timing for separated Read/Write strobe . 119
26.2.2.2 Bus timing for common Read/Write strobe . 120
27 Package information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
28 Package outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
29 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
30 Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
31 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
32 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
33 Legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
33.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
33.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
33.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
33.4 Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
33.5 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NXP Semiconductors PN512
Full NFC Forum compliant solution
© NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 17 December 2013
111345
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
34 Contact information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
35 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
36 Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
37 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
1. General description
The UHF EPCglobal Generation 2 standard allows the commercialized provision of mass
adoption of UHF RFID technology for passive smart tags and labels. Main fields of
applications are supply chain management and logistics for worldwide use with special
consideration of European, US and Chinese frequencies to ensure that operating
distances of several meters can be realized.
The NXP Semiconductors UCODE product family is compliant to this EPC gen2 standard
offering anti-collision and collision arbitration functionality. This allows a reader to
simultaneously operate multiple labels/tags within its antenna field.
The UCODE based label/ tag requires no external power supply for contactless operation.
Its contactless interface generates the power supply via the antenna circuit by propagative
energy transmission from the interrogator (reader), while the system clock is generated by
an on-chip oscillator. Data transmitted from the interrogator to the label/tag is
demodulated by the interface, and it also modulates the interrogator's electromagnetic
field for data transmission from the label/tag to the interrogator.
A label/tag can be then operated without the need for line of sight or battery, as long as it
is connected to a dedicated antenna for the targeted frequency range. When the label/tag
is within the interrogator's operating range, the high-speed wireless interface allows data
transmission in both directions.
With the UCODE I2C product, NXP Semiconductors introduces now the possibility to
combine 2 independent UHF Interfaces (following EPC gen 2 standard) with an I2C
interface. Its large memory can be then read or write via both interfaces.
This I2C functionality enables the standard EPC gen 2 functionalities to be linked to an
electronic device microprocessor. By linking the rich functionalities of the EPC gen 2
standards to the Electronics world, the UCODE I2C product opens a whole new range of
application.
The I2C interface needs to be supplied externally and supports standard and fast I2C
modes. Its large memory is based on a field proven non-volatile memory technology
commonly used in high quality automotive applications
SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 2 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
2. Features and benefits
2.1 UHF interface
Dual UHF antenna port
18 dBm READ sensitivity
11 dBm WRITE sensitivity
23 dBm READ & WRITE sensitivity with the chip powered
Compliant to EPCglobal Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols Class-1 Generation-2
UHF RFID Protocol for communications at 860 MHz to 960 MHz version 1.2.0
Wide RF interface temperature range: 40 °C up to +85 °C
Memory read protection
Interrupt output
RF - I2C bridge function based on SRAM memory
2.2 I2C interface
Supports Standard (100 kHz) and Fast (400 kHz) mode (see Ref. 1)
UCODE I2C can be used as standard I2C EEPROMs
2.3 Command set
All mandatory EPC Gen2 v1.2.0 commands
Optional commands: Access, Block Write (32 bit)
Custom command: ChangeConfig
2.4 Memory
3328-bit user memory
160-bit EPC memory
96-bit tag identifier (TID) including 48-bit unique serial number
32-bit KILL password to permanently disable the tag
32-bit ACCESS password to allow a transition into the secured transmission state
Data retention: 20 years at 55 °C
Write endurance: 50 kcycles at 85 °C
2.5 Package
SOT-902-3; MO-255B footprint
Outline 1.6 × 1.6 mm
Thickness 0.5 mm
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 3 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
3. Applications
Firmware downloads
Return management
Counterfeit protection and authentication
Production information
Theft protection and deterrence
Production automation
Device customization/product configuration
Offline Diagnostics
4. Ordering information
[1] RFP1, RFN1
Table 1. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
SL3S4011FHK XQFN8 Single differential RF Front End [1]- Plastic, extremely thin quad flat
package; no leads; 8 terminals; body 1.6 × 1.6 × 0.5 mm
SOT902-3
SL3S4021FHK XQFN8 Dual differential RF Front End - Plastic, extremely thin quad flat
package; no leads; 8 terminals; body 1.6 × 1.6 × 0.5 mm
SOT902-3
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 4 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
5. Block diagram
Fig 1. Block diagram
RFP1
DIFFERENTIAL
UHF FRONTEND 1
RFN1
RFN2
DIFFERENTIAL
UHF FRONTEND 2
NON
VOLATILE
MEMORY I2C INTERFACE
ISO18000-6
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
ANALOG
UHF antenna 2
UHF antenna 1
I2C DRIVER/SCL
INT SIGNALLING DRIVER
50 ns SPIKE INPUT FILTER
RFP2
SCL
SDA
I2C DRIVER/SDA
CE OUPUT DRIVER
50 ns SPIKE INPUT FILTER
VDDB
VDDB
POWER
MANAGEMENT/
GND
001aao224
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 5 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
6. Pinning information
6.1 Pinning
6.2 Pin description
(1) Dimension A: 1.6 mm
(2) Dimension B: 0.5 mm
Fig 2. Pin configuration
001aao225
VDD
Transparent top view
side view
4
8
6
5
7
3
1
RF1N 2
RF1P
SCL
A
B
GND
A
RF2N
SDA
RF2P
Table 2. Pin description
Pin Symbol Description
1 RF1P active antenna 1 connector
2 RF1N antenna 1
3 SCL I2C clock / _INT
4 VDD supply
5 SDA I2C data
6 RF2N antenna 2
7 RF2P active antenna 2 connector
8 GND ground
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 6 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
7. Mechanical specification
7.1 SOT902 specification
8. Functional description
8.1 Air interface standards
The UCODE I2C fully supports all mandatory parts of the "Specification for RFID Air
Interface EPCglobal, EPC Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols, Class-1 Generation-2
UHF RFID, Protocol for Communications at 860 MHz to 960 MHz, Version 1.2.0".
8.2 Power transfer
The interrogator provides an RF field that powers the tag, equipped with a UCODE I2C.
The antenna transforms the impedance of free space to the chip input impedance in order
to get the maximum possible power for the UCODE I2C on the tag.
The RF field, which is oscillating on the operating frequency provided by the interrogator,
is rectified to provide a smoothed DC voltage to the analog and digital modules of the IC.
For I2C operation the UCODE I2C has to be supplied externally via the VDD pin.
8.3 Data transfer air interface
8.3.1 Interrogator to tag Link
An interrogator transmits information to the UCODE I2C by modulating a UHF RF signal.
The UCODE I2C receives both information and operating energy from this RF signal. Tags
are passive, meaning that they receive all of their operating energy from the interrogator's
RF waveform.
An interrogator is using a fixed modulation and data rate for the duration of at least one
inventory round. The interrogator communicates to the UCODE I2C by modulating an RF
carrier using DSB-ASK with PIE encoding.
8.3.2 Tag to reader Link
An interrogator receives information from a UCODE I2C by transmitting an unmodulated
RF carrier and listening for a backscattered reply. The UCODE I2C backscatters by
switching the reflection coefficient of its antenna between two states in accordance with
the data being sent.
Table 3. Mechanical properties XQFN8
Package name Outline code Package size Reel format
SOT902 SOT902-3 size:1.6 mm × 1.6 mm 4000 pcs
thickness: 0.5 mm 7” diameter
Carrier tape width 8 mm
Carrier pocket pitch 4 mm
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 7 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
The UCODE I2C communicates information by backscatter-modulating the amplitude
and/or phase of the RF carrier. Interrogators shall be capable of demodulating either
demodulation type.
The encoding format, selected in response to interrogator commands, is either FM0
baseband or Miller-modulated subaltern.
8.4 Data transfer to I2C interface
The UCODE I2C memory can be read/written similar to a standard I2C serial EEPROM
device. The address space is arranged in a linear manner. When performing a sequential
read the address pointer is increased linearly from start of the EPC memory to the end of
the user memory.
At the end address of each bank the address pointer jumps automatically to the first
address in the subsequent bank. In I2C write modes only even address values are
accepted, due to the word wise organization of the EEPROM.
Regarding arbitration between RF and I2C, see Section 11 “RF interface/I2C interface
arbitration”).
Write operation:
• Write word
• Write block (2 words)
Read operation:
• current address read
• random address read
• sequential current read
• random sequential read
8.5 Supported commands
The UCODE I2C supports all mandatory EPCglobal V1.2.0 commands.
In addition the UCODE I2C supports the following optional commands.
• Access
• BlockWrite (32 bit)
The UCODE I2C features the following custom commands described in more detail later:
• ChangeConfig
8.6 UCODE I2C memory
The UCODE I2C memory is implemented according to EPCglobal Gen2 and organized in
four sections all accessible via both RF and I2C operation except the reserved memory
section which only accessible via RF:
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 8 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
The logical addresses of all memory banks begin at zero (00h).
In addition to the 4 memory banks one configuration word to handle the UCODE I2C
specific features is available at EPC bank 01b address 200h. The configuration word is
described in detail in section “UCODE I2C special features”.
Table 4. UCODE I2C memory sections
Name Size Bank
Reserved memory (32-bit ACCESS and 32-bit KILL password) 64 bit 00b
EPC (excluding 16 bit CRC-16 and 16-bit PC) 160 bit 01b
Download register 16 bit 01b
UCODE I2C Configuration Word 16 bit 01b
TID (including unique 48 bit serial number) 96 bit 10b
User Memory 3328 bit 11b
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 9 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
8.6.1 UCODE I2C overall memory map
[1] SL3S4011 EPC: E200 680D 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SL3S4021 EPC: E200 688D 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
[2] see TID paragraph
Table 5. Memory map
Bank address Memory address Type Content Initial
value
Remark
RF I2C
Bank 00 00h to 1Fh not accessible via i2C reserved kill password all 00h unlocked memory
20h to 3Fh not accessible via i2C reserved access password all 00h unlocked memory
Bank 01
EPC
00h to 0Fh 2000h EPC CRC-16:
refer to Ref. 5
memory mapped calculated
CRC
10h to 1Fh 2002h EPC PC 3000h unlocked memory
20h to 2Fh 2004h EPC EPC bit [0 to 15] [1] unlocked memory
... EPC ... unlocked memory
20h to BFh 2016h EPC EPC bit [144 to 159] unlocked memory
1F0h to 1FFh 203Eh EPC download register for the bridge function
200h to 20Fh 2040h EPC Configuration word, see
Section 9.2
Bank 10 TID 00h to 0Fh 4000h TID TID header n.a. locked memory
10h to 1Fh 4002h TID TID header n.a. locked memory
20h to 2Fh 4004h TID XTID_header 0000h locked memory
30h to 3Fh 4006h TID TID serial number [2] locked memory
40h to 4Fh 4008h TID TID serial number n.a. locked memory
50h to 5Fh 400Ah TID TID serial number n.a. locked memory
Bank 11
User memory
000h to 00Fh 6000h UM user memory bit [0 to 15] all 00h unlocked memory
010h to 01Fh 6002h UM user memory bit [16 to 31] all 00h unlocked memory
... UM all 00h unlocked memory
CF0h to CFFh 619Eh UM user memory bit [3311 to 3327] all 00h unlocked memory
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 10 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
8.6.2 UCODE I2C TID memory details
Table 6. UCODE I2C TID description
Model number
Type First 32 bit of
TID memory
Class ID Mask designer
ID
Config Word
indicator
Sub version
number
Version (Silicon)
number
UCODE SL3S4011 E200680D E2h 006h 1 0000b 0001101
UCODE SL3S4021 E200688D E2h 006h 1 0001b 0001101
Fig 3. UCODE I2C TID memory structure
aaa-006851
Class Identifier
MS Byte
MS Bit LS Bit
TID
Mask-Designer Identifier Model Number XTID Header Serial Number
Bits 7 0 11 0 11 0 15 0 47 0
Addresses 00h 07h 13h 1Fh 5Fh
Addresses 00h CFh
08h 14h 20h 2Fh 30h
E2h
(EAN.UCC)
TID Example
(UCODE I2C)
006h
(NXP)
0000h
Sub Version Number Version Number
000b or 001b 0001101b
(UCODE I2C)
Bits 0 3 0 6 0
Addresses 14h 18h 19h 1Fh
80Dh or 88Dh
(UCODE I2C)
LS Byte
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 11 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
9. Supported features
The UCODE I2C is equipped with a number of additional features and a custom
command. Nevertheless, the chip is designed in a way that standard EPCglobal READ /
WRITE / ACCESS commands can be used to operate the features.
The memory map in the previous section describes the Configuration Word used to
control the additional features located after address 200h of the EPC memory, hence
UCODE I2C features are controlled by bits located in the EPC number space. For this
reason the standard READ / WRITE commands of a UHF EPCglobal compliant reader
can be used to select the flags or activate/deactivate features if the memory bank is not
locked. In case of locked memory banks the ChangeConfig custom command has to be
used.
The bits (flags) of the ConfigurationWord are selectable using the standard EPC SELECT
command.
9.1 UCODE I2C special feature
• Externally Supplied flag
The flag will indicate the availability of an external supply.
• RF active flag
The flag will indicate on which RF port power is available and signal transmission
ongoing.
• RF Interface on/off switching
For privacy reasons the two RF ports as well as the I2C interface can be switched
on/off by toggling the related bits of the ConfigurationWord. The ConfigurationWord is
accessible via RF and I2C interface. Although it is possible to kill the RF interface via
the KILL feature of EPC gen2, a minimum of one port shall be active at all times. In
the case of the dual port version, either one or both RF can be active. In the case of
the single front end version, the RF port can not be deactivated.
• I2C Interface on/off switching
For privacy reasons the I2C port can be disabled by toggling the related bit of the
Config-Word but only via RF.
• RF - I2C Bridge feature
The UCODE I2C can be used as an RF- I2C bridge to directly forward data from the
RF interface to the I2C interface and vice versa. The UCODE I2C is equipped with a
download/upload register of 16-bit data buffer located in the EPC bank. The data
received via RF can be read via I2C like regular memory content. In case the buffer is
empty reading the register returns NAK. This feature can be combined with the
Download Indicator.
– Upload Indicator flag (I2C to UHF) - address 203h in the configuration word
The flag will indicate if data in the download/upload register is available. Will be
automatically cleared when the download/upload register is read out via UHF.
– Download Indicator flag (UHF to I2C) - address 200h in the configuration word
The flag will indicate if data in the download/upload register is available. Will be
automatically cleared when the download/upload register is read out via I2C.
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 12 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
• Interrupt signaling/Download Indicator
The UCODE I2C features two methods of signaling:
1. Signaling via ConfigWord "Download/Upload Indicator" (200h or 203h):
– The Download/Upload Indicator will go high as soon new data from the RF reader
or from the I2C interface is written to the buffer register. This flag can be polled via
I2C READ or using the SELECT command. Reading an empty buffer register will
return NAK.
– The Download/Upload Indicator will automatically return to low as soon as the data
is read.
2. Interrupt Signaling via the I2C-SCL line:
– If the SCL INT enabler of the ConfigWord is set (20Bh) the SCL line will be pulled
low for at least 210 s in case new data was written by the reader or at least 85 s
in case new data has been read by the reader (see Figure 4 “SCL interrupt
signalling” and Table 7 “Interrupt signaling via the I2C-SCL line timing”).
[1] This timing parameter is dependent on the chosen return link frequency.
[2] At 640 kHz return link frequency.
Remark: The features can even be operated (enabled/disabled) with '0' as ACCESS
password. It is recommended to set an ACCESS password to avoid unauthorized
manipulation of the features via the RF interface.
9.2 UCODE I2C special features control mechanism
Special features of the UCODE I2C are managed using a Configuration Word
(ConfigWord) located at the end of the EPC memory bank (address 200h via RF or 2040h
via I2C) - see Table 8 and Table 9.
Fig 4. SCL interrupt signalling
Table 7. Interrupt signaling via the I2C-SCL line timing
Symbol Min Typ Max Unit
tSCL low_write 210 266 320 s
tSCL low_read[1] 85 102[2] 7800 s
aaa-005682
UHF Write DL Reg
Command
SCL
UHF
SCL
Read DL Reg
Command
Read DL Reg
Response
Write DL Reg
Response
tSCL low_read
tSCL low_write
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 13 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
The bits of the ConfigWord are selectable (using the standard EPC SELECT command)
and can be read, via RF, using standard EPC READ command and via I2C. They can be
modified using the ChangeConfig custom command or standard READ/WRITE
commands or via the I2C interface (if allowed).
[1] Indicator bits are reset at power-up but cannot be changed by command
[2] Permanent bits are permanently stored bits in the memory
[3] Defaults values for bit3/bit2/bit1 are 0/0/1 (see Table 14)
Table 8. Configuration Word accessible located at address 200h via UHF of the EPC bank and I2C address 2040h
(1 RF front end version SL3S4011)
Feature Bit type via RF via I2C
Address Access Address Access
Download indicator indicator[1] 200h read 2040h read
Externally supplied flag indicator 201h read read
RF active flag indicator 202h read read
Upload indicator Indicator 203h read read
I2C address bit 3[3] permanent[2] 204h r/w read only
I2C address bit 2[3] permanent 205h r/w read only
I2C address bit 1[3] permanent 206h r/w read only
I2C port on/off permanent 207h r/w read only
UHF antenna port1 on locked 208h read only read only
rfu 209h
rfu 20Ah
SCL INT enable permanent 20Bh r/w read only
bit for read protect user memory permanent 20Ch r/w r/w
bit for read protect EPC permanent 20Dh r/w r/w
bit for read protect TID SNR (48 bits) permanent 20Eh r/w r/w
PSF alarm flag permanent 20Fh r/w read only
Table 9. Configuration Word accessible located at address 200h via UHF of the EPC bank and I2C address 2040h
(2 RF front end version SL3S4021)
Feature Bit type via RF via I2C
Address Access Address Access
Download indicator indicator[1] 200h read 2040h read
Externally supplied flag indicator 201h read read
RF active flag indicator 202h read read
Upload indicator indicator 203h read read
I2C address bit 3[3] permanent[2] 204h r/w read only
I2C address bit 2[3] permanent 205h r/w read only
I2C address bit 1[3] permanent 206h r/w read only
I2C port on/off permanent 207h r/w read only
UHF antenna port1 on/off permanent 208h r/w r/w
UHF antenna port2 on/off permanent 209h r/w r/w
rfu 20Ah
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 14 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
[1] Indicator bits are reset at power-up but cannot be changed by command
[2] Permanent bits are permanently stored bits in the memory
[3] Defaults values for bit3/bit2/bit1 are 0/0/1 (see Table 14)
SCL INT enable permanent 20Bh r/w read only
bit for read protect user memory permanent 20Ch r/w r/w
bit for read protect EPC permanent 20Dh r/w r/w
bit for read protect TID SNR (48 bits) permanent 20Eh r/w r/w
PSF alarm flag permanent 20Fh r/w read only
Table 9. Configuration Word accessible located at address 200h via UHF of the EPC bank and I2C address 2040h
(2 RF front end version SL3S4021)
Feature Bit type via RF via I2C
Address Access Address Access
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 15 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
9.3 Change Config Command
The UCODE I2C ChangeConfig custom command allows handling the special features
described in the previous paragraph. As long the EPC bank is not write locked standard
EPC READ/WRITE commands can be used to modify the flags.
The bits to be toggled in the configuration register need to be set to '1'.
E.g. sending 0000 0000 0000 0000 1001 XOR RN16 will activate the EPC Read Protect
and PSF bit. Sending the very same command a second time will disable the features.
The reply of the ChangeConfig will return the current register setting.
The features can only be activated/deactivated in the open or secured state and with a
non-zero ACCESS password. If the EPC memory bank is locked for writing, the
ChangeConfig command is needed to modify the ConfigurationWord.
Table 10. ChangeConfig custom command
Command RFU Data RN CRC-16
No. of bits 16 8 16 16 16
Description 11100000
00000111
00000000 Toggle bits
XOR RN16
handle -
Table 11. ChangeConfig custom response table
Starting state Condition Response Next state
ready all - ready
arbitrate, reply,
acknowledged
all - arbitrate
open valid handle, Status word
needs to change
Backscatter unchanged
StatusWord immediately
open
valid handle, Status word
does not need to change
Backscatter StatusWord
immediately
open
secured valid handle, Status word
needs to change
Backscatter modified
StatusWord, when done
secured
valid handle, Status word
does not need to change
Backscatter StatusWord
immediately
secured
invalid handle - secured
killed all - killed
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 16 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
9.4 UCODE I2C memory bank locking mechanism
9.4.1 Possibilities
9.4.2 Via RF
The UCODE I2C memory banks can be locked following EPC Gen2 mandatory command via RF (see table Table 13).
Table 12. Memory banks locking possibilities for UCODE I2C via RF and I2C
I2C interface RF interface
Memory bank Lock
(entire bank)
PermaLock
(entire bank)
Lock (entire bank)
via Access Password
PermaLock (entire bank)
via Access Password
01 EPC yes yes yes yes
11 User Memory yes yes yes yes
Table 13. Lock payload and usage
Kill pwd Access pwd EPC memory TID memory User memory
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Mask skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write skip/write
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Action pwd read/write permalock pwd read/write permalock pwd write permalock pwd write permalock pwd write permalock
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 17 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
9.4.3 Via I2C
The EPC Gen2 locking bits for the memory banks are also accessible via the I2C interface
for read and write operation and are located at the I2C address 803Ch. But it is not
possible to read and write the access and kill password.
Fig 5. I2C memory bank lock write and read access
Data Byte 1
Mask field
Action field
Kill PWD
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
Skip/
write
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
Access PWD User memory
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
RFU
EPC memory TID memory
Kill PWD
n/a n/a n/a n/a permalock permalock permalock
PWD
write
PWD
write
PWD
write
Access PWD EPC memory TID memory User memory
MSB Data Byte 2 LSB
MSB Data Byte 3 Data Byte 4 LSB
aaa-003734
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 18 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
10. I2C commands
10.1 UCODE I2C operation
For details on I2C interface refer to Ref. 1.
The UCODE I2C supports the I2C protocol. This is summarized in Figure 7. Any device
that sends data on to the bus is defined to be a transmitter, and any device that reads the
data to be a receiver. The device that controls the data transfer is known as the bus
master, and the other as the slave device. A data transfer can only be initiated by the bus
master, which will also provide the serial clock for synchronization. The device is always a
slave in all communications.
10.2 Start condition
Start is identified by a falling edge of Serial Data (SDA) while Serial Clock (SCL) is stable
in the high state. A Start condition must precede any data transfer command. The UCODE
I2C continuously monitors (except during a Write cycle) Serial Data (SDA) and Serial
Clock (SCL) for a Start condition, and will not respond unless one is given.
Fig 6. I2C bus protocol
SCL
SDA
SCL 1 2 3 7 8 9
1 2 3 7 8 9
MSB ACK
MSB ACK
Start
Condition
SDA
Input
SDA
Change
Stop
Condition
Stop
Condition
Start
Condition
SDA
SCL
SDA
001aao231
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 19 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
10.3 Stop condition
Stop is identified by a rising edge of Serial Data (SDA) while Serial Clock (SCL) is stable
and driven high. A Stop condition terminates communication between the UCODE I2C and
the bus master. A Read command that is followed by NoAck can be followed by a Stop
condition to force the UCODE I2C into the Standby mode. A Stop condition at the end of a
Write command triggers the internal Write cycle.
10.4 Acknowledge bit (ACK)
The acknowledge bit is used to indicate a successful byte transfer. The bus transmitter,
whether it be bus master or slave device, releases Serial Data (SDA) after sending eight
bits of data. During the 9th clock pulse period, the receiver pulls Serial Data (SDA) low to
acknowledge the receipt of the eight data bits.
10.5 Data input
During data input, the UCODE I2C samples Serial Data (SDA) on the rising edge of Serial
Clock (SCL). For correct device operation, Serial Data (SDA) must be stable during the
rising edge of Serial Clock (SCL), and the Serial Data (SDA) signal must change only
when Serial Clock (SCL) is driven low.
10.6 Addressing
To start communication between a bus master and the UCODE I2C slave device, the bus
master must initiate a Start condition. Following this, the bus master sends the device
select code. The 7-bit device select code consists of a 4-bit device identifier (value Ah)
which is initialized in wafer test and cannot be changed in the user mode. Three additional
bits in the configuration word are reserved to alter the device address via RF interface
after initialization. This allows up to eight UCODE I2C devices to be connected to a bus
master at the same time.
The 8th bit is the Read/Write bit (RW). This bit is set to 1 for Read and 0 for Write
operations.
If a match occurs on the device select code, the UCODE I2C gives an acknowledgment on
Serial Data (SDA) during the 9th bit time. If the UCODE I2C does not match the device
select code, it deselects itself from the bus.
[1] Initial values - can be changed - See also Table 8 and Table 9.
Table 14. Device select code
Device type identifier Device address in
configuration word 204h
to 206h
R/W
Device select
code
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Value 1 0 1 0 0 [1] 0 [1] 1 [1] 1/0
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 20 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
10.7 Write Operation
The byte address must be an even value due to the word wise organization of the
EEPROM.
Following a Start condition the bus master sends a device select code with the Read/Write
bit (RW) reset to 0. The UCODE I2C acknowledges this, as shown in Figure 7 and waits
for two address bytes. The UCODE I2C responds to each address byte with an
acknowledge bit, and then waits for the data Byte.
Each data byte in the memory has a 16-bit (two byte wide) address. The Most Significant
Byte (Table 15) is sent first, followed by the Least Significant Byte (Table 15). Bits b15 to
b0 form the address of the byte in memory.
When the bus master generates a Stop condition immediately after the ACK bit (in the
"10th bit" time slot), either at the end of a Word Write or a Page Write, the internal Write
cycle is triggered. A Stop condition at any other time slot does not trigger the internal Write
cycle.
During the internal Write cycle, Serial Data (SDA) is disabled internally, and the UCODE
I2C does not respond to any requests.
Table 15. I2C addressing
Most significant
byte
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
EPC address EPC/Lock EPC memory
bank
EPC memory word address
Least
significant byte
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
EPC address EPC memory word address MSB/
LSB
Fig 7. I2C write operation
ACK
Word Write
Page Write
Page Write
(cont’d)
ACK ACK ACK ACK
Stop
Start
R/W
Dev select Byte address Byte address Data in 1 Data in 2
ACK
Stop
001aao230
ACK ACK ACK ACK
Start
R/W
Dev select Byte address Byte address Data in 1 Data in 2
ACK
Data in N
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 21 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
10.7.1 Word Write
After the device select code and the address word, the bus master sends one word data.
If the addressed location is Write-protected, the UCODE I2C replies with NACK, and the
location is not modified. If, instead, the addressed location is not Write-protected, the
UCODE I2C replies with ACK. The bus master terminates the transfer by generating a
Stop condition, as shown in Figure 7.
10.7.2 Page Write
The Page Write mode allows 2 words to be written in a single Write cycle, provided that
they are all located in the same 'row' in the memory: that is, the most significant memory
address bits (b12-b2) are the same and b1= 0 and b0 = 0. If more than two words are sent
than each additional byte will cause a NACK on SDA.
The bus master sends from 1 to 2 words of data, each of which is acknowledged by the
UCODE I2C. The transfer is terminated by the bus master generating a Stop condition.
10.8 Read operation
After the successful completion of a read operation, the UCODE I2C's internal address
counter is incremented by one, to point to the next byte address.
Fig 8. I2C read operation
ACK
ACK NO ACK
Current
Address
Read
Random
Address
Read
Sequential
Current
Read
Sequential
Random
Read
ACK ACK ACK NO ACK
Stop
Start
Start
Start
Stop
R/W R/W
R/W
R/W
Dev select * Byte address Dev select * Data out
Dev select Data out
Byte address
ACK ACK ACK NO ACK
NO ACK
Stop
Stop
Start
Dev select Data out 1 Data out N
001aao229
ACK ACK ACK ACK ACK
Start
Start
R/W R/W
Dev select * Byte address Byte address Dev select * Data out 1
ACK
Data out N
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 22 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
10.8.1 Random Address Read
A dummy Write is first performed to load the address into this address counter (as shown
in Figure 8) but without sending a Stop condition. Then, the bus master sends another
Start condition, and repeats the device select code, with the Read/Write bit (RW) set to 1.
The UCODE I2C acknowledges this, and outputs the contents of the addressed byte. The
bus master must not acknowledge the byte, and terminates the transfer with a Stop
condition.
10.8.2 Current Address Read
For the Current Address Read operation, following a Start condition, the bus master only
sends a UCODE I2C select code with the Read/Write bit (RW) set to 1. The UCODE I2C
acknowledges this, and outputs the byte addressed by the internal address counter. The
counter is then incremented. The bus master terminates the transfer with a Stop condition,
as shown in Figure 8, without acknowledging the Byte.
10.8.3 Sequential Read
This operation can be used after a Current Address Read or a Random Address Read.
The bus master does acknowledge the data byte output, and sends additional clock
pulses so that the UCODE I2C continues to output the next byte in sequence. To terminate
the stream of bytes, the bus master must not acknowledge the last byte, and must
generate a Stop condition, as shown in Figure 8.
The output data comes from consecutive addresses, with the internal address counter
automatically incremented after each byte output.
10.8.4 Acknowledge in Read mode
For all Read commands, the UCODE I2C waits, after each byte read, for an
acknowledgment during the 9th bit time. If the bus master does not drive Serial Data
(SDA) low during this time, the UCODE I2C terminates the data transfer and switches to
its Standby mode.
10.8.5 EPC memory bank handling
After the last memory address within one EPC memory bank, the address counter
'rolls-over' to the next EPC memory bank, and the UCODE I2C continues to output data
from memory address 00h in the successive EPC memory bank.
Example: EPC Bank 01 EPC Bank 10 EPC Bank 11 EPC Bank 01
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 23 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
11. RF interface/I2C interface arbitration
The UCODE I2C needs to arbitrate the EEPROM access between the RF and the I2C
interface.
The arbitration is implemented as following:
• First come, first serve strategy - the interface which provides data by having a first
valid preamble on RF envelope (begin of a command) or a start condition and a valid
I2C device address on the I2C interface will be favored.
• I2C access to the chip memory is possible regardless if it is in the EPC Gen2 secured
state or not
• During an I2C command, starting with an I2C start followed by valid I2C device
address and ending with an I2C stop condition, any RF command is ignored.
• During any EPC Gen2 command any I2C command is ignored
12. Limiting values
[1] Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any conditions other
than those described in the Operating Conditions and Electrical Characteristics section of this specification
is not implied.
[2] This product includes circuitry specifically designed for the protection of its internal devices from the
damaging effects of excessive static charge. Nonetheless, it is suggested that conventional precautions be
taken to avoid applying greater than the rated maxima.
[3] For ESD measurement, the die chip has been mounted into a CDIP8 package.
[4] For ESD measurement, the die chip has been mounted into a CDIP8 package.
Table 16. Limiting values[1][2] [3][4]
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Voltages are referenced to
GND.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
Die
Vmax maximum voltage on pin VDD, SDA,
SCL, GND
0.3 3.6 V
Tstg storage temperature 55 +125 C
Tamb ambient temperature 40 +85 C
VESD electrostatic discharge
voltage
Human body
model;
SNW-FQ-302A
- 2 kV
Charged device
model
- 500 V
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 24 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
13. Characteristics
[1] Some legacy Standard-mode devices had fixed input levels of VIL = 1.5 V and VIH = 3.0 V. Refer to component data sheets.
[2] Maximum VIH = VDD(max) + 0.5 V or 5.5 V, which ever is lower. See component data sheets.
[3] The same resistor value to drive 3 mA at 3.0 V VDD provides the same RC time constant when using <2 V VDD with a smaller current
draw.
[4] Only applies to Fast Mode and Fast Mode Plus.
Table 17. Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
EEPROM characteristics
tret retention time Tamb 55 C 20 - - year
Nendu(W) write endurance Tamb 85 C 50000 - - cycle
Interface characteristics
Ptot total power dissipation - - 30 mW
foper operating frequency 840 - 960 MHz
Pmin minimum operating power supply Read mode - 18 - dBm
Write mode - 11 - dBm
Read and Write
mode with VDD input
- 23 - dBm
VDD supply voltage I2C, on VDD input 1.8 - 3.6 V
VDD supply voltage rise time
requirements
100 - - s
IDD supply current from VDD in I2C
read mode
- 10 - A
from VDD in I2C
write mode
- 40 - A
Z impedance (package) 915 MHz - 12,7-j 199 -
- modulated jammer suppression
1.0 MHz
- 4 - dB
- unmodulated jammer
suppression 1.0 MHz
- 4 - dB
VIL LOW-level input voltage[1] -0.5 - 0.3 VDD V
VIH HIGH-level input voltage[1] 0.7 VDD - -[2] V
Vhys hysteresis of Schmitt trigger
inputs[4]
0.05 VDD - - V
VOL1 LOW-level output voltage 1 (open-drain or
open-collector)
at 3 mA sink
current[3];
VDD > 2 V
0 - 0.4 V
VOL2 LOW-level output voltage 2[4] (open-drain or
open-collector)
at 2 mA sink
current[3];
VDD 2 V
0 - 0.2VDD V
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 25 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
14. Package outline
Fig 9. Package outline SOT902-3
Outline References
version
European
projection Issue date
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT902-3 - - - MO-255 - - -
sot902-3_po
11-08-16
11-08-18
Unit
mm
max
nom
min
0.5 0.05
0.00
1.65
1.60
1.55
1.65
1.60
1.55
0.6 0.5 0.1 0.05
A
Dimensions
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are not included.
XQFN8: plastic, extremely thin quad flat package; no leads;
8 terminals; body 1.6 x 1.6 x 0.5 mm SOT902-3
A1 b
0.25
0.20
0.15
D E e e1 L
0.45
0.40
0.35
v w
0.05
y y1
0.05
0 1 2 mm
scale
terminal 1
index area
D B A
E
X
C
y1 C y
terminal 1
index area
3
L
e1
e
v C A B
w C
2
1
5
6
7
metal area
not for soldering
8
4
e1
e
b
A1
A
detail X
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 26 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
15. Abbreviations
16. References
[1] I2C-bus specification and user manual (NXP standard UM10204.pdf / Rev. 03 - 19
June 2007)
[2] EPC Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols Class-1 Generation-2 UHF RFID Protocol
for Communications at 860 MHz - 960 MHz Version 1.2.0
[3] EPC Conformance Standard Version 1.0.5
[4] ESD Method SNW -FQ-302A
[5] ISO/IEC 18000-1: Information technology - Radio frequency identification for item
management - Part 1: Reference architecture and definition of parameters to be
standardized
Table 18. Abbreviations
Acronym Description
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CW Continuous Wave
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EPC Electronic Product Code (containing Header, Domain Manager, Object Class
and Serial Number)
FM0 Bhi phase space modulation
HBM Human Body Model
IC Integrated Circuit
LSB Least Significant Byte/Bit
MSB Most Significant Byte/Bit
NRZ Non-Return to Zero coding
RF Radio Frequency
RTF Reader Talks First
Tari Type A Reference Interval (ISO 18000-6)
UHF Ultra High Frequency
Xxb Value in binary notation
XXhex Value in hexadecimal notation
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 27 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
17. Revision history
Table 19. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
SL3S4011_4021 v. 3.1 20130703 Product data sheet - SL3S4011_4021 v. 3.0
Modifications: • General update
SL3S4011_4021 v. 3.0 20130416 Product data sheet - SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.3
Modifications: • Data sheet status changed to Product data sheet
SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.3 20130305 Preliminary data sheet - SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.2
Modifications: • General update
• Security status changed into COMPANY PUBLIC
SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.2 20121127 Preliminary data sheet SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.1
Modifications: • General update
SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.1 20120726 Preliminary data sheet - SL3S4001FHK v. 2.0
Modifications: • General update
SL3S4011_4021 v. 2.0 20120627 Preliminary data sheet - SL3S4001FHK v. 1.2
Modifications: • General update
SL3S4001FHK v. 1.2 20111004 Objective data sheet - SL3S4001FHK v. 1.1
Modifications: • Table 1 “Ordering information”: updated
• Figure 3 “UCODE I2C wafer layout”: values updated
SL3S4001FHK v. 1.1 20110707 Objective data sheet - SL3S4001FHK v. 1.0
Modifications: • Table 3 “Mechanical properties XQFN8”: updated
• Section 10.6 “Addressing”: updated
SL3S4001FHK v. 1.0 20110609 Objective data sheet - -
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 28 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
18. Legal information
18.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
18.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
18.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 29 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the
product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this
document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
Translations — A non-English (translated) version of a document is for
reference only. The English version shall prevail in case of any discrepancy
between the translated and English versions.
18.4 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
UCODE — is a trademark of NXP B.V.
I2C-bus — logo is a trademark of NXP B.V.
19. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
SL3S4011_4021 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.1 — 3 July 2013
204931 30 of 31
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
20. Tables
Table 1. Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Table 2. Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Table 3. Mechanical properties XQFN8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Table 4. UCODE I2C memory sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Table 5. Memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Table 6. UCODE I2C TID description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Table 7. Interrupt signaling via the I2C-SCL line timing .12
Table 8. Configuration Word accessible located at
address 200h via UHF of the EPC bank and
I2C address 2040h (1 RF front end version
SL3S4011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Table 9. Configuration Word accessible located at
address 200h via UHF of the EPC bank
and I2C address 2040h (2 RF front end
version SL3S4021) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 10. ChangeConfig custom command. . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 11. ChangeConfig custom response table. . . . . . . 15
Table 12. Memory banks locking possibilities for
UCODE I2C via RF and I2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 13. Lock payload and usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 14. Device select code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Table 15. I2C addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 16. Limiting values[1][2] [3][4] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 17. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 18. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 19. Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
21. Figures
Fig 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Fig 2. Pin configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Fig 3. UCODE I2C TID memory structure . . . . . . . . . . .10
Fig 4. SCL interrupt signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Fig 5. I2C memory bank lock write and read access . . .17
Fig 6. I2C bus protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Fig 7. I2C write operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Fig 8. I2C read operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Fig 9. Package outline SOT902-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
NXP Semiconductors SL3S4011_4021
UCODE I²C
© NXP B.V. 2013. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 3 July 2013
204931
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
22. Contents
1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 UHF interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 I2C interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 Command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.4 Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.5 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7 Mechanical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
7.1 SOT902 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.1 Air interface standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.2 Power transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.3 Data transfer air interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.3.1 Interrogator to tag Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.3.2 Tag to reader Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.4 Data transfer to I2C interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8.5 Supported commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8.6 UCODE I2C memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8.6.1 UCODE I2C overall memory map. . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.6.2 UCODE I2C TID memory details . . . . . . . . . . 10
9 Supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.1 UCODE I2C special feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.2 UCODE I2C special features control
mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9.3 Change Config Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
9.4 UCODE I2C memory bank locking
mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
9.4.1 Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
9.4.2 Via RF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
9.4.3 Via I2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
10 I2C commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
10.1 UCODE I2C operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
10.2 Start condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
10.3 Stop condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
10.4 Acknowledge bit (ACK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
10.5 Data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
10.6 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
10.7 Write Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
10.7.1 Word Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10.7.2 Page Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10.8 Read operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10.8.1 Random Address Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10.8.2 Current Address Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10.8.3 Sequential Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10.8.4 Acknowledge in Read mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10.8.5 EPC memory bank handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
11 RF interface/I2C interface arbitration. . . . . . . 23
12 Limiting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
13 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
14 Package outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
15 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
16 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
17 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
18 Legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
18.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
18.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
18.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
18.4 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
19 Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
20 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
21 Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
22 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1. General description
NXP’s UCODE G2iL series transponder ICs offer leading-edge read range and support
industry-first features such as a Tag Tamper Alarm, Data Transfer, Digital Switch, and
advanced privacy-protection modes.
Very high chip sensitivity (18 dBm) enables longer read ranges with simple, single-port
antenna designs. When connected to a power supply, the READ as well as the WRITE
range can be boosted to a sensitivity of 27 dBm. In fashion and retail the UCODE G2iL
series improve read rates and provide for theft deterrence. For consumer electronics the
UCODE G2iL series is suited for device configuration, activation, production control, and
PCB tagging. In authentication applications the transponders can be used to protect
brands and guard against counterfeiting. They can also be used to tag containers,
electronic vehicles, airline baggage, and more.
In addition to the EPC specifications the G2iL offers an integrated Product Status Flag
(PSF) feature and read protection of the memory content.
On top of the G2iL features the G2iL+ offers an integrated tag tamper alarm, RF field
detection, digital switch, external supply mode, read range reduction and data transfer
mode.
2. Features and benefits
2.1 Key features
UHF RFID Gen2 tag chip according EPCglobal v1.2.0 with 128 bit EPC memory
Memory read protection
Integrated Product Status Flag (PSF)
Tag tamper alarm
RF field detection
Digital switch
Data transfer mode
Real Read Range Reduction (Privacy Mode)
External supply mode where both the READ & WRITE range are boosted to -27dBm
2.1.1 Memory
128-bit of EPC memory
64-bit Tag IDentifier (TID) including 32-bit factory locked unique serial number
32-bit kill password to permanently disable the tag
32-bit access password to allow a transition into the secured state
SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 2 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
Data retention: 20 years
Broad international operating frequency: from 840 MHz to 960 MHz
Long read/write ranges due to extremely low power design
Reliable operation of multiple tags due to advanced anti-collision
READ protection
WRITE Lock
Wide specified temperature range: 40 C up to +85 C
2.2 Key benefits
2.2.1 End user benefit
Prevention of unauthorized memory access through read protection
Indication of tag tampering attempt by use of the tag tamper alarm feature
Electronic device configuration and / or activation by the use of the digital switch / data
transfer mode
Theft deterrence supported by the PSF feature (PSF alarm or EPC code)
Small label sizes, long read ranges due to high chip sensitivity
Product identification through unalterable extended TID range, including a 32-bit serial
number
Reliable operation in dense reader and noisy environments through high interference
suppression
2.2.2 Antenna design benefits
High sensitivity enables small and cost efficient antenna designs
Low Q-Value eases broad band antenna design for global usage
2.2.3 Label manufacturer benefit
Consistent performance on different materials due to low Q-factor
Ease of assembly and high assembly yields through large chip input capacitance
Fast first WRITE of the EPC memory for fast label initialization
2.3 Custom commands
PSF Alarm
Built-in PSF (Product Status Flag), enables the UHF RFID tag to be used as EAS tag
(Electronic Article Surveillance) tag without the need for a back-end data base.
Read Protect
Protects all memory content including CRC16 from unauthorized reading.
ChangeConfig
Configures the additional features of the chip like external supply mode, tamper alarm,
digital switch, read range reduction or data transfer.
The UCODE G2iL is equipped with a number of additional features and custom
commands. Nevertheless, the chip is designed in a way standard EPCglobal
READ/WRITE/ACCESS commands can be used to operate the features. No custom
commands are needed to take advantage of all the features in case of unlocked EPC
memory.
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 3 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
3. Applications
3.1 Markets
Fashion (Apparel and footwear)
Retail
Electronics
Fast Moving Consumer Goods
Asset management
Electronic Vehicle Identification
3.2 Applications
Supply chain management
Item level tagging
Pallet and case tracking
Container identification
Product authentication
PCB tagging
Cost efficient, low level seals
Wireless firmware download
Wireless product activation
Outside above mentioned applications, please contact NXP Semiconductors for support.
4. Ordering information
5. Marking
Table 1. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name IC type Description Version
SL3S1203FUF Wafer G2iL bumped die on sawn 8” 75 m wafer not applicable
SL3S1213FUF Wafer G2iL+ bumped die on sawn 8” 75 m wafer not applicable
SL3S1203FUD/BG Wafer G2iL bumped die on sawn 8” 120 m wafer,
7 m Polyimide spacer
not applicable
SL3S1213FUD/BG Wafer G2iL+ bumped die on sawn 8” 120 m wafer,
7 m Polyimide spacer
not applicable
SL3S1203FTB0 XSON6 G2iL plastic extremely thin small outline package;
no leads; 6 terminals; body 1 1.45 0.5 mm
SOT886F1
Table 2. Marking codes
Type number Marking code Comment Version
SL3S1203FTB0 UN UCODE G2iL SOT886
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 4 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
6. Block diagram
The SL3S12x3 IC consists of three major blocks:
- Analog Interface
- Digital Control
- EEPROM
The analog part provides stable supply voltage and demodulates data received from the
reader for being processed by the digital part. Further, the modulation transistor of the
analog part transmits data back to the reader.
The digital section includes the state machines, processes the protocol and handles
communication with the EEPROM, which contains the EPC and the user data.
Fig 1. Block diagram of G2iL IC
001aam226
MOD
DEMOD
VREG
VDD
VDD
data
in
data
out
R/W
ANALOG
RF INTERFACE
PAD
PAD
RECT
DIGITAL CONTROL
ANTENNA
ANTICOLLISION
READ/WRITE
CONTROL
ACCESS CONTROL
EEPROM INTERFACE
CONTROL
RF INTERFACE
CONTROL
I/O CONTROL
I/O
CONTROL
EEPROM
MEMORY
SEQUENCER
CHARGE PUMP
PAD
OUT
PAD
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 5 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
7. Pinning information
7.1 Pin description
Fig 2. Pinning bare die Fig 3. Pin configuration for SOT886
001aam529
VDD
OUT RFN
NXP trademark RFP
SL3S12x3FTB0
n.c.
001aan103
RFP
RFN
n.c.
VDD
OUT
Transparent top view
2
3
1
5
4
6
Table 3. Pin description bare die
Symbol Description
OUT output pin
RFN grounded antenna connector
VDD external supply
RFP ungrounded antenna connector
Table 4. Pin description SOT886
Pin Symbol Description
1 RFP ungrounded antenna connector
2 n.c. not connected
3 RFN grounded antenna connector
4 OUT output pin
5 n.c. not connected
6 VDD external supply
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 6 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
8. Wafer layout
8.1 Wafer layout
(1) Die to Die distance (metal sealring - metal sealring) 21,4 m, (X-scribe line width: 15 m)
(2) Die to Die distance (metal sealring - metal sealring) 21,4 m, (Y-scribe line width: 15 m)
(3) Chip step, x-length: 485 m
(4) Chip step, y-length: 435 m
(5) Bump to bump distance X (OUT - RFN): 383 m
(6) Bump to bump distance Y (RFN - RFP): 333 m
(7) Distance bump to metal sealring X: 40,3 m (outer edge - top metal)
(8) Distance bump to metal sealring Y: 40,3 m
Bump size X x Y: 60 m x 60 m
Remark: OUT and VDD are used with G2iL+ only
Fig 4. G2iL wafer layout
not to scale! 001aak871
(1)
(7)
(2)
(8)
(5)
(6) (4)
(3)
Y
X
VDD
OUT RFN
RFP
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 7 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
9. Mechanical specification
The UCODE G2iL/G2iL+ wafers are available in 75 m and 120 m thickness. The 75m
thick wafer allows ultra thin label design but require a proper tuning of the glue dispenser
during production. Because of the more robust structure of the 120m wafer, the wafer is
ideal for harsh applications. The 120 m thick wafer is also enhanced with 7m Polyimide
spacer allowing additional protection of the active circuit.
9.1 Wafer specification
See Ref. 20 “Data sheet - Delivery type description – General specification for 8” wafer on
UV-tape with electronic fail die marking, BU-ID document number: 1093**”.
9.1.1 Wafer
Table 5. Specifications
Wafer
Designation each wafer is scribed with batch number
and wafer number
Diameter 200 mm (8”)
Thickness
SL3S12x3FUF 75 m 15 m
SL3S12x3FUD 120 m 15 m
Number of pads 4
Pad location non diagonal/ placed in chip corners
Distance pad to pad RFN-RFP 333.0 m
Distance pad to pad OUT-RFN 383.0 m
Process CMOS 0.14 m
Batch size 25 wafers
Potential good dies per wafer 139.351
Wafer backside
Material Si
Treatment ground and stress release
Roughness Ra max. 0.5 m, Rt max. 5 m
Chip dimensions
Die size including scribe 0.485 mm 0.435 mm = 0.211 mm2
Scribe line width: x-dimension = 15 m
y-dimension = 15 m
Passivation on front
Type Sandwich structure
Material PE-Nitride (on top)
Thickness 1.75 m total thickness of passivation
Polyimide spacer 7 m 1 m (SL3S12x3FUD only)
Au bump
Bump material > 99.9 % pure Au
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 8 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
[1] Because of the 7 m spacer, the bump will measure 18 m relative height protruding the spacer.
9.1.2 Fail die identification
No inkdots are applied to the wafer.
Electronic wafer mapping (SECS II format) covers the electrical test results and
additionally the results of mechanical/visual inspection.
See Ref. 20 “Data sheet - Delivery type description – General specification for 8” wafer on
UV-tape with electronic fail die marking, BU-ID document number: 1093**”
9.1.3 Map file distribution
See Ref. 20 “Data sheet - Delivery type description – General specification for 8” wafer on
UV-tape with electronic fail die marking, BU-ID document number: 1093**”
10. Functional description
10.1 Air interface standards
The UCODE G2iL fully supports all parts of the "Specification for RFID Air Interface
EPCglobal, EPC Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols, Class-1 Generation-2 UHF RFID,
Protocol for Communications at 860 MHz to 960 MHz, Version 1.2.0".
10.2 Power transfer
The interrogator provides an RF field that powers the tag, equipped with a UCODE G2iL.
The antenna transforms the impedance of free space to the chip input impedance in order
to get the maximum possible power for the G2iL on the tag. The G2iL+ can also be
supplied externally.
The RF field, which is oscillating on the operating frequency provided by the interrogator,
is rectified to provide a smoothed DC voltage to the analog and digital modules of the IC.
Bump hardness 35 – 80 HV 0.005
Bump shear strength > 70 MPa
Bump height
SL3S12x3FUF 18 m
SL3S12x3FUD 25 m[1]
Bump height uniformity
within a die 2 m
– within a wafer 3 m
– wafer to wafer 4 m
Bump flatness 1.5 m
Bump size
– RFP, RFN 60 60 m
– OUT, VDD 60 60 m
Bump size variation 5 m
Table 5. Specifications
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 9 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
The antenna that is attached to the chip may use a DC connection between the two
antenna pads. Therefore the G2iL also enables loop antenna design. Possible examples
of supported antenna structures can be found in the reference antenna design guide.
10.3 Data transfer
10.3.1 Reader to tag Link
An interrogator transmits information to the UCODE G2iL by modulating an UHF RF
signal. The G2iL receives both information and operating energy from this RF signal. Tags
are passive, meaning that they receive all of their operating energy from the interrogator's
RF waveform. In order to further improve the read range the UCODE G2iL+ can be
externally supplied as well so the energy to operate the chip does not need to be
transmitted by the reader.
An interrogator is using a fixed modulation and data rate for the duration of at least one
inventory round. It communicates to the G2iL by modulating an RF carrier using DSB-ASK
with PIE encoding.
For further details refer to Section 16, Ref. 1. Interrogator-to-tag (R=>T) communications.
10.3.2 Tag to reader Link
An interrogator receives information from a G2iL by transmitting an unmodulated RF
carrier and listening for a backscattered reply. The G2iL backscatters by switching the
reflection coefficient of its antenna between two states in accordance with the data being
sent. For further details refer to Section 16, Ref. 1, chapter 6.3.1.3.
The UCODE G2iL communicates information by backscatter-modulating the amplitude
and/or phase of the RF carrier. Interrogators shall be capable of demodulating either
demodulation type.
The encoding format, selected in response to interrogator commands, is either FM0
baseband or Miller-modulated subcarrier.
10.4 G2iL and G2iL+ differences
The UCODE G2iL is tailored for application where mainly EPC or TID number space is
needed. The G2iL+ in addition provides functionality such as tag tamper alarm, external
supply operation to further boost read/write range (external supply mode), a Privacy mode
reducing the read range or I/O functionality (data transfer to externally connected devices)
required.
The following table provides an overview of G2iL, G2iL+ special features.
Table 6. Overview of G2iL and G2iL+ features
Features G2iL G2iL+
Read protection (bankwise) yes yes
PSF (Built-in Product Status Flag) yes yes
Backscatter strength reduction yes yes
Real read range reduction yes yes
Digital switch / Digital input - yes
External supply mode - yes
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 10 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
10.5 Supported commands
The G2iL supports all mandatory EPCglobal V1.2.0 commands.
In addition the G2iL supports the following optional commands:
• ACCESS
• Block Write (32 bit)
The G2iL features the following custom commands described more in detail later:
• ResetReadProtect (backward compatible to G2X)
• ReadProtect (backward compatible to G2X)
• ChangeEAS (backward compatible to G2X)
• EAS_Alarm (backward compatible to G2X)
• ChangeConfig (new with G2iL)
10.6 G2iL, G2iL+ memory
The G2iL, G2iL+ memory is implemented according EPCglobal Class1Gen2 and
organized in three sections:
The logical address of all memory banks begin at zero (00h).
In addition to the three memory banks one configuration word to handle the G2iL specific
features is available at EPC bank 01 address 200h. The configuration word is described in
detail in Section 10.7.1 “ChangeConfig”.
Memory pages (16 bit words) pre-programmed to zero will not execute an erase cycle
before writing data to it. This approach accelerates initialization of the chip and enables
faster programming of the memory.
RF field detection - yes
Data transfer - yes
Tag tamper alarm - yes
Table 6. Overview of G2iL and G2iL+ features …continued
Features G2iL G2iL+
Table 7. G2iL memory sections
Name Size Bank
Reserved memory (32 bit ACCESS and 32 bit KILL password) 64 bit 00b
EPC (excluding 16 bit CRC-16 and 16 bit PC) 128 bit 01b
G2iL Configuration Word 16 bit 01b
TID (including permalocked unique 32 bit serial number) 64 bit 10b
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 11 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
10.6.1 G2iL, G2iL+ overall memory map
[1] See Figure 5
[2] Indicates the existence of a Configuration Word at the end of the EPC number
[3] See also Table 12 for further details.
Table 8. G2iL, G2iL+ overall memory map
Bank
address
Memory
address
Type Content Initial Remark
Bank 00 00h to 1Fh reserved kill password all 00h unlocked memory
20h to 3Fh reserved access password all 00h unlocked memory
Bank 01
EPC
00h to 0Fh EPC CRC-16: refer to Ref. 16 memory mapped
calculated CRC
10h to 14h EPC backscatter length 00110b unlocked memory
15h EPC UMI 0b unlocked memory
16h EPC XPC indicator 0b hardwired to 0
17h to 1Fh EPC numbering system indicator 00h unlocked memory
20h to 9Fh EPC EPC [1] unlocked memory
Bank 01
Config Word
200h EPC tamper alarm flag 0b[3] indicator bit
201h EPC external supply flag or input
signal
0b[3] indicator bit
202h EPC RFU 0b[3] locked memory
203h EPC RFU 0b[3] locked memory
204h EPC invert digital output: 0b[3] temporary bit
205h EPC transparent mode on/off 0b[3] temporary bit
206h EPC transparent mode data/raw 0b[3] temporary bit
207h EPC RFU 0b[3] locked memory
208h EPC RFU 0b[3] locked memory
209h EPC max. backscatter strength 1b[3] unlocked memory
20Ah EPC digital output 0b[3] unlocked memory
20Bh EPC read range reduction on/off 0b[3] unlocked memory
20Ch EPC RFU 0b[3] locked memory
20Dh EPC read protect EPC Bank 0b[3] unlocked memory
20Eh EPC read protect TID 0b[3] unlocked memory
20Fh EPC PSF alarm flag 0b[3] unlocked memory
Bank 10
TID
00h to 07h TID allocation class identifier 1110 0010b locked memory
08h to 13h TID tag mask designer identifier 0000 0000 0110b locked memory
14h TID config word indicator 1b[2] locked memory
14h to 1Fh TID tag model number TMNR[1] locked memory
20h to 3Fh TID serial number SNR locked memory
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 12 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
10.6.2 G2iL TID memory details
Fig 5. G2iL TID memory structure
aaa-010217
E2006906 E2h 006h 1 0010b 0000110b
Ucode G2iL+ E2006807 E2h 006h 1 0000b 0000111b
E2006907 E2h 006h 1 0010b 0000111b
Ucode G2iL E2006806 E2h 006h 1 0000b 0000110b
First 32 bit of TID
memory
Class ID
Mask
Designer
ID
Config Word
Indicator
Sub
Version Nr.
Model Number
Version
(Silicon) Nr.
Class Identifier
MS Byte
MS Bit LS Bit
LS Byte
TID
MS Bit LS Bit
Mask-Designer Identifier Model Number Serial Number
Bits 7 0 11 0 11 0 31 0
Addresses 00h 07h 13h 1Fh 3Fh
Addresses 00h 3Fh
08h 14h 20h
E2h
(EAN.UCC)
006h
(NXP)
806h or 906h or B06h
(UCODE G2iL)
00000001h to FFFFFFFFh
Sub Version Number Version Number
000b or 001b or 0110b 0000110b
(UCODE G2iL)
Bits 0 3 0 6 0
Addresses 14h 18h 19h 1Fh
E2006B06 E2h 006h 1 0110b 0000110b
E2006B07 E2h 006h 1 0110b 0000111b
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 13 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
10.7 Custom commands
The UCODE G2iL, G2iL+ is equipped with a number of additional features and custom
commands.
Nevertheless, the chip is designed in a way standard EPCglobal READ/WRITE/ACCESS
commands can be used to operate the features.
The memory map stated in the previous section describes the Configuration Word used to
control the additional features located at address 200h of the EPC memory. For this
reason the standard READ/WRITE commands of an UHF EPCglobal compliant reader
can be used to select the flags or activate/deactivate features.
The features can only be activated/deactivated (written) using standard EPC WRITE
command as long the EPC is not locked. In case the EPC is locked either the bank needs
to be unlocked to apply changes or the ChangeConfig custom command is used to
change the settings.
The UCODE G2iL is also equipped with the complete UCODE G2X command set for
backward compatibility reasons. Nevertheless, the one ChangeConfig command of the
G2iL can be used instead of the entire G2X command set.
Bit 14h of the TID indicates the existence of a Configuration Word. This flag will enable
selecting Config-Word enhanced transponders in mixed tag populations.
10.7.1 ChangeConfig
Although G2iL is tailored for supply chain management, item level tagging and product
authentication the G2iL+ version enables active interaction with products. Among the
password protected features are the capability of download firmware to electronics,
activate/deactivate electronics which can also be used as theft deterrence, a dedicated
privacy mode by reducing the read range, integrated PSF (Product Status Flag) or Tag
Tamper Alarm.
The G2iL ChangeConfig custom command allows handling the special NXP
Semiconductors features described in the following paragraph. Please also see the
memory map in Section 10.6 “G2iL, G2iL+ memory” and “Section 10.7.2 “G2iL, G2iL+
special features control mechanism”. If the EPC memory is not write locked the standard
EPC READ/WRITE command can be used to change the settings.
G2iL, G2iL+ special features1
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+ common special features are:
• Bank wise read protection (separate for EPC and TID)
EPC bank and the serial number part of the TID can be read protected independently.
When protected reading of the particular memory will return '0'. The flags of the
configuration word can be selected using the standard SELECT2 command. Only
read protected parts will then participate an inventory round. The G2X ReadProtect
command will set both EPC and TID read protect flags.
1. The features can only be manipulated (enabled/disabled) with unlocked EPC bank, otherwise the ChangeConfig command can be
used.
2. SELECT has to be applied onto the Configuration Word with pointer address 200h. Selecting bits within the Configuration Word
using a pointer address not equal to 200h is not possible.
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 14 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
• Integrated PSF (Product Status Flag)
The PSF is a general purpose flag that can be used as an EAS (Electronic Article
Surveillance) flag, quality checked flag or similar.
The G2iL offers two ways of detecting an activated PSF. In cases extremely fast
detection is needed the EAS_Alarm command can be used. The UCODE G2iL will
reply a 64-bit alarm code like described in section EAS_Alarm upon sending the
command. As a second option the EPC SELECT2 command selecting the PSF flag of
the configuration word can be used. In the following inventory round only PSF
enabled chips will reply their EPC number.
• Backscatter strength reduction
The UCODE G2iL features two levels of backscatter strengths. Per default maximum
backscatter is enabled in order to enable maximum read rates. When clearing the flag
the strength can be reduced if needed.
• Real Read Range Reduction 4R
Some applications require the reduction of the read range to close proximity for
privacy reasons. Setting the 4R flag will significantly reduce the chip sensitivity to
+12 dBm. The +12 dBm have to be available at chip start up (slow increase of field
strength is not applicable). For additional privacy, the read protection can be activated
in the same configuration step. The related flag of the configuration word can be
selected using the standard SELECT2 command so only chips with reduced read
range will be part of an inventory.
Remark: The attenuation will result in only a few centimeter of read range at 36 dBm
EIRP!
UCODE G2iL+ specific special features are:1
• Tag Tamper Alarm (G2iL+ only)
The UCODE G2iL+ Tamper Alarm will flag the status of the VDD to OUT pad
connection which can be designed as an predetermined breaking point (see
Figure 6).
The status of the pad connection (open/closed) can be read in the configuration register
and/or selected using the EPC SELECT2. This feature will enable designing a wireless
RFID safety seal. When breaking the connection by peeling off the label or manipulating a
lock an alarm can be triggered.
Fig 6. Schematic of connecting VDD and OUT pad with a predetermined breaking point
to turn a standard RFID label into a wireless safety seal
001aam228
OUT VDD
GND RFP
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 15 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
• RF field detection (G2iL+ only)
The UCODE G2iL+ VDD pin can be also used as a RF field detector. Upon bringing
the tag within an RF field, a pulse signal will be immediately sent from the VDD test
pad. (for details see Ref. 21).
• Digital Switch (G2iL+ only)
The UCODE G2iL+ OUT pin can be used as digital switch. The state of the output pad
can be switched to VDD or GND depending on the Digital OUT bit of the Configuration
Word register. The state of the output is persistent in the memory even after KILL or
switching off the supply. This feature will allow activating/deactivating externally
connected peripherals or can be used as theft deterrence of electronics.
The state of the OUT pin can also be changed temporary by toggling the 'Invert Digital
Output' bit.
• Data transfer Mode (G2iL+ only)
In applications where not switching the output like described in "Digital Switch" but
external device communication is needed the G2iL+ Data Transfer Mode can be used
by setting the according bit of the Configuration Word register. When activated the air
interface communication will be directly transferred to the OUT pad of the chip.
Two modes of data transfer are available and can be switched using the Transparent
Mode DATA/RAW bit.
The default Transparent Mode DATA will remove the Frame Sync of the
communication and toggle the output with every raising edge in the RF field. This will
allow implementing a Manchester type of data transmission.
The Transparent Mode RAW will switch the demodulated air interface communication
to the OUT pad.
• External Supply Indicator - Digital Input (G2iL+ only)
The VDD pad of the UCODE G2iL+ can be used as a single bit digital input pin. The
state of the pad is directly associated with the External Supply Indicator bit of the
configuration register. Simple one bit return signaling (chip to reader) can be
implemented by polling this Configuration Word register flag. RF reset is necessary
for proper polling.
• External Supply Mode (G2iL+ only)
The UCODE G2iL+ can be supplied externally by connecting 1.85 V (Iout = 0μA)
supply. When externally supplied less energy from the RF field is needed to operate
the chip. This will not just enable further improved sensitivity and read ranges (up to
27 dBm) but also enable a write range that is equal to the read range.
The figure schematically shows the supply connected to the UCODE G2iL+.
Remark: When permanently externally supplied there will not be a power-on-reset. This
will result in the following limitations:
• When externally supplied session flag S0 will keep it’s state during RF-OFF phase.
• When externally supplied session flag S2, S3, SL will have infinite persistence time
and will behave similar to S0.
• Session flag S1 will behave regular like in pure passive operation.
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 16 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
The bits to be toggled in the configuration register need to be set to '1'.
E.g. sending 0000 0000 0001 0001 XOR RN16 will activate the 4R and PSF. Sending the
very same command a second time will disable the features again.
The reply of the ChangeConfig will return the current register setting.
Fig 7. Schematic of external power supply
Table 9. ChangeConfig custom command
Command RFU Data RN CRC-16
No. of bits 16 8 16 16 16
Description 11100000
00000111
00000000 Toggle bits
XOR RN 16
handle -
Table 10. ChangeConfig custom command reply
Header Status bits RN CRC-16
No. of bits 1 16 16 16
Description 0 Config-Word Handle -
Table 11. ChangeConfig command-response table
Starting state Condition Response Next state
ready all - ready
arbitrate, reply,
acknowledged
all - arbitrate
open valid handle Status word
needs to change
Backscatter unchanged
Config-WordConfig-Word
immediately
open
valid handle Status word does
not need to change
Backscatter Config-Word
immediately
open
secured valid handle Status word
needs to change
Backscatter modified
Config-Word, when done
secured
valid handle Status word does
not need to change
Backscatter Config-Word
immediately
secured
killed all - killed
001aam229
OUT VDD
Vsupply
GND RFP
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 17 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
The features can only be activated/deactivated using standard EPC WRITE if the EPC
bank is unlocked. The permanent and temporary bits of the Configuration Word can be
toggled without the need for an ACCESS password in case the ACCESS password is set
to zero. In case the EPC bank is locked the lock needs to be removed before applying
changes or the ChangeConfig command has to be used.
10.7.2 G2iL, G2iL+ special features control mechanism
Special features of the G2iL are managed using a configuration word (Config-Word)
located at address 200h in the EPC memory bank.
The entire Config-Word is selectable (using the standard EPC SELECT2 command) and
can be read using standard EPC READ command and modified using the standard EPC
WRITE or ChangeConfig custom command in case the EPC memory is locked for writing.
ChangeConfig can be executed from the OPEN and SECURED state.
The chip will take all “Toggle Bits” for ’0’ if the chip is in the OPEN state or the ACCESS
password is zero; therefore it will not alter any status bits, but report the current status
only. The command will be ignored with an invalid CRC-16 or an invalid handle. The chip
will then remain in the current state. The CRC-16 is calculated from the first
command-code bit to the last handle bit.
A ChangeConfig command without frame-sync and proceeding Req_RN will be ignored.
The command will also be ignored if any of the RFU bits are toggled.
In order to change the configuration, to activate/deactivate a feature a ’1’ has to be written
to the corresponding register flag to toggle the status. E.g. sending 0x0002 to the register
will activate the read protection of the TID. Sending the same command a second time will
again clear the read protection of the TID. Invalid toggling on indicator or RFU bits are
ignored.
Executing the command with zero as payload or in the OPEN state will return the current
register settings. The chip will reply to a successful ChangeConfig with an extended
preamble regardless of the TRext value of the Query command.
After sending a ChangeConfig an interrogator shall transmit CW for less than TReply or
20 ms, where TReply is the time between the interrogator's ChangeConfig command and
the chip’s backscattered reply. An interrogator may observe three possible responses
after sending a ChangeConfig, depending on the success or failure of the operation
• ChangeConfigChangeConfig succeeded: The chip will backscatter the reply shown
above comprising a header (a 0-bit), the current Status Word setting, the handle, and
a CRC-16 calculated over the 0-bit, the status word and the handle. If the interrogator
observes this reply within 20 ms then the ChangeConfig completed successfully.
• The chip encounters an error: The chip will backscatter an error code during the CW
period rather than the reply shown below (see EPCglobal Spec for error-code
definitions and for the reply format).
• ChangeConfig does not succeed: If the interrogator does not observe a reply within
20 ms then the ChangeStatus did not complete successfully. The interrogator may
issue a Req_RN command (containing the handle) to verify that the chip is still in the
interrogator's field, and may reissue the ChangeConfig command.
The G2iL configuration word is located at address 200h of the EPC memory and is
structured as following:
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 18 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
The configuration word contains three different type of bits:
• Indicator bits cannot be changed by command:
Tag Tamper Alarm Indicator
External Supply Indicator (digital input)
• Temporary bits are reset at power up:
Invert Output
Transparent Mode on/off
Data Mode data/raw
• Permanent bits: permanently stored bits in the memory
Max. Backscatter Strength
Digital Output
Read Range Reduction
Read Protect EPC
Read Protect TID
PSF Alarm
10.7.3 ReadProtect3
The G2iL ReadProtect custom command enables reliable read protection of the entire
G2iL memory. Executing ReadProtect from the Secured state will set the ProtectEPC and
ProtectTID bits of the Configuration Word to '1'. With the ReadProtect-Bit set the G2iL will
continue to work unaffected but veil its protected content.
The read protection can be removed by executing Reset ReadProtect. The
ReadProtect-Bits will than be cleared.
Devices whose access password is zero will ignore the command. A frame-sync must be
pre-pended the command.
After sending the ReadProtect command an interrogator shall transmit CW for the lesser
of TReply or 20 ms, where TReply is the time between the interrogator's ReadProtect
command and the backscattered reply. An interrogator may observe three possible
responses after sending a ReadProtect, depending on the success or failure of the
operation:
Table 12. Address 200h to 207h
Indicator bits Temporary bits
Tamper
indicator
External supply
indicator
RFU RFU Invert Output Transparent
mode on/off
Data mode
data/raw
RFU
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 13. Address 208h to 20Fh
Permanent bits
RFU max. backscatter
strength
Digital
output
Privacy
mode
RFU Protect EPC Protect TID PSF Alarm
bit
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3. Note: The ChangeConfig command can be used instead of “ReadProtect”, “ResetReadProtect”, “ChangeEAS”.
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 19 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
• ReadProtect succeeds: After completing the ReadProtect the G2iL shall backscatter
the reply shown in Table 15 comprising a header (a 0-bit), the tag's handle, and a
CRC-16 calculated over the 0-bit and handle. Immediately after this reply the G2iL will
render itself to this ReadProtect mode. If the interrogator observes this reply within
20 ms then the ReadProtect completed successfully.
• The G2iL encounters an error: The G2iL will backscatter an error code during the CW
period rather than the reply shown in the EPCglobal Spec (see Annex I for error-code
definitions and for the reply format).
• ReadProtect does not succeed: If the interrogator does not observe a reply within
20 ms then the ReadProtect did not complete successfully. The interrogator may
issue a Req_RN command (containing the handle) to verify that the G2iL is still in the
interrogation zone, and may re-initiate the ReadProtect command.
The G2iL reply to the ReadProtect command will use the extended preamble shown in
EPCglobal Spec (Figure 6.11 or Figure 6.15), as appropriate (i.e. a Tag shall reply as if
TRext=1) regardless of the TRext value in the Query that initiated the round.
10.7.4 Reset ReadProtect3
Reset ReadProtect allows an interrogator to clear the ProtectEPC and ProtectTID bits of
the Configuration Word. This will re-enable reading of the related G2iL memory content.
For details on the command response please refer to Table 17 “Reset ReadProtect
command”.
Table 14. ReadProtect command
Command RN CRC-16
# of bits 16 16 16
description 11100000 00000001 handle -
Table 15. G2iL reply to a successful ReadProtect procedure
Header RN CRC-16
# of bits 1 16 16
description 0 handle -
Table 16. ReadProtect command-response table
Starting State Condition Response Next State
ready all – ready
arbitrate, reply,
acknowledged
all – arbitrate
open all - open
secured valid handle & invalid
access password
– arbitrate
valid handle & valid
non zero access
password
Backscatter handle,
when done
secured
invalid handle – secured
killed all – killed
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 20 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
After sending a Reset ReadProtect an interrogator shall transmit CW for the lesser of
TReply or 20 ms, where TReply is the time between the interrogator's Reset ReadProtect
command and the G2iL backscattered reply. A Req_RN command prior to the Reset
ReadProtect is necessary to successfully execute the command. A frame-sync must be
pre-pended the command.
An interrogator may observe three possible responses after sending a Reset
ReadProtect, depending on the success or failure of the operation:
• Reset ReadProtect succeeds: After completing the Reset ReadProtect a G2iL will
backscatter the reply shown in Table 18 comprising a header (a 0-bit), the handle, and
a CRC-16 calculated over the 0-bit and handle. If the interrogator observes this reply
within 20 ms then the Reset ReadProtect completed successfully.
• The G2iL encounters an error: The G2iL will backscatter an error code during the CW
period rather than the reply shown in Table 18 (see EPCglobal Spec for error-code
definitions and for the reply format).
• Reset ReadProtect does not succeed: If the interrogator does not observe a reply
within 20 ms then the Reset ReadProtect did not complete successfully. The
interrogator may issue a Req_RN command (containing the handle) to verify that the
G2iL is still in the interrogation zone, and may reissue the Reset ReadProtect
command.
The G2iL reply to the Reset ReadProtect command will use the extended preamble
shown in EPCglobal Spec (Figure 6.11 or Figure 6.15), as appropriate (i.e. a G2iL will
reply as if TRext=1 regardless of the TRext value in the Query that initiated the round.
The Reset ReadProtect command is structured as following:
• 16 bit command
• Password: 32 bit Access-Password XOR with 2 times current RN16
Remark: To generate the 32 bit password the 16 bit RN16 is duplicated and used two
times to generate the 32 bit (e.g. a RN16 of 1234 will result in 1234 1234).
• 16 bit handle
• CRC-16 calculate over the first command-code bit to the last handle bit
Table 17. Reset ReadProtect command
Command Password RN CRC-16
# of bits 16 32 16 16
description 11100000
00000010
(access
password)
2*RN16
handle -
Table 18. G2iL reply to a successful Reset ReadProtect command
Header RN CRC-16
# of bits 1 16 16
description 0 handle -
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 21 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
10.7.5 ChangeEAS3
UCODE G2iL equipped RFID tags will also feature a stand-alone operating EAS alarm
mechanism for fast and offline electronic article surveillance. The PSF bit of the
Configuration Word directly relates to the EAS Alarm feature. With an PSF bit set to '1' the
tag will reply to an EAS_Alarm command by backscattering a 64 bit alarm code without
the need of a Select or Query. The EAS is a built-in solution so no connection to a
backend database is required. In case the EAS_Alarm command is not implemented in
the reader a standard EPC SELCET to the Configuration Word and Query can be used.
When using standard SELECT/QUERY the EPC will be returned during inventory.
ChangeEAS can be executed from the Secured state only. The command will be ignored
if the Access Password is zero, the command will also be ignored with an invalid CRC-16
or an invalid handle, the G2iL will than remain in the current state. The CRC-16 is
calculated from the first command-code bit to the last handle bit. A frame-sync must be
pre-pended the command.
The G2iL reply to a successful ChangeEAS will use the extended preamble, as
appropriate (i.e. a Tag shall reply as if TRext=1) regardless of the TRext value in the
Query that initiated the round.
After sending a ChangeEAS an interrogator shall transmit CW for less than TReply or
20 ms, where TReply is the time between the interrogator's ChangeEAS command and the
G2iL backscattered reply. An interrogator may observe three possible responses after
sending a ChangeEAS, depending on the success or failure of the operation
• ChangeEAS succeeds: After completing the ChangeEAS a G2iL will backscatter the
reply shown in Table 21 comprising a header (a 0-bit), the handle, and a CRC-16
calculated over the 0-bit and handle. If the interrogator observes this reply within
20 ms then the ChangeEAS completed successfully.
• The G2iL encounters an error: The G2iL will backscatter an error code during the CW
period rather than the reply shown in Table 21 (see EPCglobal Spec for error-code
definitions and for the reply format).
Table 19. Reset ReadProtect command-response table
Starting State Condition Response Next State
ready all – ready
arbitrate, reply,
acknowledged
all – arbitrate
open valid handle & valid access password Backscatter handle,
when done
open
valid handle & invalid access password – arbitrate
invalid handle – open
secured valid handle & valid access password Backscatter handle,
when done
secured
valid handle & invalid access password – arbitrate
invalid handle – secured
killed all – killed
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 22 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
• ChangeEAS does not succeed: If the interrogator does not observe a reply within
20 ms then the ChangeEAS did not complete successfully. The interrogator may
issue a Req_RN command (containing the handle) to verify that the G2iL is still in the
interrogator's field, and may reissue the ChangeEAS command.
Upon receiving a valid ChangeEAS command a G2iL will perform the commanded
set/reset operation of the PSF bit of the Configuration Word.
If PSF bit is set, the EAS_Alarm command will be available after the next power up and
reply the 64 bit EAS code upon execution. Otherwise the EAS_Alarm command will be
ignored.
10.7.6 EAS_Alarm
Upon receiving an EAS_Alarm custom command the UCODE G2iL will immediately
backscatter an EAS-Alarmcode in case the PSF bit of the Configuration Word is set. The
alarm code is returned without any delay caused by Select, Query and without the need
for a backend database.
The EAS feature of the G2iL is available after enabling it by sending a ChangeEAS
command described in Section 10.7.5 “ChangeEAS3” or after setting the PSF bit of the
Configuration Word to ’1’. With the EAS-Alarm enabled the G2iL will reply to an
EAS_Alarm command by backscattering a fixed 64 bit alarm code. A G2iL will reply to an
EAS_Alarm command from the ready state only. As an alternative to the fast EAS_Alarm
command a standard SELECT2 (upon the Configuration Word) and QUERY can be used.
If the PSF bit is reset to '0' by sending a ChangeEAS command in the password protected
Secure state or clearing the PSF bit the G2iL will not reply to an EAS_Alarm command.
Table 20. ChangeEAS command
Command ChangeEAS RN CRC-16
# of bits 16 1 16 16
description 11100000
00000011
1 ... set PSF bit
0 ... reset PSF bit
handle
Table 21. G2iL reply to a successful ChangeEAS command
Header RN CRC-16
# of bits 1 16 16
description 0 handle -
Table 22. ChangeEAS command-response table
Starting State Condition Response Next state
ready all – ready
arbitrate, reply,
acknowledged
all – arbitrate
open all – open
secured valid handle backscatter handle,
when done
secured
invalid handle – secured
killed all – killed
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 23 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
The EAS_Alarm command is structured as following:
• 16 bit command
• 16 bit inverted command
• DR (TRcal divide ratio) sets the T=>R link frequency as described in EPCglobal Spec.
6.3.1.2.8 and Table 6.9.
• M (cycles per symbol) sets the T=>R data rate and modulation format as shown in
EPCglobal Spec. Table 6.10.
• TRext chooses whether the T=>R preamble is pre-pended with a pilot tone as
described in EPCglobal Spec. 6.3.1.3.
A preamble must be pre-pended the EAS_Alarm command according EPCglobal Spec,
6.3.1.2.8.
Upon receiving an EAS_Alarm command the tag loads the CRC5 register with 01001b
and backscatters the 64 bit alarm code accordingly. The reader is now able to calculate
the CRC5 over the backscattered 64 bits received to verify the received code.
Table 23. EAS_Alarm command
Command Inv_Command DR M TRext CRC-16
# of bits 16 16 1 2 1 16
description 11100000
00000100
00011111
11111011
0: DR = 8
1: DR = 64/3
00: M = 1
01: M = 2
10: M = 4
11: M = 8
0: no pilot
tone
1: use pilot
tone
-
Table 24. G2iL reply to a successful EAS_Alarm command
Header EAS Code
# of bits 1 64
description 0 CRC5 (MSB)
Table 25. EAS_Alarm command-response table
Starting State Condition Response Next state
ready PSF bit is set
PSF bit is cleard
backscatter alarm code
--
ready
arbitrate, reply,
acknowledged
all – arbitrate
open all – open
secured all – secured
killed all – killed
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 24 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
11. Limiting values
[1] Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any conditions other
than those described in the Operating Conditions and Electrical Characteristics section of this specification
is not implied.
[2] This product includes circuitry specifically designed for the protection of its internal devices from the
damaging effects of excessive static charge. Nonetheless, it is suggested that conventional precautions be
taken to avoid applying greater than the rated maxima.
[3] For ESD measurement, the die chip has been mounted into a CDIP20 package.
Table 26. Limiting values[1][2]
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).
Voltages are referenced to RFN
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
Bare die and SOT886 limitations
Tstg storage temperature 55 +125 C
Tamb ambient temperature 40 +85 C
VESD electrostatic discharge
voltage
Human body
model
[3] - 2 kV
Pad limitations
Vi input voltage absolute limits,
VDD-OUT pad
0.5 +2.5 V
Io output current absolute limits
input/output
current, VDD-OUT
pad
0.5 +0.5 mA
Pi input power maximum power
dissipation, RFP
pad
- 100 mW
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 25 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
12. Characteristics
12.1 UCODE G2iL, G2iL+ bare die characteristics
[1] Power to process a Query command.
[2] Measured with a 50 source impedance.
[3] At minimum operating power.
[4] It has to be assured the reader (system) is capable of providing enough field strength to give +12 dBm at the chip otherwise
communication with the chip will not be possible.
[5] Enables tag designs to be within ETSI limits for return link data rates of e.g. 320 kHz/M4.
[6] Will result in up to 10 dB higher tag backscatter power at high field strength.
[7] Results in approx. 18.5 dBm tag sensitivity on a 2 dBi gain antenna.
Table 27. G2iL, G2iL+ RF interface characteristics (RFN, RFP)
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
fi input frequency 840 - 960 MHz
Normal mode - no external supply, read range reduction OFF
Pi(min) minimum input power READ sensitivity [1][2][7] - 18 - dBm
Pi(min) minimum input power WRITE sensitivity,
(write range/read
range - ratio)
- 30 - %
Ci input capacitance parallel [3] - 0.77 - pF
Q quality factor 915 MHz [3] - 9.7 - -
Z impedance 866 MHz [3] - 25 -j237 -
915 MHz [3] - 23 -j224 -
953 MHz [3] - 21 -j216 -
External supply mode - VDD pad supplied, read range reduction OFF
Pi(min) minimum input power Ext. supplied READ [1][2] - 27 - dBm
Ext. supplied WRITE [2] - 27 - dBm
Z impedance externally supplied,
915 MHz
[3] - 7 -j230 -
Read range reduction ON - no external supply
Pi(min) minimum input power 4R on READ [1][2][4] - +12 - dBm
4R on WRITE [2][4] - +12 - dBm
Z impedance 4R on, 915 MHz [3] - 18 -j2 -
Modulation resistance
R resistance modulation
resistance, max.
backscatter = off
[5] - 170 -
modulation
resistance, max.
backscatter = on
[6] - 55 -
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 26 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
[1] Activates Digital Output (OUT pin), increases read range (external supplied).
[2] Activates Digital Output (OUT pin), increases read and write range (external supplied).
[3] Operating the chip outside the specified voltage range may lead to undefined behaviour.
[4] Either the voltage or the current needs to be above given values to guarantee specified functionality.
[5] No proper operation is guaranteed if both, voltage and current, limits are exceeded.
[1] Is the sum of the allowed capacitance of the VDD and OUT pin referenced to RFN.
[2] Is the maximum allowed RF input voltage coupling to the VDD/OUT pin to guarantee undisturbed chip functionality.
[3] Resistance between VDD and OUT pin in checked during power up only.
[4] Resistance range to achieve tamper alarm flag = 1.
[5] Resistance range to achieve tamper alarm flag = 0:
Table 28. VDD pin characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Minimum supply voltage/current - without assisted EEPROM WRITE [1][3][4]
VDD supply voltage minimum voltage - - 1.8 V
IDD supply current minimum current,
Iout-^- = 0 A
- - 7 A
Iout = 100 A - - 110 A
Minimum supply voltage/current - assisted EEPROM READ and WRITE [2][3][4]
VDD supply voltage minimum voltage,
Iout = 0 A
- 1.8 1.85 V
Iout = 100 A - - 1.95 V
IDD supply current minimum current,
Iout = 0 A
- - 125 A
Iout = 100 A - - 265 A
Maximum supply voltage/current [3][5]
VDD supply voltage absolute maximum
voltage
2.2 - - V
Ii(max) maximum input current absolute maximum
current
280 - - A
Table 29. G2iL, G2iL+ VDD and OUT pin characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
OUT pin characteristics
VOL Low-level output voltage Isink = 1 mA - - 100 mV
VOH HIGH-level output voltage VDD = 1.8 V; Isource
= 100 μA
1.5 - - V
VDD/OUT pin characteristics
CL load capacitance VDD - OUT pin max. [1] - - 5 pF
Vo output voltage maximum RF peak
voltage on VDD-OUT
pins
[2] - - 500 mV
VDD/OUT pin tamper alarm characteristics [3]
RL(max) maximum load resistance resistance range high [4] - - <2 M
RL(min) minimum load resistance resistance range low [5] >20 - - M
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 27 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
For further reading we recommend application note “FAQ UCODE G2iL+“ (Ref. 21)
describing the output characteristics more in detail. An example schematic is available in
application note “UCODE G2iL+ Demo board Manual“ (Ref. 22). The documents are
available at NXP Document Control or at the website www.nxp.com.
[1] Tamb 25 C
12.2 UCODE G2iL SOT886 characteristics
[1] Power to process a Query command.
[2] Measured with a 50 source impedance.
[3] At minimum operating power.
Remark: For DC and memory characteristics refer to Table 28, Table 29 and Table 30.
Table 30. G2iL, G2iL+ memory characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
EEPROM characteristics
tret retention time Tamb 55 C 20 - - year
Nendu(W) write endurance 1000 10000[1] - cycle
Table 31. G2iL RF interface characteristics (RFN, RFP)
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Normal mode - no external supply, read range reduction OFF
Pi(min) minimum input power READ
sensitivity
[1][2] - 17.6 - dB
m
Z impedance 915 MHz [3] - 21 j199 -
Normal mode - externally supplied, read range reduction OFF
Pi(min) minimum input power READ
sensitivity
[1][2] - 27 - dB
m
Z impedance 915 MHz [3] - 5.6 j204 -
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 28 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
13. Package outline
Fig 8. Package outline SOT886
Outline References
version
European
projection Issue date
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT886 MO-252
sot886_po
04-07-22
12-01-05
Unit
mm
max
nom
min
0.5 0.04 1.50
1.45
1.40
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.35
0.30
0.27
0.40
0.35
0.32
0.6
A(1)
Dimensions (mm are the original dimensions)
Notes
1. Including plating thickness.
2. Can be visible in some manufacturing processes.
XSON6: plastic extremely thin small outline package; no leads; 6 terminals; body 1 x 1.45 x 0.5 mm SOT886
A1 b
0.25
0.20
0.17
D E e e1
0.5
L L1
terminal 1
index area
D
E
e1
e
A1
b
L1 L
e1
0 1 2 mm
scale
1
6
2
5
3
4
6x
(2)
4x
(2)
A
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 29 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
14. Packing information
14.1 Wafer
See Ref. 20 “Data sheet - Delivery type description – General specification for 8” wafer on
UV-tape with electronic fail die marking, BU-ID document number: 1093**”
14.2 SOT886
Part orientation T1. For details please refer to
http://www.standardics.nxp.com/packaging/packing/pdf/sot886.t1.t4.pdf
15. Abbreviations
Table 32. Abbreviations
Acronym Description
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CW Continuous Wave
DSB-ASK Double Side Band-Amplitude Shift Keying
DC Direct Current
EAS Electronic Article Surveillance
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EPC Electronic Product Code (containing Header, Domain Manager, Object Class
and Serial Number)
FM0 Bi phase space modulation
G2 Generation 2
IC Integrated Circuit
PIE Pulse Interval Encoding
RRRR Real Read Range Reduction
PSF Product Status Flag
RF Radio Frequency
UHF Ultra High Frequency
SECS Semi Equipment Communication Standard
TID Tag IDentifier
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 30 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
16. References
[1] EPCglobal: EPC Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols Class-1 Generation-2 UHF
RFID Protocol for Communications at 860 MHz – 960 MHz, Version 1.1.0
(December 17, 2005)
[2] EPCglobal: EPC Tag Data Standards
[3] EPCglobal (2004): FMCG RFID Physical Requirements Document (draft)
[4] EPCglobal (2004): Class-1 Generation-2 UHF RFID Implementation Reference
(draft)
[5] European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), EN 302 208:
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM) – Radio-frequency
identification equipment operating in the band 865 MHz to 868 MHz with power
levels up to 2 W, Part 1 – Technical characteristics and test methods
[6] European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), EN 302 208:
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM) – Radio-frequency
identification equipment operating in the band 865 MHz to 868 MHz with power
levels up to 2 W, Part 2 – Harmonized EN under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive
[7] [CEPT1]: CEPT REC 70-03 Annex 1
[8] [ETSI1]: ETSI EN 330 220-1, 2
[9] [ETSI3]: ETSI EN 302 208-1, 2 V<1.1.1> (2004-09-Electromagnetic compatibility
And Radio spectrum Matters (ERM) Radio Frequency Identification Equipment
operating in the band 865 - MHz to 868 MHz with power levels up to 2 W Part 1:
Technical characteristics and test methods.
[10] [FCC1]: FCC 47 Part 15 Section 247
[11] ISO/IEC Directives, Part 2: Rules for the structure and drafting of International
Standards
[12] ISO/IEC 3309: Information technology – Telecommunications and information
exchange between systems – High-level data link control (HDLC) procedures –
Frame structure
[13] ISO/IEC 15961: Information technology, Automatic identification and data capture –
Radio frequency identification (RFID) for item management – Data protocol:
application interface
[14] ISO/IEC 15962: Information technology, Automatic identification and data capture
techniques – Radio frequency identification (RFID) for item management – Data
protocol: data encoding rules and logical memory functions
[15] ISO/IEC 15963: Information technology — Radio frequency identification for item
management — Unique identification for RF tags
[16] ISO/IEC 18000-1: Information technology — Radio frequency identification for item
management — Part 1: Reference architecture and definition of parameters to be
standardized
[17] ISO/IEC 18000-6: Information technology automatic identification and data capture
techniques — Radio frequency identification for item management air interface —
Part 6: Parameters for air interface communications at 860–960 MHz
[18] ISO/IEC 19762: Information technology AIDC techniques – Harmonized vocabulary
– Part 3: radio-frequency identification (RFID)
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 31 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
[19] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Chapter I, Part 15:
Radio-frequency devices, U.S. Federal Communications Commission.
[20] Data sheet - Delivery type description – General specification for 8” wafer on
UV-tape with electronic fail die marking, BU-ID document number: 1093**4
[21] Application note - FAQ UCODE G2i, BU-ID document number: AN10940
[22] Application note - UCODE G2iM+ demo board documentation, BU-ID document
number: AN11237
4. ** ... document version number
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 32 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
17. Revision history
Table 33. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
SL3S1203_1213 v.4.4 20140317 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.4.3
Modifications: • Table 8 “G2iL, G2iL+ overall memory map”: Table notes updated
• Figure 5 “G2iL TID memory structure”: TIDs updated
SL3S1203_1213 v.4.3 20131127 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.4.2
Modifications: • Figure 5 “G2iL TID memory structure”: updated
SL3S1203_1213 v.4.2 20130701 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.4.1
Modifications: • Update of delivery form
• Update RF field detection
SL3S1203_1213 v.4.1 20120917 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.4.0
Modifications: • Update of delivery form
SL3S1203_1213 v.4.0 20120227 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.9
Modifications: • Figure 4 “G2iL wafer layout”: Figure notes (1) and (2) updated
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.9 20120130 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.8
Modifications: • Table 6 “Specifications”: “Passivation on front” updated
• Section 15.2.1 “General assembly recommendations”: updated
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.8 20120111 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.7
Modifications: • Section 8.1 “Wafer layout”: Figure notes (1) and (2) updated
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.7 20111124 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.6
Modifications: • Table 11 “G2iL, G2iL+ overall memory map”: updated
• Table 34 “G2iL, G2iL+ RF interface characteristics (RFN, RFP)”: updated
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.6 20110803 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.5
Modifications: • Real Read Range Reduction feature added to G2iL
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.5 20110531 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.4
Modifications: • Superfluous text removed from Table 6
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.4 20110511 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.3
Modifications: • Security status changed into COMPANY PUBLIC
• Delivery form of FCS2 strap added
• Section 13 “Package information”, Section 15 “Handling information” and Section 16
“Packing information” added
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.3 20110131 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.2
Modifications: • Section 4 “Ordering information”: new types SL3S1203FUD and SL3S1213FUD added
• Section 9 “Mechanical specification”: updated according to the new types
• Replaced wording of “ChangeStatus” with “ChangeConfig”
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.2 20101109 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.1
Modifications: • Version SOT886F1 added
• Section 5 “Marking”, Section 13 “Package outline” and Section 14 “Packing information”
added
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.1 20100922 Product data sheet - SL3S1203_1213 v.3.0
Modifications: • General Modifications
SL3S1203_1213 v.3.0 20100621 Product data sheet - 178810
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 33 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
Modifications: • General update
178810 20100304 Objective data sheet - -
Table 33. Revision history …continued
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 34 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
18. Legal information
18.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
18.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
18.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 35 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the
product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this
document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
Translations — A non-English (translated) version of a document is for
reference only. The English version shall prevail in case of any discrepancy
between the translated and English versions.
18.4 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
UCODE — is a trademark of NXP Semiconductors N.V.
19. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
SL3S1203_1213 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 4.4 — 17 March 2014
178844 36 of 37
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
20. Tables
Table 1. Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Table 2. Marking codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Table 3. Pin description bare die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Table 4. Pin description SOT886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Table 5. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Table 6. Overview of G2iL and G2iL+ features . . . . . . . .9
Table 7. G2iL memory sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Table 8. G2iL, G2iL+ overall memory map. . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 9. ChangeConfig custom command . . . . . . . . . . .16
Table 10. ChangeConfig custom command reply. . . . . . .16
Table 11. ChangeConfig command-response table . . . . .16
Table 12. Address 200h to 207h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Table 13. Address 208h to 20Fh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Table 14. ReadProtect command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Table 15. G2iL reply to a successful ReadProtect
procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Table 16. ReadProtect command-response table . . . . . .19
Table 17. Reset ReadProtect command . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Table 18. G2iL reply to a successful Reset
ReadProtect command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Table 19. Reset ReadProtect command-response
table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 20. ChangeEAS command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 21. G2iL reply to a successful ChangeEAS
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 22. ChangeEAS command-response table . . . . . . 22
Table 23. EAS_Alarm command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 24. G2iL reply to a successful EAS_Alarm c
ommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 25. EAS_Alarm command-response table . . . . . . 23
Table 26. Limiting values[1][2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 27. G2iL, G2iL+ RF interface characteristics
(RFN, RFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Table 28. VDD pin characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 29. G2iL, G2iL+ VDD and OUT
pin characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 30. G2iL, G2iL+ memory characteristics . . . . . . . . 27
Table 31. G2iL RF interface characteristics
(RFN, RFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 32. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 33. Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
21. Figures
Fig 1. Block diagram of G2iL IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Fig 2. Pinning bare die. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Fig 3. Pin configuration for SOT886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Fig 4. G2iL wafer layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Fig 5. G2iL TID memory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Fig 6. Schematic of connecting VDD and OUT pad
with a predetermined breaking point to turn a
standard RFID label into a wireless safety seal . .14
Fig 7. Schematic of external power supply . . . . . . . . . .16
Fig 8. Package outline SOT886. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
NXP Semiconductors SL3S1203_1213
UCODE G2iL and G2iL+
© NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 17 March 2014
178844
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
22. Contents
1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 Key features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1.1 Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Key benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2.1 End user benefit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2.2 Antenna design benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2.3 Label manufacturer benefit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 Custom commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.1 Markets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.2 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7.1 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
8 Wafer layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.1 Wafer layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
9 Mechanical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
9.1 Wafer specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
9.1.1 Wafer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
9.1.2 Fail die identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
9.1.3 Map file distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
10 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
10.1 Air interface standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
10.2 Power transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
10.3 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
10.3.1 Reader to tag Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
10.3.2 Tag to reader Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
10.4 G2iL and G2iL+ differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
10.5 Supported commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
10.6 G2iL, G2iL+ memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
10.6.1 G2iL, G2iL+ overall memory map. . . . . . . . . . 11
10.6.2 G2iL TID memory details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
10.7 Custom commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
10.7.1 ChangeConfig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
G2iL, G2iL+ special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
10.7.2 G2iL, G2iL+ special features
control mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
10.7.3 ReadProtect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
10.7.4 Reset ReadProtect3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
10.7.5 ChangeEAS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10.7.6 EAS_Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
11 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
12 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
12.1 UCODE G2iL, G2iL+ bare die characteristics 25
12.2 UCODE G2iL SOT886 characteristics . . . . . . 27
13 Package outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
14 Packing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
14.1 Wafer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
14.2 SOT886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
15 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
16 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
17 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
18 Legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
18.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
18.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
18.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
18.4 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
19 Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
20 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
21 Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
22 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1 | P a g e
Address: Midas Components Ltd, Electra House, 32 Southtown Road, Great Yarmouth, Norfolk, England, NR31 ODU
Email:sales@midascomponents.co.uk
Website:www.midascomponents.co.uk
Tel:+44(0)1493 602602
Fax:+44(0)1493 665111
Specification Issue 1 26/6/2012
SERIAL TFT MODULE APPLICATION NOTE 1
Compiling and transferring image files via the USB interface.
Date Description of change
26/6/12
Initial creation
2 | P a g e
Address: Midas Components Ltd, Electra House, 32 Southtown Road, Great Yarmouth, Norfolk, England, NR31 ODU
Email:sales@midascomponents.co.uk
Website:www.midascomponents.co.uk
Tel:+44(0)1493 602602
Fax:+44(0)1493 665111
Overview
The Midas range of serial TFT modules offer the ability to store images which are then selected for display using serial commands. This overcomes the need to transfer large amounts of data over the serial interface. The following application note describes how to prepare image files and transfer them to the display module flash memory drive via the USB interface.
Requirements
Midas Serial TFT display module.
USB cable type A to mini B.
BmpToBin application software (available from Midas).
Procedure
1) Create two directories one called BMP_DATA and the other BMP_FILE .
2) Place all the bitmap files you require for your project in the BMP_FILE directory. Note that the files must be 24-bit bitmap type.
Note that the size of the combined images must not be greater than 2M bytes. This is the sum of x*y*2 for each image. Ie. For the above
(240*320*2)+ (240*320*2)+ (240*320*2)+ (240*320*2)+ (240*320*2)+ (240*320*2)+ (240*320*2)+ (1315*32*2)=1159360
3 | P a g e
Address: Midas Components Ltd, Electra House, 32 Southtown Road, Great Yarmouth, Norfolk, England, NR31 ODU
Email:sales@midascomponents.co.uk
Website:www.midascomponents.co.uk
Tel:+44(0)1493 602602
Fax:+44(0)1493 665111
3) Re-name each image numerically in the sequence required bearing in mind that any short animation sequences need to be in sequential order. i.e:
4) Exit this directory and place the BmpToBin application file in the parent directory i.e
5) Run the BmpToBinForM.exe application by double clicking the icon. This will then create two files within the BMP_DATA directory.
6) Plug the TFT module into your PC using a USB A to mini B cable. The module should then appear on your PC as a flash memory device.
4 | P a g e
Address: Midas Components Ltd, Electra House, 32 Southtown Road, Great Yarmouth, Norfolk, England, NR31 ODU
Email:sales@midascomponents.co.uk
Website:www.midascomponents.co.uk
Tel:+44(0)1493 602602
Fax:+44(0)1493 665111
7) Simply Copy the two files BMPDATA.BIN and TABLE.BIN created earlier to the module flash drive. These images are then available to be displayed via serial command. If there are already files on the module flash drive you may want to back them up to your PC. You can now via the serial interface view the images on the display module using commands such as: Browse Pictures, Cut a Picture, Animation, Call on PIC and Run Demo.
Command Summary
Commands are sent to the board via the Serial UART (TTL levels) on J1. The default serial format is 9600,N,8,1. All commands are ASCII characters followed by CR LF (0D0A hex). Function Command Format Example Busy Low time
Browse Pictures
ALL
“ALL\n”
-
Draw a circle
CIRCLE Xa Ya R C
“CIRCLE 100 100 50 31\n”
4ms
Fill in colour
CLR Xa Ya Xe Ye C
“CLR 0 0 100 100 31\n”
5ms
Clear Screen
CLS C
“CLS 31\n”
28ms
Cut a picture
CUT Pn Xa Ya Xb Yb Xs Ys
“CUT 1 30 30 0 0 100 100 \n”
20ms
Draw a dot
DOT Xa Ya C
“DOT 100 100 31\n”
0.12ms
Draw a frame with line type and chamfer
FRAME Xa Ya Xe Ye Ds Do C
“FRAME 10 10 200 40 2 3 31\n”
4ms
Draw a line
LINE Xa Ya Xe Ye C
“LINE 10 10 50 50 31\n”
0.7ms
Backlight on
LEDON
“LEDON\n”
4us
Backlight off
LEDOFF
“LEDOFF\n”
4us
Animation
MOT Xa Ya Ps Pe Pt
“MOT 0 0 10 14 100\n”
0.15ms
Animation off
MOFF
“MOFF\n”
4us
Call on PIC
PIC Pn Xa Ya
“PIC 1 30 30\n”
125ms
Draw a rectangle
RECT Xa Ya Xe Ye C
“RECT 10 10 100 100 31\n”
5ms
Get screen size *
SIZE
“SIZE\n”
13ms
Display alphabetic string
STR Xa Ya C Str
“STR 0 0 31 Hello World\n”
0.8ms / char
Display alphabetic string with background colour
STR Xa Ya C Cb Str
“STR 0 20 65535 31 Hello World\n”
30us / char
Set baud rate
BAUD b1 b2
“BAUD 9600 9600\n”
20ms
Run demo
DEMO Dt Xa Ya
“DEMO 1000 0 0\n”
20ms
Stop demo
DMOFF
“DMOFF\n”
20ms
Change orientation
TURN Tn
“TURN 90\n”
140ms
5 | P a g e
Address: Midas Components Ltd, Electra House, 32 Southtown Road, Great Yarmouth, Norfolk, England, NR31 ODU
Email:sales@midascomponents.co.uk
Website:www.midascomponents.co.uk
Tel:+44(0)1493 602602
Fax:+44(0)1493 665111
Notes:
Xa Ya :Start x y coordinates. Xe Ye :End x y coordinates.
C :Colour (16 bits,RGB 565).
Xb Yb :Start x y coordinates in flash image. Xs yS :Size of flash image block.
Ds Do :Length of solid line / dotted line. Str :ASCII String (8x16).
Pn :Picture number in flash 000-999. R :Radius in pixels.
Ps :Start Picture number.
Pe :End picture number.
Pt :Time between pictures (step:100ms).
* :Returned on RX “STY Xsize Ysize\n”
b1 b2 :Baud rate (2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,56000,57600,115200)
Dt :Time between pictures (step:100ms).
Tn :Rotation angle (0,90)
Notes:
Anti-static precautions should be observed whilst handling this product.
Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
MIDAS MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Midas disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Midas’s products as critical components in life support systems is not authorized except with express written approval by Midas. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Midas intellectual property rights.
A Premier Farnell Company
MIDAS un traitement
complet du signal
Bien que les algorithmes de traitement
complexes rendent cela possible, ils sont en
général exécutés plus vite et de manière plus
économique dans un système numérique. Le monde
réel ne suit pas l’évolution informatique définie par la
Loi de Moore, et le désir humain d’aller toujours plus
vite et à moindre coût, incite résolument à rester en
analogique. En conséquence, les ingénieurs doivent
continuer à relever des défis relatifs à la détection
précise de signaux dans l’univers analogique et les
restituer le plus fidèlement possible dans un format
numérique.
Alchimie analogique
La conception analogique a longtemps été considérée
comme un art ésotérique, exigeant une connaissance
pointue et une intuition pour garantir la stabilité du
système, optimiser le gain et la réponse en fréquence,
traiter les problèmes de mise à la masse, gérer les
impédances et leur comparaison, ainsi que minimiser
les effets de bruit. Parallèlement, la pression augmente
pour satisfaire aux exigences rigoureuses en matière
de coût, commercialisation et capacité de production
de masse. La grande majorité des ingénieurs modernes
ne peut tout simplement pas s’offrir le luxe d’optimiser
individuellement des circuits analogiques.
Pour relever ces défis, l’alchimie analogique la plus
mystérieuse a tendance désormais à se produire
au niveau du silicium ; la technique de dorure est
intégrée aux composants qui constituent le traitement
du signal. Les produits analogiques les plus récents
visent maintenant à « pré résoudre » un grand
nombre des défis qui occupaient les spécialistes
en technique analogique. Ils sont plus riches en
fonctionnalités et moins sensibles aux variables, telles
que configuration et longueurs de tracé PCB. Ils sont
aussi intrinsèquement moins gourmands en énergie
que leurs prédécesseurs. Ainsi, les produits de dernière
génération proposés sur le marché des circuits intégrés
offrent une conception interne plus simple, nécessitant
moins de composants externes et supportant une
gestion de l’alimentation au niveau du système.
La gamme des produits Farnell
En offrant l’un des portefeuilles produits, les plus
étendus en technologies de traitement du signal,
provenant d’innovateurs influents dans le domaine
des produits analogiques de pointe, hautement
performants, Farnell est idéalement placé pour aider
le concepteur à identifier, sélectionner et évaluer les
produits haute performance du marché actuel. Pour
faciliter l’évaluation, la sélection et l’intégration de
produits de traitement du signal en vue d’atteindre des
objectifs de système ambitieux, Farnell a classé les
principales technologies en cinq catégories, regroupées
sous l’acronyme MIDAS : Mixed-signal, Interface,
Data conversion, Amplification, and Sensors (ou
signaux mixtes, interface, conversion de données,
amplification et capteurs).
La catégorie Signaux mixtes comprend des
appareils comme les multiplexeurs, les commutateurs
analogiques, les filtres, les potentiomètres numériques,
les isolateurs, les résistances et les compensateurs.
Concernant les produits d’interface, les ingénieurs
ont de nombreuses options de connectivité, dont
SERDES, transmetteurs LVDS et interfaces Ethernet.
Ce groupe englobe également les oscillateurs, les
circuits d’horloge et les PLL. La conversion de donnée
est la phase du traitement du signal la plus proche du
domaine numérique, comprenant diverses classes
de convertisseurs N/A et A/N dont des appareils
polyvalents à haut débit et de grande précision, selon
les spécifications de l’application ou du système. Dans
la catégorie Amplificateurs, les ingénieurs ont la
possibilité de choisir parmi une gamme extrêmement
étendue d’options disponibles, là aussi le choix
étant en grande partie déterminé par l’application
et les exigences de performance du système. Les
amplificateurs proposés par les principaux fournisseurs
distribués par Farnell incluent des amplificateurs
audio, à détection de courant, différentiels, polyvalents,
d’instrumentation, d’isolement, logarithmiques,
‘Médaille d’or’ de la conception analogique avancée
Le monde actuel est très dépendant du contrôle et de la régulation d’une grande variété d’effets physiques. Par exemple
pour utiliser des ressources énergétiques de manière plus efficace et pour améliorer la qualité de vie, les exemples
de produits électroniques utilisés pour atteindre ces objectifs incluent les systèmes de contrôle et de mesure des gaz
d’échappement, les scanners médicaux, les instruments de surveillance médicale, la télésurveillance d’état d’un
équipement et les systèmes de sécurité sophistiqués.
opérationnels, à gain programmable et amplis buffer
vidéo, ainsi qu’une gamme étendue de comparateurs et
de compresseurs/extenseurs.
Enfin, concernant les capteurs appropriés, avec les
accéléromètres, capteurs de courant, à effet hall, de
pression, de proximité et de température, complétés
des quatre autres catégories, les ingénieurs peuvent
compléter leur analyse des besoins en traitement du
signal pour tout système de contrôle, d’enregistrement
ou de régulation. Ceux-ci peuvent élargir les possibilités
d’application, allant des systèmes médicaux,
automobile aux systèmes industriels, commerciaux et
domestiques.
En analysant le traitement du signal de cette manière,
les ingénieurs peuvent rapidement identifier les
éléments nécessaires pour compléter une solution et
commencer l’assemblage d’une combinaison optimale.
Technologie d’avant-garde,
présentée en avant-première
Dans le cadre de cette campagne Technology First,
nous étudions quelques-unes des dernières innovations
et tendances dans chacune des cinq catégories
afin identifier comment les caractéristiques et les
performances des composants viennent en aide aux
défis de la conception analogique, en améliorant le
rapport qualité/prix tout en supportant encombrement
et consommation énergétique moindres.
En conclusion, il est important de noter que
Farnell est en mesure de fournir des composants
complémentaires pour satisfaire aux exigences de la
conception numérique, réaliser un système complet et
hautement performant.
DATA SHEET
Product specification October 1998
DISCRETE SEMICONDUCTORS
BYW29EX series
Rectifier diodes
ultrafast, rugged
NXP Semiconductors Product specification
Rectifier diodes BYW29EX series
ultrafast, rugged
GENERAL DESCRIPTION QUICK REFERENCE DATA
Glass passivated epitaxial rectifier SYMBOL PARAMETER MAX. MAX. UNIT
diodes in a full pack plastic envelope,
featuring low forward voltage drop, BYW29EX- 150 200
ultra-fast recovery times, soft recovery VRRM Repetitive peak reverse 150 200 V
characteristic and guaranteed reverse voltage
surge and ESD capability. They are VF Forward voltage 0.895 0.895 V
intended for use in switchedmode power IF(AV) Forward current 8 8 A
supplies and high frequency circuits in trr Reverse recovery time 25 25 ns
general where low conduction and IRRM Repetitive peak reverse 0.2 0.2 A
switching losses are essential. current
PINNING - SOD113 PIN CONFIGURATION SYMBOL
PIN DESCRIPTION
1 cathode
2 anode
case isolated
LIMITING VALUES
Limiting values in accordance with the Absolute Maximum System (IEC 134).
SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. MAX. UNIT
-150 -200
VRRM Repetitive peak reverse voltage - 150 200 V
VRWM Crest working reverse voltage - 150 200 V
VR Continuous reverse voltage - 150 200 V
IF(AV) Average forward current1 square wave; d = 0.5;
Ths £ 106 °C - 8 A
sinusoidal; a = 1.57;
Ths £ 109 °C - 7.3 A
IF(RMS) RMS forward current - 11.3 A
IFRM Repetitive peak forward current t = 25 μs; d = 0.5; - 16 A
Ths £ 106 °C
IFSM Non-repetitive peak forward t = 10 ms - 80 A
current t = 8.3 ms - 88 A
sinusoidal; with reapplied
VRWM(max)
I2t I2t for fusing t = 10 ms - 32 A2s
IRRM Repetitive peak reverse current tp = 2 μs; d = 0.001 - 0.2 A
IRSM Non-repetitive peak reverse tp = 100 μs - 0.2 A
current
Tstg Storage temperature -40 150 °C
Tj Operating junction temperature - 150 °C
1 2
case
k a
1 2
1 Neglecting switching and reverse current losses
October 1998 1 Rev 1.200
NXP Semiconductors Product specification
Rectifier diodes BYW29EX series
ultrafast, rugged
ESD LIMITING VALUE
SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. MAX. UNIT
VC Electrostatic discharge Human body model; - 8 kV
capacitor voltage C = 250 pF; R = 1.5 kW
ISOLATION LIMITING VALUE & CHARACTERISTIC
Ths = 25 °C unless otherwise specified
SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNIT
Visol R.M.S. isolation voltage from f = 50-60 Hz; sinusoidal - 2500 V
both terminals to external waveform;
heatsink R.H. £ 65% ; clean and dustfree
Cisol Capacitance from both terminals f = 1 MHz - 10 - pF
to external heatsink
THERMAL RESISTANCES
SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNIT
Rth j-hs Thermal resistance junction to with heatsink compound - - 5.5 K/W
heatsink without heatsink compound - - 7.2 K/W
Rth j-a Thermal resistance junction to in free air - 55 - K/W
ambient
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS
Tj = 25 °C unless otherwise stated
SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNIT
VF Forward voltage IF = 8 A; Tj = 150°C - 0.80 0.895 V
IF = 8 A - 0.92 1.05 V
IF = 20 A - 1.1 1.3 V
IR Reverse current VR = VRWM; Tj = 100 °C - 0.2 0.6 mA
VR = VRWM - 2 10 μA
DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS
Tj = 25 °C unless otherwise stated
SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNIT
Qs Reverse recovery charge IF = 2 A; VR ³ 30 V; -dIF/dt = 20 A/μs - 4 11 nC
trr1 Reverse recovery time IF = 1 A; VR ³ 30 V; - 20 25 ns
-dIF/dt = 100 A/μs
trr2 Reverse recovery time IF = 0.5 A to IR = 1 A; Irec = 0.25 A - 15 20 ns
Vfr Forward recovery voltage IF = 1 A; dIF/dt = 10 A/μs - 1 - V
October 1998 2 Rev 1.200
NXP Semiconductors Product specification
Rectifier diodes BYW29EX series
ultrafast, rugged
Fig.1. Definition of trr1, Qs and Irrm
Fig.2. Definition of Vfr
Fig.3. Circuit schematic for trr2
Fig.4. Definition of trr2
Fig.5. Maximum forward dissipation PF = f(IF(AV));
square current waveform where IF(AV) =IF(RMS) x ÖD.
Fig.6. Maximum forward dissipation PF = f(IF(AV));
sinusoidal current waveform where a = form
factor = IF(RMS) / IF(AV).
Q
s
10% 100%
time
dI
dt
F
I
R
I
F
I
rrm
t
rr
I = 1A
R
I rec = 0.25A
0A
trr2
0.5A
IF
IR
time
time
V F
V
fr
V F
I
F
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
D = 1.0
0.5
0.2
0.1
BYW29
IF(AV) / A
PF / W
tp D = tp
T
T
t
I
Ths(max) / C
150
139
128
117
106
95
84
Vo = 0.791 V
Rs = 0.013 ohms
shunt
Current
to ’scope
D.U.T.
Voltage Pulse Source
R
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
a = 1.57
1.9
2.2
2.8
4
BYW29
IF(AV) / A
PF / W Ths(max) / C
150
144.5
139
133.5
128
122.5
117
111.5
106
Vo = 0.791 V
Rs = 0.013 Ohms
October 1998 3 Rev 1.200
NXP Semiconductors Product specification
Rectifier diodes BYW29EX series
ultrafast, rugged
Fig.7. Maximum trr at Tj = 25 °C.
Fig.8. Maximum Irrm at Tj = 25 °C.
Fig.9. Typical and maximum forward characteristic
IF = f(VF); parameter Tj
Fig.10. Maximum Qs at Tj = 25 °C.
Fig.11. Transient thermal impedance; Zth j-hs = f(tp).
1
10
trr / ns
1 10 100
1000
100
dIF/dt (A/us)
IF=1A
IF=10A
10
1.0
1.0 10 100
-dIF/dt (A/us)
Qs / nC
IF=10A
5A
2A
1A
100
10
1
0.1
0.01
Irrm / A
1 10 100
-dIF/dt (A/us)
IF=1A
IF=10A
1us 10us 100us 1ms 10ms 100ms 1s 10s
0.001
0.01
0.1
1
10
pulse width, tp (s) BYW29F/EX
Transient thermal impedance, Zth j-hs (K/W)
tp D = tp
T
T
P
t
D
0 1 2
30
20
10
0
typ max
IF / A
0.5 1.5
VF / V
Tj=150 C
Tj=25 C
BYW29
October 1998 4 Rev 1.200
NXP Semiconductors Product specification
Rectifier diodes BYW29EX series
ultrafast, rugged
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
Net Mass: 2 g
Fig.12. SOD113; The seating plane is electrically isolated from all terminals.
Notes
1. Refer to mounting instructions for F-pack envelopes.
2. Epoxy meets UL94 V0 at 1/8".
10.3
max
3.2
3.0
4.6
max
2.9 max
2.8
seating
plane
6.4
15.8
max
0.6
2.5
2.54
5.08
1 2
3 max.
not tinned
3
0.5
2.5
0.9
0.7
0.4 M
15.8
max.
19
max.
13.5
min.
Recesses (2x)
2.5
0.8 max. depth
1.0 (2x)
October 1998 5 Rev 1.200
NXP Semiconductors
Legal information
DATA SHEET STATUS
Notes
1. Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
2. The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published
and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at
URL http://www.nxp.com.
DOCUMENT
STATUS(1)
PRODUCT
STATUS(2) DEFINITION
Objective data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product
development.
Preliminary data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
DEFINITIONS
Product specification ⎯ The information and data
provided in a Product data sheet shall define the
specification of the product as agreed between NXP
Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP
Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed
otherwise in writing. In no event however, shall an
agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors
product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond
those described in the Product data sheet.
DISCLAIMERS
Limited warranty and liability ⎯ Information in this
document is believed to be accurate and reliable.
However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to
the accuracy or completeness of such information and
shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such
information.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any
indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential
damages (including - without limitation - lost profits, lost
savings, business interruption, costs related to the
removal or replacement of any products or rework
charges) whether or not such damages are based on tort
(including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any
other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur
for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’
aggregate and cumulative liability towards customer for
the products described herein shall be limited in
accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial
sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes ⎯ NXP Semiconductors
reserves the right to make changes to information
published in this document, including without limitation
specifications and product descriptions, at any time and
without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all
information supplied prior to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use ⎯ NXP Semiconductors products are
not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for
use in life support, life-critical or safety-critical systems or
equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction
of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be
expected to result in personal injury, death or severe
property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP
Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at
the customer’s own risk.
Applications⎯ Applications that are described herein for
any of these products are for illustrative purposes only.
NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or
warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of
their applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or
customer product design. It is customer’s sole
responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the
customer’s applications and products planned, as well as
for the planned application and use of customer’s third
party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks
associated with their applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors
Legal information
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related
to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based
on any weakness or default in the customer’s applications
or products, or the application or use by customer’s third
party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all
necessary testing for the customer’s applications and
products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to
avoid a default of the applications and the products or of
the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this
respect.
Limiting values ⎯ Stress above one or more limiting
values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings
System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent damage to
the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and
(proper) operation of the device at these or any other
conditions above those given in the Recommended
operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted.
Constant or repeated exposure to limiting values will
permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and
reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale ⎯ NXP
Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general
terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at
http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an
individual agreement is concluded only the terms and
conditions of the respective agreement shall apply. NXP
Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to applying the
customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license ⎯ Nothing in this document
may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products
that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or
implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Export control ⎯ This document as well as the item(s)
described herein may be subject to export control
regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from
national authorities.
Quick reference data ⎯ The Quick reference data is an
extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and
Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is
not complete, exhaustive or legally binding.
Non-automotive qualified products ⎯ Unless this data
sheet expressly states that this specific NXP
Semiconductors product is automotive qualified, the
product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither
qualified nor tested in accordance with automotive testing
or application requirements. NXP Semiconductors accepts
no liability for inclusion and/or use of non-automotive
qualified products in automotive equipment or
applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in
and use in automotive applications to automotive
specifications and standards, customer (a) shall use the
product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and
specifications, and (b) whenever customer uses the
product for automotive applications beyond NXP
Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at
customer’s own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies
NXP Semiconductors for any liability, damages or failed
product claims resulting from customer design and use of
the product for automotive applications beyond NXP
Semiconductors’ standard warranty and NXP
Semiconductors’ product specifications.
Contact information
For additional information please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales offices addresses send e-mail to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Customer notification
This data sheet was changed to reflect the new company name NXP Semiconductors, including new legal definitions
and disclaimers. No changes were made to the content, except for the legal definitions and disclaimers.
© NXP B.V. 2011
All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the prior written consent of the copyright owner.
The information presented in this document does not form part of any quotation or contract, is believed to be accurate and reliable and may be changed without
notice. No liability will be accepted by the publisher for any consequence of its use. Publication thereof does not convey nor imply any license under patent- or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Printed in The Netherlands
CSM_EE-SPX303N_403N_DS_E_3_2
Broad Slot-type Photomicrosensor
EE-SPX303N/403N
A Wide Slot Width of 13 mm and
Superior Resistance to Light
Interference and Noise.
• Noise resistance equivalent to photomicrosensors with built-in amplifiers.
• Resistance to common noise at least 30 times that of previous models.
• Resistance to inverter noise at least 10 times that of previous models.
• Reverse polarity protection built in.
Be sure to read Safety Precautions on
page 3.
For the most recent information on models that have been certified for
safety standards, refer to your OMRON website.
Ordering Information
Sensors
Accessories (Order Separately)
* Refer to Accessories for details.
Appearance Sensing method Sensing distance
(slot width) Output type Output
configuration Model
Through-beam type
(with slot) NPN output
Dark-ON EE-SPX303N
Light-ON EE-SPX403N
Type Cable length Model
Connector EE-1001
EE-1009
Connector with
Cable
1 m
EE-1006 1M
EE-1010 1M
2 m
EE-1006 2M
EE-1010 2M
Connector with
Robot Cable
1 m EE-1010-R 1M
2 m EE-1010-R 2M
NPN/PNP Conversion Connector 0.46 m (total length) EE-2002
Infrared light
13 mm
(slot width)
2
EE-SPX303N/403N
Ratings and Specifications
Engineering Data (Reference Value)
Sensing Position Characteristics
EE-SPX303N
Item Models EE-SPX303N, EE-SPX403N
Sensing distance 13 mm (slot width)
Sensing object Opaque: 2.2 × 0.5 mm min.
Differential distance 0.05 mm max.
Light source Infrared LED (pulse lighting) with a peak wavelength of
940 nm
Indicator Light indicator (red)
Supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 5% max.
Current consumption 15 mA max.
Control output
NPN voltage output:
Load power supply voltage: 12 to 24 VDC
Load current: 80 mA max.
OFF current: 0.5 mA max.
80 mA load current with a residual voltage of 2.0 V max.
10 mA load current with a residual voltage of 1.0 V max.
Protection circuits Power supply reverse polarity protection,
Output reverse polarity protection
Response frequency * 100 Hz min.
Ambient illumination 3,000 lx max. with incandescent light or sunlight on the surface of
the receiver.
Ambient temperature
range
Operating: −10 to +55°C
Storage: −25 to +65°C
Ambient humidity range Operating: 5% to 85%
Storage: 5% to 95%
Vibration resistance Destruction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 h each
in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2 for 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Degree of protection IEC IP50
Connecting method Special connector (soldering not possible)
Weight Approx. 4 g
Material Polycarbonate
* The response frequency was measured by
detecting the following rotating disk.
2 mm
Disk
2 mm 2 mm
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Distance d (mm)
Tr ON
Tr OFF
Dark-ON
d
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Distance d (mm)
Tr ON
Tr OFF
Dark-ON
d
EE-SPX303N/403N
3
I/O Circuit Diagrams
NPN Output
Safety Precautions
Refer to Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
This product is not designed or rated for ensuring
safety of persons either directly or indirectly.
Do not use it for such purposes.
Make sure that this product is used within the rated ambient
environment conditions.
● Wiring
• Connection is made using a connector. Do not solder to the pins
(leads). The pins (leads) are soldered to the internal board of the
Sensor. Therefore, direct soldering of the pins (leads) may result in
an internal disconnection causing malfunction.
• When extending the cable, use an extension cable with conductors
having a total cross-section area of 0.3 mm2. The total cable length
must be 2 m maximum.
• To use a cable length longer than 2 m, attach a capacitor with a
capacitance of approximately 10 μF to the wires as shown below.
The distance between the terminal and the capacitor must be within
2 m. (Use a capacitor with a dielectric strength that is at least twice
the Sensor's power supply voltage.)
• Make sure the total length of the power cable connected to the
product is less than 10 m even if a capacitor is inserted.
Model Output
configuration Timing charts Output circuit
EE-SPX403N Light-ON
EE-SPX303N Dark-ON
Incident
Interrupted
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Operates
Releases
H
L
Light indicator
(red)
Output
transistor
Load 1
(relay)
Load 2
lC
Light
indicator
(red) 1.5 to
3 mA Load 1
Load 2
Main
circuit
OUT
∗
* Voltage output (when the sensor is connected to a transistor circuit)
12 to 24 VDC
Incident
Interrupted
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Operates
Releases
H
L
Light indicator
(red)
Output
transistor
Load 1
(relay)
Load 2
WARNING Precautions for Correct Use
OUT
Extension cable
A capacitance of
10 μF min.
+
−
12 to 24 VDC
0 V
2 m max.
4
EE-SPX303N/403N
(Unit: mm)
Dimensions Tolerance class IT16 applies to dimensions in this datasheet unless otherwise specified.
Sensors
Accessories (Order Separately)
* Refer to Accessories for details.
7.4
0.3
0.7
13
10
19
3.2
26
26
2-3.7
5.08
13
19.5
2.54
1 2 3
Four, R1.6
Indicator window
Sensing window
(0.5 × 2.2)
EE-SPX303N, EE-SPX403N
Terminal Arrangement
(1) + Vcc
(2) OUT OUTPUT
(3) − GND (0 V)
Read and Understand This Catalog
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or
comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified)
from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR
FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS
IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS
OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT
SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's
application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the
products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product,
machine, system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible
uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:
Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this catalog.
Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles,
safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE
SYSTEM AS AWHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made.
However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or
establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual
specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS ANDWEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the
result of OMRON’s test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical,
typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
2012.8
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
http://www.ia.omron.com/
(c)Copyright OMRON Corporation 2012 All Right Reserved.
DATA SHEET
Product data sheet
Supersedes data of 1999 Apr 29
2004 Jan 22
DISCRETE SEMICONDUCTORS
PMBTA13; PMBTA14
NPN Darlington transistors
2004 Jan 22 2
NXP Semiconductors Product data sheet
NPN Darlington transistors PMBTA13; PMBTA14
FEATURES
•High current (max. 500 mA)
•Low voltage (max. 30 V)
•High DC current gain (min. 10000).
APPLICATIONS
•High input impedance preamplifiers.
DESCRIPTION
NPN Darlington transistor in a SOT23 plastic package. PNP complement: PMBTA64.
MARKING
Note
1.* = p : Made in Hong Kong.
* = t : Made in Malaysia.
* = W : Made in China.
PINNING
TYPE NUMBER
MARKING CODE(1)
PMBTA13
*1M
PMBTA14
*1N
PIN
DESCRIPTION
1
base
2
emitter
3
collector
Fig.1 Simplified outline (SOT23) and symbol.handbook, halfpageMAM298132132TR2TR1Top view
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE NUMBER
PACKAGE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
VERSION
PMBTA13
−
plastic surface mounted package; 3 leads
SOT23
PMBTA14
2004 Jan 22 3
NXP Semiconductors Product data sheet
NPN Darlington transistors PMBTA13; PMBTA14
LIMITING VALUES
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).
Note
1.Transistor mounted on an FR4 printed-circuit board.
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
Note
1.Transistor mounted on an FR4 printed-circuit board.
CHARACTERISTICS
Tj = 25 °C unless otherwise specified.
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN.
MAX.
UNIT
VCBO
collector-base voltage
open emitter
−
30
V
VCES
collector-emitter voltage
VBE = 0
−
30
V
VEBO
emitter-base voltage
open collector
−
10
V
IC
collector current (DC)
−
500
mA
ICM
peak collector current
−
800
mA
IB
base current (DC)
−
200
mA
Ptot
total power dissipation
Tamb ≤ 25 °C; note 1
−
250
mW
Tstg
storage temperature
−65
+150
°C
Tj
junction temperature
−
150
°C
Tamb
operating ambient temperature
−65
+150
°C
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
VALUE
UNIT
Rth(j-a)
thermal resistance from junction to ambient
note 1
500
K/W
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN.
MAX.
UNIT
ICBO
collector cut-off current
IE = 0; VCB = 30 V
−
100
nA
IEBO
emitter cut-off current
IC = 0; VEB = 10 V
−
100
nA
hFE
DC current gain
IC = 10 mA; VCE = 5 V; (see Fig.2)
PMBTA13
5000
−
PMBTA14
10000
−
DC current gain
IC = 100 mA; VCE = 5 V; (see Fig.2)
PMBTA13
10000
−
PMBTA14
20000
−
VCEsat
collector-emitter saturation voltage
IC = 100 mA; IB = 0.1 mA
−
1.5
V
VBEon
base-emitter on-state voltage
IC = 100 mA; VCE = 5 V
−
1.4
V
fT
transition frequency
IC = 10 mA; VCE = 5 V; f = 100 MHz
125
−
MHz
2004 Jan 22 4
NXP Semiconductors Product data sheet
NPN Darlington transistors PMBTA13; PMBTA14
Fig.2 DC current gain; typical values.handbook, full pagewidth060000800002000040000MGD83710−11IC (mA)hFE10102 103VCE = 2 V.
2004 Jan 22 5
NXP Semiconductors Product data sheet
NPN Darlington transistors PMBTA13; PMBTA14
PACKAGE OUTLINEUNITA1max.bpcDE e1HELpQwv REFERENCESOUTLINEVERSIONEUROPEANPROJECTIONISSUE DATE04-11-0406-03-16 IEC JEDEC JEITAmm0.10.480.380.150.093.02.81.41.20.95e1.92.52.10.550.450.10.2DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)0.450.15 SOT23TO-236ABbpDe1eAA1LpQdetail XHEEwMvMABAB012 mmscaleA1.10.9cX123Plastic surface-mounted package; 3 leadsSOT23
2004 Jan 22 6
NXP Semiconductors Product data sheet
NPN Darlington transistors PMBTA13; PMBTA14
DATA SHEET STATUS
Notes
1.Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
2.The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
DOCUMENTSTATUS(1)
PRODUCT STATUS(2)
DEFINITION
Objective data sheet
Development
This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary data sheet
Qualification
This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product data sheet
Production
This document contains the product specification.
DISCLAIMERS
General ⎯ Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information.
Right to make changes ⎯ NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use ⎯ NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in medical, military, aircraft, space or life support equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk.
Applications ⎯ Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification.
Limiting values ⎯ Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) may cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of this document is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Terms and conditions of sale ⎯ NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, including those pertaining to warranty, intellectual property rights infringement and limitation of liability, unless explicitly otherwise agreed to in writing by NXP Semiconductors. In case of any inconsistency or conflict between information in this document and such terms and conditions, the latter will prevail.
No offer to sell or license ⎯ Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Export control ⎯ This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities.
Quick reference data ⎯ The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding.
NXP Semiconductors
Contact information
For additional information please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales offices addresses send e-mail to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
© NXP B.V. 2009
All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the prior written consent of the copyright owner.
The information presented in this document does not form part of any quotation or contract, is believed to be accurate and reliable and may be changed
without notice. No liability will be accepted by the publisher for any consequence of its use. Publication thereof does not convey nor imply any license
under patent- or other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Customer notification
This data sheet was changed to reflect the new company name NXP Semiconductors, including new legal
definitions and disclaimers. No changes were made to the technical content, except for package outline
drawings which were updated to the latest version.
Printed in The Netherlands R75/05/pp7 Date of release: 2004 Jan 22 Document order number: 9397 750 12507
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 4
DC/DC Converters
TDR 3 Series, 3 Watt
Features
◆ Compact design in SMD or DIP package
◆ Wide 2:1 input voltage range
◆ Fully regulated outputs
◆ Low ripple and noise
◆ No minimum load required
◆ Temperature range –40°C to +85°C
◆ I/O isolation 1500 VDC
◆ Continuous short-circuit protection
◆ Remote On/Off control
◆ Fully RoHS compliant
◆ 3-year product warranty
The TDR-3 series is a family of compact 3 W dc/dc-converters with 2:1 input voltage
ranges and tightly regulated output voltages even under no load conditions.
The product is available in SMD-package or in DIP-package. They work with high
efficiency over the full load range and come with a remote On/Off input.
The usability in temperature ranges of up to 85°C, continuous short circuit protection
and excellent immunity against environmental influences make these converters
very reliable.
A TDR-3 converter is the ideal solution for space critical high end applications in
communication equipment, instrumentation and industrial electronics.
Order code
DIP models
Order code
SMD models
Input voltage range Output voltage
Output current
max.
Efficiency typ.
TDR 3-0511 TDR 3-0511SM 5.0 VDC 600 mA 79 %
TDR 3-0512 TDR 3-0512SM 12 VDC 250 mA 80 %
TDR 3-0513 TDR 3-0513SM 4.5 – 9.0 VDC 15 VDC 200 mA 81 %
TDR 3-0522 TDR 3-0522SM (5 VDC nominal) ±12 VDC ±125 mA 80 %
TDR 3-0523 TDR 3-0523SM ±15 VDC ±100 mA 81 %
TDR 3-1211 TDR 3-1211SM 5.0 VDC 600 mA 81 %
TDR 3-1212 TDR 3-1212SM 12 VDC 250 mA 82 %
TDR 3-1213 TDR 3-1213SM 9 – 18 VDC 15 VDC 200 mA 82 %
TDR 3-1222 TDR 3-1222SM (12 VDC nominal) ±12 VDC ±125 mA 82 %
TDR 3-1223 TDR 3-1223SM ±15 VDC ±100 mA 83 %
TDR 3-2411 TDR 3-2411SM 5.0 VDC 600 mA 81 %
TDR 3-2412 TDR 3-2412SM 12 VDC 250 mA 82 %
TDR 3-2413 TDR 3-2413SM 18 – 36 VDC 15 VDC 200 mA 83 %
TDR 3-2422 TDR 3-2422SM (24 VDC nominal) ±12 VDC ±125 mA 83 %
TDR 3-2423 TDR 3-2423SM ±15 VDC ±100 mA 83 %
TDR 3-4811 TDR 3-4811SM 5.0 VDC 600 mA 81 %
TDR 3-4812 TDR 3-4812SM 12 VDC 250 mA 82 %
TDR 3-4813 TDR 3-4813SM 36 – 75 VDC 15 VDC 200 mA 82 %
TDR 3-4822 TDR 3-4822SM (48 VDC nominal) ±12 VDC ±125 mA 83 %
TDR 3-4823 TDR 3-4823SM ±15 VDC ±100 mA 83 %
Models
UL 60950-1
http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 4
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
DC/DC Converters
TDR 3 Series 3 Watt
Input Specifications
Input current at no load (nominal input voltage) 5 Vin models: 50 mA typ.
12 Vin models: 30 mA typ.
24 Vin models: 13 mA typ.
48 Vin models: 10 mA typ.
Input current at full load (nominal input voltage) 5 Vin models: 790 mA typ.
12 Vin models: 320 mA typ.
24 Vin models: 160 mA typ.
48 Vin models: 80 mA typ.
Surge voltage (1 sec. max.) 5 Vin models: 15 V max.
12 Vin models: 25 V max.
24 Vin models: 50 V max.
48 Vin models: 100 V max.
Input filter capacitor type (see EMC considerations page 3
for compliance to EN 55022 class A/B)
ESD (electrostatic discharge) EN 61000-4-2, air ±8 kV, contact ±6 kV,
perf. criteria A
Radiated immunity EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m, perf. criteria A
Fast transient / Surge EN 61000-4-4, ±2 kV, perf. criteria A
EN 61000-4-5, ±1 kV perf. criteria A
with external input capacitor e.g. Nippon
chemi-con KY 220 μF, 100 V, ESR 48 mOhm
Conducted immunity EN 61000-4-6, 10 Vrms, perf. criteria A
Reflected ripple current 5 Vin models: 80 mAp-p typ.
(measured with input filter according class A) 12 Vin models: 40 mAp-p typ.
24 Vin models: 30 mAp-p typ.
48 Vin models: 20 mAp-p typ.
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±1 % max
Regulation – Input variation Vin min. to Vin max. 0.2 % max.
– Load variation 0 – 100 % single output models: 1.0 % max.
dual output models: 1.0 % max. balanced load
– Load variation 10 – 90 % single output models: 0.5 % max.
dual output models: 0.8 % max. balanced load
– Load cross regulation 25/100 % 5.0 % max. (dual output models)
Minimum load 0 % of rated max. load
Temperature coefficient ±0.02 %/K
Ripple and noise (20 MHz bandwidth) 30 mVp-p typ.
Start up time – Power On 5 ms typ.
(constant resistive load) – Remote On 5 ms typ.
Transient response setting time (25 % load step change) 250 μs typ.
Short circuit protection continuous, automatic recovery
Capacitive load 5 VDC models: 1680 μF max.
12 VDC models: 820 μF max.
15 VDC models: 680 μF max.
±12 VDC models: ±470 μF max.
±15 VDC models: ±330 μF max.
http://www.tracopower.com Page 3 of 4
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
DC/DC Converters
TDR 3 Series 3 Watt
EMC Consideration
Recommended filter for
EN 55022 class A compliance
Input models C1 C3 L1
value
order code
datasheet
5 VDC 4.7 μF / 25 V 1812 MLCC 10 μH TCK-047 www.tracopower.com/products/tck047.pdf
12 VDC 6.8 μF / 50 V 1812 MLCC 12 μH TCK-062 www.tracopower.com/products/tck062.pdf
24 VDC 4.7 μF / 50 V 1812 MLCC
220pF / 3 kV 1808 MLCC
10 μH
TCK-047 www.tracopower.com/products/tck047.pdf
48 VDC 4.7 μF / 100 V 1812 MLCC 10 μH
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –40°C to +85°C
– Storage –55°C to +125°C
– Case temperature tba.
Load derating 3.3 %/K above +70°C
Humidity (non condensing) 5 % to 90 % rel. H max.
Thermal shock acc. MIL-STD-810F
Vibration acc. MIL-STD-810F
Reliability, calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F, at+25°C, ground benign) >2.4 Mio h
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 1500 VDC
Isolation capacitance – Input/Output 50 pF max.
Isolation resistance – Input/Output (500 VDC) >10 GOhm
Altitude during operation tba.
Safety standard (designed to meet) IEC/EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1
Safety approvals – UL/cUL www.ul.com -> certifications -> File e188913
Switching frequency 100 kHz (PWM)
Remote On/Off – On: open or high impedance
– Off: 2...4 mA current applied via 1KOhm resistor
– Off stand by input current 2.5 mA max.
TDR 3
dc/dc-converter
Load L1
C1
C3
+Vin
-Vin
+Vout
-Vout
TDR 3
dc/dc-converter
Load
L1
C1 C2
C3
+Vin
-Vin
+Vout
-Vout
Input models C1 & C2 C3 L1
value
order code
(SMD type)
datasheet
5 VDC 6.8 μF / 25 V 1812 MLCC 10 μH TCK-047 www.tracopower.com/products/tck047.pdf
12 VDC
4.7 μF / 50 V 1812 MLCC
12 μH TCK-062 www.tracopower.com/products/tck062.pdf
24 VDC
220pF / 3 kV 1808 MLCC
18 μH TCK-046
48 VDC 4.7 μF / 100 V 1812 MLCC 18 μH TCK-046
www.tracopower.com/products/tck046.pdf
Recommended filter for
EN 55022 class B compliance
Page 4 of 4
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TDR 3 Series 3 Watt
Outline Dimensions
Pin Single Dual
1 –Vin (GND) –Vin (GND)
2 Remote On/Off Remote On/Off
6 NC Common
7 NC –Vout
8 +Vout +Vout
9 –Vout Common
14 +Vin (Vcc) +Vin (Vcc)
Pin-Out
Rev. February 22. 2013
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Pin pich tolerances: ±0.25 (±0.01)
Pysical Specifications
Casing material non-conductive plastic (UL94V-0 rated)
Package weight 4.5 g (0.16 oz)
Soldering profile for DIP-package models max. 265°C / 10 sec. (wave soldering)
Lead-free reflow solder process for SMD-package models as per J-STD-020D.01 (to find at:
www.jedec.org - free registration required)
Moisture sensivity level (for SMD-package models) level 2a as per J-STD-033B.01 (to find at:
www.jedec.org - free registration required)
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/tdr3-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
Packaging – Tube 10 pcs packing unit
– Tape & Reel (only SMD models, add suffix –TR) 200 pcs packing unit
18.9
8.7
12.8
13.55
(0.74)
(0.35)
(0.533)
(0.50)
3.8
(0.15)
0.8(0.03)
1.3(0.05)
top view
14
9
8
1
2
6
7
1.8 2.54 10.16 2.54
(0.07) (0.1) (0.4) (0.1)
0.25 (0.01)
0-15°
1.8 2.54 10.16 2.54
18.9
8.7 12.8
17.2
(0.07) (0.1) (0.4)
(0.74)
(0.35)
(0.68)
(0.50)
(0.1)
1.0 (0.04)
1.5 (0.06)
top view
14
9
8
1
2
6
7
7.4 (0.29)
0.25 (0.01)
0-4°
1.2
(0.05)
DIP-Models
SMD-Models
NC = not to connect
Recommended Solder Pad
Dimension:
18.1 (0.71)
1.8 2.54 10.16 2.54
(0.07) (0.1) (0.4) (0.1)
1.8 (0.07)
2.0 (0.08)
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 1 / 60
Features
Single output current up to 700 mA
3 watts maximum output power
High efficiency up to 82%
RoHS directive compliant
Sip package, 21.8 x 11.2 x 9.1mm (0.86 x 0.36x 0.44 inch)
4:1 wide input voltage range
Low ripple & noise
UL94-V0 case potting materials
Input to output isolation: 1500Vdc,min for 60 seconds
Continuous short circuit protection
Remote ON/OFF
International safety standard approval
Options
3000Vdc isolation for 60 seconds
Applications
Wireless Network
Telecom / Datacom
Industry Control System
Measurement Equipment
Semiconductor Equipment
TMR 3-WI Series Application Note
DC/DC Converter 4.5 to 18Vdc, 9 to 36Vdc or 18 to 75Vdc Input
3.3 to 15Vdc Single Outputs ±5Vdc to ±15Vdc Dual Outputs and 3 Watt Output Power
Pending
Complete TMR 3-WI datasheet can be downloaded at:
http://www.tracopower.com/products/tmr3wi.pdf
General Description
The TMR 3WI series offer 3 watts of output power from a 21.8 x 11.2 x 9.1mm (0.86 x 0.36 x 0.44 inch) package without
derating up to 71°C. The TMR 3WI series have 4:1 wide input voltage range from 4.5-18Vdc, 9-36Vdc or 18-75Vdc and features
1500Vdc of isolation test voltage, short-circuit protection. All models are particularly suited to telecommunications, industrial,
mobile telecom and test equipment applications.
Table of contents
Absolute Maximum Rating P2 Thermal Consideration P57
Output Specification P2 Remote ON/OFF Control P57
Input Specification P3 – P4 Mechanical Data P58
General Specification P4 – P5 Recommended Pad Layout P58
Environmental Specification P5 Soldering Consideration P59
EMC Characteristic P5 Packaging Information P59
Characteristic Curves P6 – P53 Order Code P60
Test Configurations P54 Safety and Installation Instruction P60
EMI Considerations P55 – P56 MTBF and Reliability P60
Input Source Impedance P57
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 2 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Absolute Maximum Rating
Parameter Model Min Max Unit
Input Voltage
Continuous
Transient (100ms)
TMR 3-12xxWI
TMR 3-24xxWI
TMR 3-48xxWI
TMR 3-12xxWI
TMR 3-24xxWI
TMR 3-48xxWI
18
36
75
36
50
100
Vdc
Operating Ambient Temperature (without derating) All -40 +71 °C
Storage Temperature All -55 +125 °C
Output Specification
Parameter Model Min Typ Max Unit
Output Voltage
(Vin = Vin nom; Full Load; TA = 25°C)
TMR 3-xx10WI
TMR 3-xx11WI
TMR 3-xx09WI
TMR 3-xx12WI
TMR 3-xx13WI
TMR 3-xx21WI
TMR 3-xx22WI
TMR 3-xx23WI
3.267
4.95
8.91
11.88
14.85
±4.95
±11.88
±14.85
3.3
5
9
12
15
±5
±12
±15
3.333
5.05
9.09
12.12
15.15
±5.05
±12.12
±15.15
Vdc
Output Regulation
Line (Vin min to Vin max at Full Load)
Load (0% to 100% of Full Load)
Load (5% to 100% of Full Load)
All
-0.2
-1.0
-0.5
+0.2
+1.0
+0.5
%
Output Ripple & Noise
Peak-to-Peak (5Hz to 20MHz Bandwidth)
All 30 mV pk-pk
Temperature Coefficient All -0.02 +0.02 %/°C
Dynamic Load Response
(Vin = Vin nom; TA = 25°C)
Load step change from
75% to 100% or 100 to 75% of Full Load
Setting Time (Vout < 10% peak deviation)
All 250 μS
Output Current TMR 3-xx10WI
TMR 3-xx11WI
TMR 3-xx09WI
TMR 3-xx12WI
TMR 3-xx13WI
TMR 3-xx21WI
TMR 3-xx22WI
TMR 3-xx23WI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
700
600
333
250
200
±300
±125
±100
mA
Max. Capacitive Load on the Output TMR 3-xx10WI
TMR 3-xx11WI
TMR 3-xx09WI
TMR 3-xx12WI
TMR 3-xx13WI
TMR 3-xx21WI
TMR 3-xx22WI
TMR 3-xx23WI
3300
1680
1000
820
680
±1000
±470
±330
μF
Output Short Circuit Protection All Continuous, automatics recovery
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 3 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Input Specification
Parameter Model Min Typ Max Unit
Operating Input Voltage TMR 3-12xxWI
TMR 3-24xxWI
TMR 3-48xxWI
4.5
9
18
12
24
48
18
36
75
Vdc
Input Current
(Maximum Value at Vin = Vin nom; Full Load)
TMR 3-1210WI
TMR 3-1211WI
TMR 3-1209WI
TMR 3-1212WI
TMR 3-1213WI
TMR 3-1221WI
TMR 3-1222WI
TMR 3-1223WI
TMR 3-2410WI
TMR 3-2411WI
TMR 3-2409WI
TMR 3-2412WI
TMR 3-2413WI
TMR 3-2421WI
TMR 3-2422WI
TMR 3-2423WI
TMR 3-4810WI
TMR 3-4811WI
TMR 3-4809WI
TMR 3-4812WI
TMR 3-4813WI
TMR 3-4821WI
TMR 3-4822WI
TMR 3-4823WI
285
338
333
329
329
329
329
329
140
165
165
160
160
167
162
162
71
82
82
81
81
84
81
81
mA
Input Standby Current
(Typical Value at Vin = Vin nom; No Load)
TMR 3-1210WI
TMR 3-1211WI
TMR 3-1209WI
TMR 3-1212WI
TMR 3-1213WI
TMR 3-1221WI
TMR 3-1222WI
TMR 3-1223WI
TMR 3-2410WI
TMR 3-2411WI
TMR 3-2409WI
TMR 3-2412WI
TMR 3-2413WI
TMR 3-2421WI
TMR 3-2422WI
TMR 3-2423WI
TMR 3-4810WI
TMR 3-4811WI
TMR 3-4809WI
TMR 3-4812WI
TMR 3-4813WI
TMR 3-4821WI
TMR 3-4822WI
TMR 3-4823WI
35
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
20
19
20
19
25
25
25
12
12
13
14
14
14
14
14
mA
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 4 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Input Specification
Parameter Model Min Typ Max Unit
Input Reflected Ripple Current (See Page 54) TMR 3-12xxWI
TMR 3-24xxWI
TMR 3-48xxWI
25
10
8
mA pk-pk
Start Up Time
(Vin = Vin nom and constant resistive load)
Power up
Remote ON/OFF
All
30
30
mS
Remote ON/OFF Control (See Page 57)
DC-DC ON
DC-DC OFF
All 2 Open 4 mA
Remote Off Input Current All 2.5 mA
General Specification
Parameter Model Min Typ Max Unit
Efficiency (See Page 60)
(Vin = Vin nom; Full Load; TA = 25°C)
TMR 3-1210WI
TMR 3-1211WI
TMR 3-1209WI
TMR 3-1212WI
TMR 3-1213WI
TMR 3-1221WI
TMR 3-1222WI
TMR 3-1223WI
TMR 3-2410WI
TMR 3-2411WI
TMR 3-2409WI
TMR 3-2412WI
TMR 3-2413WI
TMR 3-2421WI
TMR 3-2422WI
TMR 3-2423WI
TMR 3-4810WI
TMR 3-4811WI
TMR 3-4809WI
TMR 3-4812WI
TMR 3-4813WI
TMR 3-4821WI
TMR 3-4822WI
TMR 3-4823WI
74
78
79
80
80
80
80
80
75
80
80
82
82
79
81
81
74
80
80
81
81
79
81
81
%
Isolation Voltage (for 60 seconds)
Input to Output Standard
Suffix ”H”
All
All
1500
3000
Vdc
Isolation Resistance All 109 Ω
Isolation Capacitance
Standard
Suffix ”H”
All 200
40
pF
Switching Frequency All 100 KHz
Weight All 4.8 g
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 5 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
General Specification
Parameter Model Min Typ Max Unit
MTBF (See Page 60)
Bellcore TR-NWT-000332, TC = 40°C
MIL-HDBK-217F
All 3’963’000
1’707’000
hours
Case Material Non-conductive black plastic
Base Material None
Potting material Silicon (UL94-V0)
Dimensions 21.8 X 9.2 X 11.1 mm (0.86 X 0.36 X 0.44 Inch)
Environmental Specification
Thermal shock MIL-STD-810F
Vibration MIL-STD-810F
Relative humidity 5% to 95% RH
EMC Characteristic
EMI (See Page 55 & 56)
EN55022
Class A
Class B
ESD EN61000-4-2
Air ±8KV
Contact ±6KV
Performance Criteria A
Radiated immunity EN61000-4-3 10V/m Performance Criteria A
Fast transient * EN61000-4-4 ±2KV Performance Criteria A
Surge * EN61000-4-5 ±1KV Performance Criteria A
Conducted immunity EN61000-4-6 10Vr.m.s Performance Criteria A
* An external input filter capacitor is required if the module has to comply with EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5.
The filter capacitor Tracopower suggest: Nippon Chemi-Con KY series, 100μF/100V, ESR = 110mΩ.
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 6 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1210WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 7 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1210WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 8 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1211WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 9 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1211WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 10 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1209WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 11 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1209WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 12 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1212WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 13 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1212WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 14 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1213WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 15 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1213WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 16 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1221WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 17 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1221WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 18 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1222WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 19 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1222WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 20 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1223WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 21 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-1223WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 22 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2410WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 23 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2410WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 24 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2411WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 25 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2411WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 26 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2409WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 27 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2409WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 28 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2412WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 29 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2412WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 30 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2413WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 31 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2413WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 32 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2421WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 33 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2421WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 34 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2422WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 35 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2422WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 36 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2423WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 37 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-2423WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 38 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4810WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 39 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4810WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 40 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4811WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 41 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4811WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 42 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4809WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 43 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4809WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 44 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4812WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 45 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4812WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 46 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4813WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 47 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4813WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 48 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4821WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 49 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4821WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 50 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4822WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 51 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4822WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 52 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4823WI
Efficiency versus Output Current Power Dissipation versus Output Current
Efficiency versus Input Voltage. Full Load Derating Output Current versus Ambient Temperature and
Airflow Vin = Vin nom
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 53 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Characteristic Curves (Continued)
All test conditions are at 25°C. The figures are identical for TMR 3-4823WI
Typical Output Ripple and Noise.
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Transient Response to Dynamic Load Change from
100% to 75% to 100% of Full Load ; Vin = Vin nom
Typical Input Start-Up and Output Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Using ON/OFF Voltage Start-Up and Vout Rise Characteristic
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class A
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Conduction Emission of EN55022 Class B
Vin = Vin nom, Full Load
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 54 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Testing Configurations
Input reflected-ripple current measurement test up
Component Value Voltage Reference
L 2u2H ---- SMD Inductor
C 1μF 100V 1210 MLCC
Peak-to-peak output ripple & noise measurement test up
Output voltage and efficiency measurement test up
Note: All measurements are taken at the module terminals.
% 100
in in
o o
V I
V I
Efficiency
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 55 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
EMI considerations
+Vin
-Vin
+Vout
-Vout
C1
L1
D/D Converter
＋INPUT
－INPUT
LOAD
Suggested Schematic to comply with EN55022 Conducted Noise Class A
recommended PCB Layout with Input Filter
To comply with conducted noise according to EN55022 CLASS A following components are recommended:
TMR 3-12xxWI
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 4.7μF 25V 1210 MLCC
L1 2.2μH ---- SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-059
TMR 3-24xxWI
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 2.2μF 50V 1210 MLCC
L1 10μH ---- SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-047
TMR 3-48xxWI
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 2.2μF 100V 1210 MLCC
L1 10μH ---- SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-047
PDL03W
SERIES
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 56 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
EMI considerations (Continued)
+Vin
-Vin
+Vout
-Vout
C1
L1
D/D Converter
＋INPUT
－INPUT
LOAD
Suggested Schematic to comply with EN55022 Conducted Noise Class B
recommended PCB Layout with Input Filter
To comply with conducted noise according to EN55022 CLASS B following components are recommended:
TMR 3-12xxWI
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 10μF 25V 1812 MLCC
L1 2.2μH ---- SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-059
TMR 3-24xxWI
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 6.8μF 50V 1812 MLCC
L1 18μH ---- SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-046
TMR 3-48xxWI
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 2.2μF 100V 1812 MLCC
L1 18μH ---- SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-046
PDL03W
SERIES
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 57 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Input Source Impedance
The power module should be connected to a low impedance input source. Highly inductive source impedance can affect the
stability of the power module. Input external L-C filter is recommended to minimize input reflected ripple current. The capacitor
must as close as possible to the input terminals of the power module for lower impedance.
Thermal Consideration
The power module operates in a variety of thermal environments. However, sufficient cooling should be provided to help ensure
reliable operation of the unit. Heat is removed by conduction, convection, and radiation to the surrounding Environment. Proper
cooling can be verified by measuring the point as the figure below. The temperature at this location should not exceed 100°C.
When Operating, adequate cooling must be provided to maintain the test point temperature at or below 100°C. Although the
maximum point Temperature of the power modules is 100°C, you can limit this Temperature to a lower value for extremely high
reliability.
TOP VIEW
Remote ON/OFF Control
The positive logic remote ON/OFF control circuit is included.
Turns the module ON during a logic High on the On/Off pin and turns OFF during a logic Low.
The On/Off pin is an open collector/drain logic input signal (Von/off) that referenced to GND.
If not using the remote on/off feature, please open circuit between on/off pin and input pin to turn the module on.
Recommended external ON/OFF Ctrl circuit and components
R1
R2
1K
Vcc
CONTROL
TTL Signal 5K1
ON/OFF
PIN RIN
ZD1
DC/DC Converter
Logic Positive R1(K) R2(K) ZD1
Vcc = 4.5~18Vdc 0 7.5 10V, 5mA
Vcc = 9~36Vdc 2.2 16 18V, 5mA
Vcc = 18~75Vdc 6.8 33 36V, 5mA
Measurement shown in inches and (millimeters)
Temperature Measurement Point
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 58 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Mechanical Data
Pin Connection
Pin Single Dual
1 -Input (GND) -Input (GND)
2 +Input (Vcc) +Input (Vcc)
3 Remote on/off Remote on/off
5 NC* / No Pin** NC* / No Pin**
6 +Output (+Vout) +Output (+Vout)
7 -Output (-Vout) Com
8 NC -Output (-Vout)
Recommended Pad Layout
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Tolerance: X.XX ±0.02 (X.X ±0.5)
X.XXX ±0.01 (X.XX ±0.25)
Pin Pitch Tolerance: ±0.01 (±0.25)
Pin Dimension Tolerance: ±0.004 (±0.1)
0.16
(4.10)
0.44 (11.2)
1 2 3 5 6 7 8
0.100(2.54)
0.86(21.80)
FRONT VIEW
0.02(0.50)
0.700(17.78)
.0.01(0.25)
Rectangular pin
0.08(2.0)
0.36(9.10)
0.13(3.3)
BOTTOM VIEW
0.02(0.50)
* NC pin for standard.
** No pin for 3KV isolation. (P/N suffix ”H”)
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 59 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Soldering Considerations
Lead free wave solder profile for TMR 3WI SIP type
Zone Reference Parameter
Preheat zone
Rise temp. speed: 3°C/ sec max.
Preheat temperature: 100~130°C
Actual heating
Peak temperature: 250~260°C
Peak time (T1+T2 time): 4~6 sec
Reference Solder: Sn-Ag-Cu; Sn-Cu
Hand Welding:
Soldering iron: Power 90W
Welding Time: 2~4 sec
Temperature: 380~400°C
Packaging Information
10 pc’s per TUBE
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: June 7th, 2011 / Rev.: 1.1 / Page 60 / 60
3W Single & Dual Output
Order Code
Note 1: Maximum value at nominal input voltage and full load of standard type.
Note 2: Typical value at nominal input voltage and full load.
Model Output Current Input Current
Number
Input
Range
Output
Voltage Full Load Full Load(1)
Eff (2)
(%)
TMR 3-1210WI 4.5 – 18Vdc 3.3Vdc 700mA 285mA 74
TMR 3-1211WI 4.5– 18Vdc 5.0Vdc 600mA 338mA 78
TMR 3-1209WI 4.5– 18Vdc 9.0Vdc 333mA 333mA 79
TMR 3-1212WI 4.5– 18Vdc 12.0Vdc 250mA 329mA 80
TMR 3-1213WI 4.5– 18Vdc 15.0Vdc 200mA 329mA 80
TMR 3-1221WI 4.5– 18Vdc ±5.0Vdc ±300mA 329mA 80
TMR 3-1222WI 4.5– 18Vdc ±12.0Vdc ±125mA 329mA 80
TMR 3-1223WI 4.5– 18Vdc ±15.0Vdc ±100mA 329mA 80
TMR 3-2410WI 9– 36Vdc 3.3Vdc 700mA 140mA 75
TMR 3-2411WI 9 – 36Vdc 5.0Vdc 600mA 165mA 80
TMR 3-2409WI 9 – 36Vdc 9.0Vdc 333mA 165mA 80
TMR 3-2412WI 9 – 36Vdc 12.0Vdc 250mA 160mA 82
TMR 3-2413WI 9 – 36Vdc 15.0Vdc 200mA 160mA 82
TMR 3-2421WI 9 – 36Vdc ±5.0Vdc ±300mA 167mA 79
TMR 3-2422WI 9 – 36Vdc ±12.0Vdc ±125mA 162mA 81
TMR 3-2423WI 9 – 36Vdc ±15.0Vdc ±100mA 162mA 81
TMR 3-4810WI 18 – 75Vdc 3.3Vdc 700mA 71mA 74
TMR 3-4811WI 18 – 75Vdc 5.0Vdc 600mA 82mA 80
TMR 3-4809WI 18 – 75Vdc 9.0Vdc 333mA 82mA 80
TMR 3-4812WI 18 – 75Vdc 12.0Vdc 250mA 81mA 81
TMR 3-4813WI 18 – 75Vdc 15.0Vdc 200mA 81mA 81
TMR 3-4821WI 18 – 75Vdc ±5.0Vdc ±300mA 84mA 79
TMR 3-4822WI 18 – 75Vdc ±12.0Vdc ±125mA 81mA 81
TMR 3-4823WI 18 – 75Vdc ±15.0Vdc ±100mA 81mA 81
Safety and Installation Instruction
Fusing Consideration
Caution: This power module is not internally fused. An input line fuse must always be used.
This encapsulated power module can be used in a wide variety of applications, ranging from simple stand-alone operation to an
integrated part of sophisticated power architecture. To maximum flexibility, internal fusing is not included; however, to achieve
maximum safety and system protection, always use an input line fuse. The safety agencies require a slow-blow fuse with
maximum rating of 1.6A for TMR 3-12xxWI modules, 1A for TMR 3-24xxWI and TMR 3-48xxWI modules. Based on the
information provided in this data sheet on Inrush energy and maximum dc input current; the same type of fuse with lower rating
can be used. Refer to the fuse manufacturer’s data for further information.
MTBF and Reliability
The MTBF of TMR 3WI-SERIES of DC/DC converters has been calculated using
Bellcore TR-NWT-000332 Case I: 50% stress, operating temperature at 40°C (Ground fixed and controlled environment).
The resulting figure for MTBF is 3’963’000 hours.
MIL-HDBK 217F NOTICE2 FULL LOAD, operating temperature at 25°C. The resulting figure for MTBF is 1’707’000 hours.
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 1 / 23
Features
• SIP package: 21.8 x 9.2 x 11.1 mm (0.86 x 0.36 x 0.44inch)
• 2：1 wide input voltage of 4.5-9, 9-18,18-36 and 36-75VDC
• 2 Watts output power
• Low ripple & noise
• UL94-V0 case potting materials
• Input to output isolation: 1000Vdc, for 1 minute
• Operating temperature range: up to 75°C max without derating
• Continuous short circuit protection
• RoHS directive compliant
• External on/off control
• ISO 9001 certified manufacturing facilities
• UL60950-1 Recognized E188913
Applications
• test equipment
• Communication equipment
• Computer equipment
• mobile telecom equipment
TMR 2 Series Application Note
DC/DC Converter 4.5 to 9Vdc, 9 to 18Vdc, 18 to 36Vdc or 36 to 75 Vdc Input
3.3 to 15Vdc Single Outputs and ±5 to ±15Vdc Dual Outputs, 2 Watt
E188913
Complete TMR-2 datasheet can be downloaded at:
http://www.tracopower.com/products/tmr.pdf
General Description
The TMR 2 series offer 2 watts of output power from a 21.8 x 9.2 x 11.1 mm package up to an operating temperature of +75°C
without derating and without need of any external components. This product has a 2:1 wide input voltage range of 4.5-9Vdc,
9-18Vdc, 18-36Vdc or 36-75Vdc and features an input to output isolation of 1000Vdc, indefinite short-circuit protection. All
models are particularly suited to telecommunications, industrial, mobile telecom and test equipment applications.
Table of contents
Block Diagram P2 EMC consideration P8
Absolute maximum rating P2 Input Source Impedance P8
Output Specifications P2 & P3 Characteristic curve P9 - P20
Input Specifications P3 & P4 Thermal Consideration P21
General Specifications P5 Part number structure P21
Remote on/off control P6 EMC Specifications P21 & P22
Output over current protection P6 Mechanical data P22
Short circuitry protection P6 Safety and installation instruction P23
Solder, clearing, and drying considerations P7 MTBF and Reliability P23
Test configurations P7 & P8
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 2 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Block Diagram
Absolute Maximum Rating
Parameter Device Min Typ Max Unit
Continuous
TMR 05xx
TMR 12xx
TMR 24xx
TMR 48xx
9
18
36
75
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Input Voltage
Transient (100ms)
TMR 05xx
TMR 12xx
TMR 24xx
TMR 48xx
15
36
50
100
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Output power 2 W
Temperature coefficient ±0.1 %/°C
Output Specifications
Parameter Device Min Typ Max Unit
Operating Output Range
TMR xx10
TMR xx11
TMR xx09
TMR xx12
TMR xx13
TMR xx21
TMR xx22
TMR xx23
3.267
4.950
8.910
11.880
14.850
±4.950
±11.880
±14.850
3.300
5.000
9.000
12.000
15.000
±5.000
±12.000
±15.000
3.333
5.050
9.090
12.120
15.150
±5.050
±12.120
±15.150
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Output Current
TMR xx10
TMR xx11
TMR xx09
TMR xx12
TMR xx13
TMR xx21
TMR xx22
TMR xx23
50
40
22
17
13
±20
±8
±7
500
400
222
167
134
±200
±83
±67
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
Max. Output Capacitive Load
TMR xx10
TMR xx11
TMR xx09
TMR xx12
TMR xx13
TMR xx21
TMR xx22
TMR xx23
2200
1000
470
170
110
±470
±100
±47
μF
μF
μF
μF
μF
μF
μF
μF
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 3 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Output Specifications (continue)
Parameter Device Min Typ Max Unit
Line Regulation (LL to HL at Full Load) All 0.5 %
Load Regulation (10% to 100% of Full Load) TMR xx10
Other single output
Dual output
±0.85
±0.75
±1.00
%
Cross regulation (Asymmetrical load 25% to 100% of Full Load) ±5.0
Output Ripple & Noise (20MHz bandwidth) All 50 mV pk-pk
Transient Response Recovery Time (25% load step change) All 500 μS
Input Specifications
Parameter Device Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage Continuous TMR 05xx
TMR 12xx
TMR 24xx
TMR 48xx
4.5
9
18
36
5.0
12.0
24.0
48.0
9
18
36
75
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Input Current
(Maximum Value at Vin = Vin nom; Full Load)
TMR 0510
TMR 0511
TMR 0509
TMR 0512
TMR 0513
TMR 0521
TMR 0522
TMR 0523
TMR 1210
TMR 1211
TMR 1209
TMR 1212
TMR 1213
TMR 1221
TMR 1222
TMR 1223
TMR 2410
TMR 2411
TMR 2409
TMR 2412
TMR 2413
TMR 2421
TMR 2422
TMR 2423
TMR 4810
TMR 4811
TMR 4809
TMR 4812
TMR 4813
TMR 4821
TMR 4822
TMR 4823
540
615
596
588
582
645
595
598
202
234
222
219
220
242
224
226
102
115
109
109
108
117
112
110
52
60
56
55
55
62
57
57
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 4 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Input Specifications (continue)
Parameter Device Min Typ Max Unit
Input Standby Current
(Typical Value at Vin = Vin nom; No Load)
TMR 0510
TMR 0511
TMR 0509
TMR 0512
TMR 0513
TMR 0521
TMR 0522
TMR 0523
TMR 1210
TMR 1211
TMR 1209
TMR 1212
TMR 1213
TMR 1221
TMR 1222
TMR 1223
TMR 2410
TMR 2411
TMR 2409
TMR 2412
TMR 2413
TMR 2421
TMR 2422
TMR 2423
TMR 4810
TMR 4811
TMR 4809
TMR 4812
TMR 4813
TMR 4821
TMR 4822
TMR 4823
60
55
55
75
40
75
75
90
20
25
25
30
30
50
40
40
10
10
15
15
15
15
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
12
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
5V input (100μF)
12V input (100μF)
24V input (10μF)
Input reflected ripple current
(It will not damage the device if the capacitor
on the input is not equipped)
48V input (10μF)
400
150
380
170
mA pk-pk
mA pk-pk
mA pk-pk
mA pk-pk
Start up time Power up
(nominal Vin and constant resistive load
power up) Remote ON/OFF
1
1
mS
mS
Remote ON/OFF Control (See Page 13)
DC-DC ON
DC-DC OFF
All
4
Open
8
mA
Remote Off Input Current All 2.5 mA
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 5 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
General Specifications
Parameter Device Min Typ Max Unit
Efficiency
at Vin nom and full load
(Please see the testing configurations part)
TMR 0510
TMR 0511
TMR 0509
TMR 0512
TMR 0513
TMR 0521
TMR 0522
TMR 0523
TMR 1210
TMR 1211
TMR 1209
TMR 1212
TMR 1213
TMR 1221
TMR 1222
TMR 1223
TMR 2410
TMR 2411
TMR 2409
TMR 2412
TMR 2413
TMR 2421
TMR 2422
TMR 2423
TMR 4810
TMR 4811
TMR 4809
TMR 4812
TMR 4813
TMR 4821
TMR 4822
TMR 4823
65
69
71
72
73
66
71
71
72
75
79
80
80
73
78
78
71
76
80
80
81
75
78
80
70
74
78
80
79
75
77
77
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Isolation resistance All 109 Ω
Isolation Capacitance All 300 1000 pF
Switching Frequency (full load to minimum load) All 100 650 KHz
Weight All 4.8 g
MTBF (please see the MTBF and reliability part) All 5.107×106 hours
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 6 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Vout
Pi (Input Power)
Iocp
Remote On/Off Control
Only one type of remote on/off control is available for TMR. The module will turn on during the ctrl pin left open or high impedance between ctrl pin
and -Vin pin. The module will turn off if the control pin is applied with a current of 4~8mA.
In off condition the input current is app. 1mA max.
Positive Logic: Negative Logic:
Output over current protection
When excessive output currents occur in the system, circuit protection is required on all converters. Normally, overload current is maintained at
approximately 115~175% percent of rated current.
The TMR converters have a fold-back over current protection. Fold back current protection reduces the load current during over current condition.
The figure below shows a typical curve. Since the over current protection is a fold-back characteristic the highest power dissipation occurs at point
S. During start-up this product provides less output current, hence the output rises slower, or the power supply may not start up at all if the load
current during start up is larger than the fold back current.
Short Circuitry Protection
Continuous, hiccup and auto-recovery mode. During short circuit, converter will shut down and will switch on again to detect if the short circuit is
still present or not. The average current during this condition will be very low and the device will be safe in short circuit condition. Due to that is the
TMR converters indefinite short circuit protected.
●
●
+Input
-Input
6mA current
Source
Ctrl
1KΩ
DC-DC OFF
+Input
-Input
6mA current
Source
Ctrl
1KΩ
DC-DC ON
S (Iout, max, Pi, max)
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 7 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Solder, clearing, and drying considerations
Soldering
Flow (wave) soldering: 250°C ±10°C less than10 seconds (see below)
Soldering iron: 370°C ±10°C less than 5 seconds
Note: the pin of this product is Tin coated. To assure the solder-ability, modules should be kept in their original shipping containers to provide
adequate protection. Also, the storage environment shall be well controlled to protect any oxidation.
Cleaning process
In aqueous cleaning, it is preferred to have an in-line cleaner system consisting of several cleaning stages (pre-wash, wash, rinse, final rinse, and
drying). Deionize (DI) water is recommend for aqueous cleaning; the minimum resistive level is 1MΩ-cm.
Tap-water quality varies per region in terms of hardness, chloride, and solid contents; therefore, the use of tap water is not recommended for
aqueous cleaning.
Drying
The drying section of the cleaner system should be equipped with blowers capable of generating 1000cfm -1500cfm of air so that the amount of
rinse water left to be dried off with heat is minimal. Handheld air guns are not recommended due the variability and consistency of the operation.
Note: after post-wash, the marking (date code) of converter may fall off. These only impacts the appearance and do not affect the operation of the
module.
Testing Configurations
Input reflected-ripple current measurement test up
TMR 05xx and TMR 12xx
Component Value Voltage Reference
C 100μF 50V Aluminium Electrolytic Capacitor
TMR 24xx and TMR 48xx
Component Value Voltage Reference
C 10μF 100V Aluminium Electrolytic Capacitor
Peak-to-peak output ripple & noise measurement test up
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 8 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Testing Configurations (continue)
Output voltage and efficiency measurement test up
Note: All measurements are taken at the module terminals.
% 100 ×
×
×
=
in in
o o
V I
V I
Efficiency
EMC considerations
Suggested Schematic for EN55022 Conducted Emission Class B Limits
To comply with EN55022 CLASS B conducted emissions the following components are recommended:
TMR 05xx and TMR 12xx
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 22 μF 25V 1812 MLCC Capacitor
L1 3.3 μH 2.0A / 0.06Ω / 0504 SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-044
TMR 24xx
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 4.7 μF 50V 1812 MLCC Capacitor
L1 12 μH 1.4A / 0.12Ω / 0504 SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-062
TMR 48xx
Component Value Voltage Reference
C1 2.2 μF 100V 1812 MLCC Capacitor
L1 27 μH 0.9A / 0.2Ω / 0504 SMD Inductor, P/N: TCK-063
Input Source Impedance
The power module should be connected to a low impedance input source. Highly inductive source impedance can affect the stability of the power
module. Input external L-C filter is recommended to minimize input reflected ripple current. The capacitor should be equipped as close as possible
to the input terminals of the power module for lower impedance.
+Vin
-Vin
+Vout
-Vout
C1
L1
D/D Converter
＋INPUT
－INPUT
LOAD
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 9 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Characteristic Curve
Efficiency
a. Efficiency with load change under different line condition at room temperature
TMR 0510
15.00
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
lout (mA )
Efficiency (%)
TMR 1213
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
85.00
13 27 40 54 67 80 94 107 121 134
lout (mA )
Efficiency (%)
TMR 4810
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
lout (mA )
Efficiency (%)
9V
12V
18V
4.5V
5V
9V
36V
48V
75V
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 10 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
TMR 1221
15.00
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
lout (mA )
Efficiency (%)
TMR 2422
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
85.00
8 17 25 33 42 50 58 66 75 83
lout (mA )
Efficiency (%)
TMR 4823
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
7 13 20 27 34 40 47 54 60 67
lout (mA )
Efficiency (%)
9V
12V
18V
18V
24V
36V
36V
48V
75V
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 11 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
b. Efficiency at input voltage change under different load condition at room temperature
TMR 0510
15.00
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9
Vin (V)
Efficiency (%)
TMR 1213
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
85.00
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Vin (V)
Efficiency (%)
TMR 4810
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
36V 40V 44V 48V 52V 56V 60V 64V 68V 75V
Vin(V)
Eff(%)
500mA
250mA
50mA
134mA
67mA
13mA
500mA
250mA
50mA
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 12 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
TMR 1221
15.00
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
85.00
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Vin (V)
Efficiency (%)
TMR 2422
25.00
35.00
45.00
55.00
65.00
75.00
85.00
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
Vin (V)
Efficiency (%)
TMR 4823
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
90.00
36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 75
Vin (V)
Efficiency (%)
200mA
100mA
20mA
83mA
42mA
8mA
67mA
34mA
7mA
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 13 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Power dissipation curve
TMR 0510
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
0.900
1.000
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
lout (mA )
Pd (W)
TMR 1213
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
13 27 40 54 67 80 94 107 121 134
lout (mA )
Pd (W)
TMR 4810
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
lout (mA )
Pd (W)
9V
5V
4.5V
18V
12V
9V
75V
48V
36V
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 14 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
TMR 1221
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
0.900
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
lout (mA )
Pd (W)
TMR 2422
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
8 17 25 33 42 50 58 66 75 83
lout (mA )
Pd (W)
TMR 4823
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
7 13 20 27 34 40 47 54 60 67
lout (mA )
Pd (W)
75V
48V
36V
36V
24V
18V
18V
12V
9V
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 15 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Output ripple & noise
TMR 0510
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Output Ripple & Noise = 26.8mV Output Ripple & Noise = 20.8mV Output Ripple & Noise = 14.8mV
TMR 1213
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Output Ripple & Noise = 25.2mV Output Ripple & Noise = 14.0mV Output Ripple & Noise = 11.6mV
TMR 4810
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Output Ripple & Noise = 20.0mV Output Ripple & Noise = 13.6mV Output Ripple & Noise = 10.8mV
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 16 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
TMR 1221
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
+Vout = 18.8mV / – Vout = 14.4mV + Vout = 17.6mV / –Vout = 14.0mV + Vout = 17.6mV / – Vout = 15.2mV
TMR 2422
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
+ Vout = 30.8mV / – Vout = 19.2mV + Vout = 25.6mV / – Vout = 18.0mV + Vout = 18.4mV / – Vout = 12.8mV
TMR 4823
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
+ Vout = 26.8mV / – Vout = 24.4mV + Vout = 14.8mV / – Vout = 14.0mV + Vout = 12.8mV / – Vout = 10.4mV
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 17 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Transient Peak and Response
TMR 0510
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Transient Peak 85.0mV Transient Peak 81.0mV Transient Peak 75.0mV
Transient Response 332.0μS Transient Response 328.0μS Transient Response 316.0μS
TMR 1213
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Transient Peak 123.0mV Transient Peak 102.0mV Transient Peak 88.0mV
Transient Response 488μS Transient Response 488μS Transient Response 488μS
TMR 4810
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Transient Peak 79.0mV Transient Peak 68.0mV Transient Peak 63.0mV
Transient Response 316μS Transient Response 316μS Transient Response 316μS
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 18 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
TMR 1221
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Transient Peak 270mV Transient Peak 246mV Transient Peak 240mV
Transient Response 496μS Transient Response 480μS Transient Response 472μS
TMR 2422
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Transient Peak 152mV Transient Peak 133mV Transient Peak 124mV
Transient Response 320μS Transient Response 328μS Transient Response 320μS
TMR 4823
Vin min, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load Vin max, Full Load
Transient Peak 119mV Transient Peak 100mV Transient Peak 93mV
Transient Response 400μS Transient Response 384μS Transient Response 392μS
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 19 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Start-up Time and Rise Time
TMR 0510
Vin nom, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load
Rise Time = 247.6μS Start-up Time = 408.0μS
TMR 1213
Vin nom, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load
Rise Time = 530.3μS Start-up Time = 640.0μS
TMR 4810
Vin nom, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load
Rise Time = 176.3μS Start-up Time = 240.0μS
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 20 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
TMR 1221
Vin nom, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load
Rise Time = 297.2μS Start-up Time = 640.0μS
TMR 2422
Vin nom, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load
Rise Time = 324.8uS Start-up Time = 432.0uS
TMR 4823
Vin nom, Full Load Vin nom, Full Load
Rise Time=1.056mS Start-up Time= 1.180mS
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 21 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Thermal Consideration
The power module operates in a variety of thermal environments. However, sufficient cooling should be provided to help ensure reliable operation
of the unit. Heat is removed by conduction, convection, and radiation to the surrounding Environment. Proper cooling can be verified by
measuring the point as shown in the figure below. The temperature at this location should not exceed 100°C. During performance, adequate
cooling must be provided to maintain the test point temperature at or below 100°C. Although the maximum point Temperature of the power
modules is 100°C, you can limit the case temperature to a lower value for high reliability.
TOP VIEW
Part Number Structure
TMR 4812
EMC Specifications
Contact discharge Air discharge
level test voltage (KV) level test voltage (KV)
1 ±2 1 ±2
2 ±4 2 ±4
3 ±6 3 ±8
EN61000-4-2
ESD
(performance criteria B)
4 ±8 4 ±15
level test field strength (V/m)
1 1
2 3
EN61000-4-3
RS
(performance criteria B)
3 10
Input Voltage
Range:
05xx : 4.5~9V
12xx : 9~18V
24xx : 18~36V
48xx : 36~75V
Output Voltage
10 : 3.3V
11 : 5V
09 : 9V
12 : 12V
13 : 15V
21 : ±5V
22 : ±12V
23 : ±15V
TEMPERATURE MEASURE POINT
Measurement shown in inches and (millimeters)
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 22 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
EMC Specifications (continue)
open circuit output test voltage ±10%
level power line
1 ±0.5KV
2 ±1.0KV
3 ±2.0KV
EN61000-4-4
EFT
(performance criteria B)
4 ±4.0KV
level open circuit output test voltage ±10%
1 ±0.5KV
2 ±1.0KV
3 ±2.0KV
EN61000-4-5
Surge
(performance criteria B)
4 ±4.0KV
level voltage level(EMF)
1 1V/rms
2 3V/rms
EN61000-4-6
CS
(performance criteria B)
3 10V/rms
Mechanical Data
.0.01
(0.32)
Rectangular pin
0.08
(2.01)±0.5
0.36
0.13
(3.20) BOTTOMVIEW
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Tolerance: X.XX ±0.02 (X.X ±0.5)
X.XXX ±0.01(X.XX ±0.25)
Pin Pitch Tolerance ±0.02(0.5)
0.16
(4.10)±0.5
0.02
(0.50)±0.05
0.44
1 2 3 5 6 7 8
0.10(2.54)
0.86(21.80)
FRONT VIEW 0.02
(0.50)
0.70(17.78)
PIN CONNECTION
PIN SINGLE
1 - INPUT
2 + INPUT
3 CTRL
5 NC
6 + OUTPUT
7 - OUTPUT
8 NC
DUAL OUTPUT
- INPUT
+ INPUT
CTRL
NC
+ OUTPUT
COM
-OUTPUT
Application Note
Created by Traco Electronic AG Arp. www.tracopower.com Date: October 9th, 2007 / Rev.: 1.4 / Page 23 / 23
2W, Single and Dual Output
Safety and Installation Instruction
Isolation consideration
The TMR series features 1.0k Volt DC isolation for 60 seconds from input to output, input to case, and output to case. The input to output
resistance is greater than 109 ohms. Nevertheless, if the system using the TMR converter needs to get safety agency approval, certain rules must
be followed in the design of the system. In particular, all of the creepage and clearance requirements of the end-use safety requirement must be
observed. These documents include UL60950-1, EN60950-1 and CSA 22.2-60950, although specific applications may have other or additional
requirements.
Fusing Consideration
Caution: The TMR converter is not internally fused. An input line fuse must always be used. This encapsulated power module can be used in a
wide variety of applications, ranging from simple stand-alone operation to an integrated part of a sophisticated power architecture. To maximum
flexibility, internal fusing is not included; however, to achieve maximum safety and system protection, always use an input line fuse. The safety
agencies require a slow-blow fuse with maximum rating of 6.3 A. Based on the information provided in this data sheet on inrush energy and
maximum dc input current, the same type of fuse with lower rating can be used.
Minimum Load Requirement
25% (of full load) minimum load required to maintain a stable output voltage and to comply with the published specifications. The TMR Series is
not getting damaged at no load or low load conditions but at loads below 25% a proper and accurate regulation of the output voltage cannot be
ensured. The output voltage drops by app. 10%.
MTBF and Reliability
The MTBF of TMR series has been calculated according to:
1. MIL-HDBK-217F under the following conditions:
Nominal Input Voltage and GB
Iout = Iout max
TA = +25°C
The resulting figure for MTBF is 2.399× 106 hours.
2. Bell-core TR-NWT-000332 Case I:
50% stress, Operating Temperature at 40 ℃ (Ground fixed and controlled environment)
The resulting figure for MTBF is 5.107× 106 hours.
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 13
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series, 50–600 Watt
Features
◆ Switch mode power supplies for
DIN-rail mount
◆ 6 power ranges with 2, 3, 6, 12, 20 and
24 A output current (24 VDC models)
◆ Selectable 115/230 VAC input
◆ Very low ripple and noise
◆ EMI complies with EN 61000-6-3 and
EN 61000-6-4
◆ Operating temp. range –25°C to +70°C
◆ For system operation available with
built-in functions:
RED: Redundancy module for N+1
Systems with true current sharing
SIG: Signal module with AC-powerfail,
power good signal and
external On/Off control
UDS: DC-UPS module for uninterruptable
battery backed-up
power systems
◆ Worldwide safety approvals incl.
class I, div. 2 location
◆ Easy snap-on mount on DIN-rails
or chassis mount
◆ 3-year product warranty
The switching power supplies of the TIS series have been particularly designed for
applications in industrial process control systems and with machine tools. Excellent
specifications and high immunity against electrical disturbances guarantee reliable
power for sensitive loads in rugged industrial environments. With the help of optional
function modules specific requirements for system applications can be easily
realized with a standard model. With the UDS module the power supplies can be
extended to a perfect DC-UPS with automatic battery- backup. This function is very
often required in applications where a time delayed shutdown of a system is necessary.
To monitor and control the power supply a signal module can be installed.
For parallel operation with active power sharing a redundancy option is available.
This flexibility makes the TIS series power supplies a cost effective solution for many
industrial applications.
Order Code Input Voltage Output Power Output Voltage Output Current
(includes terminal plugs) nom. max. nom. max.
TIS 50-112 115–240 VAC
50 W
12 VDC 3.5 A
TIS 50-124 universal input 24 VDC 2.0 A
TIS 75-112
115/230 VAC
12 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 75-124
selectable
75 W 24 VDC 3.0 A
TIS 75-148 48 VDC 1.5 A
TIS 150-124 115/230 VAC
150 W
24 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 150-148 selectable 48 VDC 3.0 A
TIS 300-124
115/230 VAC
24 VDC 12.0 A
TIS 300-148
selectable
300 W 48 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 300-172 72 VDC 4.2 A
TIS 500-124-115 115 VAC 500 W 24 VDC 20.0 A
TIS 500-124-230 230 VAC 500 W 24 VDC 20.0 A
TIS 600-124 24 VDC 24.0 A
TIS 600-148
115/230 VAC
600 W 48 VDC 12.0 A
TIS 600-172
selectable
72 VDC 8.5 A
Models
CB Scheme
(LVD) UL 60950-1 UL 508
UL 1604
http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 13
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Input Specifications
Input voltage range TIS 50: 93 – 264 VAC
TIS 75, 150, 300, 600: 93 – 132 VAC / 187 – 264 VAC
TIS 500-124-230. 187 – 264 VAC
TIS 500-124-115: 93 – 132 VAC
Input frequency 47 – 63 Hz
Input current at full load (typ.) at 115 VAC at 230 VAC
TIS 50: 0.85 A 0.50 A
TIS 75: 1.3 A 0.75 A
TIS 150: 2.7 A 1.6 A
TIS 300: 4.9 A 2.9 A
TIS 500: 6.0 A 4.3 A
TIS 600: 7.0 A 5.0 A
Recommended circuit breaker, TIS 50: 5.0 A
characteristic C TIS 75: 5.0 A
or fuse, slow blow typ TIS 150: 10.0 A
TIS 300: 15.0 A
TIS 500: 15.0 A
TIS 600: 20.0 A
Output Specifications
Output voltage adj. range 12 VDC models: 12 – 14 VDC
24 VDC models: 24 – 28 VDC
48 VDC models: 48 – 52 VDC
72 VDC models: 60 – 76 VDC
Regulation – Input variation 0.2 %
– Load variation (10–90%) TIS 50, TIS 75, TIS 150: 1.0 %
TIS 300, TIS 500, TIS 600: 0.3 %
(2.0 % in parallel operation)
Ripple and noise (20MHz bandwidth) <50 mV pk-pk
Electronic short circuit protection current limitation at 110 % typ.
(constant current, automatic restart)
Over voltage protection, trigger point at 140 % typ. Vout nom.
Hold-up time 115 VAC 230 VAC
TIS 50 ... TIS 300: min. 25 ms min. 30 ms
TIS 500: min. 20 ms min. 40 ms
TIS 600: min. 15 ms min. 25 ms
http://www.tracopower.com Page 3 of 13
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating (ambient temp.) –25°C to +70°C
– Derating above 50°C (122°F) 2 %/K
– Storage (non operating) –25°C to +85°C
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel. H max.
Pollution degree 2
Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/K
Switching frequency 80 kHz typ. (pulse width modulation)
Efficiency TIS 50 ... TIS 300: 85 % typ.
TIS 500: 90 % typ.
TIS 600: 90 % typ.
Isolation according to IEC/EN 60950, UL 60950, UL 508
Reliability, calculated MTBF TIS 50/75: 450’000 h / 420’000 h
(MIL-HDBK-217F, at +25°C, ground benign) TIS 150/300: 420’000 h / 360’000 h
TIS 500/600: 340’000 h / 300’000 h
Safety standards IEC/EN 60950-1 (SELV, except 72 VDC models)
UL/cUL 60950-1, UL 508, UL/cUL 1604
Safety approvals – CB report for IEC 60950
www.tracopower.com/products/tis-cb.pdf
– UL approvals UL/cUL 60950, File e181381
UL/cUL 508, File e210002
UL/cUL 1604, File e213613 not for TIS 50 & 500
(Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations)
www.ul.com -> certifications
– CSA certificate (UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1) www.tracopower.com/products/tis-csa.pdf
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Emissions EN 61000-6-3 / EN 61000-6-4
– Conducted RI suppression on input EN 55011 class B, EN 55022 class B,
FCC part 15, level B
– Radiated RI suppression EN 55011 class A, EN 55022 class A,
FCC part 15, level A
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Immunity EN 61000-6-2
– Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC/EN 61000-4-2 4 kV/8 kV
– Radiated RF field immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
– Electrical fast transient / burst immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-4 2 kV
– Surge immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-5 2 kV/4 kV
– Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC/EN 61000-4-6 10 V
– Power frequency field immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-8 30 A/m
Safety class degree of electrical protection 1 (IEC 536)
Case protection IP 20 (IEC 529)
Environment – Vibration IEC 60068-2-6; 1 gn, 200 sweeps, each axis
– Shock IEC 60068-2-27; 15 gn, 11 ms, each axis
Enclosure material aluminium (chassis) / zinc plated steel (cover)
Mounting (snap-on with self locking spring) for 35 mm DIN-rails as per EN 50022
Connection detachable screw terminal block
(plugs included)
(TIS 600: fixed screw terminal block)
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Instruction manual can be downloaded under:
www.tracopower.com/products/tis-manual.pdf
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25 °C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
http://www.tracopower.com Page 4 of 13
Power Supplies with Redundancy Function
With this option a parallel operation of up to 5 units is possible. Decoupling diodes and current share lines allow to build true N +1 redundant
systems with active current sharing for all units. This function also includes an alarm relay to signal a single unit failure.
This option is available for TIS 150 W, TIS 300 W and TIS 600 W models.
Please note: This option cannot be combined with other options.
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Order Code Input Voltage Output Power Output Voltage Output Current
(includes terminal plugs) max. nom. max.
TIS 150-124 RED 115/230 VAC
150 W
24 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 150-148 RED selectable 48 VDC 3.0 A
TIS 300-124 RED 115/230 VAC
300 W
24 VDC 12 A
TIS 300-148 RED selectable 48 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 600-124 RED 115/230 VAC
600 W
24 VDC 24 A
TIS 600-148 RED selectable 48 VDC 12 A
Models
I-Sense
Regulator
L
Con1
Pin3
N
115/230VAC
Con1
Pin1
AC
Con1
Pin2 DC
Common
Unit
OK
Unit OK Con3 - Pin1
Bus
Indicator
Con2 - Pin1/2
Con2 - Pin3/4
V-Sense
+Vout
Current
Shareline
Unit OK
Con3 - Pin4
Con3 - Pin3
Con3 - Pin2
-Vout
24/48VDC
Specifications
Rating per relay contact 60 VDC /0.36 A max.
Instruction manual for RED option can be downloaded under:
http://www.tracopower.com/products/tis-red_manual.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com Page 5 of 13
Power Supplies with Powerfail Functions
These models provide 3 functions required in many process control system applications:
◆ AC-Powerfail signal (relay contact)
◆ Power Good signal (relay contact)
◆ Remote On/Off
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Order Code Input Voltage Output Power Output Voltage Output Current
(includes terminal plugs) max. nom. max.
TIS 150-124 SIG 115/230 VAC
150 W
24 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 150-148 SIG selectable 48 VDC 3.0 A
TIS 300-124 SIG 115/230 VAC
300 W
24 VDC 12 A
TIS 300-148 SIG selectable 48 VDC 6.0 A
TIS 600-124 SIG 115/230 VAC
600 W
24 VDC 24 A
TIS 600-148 SIG selectable 48 VDC 12 A
Models
Remote
ON/OFF
L
115/230VAC
Con1
Pin1
N
Con1
Pin2
Con1
Pin3
AC
DC
Mains
Fail
Detection
Mains OK
Remote
ON/OFF
+Vout Con2 - Pin3/4
-Vout
24/48VDC
Common
AC-Powerfail
Con3 - Pin2
Con3 - Pin7
Con3 - Pin6
Con2 - Pin1/2
Output
OK
Power Good
Detection Power Good
Common
Power Good
Power Good
Con3 - Pin5
Con3 - Pin4
Con3 - Pin3
+
-
Con3 - Pin1
(Relay A)
(Relay B)
Specifications
Power Good signal trigger point models with 24 Vout: >22.8 VDC ±0.5 V relay B closed (pin 4 – pin 3)
models with 48 Vout: >45.6 VDC ±1.0 V relay B closed (pin 4 – pin 3)
AC-Powerfail signal Vin <93 resp. <187 VAC relay A closed
(pin 7 – pin 6)
Raiting per relay contact 60 VDC /0.36 A max.
Remote On/Off – On short circuit con 3 pin 1 and pin 2
– Off open circuit con 3 pin 1 and pin 2
Instruction manual for SIG option can be downloaded under:
http://www.tracopower.com/products/tis-sig_manual.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com Page 6 of 13
DC-UPS-System
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
In addition to the standard power supply function, these models
include a professional battery management system to charge and
monitor an external battery. In the event of a power failure the
battery is switched automatically and without any interruption to
the DC output. Once mains power is available again, the battery
is switched off. The backup time is limited only by battery capacity
and load. Charge current and voltage can be adjusted to values as
required by battery type. Power fail and low battery alarm signals
are available via two independent relay contacts. During normal
operation the battery status is monitored by periodically loading
the battery for a short time. If a cell resistance is high, there is a
relay alarm is available. The battery is fully protected under any
operational conditions. The power supply is short circuit protected
even in battery backup operation but, for safety reasons, the battery
should be fitted with a fast blow fuse. Battery mode can be
activated by interconnecting pin 7 and 8.
Complete external battery packs (3.2 Ah or 7 Ah standard) with lead batteries and circuit breaker are available (see page 8).
Order Code 1) Input Voltage Output Power Output Voltage Output Current 2)
max. nom. max.
TIS 300-124 UDS 115/230 VAC 300 W 24 VDC 12 A
selectable
TIS 600-124 UDS 115/230 VAC 600 W 24 VDC 24 A
selectable
Models
1) Includes terminal plugs, does not include batteries
2) reduce max. output current by battery charging current
http://www.tracopower.com Page 7 of 13
DC-UPS-System
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Battery
ON/OFF
Con4
Pin7
L
115/230VAC
Con1
Pin1
Con4
Pin8
N
Con1
Pin2
Battery -
Battery +
Con1
Pin3
Con3 - Pin1
Con3 - Pin2
AC
DC
Mains
Fail
Detection
Battery
Test
Battery OK
Battery Low / failure
Common
Low Battery
Con4 - Pin4
AC-Powerfail
Con4 - Pin6
Con4 - Pin5
Battery Switch
Logic
I
V Battery Charger
+Vout Con2 - Pin3/4
-Vout
24VDC
Common
AC-Power OK
AC-Powerfail
Con4 - Pin3
Con4 - Pin2
Con4 - Pin1
Con2 - Pin1/2
Output
OK
VBat>18V
Bat ON/OFF
Mains Fail
(Relay B)
(Relay A)
Specifications
Charging current (factory set) TIS 300-124 UDS: 1.2 A
TIS 600-124 UDS: 2.4 A
Adjustment range of charging current TIS 300-124 UDS: 0.15 – 1.5 A
TIS 600-124 UDS: 0.25 – 2.5 A
Holding current for charged battery at voltage 27.3 VDC <50 mA
Overload or short circuit during battery operation system switches off
AC-Powerfail signal Vin <93 or <187 VAC relay A closed
(pin 2 – pin 3)
Low battery signal – Battery voltage below 22 V relay B closed (pin 5 – pin 6)
– Raiting per relay contact 60 VDC /0.36 A max.
During battery charge operation output current reduction by 1.4 x battery charge current
Instruction manual for UDS option can be downloaded under:
http://www.tracopower.com/products/tis-uds_manual.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com Page 8 of 13
Battery-Pack for DC-UPS Systems
The battery pack contains high quality, maintenance free lead-acid batteries with 3.2 Ah or 7.0 Ah capacity. The batteries are fixed together
with a re-settable electronic fuse on a solid mounting frame. Together with power supply models TIS 300-124 UDS or TIS 600-124
UDS the battery pack provides a complete and reliable DC-UPS system.
Backup time depends on load current and battery capacity.
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Order Code Battery Voltage Battery Capacity Permissable Charge
(25 °C, 20 h-rate) Current max.
TIS 24-32AP 24 VDC 3.2 Ah 1.2 A
TIS 24-70AP 24 VDC 7.0 Ah 2.4 A
Models
Specifications
Max. charge voltage 27 – 27.6 VDC
Temperature coefficient –36 mV/°C
Temperature range – at charge operation –15°C to +50°C
– at load operation –20°C to +60°C
– Storage –20°C to +60°C
Average lifetime on standby operation at tA =20°C 4 – 5 years (Limited Warranty on Battery)
Cable length 1.0 m
Cable diameter TIS 24-32 AP: 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
TIS 24-70 AP: 4.0 mm2 (AWG 11)
Weight TIS 24-32 AP: 2.9 kg (6.4 lb)
TIS 24-70 AP: 4.1 kg (9.1 lb)
Recommended combinations TIS 24-32 AP: TIS 300-124 UDS
(power supplies) TIS 24-70 AP: TIS 600-124 UDS
http://www.tracopower.com Page 9 of 13 100.0 (3.94)
75 (2.95)
37.5
(1.48)
74.0 (2.91)
56.7
(2.23)
26 (1.02)
5
(0.2)
31.5
(1.24)
10
(0.39)
TIS 50-112
Input
115/230 VAC
1,2/0,7 A
L N
12 VDC
3,5 A
Output
+ – Industrial
Power Supply
Model
DC-ON
adj
114.6 (4.51)
90 (3.54)
45 (1.77)
10
(0.39)
56.7
(2.23)
86.5 (3.4) 34 (1.34)
5
(0.2)
39.5
(1.56)
TIS 75-112
Input
115/230 VAC
1,7/0,9 A
L N
12 VDC
6 A
Output
+ –
Industrial
Power Supply
Model
DC-ON
adj
114.6 (4.51)
10
(0.39)
157 (6.18) 56.7 (2.23)
38.5 80 (3.15)
(1.52)
86.5 (3.4) 34 (1.34)
5
(0.2)
39.5
(1.56)
TIS 150-124 Input
115/230 50/60Hz
3,7/1,7 A
N L
24 VDC / 6 A
Output
+ –
Industrial
Power Supply
Model
DC-ON
Case Dimensions
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
TIS 50 models TIS 75 models
Weight: 0.48 kg (1.06 lb)
Weight: 0.80 kg (1.76 lb)
TIS 150 models
Weight: 0.41 kg (0.9 lb)
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
TIS PLUG-1 Connector Set for TIS 50/ 75/ 150
TIS PLUG-1-RED Connector Set for TIS 150-1xx RED
Connectors ( Included in shipment)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 10 of 13 114.6 (4.51)
10
(0.39)
83 (3.27)
38.5
(1.52)
130 (5.12)
83 (3.27)
207 (8.15)
91.5 (3.6)
(1.36)
34.5
34 (1.34)
5
(0.2)
39.5
(1.56)
TIS300-172 Input
115/230 50/60Hz
5,4/3,3 A
N L
72 VDC / 4 A
Output
+ –
Industrial
Power Supply
Model
DC-ON
+ –
83 (3.27)
130 (5.12)
220 (8.66)
46 (1.81) 130 (5.12)
10
(0.39)
(0.2)
94 (3.7) 41.5(1.63)
5
47
(1.85)
TIS 500-124-230 Input
230 VAC 50/60Hz
5,3 A
N L
24 VDC / 20 A
Output
+ –
Industrial
Power Supply
Model
DC-ON
+ –
Case Dimensions
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
TIS 300 models
Weight: 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)
Weight: 1.9 kg (4.19 lb)
TIS 500 models
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
TIS PLUG-3 Connector Set for TIS 300
TIS PLUG-3-RED Connector Set for TIS 300-1xx RED
TIS PLUG-3-UDS Connector Set for TIS 300-1xx UDS
TIS PLUG-5 Connector Set for TIS 500
Connectors ( Included in shipment)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 11 of 13
6.8
(0.27)
82.8 (3.26) 177.2 (6.98)
32
(1.26)
120.2 (4.73)
82.6 (3.25)
179 (7.05)
243 (9.57)
TIS 600-124
Input
115/230 VAC 50/60Hz
10,5/6,4 A
N L
24 VDC / 20 A
Output
– +
Industrial
Power Supply
Model
– +
Outline Dimensions mm (inches)
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
TIS 600 models
Weight: 2.0 kg (4.41 lb)
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
TIS PLUG-6-RED Connector Set for TIS 600-1xx RED
TIS PLUG-6-UDS Connector Set for TIS 600-1xx UDS
Connectors ( Included in shipment)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 12 of 13
Optional Mounting Systems
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
Wall mounting kit
B
A
C 7.5 (0.30)
D
E
4.6 (0.18)
TIS 75 MK-75 37 (1.46) 14.5 (0.57) – 134.5 (5.30) 150.5 (5.93)
TIS 150 MK-150 132 (5.20) 13.5 (0.53) 105 (4.13) 134.5 (5.30) 150.5 (5.93)
TIS 300 MK-300 132 (5.20) 13.5 (0.53) 105 (4.13) 134.5 (5.30) 150.5 (5.93)
TIS 500 MK-500 132 (5.20) 13.5 (0.53) 105 (4.13) 134.5 (5.30) 150.5 (5.93)
TIS 600 MK-600 190 (7.48) 37.5 (1.48) 115 (4.53) 197.0 (7.76) 207.0 (8.15)
Models Order code A B C D E
Rugged DIN-Rail mounting kit
4.2 (0.17)
25
(0.98)
50.1 (1.97)
A
B
C
countersink M4
TIS 150 RMK-150 150 (5.91) 115 (4.53) 35 (1.38)
TIS 300 RMK-300 200 (7.87) 165 (6.50) 35 (1.38)
TIS 500 RMK-300 200 (7.87) 165 (6.50) 35 (1.38)
TIS 600 standard 180 (7.09) 165 (6.50) 15 (0.59)
Models Order code A B C
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Page 13 of 13
Outline Dimensions mm (inches)
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
Industrial Power Supplies
TIS Series 50–600 Watt
TIS 24-32AP
Weight (incl. batteries):
TIS 24-32AP 2.9 kg (6.4 lb)
TIS 24-70AP TIS 24-70AP 4.1 kg (9.1 lb)
A
B
A
B
204 (8.03)
184 (7.24)
69 (2.72)
Detail B
Detail A
9
(0.35) 5.8
(0.23)
12
(0.47)
14
(0.55)
7
(0.28)
100 (3.94)
135 (5.14)
7
(0.28)
B
A
272 (10.71)
252 (9.92)
B
A
100 (3.94)
69 (2.72) 152 (5.98)
Rev. May 17. 2013
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
http://www.tracopower.com
Industrial DC/DC-Converter
TCL-DC Series, 24 to 60 Watt
Features
◆ Ultra-wide input voltage range
◆ Output voltage adjustable
◆ Overload and short circuit protection
◆ Low ripple and noise
◆ I/O isolation 1500 VDC
◆ Compact, slim plastic case
◆ Reliable snap-on mount on DIN-rail
◆ Bracket for wall mount included
◆ 3-year product warranty
In the TCL range of DIN-rail power supplies are 6 models for DC input voltage available.
The wide input ranges of 9.5–18 VDC resp. 18–75 VDC means these models
can be operated from all popular DC supply voltage systems.
With tightly regulated output voltage these DC/DC converters provide a reliable
power source for sensitive loads in industrial process controls, factory automation
and other equipment exposed to a critical industrial environment. Further applications
for these converters are isolation of a specific load or refreshing the 24 V
bus voltage. Easy installation is provided with snap-on mounting on DIN-rails and
detachable screw terminal block.
Order Code Input Voltage Range Output Voltage Output Current max.
TCL 012-124 DC 9.5 – 18.0 VDC 24 VDC 1.0 A
TCL 024-105 DC 5 VDC 5.0 A
TCL 024-112 DC 18 – 75 VDC 12 VDC 2.0 A
TCL 024-124 DC 24 VDC 1.0 A
TCL 060-112 DC
TCL 060-124 DC
18 – 75 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
5.0 A
2.5 A
Models
Page 1 of 3
UL 508
CB
Scheme
http://www.tracopower.com
Industrial DC/DC-Converter
TCL-DC Series 24 to 60 Watt
Input Specifications
Input power at no load 1.0 Watt max.
Start-up voltage/under voltage shut down TCL 012 model: 8.4 VDC / 7.6 VDC
TCL 024 & TCL 060 models: 17.2 VDC / 15.7 VDC
Reverse polarity protection by internal fuse
Efficiency 86 % typ.
Output Specifications
Output voltage adj. range 5 VDC model: 5.0 – 5.25 VDC
12 VDC models: 12.0 – 15.0 VDC
24 VDC models: 24.0 – 28.0 VDC
Regulation – Input variation Vin min. to Vin max. 0.5 % max
– Load variation 0...100% 0.5 % max
Ripple and noise (20 MHz bandwidth) <50 mV pk-pk
Electronic short circuit protection current limitation at 110 % typ.
(constant current, automatic recovery)
Overvoltage protection, trigger point 5 VDC model: <6.5 V
12 VDC models: <24 V
24 VDC models: <42 V
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –25°C to +70°C max.
– Storage (non operating) –25°C to +85°C
Temperature derating 1.5 %/K above +50°C
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel. H max.
Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/K
Switching frequency 55 – 180 kHz depending on load
(frequency modulation)
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 1500 VDC
Reliability, calculated MTBF at +25°C (according to IEC 61709) >2.5 Mio h
Safety standards – Information technology equipment IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-1 (output SELV),
UL Std. 60950-1 (2nd Edition) +Am1:2011,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1-07 +Am1:2011
– Industrial control equipment UL 508
– Electronic equipment for power installation EN 50178
– Electrical equipment for machines EN 60204
Safety approvals – CB test certificate (IEC 60950-1) www.tracopower.com/products/tcl-cb.pdf
– UL approval www.ul.com -> certifications
UL 508C listed, CSA C22.2 No.14 File e210002
– CSA certification UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1-03
www.tracopower.com/products/tcl-csa.pdf
– GS certification www.tracopower.com/products/tcl060dc_gs.pdf
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), emissions EN 61000-6-3
– Conducted RI suppression on input EN 55022 class B
– Radiated RI suppression EN 55022 class B
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), immunity EN 61000-6-2
– Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 4 kV / 8 kV
– Radiated RF field immunity EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
– Electrical fast transient / burst immunity EN 61000-4-4 Level 3
– Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 Level 3
– Immunity to conducted RF disturbances EN 61000-4-6 10 Vrms
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/reach-declaration.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
Case protection IP 20 (IEC 60529)
Enclosure material plastic UL 94V-0 rated
Mounting DIN-rails as per EN 50022-35x15/7.5
(snap-on with self-locking spring)
bracket for wall/chassis mount included
Installation instructions www.tracopower.com/products/tcl-dc-inst.pdf
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25 °C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Page 2 of 3
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
Industrial DC/DC-Converter
TCL-DC Series 24 to 60 Watt
Rev. October 18. 2013
Page 3 of 3
27 (1.06)
2.2 (0.09)
100.0 (3.94)
75.0 (2.95)
DC-ON LED
Output voltage
adjust
INPUT
1 2 3
OUTPUT
1 2
Output Input
1 + Vout 1 Protective earth
2 – Vout 2 –Vin
3 +Vin
Weight: 140g (4.9 oz)
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Case Dimensions
Wall Mounting Bracket
Instead on a DIN-rail, the modules can be
also mounted on a chassis or wall with help of a
mounting bracket which is supplied as standard
with each Converter
75.0 (2.95)
100.0 (3.94)
3.2 (0.13) 45 (1.77)
DC-ON LED
Output voltage
adjust
OUTPUT
1 1 2 2
INPUT
1 2 3
TCL 012 and TCL 024 models
TCL 060 model
Weight: 265 g (9.4 oz)
Output Input
1 + Vout 1 Protective earth
2 – Vout 2 –Vin
3 +Vin
http://www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TOS Series, Point-of-Load (POL) Converter
Features
Small size, low profile
SMT package or SIP version
Cost-efficient open frame design
Wide input voltage ranges
Output voltages trim from
0.75 VDC to 5.5 VDC
Delivers up to 30 A with minimal derating
Ultra high efficiency to 96 %
Fast transient response
Remote On/Off control
Wide temperature range –40°C to +85°C
SMT package fully DOSA compatible
Lead free design – RoHS compliant
The TOS series is a range of high performance non-isolated dc-dc converters With
very high efficiency that can supply up to 30A of output current. These modules
provide precisely regulated output voltages which can be set via an external resistor
to a value from 0.75 VDC to 5.5 VDC. These converters work over a wide input
voltage range of 2.4 to 5.5 VDC or 8.3 to 14.0 VDC.Further features include remote
On/Off, under voltage lockout, over temperature and over current protection.
These products have an open-frame construction with very small footprint and are
available in an industry standard SIP or in a SMT package. The TOS series is fully
RoHS compliant and can withstand industry standard handling, cleaning and the
high temperatures of lead-free reflow solder processes.
Order code
SMT-version
Input voltage
range
Output voltage
range
Output current max. Efficiency typ.
TOS 06-05SM 6 A 94 %
TOS 10-05SM 2.4 – 5.5 VDC 0.75 – 3.3 VDC** 10 A 93 %
TOS 16-05SM 16 A 95 %
TOS 06-12SM 6 A 89 %
TOS 10-12SM 8.3 – 14.0 VDC 0.75 – 5.0 VDC 10 A 93 %
TOS 16-12SM 16 A 92 %
SIL-version
TOS 06-05SIL 6 A 94 %
TOS 10-05SIL 2.4 – 5.5 VDC 0.75 – 3.3 VDC* 10 A 93 %
TOS 16-05SIL 16 A 95 %
TOS 06-12SIL 6 A 89 %
TOS 10-12SIL 8.3 – 14 VDC 0.75 – 5.0 VDC 10 A 93 %
TOS 16-12SIL 16 A 92 %
Models
* 25 A output voltage higher than 2.75 VDC
** Max output voltage to be adjusted min. 0.5 VDC below impressed input voltage
Page 1 of 4
Order code
SMT-version
Input voltage
range
Output voltage
range
Output current max. Efficiency typ.
TOS 30-05SM 4.5 – 5.5 VDC 0.80 – 3.6 VDC 30 A 93 %
TOS 30-12SM 6.0 – 14.0 VDC 0.80 – 3.6 VDC 30 A* 92 %
SIL-version
TOS 30-05SIL 4.5 – 5.5 VDC 0.80 – 5.5 VDC 30 A 93 %
TOS 30-12SIL 6.0 – 14.0 VDC 0.80 – 5.5 VDC 30 A* 92 %
Models Datasheet for 30A Models see: www.tracopower.com/products/tos30.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TOS Series, POL Converter
Input Specifications
Input current no load – Vin 5 VDC (at Vout min./Vout max.) 6 A models: 20 mA / 45 mA typ.
10 A models: 25 mA / 30 mA typ.
16 A models: 25 mA / 40 mA typ.
– Vin 12 VDC (at Vout min./Vout max.) 6 A models: 17 mA / 100 mA typ.
10 A models: 40 mA / 100 mA typ.
16 A models: 40 mA / 100 mA typ.
Stand by input current (at remote Off) 6 A models: 1 mA typ.
10 A / 16 A models: 2 mA typ.
Max. input current – Vin 5 VDC 6 A models: 6 A
10 A models: 10 A
16 A models: 16 A
– Vin 12 VDC 6 A models: 4.5 A
10 A models: 7 A
16 A models: 10 A
Start up voltage / under voltage lockout 5 Vin models: 2.2 VDC / 2.0 VDC typ.
12 Vin models: 7.9 VDC / 7.8 VDC typ.
Start up time (power / remote On till Vout set) 8 mS typ.
Reflected ripple current – Vin 5 VDC 6 A models: 35 mA typ.
(with input filter) 10 A / 16 A models: 100 mA typ.
– Vin 12 VDC 6 A models: 30 mA typ.
10 A models: 20 mA typ.
16 A models: 20 mA typ.
Input filter external (recommended) 2 x 150 μF low ESR polymer capacitors and
2 x 47 μF ceramic capacitors
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±2 % max. (see page 3 for set up)
Voltage balance (dual output models) ±1 % max.
Regulation – Input variation ±0.3 % max.
– Load variation 0 – 100 % ±0.4 % max.
Dynamic load response – 50 % load change (upper half) with external 1 μF ceramic- and 10 μF tantalum capacitors
max. peak variation / response time Vin 5 VDC, 6 A models: 130 mV / 60 μS typ.
Vin 12 VDC, 6 A models: 200 mV / 35 μS typ.
Vin 5 VDC, 10 A models: 200 mV / 25 μS typ.
Vin 12 VDC, 10 A models: 200 mV / 25 μS typ.
Vin 5 VDC, 16 A models: 300 mV / 25 μS typ.
Vin 12 VDC, 16 A models: 200 mV / 25 μS typ.
– 50 % load change (upper half) with external 2 x 150 μF polymer capacitors
Vin 5 VDC, 6 A models: 50 mV / 100 μS typ.
Vin 12 VDC, 6 A models: 50 mV / 50 μS typ.
Vin 5 VDC, 10 A models: 100 mV / 100 μS typ.
Vin 12 VDC, 10 A models: 100 mV / 25 μS typ.
Vin 5 VDC, 16 A models: 150 mV / 100 μS typ.
Vin 12 VDC, 16 A models: 100 mV / 50 μS typ.
Ripple and noise (20 MHz Bandwidth) 5 Vin models: 50 mV pk-pk max.
12 Vin models: 75 mV pk-pk max
Temperature coefficient ±0.4 % typ.
Over current protection at +200 % of Iout max. typ.
Short circuit protection indefinite, automatic recovery
Capacitive load – ESR <1 mOhm 1000 μF max.
– ESR <10 mOhm 6 A models: 3000 μF max.
10 A / 16 A models: 5000 μF max.
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Page 2 of 4
http://www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TOS Series, POL Converter
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –40°C to +85°C
– Storage –55°C to +125°C
Derating see application note
Over temperature protection at +125°C typ.
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel H max.
Reliability, calculated MTBF (Bellcore TR-NWT-000332) 6 A models: >20 mio. h at +40°C
10 A / 16 A models: >14 mio. h at +40°C
Switching frequency 300 kHz typ. (pulse width modulation - PWM)
Remote On/Off On: 1 VDC to Vin max. or open circuit.
(reference to GND) Off: 0 to 0.3 VDC
Physical Specifications
Weight 6 A models: 2.8 g
10 A / 16 A models: 6.0 g
Soldering profile – SIL - Version max. 265°C / 10 sec. (wave soldering)
– SMT - Version peak temp. 245°C for 10 sec. max., 217°C for
90 sec. max. (Convection reflow solder process
is recommended)
Output Voltage Adjustment
Rd
GND
Prog
Load
(+Vout)
Vo
5 VDC input models: Rd [Ohm] = 21070 – 5110
Vo – 0.7525
12 VDC input models: Rd [Ohm] = 10570 – 1000
Vo – 0.7525
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Page 3 of 4
Application note: www.tracopower.com/products/tos-application.pdf
Jenatschstrasse 1 · CH-8002 Zurich · Switzerland
Tel. +41 43 311 45 11 · Fax +41 43 311 45 45 · info@traco.ch · www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TOS Series, POL Converter
Outline Dimensions mm (inches)
Rev. 12/12
Surface Mount (SMT-Version)
Single-in-Line (SIL-Version)
10.2 (0.40)
22.9 (0.90)
3.29
(0.13)
20.32 (0.8)
Vin
GND
Prog
Vout
On/Off
6 A output Models
Vin
GND
Prog
Vout
On/Off
0.70
(0.028)
6.65
(0.26)
10A & 16A output models
Sens
No Pin
0.64
(0.025)
0.51
(0.02)
1.28
(0.05)
3.24
(0.128)
1.18
(0.046)
8.28
(0.33)
0.51
(0.02)
0.64
(0.025)
1.28
(0.05)
5 x 2.54 (5 x 0.10) 4 x 2.54 (4 x 0.10)
50.8 (2.00)
12.7 (0.50)
25.4 (1.0)
Vin
Vout
Vout
GND
2.54 (0.1)
15.24 (0.6)
17.78 (0.7)
1.5
11.4 (0.45)
2.29
20.3 (0.8)
(0.09) (0.05)
1.3
1.57
8.9 (0.35)
(0.82)
4.06
(0.16)
4.06
(0.16)
4.57
(0.18)
17.52 (0.69)
(0.06)
8.64 (0.34)
Vin
GND Prog Vout
On/Off
1.57
(0.82)
5.97
(0.24)
Bottom View
6 A output Models
1.9
13.5 (0.53)
2.84
33.0 (1.3)
(0.112) (0.05)
1.3
1.57
10.92 (0.43)
(0.82)
4.83
(0.19)
4.83
(0.19)
7.54
(0.30)
29.9 (1.18)
(0.075)
10.29 (0.41)
Vin
GND Vout Prog
On/Off
1.57
(0.82)
8.28
(0.33)
Bottom View
10A & 16A output models
4.83
(0.19)
4.83
(0.19)
No Pin Sens
Page 4 of 4
Specifications can be changed any time without notice.
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 6
AC/DC Power Modules
TML Series, 5to
30 Watt
The TML series are ultra compact AC/DC power supplies in a fully encapsulated
plastic case. They feature versions with screw terminals for easy installation or with
solder pins for direct PCB mounting. International safety approvals qualify this
product for worldwide markets. The TML series AC/DC modules offer an interesting
solution for many space critical applications in commercial and industrial electronic
equipment.
Features
◆ Encapsulated power Supplies
◆ PCB mount or chassis mount with
screw terminals
◆ Single, dual and triple output models
◆ Universal input 85–264 VAC, 47–440 Hz
◆ EMI meets EN 55022, class B and
FCC, level B
◆ Low ripple and noise
◆ Short circuit and overload protection
◆ 3-year product warranty
Order Code Output Power
max.
Output 1 Output 2 Output 3
TML 05105 5 VDC/1000 mA
TML 05112 12 VDC/416 mA
TML 05115 15 VDC/333 mA
TML 05124 5 Watt 24 VDC/200 mA
TML 05205 5 VDC/500 mA –5 VDC/500 mA
TML 05212 12 VDC/200 mA –12 VDC/200 mA
TML 05215 15 VDC/160 mA –15 VDC/160 mA
TML 10105 5 VDC/2000 mA
TML 10112 12 VDC/833 mA
TML 10115 15 VDC/666 mA
TML 10124 10 Watt 24 VDC/416 mA
TML 10205 5 VDC/800 mA –5 VDC/800 mA
TML 10212 12 VDC/380 mA –12 VDC/380 mA
TML 10215 15 VDC/300 mA –15 VDC/300 mA
Models
LVD UL 60950-1
http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 6
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
AC/DC Power Modules
TML Series 5 to 30 Watt
Input Specifications
Input voltage ranges – AC input 85–264 VAC
– DC Input TML 30 models: 100 – 370 VDC
output power derating 1 %/V below 110 VDC
other models: 85 – 370 VDC
output power derating 0.8 %/V below 110 VDC
Input frequency 47–440 Hz
Input current no load 115 VAC / 230 VAC
TML 5 models: 10 mA / 15 mA typ
TML 10 models: 15 mA / 20 mA typ
TML 15 models: 18 mA / 25 mA typ.
TML 30 models: 30 mA / 55 mA typ.
Input current full load 115 VAC / 230 VAC
TML 5 models: 160 mA / 80 mA typ.
TML 10 models: 200 mA / 120 mA typ
TML 15 models: 280 mA / 165 mA typ.
TML 30 models: 550 mA / 320 mA typ.
External fuse (required) 1.5 A slow blow type (recommendation)
Order Code Output Power Output 1 Output 2 Output 3
PCB-mounting Chassis mounting max.
TML 15105 TML 15105C 5 VDC/3000 mA
TML 15112 TML 15112C 12 VDC/1250 mA
TML 15115 TML 15115C 15 VDC/1000 mA
TML 15124 TML 15124C 24 VDC/625 mA
TML 15205 TML 15205C 15 Watt 5 VDC/1500 mA –5 VDC/1500 mA
TML 15212 TML 15212C 12 VDC/650 mA –12 VDC/650 mA
TML 15215 TML 15215C 15 VDC/500 mA –15 VDC/500 mA
TML 15512 TML 15512C 5 VDC/2000 mA 12 VDC/200 mA –12 VDC/200 mA
TML 15515 TML 15515C 5 VDC/2000 mA 15 VDC/150 mA –15 VDC/150 mA
TML 30103 TML 30103C 3.3 VDC/6000 mA
TML 30105 TML 30105C 5 VDC/6000 mA
TML 30112 TML 30112C 12 VDC/2500 mA
TML 30115 TML 30115C 15 VDC/2000 mA
TML 30124 TML 30124C 24 VDC/1250 mA
TML 30205 TML 30205C 30 Watt 5 VDC/3000 mA –5 VDC/3000 mA
TML 30212 TML 30212C 12 VDC/1300 mA –12 VDC/1300 mA
TML 30215 TML 30215C 15 VDC/1000 mA –15 VDC/1000 mA
TML 30252 TML 30252C *5 VDC/3000 mA *12 VDC/1250 mA
TML 30512 TML 30512C * 5 VDC/3000 mA 12 VDC/630 mA –12 VDC/630 mA
TML 30515 TML 30515C *5 VDC/3000 mA 15 VDC/500 mA –15 VDC/500 mA
Models
* Output floating
http://www.tracopower.com Page 3 of 6
AC/DC Power Modules
TML Series 5 to 30 Watt
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ± 2 %
Regulation – Input variation 0.3 % max.
– Load variation (10–100%)
single output models: 1.0 % max.
dual / triple output models: 5 % max.
Minimum load single output models: 5 %
dual output models: 3 % (each output)
triple output 15W models: 10 % (main output only)
triple output 30W models: 20 % (each output)
Ripple and noise (20 MHz bandwidth) – 3.3 & 5 VDC output models: <1.5 % of Vout
– other models: <1.0 % of Vout
Current limitation 120– 80 % fold back
Short circuit protection hiccup mode, indefinite (automatic recovery)
Maximum capacitive load 470–50’000 μF depending on model
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –25 °C to +60 °C
– Power derating above 50 °C 3.75 %/°C
– Storage (non operating) –40 °C to +85 °C
Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/°C
Efficiency 72–80 % (depending on model)
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel max.
Switching frequency 100 kHz typ. (pulse width modulation PWM)
Hold-up time 40 ms min. (Vin 115...230 VAC)
Isolation voltage – Input/Output 3‘000 VAC
Reliability /calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F at +25°C, ground benign) >660’000 h
EMI / RFI conducted EN 55022, class B, FCC part 15, level B
EMC compliance – Electrostatic discharge ESD IEC / EN 61000-4-2 4 kV / 8 kV
– RF field susceptibility IEC / EN 61000-4-3 3 V/m
– Electrical fast transients/bursts on mainsline IEC / EN 61000-4-4 1 kV
Safety class II (only 30 watt models) to IEC / EN 60536
Safety standards UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1
Safety approval cUL/UL File e188913
www.ul.com -> certifications
Case material plastic resin + fiberglass
(flammability to UL 94-V0)
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/tml-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25 °C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
http://www.tracopower.com Page 4 of 6
AC/DC Power Modules
TML Series 5 to 30 Watt
Outline Dimensions
TML 5 Models
Pin diameter ø 1.0 mm
TML 10 Models
Weight: 80 g (2.8 oz)
Weight: 95 g (3.4 oz)
( ) = Inches
Tolerances = 0.5mm (0.02)
1
2
3
4
5
6
45.0
(1.77)
17.5 ±0.3
(0.69 ±0.012)
17.5 ±0.3
(0.69 ±0.012)
4.0
(0.16)
47.0 ±0.3
(1.85 ±0.012)
55.0
(2.17)
10 ±0.3
(0.39 ±0.012)
10 ±0.3
(0.39 ±0.012)
20.5
(0.81)
10
(0.39)
Bottom view
Bottom view
1
2
3
4
5
45.0
(1.77)
20.5
(0.79)
10
(0.39)
17.5 ±0.3
(0.69 ±0.012)
4.0
(0.16)
6
17.5 ±0.3
(0.69 ±0.012)
54.0 ±0.3
(2.13 ±0.012)
64.0
(2.52)
10 ±0.3
(0.39 ±0.012)
10 ±0.3
(0.39 ±0.012) Pin diameter ø
1.0 mm
Pin Single Dual
1 FG FG
2 AC(N) AC(N)
3 AC(L) AC(L)
4 –V out –V out
5 NC Common
6 +V out +V out
Pin-Out
Pin Single Dual
1 FG FG
2 AC(N) AC(N)
3 AC(L) AC(L)
4 –V out –V out
5 NC Common
6 +V out +V out
Pin-Out
NC = Not to connect
NC = Not to connect
http://www.tracopower.com Page 5 of 6
AC/DC Power Modules
TML Series 5 to 30 Watt
Outline Dimensions
TML 15 Models
PCB mounting:
TML 15-C Models
Chassis mounting:
Bottom view
1
2
3 8
7
6
5
4
54.0
(2.13)
20.0 ±0.3
(0.79 ±0.012)
20.0 ±0.3
(0.79 ±0.012)
6.0
(0.24)
62.0 ±0.3
(2.44 ±0.012)
74.0
(2.91)
8.5 ±0.3
(0.33 ±0.012)
8.5 ±0.3
(0.33 ±0.012)
11.5 ±0.3
(0.45 ±0.012)
11.5 ±0.3
(0.45 ±0.012)
22.0
(0.87)
10
(0.39)
Top view
54.0
(2.13)
5.0
(0.20)
86.0 ±0.3
(3.39 ±0.012)
96.0
(3.78)
4 x ø3.5
(4 x ø0.14)
1
2
3
8
7
6
5
4
27.6
(1.08)
5.0
(0.20)
46.0 ±0.3
(1.81 ±0.012)
Pin diameter ø 1.0 mm Weight: 120 g (4.2 oz)
Weight: 150 g (5.3 oz)
Pin Single Dual Triple
1 FG FG FG
2 AC(N) AC(N) AC(N)
3 AC(L) AC(L) AC(L)
4 No Pin No Pin –V out 3
5 –V out –V out Com. 2/3
6 No Pin Common +V out 2
7 +V out +V out –V out 1
8 No Pin No Pin +V out 1
Pin-Out
Page 6 of 6
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TML Series 5 to 30 Watt
TML 30 Models
PCB mounting:
1
2 7
6
5
4
3
Bottom view
63.5
(2.50)
27.9 ±0.3
(1.10 ±0.012)
3.8
(0.15)
81.3 ±0.3
(3.20 ±0.012)
88.9
(3.50)
15.24 ±0.3
(0.60 ±0.012)
12.7 ±0.3
(0.50 ±0.012)
12.7 ±0.3
(0.50 ±0.012)
15.24 ±0.3
(0.60 ±0.012)
25.0
(0.98)
6
(0.24)
27.9 ±0.3
(1.10 ±0.012)
Top view
1
2
7
6
5
4
3
31.0
(1.22)
5.5
(0.22)
64.7
(2.55)
50.0 ±0.3
(1.97 ±0.012)
6.0
(0.20)
100.0 ±0.3
(3.94 ±0.012)
112.0
(4.41)
4 x ø3.5
(4 x ø0.14)
NC
TML 30-C Models
Chassis mounting:
Pin diameter ø 1.0 mm Weight : 230 g (8.1 oz)
Weight : 275 g (9.7 oz) Dimensions in[mm], () = Inches
Tolerances = 0.5mm (0.02)
Pin Single Dual sym. Dual asym. Triple
1 AC(N) AC(N) AC(N) AC(N)
2 AC(L) AC(L) AC(L) AC(L)
3 +V out +V out +V out 2 +V out 2
4 No Pin No Pin +V out 1 +V out 1
5 –V out Common –V out 2 Com. 2/3
6 No Pin No Pin –V out 1 –V out 1
7 NC. –V out NC. –V out 3
Pin-Out
Rev. February 14. 2014
Outline Dimensions
NC = Not to connecthttp://www.tracopower.com
Features
◆ Shielded metal case with screw terminals
◆ Compact dimensions: 98 x 52 x 34 mm
◆ Ultra-wide 4:1 input voltage range
◆ Very high efficiency up to 87%
◆ Constant current output characteristic for
battery load applications
◆ Optional with input filter to meet
EN55022 class B
◆ Overtemperature protection
◆ Wide Operating temperature range:
–40°C to +75°C
◆ Reverse input protection
◆ Under voltage lock-out
◆ I/O isolation 2250 VDC
◆ Easy chassis and wall mounting
◆ 3-year product warranty
DC/DC Converters
TEP 150WI Series, 150 Watt
The TEP-150WI Series is a family of high power density dc-dc converter modules
with ultra-wide 4:1 input voltage range which come in an ultra-compact metal
case with screw terminal connection. Suitable for a wide range of applications, the
TEP-150WI series was particularly designed with industrial applications in mind.
The modules have flanges for easy chassis or wall mounting. A very high efficiency
allows an operating temperature up to +50°C with natural convection cooling.
Further features include adjustable output voltage with constant current characteristic
for battery charger applications.
Page 1 of 5
Order code* Input voltage Output voltage Output current max. Efficiency typ.
TEP 150-2412WI 12 VDC 12.5 A 86 %
TEP 150-2413WI
9 – 36 VDC
15 VDC 10 A 86 %
TEP 150-2415WI
(24 VDC nominal)
24 VDC 6.3 A 87 %
TEP 150-2416WI 28 VDC 5.4 A 87 %
TEP 150-2418WI 48 VDC 3.2 A 86 %
TEP 150-4812WI 12 VDC 12.5 A 87 %
TEP 150-4813WI
18 – 75 VDC
15 VDC 10 A 87 %
TEP 150-4815WI
(48 VDC nominal)
24 VDC 6.3 A 88 %
TEP 150-4816WI 28 VDC 5.4 A 88 %
TEP 150-4818WI 48 VDC 3.2 A 87 %
TEP 150-7212WI 12 VDC 12.5 A 86 %
TEP 150-7213WI
43 – 160 VDC
15 VDC 10 A 86 %
TEP 150-7215WI
(72 VDC nominal)
24 VDC 6.3 A 87 %
TEP 150-7216WI 28 VDC 5.4 A 87 %
TEP 150-7218WI 48 VDC 3.2 A 86 %
Options
suffix –F Modules with input filter to meet EN 55022 class B, see page 5
on demand Negative (passive = Off) remote On/Off function (standard is passive = On)range
Models
CB
Scheme UL 60950-1
http://www.tracopower.com
Input Specifications
Input current (no load) 24 Vin, 12 – 24 VDC models: 80 mA typ.
24 Vin, 28 – 48 VDC models: 130 mA typ.
48 Vin, 12 – 24 VDC models: 60 mA typ.
48 Vin, 28 – 48 VDC models: 70 mA typ.
110 Vin, 12 – 24 VDC models: 30 mA typ.
110 Vin, 28 – 48 VDC models: 40 mA typ.
Start-up voltage / under voltage lock-out 24 Vin models: 9 VDC / 8.2 VDC typ.
48 Vin models: 18 VDC / 16.2 VDC typ.
110 Vin models: 43 VDC / 34.5 VDC typ.
Surge voltage (1sec. max.) 24 Vin models: 50 V
48 Vin models: 100 V
110 Vin models: 170 V
Conducted noise (input) EN 55022 class A, FCC part 15, class A
without external components.
optional filter for class B – suffix F
ESD (electrostatic discharge) EN 61000-4-2, air ±8 kV, contact ±6 kV,
perf. criteria A
Radiated immunity EN 61000-4-3, 10 V/m, perf. criteria A
Fast transient / Surge (with input capacitor for models without filter module) EN 61000-4-4, ±2 kV, perf. criteria A
EN 61000-4-5, ±1 kV perf. criteria A
– Input capacitor: 24 VDC models: Nippon chemi-con KY 470 μF, 50 V, ESR 45 mOhm
48 VDC models: Nippon chemi-con KY 220 μF, 100 V, ESR 48 mOhm
110 VDC models: Nippon chemi-con KXJ series, 150 μF, 200V
models with filter module (suffix F): no input capacitor required
Conducted immunity EN 61000-4-6, 10 Vrms, perf. criteria A
Reverse voltage protection parallel diode (input fuse required)
Recommended input fuse (slow blow) 24 Vin models: 15 A
48 Vin models: 10 A
72 Vin models: 5 A
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±1 %
Output voltage adjustment +20 % by external resistor (see application note)
Regulation – Input variation Vin min. to Vin max. 0.2 % max.
– Load variation 0 – 100 % 0.4 % max.
Temperature coefficient ±0.02 %/K
Minimum load not required
Ripple and noise (20 MHz Bandwidth) 12 & 15 VDC models: 100 mVpk-pk max.
24 & 28 VDC models: 200 mVpk-pk max.
48 VDC models: 350 mVpk-pk max.
Start up time (nominal Vin and constant resistive load) 25 ms typ. (at power On or remote On)
Transient response (25 % load step change) 200 μs typ.
Output current – Constant voltage (CV) up to 110 % of Iout max.
– Constant current (CC) above 110 % of Iout max.
Over voltage protection at 125 –140 % of Vout nom.
Short circuit protection indefinite, automatic recovery
Capacitive load 12 VDC models: 40‘000 μF max.
15 VDC models: 26‘000 μF max.
24 VDC models: 10‘000 μF max.
28 VDC models: 7‘600 μF max.
48 VDC models: 2‘600 μF max.
DC/DC Converters
TEP 150WI Series 150 Watt
Page 2 of 5
http://www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TEP 150WI Series 150 Watt
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –40°C to +75°C
– Case temperature +100°C max.
– Storage –55°C to +125°C
Thermal consideration – Mounting surface Optimize thermal coupling to heat conducting
surface. Not to mount on flammable surface!
– Derating and temperature test point see application note
Over temperature protection at 110°C (auto restart)
Vibration and thermal shock acc. MIL-STD-810F
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel H max.
Reliability, calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F, at +40°C, ground benign) >135‘000 h
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 2250 VDC (functional insulation)
– Input/Case 1500 VDC
– Output/Case 1500 VDC
Isolation capacitance – Input/Output 3500 pF max.
Isolation resistance – Input/Output (500 VDC) >1 GOhm min.
Switching frequency 220 – 330 kHz depending on model
(puls width modulation)
Safety standards UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1
Safety approvals – UL/cUL 60950-1 www.ul.com -> certifications -> File e188913
– CB test certificate (IEC 60950-1) www.tracopower.com/products/tep150wi-cb.pdf
(72 Vin models pending)
Remote On/Off – positive logic (standard) – On: 3 to 12 VDC or open circuit
– Off: 0 to 1.2 VDC or short circuit pin 5 and 3
– negative logic (option -N) – On: 0 to 1.2 VDC or short circuit pin 5 and 3
– Off: 3 to 12 VDC or open circuit
– Off idle current: 3 mA
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/tep150wi-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
Physical Specifications
Casing material metal
Potting material silicon (UL 94V-0 rated)
Case protection IP 50 (in accordance to IEC/EN60529)
Weight 300 g (10.6 oz)
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Page 3 of 5
Application note: www.tracopower.com/products/tep150wi-application.pdf (72 Vin models pending)
http://www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TEP 150WI Series 150 Watt
Page 4 of 5
Weight: 300g (10.6 oz)
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Mounting slot tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.001)
Case tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Outline Dimensions
52.5
65.0
1.2
35.7
(2.07)
(2.56)
(1.6)
(0.05)
59.0 (2.07)
98.0 (3.86)
56.0 (2.20) 21.0 (0.83)
4 x r2
(0.08)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pin Connection
pin function recommended wire
1 + Vin 14 – 16 AWG
2 + Vin 14 – 16 AWG
3 – Vin 14 – 16 AWG
4 – Vin 14 – 16 AWG
5 Remote On/Off 14 – 24 AWG
6 + Vout 14 – 16 AWG
7 – Vout 14 – 16 AWG
8 Trim 14 – 24 AWG
9 Trim 14 – 24 AWG
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
Rev. June 14. 2013
Page 5 of 5
DC/DC Converters
TEP 150WI Series 150 Watt
Outline Dimensions
Pin Connection
52.5
65.0
1.2
35.7
(2.07)
(2.56)
(1.6)
(0.05)
59.0 (2.07)
139.5 (5.49)
56.0 (2.20) 21.0 (0.83)
6 x r2
(0.08)
160.5 (6.32)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
90.0 (3.54)
18.7
(0.74)
Weight: 435g (15.3 oz)
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Mounting slot tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.001)
Case tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
pin function recommended wire
1 + Vin 14 – 16 AWG
2 + Vin 14 – 16 AWG
3 – Vin 14 – 16 AWG
4 – Vin 14 – 16 AWG
5 Remote On/Off 14 – 24 AWG
6 + Vout 14 – 16 AWG
7 – Vout 14 – 16 AWG
8 Trim 14 – 24 AWG
9 Trim 14 – 24 AWG
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 11
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series, 15–
1000 Watt
Features
◆ Compact metal case with
screw terminal block
◆ Dual and triple output models with
isolated outputs
◆ Universal input 85–264 VAC
◆ EMI/EMC compliance with EN 61000-6-3
and EN 61000-6-1
◆ Compliance to EN 61000-3-2 (PFC)
◆ Short circuit and overvoltage protection
◆ International safety approvals
◆ 3-year product warranty
Order Code Case Type Output Power max. Output Voltage nom. Output Current max.
TXL 015-3.3S 3.3 VDC 3.0 A
TXL 015-05S 5 VDC 3.0 A
TXL 015-12S
B 15 Watt
12 VDC 1.3 A
TXL 015-15S 15 VDC 1.0 A
TXL 015-24S 24 VDC 0.63 A
TXL 015-48S 48 VDC 0.32 A
TXL 025-3.3S 3.3 VDC 6.0 A
TXL 025-05S 5 VDC 5.0 A
TXL 025-12S
C 25 Watt
12 VDC 2.1 A
TXL 025-15S 15 VDC 1.7 A
TXL 025-24S 24 VDC 1.1 A
TXL 025-48S 48 VDC 0.57 A
TXL 035-3.3S
D
3.3 VDC 9.0 A
TXL 035-05S 5 VDC 7.0 A
TXL 035-12S
35 Watt
12 VDC 3.0 A
TXL 035-15S 15 VDC 2.4 A
TXL 035-24S 24 VDC 1.5 A
TXL 035-48S 48 VDC 0.8 A
TXL 050-05S 5 VDC 10.0 A
TXL 060-12S
50 / 60 Watt
12 VDC 5.0 A
TXL 060-15S 15 VDC 4.0 A
TXL 060-24S 24 VDC 2.5 A
Models with Single Output
The TRACOPOWER TXL series is a family of encased power supplies designed for
a wide range of cost critical applications. With a low profile metal case and screw
terminal block connection, they are easy to install in any equipment.
There are 64 models in this range with single, dual, and triple output voltages from
3.3 VDC to 48 VDC in 12 power ranges from 15 W to 1000 W. These power supplies
have universal input and comply with European EMC standards and the Low
Voltage Directive (LVD).
http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 11
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Order Code Case Type Output Power max. Output Voltage nom. Output Current max.
TXL 060-3.3S 3.3 VDC 15.0 A
TXL 060-05S 5 VDC 12.0 A
TXL 070-12S
E
60 / 70 Watt 12 VDC 6.0 A
TXL 070-15S 15 VDC 4.8 A
TXL 070-24S 24 VDC 3.0 A
TXL 070-48S 48 VDC 1.5 A
TXL 100-3.3S 3.3 VDC 23.0 A
TXL 100-05S 5 VDC 20.0 A
TXL 100-12S
J 100 Watt
12 VDC 8.5 A
TXL 100-15S 15 VDC 7.0 A
TXL 100-24S 24 VDC 4.3 A
TXL 100-48S 48 VDC 2.3 A
TXL 150-05S 5 VDC 30.0 A
TXL 150-12S
L 150 Watt
12 VDC 12.5 A
TXL 150-24S 24 VDC 6.3 A
TXL 150-48S 48 VDC 3.2 A
TXL 230-12S 12 VDC 19.2 A
TXL 230-24S N 230 Watt 24 VDC 9.6 A
TXL 230-48S 48 VDC 4.8 A
TXL 350-24S
O 350 Watt
24 VDC 14.7 A
TXL 350-48S 48 VDC 7.5 A
TXL 750-24S
P 750 Watt
24 VDC 31.3 A
TXL 750-48S 48 VDC 15.8 A
TXL 1000-24S
Q 1000 Watt
24 VDC 40.0 A
TXL 1000-48S 48 VDC 21.0 A
Models with Single Output
Order Code Case Type Output Power
max.
* Output1
(Main Output)
* Output 2 * Output 3
TXL 035-0512D +5 VDC/ 4.0 A +12 VDC/ 2.5 A
TXL 035-0524D
D 35 Watt
+5 VDC/ 4.0 A +24 VDC/ 1.3 A
TXL 035-1212D +12 VDC/ 3.0 A –12 VDC/ 1.5 A
TXL 035-1515D +15 VDC/ 2.4 A –15 VDC/ 1.5 A
TXL 060-0512DI 5 VDC/ 8.0 A 12 VDC/ 4.0 A
TXL 060-0524DI 5 VDC/ 6.0 A 24 VDC/ 2.2 A
TXL 060-0521TI
E 60 Watt
5 VDC/ 8.0 A 12 VDC/ 3.5 A 5 VDC/ 1.0 A
TXL 060-0522TI 5 VDC/ 7.0 A 12 VDC/ 3.5 A 12 VDC/ 1.0 A
TXL 060-0533TI 5 VDC/ 7.0 A 15 VDC/ 3.0 A 15 VDC/ 1.0 A
TXL 060-0534TI 5 VDC/ 6.0 A 12 VDC/ 1.5 A 24 VDC/ 1.2 A
TXL 100-0512DI 5 VDC/ 12.0 A 12 VDC/ 7.0 A
TXL 100-0524DI 5 VDC/ 12.0 A 24 VDC/ 3.5 A
TXL 100-0521TI
J 100 Watt
5 VDC/ 12.0 A 12 VDC/ 5.0 A 5 VDC/ 1.5 A
TXL 100-0522TI 5 VDC/ 12.0 A 12 VDC/ 5.0 A 12 VDC/ 1.5 A
TXL 100-0533TI 5 VDC/ 12.0 A 15 VDC/ 4.0 A 15 VDC/ 1.5 A
TXL 100-0534TI 5 VDC/ 12.0 A 12 VDC/ 4.0 A 24 VDC/ 2.0 A
Models with Multiple Output
* Total power must not exceed specified max. output power
http://www.tracopower.com Page 3 of 11
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Input Specifications
Input voltage range – nominal 100 – 240 VAC
– AC range (universal input) 85 – 264 VAC for 15 to 350 Watt model
90 – 264 VAC for 750 & 1000 Watt models
– DC range 120 – 375 VDC for 15 to 350 Watt model
127 – 375 VDC for 750 & 1000 Watt models
Input voltage frequency 47 – 63 Hz
Input current (at full load) Vin = 115 VAC Vin = 230 VAC
TXL 015/025 models: 0.50 A typ. 0.22 A typ.
TXL 035 models: 0.70 A typ. 0.42 A typ.
TXL 060/070 models: 1.00 A typ. 0.60 A typ.
TXL 100 models: 1.65 A typ. 0.95 A typ.
TXL 150 models: 2.10 A typ. 1.10 A typ.
TXL 230 models: 3.20 A typ. 1.70 A typ.
TXL 350 models: 3.30 A typ. 1.70 A typ.
TXL 750 models: 8.0 A typ. 3.90 A typ
TXL 1000 models: 11.0 A typ. 5.0 A typ.
Input current (at no load) Vin = 115 VAC Vin = 230 VAC
TXL 015/025 models: 10 mA typ. 17 mA typ.
TXL 035 models: 50 mA typ. 55 mA typ.
TXL 230/350 models: 115 mA typ. 140 mA typ.
TXL 750 models: 210 mA typ. 220 mA typ.
TXL 1000 models: 330 mA typ. 350 mA typ.
other models: 100 mA typ. 80 mA typ.
Recommended circuit breaker up to 70 Watt models: 5 A
(characteristic C) or slow blow fuse up to 350 Watt models: 10 A
TXL 750 & 1000 Watt models: 16 A
Output Specifications
Output voltage adjustment range ±10 %
– 35 Watt dual output models: range Vout 1–2
– other multi output models: Vout 1
Regulation – Input variation 1 % max.
– Load variation (10–100%) single output models: 2 % max.
multiple output models: 4 % max. for main output
6 % max. for output 2/3 (20–100 % load)
– Minimum load on main output of multiple output models: 0.3 A for TXL 035
(to provide the regulation on the auxilary outputs) 1.0 A for TXL 060
1.5 A for TXL 100
Ripple and noise (20 MHz bandwidth) 3.3 VDC output < 50 mV
Output 3 (on triple output models) < 1.5 % of Vout
all other output voltages < 1.0 % of Vout nom.
Output current limitation 105 % – 150 % of Iout max.
Overload protection mode Fold back, automatic recovery
Over voltage protection (only output 1) 115 % – 140 % of Vout nom.
(depending on model)
Capacitive load, max. www.tracopower.com/products/txl-capload.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com Page 4 of 11
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –10°C to +70°C
– Load derating above +45°C 2 %/°K (2.5 %/°K for TXL 120/230/1000)
– Storage (non operating) –10°C to +75°C
Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/°C
Efficiency 70 – 84 % (depending on model)
Humidity (non condensing) 85 % rel max. (non condensing)
Switching frequency 50 kHz typ. (pulse width modulation)
Hold-up time 20 ms min.
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 3‘000 VAC
– Input/Case 1‘500 VAC
– Output/Case 500 VAC
– Output/Output
60–100 Watt multiple output models: 500 VAC (for all outputs of triple output models!)
35 Watt dual output models: outputs not isolated
Reliability /calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F, at +25°C typ., ground benign) >250’000 h
Electromagnetic compatibility – Conducted input RI suppression EN 55022, class B, FCC part 15, level B
(EMC), Emissions – Harmonic current emissions IEC/EN 61000-3-2, class D (TXL 120/150/220)
IEC/EN 61000-3-2, class A (others)
– Flicker IEC/EN 61000-3-3
Electromagnetic compatibility – Electrostatic discharge ESD IEC/EN 61000-4-2 4 kV / 8 kV
(EMC), Immunity – RF field immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-3 3 V/m
– Electrical fast transients/burst immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-4 1 kV
– Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 1 kV / 2 kV
– Conducted RF IEC/EN 61000-4-6 3 V/m
– Magnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-8 3 A/m
– Voltage dip IEC/EN 61000-4-11
Safety standards UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1 2nd edition
Safety approvals – UL/cUL www.ul.com -> certifications -> File: e188913
– CB report TXL 015 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl015-cb.pdf
TXL 025 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl025-cb.pdf
TXL 035 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl035-cb.pdf
TXL 060/070 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl060-cb.pdf
TXL 100 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl100-cb.pdf
TXL 150 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl150-cb.pdf
TXL 230 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl230-cb.pdf
TXL 350 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl350-cb.pdf
TXL 750 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl750-cb.pdf
TXL 1000 models: www.tracopower.com/products/txl1000-cb.pdf
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/txl-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
Casing material TXL 025/035 nickel plated steel (chassis & cover)
TXL 50/60/70/100 aluminium (chassis), nickel plated steel (cover)
others aluminium (chassis & cover)
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
http://www.tracopower.com Page 5 of 11
Case Dimensions
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
82
10 max. 99
(0.39 max.)
(3.90)
55 (2.17) 23.5
(0.93)
45 (1.77)
74 (2.91) 7
(0.28)
17.5
(0.69)
35
(1. 38)
(3.23)
3
1
45
6
2
2 x M3 THD
(bottom) Top view
2x M3 THD
Case C
Case D
Weight: 0.19 kg (6.7 oz)
Weight: 0.3 kg (10 oz)
single dual
1 AC L AC L
2 AC N AC N
3 AC FG AC FG
4 –Vout Common
5 +Vout Vout 1
6 No con. Vout 2
Connection
Max mounting screw penetration: 2.0 mm (0.08)
LN
Vout
2x M3 THD
14 max. 79
(0.55 max.)
(3.11)
55 11
(2.17) (0.43)
65 (2.56) 3
(0.12)
14.5
(0.57)
28.5
(1.12)
51
(2.0 1)
25.5
(1.0) Top view
2 x M3 THD
(bottom)
Case B
LN
Vout
2x M3 THD
14 max. 62
(0.55 max.)
(2.44)
39.1 14.7
(1.54) (0.58)
11.5
(0.45)
15.1
(0.59)
28.0
(1.10)
51
(2.0 1)
25.25
(0.99)
Top view
2 x M3 THD
(bottom)
+
39.1
(1.54)
Weight: 0.13 kg (4.6 oz)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 6 of 11
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Case E
10 max. 159
(0.39 max.)
(6.26)
32
(1.26)
78 57
(3.07) (0.95)
118 19
(4.65 ) (0.75)
18
(0.71)
19
(0.75)
38
(1.50)
95
(3.74)
1234567
123456789
Dual & Triple
output models
Single
output
Top view
2 x M3 THD
(bottom)
10
(0.39)
3 x M3 THD
Case J
10 max. 198
(0.39 max.)
(7.80)
9
(0.35)
80 (3.15)
120 (4.72)
4 x M3 THD
(bottom)
1234567
123456789
Dual & Triple
output models
Single
output
158 (6.22) 20
(0.79)
18
(0.71)
19
(0.75)
10
(0.39)
38
(1.50)
95
(3.74)
16.5
(0.45)
Top view
3 x M3 THD
Single Dual Triple
1 AC L AC L AC L
2 AC N AC N AC N
3 AC FG AC FG AC FG
4 –Vout No con. +Vout 3*
5 –Vout No con –Vout 3*
6 +Vout –Vout 1 –Vout 1
7 +Vout +Vout 1 +Vout 1
8 – –Vout 2 –Vout 2
9 – +Vout 2 +Vout 2
Connection
Case Dimensions
Weight: 0.7 kg (25 oz)
Weight: 0.8 kg (28 oz)
Single Dual Triple
1 AC L AC L AC L
2 AC N AC N AC N
3 AC FG AC FG AC FG
4 –Vout No con. +Vout 3*
5 –Vout No con –Vout 3*
6 +Vout –Vout 1 –Vout 1
7 +Vout +Vout 1 +Vout 1
8 – –Vout 2 –Vout 2
9 – +Vout 2 +Vout 2
Connection
Max mounting screw penetration: 3.0 mm (0.12)
* Opposite polarity for TXL 060-0534TI
* Opposite polarity for TXL 100-0534TI
http://www.tracopower.com Page 7 of 11
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Case Dimensions
Case L
13 max. 198
(0.51 max.)
(7.83)
50
(1.97 )
99 (3.90)
10
(0.39)
28
(1.10)
79 (3.11)
10
(0.39)
168 (6.61)
Vout
L
N
++
49.5
(1.95) 2 x M4 thread
(bottom)
65 (2.56) 63 (2.48)
117 (4.61) 56
25
(0.98)
12.5
(0.49)
(2.20)
11.5
(0.45)
(0.83)
21
(0.49)
12.5
176.5 (6.95)
6 x M4 THD
4 x M3 THD
(bottom)
Top view
Weight: 0.89 kg (31 oz)
4x TXL-CMB chassis mount brackets included in shipment Max mounting screw penetration: 3.0 mm (0.12)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 8 of 11
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Outline Dimensions
99 (3.9)
45
(1.77)
Vout
L
N
++
12 max. 198
(0.47 max.)
(7.8)
117 (4.61) 56
25
(0.98)
12.5
(0.49)
(2.20)
11.5
(0.45)
(0.83)
21
(0.49)
12.5
176.5 (6.95)
V adj.
RC
RS
+--+
65
(2.56)
10
(0.39)
168 (6.61)
63
(2.48)
6 x M4 THD
air flow
10
(0.39)
28
(1.10)
79 (3.11)
49.5
(1.95)
2 x M4 THD
(bottom)
4 x M3 THD
(bottom)
Top View
115 (4.53)
50
(1.97 )
12 max. 212
(0.47 max.)
(8.35)
Vout
L
N
+++
7
(0.28)
177.5 (6.99)
87.5 (3.44)
10
(0.39)
95 (3.74)
54.5
(2.15)
29.5
(1.16)
150 (5.91)
50
(1.97)
32.5
(1.28)
4 x M4 THD
5 x M3 THD
(bottom)
(bottom)
29.5
(1.16)
150 ±0.8
(5.91 ±0.03)
25 ±0.8
(0.98 ±0.03)
12.5
(0.49)
air flow
4 x M4 THD
Weight: 1.05 kg (37 oz)
Case N
Case O
Weight: 0.88 kg (30 oz)
Max mounting screw penetration: 3.0 mm (0.12)
RC Remote Control On/Off:
RC+/RC–: 0–0.7 V = On
3–10 V = Off.
RS Remote Sense
Can be open or connected to
the load under regard of polarity
Connector
4x TXL-CMB chassis mount brackets included in shipment
4x TXL-CMB chassis mount brackets included in shipment
http://www.tracopower.com Page 9 of 11
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Outline Dimensions
Case P
Weight: 3.5 kg (123 oz)
Max mounting screw penetration: 3.0 mm (0.12)
30 20 13
39 220 16
25 210 40
6 113 6 12.5
30 240 5
40 220 15
34.5 20 8.5
5
16.5 30 16.5
275
S/N LABEL
MODE L LABE L
63
125
6 (bottom)
6 (bottom) 113(bottom) 6
29(bottom) 240(bottom)
25
145
125
210 40
air flow
CN3 pin consideration:
Pin 1: Current sharing to interconnect up to 3 units at parallel operation
Max power = units x 0.9, max deviation of voltage adjustment among units =100mV
Pin 2: Power Good Signal. TTL (3mA max.): 0 – 1 VDC = DC-Off, 3.3 – 5.6 VDC = DC-OK
Pin 3/4: Remote sense to be connected at load side under regard of polarity
Pin 5/6: Remote control input RC1& RC2
Pin 7/8 Auxillary output 12VDC/0.1A for remote control function
PSU PSU
+v +v +v -v -v -v
PSU
+V -V
LOAD
RS-(PIN4)
RS+(PIN3)
CN3
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
CN3
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
CN3
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
+v +v +v -v -v -v +v +v +v -v -v -v
CN3
Parallel operation:
AUX
RC2
GND
12V
SW
RC1
2K
330
AUX
RC2
RC1
GND
5V
SW
12V
470
2K
330
AUX
RC2
GND
12V
SW
RC1
2K
330
Using internal 12V auxiliary output Using internal 12V auxiliary output Using external voltage
Remote On/Off function:
Mating connector:
Housing: HRS DF11-08DS-2C
Terminal: HRS DF11-EP22SCB
Mating cable with 500mm flyind leeds
included!
TXL-CMB chassis mount bracket set
(4pcs) included in shipment. For dimensions
see page 11.
Enclosed Power Supplies
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Page 10 of 11
Outline Dimensions
Specifications can be changed any time without notice.
Case Q
Vadj
+
(10.70)
CN15
LED 1
CN14
−V
+V
+S
5V_AUX
DC_OK
CS
−S
GND
ON/OFF
GND
CN15
N
L
PE
2 4
6 8
1 3 5 7
(bottom)
271.7
3 x M4 THD
20.5
25.4
17.3
7.8
127.0 40.6
295.0 (11.61)
3 x M4 THD
239.5 34.5
18.5 90.0
68.0
air flow
air flow
(9.43)
(1.36)
(XXX)
(both sides)
(0.81)
(3.54)
(0.73)
(5.00)
(XXX)
(0.31) (1.00)
(2.68)
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances ±0.8 (±0.03)
Monting hole pich tolerances ±0.5 (±0.02)
CN14 Jumper on CN14 disables the Remote Off function
CN15 On/Off (pin 4 & 6): Contact closed = Power On, Contact open = Power Off
CN15 –S/+S (pin 1 & 2): Remote sense to be connected at load side under regard
of polarity
CN15 5V Aux (pin 3 & 8): Auxiliary output 5 VDC / 0.5 A
CN15 DC–OK (pin 5 & 8): TTL signal (2.2 mA max.): 0 – 1 VDC = DC–Off, 3.3 – 5.6 VDC = DC–OK
CN15 CS (pin 7): Current Sharing to interconnect up to 4 units at parallel operation
Max power = units x 0.9, max deviation of voltage adjustment among units =100mV
Parallel operation:
8
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
-V +V -V +V -V +V
LOAD
CN15 PS1 CN15 PS2 CN15 PS3
CS CS CS
-S +S -S +S -S +S
+S
-S
Caution! Max mounting screw penetration: 3.0 mm (0.12)
Weight: 1.9 kg (67 oz)
TXL-CMB1 chassis mount bracket set (4pcs) included in shipment. For
dimensions see page 11.
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TXL Series 15–1000 Watt
Page 11 of 11
Rev. November 15. 2013
Chassi Mount Brackets
17.5
5.6
15.0
16.8
7.5 7.5
15.0
12.5 5.0
Ø4.2
R0.5
7.5 7.5
5.0 10.0
4x7
R1.0
Note:
1. Material: S.P.C.C.
2. Thickness: 0.8mm
3. Treatment: Nickel plated
4. Unit: mm
The chassi mount brackets are bypacked along with the following models:
Order code: TXL-CMB
contains 4pcs brackets and screws
For series models:
• TXL 150; Case L
• TXL 230; Case N
• TXL 350; Case O
• TXL 750; Case P
Order code: TXL-CMB1
contains 4pcs brackets and screws
For series models:
• TXL 1000; Case Q
5.0
4x7
R1.0
6.9 6.9
6.9
Ø4.2
7.8 12.7 4.9
13.8 15.0
2.8
11.2 5.6 8.6
25.4
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 3
DC/DC Converters
TEL 5 Series, 5 Watt
Features
◆ Wide 2:1 input range
◆ Cost efficient SMD-design
◆ High power density
◆ High efficiency up to 86%
◆ Regulated outputs
◆ I/O isolation 1’500 VDC
◆ Indefinite short-circuit protection
24-pin DIP with industry standard pinout
◆ High reliability, MTBF >1 Mio. h
◆ Lead free design, RoHS compliant
◆ 3-year product warranty
The TEL 5 Series is a range of DC/DC-converter modules with wide input range
of 2:1. State of the art SMD-technology guarantees a product with very high reliability
and excellent cost /performance ratio. High efficiency allows an operating
temperature range of –40°C to +85°C at full load. This product series provides an
economical solution for many cost critical applications in industrial and consumer
electronics.
Ordercode Input voltage range Output voltage Output current max. Efficiency typ.
TEL 5-1210 3.3 VDC 1200 mA 77 %
TEL 5-1211
9 – 18 VDC
5 VDC 1000 mA 81 %
TEL 5-1212
(nominal 12 VDC)
12 VDC 500 mA 84 %
TEL 5-1222 ±12 VDC ±250 mA 84 %
TEL 5-1223 ±15 VDC ±200 mA 84 %
TEL 5-2410 3.3 VDC 1200 mA 79 %
TEL 5-2411
18 – 36 VDC
5 VDC 1000 mA 83 %
TEL 5-2412
(nominal 24 VDC)
12 VDC 500 mA 86 %
TEL 5-2422 ±12 VDC ±250 mA 86 %
TEL 5-2423 ±15 VDC ±200 mA 86 %
Models
UL 60950-1
CB
Scheme
http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 3
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Input Specifications
Input current no load /full load 12 Vin models: 20 mA / 590 mA typ.
24 Vin models: 5 mA / 290 mA typ.
Start-up voltage / 12 Vin models: 8.0 VDC / 8.0 VDC
under voltage shut down 24 Vin models: 16.0 VDC / 16.0 VDC
Surge voltage (1 sec. max.) 12 Vin models: 25 V max.
24 Vin models: 50 V max.
Reverse voltage protection 1.0 A max.
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±1 %
Regulation – Input variation Vin min. to Vin max. 0.3 % max.
– Load variation 20 – 100 %
single output models 1 % max
dual output models balanced load 2 % max.
Ripple and noise (20 MHz Bandwidth) 75 mVpk-pk max.
Temperature coefficient ±0.02 %/K
Output current limitation >120 % of Iout max., constant current
Short circuit protection continuous (automatic recovery)
Capacitive load single output models: 6800 μF max.
dual output models: 1000 μF max. (each output)
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –40°C to +85°C
– Case temperature +90°C
– Storage –40°C to +125°C
Derating (convection cooling) 3.3 %/K above 70°C
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel H max.
Reliability, calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F at +25°C, ground benign) >1 Mio. h
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 1’500 VDC
Isolation capacitance – Input/Output 380 pF typ.
Isolation resistance – Input/Output (500 VDC) >1‘000 M Ohm
Switching frequency 300 kHz typ.
Safety standards UL/cUL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1
Safety approvals – CB report (SIQ) (IEC/EN 60950-1) www.tracopower.com/products/tel5-cb.pdf
– CSA certification (UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1-03) CSA File No. 226037
http://directories.csa-international.org
www.tracopower.com/products/tel5-csa.pdf
DC/DC Converters
TEL 5 Series 5 Watt
Page 3 of 3
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
Physical Specifications
Casing material non conductive plastic (UL 94V-0 rated)
Weight 17 g (0.60 oz)
Soldering temperature max. 265°C / 10 sec.
Outline Dimensions mm (inches)
5.0
(0.2)
4.5 ± 0.5 22.86 (0.9) 20.3 ± 0.5
2.54
32 ± 0.5 (1.25 ± 0.02)
10.2 ± 0.5
(0.4 ± 0.02)
15.24
(0.6)
9 11
23 22
2 3
16 14
Bottom view
15.24 (0.6) 5.08
2.4 ± 0.5
(0.8 ± 0.02)
(0.1 ± 0.02) (0.18 ± 0.02)
(0.1) (0.2)
Pin Single Dual
2 –Vin (GND) –Vin (GND)
3 –Vin (GND) –Vin (GND)
9 No pin Common
11 No con. –Vout
14 +Vout +Vout
16 –Vout Common
22 +Vin (Vcc) +Vin (Vcc)
23 +Vin (Vcc) +Vin (Vcc)
Pin-Out
Pin diameter ø 0.5 ±0.05 (0.02 ±0.002)
Tolerances ±0.5 (±0.02)
DC/DC Converters
TEL 5 Series 5 Watt
Rev. April 19. 2013
http://www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TMLM Series, 4 to 20 Watt
The TMLM Series switching power supplies, offer highest power density in a fully
encapsulated module which can be soldered directly on to PCBs. This feature makes
these modules an ideal solution for all space critical applications in commercial and
industrial electronic equipment. International safety approvals qualify the product
for worldwide markets. SMD-technology and high efficiency guarantees a high reliability
of these Power Supplies.
Features
◆ AC/DC power modules for PCB mounting
◆ Highest power density
◆ Fully encapsulated plastic case
◆ Universal input 90–264 VAC, 47–440 Hz
◆ High efficiency
◆ EMI meets EN 55022, class B and
FCC, level B
◆ Low ripple and noise
◆ Short circuit and overload protection
◆ 3-year product warranty
Order Code Output Power max. Output 1 Output 2 Efficiency
TMLM 04103 4.0 Watt 3.3 VDC / 1200 mA 68 %
TMLM 04105 4.0 Watt 5.0 VDC / 800 mA 72 %
TMLM 04109 4.0 Watt 9.0 VDC / 444 mA 75 %
TMLM 04112 4.0 Watt 12 VDC / 333 mA 76 %
TMLM 04115 4.0 Watt 15 VDC / 267 mA 76 %
TMLM 04124 4.0 Watt 24 VDC / 167 mA 77 %
TMLM 04253 3.5 Watt +5.0 VDC / 600 mA +3.3 VDC / 150 mA 72 %
TMLM 04225 3.6 Watt +12 VDC / 250 mA +5.0 VDC / 120 mA 75 %
TMLM 05103 4.1 Watt 3.3 VDC / 1250 mA 68 %
TMLM 05105 5 Watt 5.0 VDC / 1000 mA 71 %
TMLM 05112 5 Watt 12 VDC / 420 mA 75 %
TMLM 05115 5 Watt 15 VDC / 333 mA 75 %
TMLM 05124 5.5 Watt 24 VDC / 230 mA 77 %
TMLM 10103 8.2 Watt 3.3 VDC / 2500 mA 74 %
TMLM 10105 10 Watt 5.0 VDC / 2000 mA 79 %
TMLM 10112 10 Watt 12 VDC / 833 mA 82 %
TMLM 10115 10 Watt 15 VDC / 667 mA 78 %
TMLM 10124 10 Watt 24 VDC / 417 mA 80 %
TMLM 20103 12 Watt 3.3 VDC / 3600 mA 74 %
TMLM 20105 18 Watt 5.0 VDC / 3600 mA 78 %
TMLM 20112 20 Watt 12 VDC / 1660 mA 82 %
TMLM 20115 20 Watt 15 VDC / 1330 mA 83 %
TMLM 20124 20 Watt 24 VDC / 833 mA 83 %
Models
UL 60950-1
Page 1 of 4
http://www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TMLM Series 4 to 20 Watt
Input Specifications
Input voltage – Nominal 100 – 240 VAC
– Range 90 – 264 VAC (universal input)
– DC range 120 – 370 VDC
Input frequency 47 – 440 Hz
Input current at full load (115 VAC / 230 VAC) TMLM 04 models: 95 mA / 65 mA typ.
TMLM 05 models: 110 mA / 70 mA typ.
TMLM 10 models: 220 mA / 150 mA typ.
TMLM 20 models: 385 mA / 250 mA typ.
Inrush current (<2 ms) (115 VAC / 230 VAC) TMLM 04 models: 15 A max / 25 A max.
TMLM 05 & TMLM 10 models: 10 A max / 20 A max.
TMLM 20 models: 20 A max / 40 A max.
External input fuse required (recommended value) 1.5 A slow blow type
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±2 %
Regulation – Input variation 0.3 % max. (0.5% max. for TMLM 20 models,
3.0 % max for output 2)
– Load variation TMLM 04; 3.3 VDC models: 1.0 % max. (0–100% load)
TMLM 04 other models output 1: 0.5 % max. (0–100% load)
TMLM 04 output 2: 5.0 % max. (25–100% load)
TMLM 05 & TMLM 10 models: 0.5 % max. (5–100% load)
TMLM 20 models: 1.0 % max. (5–100% load)
Minimum load 0 % (25% for dual output models)
operation at 0-load condition will not
damage these power supplies, however,
they
may not meet all listed specifications
Ripple and noise (20 MHz bandwidth) TMLM 04; 3.3 VDC models: <250 mV
TMLM 04; 5.0 VDC models: <200 mV
TMLM 04; other models: <100 mV
TMLM 05 & TMLM 10; 3.3 & 5.0 VDC models: <130 mV
TMLM 05 & TMLM 10; 12 & 15 VDC models: <210 mV
TMLM 05 & TMLM 10; 24 VDC models: <280 mV
TMLM 20; 3.3 & 5.0 VDC models: <200 mV
TMLM 20; 12 VDC model: <240 mV
TMLM 20; 15 VDC model: <300 mV
TMLM 20; 24 VDC model: <480 mV
Current limitation 120 – 180 % fold back
Short circuit protection indefinite (automatic recovery)
Overvoltage protection by Zehner diode (main output only) 120 % of Vout typ.
Page 2 of 4
Max. capacitive load [μF] Model series
Output: TMLM 04 TMLM 05 TMLM 10 TMLM 20
Single output
models:
3.3 VDC 14‘000 13‘800 75‘000 4‘500
5.0 VDC 8‘000 6‘000 40‘000 3‘500
9.0 VDC 2‘400 - - -
12 VDC 1‘000 1‘400 8‘500 1‘800
15 VDC 700 1‘000 3‘500 1‘500
24 VDC 220 170 1‘200 1‘200
Dual output
models:
5.0 VDC / 3.3 VDC 5‘600 / 4‘700 - - -
12 VDC / 5.0 VDC 330 / 4‘700 - - -
http://www.tracopower.com Page 3 of 4
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –25°C to +60°C
– Storage (non operating) –40°C to +85°C
Derating 3.75 %/K above +50°C
TMLM 20 models: 2.5 %/K above +40°C
Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/K
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel max.
Switching frequency approx. 100 kHz
Hold-up time (115 VAC / 230 VAC) TMLM 20 models: 12 ms / 56 ms
other models: 15 ms min.
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/ Output 3‘000 VAC
Leakage current TMLM 04 models: 0.25 mA max.
TMLM 05 models: 0.75 mA max.
TMLM 10 models: 0.25 mA max.
TMLM 20 models: tba.
Reliability /calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F, at +25°C, ground benign) >330’000 h
TMLM 20 models: >250’000 h
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), emissions EN 55022, class B, FCC part 15, level B
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005
Degree of protection class II to IEC/EN 60536
Safety standards UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1
Safety approvals – UL/cUL 60950-1 www.ul.com -> certifications -> File e188913
– CB test certificate IEC 60950-1 for 4W models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmlm04-cb.pdf
– CB test certificate IEC 60950-1 for other models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmlm-cb.pdf
Environment – Vibration acc. IEC 60068-2-6; 3 axes, sine sweep, 10-55 Hz, 1g, 1oct/min.
– Shock acc. IEC 60068-2-27 20 G (3 directions each 3 times)
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/tmlm-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
Casing material Plastic resin with fiberglass (UL 94V-0 rated)
TMLM 04 Models:
21.5 (0.85)
36.5 (1.44)
2 x 3.75
(2 x 0.15)
3.75
(0.15)
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
27.0 (1.06)
3.0 21.0 (0.83)
(0.12)
17.1
(0.67)
4.0
(0.16) Bottom view
Pin-Out
Weight: 26 g (0.92 oz)
Pin diameter: 0.5 (0.02) (ntc = not to connect)
Outline Dimensions
Pin Single Dual
1 ntc ntc
2 +Vout Vout 1
3 –Vout Common
4 ntc Vout 2
5 AC (L) AC (L)
6 AC (N) AC (N)
7 ntc ntc
AC/DC Power Modules
TMLM Series 4 to 20 Watt
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TMLM Series 4 to 20 Watt
Weight: 30 g (1.06 oz)
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
Rev. September 27. 2013
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Pin pitch tolerance: ±0.3 (±0.012)
Max mounting screw penetration: 3.0 mm (0.12)
TMLM 10 Models:
Weight: 54 g (1.91 oz)
Page 4 of 4
Outline Dimensions
AC
25.4 (1.00)
20.32 (0.80)
10.16
(0.40)
Bottom view
2.6
(0.81)
2.54
(0.10)
45.72 (1.80)
50.8 (2.00)
AC +Vout
– Vout
15.16
(0.59)
8.0
(0.31)
23.5 (0.93) 8.0
(0.31)
AC
27.2 (1.07)
20.32 (0.80)
10.16
(0.40)
Bottom view
3.5
(0.13)
3.4
(0.13)
45.72 (1.80)
52.4 (2.06)
AC
+Vout
– Vout
M3 THD
13.65
(0.54)
4.50
(0.18)
AC
27.2 (1.07)
20.32 (0.80)
10.16
(0.40)
Bottom view 3.5
(0.13)
3.4
(0.13)
45.72 (1.80)
52.4 (2.06)
AC
+Vout
– Vout 23.5 (0.93) 8
(0.31)
M3 THD
13.65
(0.54)
4.50
(0.18)
TMLM 20 Models:
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
TMLM 05 Models:
Weight: 59 g (2.08 oz)
http://www.tracopower.com
Features
◆ Ultra compact, low profile plastic casing
◆ Fully encapsulated (pollution/dust)
◆ Single-, dual- and triple output models
◆ 2 package versions:
- Screw terminal block for chassis mount
- Solder pins for direct PCB mount
◆ DIN-rail mount adaptor (optional)
◆ Universal input 85-264 VAC, 47-440 Hz
◆ Protection class ll
◆ IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 approval, CB-report
◆ Over-temperature protection
◆ Protection against short circuit
and oveload
◆ 3-year product warranty
The TMP & TMPM series AC/DC Power Modules is a new range of fully encapsulated
power supplies in an ultra-compact casing. They feature easy chassis mounting
with screw terminal block connection or direct PCB mounting with solder pins.
Full compliance with International safety standards for industrial control equipment
qualifies the products for worldwide markets.
These power supplies offer a cost effective solution for many space critical applications
in commercial and industrial electronic equipment and for polluted and dusty
environment.
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series, 4 to 60 Watt
Page 1 of 9
15 to 60 Watt and multi output models see next page -->
CB
Scheme UL 60950-1 UL 508
Order code Output power max. Output Efficiency
PCB-mount with solder pins typ.
TMPM 04103 3.3 VDC / 1200 mA 70 %
TMPM 04105 5.0 VDC / 800 mA 72 %
TMPM 04109 9.0 VDC / 444 mA 75 %
TMPM 04112 4 W 12 VDC / 333 mA 76 %
TMPM 04115 15 VDC / 267 mA 76 %
TMPM 04124 24 VDC / 167 mA 77 %
TMP 07103 4.6 W 3.3 VDC / 1400 mA 70 %
TMP 07105 5.0 VDC / 1400 mA 73 %
TMP 07112 7 W 12 VDC / 583 mA 78 %
TMP 07115 15 VDC / 466 mA 78 %
TMP 07124 24 VDC / 291 mA 78 %
TMPM 10103 8.3 W 3.3 VDC / 2500 mA 70 %
TMPM 10105 5.0 VDC / 2000 mA 72 %
TMPM 10112 10 W 12 VDC / 833 mA 76 %
TMPM 10115 15 VDC / 667 mA 75 %
TMPM 10124 24 VDC / 417 mA 72 %
TMP 10103 6.6 W 3.3 VDC / 2000 mA 70 %
TMP 10105 5.0 VDC / 2000 mA 73 %
TMP 10112 10 W 12 VDC / 833 mA 76 %
TMP 10115 15 VDC / 666 mA 76 %
TMP 10124 24 VDC / 416 mA 76 %
Single Output Models 4 to 10 Watt
Low profile Small footprint
http://www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
Page 2 of 9
Order code Output power max. Output Efficiency
PCB-mount with solder pins Chassis mount, screw
terminal typ.
TMP 15105 TMP 15105C 5 VDC / 3000 mA 75 %
TMP 15112 TMP 15112C 12 VDC / 1250 mA 79 %
TMP 15115 TMP 15115C 15 W 15 VDC / 1000 mA 79 %
TMP 15124 TMP 15124C 24 VDC / 625 mA 79 %
TMP 15148 TMP 15148C 48 VDC / 310 mA 79 %
TMP 30105 TMP 30105C 5 VDC / 6000 mA 78 %
TMP 30112 TMP 30112C 12 VDC / 2500 mA 80 %
TMP 30115 TMP 30115C 30 W 15 VDC / 2000 mA 80 %
TMP 30124 TMP 30124C 24 VDC / 1250 mA 80 %
TMP 30148 TMP 30148C 48 VDC / 625 mA 80 %
TMP 60105 TMP 60105C 51 W 5.1 VDC / 10‘000 mA 79 %
TMP 60112 TMP 60112C 12 VDC / 5000 mA 82 %
TMP 60115 TMP 60115C 15 VDC / 4000 mA 83 %
TMP 60124 TMP 60124C 60 W 24 VDC / 2500 mA 84 %
TMP 60136 TMP 60136C 36 VDC / 1665 mA 84 %
TMP 60148 TMP 60148C 48 VDC / 1250 mA 84 %
Single Output Models 15 to 60 Watt
Peak current, total power not to exceede 30 Watt: 1) 133 %
2) 150 %
3) 200 %
Order code Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Eff.
PCB-mount Chassis mount power typ.
Models with common ground
TMPM 04212 +12 VDC / 166 mA –12 VDC / 166 mA 77 %
TMPM 04215
4 W
+15 VDC / 133 mA –15 VDC / 133 mA 77 %
TMPM 04253 +5.0 VDC / 600 mA +3.3 VDC / 150 mA 72 %
TMPM 04225 +12 VDC / 250 mA +5.0 VDC / 120 mA 75 %
TMP 10212
10 W
+12 VDC / 380 mA –12 VDC / 380 mA 77 %
TMP 10215 +15 VDC / 300 mA –15 VDC / 300 mA 77 %
TMP 15212 TMP 15212C
15 W
+12 VDC / 650 mA –12 VDC / 650 mA 79 %
TMP 15215 TMP 15215C +15 VDC / 500 mA –15 VDC / 500 mA 79 %
TMP 30212 TMP 30212C
30 W
+12 VDC / 1300 mA –12 VDC / 1300 mA 80 %
TMP 30215 TMP 30215C +15 VDC / 1000 mA –15 VDC / 1000 mA 80 %
Models with output 1 isolated from output 2/3 (floating)
TMP 15252 TMP 15252C 5.0 VDC / 1500 mA 12 VDC / 625 mA 72 %
TMP 15512 TMP 15512C 15 W 5.0 VDC / 2000 mA +12 VDC / 200 mA –12 VDC / 200 mA 74 %
TMP 15515 TMP 15515C 5.0 VDC / 2000 mA +15 VDC / 150 mA –15 VDC / 150 mA 74 %
TMP 30252 TMP 30252C 5.0 VDC / 3000 mA2) 12 VDC /1250 mA2) 76 %
TMP 30512 TMP 30512C 5.0 VDC / 3000 mA2) +12 VDC / 600 mA2) –12 VDC / 600 mA2) 76 %
TMP 30515 TMP 30515C
30 W
5.0 VDC / 3000 mA2) +15 VDC / 500 mA2) –15 VDC / 500 mA2) 76 %
TMP 30522 TMP 30522C 5.0 VDC / 3000 mA2) +12 VDC / 1000 mA2) –12 VDC / 250 mA3) 76 %
TMP 30316 TMP 30316C 3.3 VDC / 4000 mA1) +5.0 VDC / 1500 mA1) +12 VDC / 250 mA3) 71 %
TMP 30317 TMP 30317C 5.0 VDC / 4500 mA1) +3.3 VDC / 1000 mA2) +12 VDC / 250 mA3) 71 %
Multi Output Models 4 to 30 Watt
http://www.tracopower.com
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
Page 3 of 9
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
Max. capacitive load [μF] Model series
Output: TMPM 04 TMP 07 TMPM 10 TMP 10 TMP 15 TMP 30 TMP 60
Single output
models:
3.3 VDC 1200 2200 2200 3900 - - -
5.0 / 5.1 VDC 800 2200 2200 3300 3900 8000 8000
9.0 VDC 440 - - - - - -
12 / 15 VDC 260 1000 1000 2200 2200 3900 3900
24 VDC 160 680 680 1000 1000 1500 1500
36 VDC - - - - - - 1000
48 VDC - - - - 680 1000 800
Dual output
models:
3.3 / 5.0 VDC 4700 - - - 2000 3900 -
+12 / –12 / +15 / –15 VDC 260 - - 1000 1500 1500 -
Triple output
models:
3.3 / 5.0 VDC - - - - 2200 2200 -
+12 / –12 / +15 / –15 VDC - - - - 1500 1500 -
Input Specifications
Input voltage – nominal 100 – 240 VAC
– AC range (universal input) 85 – 264 VAC
– DC range 120 – 370 VDC
Input frequency – nominal 50 / 60 Hz
– range 4 – 30 W models: 47 – 440 Hz
60 W models: 47 – 63 Hz
Input current at full load – 115 VAC / 230 VAC input 4 W models: 80 mA / 55 mA typ.
7 W models: 150 mA / 100 mA typ.
10 W models: 200 mA / 130 mA typ.
15 W models: 300 mA / 190 mA typ.
30 W models: 550 mA / 330 mA typ.
60 W models: 1050 mA / 670 mA typ.
External input fuse required (recommended value) 4 W models: 1.0 A slow blow
7 – 15 W models: 2.0 A slow blow
30 W models: 3.5 A slow blow
60 W models: 6.3 A slow blow
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±2 % max.
Regulation – Input variation Output 1 1 % max.
– Input variation Output 2/3 3 % max.
– Load variation TMPM 04103 model (0–100%): 1.5 % max.
single and floating outputs (10–100%): 1 % max. (0–100% for TMPM 04 models)
common ground outputs balanced load (10–100%): 2.5 % max.
common ground outputs unbalanced load (20/90%): 5.0 % max.
Minimum load TMPM 04 single and sym.dual models: not required
TMPM 04 asym. dual models: 25% per output
single and dual output models: 10 % of rated max. current
triple output models main output: 10 % of rated max. current
triple output models auxiliary outputs: 20 % of rated max. current
operation at lower load condition will not
damage these power supplies, however,
they
may not meet all listed specifications.
Ripple and noise (20MHz bandwidth) 3.3 VDC & 5.0 VDC outputs: 1.8 % of Vout [mVp-p]
other outputs: 1.0 % of Vout [mVp-p]
Overload protection by current limit 105 % min. of Inom, fold back, automatic
recovery (long term overload condition may
cause damage to the power supply)
Overvoltage protection by Zehner diode (main output only) 120 % of Vout typ.
Start-up time 400 ms typ.
Hold-up time 20 ms typ.
http://www.tracopower.com Page 4 of 9
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating TMPM 04 models: –25°C to +60°C (no derating)
TMP 10 models: –25°C to +50°C (no derating)
other models: –25°C to +70°C (with derating)
– Storage (non-operating) –40°C to +85°C
Power derating 3.3 %/K above +50°C to +65°C
5.0 %/K above +65°C to +70°C
(no derating aproved for TMPM04 and TMP10 models)
Over temperature protection at 90°C (automatic recovery at 67°C)
Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/K
Humidity (non-condensing) 95 % rel. H max.
Switching frequency 100 kHz typ. fixed
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 3‘000 VAC
Isolation resistance – Input/Output 100 MOhm (at 500 VDC)
Altitude during operation TMP 10, TMPM 04 & 10, : 2‘000 m max. (6’560 ft) approved
other models: 3‘000 m max. (9‘840 ft) approved
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Emissions EN 61000-6-3: 2007
EN 61204-3: 2000, class A
EN 55022, level B, FCC Part 15 level B
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005
EN 61204-3: 2000, class A
– Electrostatic discharge ESD EN 61000-4-2 8 kV / 4 kV, criteria B
– RF field susceptibility EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m, criteria A
– Electrical fast transient / burst immunity input EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV, criteria B
– Electrical fast transient / burst immunity output EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV, criteria B
– Surge immunity line – neutral EN 61000-4-5, ±1 kV, criteria B
– Surge immunity output EN 61000-4-5 ±0.5 kV, criteria B
– Immunity to conducted RF disturbances EN 61000-4-6 10 V, criteria B
– Mains voltage dips and interruptions EN 61000-4-11 30 % 10 ms, criteria B
60 % 100 ms, criteria C
95 % 5000 ms, criteria C
EMC test certificates www.tracopower.com/products/tmp-emc.pdf
Protection class II to IEC/EN 60536
Safety standards – Information technology equipment IEC/EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1
– Industrial control equipment UL/cUL 508 (chassis mount single and symetric
dual output models only)
Safety approvals – CB certificate for IEC 60950-1 TMPM 04 models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmpm04-cb.pdf
TMP 07 models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmp07-cb.pdf
TMP 10 models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmp10-cb.pdf
TMPM 10 models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmpm10-cb.pdf
TMP 15 models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmp15-cb.pdf
TMP 30 single output models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmp30-cb.pdf
TMP 30 dual / triple output models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmp30-cb2.pdf
TMP 60 models: www.tracopower.com/products/tmp60-cb.pdf
– UL approvals for UL 60950-1 www.ul.com -> certifications -> File: e188913
– UL approval for UL 508 (chassis mount models only) www.ul.com -> certifications -> File: e322109
Reliability /calculated MTBF TMP 07, TMPM 04 & 10 models: >330‘000 h
(MIL-HDBK-217F, at +25°C, ground benign) TMP 10 models: >300‘000 h
TMP 15 models: >280‘000 h
TMP 30 models: >250‘000 h
TMP 60 models: >125‘000 h
Casing material plastic resin + fiberglass (UL 94V-0 rated)
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/tmp-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU
http://www.tracopower.com Page 5 of 9
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
Outline Dimensions
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
TMP 07 models:
TMP 10 models:
Weight: 44 g (1.55 oz)
Dimensions in [mm], ( ) = Inches
Case tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Pin pich tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.01)
19.3
0.5 6.0
5.0
(0.02)
(0.24)
(0.76)
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
2 1
4 3
10.16
25.4
20.32
2.54
45.72
50.80
(0.40)
(1.00)
(0.80)
(0.10)
Bottom view
(1.80)
(2.00)
2.54
(0.10)
Pin Single
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 +Vout
4 –Vout
Pinout
2 1
5 4 3
10.16 10.16
45.0
17.78
19.0
0.5 6.0
54.0
64.0
5.0
(0.40) (0.40)
(1.77)
(0.70) (0.02)
(0.24)
(0.75)
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
Bottom view
(2.13)
(2.52)
4.0
(0.16)
22.5 (0.89)
Pin Single Dual
1 AC (N) AC (N)
2 AC (L) AC (L)
3 –Vout Vout 2
4 ntc com.1/2
5 +Vout Vout 1
Pinout
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
Weight: 92 g (3.25 oz)
(ntc = not to connect)
TMPM 10 models:
23.5
0.7 10.0
5.0
(0.03)
(0.39)
(0.93)
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
2 1
4 3
10.16
27.2
20.32
3.45
45.72
52.4
(0.40)
(1.07)
(0.80)
(0.14)
Bottom view
(1.80)
(2.06)
3.35
(0.13)
Pin Single
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 +Vout
4 –Vout
Pinout
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
Weight: 54 g (1.90 oz)
7.50
(0.30)
Bottom view
14.00
(0.55)
2x3.75
(2x0.15)
3.75
(0.15)
36.5 (1.44)
27.0 (1.06)
3.00 21.00 (0.83)
(0.12)
7.50
(0.30)
25.25 (0.99)
17.1 (0.67) 4.0
(0.16)
1
2 3
4
5
6
7
TMPM 04 models:
Pin diameter: 0.5 (0.02)
Weight: 26 g (0.92 oz)
Pin Single Dual
1 ntc
2 ntc
3 +Vout Vout 1
4 –Vout com.1/2
5 ntc Vout 2
6 AC (N)
7 AC (L)
Pinout
(ntc = not to connect)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 6 of 9
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
Outline Dimensions
TMP 15 models for PCB mount:
TMP 15 models for chassis mount:
Dimensions in [mm], ( ) = Inches
Case tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Pin pich tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.01)
Mounting hole tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.02)
2 1
6 5 4
11.43
54.0
20.32
62.0
74.0
(0.45)
(2.13)
(0.80)
Bottom view
(2.44)
(2.91)
3
8.89
(0.35)
7
27.0 (1.06)
11.43
(0.45)
8.89
(0.35)
2 x M4 THD
19.9 (0.78) 19.9 (0.78)
40.0 (1.57)
6.0
(0.24)
19.3
0.5 6.0
5.0
(0.02)
(0.24)
(0.76)
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
Pin Single Dual
sym.
Dual
asym.
Triple
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 no pin Vout 3
4 –Vout Vout 2 –Vout 2 com.2/3
5 no pin com.1/2 +Vout 2 Vout 2
6 +Vout Vout 1 –Vout 1 –Vout 1
7 no pin +Vout 1 +Vout 1
Pin-Out
3 4 5 6 7
1 2
Top view
86.0
96.0
(3.39)
(3.78)
5.0
(0.20)
54.0 (2.13)
4.0
(0.16)
46.0 (1.81)
10.0 76.0 (2.99)
(0.39)
23.3 (0.92)
5.0
(0.20
11.8
(0.46)
4 x ø3.5
Pin Single Dual
sym.
Dual
asym.
Triple
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 ntc Vout 3
4 –Vout Vout 2 –Vout 2 com.2/3
5 ntc com.1/2 +Vout 2 Vout 2
6 +Vout Vout 1 –Vout 1 –Vout 1
7 ntc +Vout 1 +Vout 1
Connection
(ntc = not to connect)
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
Weight: 114 g (4.02 oz)
Weight: 162 g (5.71 oz)
Max Screw penetration: 5.5 (0.21)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 7 of 9
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
Outline Dimensions
TMP 30 models for PCB mount:
2 1
6 5 4
63.5
31.75
81.3
88.9
(2.50)
(1.25)
Bottom view
(3.20)
(3.50)
7 3
27.94 (1.10)
12.70
(0.50)
15.24
(0.60)
2 x M4 THD
27.5 (1.08)
3.8
(0.15)
5.0 (0.20)
27.65 (1.09)
12.70
(0.50)
15.24
(0.60)
27.94 (1.10)
21.5
0.5 6.0
5.0
(0.02)
(0.24)
(0.85)
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
Pin Single Dual sym. Dual asym. Triple
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 +Vout Vout 1 +Vout 2 Vout 2
4 no pin / ntc +Vout 1 +Vout 1
5 –Vout com.1/2 –Vout 2 com
2/3
6 no pin / ntc –Vout 1 –Vout 1
7 ntc Vout 2 ntc Vout 3
Pinout / Connection
(ntc = not to connect)
Dimensions in [mm], ( ) = Inches
Case tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Pin pich tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.01)
Mounting hole tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.02)
Pin diameter: 1.0 (0.04)
Weight: 177 g (6.24 oz)
TMP 30 models for chassis mount:
Weight: 191 g (6.74 oz)
3 4 5 6 7
1 2
Top view
100.0
112.0
(3.94)
(4.41)
6.0
(0.24)
63.8 (2.51)
6.9
(0.27)
50.0 (1.97)
4 x ø3.5
10.0 92.0 (3.62)
(0.39)
25.6 (1.01)
5.0
(0.20)
11.8
(0.46)
Max Screw penetration: 5.5 (0.21)
http://www.tracopower.com Page 8 of 9
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
Outline Dimensions
TMP 60 models for chassis mount:
(ntc = not to connect)
Dimensions in [mm], ( ) = Inches
Case tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
Mounting hole tolerance: ±0.25 (±0.02)
Weight: 357 g (12.95 oz)
Pin Single
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 ntc
4 +Vout
5 ntc
6 –Vout
7 ntc
Connection
3 4 5 6 7
1 2
Top view
100.0
112.0
(3.94)
(4.41)
6.0
(0.24)
67.8 (2.67)
8.9
(0.35)
50.0 (1.97)
4 x ø3.5
10.0 92.0 (3.62)
(0.39)
38.0 (1.50)
5.0
(0.20)
11.8
(0.46)
TMP 60 models for PCB mount:
2 1
6 4
67.5
33.75
81.3
89.0
(2.66)
(1.33)
Bottom view
(3.20)
(3.50)
7 3
27.94 (1.10)
12.70
(0.50)
15.24
(0.60)
2 x M4 THD
27.5 (1.08)
3.85
(0.15)
5.55 (0.219)
27.05 (1.065)
12.70
(0.50)
15.24
(0.60)
27.94 (1.10)
34.0
0.5 6.0
5.0
(0.02)
(0.24)
(1.34)
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
Weight: 345 g (12.17 oz)
Pin diameter: 2.0 (0.08)
Pin Single
1 AC (N)
2 AC (L)
3 no pin
4 +Vout
6 –Vout
7 no pin
Pinout
Max Screw penetration: 5.5 (0.21)
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com Page 9 of 9
AC/DC Power Modules
TMP & TMPM Series 4 to 60 Watt
DIN-Rail Mounting Kit
Order code For models
TMP-MK1 TMP 15xxxC
TMP-MK2 TMP 30xxxC & TMP 60xxxC
DIN-Rail Mounting Kit
Adapter for mounting on DIN-rails as per EN 50022-35 (snap-on mounting)
Specifications can be changed any time without notice.
Kit contains interface plate, DIN-rail clip and necessary screws.
Rev. June 19. 2013
http://www.farnell.com/datasheets/1749862.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 3
DC/DC Converters
TMR 2 Series, 2 Watt
Features
◆ Wide 2:1 input voltage range
◆ Compact SIP-8 package
◆ Small footprint
◆ Full SMD design
◆ Temperature range –40° to +85°C
◆ High efficiency
◆ Excellent load and line regulation
◆ Indefinite short-circuit protection
◆ I/O isolation 1000VDC
◆ Remote On/Off control
◆ Fully RoHS compliant
◆ 3-year product warranty
Ordercode Input voltage range Output voltage Output current max. Efficiency typ.
TMR 0510 3.3 VDC 500 mA 76 %
TMR 0511 5 VDC 400 mA 80 %
TMR 0512 4.5 – 9.0 VDC 12 VDC 165 mA 81 %
TMR 0521 (5 VDC nominal) ±5 VDC ±200 mA 79 %
TMR 0522 ±12 VDC ±85 mA 82 %
TMR 0523 ±15 VDC ±65 mA 81 %
TMR 1210 3.3 VDC 500 mA 77 %
TMR 1211 5 VDC 400 mA 81 %
TMR 1212 9 – 18 VDC 12 VDC 165 mA 83 %
TMR 1221 (12 VDC nominal) ±5 VDC ±200 mA 81 %
TMR 1222 ±12 VDC ±85 mA 83 %
TMR 1223 ±15 VDC ±65 mA 84 %
TMR 2410 3.3 VDC 500 mA 78 %
TMR 2411 5 VDC 400 mA 81 %
TMR 2412 18 – 36 VDC 12 VDC 165 mA 83 %
TMR 2421 (24 VDC nominal) ±5 VDC ±200 mA 80 %
TMR 2422 ±12 VDC ±85 mA 83 %
TMR 2423 ±15 VDC ±65 mA 82 %
TMR 4810 3.3 VDC 500 mA 76 %
TMR 4811 5 VDC 400 mA 78 %
TMR 4812 36 – 75 VDC 12 VDC 165 mA 83 %
TMR 4821 (48 VDC nominal) ±5 VDC ±200 mA 80 %
TMR 4822 ±12 VDC ±85 mA 81 %
TMR 4823 ±15 VDC ±65 mA 81 %
Models
The TMR-2 series is a family of isolated 2W dc-dc converter modules with regulated
output, featuring wide 2:1 input voltage ranges. The product comes in a compact
SIP-8 plastic package with small footprint occupying only 2.0 cm2 (0.3 square in.)
of board space.
An excellent efficiency allows –40° to +85°C operation temperatures. Further features
include remote On/Off control and continuous short circuit protection. The
ultra-compact dimensions of these converters make them an ideal solution for many
space critical applications in communication equipment, instrumentation and industrial
electronics.
UL 60950-1
http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 3
All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated.
DC/DC Converters
TMR 2 Series 2 Watt
Input Specifications
Input current at full load (nominal input) 5 Vin models: 645 mA max.
12 Vin models: 242 mA max.
24 Vin models: 117 mA max.
48 Vin models: 62 mA max.
Surge voltage (100 msec. max.) 5 Vin models: 15 V max.
12 Vin models: 36 V max.
24 Vin models: 50 V max.
48 Vin models: 100 V max.
Input voltage variation (dv/dt) 5 V/ms, max.
(complies to ETS 300 132 part. 4.4)
Input Filter capacitor type
Start up time 5 ms typ. (at nominal input and resistive load)
ESD (electrostatic discharge) EN 61000-4-2, air ±8 kV, contact ±6 kV,
perf. criteria A
Radiated immunity EN 61000-4-3, 10 V/m, perf. criteria A
Fast transient / surge (with external input capacitor) EN 61000-4-4, ±2 kV, perf. criteria A
EN 61000-4-5, ±1 kV perf. criteria A
– external input capacitor Nippon chemi-con KY 220 μF, 100 V, ESR 48 mOhm
Conducted immunity EN 61000-4-6, 10 Vrms, perf. criteria A
Output Specifications
Voltage set accuracy ±1 %
Regulation – Input variation Vin min. to Vin max. 0.2 % max.
– No load to full load single output models: ±1.0 % max.
dual output models: ±1.0 % max.
– Load variation 10 – 90 % single output models: ±0.5 % max.
dual output models: ±0.8 % max.
dual output models asymetric load: 5.0 % max. (25% / 100%)
Minimum load 0 %
Ripple and noise (20 MHz Bandwidth) 50 mVpk-pk max.
Temperature coefficient ±0.02 %/°C
Transient response (25% load step change) 500 μs typ.
Short circuit protection continuous, automatic recovery
Capacitive load 3.3 VDC / 5 VDC output models: 2’200 μF max. / 1’000 μF max.
12 VDC / ±5 VDC output models: 170 μF max. / ±470 μF max.
±12 VDC / ±15 VDC output models: 100 μF max. / ±47 μF max.
General Specifications
Temperature ranges – Operating –40°C to +85°C (non derating)
– Storage –55°C to +125°C
Derating (convection cooling) 2 %/K above 75°C
Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel. H max.
Reliability, calculated MTBF (Telcordia SR-332, 50% stress, Ta=40°C) 5.1 Mio. h
Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 1’600 VDC
Isolation capacitance – Input/Output 200 pF max.
Isolation resistance – Input/Output (500 VDC) >1‘000 MOhm
Switching frequency 100 to 650 kHz (PFM)
Page 3 of 3
Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com
www.tracopower.com
DC/DC Converters
TMR 2 Series 2 Watt
Outline Dimensions mm (inches)
Bottom view
3.2
(0.13)
0.5 (0.02)
0.25 (0.01)
2.54
2.0
± 0.5 2.54
21.8
5.08 2.54
0.5 (0.02)
11.1 (0.44)
(0.08 (0.1) (0.1) (0.1)
± 0.025)
(0.2)
4.0
2.54
(0.1)
2.54
(0.1)
(0.86)
(0.16)
9.2 (0.36)
1 2 3 5 6 7 8
Pin Single Dual
1 –Vin (GND) –Vin (GND)
2 +Vin (Vcc) +Vin (Vcc)
3 Remote On/Off Remote On/Off
5 No function No function
6 +Vout +Vout
7 –Vout Common
8 No function –Vout
Pin-Out
Rev. August 09/13
Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch
Pin pitch tolerances: ±0.25 (±0.01)
Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02)
General Specifications
Remote On/Off – On: open or high impedance
– Off: 2...4 mA input current applied via 1KW resistor
– Off stand by input current max. 2.5 mA
Safety standards UL/cUL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1
Safety approvals – UL/cUL www.ul.com -> certifications -> File e188913
Thermal shock, mechanical shock & vibration MIL-STD-810F
– Test conditions www.tracopower.com/products/mil810.pdf
Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/tmr2-reach.pdf
– RoHS RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Altitude – operation < 40’000ft (12’000m)
– non operation < 50’000ft (15’000m)
– test report www.tracopower.com/products/tmr-altitude.pdf
Physical Specifications
Casing material non-conductive plastic
Potting material epoxy (UL 94V-0-rated)
Weight 4.8 g (0.17oz) Physical Specifications
Application note: www.tracopower.com/products/tmr2-application.pdf
http://www.tracopower.com Page 1 of 4 DC/DC Converters TMR 1 & TMR 1SM Series, 1 Watt Order code SIP-package Order code SMD-package Input voltage range Output voltage Output current max. Efficiency SIP typ. Efficiency SMD typ. TMR 1-0511 TMR 1-0511SM 5.0 VDC 200 mA 76 % 78 % TMR 1-0512 TMR 1-0512SM 12 VDC 83 mA 77 % 79 % TMR 1-0513 TMR 1-0513SM 4.5 – 9.0 VDC 15 VDC 67 mA 79 % 81 % TMR 1-0515 (5 VDC nominal) 24 VDC 42 mA 76 % TMR 1-0522 TMR 1-0522SM ±12 VDC ±42 mA 77 % 79 % TMR 1-0523 TMR 1-0523SM ±15 VDC ±33 mA 78 % 80 % TMR 1-1211 TMR 1-1211SM 5.0 VDC 200 mA 77 % 79 % TMR 1-1212 TMR 1-1212SM 12 VDC 83 mA 77 % 79 % TMR 1-1213 TMR 1-1213SM 9.0 – 18 VDC 15 VDC 67 mA 80 % 82 % TMR 1-1215 (12 VDC nominal) 24 VDC 42 mA 77 % TMR 1-1222 TMR 1-1222SM ±12 VDC ±42 mA 79 % 81 % TMR 1-1223 TMR 1-1223SM ±15 VDC ±33 mA 78 % 80 % TMR 1-2411 TMR 1-2411SM 5.0 VDC 200 mA 77 % 79 % TMR 1-2412 TMR 1-2412SM 12 VDC 83 mA 80 % 82 % TMR 1-2413 TMR 1-2413SM 18 – 36 VDC 15 VDC 67 mA 80 % 82 % TMR 1-2415 (24 VDC nominal) 24 VDC 42 mA 77 % TMR 1-2422 TMR 1-2422SM ±12 VDC ±42 mA 80 % 82 % TMR 1-2423 TMR 1-2423SM ±15 VDC ±33 mA 80 % 82 % TMR 1-4811 TMR 1-4811SM 5.0 VDC 200 mA 77 % 79 % TMR 1-4812 TMR 1-4812SM 12 VDC 83 mA 78 % 80 % TMR 1-4813 TMR 1-4813SM 36 – 75 VDC 15 VDC 67 mA 78 % 80 % TMR 1-4815 (48 VDC nominal) 24 VDC 42 mA 76 % TMR 1-4822 TMR 1-4822SM ±12 VDC ±42 mA 79 % 81 % TMR 1-4823 TMR 1-4823SM ±15 VDC ±33 mA 79 % 81 % Models Features ◆ Wide 2:1 input voltage range ◆ Compact SIP-6 or SMD package ◆ Fully regulated outputs ◆ Cost optimised design ◆ No minimum load required ◆ Continuous short circuit protection ◆ Temperature range –40°C to +85°C ◆ I/O isolation 1500 VDC ◆ Remote On/Off control (SMD) ◆ 3-year product warranty The TMR-1 and TMR 1SM series are families of isolated 1 W dc-dc converter modules with regulated output, featuring wide 2:1 input voltage ranges. These products come in a compact SIP-6 or SMD package with small footprint occupying only 1.2 cm2 (0.2 square inch) of board space. An excellent efficiency allows –40°C to +85°C operation temperature. Further features include remote On/Off control (SMD-Version) and continuous short circuit protection. The compact dimensions and cost optimised design make this converters an ideal solution for applications in communication equipment, instrumentation and industrial electronics. CB Scheme http://www.tracopower.com Page 2 of 4 All specifications valid at nominal input voltage, full load and +25°C after warm-up time unless otherwise stated. DC/DC Converters TMR 1 & TRM 1SM 1 Watt Input Specifications Input current at no load (nominal input voltage) 5.0 V models: 40 mA typ. 12 V models: 20 mA typ. 24 V models: 10 mA typ. 48 V models: 7 mA typ. Surge voltage (1 sec. max.) 5.0 V models: 15 V max. 12 V models: 25 V max. 24 V models: 50 V max. 48 V models: 100 V max. Start-up voltage / under voltage lockout 5.0 V models: 4.5 VDC / 4 VDC or lower 12 V models: 9 VDC / 8.5 VDC or lower 24 V models: 18 VDC / 17 VDC or lower 48 V models: 36 VDC / 34 VDC or lower long term operation at undervoltage will damage the converter! Conducted noise (input) EN 55022 level A, FCC part 15, level A with external capacitor. see EMC consideration Recommended input fuse (slow blow) 5 V models: 500 mA 12 V models: 250 mA 24 V models: 120 mA 48 V models: 60 mA Output Specifications Voltage set accuracy ±1 % max. Regulation – Input variation Vin min. to Vin max. 0.2 % max. – No load to full load Single & Dual output models: ±1.0 % max. – Load variation 10 – 90% Single output models: ±0.5 % max. Dual output models (balanced load): ±0.8 % max. Minimum load no minimum load required Temperature coefficient 0.02 %/K Ripple and noise (20 MHz bandwidth) SMD models: 30 mVp-p max. SIP models: 50 mVp-p max. Transient response setting time (25% load step change) 250 μs typ. (PFM) Current limitation >120 % of Iout max. Short circuit protection continuous, automatic recovery Capacitive load 5 VDC models: 1‘680 μF max. 12 VDC models: 820 μF max. 15 VDC models: 680 μF max. 24 VDC models: 470 μF max. ±12 VDC models: 470 μF max. (each output) ±15 VDC models: 330 μF max. (each output) General Specifications Temperature ranges – Operating SIP models: –40°C to +85°C with no derating SMD models: –40°C to +82°C with derating – Case temperature +105°C (SIP) / +95°C (SMD) max. – Storage –55°C to +125°C Load derating SMD models: 7.2 %/K above +75°C Humidity (non condensing) 95 % rel. H max. Reliability, calculated MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217F, at +25°C, ground benign) >2.8 Mio h Page 3 of 4 DC/DC Converters TMR 1 & TRM 1SM 1 Watt General Specifications Isolation voltage (60 sec.) – Input/Output 1’500 VDC Isolation capacitance – Input/Output 50 pF max. Isolation resistance – Input/Output (500 VDC) >1 GOhm Switching frequency 220 kHz (PFM) Safety standards UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1 IEC 60950-1:2005 (2nd Edition); Am 1:2009 EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011 Safety approvals – CB test certificate (IEC 60950-1) www.tracopower.com/products/tmr1-cb.pdf Remote On/Off – On: < 0.6 VDC or open circuit (SMD models only) – Off: 2.7 to 15 VDC (ref. to –Vin) – Off standby current: 2.5 mA max. – Off control input current: 1 mA max. Physical Specifications Casing material non-conductive plastic (UL94V-0 rated) Potting material epoxy, (UL 94V-0 rated) Weight 3.1 g (0.11oz) (SIP)/3.3 g (0.12oz) (SMD) Soldering profile for SIP-package models max. 265°C / 10 sec. (wave soldering) Lead-free reflow solder process for SMD-package models as per J-STD-020D.01 (to find at: www.jedec.org - free registration required) Moisture sensivity level (for SMD-package models) level 2a as per J-STD-033B.01 (to find at: www.jedec.org - free registration required) Environmental compliance – Reach www.tracopower.com/products/reach-declaration.pdf – RoHS RoHS directive 2011/65/EU EMC Consideration +Vin -Vin +Vout -Vout C1 C2 L1 Load +Vin -Vin +Vout -Vout C1 C2 L1 Load Com. Load Single output models Input models C1 C2 L1 5 VDC 4.7μF /50V, 1210 X7R 4.7μH / 1.2 A, SR0302 12 VDC 4.7μF /50V, 1210 X7R 4.7μH / 1.2 A, SR0302 24 VDC SIP 4.7μF /50V, 1210 X7R 18μH / 0.58 A, SR0302 24 VDC SMD 4.7μF /50V, 1210 X7R 220pF /2 kV, 1808 X7R 12μH / 0.75 A, SR0302 48 VDC SIP 4.7μF /100V 1210 X7R 18μH / 0.58A, SR0302 48 VDC SMD 2.2μF / 00V 1210 X7R 18μH / 0.58A, SR0302 Dual output models Filter suggestion for to comply with EN55022 class A conducted noise emission Outline Dimensions mm (inches) Page 4 of 4 Specifications can be changed without notice! Make sure you are using the latest documentation, downloadable at www.tracopower.com www.tracopower.com Rev. August 30. 2013 DC/DC Converters TMR 1 & TRM 1SM 1 Watt Pin single output dual output 1 –Vin (GND) –Vin (GND) 2 +Vin (Vcc) +Vin (Vcc) 4 +Vout +Vout 5 No Pin Common 6 –Vout –Vout Pinout Bottom view 1 2 5 6 2.5 2.54 0.5 2.3 ±0.4 2.54 17.0 (0.67) 5.08 (0.2) 2.54 0.5 (0.02) 11.0 (0.4) 3.2 (0.13) (0.02) 0.5 (0.02) (0.09 (0.1) (0.1) (0.1) ±0.02) 7.62 (0.30) (0.10) (0.02) 4 0.5 0.25 (0.01) Dimensions in [mm], () = Inch Tolerances: ±0.5 (±0.02) Pin pitch tolerances: ±0.25 (±0.01) SIP-Package SMD-Package 1 6 7 14 9 8 2 13.7 [0.54] 17.2 [0.68] 8.45 [0.33] 8.7 [0.34] 0.25 [0.01] 1.00 [0.04] 18.9 [0.74] 12.7 [0.5] [0.1] 1.8 [0.1] 2.54 0~4 S SEATING PLANE 0.15 S 1.1 [0.04] 15.0 [0.6] Pin single output dual output 1 –Vin (GND) –Vin (GND) 2 Remote On/Off Remote On/Off 6 ntc Common 7 ntc –Vout 8 +Vout +Vout 9 –Vout Common 14 +Vin +Vin Pinout ntc = not to connect to electrical circuit SOURIAU Contacts and tooling For series UTP,UTS,UTG,UTO,MBG Contacts 13 Amps Diam 1.6mm Manu. Part No. Stock N° Gender mm² Crimping Tools RM20M12K 273‐2951 Male 0.32‐0.52 RC20M12K 273‐2917 Female 0.32‐0.52 RM16M23K 273‐2945 Male 0.52‐1.50 RC16M23K 273‐2901 Female 0.52‐1.50 Y16RCM RM14M30K 687‐6367 Male 1.5‐2.5 RC14M30K 687‐6370 Female 1.5‐2.5 SM16ML1TK6 437‐3762 Male 0.80‐1.50 Y14MTV SC16ML1TK6 437‐3778 Female 0.80‐1.50 RM16SE0K 510‐1079 Male 0.52‐1.50 Solder RC16SE4K 510‐1085 Female 0.52‐1.50 Contacts 5 Amps Diam 1.00 mm Manu. Part No. Stock N° mm² Crimping Tools Gender SM24WL3S26 687‐6392 Male 0.13‐0.25 SC24WL3S26 687‐6383 Female 0.13‐0.25 SM20WL3S26 540‐410 Male 0.35‐0.50 Y14MTV SC20WL3S25 540‐422 Female 0.35‐0.50 RM18W3K 191‐046 Male 0.50‐1.00 MH860 + 86‐5 RC18W3K 190‐908 Female 0.50‐1.00 Tooling Manu. Part No. Stock N° Description Y16RCM 481‐008 Crimp Tool Y14MTV 480‐998 Crimp Tool MH860 314‐8408 Crimp Tool 86‐5 314‐8414 Positioner for MH860 RX2025GE1 481‐046 Extraction tool RX20D44 233‐2731 Extraction tool 851 Series MIL-DTL-26482 Connectors 3 851 Sommaire / Contents • Sommaire / Contents............................................................... • Etendue de la gamme / Product Overview...................... • Présentation / Presentation.................................................... • Description / Description........................................................ • Tableau comparatif références SOURIAU et normes équivalentes / Cross reference list...................................... • Caractéristiques techniques / Technical characteristics. • Contacts / Contacts ................................................................ • Références / Ordering information...................................... • Arrangements / Contact layouts.......................................... • Positionnements / Orientations............................................. • Encombrements Connecteurs Etanches / Dimensions Environmental Connectors..................................................... • Encombrements Connecteurs Hermétiques / Dimensions Hermetic Connectors............................................................. • Encombrements Connecteurs pour connexions enroulées et à picots droits / Dimensions Wire-wrap and PC tail Connectors....................................................................................... • Perçage cloison / Panel cut-out............................................ 3 3 4-5 6 7-8 9 10 11-13 14-15 16 17-38 39-40 40-41 41 • Accessoires / Accessories..................................................... • Bouchons / Caps....................................................................... • Références des raccords / Backshell ordering information................................................................................... • Outillages / Tools....................................................................... • Notice de câblage / Wiring instructions............................ • Sertissage / Crimping............................................................... • Schémas d’implantations pour circuits imprimés / Coordinates for PC tail............................................................. • Prise largable push-pull / Push-pull lanyard release plug................................................................................................ • Connecteurs filtres 8F51 / 8F51 filter connector........... • Connecteurs spécifiques & accessoires SNC / Specific products & SNC accessories.................................................. • Traversée de cloison 851 RJ45 / 851 RJ45 feedthru.. • Traversée de cloison 851 USB / 851 USB feedtrhu..... • 8XE / 8XE.................................................................................... • Protection sans cadmium / Cadmium free plating......... 42 44-45 46-47 48-50 51 52-54 55-59 60-61 62 63 65-68 69-72 73-76 77 851 page 4-63 851 RJ45 Feedthru page 65-68 851 USB Feedthru page 69-72 8XE page 73-76 Etendue de la gamme / Product Overview 4 851 Présentation • Versions étanches et hermétiques • Large choix de raccords et accessoires • Protection cadmiée vert olive, oxydée anodique noire, nickelée ou zinc nickel • Contacts à souder, à sertir, à picot droit ou pour enroulement de fils • Contacts spéciaux thermocouples • La version 851 avec contacts à souder est qualifiée QPL (USA) • La gamme 851 est aussi commercialisée par un réseau de distributeurs. Les connecteurs circulaires 851 Souriau, initialement conçus pour la connexion des circuits électriques en aéronautique et armement, ont aujourd’hui conquis les domaines diversifiés de l’électricité et de l’électronique industrielles (Mesure, Instrumentation, Transport, Machine, Outil, Productique…). Ils correspondent aux normes et spécifications internationales et nationales en vigueur MIL-DTL-26482G série 1, NFC 93422, HE 301B, VG 95328, liste GAM/T1. Les connecteurs fixes (embases) et mobiles (fiches), mâles ou femelles, se verrouillent entre eux par un système mécanique endurant du type à baïonnette à 3 rampes hélicoïdales. Cinq clavettes de guidage longitudinal et cinq positionnements angulaires possibles de l’isolant assurent le détrompage entre connecteurs. Les mécaniques sont en alliage d’aluminium traité et protégé pour la version 851 étanche, et en acier protégé pour la version 851 hermétique. Les isolants sont en élastomère de la classe +125°C pour la version étanche et en verre pour la version hermétique. Les contacts sont dorés ou étamés sur sous-couche nickel. Nous proposons, afin de faciliter le câblage, des contacts à souder et à picot taille 20 (y compris version hermétique) avec protection dorure sur la partie avant et étamage sur la partie arrière. 5 851 Presentation • Sealed and hermetic types • Wide choice of body styles and back fittings • Olive green, black anodised, nickel or zinc nickel plated • Solder, crimp, PC-tail and wire-wrap versions • Thermocouple crimp contacts available • The 851 version with solder contacts is on US QPL • 851 connectors are also widely available from distributors. Souriau 851 circular connectors were originally conceived to ensure reliable electrical connections in aircraft but their lightweight compact size and general characteristics have contributed to successful adoption in numerous civil and military aviation applications and also in the fields of professional and general electronics (machine tools, automation, measuring equipment…). 851 connectors conform to the following international standards, MIL-DTL-26482G series 1, NFC 93422, HE 301B, VG 95328, GAM/T1 list. 851 connectors feature a positive bayonet coupling mechanism which ensures reliable mechanical and electrical connection between mating halves. A helical locking ring on the plug couples with three dowel pegs on the receptacle ensuring rapid locking. Orientation and location is ensured by a system of five raised keys on the plugs which couple with corresponding slots on the receptacles. Connectors with different angular positioning of the insulator relative to the shell can be provided to prevent mating of adjacent connectors with the same contact arrangements. The connector shells are manufactured from aluminium alloy. The insulators are moulded from elastomer and are bonded into the shells. Grommets are also made from elastomer and are supplied with appropriate accessories in the solder version, but are integral with the insulator for the crimp version. Copper alloy contacts have gold or tin over nickel plating. Hermetic receptacles with gold plated solder contacts are made from steel shells with nickel plating (01H) or yellow cadmium plating (02H and 07H). The contacts are permanently fused into a glass insulator providing a high level of sealing. To facilitate cabling we offer solder and straight spill contacts size 20 (including hermetic versions) with a gold plated active part and tin plated terminations. 6 851 Description Connecteurs assemblés avec contacts à sertir à clips Connectors with clip retained crimp contacts Connecteurs assemblés (embase avec contacts à picots ou avec contacts pour connexions enroulés) Connectors assemblies (receptacle with PC tail or wire-wrap terminals) Connecteurs assemblés avec contacts à souder Connectors assemblies with solder contacts 1 • Isolant arrière (passe-fils) 2 • Contact femelle à sertir 3 • Isolant femelle 4 • Isolant mâle 5 • Contact mâle à sertir 6 • Raccord simple 7 • Corps de fiche 8 • Embase 1 • Rear insulator (grommet) 2 • Female crimp contact 3 • Female insulator 4 • Male insulator 5 • Male crimp contact 6 • Backnut 7 • Plug body 8 • Receptacle 1 • Contact femelle à souder 2 • Contact mâle à souder 3 • Isolant femelle 4 • Isolant mâle 5 • Isolant arrière (passe-fils) 6 • Embase à collerette carrée 7 • Raccord simple 8 • Corps de fiche 9 • Ecrou de fixation 10 • Embase à fixation par écrou 11 • Raccord simple (pour embase à fixation par écrou) 1 • Female solder contact 2 • Male solder contact 3 • Female insulator 4 • Male insulator 5 • Rear insulator (grommet) 6 • Square flange receptacle 7 • Backnut 8 • Plug body 9 • Fixing nut 10 • Jam nut receptacle 11 • Backnut (for jam nut receptacle) 1 • Contact mâle ou femelle à souder ou à sertir 2 • Contact mâle ou femelle à picots droits 3 • Contact mâle ou femelle pour connexions enroulées 4 • Isolant mâle ou femelle 5 • Isolant arrière (passe-fils) 6 • Corps de fiche 7 • Raccord simple 8 • Isolant mâle ou femelle 9 • Embase sans possibilité de raccord 1 • Male or female crimp or solder contact 2 • Male or female PC tail contact 3 • Male or female wire-wrap contact 4 • Male or female insulator 5 • Rear insulator (grommet) 6 • Plug body 7 • Backnut 8 • Male or female insulator 9 • Receptacle not suitable for backshells 7 851 * Non QPL - Not QPL 22.1631 Connecteurs avec raccords / Connectors with backshells SOURIAU NCF 93422 (modèle HE 301B) MIL-DTL-26482G série 1 VG 95328 851 00 R .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 R .. .. .. 1A * MS 3120 E .. .. .. VG 95328 A .. .. .. 851 00 RC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 RC .. .. .. 1A * MS 3120 F .. .. .. VG 95328 B .. .. .. 851 00 RP .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 RP .. .. .. 1A * MS 3120 P .. .. .. 851 00 RG .. .. .. 50 .. VG 95328 R .. .. .. 851 00 RA .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 RA .. .. .. 1A 851 01 R .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 R .. .. .. 1A * MS 3121 E .. .. .. 851 01 RC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 RC .. .. .. 1A * MS 3121 F .. .. .. 851 01 RP .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 RP .. .. .. 1A * MS 3121 P .. .. .. 851 01 RA .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 RA .. .. .. 1A 851 02 R .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 02 R .. .. .. 1A * MS 3122 E .. .. .. VG 95328 C .. .. .. 851 06 R .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 R .. .. .. 1A * MS 3126 E .. .. .. 851 06 RC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 RC .. .. .. 1A * MS 3126 F .. .. .. VG 95328 K .. .. .. 851 06 RP .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 RP .. .. .. 1A * MS 3126 P .. .. .. 851 06 RT .. .. .. 50 .. VG 95328 J .. .. .. 851 06 RA .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 RA .. .. .. 1A 851 36 RG .. .. .. 50 .. VG 95328 M .. .. .. 851 36 RA .. .. .. 50 .. 851 07 R .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 R .. .. .. 1A * MS 3124 E .. .. .. VG 95328 D .. .. .. 851 07 RC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 RC .. .. .. 1A * MS 3124 F .. .. .. VG 95328 E .. .. .. 851 07 RP .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 RP .. .. .. 1A * MS 3124 P .. .. .. 851 07 RT .. .. .. 50 .. VG 95328 S .. .. .. 851 07 RG .. .. .. 50 .. VG 95328 T .. .. .. 851 76 RU .. .. .. 50 .. 851 08 RC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 08 RC .. .. .. 1A 851 08 RP .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 08 RP .. .. .. 1A Tableau comparatif / Cross refence list Version 851 avec contacts à sertir (protection vert olive) 851 Version with crimp contacts (olive green cadmium plating) Autres protections / Other plating Protections Plating SOURIAU NFC 93422 Version à souder (modèle HE 301B) Solder version Version à sertir Crimp version Anodique noire Black anodised 851 .. .. .. .. 5029 851 .. .. .. .. .. 50031 HE 301B .. .. .. .. .. 4A Nickelé Nickel 851 .. .. .. .. 5044 851 .. .. .. .. .. 5044 HE 301B .. .. .. .. .. 5A 8 851 Connecteurs avec raccords / Connectors with backshells SOURIAU NCF 93422 (modèle HE 301B) MIL-DTL-26482G série 1 VG 95328 851 00 E .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 E .. .. .. 1A MS 3110 E .. .. .. 851 00 EC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 EC .. .. .. 1A MS 3110 F .. .. .. 851 00 AC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 AC .. .. .. 1A 851 00 P .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 P .. .. .. 1A MS 3110 P .. .. .. 851 00 A .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 A .. .. .. 1A 851 00 J .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 00 J .. .. .. 1A 851 00 JC .. .. .. 50 .. MS 3110 J .. .. .. 851 01 E .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 E .. .. .. 1A MS 3111 E .. .. .. 851 01 EC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 EC .. .. .. 1A MS 3111 F .. .. .. 851 01 AC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 AC .. .. .. 1A 851 01 P .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 P .. .. .. 1A MS 3111 P .. .. .. 851 01 A .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 A .. .. .. 1A 851 01 J .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 01 J .. .. .. 1A 851 01 JC .. .. .. 50 .. MS 3111 J .. .. .. 851 02 E .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 02 E .. .. .. 1A MS 3112 E .. .. .. VG 95328 H .. .. .. 851 06 E .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 E .. .. .. 1A MS 3116 E .. .. .. 851 06 EC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 EC .. .. .. 1A MS 3116 F .. .. .. 851 06 AC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 AC .. .. .. 1A 851 06 P .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 P .. .. .. 1A MS 3116 P .. .. .. 851 06 A .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 A .. .. .. 1A 851 06 J .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 06 J .. .. .. 1A 851 06 JC .. .. .. 50 .. MS 3116 J .. .. .. 851 08 EC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 08 EC .. .. .. 1A 851 08 P .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 08 P .. .. .. 1A 851 07 E .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 E .. .. .. 1A MS 3114 E .. .. .. 851 07 EC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 EC .. .. .. 1A MS 3114 F .. .. .. 851 07 AC .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 AC .. .. .. 1A 851 07 P .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 P .. .. .. 1A MS 3114 P .. .. .. 851 07 A .. .. .. 50 .. HE 301 B 07 A .. .. .. 1A Tableau comparatif / Cross refence list Version 851 avec contacts à souder (protection vert olive) 851 Version with solder contacts (olive green cadmium plating) Version 851 hermétique / 851 Hermetic version SOURIAU NFC 93422 (modèle HE 301B) MIL-DTL-26482G série 1 VG 95328 851 02 H .. .. P.50 HE 301 B 02 H .. .. P.3A 851 07 H .. .. P.50 HE 301 B 07 H .. .. P.3A * MS 3114 H .. .. .. P. VG 95328 F .. .. .. 851 I H .. .. P.50 HE 301 B 1 H .. .. P.3A * MS 3113 H .. .. .. P. VG 95328 G .. .. . * Non QPL - Not QPL 9 851 Caractéristiques techniques / Technical characteristics Tension de tenue • A pression normale : connecteurs accouplés et non accouplés - 1500 Veff entre contacts taille 20 (service 1) - 2300 Veff entre contacts taille 16 (service 2) - 1500 Veff entre contacts panachés de taille 16 et de taille 20 (service 1) • A basse pression 10 mbar : connecteurs accouplés et non accouplés - 200 Veff entre contacts taille 20 (service 1) - 300 Veff entre contacts taille 16 (service 2) Résistance d’isolement ≥ 5000 MΩ sous 500 Vcc Intensité admissible par contact Taille 20 = 7,5 A / Taille 16 = 13 A Résistance de contact • Version étanche : Taille 20 ≤ 4 mΩ / Taille 16 ≤ 3 mΩ • Version hermétique : Taille 20 ≤ 30 mΩ / Taille 16 ≤ 14 mΩ Blindage 70 dB à 5 MHz / 40 dB à 100 MHz Tension de claquage mini Breakdown voltage (mini) Electriques Boîtier • Version étanche : alliage d’aluminium - Protection : - cadmié vert olive - oxydation anodique noire - cadmium incolore - nickelé satiné brillant - zinc cobalt (vert olive) - zinc nickel • Version hermétique : acier - Protection : - cadmié jaune irisé - nickelé Isolant • Partie avant : élastomère néoprène (dureté 85 shore) • Partie arrière (passe-fils) : élastomère néoprène (dureté 40 shore) Contact • A sertir : montable et démontable par l’arrière de l’isolant et retenu par clips métalliques, à souder et à picot non démontable, à connexion enroulée démontable et non démontable • Matière : alliage cuivreux • Protection : or ou or sur parties actives et étain/plomb sur parties raccordement • Effort mini de rétention des contacts dans l’isolant • Endurance mécanique : 500 cycles complets (verrouillage et déverrouillage) Vibration Selon NFC 20-616 Mécaniques Shell • Environmental version : aluminium alloy - Plating : - olive green cadmium - black anodised - white cadmium - satin finish bright nickel - zinc cobalt (olive green) - zinc nickel • Hermetic version : steel - Plating : - iridescent yellow cadmium - nickel Isolant • Front section : neoprene elastomer (85 shore) • Rear section : neoprene elastomer (40 shore) Contact • Crimp : inserted and removed from rear of insulator retained by metallic clips, solder Mechanical Taille des contacts A sertir à clip A souder A picot A wrapper 20 (Ø1mm) ≥ 68 N ≥ 68 N 16 (Ø1.6mm) ≥ 113 N ≥ 113 N Contact size Crimp Solder PC tail Wire wrap 20 (Ø1mm) ≥ 68 N ≥ 68 N 16 (Ø1.6mm) ≥ 113 N ≥ 113 N Working temperature -55°C to +125°C Sealing • Crimp contact version, 1 bar differential pressure, leakage ≤ 8 cm3/hr • Solder contact version, 2 bar differential pressure, leakage ≤ 16 cm3/hr Hermiticity • 1 bar differential pressure, leakage ≤ 2.8 mm3/hr Chemical resistance : to MIL-DTL-26482G series 1 and NFC 93422 - HE 301 B code A Resistance to salt spray • 48 hours at environmental temperature Damp heat : 21 days Climatic • Mechanical endurance : 500 cycles (full mating-unmating) Vibration To NFC 20-616 Dielectric withstanding voltage • At standard pressure : mated and unmated connectors - 1500 Vrms between size 20 contacts (service 1) - 2300 Vrms between size 16 contacts (service 2) - 1500 Vrms between mixed size 20 and 16 contacts (service 1) • At reduced pressure 10 mbar : connectors mated and unmated - 200 Vrms between size 20 contacts (service1) - 300 Vrms between size 16 contacts (service2) Insulation resistance ≥ 5000 MΩ under 500 Vcc Current rating per contact Size 20 = 7.5 A / Size 16 = 13 A Contact resistance • Environmental version : Size 20 ≤ 4 mΩ / Size 16 ≤ 3 mΩ • Hermetic version : Size 20 ≤ 30 mΩ / Size 16 ≤ 14 mΩ Shielding 70 dB to 5 MHz / 40 dB to 100 MHz Température d’utilisation -55°C à +125°C Etanchéité • Version contact à sertir sous pression différentielle de 1 bar, fuite ≤ 8 cm3/heure • Version contact à souder sous pression différentielle de 2 bars, fuite ≤ 16 cm3/heure Herméticité • Sous pression différentielle de 1 bar, fuite ≤ 2,8 mm3/heure Tenue aux agents chimiques : suivant norme MIL-DTL-26482G série 1 et NFC 93422 - HE 301 B code A Résistance au brouillard salin • 48 heures, à température ambiante Chaleur humide : 21 jours Climatiques and PC tail, non removable, wire-wrap removable or not removable • Material : copper alloy • Plating : gold overall or gold plated active zone and tin/lead plated termination • Min retention force of contacts in insulator Electrical 10 851 Contacts à sertir / Crimp contacts Type de contact / Contact type Taille de contact Contact size Références Part numbers Câble admissible Cable acceptance Ø extérieur sur gaine Ø over insulation Section (mm²) Jauge Gauge AWG min. max. standards standard mâle male pour arrangements 8-2, 8-3, 8-4 & 12-14 for layouts 8-2, 8-3, 8-4 & 12-14 20 8500-9573* 0.21 à/to 0.93 24 à/to 18 1.20 2.11 femelle female 8500-9213 900* mâle male autre arrangement for further contact layout 8500-697 femelle female 8500-1758A 900 mâle male 16 8500-1300 0.93 à/to 1.91 18 à/to 14 1.60 2.80 femelle female 8500-9331 900 embout réducteur reducing sleeve 20 8500-781 B1 0.06 à/to 0.21 30 à/to 24 16 8500-1985 B1 0.60 20 thermocouple thermocouple chromel mâle male 20 8500-809 A 0.21 à/to 0.93 24 à/to 18 1.20 2.11 alumel 8500-812 A chromel femelle female 8500-2054 900 alumel 8500-2055 900 chromel mâle male 16 8500-1053 0.93 à/to 1.91 18 à/to 14 1.60 2.80 alumel 8500-1058 chromel femelle female 8500-1054 900 alumel 8500-1059 900 Contacts Contacts pour connexions enroulées / Wire-wrap contacts Type de contact Contact type Taille de contact Contact size Références Part numbers Diagonales Diagonals Jauge Gauge (AWG) Nombre d’enroulements Number of wraps mâle male 20 8500-4220 MQ 0.78 0.85 26 28 30 3 femelle female 8500-9351 900 0.78 0.85 26 28 30 3 mâle male 16 8500-4304 LY 1.55 1.70 20 22 24 26 3 femelle female 8500-4305 900 1.55 1.70 20 22 24 26 3 * Ne pas utiliser avec embout réducteur / Not to be used with reducing sleeve 11 851 Racine / Basic series Version à souder / Solder version Version à sertir / Crimp version 851 851 00 00 E R 8 8 3A 3A P P - - 50 50 - - - - - - Type de boîtier / Shell type à souder à sertir solder crimp 00 00 01 01 02E 02R 07 07 07A 06 06 08 08 36 36 76 76 Type de raccord / Backshell type Voir tableau page 12 - See table page 12 Taille de boîtier / Shell size 8 - 10 - 12 - 14 - 16 - 18 - 20 - 22 - 24 Arrangements / Contact layouts Voir tableau page 14/15 - See table page 14/15 Type de contact / Contact type P = mâle/male - S = femelle/female Positionnement / Orientation Normal (n’apparaît pas dans la référence) w, x, y, z - voir tableau page 16 Normal (not included in part number) w, x, y, z - see table page 16 Indice obligatoire / Obligatory suffix B 50 51 52 54 Spécification / Specification sans spécification: protection cadmiée vert olive / without specification: olive green cadmium plating 29 031 44 38 42 66 Q7 R3 G4 Références / Ordering Information Connecteurs étanches / Environmental connectors embase à collerette carrée avec possibilité de raccord square flange receptacle accepting backshells prolongateur / cable connecting receptacle embase à collerette carrée sans possibilité de raccord square flange receptacle not accepting backshells embase à fixation par écrou avec possibilité de raccord jam nut receptacle accepting backshells embase à fixation par écrou sans possibilité de raccord jam nut receptacle not accepting backshells fiche droite sans bague de blindage plug for use with straight backshells fiche avec raccord coudé sans bague de blindage plug for use with 90° backshells fiche droite avec bague de blindage screened plug for use with straight backshells fiche droite avec bague de blindage et doigt de verrouillage screened plug with lock finger version à sertir sans clip avec arrangements 8-2 / 8-3 / 8-4 / 12-14 crimped version without clip which used layouts 8-2 / 8-3 / 8-4 / 12-14 contacts à sertir: dorés, toutes tailles / crimp contacts: gold plated, all sizes contacts à souder: taille 20, contacts dorés en partie active + étamés en partie arrière sauf arrangements 8-2, 8-3, 8-4 &12-14; taille 16, contacts dorés; mixte taille 20 & 16, contacts dorés / Solder contacts: size 20, contacts with gold plated active zone + tin plated termination area except layouts 8-2, 8-3, 8-4 &12-14; size 16, gold plated contacts all over; Mix size 20 & 16, gold plated contacts all over contacts à souder taille 20: dorés / solder contacts gold plated size 20 protection zinc cobalt vert olive (contacts: idem spécif.50) / zinc cobalt olive green plated (contacts idem specif.50) protection zinc nickel noir (contacts: idem spécif.50) / black zinc nickel plating (contacts idem specif.50) protection oxydation anodique noire (version à souder) / black anodised (solder version) protection oxydation anodique noire (version à sertir) / black anodised (crimp version) protection nickelée / nickel plating protection nickelée / nickel plating protection cadmiée vert olive / olive green cadmium plating version à sertir: livrée sans raccord, ni bague conique /crimp version: delivered without backshell, nor conical ring version à souder: idem version à sertir + sans grommet / solder version: idem crimp version + no grommet protection cadmiée vert olive, 500 heures brouillard salin - versions à sertir et à souder / olive green cadmium plating, salt spray 500 hr - crimp and solder versions protection cadmiée vert olive, 500 heures brouillard salin - versions à picots / olive green cadmium plating, salt spray 500 hr - PC tail version version à sertir: protection nickelée, livrée sans raccord, ni bague conique / crimp version: nickel plating, delivered without backshell, nor conical ring version à souder: idem version à sertir + sans grommet / solder version: idem crimp version + no grommet ]Pour raccord à reprise de tresse T* & RT* Backshell for screen termination, type T* & RT* 12 851 Types de raccord / Backshell types - Embases sans possibilité de raccord - 02E/02R/07A - voir page 25 - Receptacle not accepting backshells - 02E/02R/07A - see page 25 à souder solder à sertir crimp à souder solder à sertir crimp 00 01 07 06 08 36 76 00 01 07 06 08 36 76 E R raccord simple backnut 17 26 22 31 - - - 17 26 22 31 - - - EC RC raccord droit à serre-câbles straight cable clamp 17 26 22 31 - - - 17 26 22 31 - - - EC RC raccord coudé à serre-câbles 90° cable clamp - - - - 35 - - - - - - 35 - - AC raccord droit à serre-câbles sans passe-fils straight cable clamp without grommet 17 26 22 31 - - - - - - - - - - P RP raccord droit pour potting straight backshell for potting 18 27 23 32 - - - 18 27 23 32 - - - P RP raccord coudé pour potting 90° backshell for potting - - - - 35 - - - - - - 35 - - A RA raccord droit intermédiaire straight adaptor 18 27 - 32 - 36 - 18 27 - 32 - 36 - T RT raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving 19 28 23 33 - - - 19 28 23 33 - - - M RM raccord droit démontable pour gaine thermorétractable straight removable backshell for heatshrink sleeving 19 28 - 33 - - - 19 28 - 33 - - - *T *RT raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable straight removable backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving Pour spécif. 38 & 42 / for specif. 38 & 42 20 29 24 - - 36 - 20 29 24 - - 36 - G RG raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable straight removable backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving 20 29 24 - - 37 - 20 29 24 - - 37 - J raccord droit à presse-étoupe straight backshell with sealing gland 21 30 - 34 - - - - - - - - - - JC raccord droit à presse-étoupe et serrecâbles straight backshell with sealing gland and cable clamp 21 30 - 34 - - - - - - - - - - U RU raccord droit court pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable short backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving - - - - - - 38 - - - - - - 38 Z RZ raccord droit intermédiaire pour adaptation de raccord au pas électrique straight adaptor for electrical pich access - - - 37 - - - - - - 37 - - - 13 851 Références / Ordering Information Connecteurs hermétiques / Hermetic connectors Racine / Basic series 851 02H 8 3A P - 50 - - Type de boîtier / Shell type 02H 07H IH Taille de boîtier / Shell size 8 - 10 - 12 - 14 - 16 - 18 - 20 - 22 - 24 Arrangements / Contact layouts Voir tableau page 14/15 - See table page 14/15 Type de contact / Contact type P = mâle uniquement / male only Positionnement / Orientation normal (n’apparaît pas dans la référence) w, x, y, z - voir tableau page 16 normal (not included in part number) w, x, y, z - see table page 16 Indice obligatoire / Obligatory suffix 50 Spécification / Specification sans spécification: 02H et 07H, protection cadmiée jaune / without specification: 02H and 07H, yellow cadmium plating sans spécification: IH, protection nickelée / IH, nickel 44 02H et 07H, protection nickelée / 02H and 07H, nickel Connecteurs à picots & connexions enroulées / PC tail & wire-wrap connectors Racine / Basic series 851 02E 8 3A P - 50 16 Type de boîtier / Shell type 02E 07A Taille de boîtier / Shell size 8 - 10 - 12 - 14 - 16 - 18 - 20 - 22 - 24 Arrangements / Contact layouts Voir tableau page 14/15 - See table page 14/15 Type de contact / Contact type P = mâle/male - S = femelle/female Positionnement / Orientation normal (n’apparaît pas dans la référence) w, x, y, z - voir tableau page 16 normal (not included in part number) w, x, y, z - see table page 16 Indice obligatoire / Obligatory suffix 50 51 52 54 Spécification obligatoire / Obligatory specification à picot droit à picot droit pour connexion enroulée PC tail à picot droit wire-wrap embase à collerette carrée / square flange receptacle embase à fixation par écrou / jam nut receptacle embase à collerette ronde fixation par brasage / solder fixing receptacle Contacts #20 et # 16: dorés Gold plating for size 20 and size 16 embase à collerette carrée sans possibilité de raccord square flange receptacle not accepting backshell embase à fixation par écrou sans possibilité de raccord jam nut receptacle not accepting backshell contacts à picots: taille 20, contacts dorés en partie active + étamés en partie arrière sauf arrangements 8-2, 8-3, 8-4 & 12-14; Taille 16, contacts dorés; Mixte taille 20 & 16, contacts dorés / PC tail contacts: size 20, contacts with gold plated active zone + tin plated termination area except 8-2, 8-3, 8-4 & 12-14 layouts; Size 16, gold plated contacts all over; Mix size 20 & 16, gold plated contacts all over contacts à picots taille 20: dorés / gold plating for PC tail contacts size 20 protection zinc cobalt vert olive (contacts: idem spécif.50) / zinc cobalt olive green plated (contacts idem specif.50) protection zinc nickel noir (contacts: idem spécif.50) / black zinc nickel plating (contacts idem specif.50) 16: corps cadmié vert olive 45: corps nickelé 34: contacts démontables, corps cadmié vert olive (voir tableau page 10) 34A: contacts non démontables, corps cadmié vert olive 16: olive green cadmium plated body 45: nickel plating 34: non-banded contacts, olive green cadmium plated shell (see table, page 10) 34A: banded contacts, olive green cadmium plated - Ø 1 mm contact, Ø 0.6 mm terminal / Ø 1.6 mm contact, Ø 1 mm terminal - Ø 1 mm contact, Ø 0.6 mm terminal / Ø 1.6 mm contact, Ø 1 mm terminal - contact Ø 1 mm, picot de Ø 0.6 mm / contact Ø 1.6 mm, picot de Ø 1 mm - contact Ø 1 mm, picot de Ø 0.6 mm / contact Ø 1.6 mm, picot de Ø 1 mm 14 851 Arrangements / Contact layouts Vue de face avant isolant mâle / Viewed from front face of male insulator 2 2 Ø 1 (#20) 3 3 Ø 1 (#20) 3A/98 3 Ø 1 (#20) 4 4 Ø 1 (#20) 33 3 Ø 1 (#20) 6 6 Ø 1 (#20) 7 7 Ø 1 (#20) 98 6 Ø 1 (#20) 12 3 3 Ø 1.6 (#16) 8 8 Ø 1 (#20) 10 10 Ø 1 (#20) 14 14 Ø 1 (#20) 2 2 Ø 1.6 (#16) 14 12 8 Ø 1 (#20) 4 Ø 1.6 (#16) 15 14 Ø 1 (#20) 1 Ø 1.6 (#16) 18 18 Ø 1 (#20) 19 19 Ø 1 (#20) 5 5 Ø 1.6 (#16) 16 8 8 Ø 1.6 (#16) 23 22 Ø 1 (#20) 1 Ø 1.6 (#16) 26 26 Ø 1 (#20) 18 11 11 Ø 1.6 (#16) 32 32 Ø 1 (#20) 30 29 Ø 1 (#20) 1 Ø 1.6 (#16) ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ □ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ □ ♦ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ □▲ ♦ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ + ▲ ♦ ○ 8 10 15 851 20 16 16 Ø 1.6 (#16) 39 37 Ø 1 (#20) 2 Ø 1.6 (#1.6) 41 41 Ø 1 (#20) 24 24 Ø 1 (#20) 25 25 Ø 1 (#20) 22 36 36 Ø 1 (#20) 55 55 Ø 1 (#20) 32 32 Ø 1 (#20) 34 34 Ø 1 (#20) 21 21 Ø 1.6 (#16) 24 61 61 Ø 1 (#20) 27 27 Ø 1 (#20) Arrangements contacts à souder (QPL) / Solder contact layouts (QPL) Arrangements contacts à souder / Solder contact layouts Arrangements contacts à souder sans possibilité de passe-fils / Solder contact layouts without grommet Arrangements contacts à sertir / Crimp contact layouts Arrangements version hermétique / Hermetic version contact layouts Arrangements contacts à picots / PC tail contact layouts Arrangements contacts pour connexions enroulées / Wire-wrap contact layouts ■ □ + ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ □ + ▲ ♦ ○ ■ + ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ + ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ♦ ○ □ ▲ ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ ■ ▲ ● ♦ ○ Autres arrangements, nous consulter / Other layouts, please consult us 16 851 Positionnements / Orientations Isolant tournant à l’intérieur du corps métallique Insulator rotated inside metal body Vue face avant isolant mâle (corps d’embase ou corps de fiche) Viewed from front face of male insulator (receptacle or plug) boîtiers shells arrangements layouts angles en degrés / angle in degrees NFC 93422 HE 301B MIL-DTL-26482G serie 1 service1 1500 Veff 1500 Vrms service 2 2300 Veff W X Y Z 2300 Vrms souder solder sertir crimp souder solder sertir crimp 8 2 58 122 - - • X 3 60 210 - - • X 3A (98)* 60 210 - - • • X 4 45 - - - • X 33 90 - - - • • • X 10 6 90 - - - • • • • X 7* 90 - - - X 98 90 180 240 270 • • X 12 3 - - 180 - • • • • X 8 90 112 203 292 • • X 10 60 155 270 295 • • • • X 2 - - - - X 14* 45 • X 14 5 40 92 184 273 • • • • X 12 43 90 - - • • • • X 15 17 110 155 234 • • • • X 18 15 90 180 270 • • X 19 30 165 315 - • • • • X 16 8 54 152 180 331 • • • • X 23 158 270 - - • • • • X 26 60 - 275 338 • • • • X 18 11 62 119 241 340 • • • • X 32 85 138 222 265 • • • • X 30 180 193 285 350 • • X 20 16 238 318 333 347 • • • • X 39 63 144 252 333 • • • • X 41 45 126 225 - • • • • X 24 70 145 215 290 • • X 25 72 144 216 288 X 27 72 144 216 288 • • X 22 21 16 135 175 349 • • • • X 36 72 144 216 288 • X 55 30 142 226 314 • • • • X 32 72 145 215 288 • X 34 62 142 218 298 • X 24 61 90 180 270 324 • • • • X * Arrangement 8-98 : positionnements W et X non normalisés / 8-98 layout, W and X non standard ortientations Arrangements 10-7 & 12-14 : positionnement W non normalisé / 10-7 & 12-14 layouts, W non standard orientation 17 851 Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord simple Square flange receptacle with backnut Encombrements / Dimensions Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max contacts à souder J solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 E 8.. . 50.. 851 00 R 8.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 12.03 11.70 1.32 13.50 15.09 20.99 3.13 10 851 00 E 10.. . 50.. 851 00 R 10.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 15.01 11.70 1.32 16.70 18.26 24.19 3.13 12 851 00 E 12.. . 50.. 851 00 R 12.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 19.07 11.70 1.32 19.90 20.62 26.54 3.13 14 851 00 E 14.. . 50.. 851 00 R 14.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 22.25 11.70 1.32 23.40 23.00 28.89 3.13 16 851 00 E 16.. . 50.. 851 00 R 16.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 25.42 11.70 1.32 26.60 24.61 31.29 3.13 18 851 00 E 18.. . 50.. 851 00 R 18.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 28.60 11.70 1.32 29.50 26.97 33.69 3.13 20 851 00 E 20.. . 50.. 851 00 R 20.. . 50.. 34.50 33.40 31.77 14.35 2.15 32.70 29.36 36.89 3.13 22 851 00 E 22.. . 50.. 851 00 R 22.. . 50.. 34.50 33.40 34.95 14.35 2.15 36.00 31.75 39.99 3.13 24 851 00 E 24.. . 50.. 851 00 R 24.. . 50.. 34.50 33.40 38.12 15.20 2.15 39.10 34.92 43.15 3.81 00 E HE 301 B 00 E MS 3110 E 00 R HE 301 B 00 R MS 3120 E VG 95328 A PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit à serre-câbles Square flange receptacle with straight cable clamp Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max contacts à souder G J solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 8.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 8.. . 50 .. 48.00 47.30 12.03 11.70 1.32 19.90 15.09 20.99 3.50 3.13 10 851 00 10.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 10.. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 15.01 11.70 1.32 21.50 18.26 24.19 5.00 3.13 12 851 00 12.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 12.. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 19.07 11.70 1.32 25.00 20.62 26.54 8.20 3.13 14 851 00 14.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 14.. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 22.25 11.70 1.32 27.80 23.00 28.89 10.00 3.13 16 851 00 16.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 16.. . 50.. 51.00 50.50 25.42 11.70 1.32 29.40 24.61 31.29 13.00 3.13 18 851 00 18.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 18.. . 50.. 51.00 50.50 28.60 11.70 1.32 35.30 26.97 33.69 16.00 3.13 20 851 00 20.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 20.. . 50.. 53.00 51.50 31.77 14.35 2.15 35.30 29.36 36.89 16.00 3.13 22 851 00 22.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 22.. . 50.. 53.00 51.50 34.95 14.35 2.15 41.10 31.75 39.99 19.30 3.13 24 851 00 24.. . 50.. 851 00 RC 24.. . 50.. 53.00 51.50 38.12 15.20 2.15 42.40 34.92 43.15 20.60 3.81 00 EC HE 301 B 00 EC MS 3110 F 00 AC HE 301 B 00 AC 00 RC HE 301 B 00 RC MS 3120 F VG 95328 B PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 18 851 Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit pour potting Square flange receptacle with straight backshell for potting 00 P HE 301 B 00 P MS 3110 P 00 RP HE 301 B 00 RP MS 3120 P Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G max contacts à souder J solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 P 8.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 8.. . 50 .. 36.20 41.70 12.03 11.70 1.32 15.34 15.09 20.99 10.46 3.13 10 851 00 P 10.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 10.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 15.01 11.70 1.32 17.70 18.26 24.19 13.55 3.13 12 851 00 P 12.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 12.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 19.07 11.70 1.32 21.69 20.62 26.54 13.96 3.13 14 851 00 P 14.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 14.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 22.25 11.70 1.32 23.90 23.00 28.89 17.42 3.13 16 851 00 P 16.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 16.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 25.42 11.70 1.32 27.00 24.61 31.29 20.56 3.13 18 851 00 P 18.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 18.. . 50.. 36.91 44.46 28.60 11.70 1.32 30.50 26.97 33.69 23.66 3.13 20 851 00 P 20.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 20.. . 50.. 43.80 50.93 31.77 14.35 2.15 33.65 29.36 36.89 23.92 3.13 22 851 00 P 22.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 22.. . 50.. 43.80 50.93 34.95 14.35 2.15 37.10 31.75 39.99 25.52 3.13 24 851 00 P 24.. . 50.. 851 00 RP 24.. . 50.. 43.80 51.40 38.12 15.20 2.15 40.00 34.92 43.15 32.00 3.81 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit intermédiaire Square flange receptacle with straight adaptor 00 A HE 301 B 00 A 00 RA HE 301 B 00 RA Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G max J K filetage threading UNEF 2A contacts à souder solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 A 8.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 8.. . 50 .. 41.00 12.03 11.70 1.32 14.50 15.09 20.99 9.10 3.13 1/2 18 10 851 00 A 10.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 10.. . 50.. 41.00 15.01 11.70 1.32 18.70 18.26 24.19 12.08 3.13 5/8 24 12 851 00 A 12.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 12.. . 50.. 41.00 19.07 11.70 1.32 21.70 20.62 26.54 15.25 3.13 3/4 20 14 851 00 A 14.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 14.. . 50.. 41.00 22.25 11.70 1.32 25.10 23.00 28.89 18.15 3.13 7/8 20 16 851 00 A 16.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 16.. . 50.. 41.00 25.42 11.70 1.32 28.13 24.61 31.29 21.32 3.13 1-20 18 851 00 A 18.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 18.. . 50.. 41.00 28.60 11.70 1.32 31.38 26.97 33.69 24.32 3.13 1-3/16 18 20 851 00 A 20.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 20.. . 50.. 44.00 31.77 14.35 2.15 34.30 29.36 36.89 26.73 3.13 1-3/16 18 22 851 00 A 22.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 22.. . 50.. 44.00 34.95 14.35 2.15 37.60 31.75 39.99 30.67 3.13 1-7/16 18 24 851 00 A 24.. . 50.. 851 00 RA 24.. . 50.. 44.00 38.12 15.20 2.15 40.70 34.92 43.15 33.08 3.81 1-7/16 18 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 19 851 Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord pour gaine thermorétractable Square flange receptacle with straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving 00 T 00 RT PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit démontable pour gaine thermorétractable Square flange receptacle with removable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G max J M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 T 8.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 8.. . 50 .. 36.70 36.00 12.03 11.70 1.32 15.35 15.09 20.99 7.20 6.70 3.13 3.70 10 851 00 T 10.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 10.. . 50.. 36.70 36.00 15.01 11.70 1.32 18.15 18.26 24.19 10.20 9.40 3.13 3.70 12 851 00 T 12.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 12.. . 50.. 36.70 36.00 19.07 11.70 1.32 23.45 20.62 26.54 13.20 11.95 3.13 3.70 14 851 00 T 14.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 14.. . 50.. 36.70 36.00 22.25 11.70 1.32 24.25 23.00 28.89 16.10 15.15 3.13 3.70 16 851 00 T 16.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 16.. . 50.. 39.00 38.30 25.42 11.70 1.32 29.55 24.61 31.29 19.25 18.05 3.13 3.70 18 851 00 T 18.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 18.. . 50.. 39.00 38.30 28.60 11.70 1.32 31.75 26.97 33.69 21.30 19.95 3.13 3.70 20 851 00 T 20.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 20.. . 50.. 45.30 44.20 31.77 14.35 2.15 35.85 29.36 36.89 24.40 23.05 3.13 3.70 22 851 00 T 22.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 22.. . 50.. 45.30 44.20 34.95 14.35 2.15 38.20 31.75 39.99 27.50 25.55 3.13 3.70 24 851 00 T 24.. . 50.. 851 00 RT 24.. . 50.. 44.00 42.60 38.12 15.20 2.15 41.30 34.92 43.15 30.60 28.65 3.81 3.70 00 M 00 RM Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G max J M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 M 8.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 8.. . 50 .. 50.00 12.03 11.70 1.32 13.55 15.09 20.99 7.05 3.13 3.50 10 851 00 M 10.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 10.. . 50.. 50.00 15.01 11.70 1.32 15.35 18.26 24.19 9.90 3.13 3.50 12 851 00 M 12.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 12.. . 50.. 50.00 19.07 11.70 1.32 19.48 20.62 26.54 12.60 3.13 3.50 14 851 00 M 14.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 14.. . 50.. 50.00 22.25 11.70 1.32 21.30 23.00 28.89 15.90 3.13 3.50 16 851 00 M 16.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 16.. . 50.. 50.00 25.42 11.70 1.32 24.50 24.61 31.29 18.95 3.13 3.50 18 851 00 M 18.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 18.. . 50.. 50.00 28.60 11.70 1.32 26.45 26.97 33.69 20.90 3.13 3.50 20 851 00 M 20.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 20.. . 50.. 53.30 31.77 14.35 2.15 30.73 29.36 36.89 23.70 3.13 3.50 22 851 00 M 22.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 22.. . 50.. 53.30 34.95 14.35 2.15 34.24 31.75 39.99 26.60 3.13 3.50 24 851 00 M 24.. . 50.. 851 00 RM 24.. . 50.. 53.30 38.12 15.20 2.15 36.47 34.92 43.15 29.30 3.81 3.50 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 20 851 Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable (spécifications 38 & 42) / Square flange receptacle with removable backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving (38 & 42 suffix) 00 T 00 RT Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable / Square flange receptacle with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving 00 G 00 RG VG 95328 R Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G max J M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 G 8.. .50.. 851 00 RG 8.. .50 .. 54.00 12.03 11.70 1.32 16.30 15.09 20.99 7.45 3.13 3.60 10 851 00 G 10.. .50.. 851 00 RG 10.. .50.. 54.00 15.01 11.70 1.32 18.30 18.26 24.19 10.30 3.13 3.60 12 851 00 G 12.. .50.. 851 00 RG 12.. .50.. 54.00 19.07 11.70 1.32 22.30 20.62 26.54 13.20 3.13 3.60 14 851 00 G 14.. .50.. 851 00 RG 14.. .50.. 54.00 22.25 11.70 1.32 25.30 23.00 28.89 16.50 3.13 3.60 16 851 00 G 16.. .50.. 851 00 RG 16.. .50.. 54.00 25.42 11.70 1.32 28.30 24.61 31.29 19.35 3.13 3.60 18 851 00 G 18.. .50.. 851 00 RG 18.. .50.. 54.00 28.60 11.70 1.32 32.30 26.97 33.69 21.60 3.13 3.60 20 851 00 G 20.. .50.. 851 00 RG 20.. .50.. 59.30 31.77 14.35 2.15 34.30 29.36 36.89 24.80 3.13 3.60 22 851 00 G 22.. .50.. 851 00 RG 22.. .50.. 59.30 34.95 14.35 2.15 38.30 31.75 39.99 27.90 3.13 3.60 24 851 00 G 24.. .50.. 851 00 RG 24.. .50.. 59.30 38.12 15.20 2.15 41.30 34.92 43.15 31.00 3.81 3.60 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G max J M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 00 T 8.. . 50 851 00 RT 8.. . 50 51.60 12.03 11.70 1.32 18.25 15.09 20.99 7.45 3.13 3.70 10 851 00 T 10.. . 50 851 00 RT 10.. . 50 51.60 15.01 11.70 1.32 20.25 18.26 24.19 9.00 3.13 3.70 12 851 00 T 12.. . 50 851 00 RT 12.. . 50 51.60 19.07 11.70 1.32 24.75 20.62 26.54 13.30 3.13 3.70 14 851 00 T 14.. . 50 851 00 RT 14.. . 50 51.60 22.25 11.70 1.32 27.75 23.00 28.89 16.50 3.13 3.70 16 851 00 T 16.. . 50 851 00 RT 16.. . 50 51.60 25.42 11.70 1.32 30.05 24.61 31.29 18.50 3.13 3.70 18 851 00 T 18.. . 50 851 00 RT 18.. . 50 52.00 28.60 11.70 1.32 34.15 26.97 33.69 21.90 3.13 3.70 20 851 00 T 20.. . 50 851 00 RT 20.. . 50 55.10 31.77 14.35 2.15 37.25 29.36 36.89 25.10 3.13 3.70 22 851 00 T 22.. . 50 851 00 RT 22.. . 50 55.10 34.95 14.35 2.15 40.45 31.75 39.99 28.20 3.13 3.70 24 851 00 T 24.. . 50 851 00 RT 24.. . 50 55.10 38.12 15.20 2.15 43.65 34.92 43.15 31.40 3.81 3.70 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 21 851 Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit presse-étoupe Square flange receptacle with straight sealing gland backshell 00 J HE 301 B 00J Embase à collerette carrée avec raccord droit à presse-étoupe et serre-câbles Square flange receptacle with straight sealing gland and cable clamp PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G contacts à souder J solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp min max 8 851 00 J 8.. . 50.. - 47.60 - 12.03 11.70 1.32 14.40 15.09 20.99 5.02 5.84 3.13 10 851 00 J 10.. . 50.. - 47.60 - 15.01 11.70 1.32 17.60 18.26 24.19 5.94 6.76 3.13 12 851 00 J 12.. . 50.. - 48.70 - 19.07 11.70 1.32 21.10 20.62 26.54 9.34 10.16 3.13 14 851 00 J 14.. . 50.. - 53.50 - 22.25 11.70 1.32 24.40 23.00 28.89 11.32 12.14 3.13 16 851 00 J 16.. . 50.. - 59.00 - 25.42 11.70 1.32 27.60 24.61 31.29 14.73 15.55 3.13 18 851 00 J 18.. . 50.. - 65.00 - 28.60 11.70 1.32 30.80 26.97 33.69 16.00 16.82 3.13 20 851 00 J 20.. . 50.. - 79.10 - 31.77 14.35 2.15 34.10 29.36 36.89 16.89 17.70 3.13 22 851 00 J 22.. . 50.. - 80.00 - 34.95 14.35 2.15 37.30 31.75 39.99 17.78 18.60 3.13 24 851 00 J 24.. . 50.. - 90.00 - 38.12 15.20 2.15 40.50 34.92 43.15 20.34 21.16 3.81 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 00 JC MS 3110 J Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max G contacts à souder J solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp min max 8 851 00 JC 8.. .50.. - 57.68 - 12.03 11.70 1.32 19.90 15.09 20.99 5.02 5.84 3.13 10 851 00 JC 10.. .50.. - 57.68 - 15.01 11.70 1.32 21.50 18.26 24.19 5.94 6.76 3.13 12 851 00 JC 12.. .50.. - 61.24 - 19.07 11.70 1.32 25.00 20.62 26.54 9.34 10.16 3.13 14 851 00 JC 14.. .50.. - 66.01 - 22.25 11.70 1.32 27.80 23.00 28.89 11.32 12.14 3.13 16 851 00 JC 16.. .50.. - 74.75 - 25.42 11.70 1.32 29.40 24.61 31.29 14.73 15.55 3.13 18 851 00 JC 18.. .50.. - 80.57 - 28.60 11.70 1.32 35.30 26.97 33.69 16.00 16.82 3.13 20 851 00 JC 20.. .50.. - 91.69 - 31.77 14.35 2.15 35.30 29.36 36.89 16.89 17.70 3.13 22 851 00 JC 22.. .50.. - 95.66 - 34.95 14.35 2.15 41.10 31.75 39.99 17.78 18.60 3.13 24 851 00 JC 24.. .50.. - 101.22 - 38.12 15.20 2.15 42.40 34.92 43.15 20.34 21.16 3.81 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 22 851 Embase à fixation par écrou avec raccord simple Jam nut receptacle with backnut 07 E HE 301 B 07 E MS 3114 E 07 R HE 301 B 07 R MS 3124 E VG 95328 D Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 E 8.. . 50.. 851 07 R 8.. . 50 .. 34.10 33.50 12.03 17.90 2.64 18.50 26.94 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 E 10.. . 50.. 851 07 R 10.. . 50.. 34.10 33.50 15.01 17.90 2.64 21.70 30.14 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 E 12.. . 50.. 851 07 R 12.. . 50.. 34.10 33.50 19.07 17.90 2.64 24.90 34.94 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 E 14.. . 50.. 851 07 R 14.. . 50.. 34.10 33.50 22.25 17.90 2.64 28.10 38.04 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 E 16.. . 50.. 851 07 R 16.. . 50.. 34.10 33.50 25.42 17.90 2.64 31.20 41.24 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 E 18.. . 50.. 851 07 R 18.. . 50.. 34.10 33.50 28.60 17.90 2.64 34.40 44.44 36.68 41.34 20 851 07 E 20.. . 50.. 851 07 R 20.. . 50.. 39.30 37.90 31.77 22.45 3.44 38.30 49.14 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 E 22.. . 50.. 851 07 R 22.. . 50.. 39.30 37.90 34.95 22.45 3.44 41.50 52.24 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 E 24.. . 50.. 851 07 R 24.. . 50.. 39.30 37.90 38.12 22.30 3.44 44.70 55.54 46.18 52.74 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 8.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 8.. . 50 .. 49.31 49.10 12.03 17.90 2.64 19.90 26.94 3.50 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 10.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 10.. . 50.. 49.31 49.10 15.01 17.90 2.64 21.50 30.14 5.00 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 12.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 12.. . 50.. 49.17 49.10 19.07 17.90 2.64 25.00 34.94 8.20 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 14.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 14.. . 50.. 49.17 49.10 22.25 17.90 2.64 27.80 38.04 10.00 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 16.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 16.. . 50.. 52.34 52.20 25.42 17.90 2.64 29.40 41.24 13.00 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 18.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 18.. . 50.. 53.22 53.10 28.60 17.90 2.64 35.30 44.44 16.00 36.68 41.34 20 851 07 20.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 20.. . 50.. 58.10 58.00 31.77 22.45 3.44 35.30 49.14 16.00 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 22.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 22.. . 50.. 58.10 58.00 34.95 22.45 3.44 41.10 52.24 19.30 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 24.. . 50.. 851 07 RC 24.. . 50.. 58.10 58.00 38.12 23.30 3.44 42.40 55.54 20.60 46.18 52.74 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 07 EC HE 301 B 07 EC MS 3114 F 07 AC HE 301 B 07 AC 07 RC HE 301 B 07 RC MS 3124 F VG 95328 E EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm Embase à fixation par écrou avec raccord droit à serre-câbles Jam nut receptacle with straight cable clamp 23 851 Embase à fixation par écrou avec raccord droit pour potting Jam nut receptacle with straight backshell for potting Embase à fixation par écrou avec raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable Jam nut receptacle with straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 07 T 07 RT VG 95328 S 07 P HE 301 B 07 P MS 3114 P 07 RP HE 301 B 07 RP MS 3124 P Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 P 8.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 8.. . 50 .. 34.30 39.80 12.03 17.90 2.64 15.34 26.94 10.46 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 P 10.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 10.. . 50.. 34.30 39.80 15.01 17.90 2.64 17.70 30.14 13.55 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 P 12.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 12.. . 50.. 34.30 39.80 19.07 17.90 2.64 21.69 34.94 13.96 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 P 14.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 14.. . 50.. 34.30 39.80 22.25 17.90 2.64 23.90 38.04 17.42 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 P 16.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 16.. . 50.. 34.30 39.80 25.42 17.90 2.64 27.00 41.24 20.56 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 P 18.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 18.. . 50.. 34.10 41.80 28.60 17.90 2.64 30.50 44.44 23.66 36.68 41.34 20 851 07 P 20.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 20.. . 50.. 42.25 49.92 31.77 22.45 3.44 33.65 49.14 23.92 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 P 22.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 22.. . 50.. 42.25 49.92 34.95 22.45 3.44 37.10 52.24 25.52 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 P 24.. . 50.. 851 07 RP 24.. . 50.. 43.26 51.30 38.12 23.30 3.44 40.00 55.54 32.00 46.18 52.74 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max M max P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 T 8.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 8.. . 50 .. 42.60 41.50 12.03 17.90 2.64 15.35 26.94 7.20 6.70 3.70 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 T 10.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 10.. . 50.. 42.60 41.50 15.01 17.90 2.64 18.15 30.14 10.20 9.40 3.70 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 T 12.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 12.. . 50.. 42.60 41.50 19.07 17.90 2.64 23.45 34.94 13.20 11.95 3.70 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 T 14.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 14.. . 50.. 42.60 41.50 22.25 17.90 2.64 24.25 38.04 16.10 15.15 3.70 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 T 16.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 16.. . 50.. 44.40 43.80 25.42 17.90 2.64 29.55 41.24 19.25 18.05 3.70 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 T 18.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 18.. . 50.. 44.40 43.80 28.60 17.90 2.64 31.75 44.44 21.30 19.95 3.70 36.68 41.24 20 851 07 T 20.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 20.. . 50.. 50.90 49.80 31.77 22.45 3.44 35.85 49.14 24.40 23.05 3.70 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 T 22.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 22.. . 50.. 50.90 49.80 34.95 22.45 3.44 38.20 52.24 27.50 25.55 3.70 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 T 24.. . 50.. 851 07 RT 24.. . 50.. 49.90 48.50 38.12 23.30 3.44 41.30 55.54 30.60 28.65 3.70 46.18 52.74 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 24 851 07 T 07 RT PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Embase à fixation par écrou avec raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable (spécifications 38 & 42) / Jam nut receptacle with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving (38 & 42 suffix) Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max M max P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 T 8.. . 50 851 07 RT 8.. . 50 60.00 12.03 17.90 2.64 18.25 26.94 7.45 3.70 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 T 10.. . 50 851 07 RT 10.. . 50 60.00 15.01 17.90 2.64 20.25 30.14 9.00 3.70 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 T 12.. . 50 851 07 RT 12.. . 50 60.00 19.07 17.90 2.64 24.75 34.94 13.30 3.70 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 T 14.. . 50 851 07 RT 14.. . 50 60.00 22.25 17.90 2.64 27.75 38.04 16.50 3.70 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 T 16.. . 50 851 07 RT 16.. . 50 60.00 25.42 17.90 2.64 30.05 41.24 18.50 3.70 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 T 18.. . 50 851 07 RT 18.. . 50 60.40 28.60 17.90 2.64 34.15 44.44 21.90 3.70 36.68 41.34 20 851 07 T 20.. . 50 851 07 RT 20.. . 50 63.40 31.77 22.45 3.44 37.25 49.14 25.10 3.70 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 T 22.. . 50 851 07 RT 22.. . 50 63.40 34.95 22.45 3.44 40.45 52.24 28.20 3.70 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 T 24.. . 50 851 07 RT 24.. . 50 63.40 38.12 23.30 3.44 43.65 55.54 31.40 3.70 46.18 52.74 Embase à fixation par écrou avec raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable / Jam nut receptacle with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving 07 G 07 RG VG 95328 T 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max M max P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 G 8.. . 50 851 07 RG 8.. . 50 62.20 12.03 17.90 2.64 16.30 26.94 7.45 3.60 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 G 10.. . 50 851 07 RG 10.. . 50 62.20 15.01 17.90 2.64 18.30 30.14 10.30 3.60 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 G 12.. . 50 851 07 RG 12.. . 50 62.20 19.07 17.90 2.64 22.30 34.94 13.20 3.60 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 G 14.. . 50 851 07 RG 14.. . 50 62.40 22.25 17.90 2.64 25.30 38.04 16.50 3.60 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 G 16.. . 50 851 07 RG 16.. . 50 62.40 25.42 17.90 2.64 28.30 41.24 19.35 3.60 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 G 18.. . 50 851 07 RG 18.. . 50 62.40 28.60 17.90 2.64 32.30 44.44 21.60 3.60 36.68 41.34 20 851 07 G 20.. . 50 851 07 RG 20.. . 50 67.50 31.77 22.45 3.44 34.30 49.14 24.80 3.60 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 G 22.. . 50 851 07 RG 22.. . 50 67.50 34.95 22.45 3.44 38.30 52.24 27.90 3.60 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 G 24.. . 50 851 07 RG 24.. . 50 67.50 38.12 23.30 3.44 41.30 55.54 31.00 3.60 46.18 52.74 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 25 851 Embase à collerette carrée sans possibilité de raccord Square flange receptacle not accepting backshell Embase à fixation par écrou sans possibilité de raccord Jam nut receptacle not accepting backshell PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 07 A HE 301 B 07 A 02 E HE 301 B 02 E MS 3112 E VG 95328 H 02 R HE 301 B 02 R MS 3122 E VG 95328 C PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max E F max contacts à souder J solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 02 E 8.. . 50.. 851 02 R 8.. . 50 .. 25.18 32.35 12.03 11.70 1.32 10.84 15.09 20.99 3.13 10 851 02 E 10.. . 50.. 851 02 R 10.. . 50.. 25.10 32.35 15.01 11.70 1.32 13.99 18.26 24.19 3.13 12 851 02 E 12.. . 50.. 851 02 R 12.. . 50.. 25.10 32.35 19.07 11.70 1.32 17.37 20.62 26.54 3.13 14 851 02 E 14.. . 50.. 851 02 R 14.. . 50.. 25.10 32.35 22.25 11.70 1.32 20.57 23.00 28.89 3.13 16 851 02 E 16.. . 50.. 851 02 R 16.. . 50.. 25.10 32.35 25.42 11.70 1.32 23.72 24.61 31.29 3.13 18 851 02 E 18.. . 50.. 851 02 R 18.. . 50.. 25.10 32.35 28.60 11.70 1.32 26.69 26.97 33.69 3.13 20 851 02 E 20.. . 50.. 851 02 R 20.. . 50.. 26.67 33.95 31.77 14.35 2.15 29.89 29.36 36.89 3.13 22 851 02 E 22.. . 50.. 851 02 R 22.. . 50.. 26.67 33.95 34.95 14.35 2.15 33.04 31.75 39.99 3.13 24 851 02 E 24.. . 50.. 851 02 R 24.. . 50.. 26.67 33.95 38.12 15.20 2.15 36.24 34.92 43.15 3.81 Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max F max P max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 07 A 8.. . 50.. - 25.18 - 12.03 17.90 2.64 26.94 19.29 23.94 10 851 07 A 10.. . 50.. - 25.10 - 15.01 17.90 2.64 30.14 22.38 26.94 12 851 07 A 12.. . 50.. - 25.10 - 19.07 17.90 2.64 34.94 27.13 31.74 14 851 07 A 14.. . 50.. - 25.10 - 22.25 17.90 2.64 38.04 30.33 34.94 16 851 07 A 16.. . 50.. - 25.10 - 25.42 17.90 2.64 41.24 33.48 38.24 18 851 07 A 18.. . 50.. - 25.10 - 28.60 17.90 2.64 44.44 36.68 41.34 20 851 07 A 20.. . 50.. - 26.67 - 31.77 22.45 3.44 49.14 39.83 46.04 22 851 07 A 22.. . 50.. - 26.67 - 34.95 22.45 3.44 52.24 43.03 49.24 24 851 07 A 24.. . 50.. - 26.67 - 38.12 23.30 3.44 55.54 46.18 52.74 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 26 851 Prolongateur avec raccord simple Cable connecting receptacle with backnut 01 E HE 301 B 01 E MS 3111 E 01 R HE 301 B 01 R MS 3121 E PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Prolongateur avec raccord droit à serre-câbles Cable connecting receptacle with straight cable clamp PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 01 EC HE 301 B 01 EC MS 3111 F 01 AC HE 301 B 01 AC 01 RC HE 301 B 01 RC MS 3121 F EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 E 8.. . 50.. 851 01 R 8.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 12.03 10.60 2.10 13.50 24.24 20.99 10 851 01 E 10.. . 50.. 851 01 R 10.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 15.01 10.60 2.10 16.70 27.44 24.19 12 851 01 E 12.. . 50.. 851 01 R 12.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 19.07 10.60 2.10 19.90 29.79 26.54 14 851 01 E 14.. . 50.. 851 01 R 14.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 22.25 10.60 2.10 23.40 32.10 28.89 16 851 01 E 16.. . 50.. 851 01 R 16.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 25.42 10.60 2.10 26.60 34.59 31.29 18 851 01 E 18.. . 50.. 851 01 R 18.. . 50.. 32.70 32.00 28.60 10.60 2.10 29.50 36.94 33.69 20 851 01 E 20.. . 50.. 851 01 R 20.. . 50.. 34.50 33.40 31.77 13.85 2.65 32.70 40.14 36.89 22 851 01 E 22.. . 50.. 851 01 R 22.. . 50.. 34.50 33.40 34.95 13.85 2.65 36.00 43.24 40.00 24 851 01 E 24.. . 50.. 851 01 R 24.. . 50.. 34.50 33.40 38.12 14.70 2.65 39.10 46.44 43.29 Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 8.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 8.. . 50 .. 48.00 47.30 12.03 10.60 2.10 19.90 24.24 3.50 20.99 10 851 01 10.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 10.. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 15.01 10.60 2.10 21.50 27.44 5.00 24.19 12 851 01 12.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 12.. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 19.07 10.60 2.10 25.00 29.79 8.20 26.54 14 851 01 14.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 14.. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 22.25 10.60 2.10 27.80 32.10 10.00 28.89 16 851 01 16.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 16.. . 50.. 51.00 50.50 25.42 10.60 2.10 29.40 34.59 13.00 31.29 18 851 01 18.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 18.. . 50.. 51.00 50.50 28.60 10.60 2.10 35.30 36.94 16.00 33.69 20 851 01 20.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 20.. . 50.. 53.00 51.50 31.77 13.85 2.65 35.30 40.14 16.00 36.89 22 851 01 22.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 22.. . 50.. 53.00 51.50 34.95 13.85 2.65 41.10 43.24 19.30 40.00 24 851 01 24.. . 50.. 851 01 RC 24.. . 50.. 53.00 51.50 38.12 14.70 2.65 42.40 46.44 20.60 43.29 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 27 851 Prolongateur avec raccord droit pour potting Cable connecting receptacle with straight backshell for potting Prolongateur avec raccord droit intermédiaire Cable connecting receptacle with straight adaptor PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 01 A HE 301 B 01 A 01 RA HE 301 B 01 RA 01 P HE 301 B 01 P MS 3111 P 01 RP HE 301 B 01 RP MS 3121 P PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 P 8.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 8.. . 50 .. 36.20 41.70 12.03 10.60 2.10 15.34 24.24 10.46 20.99 10 851 01 P 10.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 10.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 15.01 10.60 2.10 17.70 27.44 13.55 24.19 12 851 01 P 12.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 12.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 19.07 10.60 2.10 21.69 29.79 13.96 26.54 14 851 01 P 14.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 14.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 22.25 10.60 2.10 23.90 32.10 17.42 28.89 16 851 01 P 16.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 16.. . 50.. 36.20 41.70 25.42 10.60 2.10 27.00 34.59 20.56 31.29 18 851 01 P 18.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 18.. . 50.. 36.91 44.46 28.60 10.60 2.10 30.50 36.94 23.66 33.69 20 851 01 P 20.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 20.. . 50.. 43.80 50.93 31.77 13.85 2.65 33.65 40.15 23.92 36.89 22 851 01 P 22.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 22.. . 50.. 43.80 50.93 34.95 13.85 2.65 37.10 42.24 25.52 40.00 24 851 01 P 24.. . 50.. 851 01 RP 24.. . 50.. 43.80 50.93 38.12 14.70 2.65 40.00 46.44 32.00 43.29 Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max K filetage threading UNEF 2A P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 A 8.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 8.. . 50 .. 41.00 12.03 10.60 2.10 14.50 24.24 9.10 1/2 28 20.99 10 851 01 A 10.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 10.. . 50.. 41.00 15.01 10.60 2.10 18.70 27.44 12.08 5/8 24 24.19 12 851 01 A 12.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 12.. . 50.. 41.00 19.07 10.60 2.10 21.70 29.79 15.25 3/4 20 26.54 14 851 01 A 14.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 14.. . 50.. 41.00 22.25 10.60 2.10 25.10 32.10 18.15 7/8 20 28.89 16 851 01 A 16.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 16.. . 50.. 41.00 25.42 10.60 2.10 28.13 34.59 21.32 1-20 31.29 18 851 01 A 18.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 18.. . 50.. 41.00 28.60 10.60 2.10 31.38 36.94 24.32 1-3/16 18 33.69 20 851 01 A 20.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 20.. . 50.. 44.00 31.77 13.85 2.65 34.30 40.15 26.73 1-3/16 18 36.89 22 851 01 A 22.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 22.. . 50.. 44.00 34.95 13.85 2.65 37.60 42.24 30.67 1-7/16 18 40.00 24 851 01 A 24.. . 50.. 851 01 RA 24.. . 50.. 44.00 38.12 14.70 2.65 40.70 46.44 33.08 1-7/16 18 43.29 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 28 851 Prolongateur avec raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable Cable connecting receptacle with straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving 01 T 01 RT PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Prolongateur avec raccord droit démontable pour gaine thermorétractable Cable connecting receptacle with removable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max P max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 T 8.. .50.. 851 01 RT 8.. .50.. 36.70 36.00 12.03 10.60 2.10 15.35 24.24 7.20 6.70 20.99 3.70 10 851 01 T 10.. .50.. 851 01 RT 10.. .50.. 36.70 36.00 15.01 10.60 2.10 18.15 27.44 10.20 9.40 24.19 3.70 12 851 01 T 12.. .50.. 851 01 RT 12.. .50.. 36.70 36.00 19.07 10.60 2.10 23.45 29.70 13.20 11.95 26.54 3.70 14 851 01 T 14.. .50.. 851 01 RT 14.. .50.. 36.70 36.00 22.25 10.60 2.10 24.25 32.10 16.10 15.15 28.89 3.70 16 851 01 T 16.. .50.. 851 01 RT 16.. .50.. 39.00 38.30 25.42 10.60 2.10 29.55 34.59 19.25 18.05 31.29 3.70 18 851 01 T 18.. .50.. 851 01 RT 18.. .50.. 39.00 38.30 28.60 10.60 2.10 31.75 36.94 21.30 19.95 33.69 3.70 20 851 01 T 20.. .50.. 851 01 RT 20.. .50.. 45.30 44.20 31.77 13.85 2.65 35.85 40.15 24.40 23.05 36.89 3.70 22 851 01 T 22.. .50.. 851 01 RT 22.. .50.. 45.30 44.20 34.95 13.85 2.65 38.20 42.24 27.50 25.55 40.00 3.70 24 851 01 T 24.. .50.. 851 01 RT 24.. .50.. 44.00 42.60 38.12 14.70 2.65 41.30 46.44 30.60 28.65 43.29 3.70 01 M 01 RM Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max P max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 M 8.. .50.. 851 01 RM 8.. .50 .. 50.00 12.03 10.60 2.10 13.55 24.24 7.05 20.99 3.50 10 851 01 M 10.. .50.. 851 01 RM 10.. .50.. 50.00 15.01 10.60 2.10 15.35 27.44 9.90 24.19 3.50 12 851 01 M 12.. .50.. 851 01 RM 12.. .50.. 50.00 19.07 10.60 2.10 19.48 29.79 12.60 26.54 3.50 14 851 01 M 14.. .50.. 851 01 RM 14.. .50.. 50.00 22.25 10.60 2.10 21.30 32.10 15.90 28.89 3.50 16 851 01 M 16.. .50.. 851 01 RM 16.. .50.. 50.00 25.42 10.60 2.10 24.50 34.59 18.95 31.29 3.50 18 851 01 M 18.. .50.. 851 01 RM 18.. .50.. 50.00 28.60 10.60 2.10 26.45 36.94 20.90 33.69 3.50 20 851 01 M 20.. .50.. 851 01 RM 20.. .50.. 53.30 31.77 13.85 2.65 30.75 40.15 23.70 36.89 3.50 22 851 01 M 22.. .50.. 851 01 RM 22.. .50.. 53.30 34.95 13.85 2.65 34.24 42.24 26.60 40.00 3.50 24 851 01 M 24.. .50.. 851 01 RM 24.. .50.. 53.30 38.12 14.70 2.65 36.47 46.44 29.30 43.29 3.50 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 29 851 Prolongateur avec raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable / Cable connecting receptacle with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 01 G 01 RG 01 T 01 RT PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max M max P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 G 8.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 8.. . 50 .. 54.00 12.03 10.60 2.10 16.30 24.24 7.45 3.60 20.99 10 851 01 G 10.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 10.. . 50.. 54.00 15.01 10.60 2.10 18.30 27.44 10.30 3.60 24.19 12 851 01 G 12.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 12.. . 50.. 54.00 19.07 10.60 2.10 22.30 29.79 13.20 3.60 26.54 14 851 01 G 14.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 14.. . 50.. 54.00 22.25 10.60 2.10 25.30 32.10 16.50 3.60 28.89 16 851 01 G 16.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 16.. . 50.. 54.00 25.42 10.60 2.10 28.30 34.59 19.35 3.60 31.29 18 851 01 G 18.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 18.. . 50.. 54.00 28.60 10.60 2.10 32.30 36.94 21.60 3.60 33.69 20 851 01 G 20.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 20.. . 50.. 59.30 31.77 13.85 2.65 34.30 40.15 24.80 3.60 36.89 22 851 01 G 22.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 22.. . 50.. 59.30 34.95 13.85 2.65 38.30 42.24 27.90 3.60 40.00 24 851 01 G 24.. . 50.. 851 01 RG 24.. . 50.. 59.30 38.12 14.70 2.65 41.30 46.44 31.00 3.60 43.29 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Prolongateur avec raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable (spécifications 38 & 42) / Cable connecting receptacle with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving (38 & 42 suffix) Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G max M max P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 01 T 8.. .50 851 01 RT 8.. .50 51.60 12.03 10.60 2.10 18.25 24.24 7.45 3.70 20.99 10 851 01 T 10.. .50 851 01 RT 10.. .50 51.60 15.01 10.60 2.10 20.25 27.44 9.00 3.70 24.19 12 851 01 T 12.. .50 851 01 RT 12.. .50 51.60 19.07 10.60 2.10 24.75 29.79 13.30 3.70 26.54 14 851 01 T 14.. .50 851 01 RT 14.. .50 51.60 22.25 10.60 2.10 27.75 32.10 16.50 3.70 28.89 16 851 01 T 16.. .50 851 01 RT 16.. .50 51.60 25.42 10.60 2.10 30.05 34.59 18.50 3.70 31.29 18 851 01 T 18.. .50 851 01 RT 18.. .50 52.00 28.60 10.60 2.10 34.15 36.94 21.90 3.70 33.69 20 851 01 T 20.. .50 851 01 RT 20.. .50 55.10 31.77 13.85 2.65 37.25 40.15 25.10 3.70 36.89 22 851 01 T 22.. .50 851 01 RT 22.. .50 55.10 34.95 13.85 2.65 40.45 42.24 28.20 3.70 40.00 24 851 01 T 24.. .50 851 01 RT 24.. .50 55.10 38.12 14.70 2.65 43.65 46.44 31.40 3.70 43.29 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 30 851 Prolongateur avec raccord droit à presse-étoupe Cable connecting receptacle with straight sealing gland backshell 01 J HE 301 B 01 J PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Prolongateur avec raccord droit à presse-étoupe et serre-câbles Cable connecting receptacle with straight sealing gland and cable clamp backshell PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp min max 8 851 01 J 8.. . 50.. - 47.60 - 12.03 10.60 2.10 14.40 24.24 5.02 5.84 20.99 10 851 01 J 10.. . 50.. - 47.60 - 15.01 10.60 2.10 17.60 27.44 5.94 6.76 24.19 12 851 01 J 12.. . 50.. - 48.70 - 19.07 10.60 2.10 21.10 29.79 9.34 10.16 26.54 14 851 01 J 14.. . 50.. - 53.50 - 22.25 10.60 2.10 24.40 32.10 11.32 12.14 28.89 16 851 01 J 16.. . 50.. - 59.00 - 25.42 10.60 2.10 27.60 34.59 14.73 15.55 31.29 18 851 01 J 18.. . 50.. - 65.00 - 28.60 10.60 2.10 30.80 36.94 16.00 16.82 33.69 20 851 01 J 20.. . 50.. - 79.10 - 31.77 13.85 2.65 34.10 40.15 16.89 17.71 36.89 22 851 01 J 22.. . 50.. - 80.00 - 34.95 13.85 2.65 37.30 42.24 17.78 18.60 40.00 24 851 01 J 24.. . 50.. - 90.00 - 38.12 14.70 2.65 40.50 46.44 20.34 21.16 43.29 01 JC MS 3111 J Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A B max C max D max F max G P contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp min max 8 851 01 JC 8.. .50.. - 57.68 - 12.03 10.60 2.10 19.90 24.24 5.02 5.84 20.99 10 851 01 JC 10.. .50.. - 57.68 - 15.01 10.60 2.10 21.50 27.44 5.94 6.76 24.19 12 851 01 JC 12.. .50.. - 61.24 - 19.07 10.60 2.10 25.00 29.79 9.34 10.16 26.54 14 851 01 JC 14.. .50.. - 66.01 - 22.25 10.60 2.10 27.80 32.10 11.32 12.14 28.89 16 851 01 JC 16.. .50.. - 74.75 - 25.42 10.60 2.10 29.40 34.59 14.73 15.50 31.29 18 851 01 JC 18.. .50.. - 80.57 - 28.60 10.60 2.10 35.30 36.94 16.00 16.82 33.69 20 851 01 JC 20.. .50.. - 91.69 - 31.77 13.85 2.65 35.30 40.15 16.89 17.71 36.89 22 851 01 JC 22.. .50.. - 95.66 - 34.95 13.85 2.65 41.10 42.24 17.78 18.60 40.00 24 851 01 JC 24.. .50.. - 101.22 - 38.12 14.70 2.65 42.40 46.44 20.34 21.16 43.29 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 31 851 Fiche avec raccord simple Plug with backnut Fiche avec raccord droit à serre-câbles Plug with straight cable clamp PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 06 EC HE 301 B 06 EC MS 3116 F 06 AC HE 301 B 06 AC 06 RC HE 301 B 06 RC MS 3126 F VG 95328 K 06 E HE 301 B 06 E MS 3116 E 06 R HE 301 B 06 R MS 3126 E PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 06 E 8 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 8 .. . 50 .. 32.54 32.00 19.05 13.50 10 851 06 E 10 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 10 .. . 50.. 32.54 32.00 21.80 16.70 12 851 06 E 12 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 12 .. . 50.. 32.54 32.00 26.15 19.90 14 851 06 E 14 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 14 .. . 50.. 32.54 32.00 29.35 23.40 16 851 06 E 16 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 16 .. . 50.. 32.54 32.00 32.50 26.60 18 851 06 E 18 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 18 .. . 50.. 32.54 32.00 35.30 29.60 20 851 06 E 20 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 20 .. . 50.. 33.30 32.10 38.85 32.70 22 851 06 E 22 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 22 .. . 50.. 33.30 32.10 42.05 36.00 24 851 06 E 24 .. . 50.. 851 06 R 24 .. . 50.. 33.30 32.10 45.10 39.10 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max contacts à souder G solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 06 8 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 8 .. . 50 .. 48.00 47.30 19.05 19.90 3.50 10 851 06 10 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 10 .. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 21.80 21.50 5.00 12 851 06 12 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 12 .. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 26.15 25.00 8.20 14 851 06 14 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 14 .. . 50.. 48.00 47.30 29.35 27.80 10.00 16 851 06 16 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 16 .. . 50.. 51.00 50.50 32.50 29.40 13.00 18 851 06 18 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 18 .. . 50.. 51.00 50.50 35.30 35.30 16.00 20 851 06 20 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 20 .. . 50.. 52.00 50.20 38.85 35.30 16.00 22 851 06 22 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 22 .. . 50.. 52.00 50.20 42.05 41.10 19.30 24 851 06 24 .. . 50.. 851 06 RC 24 .. . 50.. 52.00 50.20 45.10 42.40 20.60 EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC EC AC Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 32 851 Fiche avec raccord droit pour potting Plug with straight backshell for potting PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Fiche avec raccord droit intermédiaire Plug with straight adaptor PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 06 P HE 301 B 06 P MS 3116 P 06 RP HE 301 B 06 RP MS 3126 P Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max contacts à souder G solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 06 P 8 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 8 .. . 50 .. 36.20 42.10 19.05 15.34 10.46 10 851 06 P 10 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 10 .. . 50.. 36.20 42.10 21.80 17.70 13.55 12 851 06 P 12 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 12 .. . 50.. 36.20 42.10 26.15 21.69 13.96 14 851 06 P 14 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 14 .. . 50.. 36.20 42.10 29.35 23.90 17.42 16 851 06 P 16 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 16 .. . 50.. 36.20 42.10 32.50 27.00 20.56 18 851 06 P 18 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 18 .. . 50.. 37.70 45.40 35.30 30.50 23.66 20 851 06 P 20 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 20 .. . 50.. 42.40 50.00 38.85 33.65 23.92 22 851 06 P 22 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 22 .. . 50.. 42.40 50.00 42.05 37.10 25.52 24 851 06 P 24 .. . 50.. 851 06 RP 24 .. . 50.. 42.85 50.00 45.10 40.00 32.00 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 06 A HE 301 B 06 A 06 RA HE 301 B 06 RA Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max F filetage threading UNEF 2A contacts à souder solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 06 A 8 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 8 .. . 50 .. 41.00 41.00 19.05 14.50 9.10 1/2 28 10 851 06 A 10 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 10 .. . 50.. 41.00 41.00 21.80 18.70 12.08 5/8 24 12 851 06 A 12 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 12 .. . 50.. 41.00 41.00 26.15 21.70 15.25 3/4 20 14 851 06 A 14 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 14 .. . 50.. 41.00 41.00 29.35 25.10 18.15 7/8 20 16 851 06 A 16 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 16 .. . 50.. 41.00 41.00 32.50 28.13 21.32 1-20 18 851 06 A 18 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 18 .. . 50.. 41.00 41.00 35.30 31.38 24.32 1-3/16 18 20 851 06 A 20 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 20 .. . 50.. 44.00 43.30 38.85 34.30 26.73 1-3/16 18 22 851 06 A 22 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 22 .. . 50.. 44.00 43.30 42.05 37.60 30.67 1-7/16 18 24 851 06 A 24 .. . 50.. 851 06 RA 24 .. . 50.. 44.00 43.50 45.10 40.70 33.08 1-7/16 18 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 33 851 Fiche avec raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable Plug with straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving Fiche avec raccord droit démontable pour gaine thermorétractable Plug with removable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 06 M 06 RM 06 T 06 RT VG 95328 J PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 06 T 8.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 8.. . 50 .. 36.70 36.00 19.05 15.35 7.20 6.70 3.70 10 851 06 T 10.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 10.. . 50.. 36.70 36.00 21.80 18.15 10.20 9.40 3.70 12 851 06 T 12.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 12.. . 50.. 36.70 36.00 26.15 23.45 13.20 11.95 3.70 14 851 06 T 14.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 14.. . 50.. 36.70 36.00 29.35 24.25 16.10 15.15 3.70 16 851 06 T 16.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 16.. . 50.. 39.00 38.30 32.50 29.55 19.25 18.05 3.70 18 851 06 T 18.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 18.. . 50.. 39.00 38.30 35.30 31.75 21.30 19.95 3.70 20 851 06 T 20.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 20.. . 50.. 44.00 42.90 38.85 35.85 24.40 23.05 3.70 22 851 06 T 22.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 22.. . 50.. 44.00 42.90 42.05 38.20 27.50 25.55 3.70 24 851 06 T 24.. . 50.. 851 06 RT 24.. . 50.. 42.70 41.60 45.10 41.30 30.60 28.65 3.70 Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 06 M 8 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 8 .. . 50 .. 50.00 19.05 13.55 7.05 3.50 10 851 06 M 10 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 10 .. . 50.. 50.00 21.80 15.35 9.90 3.50 12 851 06 M 12 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 12 .. . 50.. 50.00 26.15 19.48 12.60 3.50 14 851 06 M 14 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 14 .. . 50.. 50.00 29.35 21.30 15.90 3.50 16 851 06 M 16 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 16 .. . 50.. 50.00 32.50 24.50 18.95 3.50 18 851 06 M 18 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 18 .. . 50.. 50.00 35.30 26.45 20.90 3.50 20 851 06 M 20 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 20 .. . 50.. 52.00 38.85 30.73 23.70 3.50 22 851 06 M 22 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 22 .. . 50.. 52.00 42.05 34.24 26.60 3.50 24 851 06 M 24 .. . 50.. 851 06 RM 24 .. . 50.. 52.00 45.10 36.47 29.30 3.50 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 34 851 Fiche avec raccord droit à presse-étoupe Plug with straight sealing gland backshell PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Fiche avec raccord droit à presse-étoupe et serre-câbles Plug with straight sealing gland and cable clamp backshells PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 06 J HE 301 B 06 J 06 JC MS 3116 J Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max contacts à souder solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp min max 8 851 06 J 8 .. . 50.. - 47.60 - 19.05 14.40 5.02 5.84 10 851 06 J 10 .. . 50.. - 47.60 - 21.80 17.60 5.94 6.76 12 851 06 J 12 .. . 50.. - 49.20 - 26.15 21.10 9.34 10.16 14 851 06 J 14 .. . 50.. - 54.00 - 29.35 24.40 11.32 12.14 16 851 06 J 16 .. . 50.. - 59.60 - 32.50 27.60 14.73 15.55 18 851 06 J 18 .. . 50.. - 65.60 - 35.30 30.80 16.00 16.80 20 851 06 J 20 .. . 50.. - 78.00 - 38.85 34.10 16.89 17.71 22 851 06 J 22 .. . 50.. - 79.50 - 42.05 37.30 17.78 18.60 24 851 06 J 24 .. . 50.. - 90.00 - 45.10 40.50 20.34 21.16 Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max contacts à souder solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp min max 8 851 06 JC 8 .. . 50.. - 57.68 - 19.05 19.90 5.02 5.84 10 851 06 JC 10 .. . 50.. - 57.68 - 21.80 21.50 5.94 6.76 12 851 06 JC 12 .. . 50.. - 61.24 - 26.15 25.00 9.34 10.16 14 851 06 JC 14 .. . 50.. - 66.01 - 29.35 27.80 11.32 12.14 16 851 06 JC 16 .. . 50.. - 74.75 - 32.50 29.40 14.73 15.50 18 851 06 JC 18 .. . 50.. - 80.57 - 35.30 35.30 16.00 16.82 20 851 06 JC 20 .. . 50.. - 91.69 - 38.85 35.30 16.89 17.71 22 851 06 JC 22 .. . 50.. - 95.66 - 42.05 41.10 17.78 18.60 24 851 06 JC 24 .. . 50.. - 101.22 - 45.10 42.40 20.34 21.16 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 35 851 Fiche avec raccord coudé à serre-câbles Plug with elbow cable clamp backshell PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 08 EC HE 301 B 08 EC 08 RC HE 301 B 08 RC PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G R contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 08 EC 8 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 8 .. . 50.. 50.10 19.05 19.70 3.50 16.00 10 851 08 EC 10 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 10 .. . 50.. 52.60 21.80 21.20 5.00 18.00 12 851 08 EC 12 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 12 .. . 50.. 54.90 26.15 24.20 8.20 19.50 14 851 08 EC 14 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 14 .. . 50.. 58.50 29.35 27.50 10.00 22.00 16 851 08 EC 16 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 16 .. . 50.. 60.80 32.50 29.10 13.00 23.50 18 851 08 EC 18 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 18 .. . 50.. 65.00 35.30 35.70 16.00 25.00 20 851 08 EC 20 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 20 .. . 50.. 69.10 38.85 35.70 16.00 26.50 22 851 08 EC 22 .. . 50.. 851 08 RC 22 .. . 50.. 71.00 42.05 39.70 19.30 28.00 24 851 08 EC 24 .. . 50.. 851 08 EC 24 .. . 50.. 75.50 45.10 43.50 20.60 31.00 Fiche avec raccord coudé pour potting Plug with elbow backshell for potting PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 08 P HE 301 B 08 P 08 RP HE 301 B 08 RP PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max G max R max S contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 08 P 8 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 8 .. . 50.. 40.70 19.05 8.10 11.70 11.30 10 851 08 P 10 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 10 .. . 50.. 44.90 21.80 11.30 14.35 14.50 12 851 08 P 12 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 12 .. . 50.. 46.90 26.15 13.30 15.90 17.70 14 851 08 P 14 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 14 .. . 50.. 49.20 29.35 16.10 16.30 20.10 16 851 08 P 16 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 16 .. . 50.. 50.60 32.50 16.90 19.30 22.80 18 851 08 P 18 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 18 .. . 50.. 51.80 35.30 18.10 20.60 25.60 20 851 08 P 20 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 20 .. . 50.. 53.70 38.85 19.70 21.90 28.80 22 851 08 P 22 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 22 .. . 50.. 54.80 42.05 20.80 23.50 31.60 24 851 08 P 24 .. . 50.. 851 08 RP 24 .. . 50.. 58.20 45.10 24.20 30.15 35.20 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 36 851 Fiche avec bracelet de blindage et raccord intermédiaire Screened plug with straight adaptor PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 36 A 36 RA VG 95328 N PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max F filetage threading UNEF 2A contacts à souder solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 36 A 8 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 8 .. . 50.. 41.00 19.05 14.50 9.10 1/2 28 10 851 36 A 10 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 10 .. . 50.. 41.00 21.80 18.70 12.08 5/8 24 12 851 36 A 12 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 12 .. . 50.. 41.00 26.15 21.70 15.25 3/4 20 14 851 36 A 14 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 14 .. . 50.. 41.00 29.35 25.10 18.15 7/8 20 16 851 36 A 16 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 16 .. . 50.. 41.00 32.50 28.13 21.32 1-20 18 851 36 A 18 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 18 .. . 50.. 41.00 35.30 31.38 24.32 1-3/16 18 20 851 36 A 20 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 20 .. . 50.. 43.30 38.85 34.30 26.73 1-3/16 18 22 851 36 A 22 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 22 .. . 50.. 43.30 42.05 37.60 30.67 1-7/16 18 24 851 36 A 24 .. . 50.. 851 36 RA 24 .. . 50.. 43.50 45.10 40.70 33.08 1-7/16 18 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 36 T 36 RT PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 36 T 8 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 8 .. . 50.. 51.60 19.05 18.25 7.45 3.70 10 851 36 T 10 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 10 .. . 50.. 51.60 21.80 20.25 9.00 3.70 12 851 36 T 12 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 12 .. . 50.. 51.60 26.15 24.75 13.30 3.70 14 851 36 T 14 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 14 .. . 50.. 51.60 29.35 27.75 16.50 3.70 16 851 36 T 16 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 16 .. . 50.. 51.60 32.50 30.05 18.50 3.70 18 851 36 T 18 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 18 .. . 50.. 52.00 35.30 34.15 21.90 3.70 20 851 36 T 20 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 20 .. . 50.. 53.90 38.85 37.25 25.10 3.70 22 851 36 T 22 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 22 .. . 50.. 53.90 42.05 40.45 28.20 3.70 24 851 36 T 24 .. . 50.. 851 36 RT 24 .. . 50.. 53.90 45.10 43.65 31.40 3.70 Fiche avec bague de blindage et raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable (spécifications 38 & 42)/ Screened plug with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving (38 & 42 suffix) 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 38 42 37 851 Fiche avec bague de blindage et raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable / Screened plug with removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving 36 G 36 RG VG 95328 M Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max G max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 851 36 G 8 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 8 .. . 50.. 54.00 19.05 16.30 7.45 3.60 10 851 36 G10 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 10 .. . 50.. 54.00 21.80 18.30 10.30 3.60 12 851 36 G 12 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 12 .. . 50.. 54.00 26.15 22.30 13.20 3.60 14 851 36 G 14 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 14 .. . 50.. 54.00 29.35 25.30 16.50 3.60 16 851 36 G 16 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 16 .. . 50.. 54.00 32.50 28.30 19.35 3.60 18 851 36 G 18 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 18 .. . 50.. 54.00 35.30 32.30 21.60 3.60 20 851 36 G 20 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 20 .. . 50.. 58.00 38.85 34.30 24.80 3.60 22 851 36 G 22 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 22 .. . 50.. 58.00 42.05 38.30 27.90 3.60 24 851 36 G 24 .. . 50.. 851 36 RG 24 .. . 50.. 58.00 45.10 41.30 31.00 3.60 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 06 Z 06 RZ PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max B max C max D filetage threading PE contacts à souder solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 10 12 851 06 Z 12 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 12 .. . 50.. 43.00 26.15 9.10 24.80 11 14 851 06 Z14 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 14 .. . 50.. 45.00 29.35 11.00 28.80 16 16 851 06 Z 16 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 16 .. . 50.. 45.00 32.50 11.00 30.80 16 18 851 06 Z 18 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 18 .. . 50.. 46.00 35.30 12.00 40.80 21 20 851 06 Z 20 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 20 .. . 50.. 46.50 38.85 12.00 40.80 21 22 851 06 Z 22 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 22 .. . 50.. 46.50 42.05 12.00 40.80 21 24 851 06 Z24 .. . 50.. 851 06 RZ 24 .. . 50.. 65.50 45.10 31.40 45.00 29 Fiche avec raccord pour adaptation d’accessoires au pas électrique Plug with straight adaptor for electrical pitch access Le manchon intermédiaire spécial de type Z qui équipe la fiche à sertir 851 06 RZ est adapté aux accessoires de câblages. - Raccord à griffes et presse-étoupe - Raccord pour gaine polyflex - Raccord pour tuyau C.N.O.M.O. The Z type special adaptor which equips crimp plug 851 06 RZ fits following accessories. - Packing gland collet backshell - Backshell for polyflex sleeving - Backshell for C.N.O.M.O. tube 38 851 Fiche avec bague de blindage et doigt de verrouillage, avec raccord droit court à reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable / Screened plug with lock finger and short backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving PS PS PS 76 U 76 RU PS PS PS Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers L max A max D max H max G max E max M contacts à souder max solder contacts contacts à sertir crimp contacts souder solder sertir crimp 8 10 12 851 76 U 12.. . 50.. 851 76 R U 12.. .50.. 35.60 25.00 22.50 32.00 13.20 19.50 3.70 14 851 76 U 14.. . 50.. 851 76 R U 14.. .50.. 35.60 29.00 25.50 32.00 16.10 21.00 3.70 16 851 76 U 16.. . 50.. 851 76 R U 16.. .50.. 35.60 32.00 28.50 32.00 19.25 22.50 3.70 18 20 22 24 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 39 851 Embase à fixation par écrou Jam nut receptacle PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 07 H HE 301 B 07 H MS 3114 H VG 95328 F Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers A C max D max G L max M max P 8 851 07 H 8 .. . 50.. 12.03 24.07 27.37 14.26 20.53 17.93 13.33 10 851 07 H 10 .. . 50.. 15.01 27.22 30.57 17.43 20.53 17.93 16.51 12 851 07 H 12 .. . 50.. 19.07 32.00 35.32 22.19 20.53 17.93 20.63 14 851 07 H 14 .. . 50.. 22.25 35.17 38.50 25.36 20.53 17.93 23.78 16 851 07 H 16 .. . 50.. 25.42 38.35 41.67 28.54 20.53 17.93 26.93 18 851 07 H 18 .. . 50.. 28.60 41.52 44.85 31.71 20.53 17.93 30.10 20 851 07 H 20 .. . 50.. 31.77 46.27 49.62 34.89 26.10 22.70 33.28 22 851 07 H 22 .. . 50.. 34.95 49.47 52.77 38.06 26.10 22.70 36.45 24 851 07 H 24 .. . 50.. 38.12 52.62 55.97 41.24 26.93 23.54 39.63 Connecteurs hermétiques / Hermetic connectors Embase à collerette carrée Square flange receptacle PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 02 H HE 301 B 02 H Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers A C max D max E F G H max J M max N max 8 851 02 H 8 .. . 50.. 12.03 21.42 27.09 15.09 13.84 14.27 6.97 3.13 11.24 1.67 10 851 02 H 10 .. . 50.. 15.01 24.62 31.87 18.26 13.84 17.06 6.97 3.13 11.24 1.67 12 851 02 H 12 .. . 50.. 19.07 26.98 35.04 20.62 13.84 19.85 6.97 3.13 11.24 1.67 14 851 02 H 14 .. . 50.. 22.25 29.36 38.22 23.00 13.84 23.00 6.97 3.13 11.24 1.67 16 851 02 H 16 .. . 50.. 25.42 31.73 41.39 24.61 13.84 26.18 6.97 3.13 11.24 1.67 18 851 02 H 18 .. . 50.. 28.60 34.12 44.57 26.97 13.84 29.36 6.97 3.13 11.24 1.67 20 851 02 H 20 .. . 50.. 31.77 37.20 47.74 29.36 15.42 31.74 6.99 3.13 12.00 2.48 22 851 02 H 22 .. . 50.. 34.95 40.47 50.92 31.75 16.23 34.92 6.99 3.13 12.00 2.48 24 851 02 H 24 .. . 50.. 38.12 43.66 55.69 34.92 17.04 38.10 6.19 3.81 12.81 2.48 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 40 851 Connecteurs pour connexions enroulées et à picots droits Wire-wrap and PC tail connectors Embase à collerette ronde, fixation par brasage Solder fixing receptacle PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS IH HE 301 B 1H MS 3113 H VG 95328 G Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers A D max H max F G max M max N max 8 851 IH 8 .. . 50.. 12.03 16.40 8.19 13.84 14.27 10.69 0.76 10 851 IH 10 .. . 50.. 15.01 19.40 8.19 13.84 17.06 10.69 0.76 12 851 IH 12 .. . 50.. 19.07 21.80 8.19 13.84 19.83 10.69 0.76 14 851 IH 14 .. . 50.. 22.25 25.00 8.19 13.84 23.00 10.69 0.76 16 851 IH 16 .. . 50.. 25.42 28.10 8.19 13.84 26.18 10.69 0.76 18 851 IH 18 .. . 50.. 28.60 31.30 8.19 13.84 29.36 10.69 0.76 20 851 IH 20 .. . 50.. 31.77 33.70 8.16 15.42 31.74 12.32 0.76 22 851 IH 22 .. . 50.. 34.95 36.90 8.16 16.23 34.92 12.32 0.76 24 851 IH 24 .. . 50.. 38.12 40.10 7.36 17.04 38.10 13.12 0.76 Embase à collerette carrée type 02E Square flange receptacle type 02E PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Version pour connexions enroulées (WW) Wire-wrap version Version à picots droits PC tail version Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers A B max C max Ø D max E F max H +1.63 0 J L max T +1.25 0 version WW WW version version à picots PC tail version 8 851 02 E 8.. .50.. 851 02 E 8.. .50.. 12.03 11.70 1.32 10.84 15.09 20.99 12.42 3.13 20.50 9.46 10 851 02 E 10.. .50.. 851 02 E 10.. .50.. 15.01 11.70 1.32 13.99 18.26 24.19 12.42 3.13 20.50 9.46 12 851 02 E 12.. .50.. 851 02 E 12.. .50.. 19.07 11.70 1.32 17.37 20.62 26.54 12.42 3.13 20.50 9.46 14 851 02 E 14.. .50.. 851 02 E 14.. .50.. 22.25 11.70 1.32 20.57 23.00 28.89 12.42 3.13 20.50 9.46 16 851 02 E 16.. .50.. 851 02 E 16.. .50.. 25.42 11.70 1.32 23.62 24.61 31.29 12.42 3.13 20.50 9.46 18 851 02 E 18.. .50.. 851 02 E 18.. .50.. 28.60 11.70 1.32 26.69 26.97 33.69 12.42 3.13 20.50 9.46 20 851 02 E 20.. .50.. 851 02 E 20.. .50.. 31.77 14.35 2.15 29.89 29.36 36.89 10.69 3.13 23.80 7.76 22 851 02 E 22.. .50.. 851 02 E 22.. .50.. 34.95 14.35 2.15 33.04 31.75 39.99 10.69 3.13 23.80 7.76 24 851 02 E 24.. .50.. 851 02 E 24.. .50.. 38.12 15.20 2.15 36.24 34.92 43.15 10.69 3.81 23.80 7.76 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 41 851 Perçage cloison Panel cut-out Taille de boîtier Shell size A±0.1 B±0.1 C±0.1 E±0.15 J±0.15 N P±0.1 X min max min 8 15.55 14.60 14.70 15.10 3.15 1.57 3.17 13.75 2.90 10 18.80 17.75 17.50 18.26 3.15 1.57 3.17 16.95 2.90 12 22.15 22.50 20.20 20.62 3.15 1.57 3.17 21.50 2.90 14 25.30 25.70 23.40 23.00 3.15 1.57 3.17 24.20 2.90 16 28.45 28.85 26.60 24.60 3.15 1.57 3.17 27.35 2.90 18 31.65 32.05 29.80 26.97 3.15 1.57 3.17 30.55 2.90 20 34.80 35.20 32.10 29.36 3.15 1.57 6.35 33.70 5.50 22 38.00 38.40 35.30 31.75 3.15 1.57 6.35 36.90 5.50 24 41.20 41.55 38.40 34.92 3.73 1.57 6.35 40.05 5.50 Embase à fixation par écrou type 07A Jam nut receptacle type 07A PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS Version pour connexions enroulées (WW) Wire-wrap version Version à picots droits PC tail version Taille de boîtier Shell size Références / Part numbers A B max C max F max H +1.63 0 L max P max S max T +1.25 0 version WW WW version version à picots PC tail version 8 851 07 A 8.. .50.. 851 07 A 8.. .50.. 12.03 17.90 2.64 26.94 12.42 20.64 19.29 23.94 9.46 10 851 07 A 10.. .50.. 851 07 A 10.. .50.. 15.01 17.90 2.64 30.14 12.42 20.64 22.38 26.95 9.46 12 851 07 A 12.. .50.. 851 07 A 12.. .50.. 19.07 17.90 2.64 34.94 12.42 20.64 27.13 31.74 9.46 14 851 07 A 14.. .50.. 851 07 A 14.. .50.. 22.25 17.90 2.64 38.04 12.42 20.64 30.33 34.94 9.46 16 851 07 A 16.. .50.. 851 07 A 16.. .50.. 25.42 17.90 2.64 41.26 12.42 20.64 33.48 38.24 9.46 18 851 07 A 18.. .50.. 851 07 A 18.. .50.. 28.60 17.90 2.64 44.44 12.42 20.64 36.68 41.34 9.46 20 851 07 A 20.. .50.. 851 07 A 20.. .50.. 31.77 22.45 3.44 49.14 8.64 25.99 39.83 46.04 8.49 22 851 07 A 22.. .50.. 851 07 A 22.. .50.. 34.95 22.45 3.44 52.24 8.64 25.99 43.03 49.24 8.49 24 851 07 A 24.. .50.. 851 07 A 24.. .50.. 38.12 23.30 3.44 55.54 7.79 26.84 46.18 52.74 7.79 PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 16 40 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A 34 34A Embase à collerette carrée Square flange receptacle Embase à fixation par écrou Jam nut receptacle Embase à collerette ronde Solder fixing receptacle Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 42 851 Embase de repos Dummy receptacle Accessoires / Accessories Taille de boîtier Shell size Références Part numbers A C max E J M max N max 8 8500-18 12.03 20.99 15.09 3.13 11.70 1.32 10 8500-19 15.01 24.19 18.26 3.13 11.70 1.32 12 8500-20 19.07 26.54 20.62 3.13 11.70 1.32 14 8500-21 22.25 28.89 23.00 3.13 11.70 1.32 16 8500-26 25.42 31.29 24.61 3.13 11.70 1.32 18 8500-22 28.60 33.69 26.97 3.13 11.70 1.32 20 8500-23 31.77 36.89 29.36 3.13 14.35 2.15 22 8500-24 34.95 39.99 31.75 3.13 14.35 2.15 24 8500-25 38.12 43.15 34.92 3.81 15.20 2.15 Bouchons de protection plastique pour embase & fiche Plastic protective caps for receptacle and plug Taille de boîtier Shell size Bouchons pour embase Caps for receptacles Bouchons pour fiches Caps for plugs 8 8500-5585 A 8500-5594 10 8500-5586 A 8500-5595 12 8500-5587 A 8500-5596 14 8500-5588 A 8500-5597 16 8500-5589 A 8500-5598 18 8500-5590 A 8500-5599 20 8500-5591 A 8500-5600 22 8500-5592 A 8500-5601 24 8500-5593 A 8500-5602 Joint de cloison Gaskets Taille de boîtier Shell size Joints pour embase à collerette carrée / Gaskets for square flange receptacle Joints pour embase à fixation par écrou / Gaskets for jam nut receptacle néoprène fairprène néoprène vitton 8 8500-275 8500-4164 3330102 3330675 10 8500-276 8500-4165 3330103 3330670 12 8500-277 8500-4166 3330104 3330671 14 8500-278 8500-4167 3330105 3330672 16 8500-283 8500-4168 3330106 3331048 18 8500-279 8500-4169 3330107 3331049 20 8500-280 8500-4170 3330108 3331050 22 8500-281 8500-4171 3330109 3331051 24 8500-282 8500-4172 3330110 3331052 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 43 Notes / Notes 44 851 Type de bouchon Cap type Bouchons pour embase / Receptacle cap Bouchons pour fiche / Plug cap Cadmiage vert olive Olive green cadmium Cadmium incolore White cadmium Oxydation noir Blak anodised Nickelage Nickel Cadmiage vert olive Olive green cadmium Cadmium incolore White cadmium Oxydation noir Blak anodised Nickelage Nickel Bouchon avec chaînette métallique et oeillet de fixation Cap with chain and ring D 02 D 29 D 44 D D 02 D 29 D 44 D Bouchon avec cordonnet nylon et oeillet de fixation Cap with nylon cord and ring B 02 B 29 B 44 B B 02 B 29 B 44 B Bouchon avec cordonnet nylon et rondelle de fixation (boîtier 10, 12, 14, 16 & 18) Cap with nylon cord and washer (shell 10, 12 , 14, 16 & 18) - - - - E - - - Bouchon avec cordonnet nylon et rondelle de fixation Cap with nylon cord and washer H - - 44 H - - - - Bouchon avec chaînette métallique et rondelle de fixation Cap with chain and washer J - - - - - - - Bouchon 500 H brouillard salin Cap 500hr salt spray JQ7 - - - - - - - Bouchon sans cordonnet Cap without chain M - - - M - - - Bouchons / Caps Références / Ordering Information Racine / Basic series 8500 05 - - - Type de boîtier / Shell size Référence pour embase / Part numbers for receptacle Référence pour fiche / Part numbers for plug 8 02 10 10 03 11 12 04 12 14 05 13 16 27 28 18 06 14 20 07 15 22 08 16 24 09 17 Spécifications / Specifications pour type de bouchon & protection, voir tableau ci-dessous / for cap & plating, see table below Types et protections / Type and plating Bouchons pour fiches Caps for plugs Taille de boîtier Shell size Ø A max B max C+6 0 D+2 0 E Ø F 8 16.80 19.84 132 128 - - 10 19.80 19.84 132 128 132 14.00 12 23.90 19.84 148 140 148 17.60 14 27.00 19.84 148 140 148 20.80 16 30.20 19.84 148 140 148 25.60 18 33.40 19.84 148 140 148 28.70 20 36.50 21.44 168 153 - - 22 39.80 21.44 168 153 - - 24 42.90 22.22 168 153 - - « - » nous contacter / consult us D B & M E Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 45 851 Bouchons pour embases Caps for receptacles D J & JQ7 B & M H Taille de boîtier Shell size Ø A max B max C+6 0 D+2 0 J max H+2 0 K+6 0 8 19.00 21.44 84 77 14.80 80 84 10 21.80 21.44 84 77 17.90 80 84 12 26.10 21.44 100 89 22.70 90 100 14 29.30 21.44 100 89 25.90 90 100 16 32.50 21.44 100 89 29.00 90 100 18 35.30 21.44 100 89 32.20 90 100 20 38.80 21.44 116 102 35.40 110 116 22 42.00 21.44 116 102 38.60 110 116 24 45.10 22.22 116 102 41.70 110 116 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 46 851 Références des raccords / Backshell ordering information Pour les types de protection voir références page 11 / For plating types see part numbers page 11 24 8500-5890 LP 8500-5890 110 8500-5890 202 8500-2477 900 8500-2477 902 8500-2477 903 8500-1567 LP 8500-474 8500-690 8500-456 LP - - 8500-4029 LP 8500-4029 110 - 8500-4053 900 - - 8500-8982 900 - 8500-8982 903 851 T 24-38 851 T 24-42 8500-5881 8500-5908 LP 22 8500-5889 LP 8500-5889 110 8500-5889 202 8500-2476 900 8500-2476 902 8500-2476 903 8500-1566 LP 8500-473 8500-689 8500-3186 LP - - 8500-4028 LP 8500-4028 110 - 8500-4052 900 - - 8500-8981 900 - 8500-8981 903 851 T 22-38 851 T 22-42 8500-5880 8500-5907 LP 20 8500-5888 LP 8500-5888 110 8500-5888 202 8500-2475 900 8500-2475 902 8500-2475 903 8500-1565 LP 8500-472 8500-688 8500-3185 LP - - 8500-4027 LP 8500-4027 110 - 8500-4051 900 - - 8500-8980 900 - 8500-8980 903 851 T 20-38 851 T 20-42 8500-5879 8500-5906 LP 18 8500-5887 LP 8500-5887 110 8500-5887 202 8500-2474 900 8500-2474 902 8500-2474 903 8500-1564 LP 8500-471 8500-687 8500-453 LP - - 8500-4026 LP 8500-4026 110 - 8500-4050 900 - - 8500-8979 900 - 8500-8979 903 851 T 18-38 851 T 18-42 8500-5878 8500-5905 LP 16 8500-5886 LP 8500-5886 110 8500-5886 202 8500-2473 900 8500-2473 902 8500-2473 903 8500-1563 LP 8500-470 8500-686 8500-452 LP - - 8500-4025 LP 8500-4025 110 - 8500-4049 900 - - 8501-0190 900 - 8501-0190 903 851 T 16-38 851 T 16-42 8500-5877 8500-5904 LP 14 8500-5885 LP 8500-5885 110 8500-5885 202 8500-2472 900 8500-2472 902 8500-2472 903 8500-1562 LP 8500-469 8500-685 8500-451 LP - - 8500-4024 LP 8500-4024 110 - 8500-4048 900 - - 8500-8978 900 - 8500-8978 903 851 T 14-38 851 T 14-42 8500-5876 8500-5903 LP 12 8500-5884 LP 8500-5884 110 8500-5884 202 8500-2471 900 8500-2471 902 8500-2471 903 8500-1561 LP 8500-468 8500-684 8500-450 LP - - 8500-4023 LP 8500-4023 110 - 8500-4047 900 - - 8501-0189 900 - 8501-0189 903 851 T 12-38 851 T 12-42 8500-5875 8500-5902 LP 10 8500-5883 LP 8500-5883 110 8500-5883 202 8500-2470 900 8500-2470 902 8500-2470 903 8500-1560 LP 8500-467 8500-683 8500-449 LP - - 8500-4022 LP 8500-4022 110 - 8500-4046 900 - - 8500-8977 900 - 8500-8977 903 851 T 10-38 851 T 10-42 8500-5874 8500-5901 LP 8 8500-5882 LP 8500-5882 110 8500-5882 202 8500-2469 900 8500-2469 902 8500-2469 903 8500-1559 LP 8500-466 8500-682 8500-448 LP - - 8500-4021 LP 8500-4021 110 - 8500-4045 900 - - 8501-0188 900 - 8501-0188 903 851 T 08-38 851 T 08-42 8500-5873 8500-5900 LP taille de boîtier shell size protection plating - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 - - - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 38 42 - E/R /RC écrou nut P/RP P RP A/RA T/RT M/RM G/RG T/RT specification 38 & 42 presseétoupe sealing gland écrou nut désignation designation raccord simple backnut raccord droit à serre-câbles straight cable clamp raccord droit pour potting straight backshell for potting raccord droit intermédiaire straight adaptor raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving raccord droit démontable pour gaine thermorétractable removable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable removable straight backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving J raccord droit à presse-étoupe straight sealing gland backshell EC AC Raccords droits / Straight backshells Potting 47 851 Références des raccords / Backshell ordering information Pour les types de protection voir références page 11 / For plating types see part numbers page 11 Raccords droits / Straight backshells 24 8500-5881 8500-5997 900 - - - 8500-8191A LP - - 22 8500-5880 8500-5996 900 - - - 8500-8190 LP - - 20 8500-5879 8500-5995 900 - - - 8500-8189 LP - - 18 8500-5878 8500-5994 900 - - - 8500-8188 LP - - 16 8500-5877 8500-5993 900 8500-8476 900 - - 8500-8187 LP - - 14 8500-5876 8500-5992 900 8500-8475 900 - - 8500-8186 LP - - 12 8500-5875 8500-5991 900 8500-8474 900 - - 8500-8185 LP - - 10 8500-5874 8500-5990 900 - - - - - - 8 8500-5873 8500-5989 900 - - - - - - taille de boîtier shell size protection plating - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 presseétoupe sealing gland écrou nut U/RU Z/RZ désignation designation JC raccord droit court pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable short backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving raccord pour adaptation d’accessoire au pas électrique straight adaptor for electrical pitch access raccord droit à presse-étoupe et serrecâbles straight sealing gland and cable clamp backshell Raccords droits pour embase 07 / Straight backshells for receptacle 07 8500-381 LP 8500-381 110 8500-381 202 8500-1797 900 - - 8500-474 8500-690 8500-4784 LP 8500-4784 110 - 8500-380 LP 8500-380 110 8500-380 202 8500-1796 900 - - 8500-473 8500-689 8500-4783 LP 8500-4783 110 - 8500-379 LP 8500-379 110 8500-379 202 8500-1795 900 - - 8500-472 8500-688 8500-4782 LP 8500-4782 110 - 8500-378 LP 8500-378 110 8500-378 202 8500-1794 900 - - 8500-471 8500-687 8500-4781 LP 8500-4781 110 - 8500-377 LP 8500-377 110 8500-377 202 8500-1793 900 - - 8500-470 8500-686 8500-4780 LP 8500-4780 110 - 8500-376 LP 8500-376 110 8500-376 202 8500-1792 900 - - 8500-469 8500-685 8500-4779 LP 8500-4779 110 - 8500-375 LP 8500-375 110 8500-375 202 8500-1791 900 - - 8500-468 8500-684 8500-4778 LP 8500-4778 110 - 8500-374 LP 8500-374 110 8500-374 202 8500-1790 900 - - 8500-467 8500-683 8500-4777 LP 8500-4777 110 - 8500-8347 LP 8500-8347 110 8500-8347 202 8500-8351 900 - - 8500-466 8500-682 8500-4776 LP 8500-4776 110 - - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 - 29 ou/or 031 44 E/R /RC P RP T/RT raccord simple backnut raccord droit à serre-câbles straight cable clamp raccord droit pour potting straight backshell for potting raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving EC AC Raccords coudés / Elbow backshells 8500-799 900 8500-799 902 - 8500-3225 900 8500-3225 902 - 8500-3224 900 8500-3224 902 - 8500-796 900 8500-796 902 - 8500-795 900 8500-795 902 - 8500-794 900 8500-794 902 - 8500-793 900 8500-793 902 - 8500-792 900 8500-792 902 - 8500-791 900 8500-791 902 - - 29 ou/or 031 44 EC/RC raccord coudé à serre-câbles elbow cable clamp backshell 48 851 Outillages / Tools Outillage de sertissage Crimping pliers Tailles de contacts Contact sizes Section de câbles / Wire sizes Références / Part numbers mm² AWG pince à sertir / crimping tool positionneur / locator 20 0.93 0.60 0.38 0.21 18 20 22 24 8476-01 (M 22520/2-01) 8365 (M 22520/1-01) 8476-02 (M 22520/2-02) 8365-02 (M 22520/1-02) 16 1.91 1.34 0.93 14 16 18 8365 (M 22520/1-01) 8365-02 (M 22520/1-02) ] ] Outillage d’insertion et d’extraction Insertion and extraction tools Type de contacts Contact types Tailles de contacts Contact sizes Références / Part numbers outil d’insertion / insertion tools outil d’extraction / extraction tools à sertir crimp 20 8500-29B* 8500-36A 16 8500-39 8500-38A pour connexion enroulée for wire-wrap 20 8500-31 8500-31 16 8500-39 ou/or 8500-37 8500-37 Tube de rechange pour outil / Square tube for tool : • 8500-36A : ref. 8500-1163 • 8500-38A : ref. 8500-1486 021 * Sauf arrangements 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 12-14 : outil 8500-93B * Except 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 12-14 contact layouts : insertion tool 8500-93B Obturateurs Filler plugs Tailles de contacts Contact sizes Références / part numbers Couleur / Colour Profil / Profile 20 8500-4144 gris / grey 16 8500-479 bleu / blue 20 8500-4144 A (MS 3187 A 20) rouge / red 16 8500-4267 (MS 3187-16) bleu / blue 49 851 Outils de sertissage Crimping pliers 8476-01 (M 22520/2-01) avec / with 8476-02 (M 22520/2-02) 8365 (M 22520/1-01) avec / with 8365-02 (M 22520/1-02) Outils de d’insertion Insertion tools 8500-39 8500-29B 50 851 Outils d’extraction Extraction tools 8500-36 A (Contact à sertir #20 / Crimp contact #20) 8500-38 A (Contact à sertir #16 / Crimp contact #16) 8500-31 (pour connexion enroulée #20 / for wire-wrap #20) 8500-37 (pour connexion enroulée #16 / for wire-wrap #16) Accessoires Accessories 8498-04 Clé à sangle pour serrage des accessoires arrière Strap backshell tightening spanner 8500-30 Support de serrage Tightening support 51 851 Notice de câblage / Wiring instructions Préparation des câbles / cable preparation Contacts à sertir Crimp contacts Dénudage Stripping • Apporter le plus grand soin à cette opération. Utiliser une pince à dénuder appropriée à la section du câble et en parfait état. • Afin de conserver toutes les caractéristiques d’étanchéité du connecteur et permettre un câblage rationnel, les fils doivent avoir les dimensions ci-dessous : • Taux de remplissage conseillé : - 050 % Ø maxi - 050 % Ø mini - 100 % Ø moyen • Contacts de taille 20 pour les câbles de : - Ø sur gaine ≤ à 2 mm, dénuder sur une longueur de 4,5 mm - Ø sur gaine > à 2 mm, dénuder sur une longueur de 7 mm. • Contacts de taille 16, dénuder le câble sur 6 mm. Raccordement câblescontacts • Enfiler le câble dans le fût du contact et s’assurer que les brins du câble sont apparents dans le trou de visite. Utilisation de l’embout réducteur • Contacts de taille 20, si le câble a une section inférieure à 0,21 mm2, il est indispensable d’intercaler un embout réducteur : réf. 8500-781. • Contacts de taille 16, embout réducteur : réf. 8500-1985, si le câble a une section égale à 0,60 mm2. contact / contact embout / sleeve câble / cable • This operation should be carried out with great care. Use stripping pliers which are in good condition and which are designed for use with the size of wire being stripped. • In order to maintain the connector’s excellent sealing characteristics and, at the same time, meet the highest cabling standards the wires should have the following external sheath dimensions : • Recommended loading : - 050 % with max. diam. wires - 050 % with min. diam. wires - 100 % with medium size wires. • Size 20 contacts for cables : - when Ø over insulation ≤ 2 mm strip to a 4.5 mm length - when Ø over insulation > 2 mm strip to a 7‑mm length. • Size 16 contacts, strip the cable to a length of 6 mm. Cable-contact assembly • Insert the wire into the crimp barrel and ensure that it has penetrated correctly by checking that it may be seen through the lateral hole in the barrel. Reducing sleeve • If a wire with a cross sectional area of less than 0.21 mm2 is used with a size 20 contact, it will be necessary to use a reducing sleeve : ref. 8500-781. • Wires of cross sectional area of 0.6 mm2 may be used with size 16 contacts by using a reducing sleeve, ref. 8500-1985. Taille des contacts Ø sur gaine min. max. 20 16 1.20 1.60 2.11 2.80 Contacts size Ø over sheath min. max. 20 16 1.20 1.60 2.11 2.80 52 851 Sertissage des contacts / Contact crimping • Avec pince à sertir MS 22520/1-01 référence Souriau 8365 et tourelle MS 22520/1-02 8365-02: - position «rouge» pour contact taille 20 - position «bleue» pour contact taille 16. • Avec pince à sertir MS 22520/2-01 référence Souriau 8476-01 et positionneur MS 22520/2-02 8476- 02 : - contact taille 20 uniquement. Nota : ne pas utiliser avec embout réducteur. Les pinces doivent être utilisées côté poinçons. • Presser sur les poignées de la pince jusqu’au déclic final, relâcher ; la pince doit s’ouvrir d’elle-même. • Introduire l’ensemble fil et contact, ou fil embout réducteur et contact entre les 4 poinçons jusqu’à venir en butée dans le positionneur. • Presser à fond jusqu’au déclic final, la pince doit s’ouvrir une fois le sertissage effectué. • Extraire fil et contact serti et contrôler l’aspect du sertissage. • With crimping pliers MS 22520/1-01 Souriau part number 8365 and turret MS 22520/1-02 8365-02 : - «red» position for size 20 contacts - «blue» position for size 16 contacts. • With crimping pliers MS 22520/2-01 Souriau part number 8476-01 and locator MS 22520/2-02 8476-02 : - for size 20 contacts only. Note : not be used with reducing sleeve. Squeeze pliers firmly until a click is heard, the pliers should spring open when the ratched mechanism is released. • Hold indentor side up-insert the wire-contact assembly or mire-reducing sleeve-contact assembly between the four indentors, ensuring that the contact bottoms in the locator. • Fully close the jaws, once the contact is crimped the pliers must spring open remove wire + crimped contact, check crimp aspect. 8365 8476-01 53 851 Insertion des contacts / Crimp contact insertion Avant les opérations suivantes, démonter et enfiler sur les câbles l’accessoire arrière du connecteur. Outils d’insertion • Contacts taille 20* : pince 8500-29B • Contacts taille 16 : outil 8500-39. Utilisation des outils d’insertion Engager manuellement le contact dans l’alvéole de l’isolant. • Contacts de taille 20 : prendre le fil entre les 2 becs de la pince en butée sur l’arrière de la jupe du contact. • Contacts de taille 16 : mettre la partie sertie du contact dans le bec de l’outil, l’extrémité de celui-ci venant en butée sur la collerette principale du contact. Introduire chaque contact dans le logement de l’isolant en poussant dans l’axe jusqu’à l’accrochage du contact dans le clip. Obturateurs Lorsque certains contacts ne sont pas câblés, afin de conserver les caractéristiques d’étanchéité, il est indispensable de prévoir un obturateur à l’arrière du contact : le contact doit être monté dans son alvéole avant l’obturateur. * Sauf arrangements 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 12-14 : outil 8500-93B First disassemble and slide connector rear accessory over cables. Insertion tools • Size 20 contacts* : pliers 8500-29B • Size 16 contacts : tool 8500-39. Use of insertion tools Manually insert the contact into the desired insert cavity. • Size 20 contacts : insert the wire between the pliers jaws, the tip of the jaws butting the contact shoulder. • Size 16 contacts : introduce the contact crimped section in the tool jaws, the tip of the tool butting against the contact main flange. Introduce contacts one by one in insert cavities pushing straight in until the contact snaps into position and the clip ensures contact retention. Filler plugs Where certain contacts are unwired and where it is necessary to fully maintain the connector’s sealing characteristics, a filler plug must be used. Note that the contact must be inserted before the filler plug. * Except 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 12-14 contact layouts : tool 8500-93B contact / contact fil / wire outil / tool Mise en place du contact dans l’outil Contact position in the tool sens du montage direction of filler plug insertion 54 851 Extraction des contacts à sertir / Crimp contact extraction Outils d’extraction Tous les contacts pour isolants à clips sont démontables à l’aide d’un outil semi-automatique : • contacts taille 20 : outil référence 8500-36A • contacts taille 16 : outil référence 8500-38A. Avant les opérations suivantes, démonter et faire glisser sur les câbles l’accessoire arrière du conducteur. • Ne pas agir sur le poussoir de l’outil. • Introduire par l’avant du connecteur (côté accouplement) le tube de l’outil sur le contact mâle ou femelle jusqu’au 1er repère pour les contacts mâles et au 2ème repère pour les contacts femelles. • Cette opération doit être effectuée délicatement, dans l’axe du contact à l’aide d’un léger mouvement rotatif. • Extraire le contact en actionnant le poussoir, retirer l’outil avec précaution et tirer sur le fil pour dégager l’ensemble fil-contact. Nota : les outils possèdent un système à ressort réglable (par le bouton moleté arrière), permettant ainsi le décrochage automatique du contact. Extraction tools All contacts for use in insulators with clips are extracted using a semi-automatic tool : • size 20 contacts : tool type 8500-36A • size 16 contacts : tool type 8500-38A. First dissassemble and slide connector rear accessory over cables. • Do not operate the tool slide button. • Bring the tool tip over the male or female contact to be removed from connector front (mating face) as far as the first mark for male contacts and the second mark for female contacts. • This operation, should be carried out delicately in a direction parallel to the contact centre line with a light turning action. • Extract contact pushing the slide button fully forward, carefully remove tool and pull wire to release the wire-contact assembly. Note : tools have an adjustable spring system (rear knurled knob) also for automatic contact disengagement. 1er repère first mark 2ème repère second mark 55 851 Schémas d’implantations pour circuits imprimés / Co-ordinates for PC tail contacts Isolant mâle, vue face arrière (côté soudure) Terminations viewed from male rear face (soldering side) Ø trous de perçage 0,90 mm min. (# 20) + trous de perçage 1,3 mm min. (# 16) tolérance de positionnement des trous sur carte Hole size : 0.90 mm min. (# 20) + Hole sizes : 1.3 mm min. (# 16) hole position tolerance. O Ø 0.10 14-5 12-3 12-8 12-10 14-12 14-15 14-18 10-6 10-7 10-98 12-2 8-2 8-4 8-3 8-3A/8-98 8-33 12-14 56 851 16-8 16-23 16-26 18-11 14-19 18-30 18-32 57 851 20-16 20-24 20-25 20-27 20-39 20-41 58 851 22-21 22-32 22-34 22-36 22-55 59 851 24-61 60 851 Prise largable push-pull / Push-pull locking plug Caractéristiques générales • Verrouillage : en poussant sur la bague • Déverrouillage : par traction sur la tirette de largage • Montage : sur toutes les embases 851 • Arrangements et contacts à sertir et à souder : (voir pages 10 et 14/15) • Autres caractéristiques : (voir page 9) Racine / Basic series version à sertir - crimp version 856 version à souder - solder version 856 06 06 R E • • • • • • • • P P • • 50 50 • • • • Type de boîtier / Shell type 06 08 Type de raccord / Backshell type R/E RC/EC RA/A RP/P RT/T RM/M *RT/*T RC/EC Taille de boîtier / Shell size 8 - 10 - 12 - 14 - 16 - 18 - 20 - 22 - 24 Arrangements / Contact layouts Voir tableau des arrangements page 14/15 - See table page 14/15 Type de contact/ Contact type P = mâle / male - S = femelle / female Positionnement / Orientation Normal (n’apparaît pas dans la référence) w, x, y, z - voir tableau page 16 Normal (not included in part number) w, x, y, z - see table page 16 Indice obligatoire / Obligatory suffix Spécification / Specification 07 08 09 General characteristics • Locking : by pushing on the coupling nut • Unlocking : by pulling a lanyard • Mounted : on all 851 receptacles • Layouts and crimp solder contacts : (see pages 10 and 14/15) • Other characteristics : (see page 9) Références / Ordering information fiche droite - plug for use with straight backshell fiche coudée - plug for use with 90° backshell raccord simple / backnut raccord droit à serre-câbles / straight cable clamp raccord droit intermédiaire / straight adaptor raccord droit pour potting / straight backshell for potting raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable / straight backshell for heatshrink sleeving raccord droit démontable pour gaine thermorétractable straight removable backshell for heatshrink sleeving spécification 38 ou/or 42: raccord droit démontable pour reprise de tresse et gaine thermorétractable / straight removable backshell for screen termination and heatshrink sleeving raccord coudé à serre-câbles / 90° cable clamp protection cadmié vert olive (version à souder) olive-green cadmium plating (solder version) protection cadmié vert olive (version à sertir) olive green cadmium plating (crimp version) protection cadmié blanc (version à sertir et à souder) white cadmium plating (crimp and solder version) 61 851 Taille de boîtier Shell size Dimensions 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 A 19.50 22.80 27.30 30.80 34.00 37.00 41.00 44.50 49.20 B 24.95 28.25 32.55 36.05 39.05 42.05 45.80 49.20 53.45 06 R E 32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 31.80 31.80 31.80 06 RC E 47.30 47.30 47.30 47.30 50.50 50.50 49.90 49.90 49.90 06 RP E 42.10 42.10 42.10 42.10 42.10 45.40 49.80 49.80 49.80 06 RA E 41.00 41.00 41.00 41.00 41.00 41.00 43.00 43.00 43.20 06 RM E 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 51.70 51.70 51.70 06 RT spécifications 38 ou/or 42 E 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 51.70 51.70 51.70 08RC E 50.10 52.60 54.90 58.50 60.80 65.00 68.80 71.20 76.20 D max 16.00 18.00 19.50 22.00 23.50 25.00 26.50 28.00 31.00 Nota : Encombrements des raccords, se reporter aux dimensions des pages précédentes Note : For backshells dimensioning, refer to values given in preceding pages Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm 62 851 Connecteurs filtres 8F51 / 8F51 filter connectors Généralités Ces connecteurs sont dérivés des spécifications standards MIL-DTL-26482 G série 1 - NFC 93422 (HE 301 B) - VG 95328. Ils sont interchangeables en fixation et intermariables avec les connecteurs standards. Différents types de filtres peuvent équiper ces connecteurs et permettent ainsi de supprimer les interférences RFI/EMI dans différentes gammes de fréquences. L’utilisation de ces connecteurs à filtres performants incorporés offre les avantages suivants : • Filtrage efficace des parasites à l’entrée ou à la sortie d’un équipement électronique, • Ecran de blindage du coffret conservé, • Encombrement et coût plus réduit par rapport à l’utilisation de filtres individuels câblés à l’arrière du connecteur, • Choix de 4 types de contacts standards - merci de nous consulter pour tout autre valeur de capacitance et type de filtre, • Possibilité de mixage de filtres dans le même arrangement : contacts filtrés, non filtrés et liés à la masse. La version adaptateur, également disponible, permet d’équiper simplement les systèmes existants non filtrés. Caractéristiques électriques • Intensité max. par contact 7.5 A (#20); 13 A (#16) • Tension max. de service 200 Vdc / 120 Vac • Types de filtre standard C, Pi • Valeur de capacitance typ. de 500 pF à 200 nF • Performance filtre Jusqu’à -60dB / -80dB Consulter pour ce produit notre département CONNECTEURS FILTRES. General information These connectors are derived from standard specifications MIL-DTL-26482 G series 1 - NFC 93422 (HE 301 B) - VG 95328. They are intermountable and intermateable with standard connectors. Different types of filters may be fitted in these connectors to eliminate RFI/EMI in different frequency ranges. Using built-in High Performance EMI filters offers the following advantages : • Efficient filtering on interferences at electronic equipment input or output, • Case screen-shielding efficiency is maintained, • Cost and volume saving as compared with the use of discrete filters wired down the line, • 4 types of standard filters are available - Please consult us for other capacitance and filter types, • Combinations of mixed filter in the same layout: filtered, non-filtered and grounded contacts available. An adaptor version is also a simple technique to equip existing systems which do not incorporate filters. Electrical characteristics • Max. current rating per contact 7.5 A (#20); 13 A (#16) • Max. operating voltage 200 Vdc / 120 Vac • Standard filter types C, Pi • Capacitance range typically 500 pF - 200 nF • Filter performance up to -60dB / -80dB For this product, consult our FILTER CONNECTOR department. 63 851 Connecteurs spécifiques et accessoires de connexion SNC SNC specific connectors and connection accessories Désignations Designations Références Part numbers • Traversée de cloison à collerette carrée, broches, douilles Boîtiers 8 à 24 : arrangements 8.03 / 10.06 / 12.10 / 14.19 / 16.26 / 18.32 / 20.41 / 22.55 / 24.61 Positionnements : N & W Protections : 085 cadmiage vert / 112 oxydation anodique noire brillante • Square flange through bulkhead, pins, sockets Shell sizes 8 to 24 : layouts 8.03 / 10.06 / 12.10 / 14.19 / 16.26 / 18.32 / 20.41 / 22.55 / 24.61 Insert rotations : N & W Plating : 085 green cadmium / 112 black anodized EC 52 B • Raccord coudé à serre-câbles à encombrement réduit, pour fiche 08RC Boîtiers 12, 14, 16, 18 et 22 • Short profile 90° backshell with cable clamp for 08 RC plug Shell sizes 12, 14, 16, 18 and 22 SN 556 • Connecteur fiche et embase Boîtier 24 équipé de 3 contacts # 16 - 7 contacts # 20 - 1 contact coaxial 50 Ω (pour câble KX 15) • Plug and receptacle connector Shell size 24 : contact layout = 3 contacts # 16, 7 contacts # 20, 1 coaxial contact 50 Ω (for KX15 cable) SN 775 P SN 775 S • Fiche shunt • Shunt plug SN 901 • Raccord droit en deux parties avec presse-étoupe et brides de serrage Boîtiers 8, 10 et 16 • Straight two-piece backshell with sealing gland and cable strap Shell sizes 8, 10 and 16 SN 946 • Fiche équipée d’une bague de verrouillage à oreilles Boîtiers 20, 22 et 24 • Plug with flanged coupling nut Shell sizes 20, 22 and 24 SN 1167 • Prolongateur de test, broches, douilles Boîtiers 8 à 24, arrangements avec contacts de # 20 • Cable connecting test connector, pins, sockets Shell sizes 8 to 24, arrangements with size contacts # 20 SN 1206 • Bague à oreilles avec vis pointeau adaptable sur fiche 851 Boîtiers 8 à 24 • Ring with lugs with cone-pointed grub screws fitting 851 plug Shell sizes 8 to 24 SN 1277 • Raccord coudé fermé avec cheminée pour reprise de tresse par magnétostriction Boîtiers 8 à 24 • Elbow backshell with closing sleeve for shield termination by magnaforming Shell sizes 8 to 24 SN 1533 • Embase type 07A à picots droits, démontage par l’avant Arrangements : 14.19 (N) / 16.26 (N) / 18.32 (N, X) / 20.41 (N, W, X, Y) / 22.55 (N, W, X, Y, Z) / 24.61 (N) Protection : cadmiage passivé vert • Jam nut receptacle with front release straight PC tails Layouts : 14.19 (N) / 16.26 (N) / 18.32 (N, X) / 20.41 (N, W, X, Y) / 22.55 (N, W, X, Y, Z) / 24.61 (N) Plating : passivated green cadmium SN 0378 Autres arrangements, nous consulter / Other layouts, please consult us 64 Notes / Notes 65 851 RJ45 Présentation / Presentation Le connecteur SOURIAU 851 RJ45 est une solution renforcée pour les applications de téléchargement / chargement de données en environnements sévères. Disponible en taille 18, ce connecteur existe en divers types de boîtiers et avec différentes terminaisons: Fiche avec cordon RJ45, traversée de cloison ou à souder pour les embases à collerette carrée et à fixation par écrou. Les principaux avantages de ce produit : • Une solution Ethernet cat5e - 10 Base T, 100 Base TX, ou 1000 Base T • Excellente résistance aux impacts & aux chocs - Boîtier renforcé • Connexion facile, fiable & sécurisée • Idéal pour les applications intérieures / extérieures - niveau d’étanchéité IP67 SOURIAU 851 RJ45 connector is a ruggedized solution for downloading / uploading data applications in harsh environments. Available in shell size 18, this connector offers multiple configurations and terminations: Cable pig tail for plug, feed through and solder out for both square flange and jam nut receptacle. Main advantages of this product : • A cat5e Ethernet solution - 10 Base T, 100 Base TX, or 1000 Base T capable • High impact & shock resistance - Ruggedized housing • Easy, reliable & secure mating • Suitable for Indoor / Outdoor applications - IP67 sealing level 66 851 RJ45 Mécaniques Matières • Boîtier Alliage d’aluminium • Insert Thermoplastique • Contacts Alliage cuivre Protection • Boîtier Cadmié vert olive Oxydation anodique noire Nickelé • Contacts Or Mécanique • Selon MIL-DTL-26482, 500 manoeuvres Mechanical Material • Shell Aluminium alloy • Insert Thermoplastic • Contacts Copper alloy Plating • Shell Olive drab cadmium Black anodized Nickel • Contacts Gold Mechanical • per MIL-DTL-26482, 500 mating cycles Electriques 10 BaseT, 100 Base TX et 1000 BaseT Cat 5e selon TIA/EIA 568A/B Electrical 10 BaseT, 100 Base TX and 1000 BaseT Cat 5e per TIA/EIA 568A/B Climatiques • Etanchéité IP67 avec un bouchon • Température -40°C à +85°C • Résistance aux fluides : selon MIL-DTL-26482 avec un bouchon Climatic • Sealing IP67 with protective cap • Temperature -40°C to +85°C • Fluid resistance : per MIL-DTL-26482 with protective cap Caractéristiques techniques / Technical characteristics Références / Ordering information Racine / Basic series 851 Ruggedized Receptacle connectors 00 00 8 J C S N OD - - - Type de boîtier / Shell type 00 01 07 06 Type de raccord / Backshell type 00 RC RT Taille de boîtier / Shell size 8 Insert / Insert J Arrangements / Layouts F S CP Style de contact / Contact style SP Orientation / Polarization N Normal W, X, Y, Z autre orientations / other polarizations Protection / Plating OD 031 44 Spécification / Specification Nous consulter pour une configuration personnalisée / Consult factory for custom configuration Embase à collerette carrée (acceptant un raccord) Square flange receptacle (accepting backshell) Prolongateur / Cable connecting receptacle Embase à fixation par écrou / Jam nut receptacle Fiche (acceptant un raccord) / Plug (accepting backshell) Pas de raccord / no backshell Serre câbles droit / Straight cable clamp Raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable / Straight backshell for heat shrink tubing RJ45 (size 18) RJ45 Traversée de cloison / Feedthrough A souder / Solder Embase avec cordon RJ45 / Pig tail receptacle Fiche avec cordon RJ45 / Pig tail plug Embase / Receptacle Fiche / Plug Protection vert olive cadmiée / Olive drab cadmium Oxydation anodique noire / Black anodized Nickelé / Nicke 67 851 RJ45 Embase RJ45 à collerette carrée à souder Square flange RJ45 feedthrough solder out Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 22.98 1.32 Encombrements / Dimensions Embase RJ45 à collerette carrée Square flange RJ45 feedthrough Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 30.91 1.32 Embase RJ45 à fixation par écrou Jam nut RJ45 feedthrough Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 23.39 2.64 PIN I □ 27.0 44.1 ‘A’ ‘B’ PIN I □ 32.3 PIN I 44.1 ‘A’ ‘B’ PIN I ø 44.2 PIN I □ 27.0 10.7 ‘A’ ‘B’ 30.8 ø 1.4 □ 32.3 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm Fiche avec cordon RJ45 Cable plug RJ45 Shell type ‘A’ Aluminium 304.8 PIN I 76.0±6 ‘A’ 52.4 PIN I 25.4±6.3 Master key Livrée en standard avec un câble de dimension ‘A’ / Come with a cable - dimension ‘A’ - in standard. 68 851 RJ45 Embase à collerette carrée avec cordon RJ45 Square flange RJ45 feedthrough Pig tail Embase à fixation par écrou avec cordon RJ45 Jam nut RJ45 feedthrough Pig tail Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ Aluminium 30.91 1.32 304.8±25.4 Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ Aluminium 23.39 2.64 304.8±25.4 PIN I 25.4 ‘A’ ‘B’ End ‘B’ PIN I ‘C’* 25.4 End ‘A’ PIN I 25.4 ‘A’ ‘B’ End ‘B’ PIN I ‘C’* 25.4 End ‘A’ Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm * Longueur du câble mesurée à partir de l’avant de la collerette / Cable length is measured from the front face of the flange. Embase RJ45 à fixation par écrou à souder Jam nut RJ45 feedthrough solder out Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 15.27 2.64 PIN I 10.7 ‘A’ ‘B’ 24.6 ø 44.2 ø 1.4 Livrée en standard avec un câble de dimension ‘C’ Come with a cable - dimension ‘C’ - in standard. Livrée en standard avec un câble de dimension ‘C’ Come with a cable - dimension ‘C’ - in standard. Perçage de cloison Panel cut-out Embase à collerette carrée Square flange receptacle Embase à fixation par écrou Jam nut receptacle Epaisseur maximum du panneau : 4.75 mm Maximum panel thickness : 4.75 mm Epaisseur maximum du panneau : 0.41mm min / 3.18 mm max Maximum panel thickness : 0.41 mm min / 3.18 mm max ø 30.5 □ 27.9 4 x 2.5 Rear mounting ø 32.1 30.55 69 851 USB Présentation / Presentation Le connecteur SOURIAU 851 USB est une solution renforcée pour les applications de téléchargement / chargement de données en environnements sévères. Disponible en taille 16, ce connecteur existe en divers types de boîtiers et avec différentes terminaisons: Fiche avec cordon USB, traversée de cloison ou à souder pour les embases à collerette carrée et à fixation par écrou. Les principaux avantages de ce produit : • Excellente résistance aux impacts & aux chocs - Boîtier renforcé • Connexion facile, fiable & sécurisée • Idéal pour les applications intérieures / extérieures - niveau d’étanchéité IP67 SOURIAU 851 USB connector is a ruggedized solution for downloading / uploading data applications in harsh environments. Available in shell size 16, this connector offers multiple configurations and terminations: Cable pig tail for plug, feed through and solder out for both square flange and jam nut receptacle. Main advantages of this product : • High impact & shock resistance - Ruggedized housing • Easy, reliable & secure mating • Suitable for Indoor / Outdoor applications - IP67 sealing level 70 851 USB Mécaniques Matières • Boîtier Alliage d’aluminium • Insert Thermoplastique • Contacts Alliage cuivre Protection • Boîtier Cadmié vert olive Oxydation anodique noire Nickelé • Contacts Or Mécanique • Selon MIL-C-26484, 500 manoeuvres Mechanical Material • Shell Aluminium alloy • Insert Thermoplastic • Contacts Copper alloy Plating • Shell Olive drab cadmium Black anodized Nickel • Contacts Gold Mechanical • per MIL-C-26484, 500 mating cycles Electriques 10 BaseT, 100 Base TX Cat 5e selon TIA/EIA 568A/B Electrical 10 BaseT, 100 Base TX Cat 5e per TIA/EIA 568A/B Climatiques • Etanchéité IP67 avec bouchon • Température de -40°C à +85°C • Résistance aux fluides : selon MIL-C-26484 avec bouchon Climatic • Sealing IP67 with protective cap • Temperature range : -40°C to +85°C • Fluid resistance : per MIL-C-26484 with protective cap Caractéristiques techniques / Technical characteristics Références / Ordering information Racine / Basic series 851 Ruggedized Receptacle connectors 00 00 6 A C S N OD - - - Type de boîtier / Shell type 00 01 07 06 Type de raccord / Backshell type 00 RC RT Taille de boîtier / Shell size 6 Insert / Insert A B Arrangements / Layouts F S CP Style de contact / Contacts style SP Orientation / Polarization N Normal W, X, Y, Z autres orientations / other polarizations Protection / Plating OD 031 44 Spécification / Specification Nous consulter pour une configuration personnalisée / Consult factory for custom configuration Embase à collerette carrée (acceptant un raccord) Square flange receptacle (accepting backshell) Prolongateur / Cable connecting receptacle Embase à fixation par écrou / Jam nut receptacle Fiche (acceptant un raccord) / Plug (accepting backshell) Pas de raccord / no backshell Serre câbles droit / Straight cable clamp Raccord droit pour gaine thermorétractable / Straight backshell for heat shrink tubing USB (size 16) USB Type A USB Type B Traversée de cloison / Feedthrough A souder / Solder Embase avec cordon USB / Pig tail receptacle Fiche avec cordon USB / Pig tail plug Embase / Receptacle Fiche / Plug Protection vert olive cadmiée / Olive drab cadmium Oxydation anodique noire / Black anodized Nickelé / Nickel 71 851 USB Embase USB à collerette carrée à souder Square flange USB feedthrough solder out Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 15.16 1.32 Encombrements / Dimensions Embase USB à collerette carrée Square flange USB feedthrough Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 24.82 1.32 Embase USB à fixation par écrou Jam nut USB feedthrough Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 17.30 2.64 PIN I □ 24.6 37.8 ‘A’ ‘B’ □ 30.9 PIN I PIN I 37.8 ‘A’ ‘B’ ø 41.0 PIN I PIN I □ 30.9 10.7 ‘A’ ‘B’ 24.5 ø 1.6 □ 24.6 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm Fiche avec cordon USB USB cable plug Shell type ‘A’ Aluminium 304.8 PIN I 12.7±6.35 ‘A’ 38.2 50.8 Master key La fiche USB standard est livrée avec un câble de dimesion ‘A’. Standard USB plug come with a cable - dimension ‘A’. 65.5 USB-A plug USB-A receptacle 72 851 USB Embase USB à fixation par écrou à souder Jam nut USB feedthrough solder out Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ Aluminium 7.65 2.64 PIN I ø 41.0 ‘A’ ‘B’ 18.3 10.7 Embase à collerette carrée avec cordon USB Square flange USB feedthrough Pig tail Embase à fixation par écrou avec cordon USB Jam nut USB feedthrough Pig tail Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ Aluminium 24.82 1.32 304.8±25.4 Shell type ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ Aluminium 17.30 2.64 304.8±25.4 PIN I 25.4 ‘A’ ‘B’ PIN I ‘C’* 25.4 □ 30.9 □ 24.6 PIN I 25.4 ‘A’ ‘B’ PIN I ‘C’* 25.4 ø 41.0 Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm *Longueur du câble mesurée à partir de l’avant de la collerette / Cable length is measured from the front face of the flange. Perçage de cloison Panel cut-out Embase à collerette carrée Square flange receptacle Embase à fixation par écrou Jam nut receptacle Epaisseur maximum du panneau / Maximum panel thickness : - Montage par l’avant / Front mounting: 3.20 mm - Montage par l’arrière / Rear mounting : 2.49 mm Epaisseur maximum du panneau : 3.20 mm Maximum panel thickness : 2.49 mm ø 28.45 ø 4 x 3.15 □ 24.6 Panel mounting ø 32.1 □ 30.4 Livrée en standard avec un câble de dimension ‘C’ Come with a cable - dimension ‘C’ - in standard. Livrée en standard avec un câble de dimension ‘C’ Come with a cable - dimension ‘C’ - in standard. 73 8XE Présentation / Presentation SOURIAU overmolded 851 connector utilises high impact glass filled plastic offering a great impact & shock resistance as well as an ergonomic shape of the coupling ring. Suitable backshell in same plastic material allows IP68 sealing level. • High impact & shock resistance (drop & crush resistance • Easy, reliable & secure mating • Excellent sealing performance : IP68 (120 hours under 15 m water ) /IP69K • High salt spray resistance • Enhanced cable sealing • Intermateable & interchangeable with MIL-DTL-26482 • Design flexibility Le connecteur 851 surmoulé SOURIAU est en plastique, chargé verre, haute performance offrant une excellente résistance aux impacts & chocs ainsi qu’une forme ergonomique de la bague de verrouillage. Le raccord, utilisant la même matière plastique permet d’obtenir un niveau d’étanchéité IP68. • Excellente résistance aux impacts & aux chocs (aux chutes & à l’écrasement) • Connexion facile, fiable & sécurisée • Excellentes performances d’étanchéité IP68 (120 heures sous 15 m d’eau) / IP69K • Excellente résistance au brouillard salin • Excellente étanchéité sur le câble • Intermariable & interchangeable avec les connecteurs MIL-DTL-26482 • Flexibilité de configuration 74 8XE Mécaniques • Endurance • Boîtier • Insert • Contacts • Enveloppe extérieure Plastique chargé verre haute résistance • Joint bague de verrouillage Teflon sur silicone Mechanical • Durability • Shell • Insert • Contacts • Housing • Coupling ring seal Electriques • Résistance d’isolement 5000 MΩ • Tension de tenue 2300 V • Résistance contact 3 MΩ • Intensité admissible par contact Taille16 : 13 A / Taille 20 : 7.5 A Electrical • Insulation resistance 5000 MΩ • Dielectric withstanding voltage 2300 V • Contact resistance 3 MΩ • Current rating per contact Size 16: 13 A / Size 20: 7.5 A Climatiques • Température d’utilisation -55°C à +125°C • Etanchéité Interface IP68 (jusqu’à 120 heures sous 15 mètres d’eau) • Résistance aux produits chimiques selon MIL-DTL-26482 Série 1 Climatic • Working temperature -55°C to +125°C • Sealing Interfacial IP68 (up to 120 hours under 15 meters of water) • Resistance to chemicals in accordance with MIL-DTL-26482 Series 1 Acceptance câbles • Câble Gauge 14 max. • Diamètre gaine extérieure: Toutes tailles jusqu’à 11.17 mm Cable acceptance • Primaries wire Gauge 14 max. • Outer jacket all popular sizes up to 11.17 mm 500 manoeuvres min. Alliage d’aluminium - anodisé dur Elastomer néoprène Alliage de cuivre - protection or 500 mating min. Aluminium alloy - hard anodized Neoprene elastomer Copper alloy with gold plating High impact glass filled plastic Teflon over silicone Références / Ordering information Racine / Basic series 8XE Connecteur pour environnment EXTREME / connector for EXTREME environment 06 - 16 8 P - BL V8 - - - Type de boîtier / Connector type 01 Prolongateur / Cable connecting receptacle 06 Fiche / Plug Type de contact / Contact type Pas de digit / No digit à souder / to solder R à sertir / to crimp Taille de boîtier / Shell size 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 22 Arrangements / Layouts Voir page suivante / See next page Sexe du contact / Contact gender P Mâle / male S Femelle / female Orientations / Insert orientations Pas de digit / No digit Normal (n’apparaît pas dans lé référence) / Standard (not included in part number) W, X, Y, Z autres orientations / other orientations Couleur / Color Pas de digit / No digit Gris / Mink (standard) BL Bleu / Blue YE Jaune / Yellow RE Rouge / Red Autres couleurs disponibles / Others available Specification / Design variation V8 Boîtier renforcé en taille 16 & 20 / ruggedized shells in size 16 & 20 AA Boîtier inox renforcé en taille 16 & 20 (Ø câble 8 mm) / ruggedized stainless steel shells in size 16 & 20 (cable Ø 8 mm) Diamètre du câble / Cable diameter Personnalisation possible / Custom available Caractéristiques techniques / Technical characteristics 75 8XE 10 6 6 Ø 1 (#20) 7 7 Ø 1 (#20) 98 6 Ø 1 (#20) 12 3 3 Ø 1.6 (#16) 8 8 Ø 1 (#20) 10 10 Ø 1 (#20) 14 14 Ø 1 (#20) 2 2 Ø 1.6 (#16) 12 8 Ø 1 (#20) 4 Ø 1.6 (#16) 15 14 Ø 1 (#20) 1 Ø 1.6 (#16) 18 18 Ø 1 (#20) 19 19 Ø 1 (#20) 5 5 Ø 1.6 (#16) 16 8 8 Ø 1.6 (#16) 23 22 Ø 1 (#20) 1 Ø 1.6 (#16) 26 26 Ø 1 (#20) 16 16 Ø 1.6 (#16) 39 37 Ø 1 (#20) 2 Ø 1.6 (#1.6) 41 41 Ø 1 (#20) 24 24 Ø 1 (#20) 25 25 Ø 1 (#20) 36 36 Ø 1 (#20) 55 55 Ø 1 (#20) 32 32 Ø 1 (#20) 34 34 Ø 1 (#20) 21 21 Ø 1.6 (#16) 27 27 Ø 1 (#20) 14 20 Arrangements / Contact layouts Vue de face avant isolant mâle / Viewed from front face of male insulator 22 76 8XE Note : toutes les dimensions sont en mm / all dimensions are in mm Encombrements / Dimensions Fiche / Plug Shell sizes Ø A B C 10 24.9 51.2 104.5 12 27.9 51.2 103.7 14 33.0 57.6 110.8 16 36.2 63.9 122.2 20 43.7 108.4 197.1 22 48.8 91.4 184.1 16 specif.V8 41.9 83.4 172 20 specif. V8 47 91.4 184.2 Orientations Viewed from front face of male insulator (receptacle or plug) Shell sizes Layouts Angle in degrees W X Y Z 10 6 90 - - - 7* 90 - - - 98 90 180 240 270 12 3 - - 180 - 8 90 112 203 292 10 60 155 270 295 2 - - - - 14* 45 14 5 40 92 184 273 12 43 90 - - 15 17 110 155 234 18 15 90 180 270 19 30 165 315 - 16 8 54 152 180 331 23 158 270 - - 26 60 - 275 338 20 16 238 318 333 347 39 63 144 252 333 41 45 126 225 - 24 70 145 215 290 25 72 144 216 288 27 72 144 216 288 22 21 16 135 175 349 36 72 144 216 288 55 30 142 226 314 32 72 145 215 288 34 62 142 218 298 Normal W X Y * 10-7 & 12-14 layouts, W non standard orientation C B Ø A Z 77 851 Protection non cadmiée Cadmium free plating SOURIAU propose des connecteurs 851 avec une protection noire non cadmiée. Cette protection zinc-nickel a été développée pour répondre aux nouvelles exigences en matière de respect de l’environnement (directive Européenne 76/769 EEC). Raison : • Réduire le niveau de pollution par métaux lourds produit par le cadmium • Réduire les risques de santé engendrés par les produits cadmiés. Caractéristiques : • Mécaniques - boîtiers : aluminium - protection : zinc-nickel • Electriques - continuité électrique des boîtiers : ≤ 2,5 mΩ • Climatiques - tenue au brouillard salin : 500 heures Références : Exemples* : • Version à souder 851 00 E 8-3A P.54 protection zinc-nickel • Version à sertir 851 00 R 8-3A P.54 protection zinc-nickel * Voir système de référence - page 11 (version à souder et à sertir) - page 13 (version à picots et connexions enroulées) Cette protection est disponible pour les boîtiers de type : - 00: embase à collerette carrée avec possibilité de raccord - 02: embase à collerette carrée sans possibilité de raccord - 07: embase à fixation par écrou avec possibilité de raccord - 07A: embase à fixation par écrou sans possibilité de raccord - 01: prolongateur - 06: fiche droite sans bague de blindage - 36: fiche droite avec bague de blindage Raccords, nous consulter. SOURIAU propose a 851 connector with cadmium free plating black. This zinc-nickel plating has been introduced in accordance with European Herth and Safety requirements (European directive 76/769 EEC). Reason : • Reduction in level of heavy metal pollutants produced by cadmium. • Reduction in health associated with the corrosive by products of cadmium. Characteristics : • Mechanical - shell : aluminium alloy - plating : zinc-nickel • Electrical - shell continuity : ≤ 2.5 mΩ • Climatic - salt spray : 500 hours Part numbers : Examples* : • Solder version 851 00 E 8-3A P.54 zinc-nickel plating • Crimp version 851 00 R 8-3A P.54 zinc-nickel plating * See part numbers system - page 11 (solder and crimp version) - page 13 (straight PC tails and wire-wrap versions) This plating is available for shell type : - 00: square flange receptacle accepting backshells - 02: square flange receptacle not accepting backshells - 07: jam nut receptacle accepting backshells - 07A: jam nut receptacle not accepting backshells - 01: cable connecting receptacle - 06: plug for use without straight backshell - 36: screened plug for use with straight backshells Backshells, please consult us. 78 Notes / Notes IND851CA03ENFRW © SOURIAU - April 2009 - All information in this document presents only general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. All rights reserved to SOURIAU for changes without prior notification or public announcement. Any duplication is prohibited, unless approved in writing. www.souriau.com www.souriau-industrial.com contactindustry@souriau.com 21 UT0 Metal circular connector Description “UT0” industrial circular connectors are a range of multiway connectors available in 8 shell sizes and 8 insert arrangements all intermateable, interchangeable and intermountable with the TRIM TRIO “UTG” and “UTP industrial connector families. “UT0” is equipped with identical shells from military connectors complying to MIL-C-26482 spec. Strong and rugged built to resist every environmental and mechanical requirement for indoor and outdoor applications. Amongst several characteristics, “UT0” offers possibilities on: Shielding, High levels on sealing and salt spray. UT0 is also the perfect solution to connect cat5e Ethernet applications in combination with other signals, using the same TRIM TRIO contacts (consult factory for more info). Features and benefits (see p2) • Suitable for shielding applications • Available in 8 shell sizes and 8 insert arrangements. • Available in plug and receptacle versions for both male and female contacts. • Different insert orientations possible. • Plastic inserts with flammability rating: UL94-V0. • 2 levels of water protection: Dynamic IP67 and IP68 both versions are IP69K • 2 levels of salt spray: 48h and 96h Higher salt spray resistance (200/500h) upon request • Cat5e Ethernet compatible. Can be combined with other signals offering the advantage to use same contacts (consult factory). • UL recognition in process. • Metal bayonet ring: - Metal wave spring loaded - Locks with audible positive “click” - Assures 500 matings and unmatings • RoHS compliant Performance characteristics Operating temp: -40°C to +105°C Insulation resistance: 5000 MΩ min. Test potential: 2000 VAC Durability: 500 matings and unmatings. Vibration Per MIL-STD202 resistance: method 204 Thermal shock: Per MIL-STD202 method 207 Corrosion: Salt spray per MIL-STD 202 method 101 48h (standard version) 96h (black anodised coupling ring) Higher salt spray resistance (200/500h) upon request Shielding effectiveness: 95 dB at 1 Mhz Degree of water protection per DIN 40050: Dynamic IP67 / IP68 / IP69K in mated condition and in combination with sealed back shell. How to order H or H6 – – – – H –– PS 12 12 14 14 06 UT0 UT0 Body variation: 0 : Wall mounting receptacle 6 : Cable plug 7 : Jam nut receptacle for rear panel mounting Shell size: Insert arrangement: Type of contacts: P : Pin contacts S : Socket contacts Insert polarisation: No letter : Standard version W, X, Y, Z: Different orientations (consult factory) Application: H : Standard version, water protected IP 67 & IP 69K H6 : Water protected IP 68 & IP 69K (only needed for wall mounting & jam nut receptacles) Design variation: No letter : Standard version Others : Special versions Plating: No letter : Standard is nickel plating (48h salt spray) 01: Black anodised jam nut (96h salt spray) 02: Black anodised coupling ring (96h salt spray) new Construction Shells: Zinc alloy Backshells and cable glands: Brass Coupling ring: Aluminium alloy Coupling spring: Spring stainless steel Insert: Glass-filled thermoplast UL94-V0 RoHS compliant Contact accommodation • “UT0” connectors accept TRIM TRIO size 16 crimp-type removable snap-lock contacts (see contacts section) • Contacts to be ordered seperately. Dynamic IP68 / IP69K High salt spray resistance RoHS compliant 2 New UT0 - UT0W series New UT0 – UT0W series: • The exclusive new product range in the TRIM TRIO broadline. • Aesthetic and top class performances UT0 – UT0W series major technical features & benefits For detailed information on UT0 and UT0W series offering see pages 21 to 31 • Full metal bayonet connector – Enabling 500 mating-unmating without wear out – Secure locking device: audible “click” when mating • In accordance with following standards – UT0 is Ethernet Cat5e compatible (consult factory) – UTO-UTOW ranges are upgradeable to highspeed solutions • RoHS compliant – Cadmium and lead free materials are used • High salt spray resistance* – Can be used in severe environment * Exists in 48 and 96 hours salt spray version * Higher salt spray resistance (e.g. 200 or 500 hours) upon request • Dynamic IP68* Connector will remain IP68 even when: – Pulling on the cable – Bending the cable * With appropriate back shell * Exists also in IP67 version • Dynamic IP69K* Connector withstands high pressure water cleaning. * With appropriate back shell New UT0-UT0W series 22 UT0 Cable plug for pin contacts (UT06- - - -PH) Part number Shell Ø A ±0.2 B max. Ø C ±0.15 Ø D ±0.15 E ±0.25 size UT06104PH 10 21.80 10.2 20.00 UT06128PH 12 26.10 13.4 23.60 UT061412PH 14 29.30 16.7 26.80 23.25 UT061619PH 16 32.45 33.00 19.7 30.00 UT061823PH 18 35.25 21.7 33.30 UT062028PH 20 38.80 24.9 36.55 UT062235PH 22 42.00 28.1 39.50 25.20 UT062448PH 24 45.05 31.2 42.60 Cable plug for socket contacts (UT06- - - -SH) Part number Shell Ø A ±0.2 B max. Ø C ±0.15 Ø D ±0.15 E ±0.25 size UT06104SH 10 21.80 10.2 20.00 UT06128SH 12 26.10 13.4 23.60 UT061412SH 14 29.30 33.00 16.7 26.80 23.25 UT061619SH 16 32.45 19.7 30.00 UT061823SH 18 35.25 21.7 33.30 UT062028SH 20 38.80 24.9 36.55 UT062235SH 22 42.00 27.30 28.1 39.50 25.20 UT062448SH 24 45.05 31.2 42.60 Part numbers are suitable for both IP67 and IP68 water protection For 96h salt spray version add ”02” behind “H” e.g. UT061412PH02 (only bayonet ring will be black anodised) Part numbers are suitable for both IP67 and IP68 water protection For 96h salt spray version add ”02” behind “H” e.g. UT061412SH02 (only bayonet ring will be black anodised) new E ± 0,25 E ± 0,25 Dynamic IP68 / IP69K High salt spray resistance RoHS compliant 23 UT0 Wall mounting receptacle for pin contacts (UT00----PH/PH6) Wall mounting receptacle for socket contacts (UT00----SH/SH6) Part number IP67 IP68 Shell size A max. B ± 0.3 C ± 0.2 Ø D ± 0.15 E ± 0.25 F ± 0.25 Ø G ± 0.1 Ø H ± 0.1 Ø J ± 0.1 UT00104PH UT00104PH6 10 33.23 1.6 11.35 15.0 18.3 23.8 3.2 17.3 14.2 UT00128PH UT00128PH6 12 19.0 20.6 26.2 21.8 18.4 UT001412PH UT001412PH6 14 22.2 23.0 28.6 25.0 21.5 UT001619PH UT001619PH6 16 25.3 24.6 31.0 28.1 24.6 UT001823PH UT001823PH6 18 28.5 26.9 33.3 31.3 27.8 UT002028PH UT002028PH6 20 34.75 2.4 14.55 31.7 29.4 36.5 34.5 30.9 UT002235PH UT002235PH6 22 34.9 31.8 39.7 37.7 34.1 UT002448PH UT002448PH6 24 15.35 38.0 34.9 42.9 3.9 40.9 37.3 Part numbers are suitable for both 48h and 96h salt spray. A square sealing has to be ordered separately to guarantee a sealing with equipment. Refer to “Circular accessories” section (UTFD--). Part numbers are suitable for both 48h and 96h salt spray. A square sealing has to be ordered separately to guarantee a sealing with equipment. Refer to “Circular accessories” section (UTFD--). Part number IP67 IP68 Shell size A max. B ± 0.3 C ± 0.2 Ø D ± 0.15 E ± 0.25 F ± 0.25 Ø G ± 0.1 Ø H ± 0.1 Ø J ± 0.1 UT00104SH UT00104SH6 10 25.20 1.6 11.35 15.0 18.3 23.8 3.2 17.3 14.2 UT00128SH UT00128SH6 12 19.0 20.6 26.2 21.8 18.4 UT001412SH UT001412SH6 14 22.2 23.0 28.6 25.0 21.5 UT001619SH UT001619SH6 16 25.3 24.6 31.0 28.1 24.6 UT001823SH UT001823SH6 18 28.5 26.9 33.3 31.3 27.8 UT002028SH UT002028SH6 20 29.00 2.4 14.55 31.7 29.4 36.5 34.5 30.9 UT002235SH UT002235SH6 22 34.9 31.8 39.7 37.7 34.1 UT002448SH UT002448SH6 24 15.35 38.0 34.9 42.9 3.9 40.9 37.3 new B ± 0,3 B ± 0,3 Ø G ± 0,1 Dynamic IP68 / IP69K High salt spray resistance RoHS compliant 24 UT0 Jam nut receptacle for pin contacts (UT07----PH/PH6) - suitable for rear panel mounting Jam nut receptacle for socket contacts (UT07---SH/SH6) - suitable for rear panel mounting Part number IP67 IP68 Shell size Ø A ± 0.15 B ± 0.2 D Max. F Max. G ± 0.25 H ± 0.3 K ± 0.25 L ± 0.2 Ø M ± 0.2 UT07104PH UT07104PH6 10 14.9 19.30 33.90 3.2 27.0 22.2 16.6 17.0 17.7 UT07128PH UT07128PH6 12 19.0 31.8 27.0 20.8 21.2 22.5 UT071412PH UT071412PH6 14 22.2 34.9 30.2 23.9 24.3 25.7 UT071619PH UT071619PH6 16 25.3 38.1 33.3 27.1 27.5 28.7 UT071823PH UT071823PH6 18 28.5 41.3 36.5 30.3 30.6 32.0 UT072028PH UT072028PH6 20 31.7 24.70 39.00 6.4 46.1 39.7 33.4 33.8 35.2 UT072235PH UT072235PH6 22 34.9 49.2 42.9 36.6 37.0 38.4 UT072448PH UT072448PH6 24 38.0 25.50 40.50 53.4 46.0 39.8 40.1 41.5 For 96h salt spray version add ”01” at the end of the part number e.g. UT071412PH601 (only jam nut will be black anodised) For 96h salt spray version add ”01” at the end of the part number e.g. UT071412PH601 (only jam nut will be black anodised) Part number IP67 IP68 Shell size Ø A ± 0.15 B ± 0.2 D Max. F Max. G ± 0.25 H ± 0.3 K ± 0.25 L ± 0.2 Ø M ± 0.2 UT07104SH UT07104SH6 10 14.9 19.30 33.00 3.2 27.0 22.2 16.6 17.0 17.7 UT07128SH UT07128SH6 12 19.0 31.8 27.0 20.8 21.2 22.5 UT071412SH UT071412SH6 14 22.2 34.9 30.2 23.9 24.3 25.7 UT071619SH UT071619SH6 16 25.3 38.1 33.3 27.1 27.5 28.7 UT071823SH UT071823SH6 18 28.5 41.3 36.5 30.3 30.6 32.0 UT072028SH UT072028SH6 20 31.7 24.70 39.00 6.4 46.1 39.7 33.4 33.8 35.2 UT072235SH UT072235SH6 22 34.9 49.2 42.9 36.6 37.0 38.4 UT072448SH UT072448SH6 24 38.0 25.50 40.50 53.4 46.0 39.8 40.1 41.5 new Dynamic IP68 / IP69K High salt spray resistance RoHS compliant connectors on request on request on request 41 Circular accessories Plastic cable clamp with strain relief (UTG--AC) Part number Shell Cable range Ø A ± 0.4 L ± 0.5 size Ø UTG10AC 10 3.0 - 8.70 21.0 40.0 UTG12AC 12 3.0 - 12.8 24.0 40.0 UTG14AC 14 4.0 - 13.8 27.0 46.0 UTG16AC 16 5.0 - 17.0 30.2 46.0 UTG18AC 18 5.0 - 19.0 33.3 50.0 UTG20AC 20 5.0 - 21.0 36.5 55.0 UTG22AC 22 5.0 - 23.0 39.7 60.0 UTG24AC 24 8.0 - 27.0 42.9 65.0 Plastic cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected (IP65) applications (UTG--PG) Part number Shell Sealing* L ± 1 A ± 0.5 size outer dia x inner dia’s UTG10PG 10 13.5 x 5 x 8 54 21.0 UTG12PG 12 16 x 7 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 57 24.0 UTG14PG 14 18.5 x 7 x 105 x 13 x 16 62 27.0 UTG16PG 16 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 68 30.2 UTG18PG 18 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 71 33.3 UTG20PG 20 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22 82 36.5 UTG22PG 22 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22 88 39.7 UTG24PG 24 35 x 19 x 23 x 27 x 31 103 42.9 *In order to accommodate different cable dia’s, the sealing exisits of different layers which can be pulled out easily. Cable clamp has a PG style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Suitable for UTP-UTG Suitable for UTP-UTG 42 Circular accessories Plastic cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected (IP65) applications (UTG--ST) Part number Shell Cable range Dia. A ± 0.5 L ± 1 size UTG10ST 10 2 - 6 21.0 64 UTG12ST 12 3 - 7 24.0 64 UTG14ST 14 6 - 9 27.0 69 UTG16ST 16 7 - 12 30.2 72 UTG18ST 18 33.3 76 UTG20ST 20 9 - 16 36.5 80 UTG22ST 22 39.7 86 UTG24ST 24 13 - 20 42.9 91 Metal cable clamp with strain relief (UT0--AC) Cable clamp has a PG style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular Part number Shell size Max cable dia. Excl. sealing Ø A±0.2 B maxi C maxi UT010AC 10 5.0 16.3 21.6 31.0 UT012AC 12 8.2 19.4 25.0 31.5 UT014AC 14 10.0 22.5 27.4 34.0 UT016AC 16 13.0 25.8 29.4 34.0 UT018AC 18 16.0 29.2 35.2 31.4 UT020AC 20 16.0 32.5 35.2 32.0 UT022AC 22 19.3 35.7 41.1 31.0 UT024AC 24 20.6 38.8 42.4 31.0 For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Suitable for UTP-UTG Suitable for UT0-UT0W 43 Circular accessories Short cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JCS) Long cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JC) Part number Shell size Clamping range (Ø en mm) min / max L± 1 Short Thread A version Long version Short version Long version UT010JCS UT010JC 10 03 / 06 48.5 60.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT012JCS UT012JC 12 06 / 10 49.5 61.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT014JCS UT014JC 14 06 / 10 53.5 67.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT016JCS UT016JC 16 9.5 / 14 62.5 73.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT018JCS UT018JC 18 9.5 / 14 65.5 76.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT020JCS UT020JC 20 11.5 / 18 70.5 84.0 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT022JCS UT022JC 22 11.5 / 18 76.5 88.0 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT024JCS UT024JC 24 11.5 / 18 82.0 92.0 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A Short cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JCSL) Long cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JCL) Part number Shell size Clamping range (Ø en mm) min / max L± 1 Short Thread A version Long version Short version Long version UT010JCSL UT010JCL 10 05 / 08 49.5 61.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT012JCSL UT012JCL 12 08 / 12 49.5 62.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT014JCSL UT014JCL 14 08 / 12 54.5 68.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT016JCSL UT016JCL 16 11.5 / 18 68.5 79.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT018JCSL UT018JCL 18 11.5 / 18 71.5 82.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT020JCSL UT020JCL 20 15 / 24 77.5 91.0 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT022JCSL UT022JCL 22 15 / 24 83.5 95.0 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT024JCSL UT024JCL 24 15 / 24 89.0 99.0 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Suitable for UT0-UT0W Suitable for UT0-UT0W 44 Circular accessories Short shielded cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JCS) Long shielded cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JC) Part number Shell size Clamping range (Ø en mm) min / max L± 1 Short Thread A version Long version Short version Long version UT0S10JCS UT0S10JC 10 04 / 6.5 58.5 70.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT0S12JCS UT0S12JC 12 07 / 10.5 61.5 74.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT0S14JCS UT0S14JC 14 07 / 10.5 66.5 80.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT0S16JCS UT0S16JC 16 10 / 14.5 72.5 83.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT0S18JCS UT0S18JC 18 10 / 14.5 75.5 86.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT0S20JCS UT0S20JC 20 13.5 / 18 84.5 97.5 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT0S22JCS UT0S22JC 22 13.5 / 18 90.0 101.5 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT0S24JCS UT0S24JC 24 13.5 / 18 95.5 105.5 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A Short shielded cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JCSL) Long shielded cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JCL) Part number Shell size Clamping range (Ø en mm) min / max L± 1 Short Thread A version Long version Short version Long version UT0S10JCSL UT0S10JCL 10 05 / 8.5 59.5 71.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT0S12JCSL UT0S12JCL 12 08 / 12.5 61.5 74.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A UT0S14JCSL UT0S14JCL 14 08 / 12.5 66.5 80.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT0S16JCSL UT0S16JCL 16 13.5 / 18 82.5 93.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A UT0S18JCSL UT0S18JCL 18 13.5 / 18 85.5 96.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT0S20JCSL UT0S20JCL 20 17 / 24 93.0 106.5 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT0S22JCSL UT0S22JCL 22 17 / 24 99.0 110.5 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A UT0S24JCSL UT0S24JCL 24 17 / 24 104.5 114.5 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Suitable for UT0-UT0W Suitable for UT0-UT0W 45 Circular accessories Metal right angle cable clamp with strain relief nut (UTG--LPGN / UTO--LPGN) Part number Part number Shell A max B max Cable range For UTP / UTG For UT0 / UT0W size UTG10LPGN UT010LPGN 10 48.0 30.0 13.5 x 5 x 8 UTG12LPGN UT012LPGN 12 50.0 33.5 16 x 7 x 10.5 x 13 UTG14LPGN UT014LPGN 14 52.0 36.5 18.5 x 7 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 UTG16LPGN UT016LPGN 16 55.0 39.5 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 UTG18LPGN UT018LPGN 18 60.0 46.0 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 UTG20LPGN UT020LPGN 20 58.0 47.0 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22 UTG22LPGN UT022LPGN 22 58.0 48.5 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22 UTG24LPGN UT024LPGN 24 67.0 54.5 35 x 19 x 23 x 27 x 31 Cable clamp has a PG style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” Metal shrink boot adaptor (UTG--AD) for UTP and UTG Part number Shell size Ø A±0.2 B UTG10AD 10 21.0 UTG12AD 12 24.0 19.2 UTG14AD 14 27.0 UTG16AD 16 30.0 21.5 UTG18AD 18 33.3 UTG20AD 20 36.5 22.8 UTG22AD 22 39.7 UTG24AD 24 42.9 21.9 Standard plating is anodised black. For tin plating add “T” at the end of the part number e.g. UTG12ADT For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” 46 Circular accessories Environmental dustcap for plugs (UTG6--DCG) Part number Shell size A max. B UTG610DCG 10 20.0 UTG612DCG 12 24.0 UTG614DCG 14 27.5 20.8 UTG616DCG 16 30.5 UTG618DCG 18 33.5 UTG620DCG 20 36.5 UTG622DCG 22 40.0 22.5 UTG624DCG 24 43.0 For dustcap without chain skip “G” e.g. UTG612DC Metal shrink boot adaptor for UTO and UTOW Part number Shell size Ø A±0.2 B For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories” UT010AD 10 21 UT012AD 12 24 24.7 UT014AD 14 27 UT016AD 16 30 UT018AD 18 33.3 UT020AD 20 36.5 27 UT022AD 22 39.7 UT024AD 24 42.9 Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W 47 Circular accessories Plastic environmental dustcap for receptacles (UTP--DCG) Part number Shell size Ø A ±0.2 B max. UTP10DCG 10 26.7 19.3 UTP12DCG 12 31.4 20.0 UTP14DCG 14 34.5 UTP16DCG 16 37.8 20.2 UTP18DCG 18 40.8 UTP20DCG 20 43.9 UTP22DCG 22 47.0 21.8 UTP24DCG 24 50.1 For dustcap without chain skip “G” e.g. UTP12DC For jam dustcap consult factory Metal environmental dustcap for receptacles (UT0--DCG) Part number Shell size A max. UT010DCG 10 20.8 UT012DCG 12 24.9 UT014DCG 14 28.1 UT016DCG 16 31.3 UT018DCG 18 34.4 UT020DCG 20 37.6 UT022DCG 22 40.8 UT024DCG 24 43.9 For dustcap without chain skip “G” e.g. UTG12DC For jam dustcap consult factory Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W 48 Sealing for wall mounting receptacle (UTFD1-B) Part number Shell size Ø F ±0.1 R ±0.25 S ±0.25 Ø V UTFD12B 10 15.9 18.3 23.8 UTFD13B 12 19.0 20.6 26.2 UTFD14B 14 22.2 23.0 28.6 UTFD15B 16 25.4 24.6 31.0 3.3 UTFD16B 18 28.6 27.0 33.3 UTFD17B 20 31.8 29.4 36.5 UTFD18B 22 34.9 31.8 39.7 UTFD19B 24 38.1 34.9 42.9 4.0 Cable gland threadings used on cable clamps Shell size Thread size on connectors PG threading Metric threading 10 9/16 - 24 UNEF PG9 M16 x 1.5 12 11/16 - 24 UNEF PG11 M20 x 1.5 14 13/16 - 20 UNEF PG13.5 M20 x 1.5 16 15/16 - 20 UNEF PG16 M25 x 1.5 18 1-1/16 - 18 UNEF PG16 M25 x 1.5 20 1-3/16 - 18 UNEF PG21 M32 x 1.5 22 1-5/16 - 18 UNEF PG21 M32 x 1.5 24 1-7/16 - 18 UNEF PG29 M32 x 1.5 Circular accessories Adaptors for flexible cable protection systems (conduits) Adaptors for flexible cable protections systems that fit to the TRIM TRIO circular connectors are available from cable protection systems manufacturers (e.g. PMA). 2 solutions are offered: • UNEF Adaptors that fit directly onto the connectors (left picture) • METRIC Adaptors that fit onto the metal cable clamp tubes as indicated on pages 43 and 44 (right picture) These types of adaptors offer extra protection to single wire applications (electrical, coax, Fibre optic … etc.) Note: the adaptors are not available from Souriau. They must be ordered directly from the manufacturers Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W 0,8 ± 0,2 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 2 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Connectors and interconnect systems for harsh environments The company designs, manufactures and markets high performance interconnect solutions for severe environments from industrial broadline and universal ranges to complex system with integrated functions: filtering, high speed data transmission, hermetic seal, separation mechanism, remote handling, underwater mating, … The dedicated end markets for SOURIAU’s products are aeronautical, defense-space and industrial. Industrial Railway Geophysics Manufacturing environment Instrumentation Automation & process Civil & military aircraft Helicopter Weapon delivery system Avionics Military marine Communications Satellites Launcher & missile Aeronautical Equipment & system SOURIAU was established in 1917 and has been created by successive acquisitions of the industrial, aeronautical, defense and space activities of SOURIAU, JUPITER and BURNDY. The Group’s products are engineered and manufactured in the USA and Dominican Republic, Europe and Morocco, Japan and India, and sold by a worldwide sales and marketing organization, and in addition to SOURIAU’s offices, a large network of licensed distributors and agents. SOURIAU complies with most of national and international Quality Assurance Standards, production unit with ISO 14001. 3 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Description/Features/Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Square flange receptacle and in-line receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Plug and backnut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Electrical thread backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Stamped and formed contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Machined contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 IP68 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 IP67 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Mated and unmated connectors (with backshells) overall dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dimensions (receptacle and plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual crimping tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Automatic crimping tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Panel mounting/panel cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Wiring instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Assembly instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 General technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Contents Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 4 Presentation CLIPPER is a plastic low cost range of industrial connectors, UL & CSA approved. Complementing SOURIAU product range CLIPPER offers : • a high sealing level : - IP67 for the sealed plug (with o’ring and mating seal) - IP68 for the enhanced sealed plug (with o’ring and a special mating seal). This version allows a permanent waterproof level when immersed at depths down to 30 meters. • a retention plate system allowing insertion/extraction of the contacts without the need for tooling, • facilities to use trade backshells with the electrical thread adaptor (PG). CLIPPER range is composed of : • 4 sizes of shell in molded black thermoplastic material (size 1/2/3/4). • 7 contact layouts (4/9/14/18/26/31/40 contacts). • #20, #16 contacts, machined or stamped and formed, crimp, solder or PC tail termination. • An adaptor with electrical PG thread for PG backshells. • Backnut with grommet facilities. Locked, the retention plate holds the contacts firmly in position Unlocked, the retention plate allows the insertion/extraction of contacts without tooling Locked plate Unlocked plate Description Retention plate principle Features Mechanical • Monobloc shell and insulator in thermoplastic material self-extinguishing to UL 94 V0. • 180° screw coupling with positive audible safety latch. • Scoop proof. • Copper alloy contacts, machined or stamped and formed • plating : gold on active part over nickel. • Mechanical endurance : - connector : 250 cycles mating / unmating, - retention plate : 50 cycles mating / unmating. • Retention force : - # 20 → 70 N - # 16 → 90 N. • Vibration : - frequency range : 10-2000 Hz, 20 g - 10 cycles in accordance with CEI 68-2-6 Electrical • Withstand voltage : 1500 Vrms min or in accordance with DIN 57110b. • Contact resistance < 10 mW. • Current rating per contact : - machined contacts : # 20 (7 Amps), # 16 (13 Amps) - stamped and formed contacts : # 20 (5 Amps), # 16 (10 Amps). Environmental • Sealing : - up to IP68 • Working temperature : -40°C to +125°C. (-40°F to +257°F) • Resistance to salt spray : - 48 h min - > 1000 h (sealed mated connectors). • Resistance to fluids : - oil, - petrol, fuel, - lubricants - other fluids : consult us. Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 5 CL1M1100 CL1R1100 CL1R1101 CL1R1102 CL1R2102 CL1R3102 CL1R4202 CL1R2101 CL1R3101 CL1R4201 CL1M1101 CL1M1102 CL1C1100 CL1C1101 CL1C1201 CL1C2101 CL1C2201 CL1C3101 CL1C3201 CL1C4101 CL1C1200 CL1C2100 CL1C2200 CL1C3100 CL1C3200 CL1C4100 CL1C4200 CL1M1202 CL1M2102 CL1M2202 CL1M3102 CL1M3202 CL1M4102 CL1M4202 CL1M1201 CL1M2101 CL1M2201 CL1M3101 CL1M3201 CL1M4101 CL1M4201 CL1R2100 CL1R3100 CL1R4200 CL1M1200 CL1M2100 CL1M2200 CL1M3100 CL1M3200 CL1M4100 CL1M4200 Receptacle types without contacts Contacts layouts Unsealed receptacle (without o’ring) for male contacts for female contacts for male contacts for female contacts for male contacts for female contacts unsealed for male contacts sealed for male contacts Sealed receptacle (with o’ring) for use with backshell Sealed receptacle (with o’ring and panel gasket) In-line receptacle Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 4 cts # 16 9 cts # 20 9 cts # 16 14 cts # 20 18 cts # 16 31 cts # 20 26 cts # 16 40 cts # 16 Available Style Square flange receptacle and in-line receptacle Part number CL1C4201 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 6 Part number Grommet Thrust ring O ring CL1P1100 CL1F1100 CL1F1200 CL1F1101 (IP67) CL1F1103 (IP68) CL1F1201 (IP67) CL1F1203 (IP68) CL111101 CL111201 CL112101 CL113101 CL113201 CL114101 CL114201 CL1F2101 (IP67) CL1F2103 (IP68) CL1F2201 (IP67) CL1F2203 (IP68) CL1F3101 (IP67) CL1F3103 (IP68) CL1F3201 (IP67) CL1F3203 (IP68) CL1F4101 (IP67) CL1F4103 (IP68) CL1F4201 (IP67) CL1F4203 (IP68) CL1P1101 CL111102 CL111000 CL112000 CL113000 CL111202 CL112102 CL113102 CL113202 CL114102 CL114202 CL1P2101 CL1P3101 CL1P4201 CL1F2100 CL1F2200 CL1F3100 CL1F3200 CL1F4100 CL1F4200 CL1P2100 CL1P3100 CL1P4200 Plug types without contacts Contact layouts Unsealed plug (without o’ring and mating seal) for male contacts for female contacts for male contacts for female contacts for male contacts for female contacts for male and female contacts Sealed plug (with o’ring and mating seal) Sealed backnut Unsealed backnut Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 4 cts # 16 9 cts # 20 9 cts # 16 14 cts # 20 18 cts # 16 31 cts # 20 26 cts # 16 40 cts # 16 Plug and backnut CL114000 Unsealed (IP40) Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 7 Note : Electrical thread backshells are always supplied complete with the adaptor. Part numbers Description 1 2 3 4 (PG 13,5) (PG 16) (PG 21) (PG 36) (PG 36) Straight backshell for flexible CL101040 CL102040 CL103040 CL124040 CL104040 conduit systems Straight cable CL101030 CL102030 CL103030 CL124030 - clamp Sealed Part numbers Description 1 2 3 4 (PG 13,5) (PG 16) (PG 21) (PG 36) (PG 36) Elbow backshell with sealing CL101051 CL102051 CL103051 CL124051 - gland Straight backshell for flexible CL101041 CL102041 CL103041 CL124041 CL104041 conduit systems Antidecoupling sealing CL101021 CL102021 CL103021 CL124021 CL104021 gland backshell Electrical thread backshells (PG) Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Shell Part number 1 CL141001 2 CL142001 3 CL143001 4 CL144001 Dim. (inches) / Shell sizes A B C D E 1 .84 .96 1.52 .13 1.15 2 .97 1.10 1.56 .13 1.21 3 1.12 1.20 1.69 .15 1.40 4 1.44 1.55 1.95 .15 1.87 90° sealed adaptors for receptacles Shell 1 to 4 * with panel gasket Shell Part numbers Sealed* 1 CL131001 2 CL132001 3 CL133001 4 CL134001 IP67 Dust cap for receptacle 90° adaptors for receptacles Accessories 8 90° adaptors for receptacles Panel gasket (for square flange receptacle) Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 Part numbers CL191001 CL192001 CL193001 CL194001 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 9 Assembly male 2 mm to 3 mm (0.08" to 0.12") female 16 0.7 to 1.5 mm2 male female CF16PC10RF CF16SC10RF CF16PC18RF CF16SC18RF Bulk Reel 5,000 pcs. male 1.2 mm to 2.1 mm (0.05" to 0.08") female female 20 0.35 to 0.6 mm2 male CF10PC10RF CF10SC10RF CF10PC18RF CF10SC18RF Bulk Reel 5,000 pcs. Filler plug # 16 Part number : 8500 479 CL (for un-used contact cavities) Polarization Contact Part number : CP16SW9700 (instruction for polarizing connector - see page 23) Filler plug # 20 Part number : 8500 4144 (for un-used contact cavities) 18 to 16 22 to 20 CM16PT10LY CM10PT10LY 16 20 male male Bulk Print Circuit (PC) Tail Machined Contact Admissible section mm2 AWG Ø mm over insulation (inches) Part numbers Size Crimp Contact with strain relief Packaging Plating RF : gold flash on active part for standard version (For other platings, consult FCI) Stamped and formed contacts Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 10 CM16PC10MQ CM16PC20MQ* CM16SC10MQ CM16SC20MQ* CM16PS10MQ CM16SS10MQ Part numbers CM16PC10MQ CM16SC10MQ CM16PS10MQ CM16SS10MQ CM10PS10MQ male female male female Plating MQ : 0.4μ mm gold on active part (.016μ inches) * Up to 1.91 mm2 Packaging male female male CM16PC20MQ female CM16SC20MQ male CM10PC20MQ female CM10SC20MQ Bulk solder 8501 9641 8501 9642 CL 16 20 male male Bulk Extended ground contact-crimp (Length + .039 inch = +1 mm) 0.08" to 0.12" 18 to 14 0.05" to 0.08" 24 to 18 2 mm to 3 mm 16 (0.08" to 0.12") 0.93 to 1.91 mm2 16 2 to 3 mm (0.08" to 0.12") 20 0.21 to 0.60 mm2 1.2 to 2.1 mm (0.05" to 0.08") 30 to 24 0.06 to 0.21 mm2 20 Contact types Size Ø mm over insulation (inches) Admissible section mm2 male female CM10PC10MQ CM10SC10MQ 20 1.2 mm to 2.1 mm (0.05" to 0.08") 18 to 14 AWG 0.21 to 0.93 mm2 crimp male female CM16PC00MQ CM16SC00MQ 16 2 mm to 3 mm (0.08" to 0.12") 0.93 to 2.60 mm2 crimp solder crimp CM10SS10MQ 14* Max 24 to 18 18 Max 18 to 13 Machined contacts Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 11 IP68 Configuration (temporary water tightness down to 100 feet) IP68 Configuration Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Part numbers CL1C2201 CL1C4201 CL1C4101 CL1C3201 CL1C3101 CL1C2101 CL1C1201 CL1C1101 CL101021 (pg 13.5) CL1F1103 CL1F1203 CL1F2103 CL1F2203 CL1F3103 CL1F3203 CL1F4103 CL1F4203 CL1M1102 CL1M1202 CL1M2102 CL1M2202 CL1M3102 CL1M3202 CL1M4102 CL1M4202 for male contacts Sealed receptacle (with o’ring and panel gasket) for female contacts Sealed plug (with o’ring and mating seal) Anti-decoupling sealing gland backshell CL102021 (pg 16) CL103021 (pg 21) CL124021 (pg 29) Shell types (without contacts) and Backshell type Contacts layouts Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 4 cts # 16 9 cts # 20 9 cts # 16 14 cts # 20 18 cts # 16 31 cts # 20 26 cts # 16 40 cts # 16 for male contacts o’ring Sealed In-line receptacle IP68 Configuration CL104021 (pg 36) 12 IP67 Configuration (temporary water tightness) Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors IP67 Configuration 13 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Part numbers CL1F2201 CL1F4101 CL1F3201 CL1F3101 CL1F2101 CL1F1201 CL1F1101 CL1C1101 CL1C1201 CL1C2101 CL1C2201 CL1C3101 CL1C3201 CL1C4101 CL1M1102 CL1M1202 CL1M2102 CL1M2202 CL1M3102 CL1M3202 CL1M4102 Sealed receptacle (with o’ring and panel gasket) for male contacts Sealed plug (with o’ring and mating seal) o’ring Sealed In-line receptacle CL1M1102 CL1R1102 CL1P1101 CL1P2101 CL1P3101 CL1P4201 CL1R2102 CL1R3102 CL1R4202 CL1F4201 CL1M2102 CL1M3102 CL1M4202 Shell types without contacts Contact layouts for male contacts for female contacts Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 4 cts # 16 9 cts # 20 9 cts # 16 14 cts # 20 18 cts # 16 31 cts # 20 26 cts # 16 40 cts # 16 for male contacts for female contacts IP67 Configuration CL1C4201 14 Part numbers Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Grommet Thrust ring O ring CL111102 CL111101 CL111201 CL112101 CL113101 CL113201 CL114101 CL114201 CL101051 (pg 13.5) CL101041 (pg 13.5) CL101021 (pg 13.5) CL102021 (pg 16) CL103021 (pg 21) CL124021 (pg 29) CL124051 (pg 29) CL124041 (pg 29) CL111202 CL112102 CL113102 CL113202 CL114102 CL114202 CL102051 (pg 16) CL102041 (pg 16) CL103051 (pg 21) CL103041 (pg 21) CL104041 (pg 36) Backshell types Contact layouts for male contacts for female contacts Elbow backshell with sealing gland Straight backshell for flexible conduit systems Anti-decoupling sealing gland backshell Sealed backnut Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 4 cts # 16 9 cts # 20 9 cts # 16 14 cts # 20 18 cts # 16 31 cts # 20 26 cts # 16 40 cts # 16 IP67 Configuration CL104021 (pg 36) 15 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors LD LV A B ADAPTOR BACKNUT C STRAIGHT CABLE CLAMP D J STRAIGHT BACKSHELL FOR CONDUIT SYSTEM F SEALING GLAND BACKSHELL WITH ANTI-DECOUPLING SYSTEM G ELBOW BACKSHELL WITH SEALING GLAND KL R N Q * For other needs, consult FCI. Dimensions 1 2 3 4 (PG 29)(PG 36) LDA 2.01 2.09 2.09 2.17 2.17 LVA 2.29 2.33 2.33 2.41 2.41 LDB 1.81 1.85 1.85 - 1.85 LVB 2.09 2.09 2.09 - 2.09 LDC 2.68 2.85 3.03 3.41 - LVC 2.97 3.09 3.27 3.60 - LDD 3.41 3.50 3.62 3.70 4.25 LVD 3.70 3.74 3.86 3.94 4.47 LDF 3.15 3.27 3.35 3.74 4.02 LVF 3.43 3.50 3.58 3.98 4.25 LDG 3.31 3.46 3.77 4.29 - LVG 3.58 3.70 4.01 4.52 - R Max. 2.24 2.34 2.87 3.58 - Dim. (inches) Shell Cable acceptance* 1 2 3 4 (PG 29) (PG 36) J .24/.55 .24/.63 .31/.83 .39/ - 1.10 Conduit L .67 .67 .91 1.14 1.42 Pmaflex K Max .63 .63 .85 1.08 1.42 N .24/47 .39/.55 .51/.71 .71/.98 .87/ 1.26 Q .24/.47 .39/.55 .51/.71 .71/.98 - Dim. (inches) Shell Mated and unmated connectors with backshells Overall dimensions in inches 16 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 17 Square flange receptacle Plug Dimensions in inches 1 2 3 4 A .8 .8 .8 .8 B 1.15 1.28 1.46 1.92 C .81 .94 1.12 1.57 D 1.52 1.56 1.56 1.56 Dim. (inches) Shell sizes 1 2 3 4 A 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.67 B .83 .96 1.14 1.59 C .71 .71 .71 .71 D .16 .16 .16 .16 E .81 .94 1.12 1.57 F 1.17 1.23 1.42 1.89 G min. .83 .96 1.11 1.43 Max. .92 .98 1.17 1.57 H .13 .13 .15 .15 Dim. (inches) Shell sizes Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors • Squeeze the plier handles until a final click sounds, release, the pliers should open by themselves. • Fully insert the contact into the locator (corresponding gauge), the contact crimping lugs should be directed upwards, according to the drawing. • Put the stripped wire in the crimping part until it comes in contact with the stopper plate. Make sure that no strands stick out of the crimping part. • Squeeze the plier handles until a final click sounds, release, the pliers should open by themselves. • Check the overall aspect of the crimping. • Push the cable into the contact barrel and make sure the cable strands stick out of the inspection hole. • The pliers must be used on the jaws side. • Squeeze the plier handles until a final click sounds, release, the pliers should open by themselves. • Insert both wire and contact (or wire, reducing sleeve and contact) between the 4 jaws until stopped by the locator. • Fully squeeze until a final click sounds, the pliers should open once the crimping is performed • Extract the wire and crimped contact, then check the overall aspect of the crimping. Stamped and Formed Contacts (#16 and #20) Y16SCMCL3 Machined Crimping Contacts (#16 and #20) 8365 with locator 8365-02 Manual Crimping Tool 18 Crimping Mechanism (left side miniapplicators) Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors UTM2 Automatic crimping tool for Clipper Description Electromechanical high speed semi automatic press is designed for mass production and is realized totally in assembled steel parts. Voltage: 115VAC - 60 Hz Power.: 700 Watts Weight: 300 lbs. (including one crimp mechanism) Dimensions: 939.8x533.4x711.2 mm (37.0"x21.0"x28.0") Contacts AWG Contact P/N Crimp Mech. P/N 16 16-18 CF16 PS 18RF CM30-R CF16 SC 18RF 20 20-22 CF10 PS 18RF CM31-R CF10 SC 18RF Press and crimping mechanism are rental. Please contact Customer Service. Automatic crimping tool 19 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 20 Panel mounting There are two types of mounting possible: through the front or through the back of the panel. Panel cut-out • For a sealed mounting, the seal gasket shall be used, making sure the surface is in good condition. • Observe the drilling hole diameters indicated below. • Use the recommended screws : M3 (all shells) or # 4.40 (shells 1 and 2) # 6.32 (shells 3 and 4) • Respect the coupling torques indicated M3 (all shells) : 0.70 N.m Max Rear Mounting .157" max (4 mm max) Front Mounting .157" max (4 mm max) Panel mounting / Panel cut-out 1 2 3 4 H .85 .98 1.22 1.61 I .84 .97 1.13 1.44 J .13 .13 .15 .15 Dim. (inches) Shell sizes Wire Stripping Length • With machined crimping contacts • With stamped and formed crimping contacts Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 21 Jacketed Cable Stripping Length Make a 90° cut at the cable end. carefully make an incision in order to remove the cable protection on a length LD as described. Caution : This operation should be realized without deterioration of wires insulation. Then, follow the normal stripping instructions : - single wire with machined crimping contacts, - single wire with stamped and formed crimping contacts Stripping Instructions Use the upmost care with stripping operation : • Use stripping pliers appropriate for the cable gauge and which are in perfect condition. • In order to obtain a correct crimping and to maintain all of the connector sealing characteristics, the wires must have the dimensions described below. l Shell size 1 2 3 4 layouts Indifferent 26 40 LD mm 60 65 65 80 100 (inch) (2.36’) (2.56’) (2.56’) (3.15") (3.94") Contact size I = Wire stripping lenght layouts 6 mm (.236") #20 Ø over insulation > 2 mm l = 5 (> .08" l = .20") Ø over insulation > 2 mm l = 7 (> .08" l = .27") Contact diameter I = Wire stripping lenght #16 4 mm (.157") #20 4 mm (.157") Wiring Instruction Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 22 Instruction For Assembly Insertion and extraction of contacts Single wires Contact insertion and extraction is performed without a tool thanks to te retainer plate system. Insertion 1) With the thumb and index finger, squeeze the retainer plate flaps and pull backwards : the plate is then in the unlocked position. 2) Fully insert the wired contact in the cavity. 3) Repeat the same procedure for the other contacts. 4) Once again squeeze the retainer plate flaps and push forwards: the plate is then locked and retains the contacts (90 N of retention force for contacts of 1.6 mm dia.) 5) The plate can only be pushed backed if the contacts are correctly engaged (backup security) Extraction 1) With the thumb and index finger, squeeze the retainer plate flaps and pull backwards : the plate is then in the unlocked position. 2) Pull the contact wire: the the contact comes out of the cavity. 3) Repeat the same procedure for the other contacts. Special case of jacketed cables 1) Locate the first contact and the corresponding cavity. 2) The wire should described a buckle as describe below. 3) Unlock the retainer plate as described above. 4) Fully insert the wired contact in the cavity. 5) Respect the same procedure for the other contacts 6) Once again squeeze the retainer plate flaps and push forwards : the plate is then locked Special case of jacketed cables 7) Manually fully screw the adaptor and the backshell on the connector. Caution : In the sealed version don’t forget the O-ring. 8) Push forwards the cable of 10 mm in the backshell. 9) Fully screw on the backshell with a wrench while keeping the adaptor with another wrench. Note : The plate can only be pushed back if the contacts are correctly engaged (backup- security) Adaptor and PG electrical thread backshells The CLIPPER connector must be equipped with an adaptor in order to use a PG electrical thread backshell (e.g.: cable clamp or sealing gland, or flexible conduits system backshells, etc.) 1) Manually, fully screw the adaptor on the connector, the hexagonal nut towards the rear. 2) In the sealed version, cover the O-ring. 3) Manually, fully screw the PG thread backshell of your choice. Note: In the case of an elbow backshell, it is possible to adjust the position according to the angle desired. 1) Position the O-ring at the bottom of the backnut. 2) Run the backnut around the cable. 3) Unlock the retainer plate. 4) Position the grommet in the thrust ring, resting against the retainer plate. 5) Insert the contacts through the grommet and the retainer plate. 6) Lock the retainer plate. 7) Screw the backshell. Instruction For Assembly Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 23 When the insert is partially filled with contacts, place polarization contact into selected hole location in the FEMALE INSERT and push in until seated. • Polarization contacts are used to provide keying capabilities for the CLIPPER series. • Polarization contacts are used in the socket-cavities of standard plugs and reverse receptacles. In order to lock the couple of chosen connectors, you have to let free the cavity in front of the polarization contact. To avoid the connection with other connectors, you have to insert a contact in the cavity in front of the polarization contact. Heat shrink boot Shrink sleeve as follows : 1) Use heat gun with an air deflector nozzle. 2) Adjust air deflector opening to accommodate tubing size. Turn switch ON. Wait until full heat output is reached. 3) Position the air deflector over section of tubing to be shrunk. Start at pre-shrunk section and work towards open end. 4) When tubing begins to shrink, move gun so that air is distributed in a band around the tubing circumference causing it to shrink evenly around the cable. 5) Move nozzle to adjacent section and shrink in the same manner. Repeat process on section at a time until entire length is shrunk. Avoid excessive heat. Direct heat away from connector assembly to prevent damage. Instruction for polarizing connector mounting CP16SW9700 Grommet Backshell Assembly Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors EXAMPLE : IP66-5 means: - Total protection against dust - Proof against temporary flooding - Proof against impact strength of 2 Joule Degree of protection in accordance with CEI 529, DIN 40050, NF EN 60529 General technical information 24 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors Conversion Table (mm) (inches) 8.2 0.32308 8.4 0.33096 8.6 0.33884 8.8 0.34672 9.0 0.35460 9.2 0.36248 9.4 0.37036 9.6 0.37824 9.8 0.38612 10.0 0.39400 10.5 0.41370 11.0 0.43340 11.5 0.45310 12.0 0.47280 12.5 0.49250 13.0 0.51220 13.5 0.53190 14.0 0.55160 14.5 0.57130 15.0 0.59100 15.5 0.61070 16.0 0.63040 16.5 0.65010 17.0 0.66980 17.5 0.68950 18.0 0.70920 18.5 0.72890 19.0 0.74860 19.5 0.76830 20.0 0.78800 20.5 0.80770 21.0 0.82740 21.5 0.84710 22.0 0.86680 22.5 0.88650 23.0 0.90620 23.5 0.92590 24.0 0.94560 24.5 0.96530 25.0 0.98500 25.5 1.00470 26.0 1.02440 26.5 1.04410 27.0 1.06380 27.5 1.08350 28.0 1.10320 28.5 1.12290 29.0 1.14260 29.5 1.16230 30.0 1.18200 30.5 1.20170 31.0 1.22140 31.5 1.24110 32.0 1.26080 32.5 1.28050 33.0 1.30020 33.5 1.31990 34.0 1.33960 34.5 1.35930 35.0 1.37900 35.5 1.39870 36.0 1.41840 36.5 1.43810 37.0 1.45780 37.5 1.47750 (°C) (°F) - 70 - 94 - 65 - 85 - 55 - 67 - 50 - 58 - 40 - 40 0 32 37 98.6 80 176 125 257 150 302 170 338 200 392 250 482 (1) 6145DJ - Câbles multipaires (armés, paires blindées) 250 MZH. (2) 6145DJ - Câbles multipaires (armés, paires non blindées) 250 MZH. (mm) (inches) 0.1 0.00394 0.2 0.00788 0.3 0.01182 0.4 0.01576 0.5 0.01970 0.6 0.02364 0.7 0.02758 0.8 0.03152 0.9 0.03546 1.0 0.03940 1.1 0.04334 1.2 0.04728 1.3 0.05122 1.4 0.05516 1.5 0.05910 1.6 0.06304 1.7 0.06698 1.8 0.07092 1.9 0.07486 2.0 0.07880 2.1 0.08274 2.2 0.08668 2.3 0.09062 2.4 0.09456 2.5 0.09850 2.6 0.10244 2.7 0.10638 2.8 0.11032 2.9 0.11426 3.0 0.11820 3.1 0.12214 3.2 0.12608 3.3 0.13002 3.4 0.13396 3.5 0.13790 3.6 0.14184 3.7 0.14578 3.8 0.14972 3.9 0.15366 4.0 0.15760 4.1 0.16154 4.2 0.16548 4.3 0.16942 4.4 0.17336 4.5 0.17730 4.6 0.18124 4.7 0.18518 4.8 0.18912 4.9 0.19306 5.0 0.19700 5.2 0.20488 5.4 0.21276 5.6 0.22064 5.8 0.22852 6.0 0.23640 6.2 0.24428 6.4 0.25216 6.6 0.26004 6.8 0.26792 7.0 0.27580 7.2 0.28368 7.4 0.29156 7.6 0.29944 7.8 0.30732 8.0 0.31520 (mm) (inches) 38.0 1.49720 38.5 1.51690 39.0 1.53660 39.5 1.55630 40.0 1.57600 40.5 1.59570 41.0 1.61540 41.5 1.63510 42.0 1.65480 42.5 1.67450 43.0 1.69420 43.5 1.71390 44.0 1.73360 44.5 1.75330 45.0 1.77300 45.5 1.79270 46.0 1.81240 46.5 1.83210 47.0 1.85180 47.5 1.87150 48.0 1.89120 48.5 1.91090 49.0 1.93060 49.5 1.95030 50.0 1.97000 51.0 2.00940 52.0 2.04880 53.0 2.08820 54.0 2.12760 55.0 2.16700 56.0 2.20640 57.0 2.24580 58.0 2.28520 59.0 2.32460 60.0 2.36400 61.0 2.40340 62.0 2.44280 63.0 2.48220 64.0 2.52160 65.0 2.56100 66.0 2.60040 67.0 2.63980 68.0 2.67920 69.0 2.71860 70.0 2.75800 71.0 2.79740 72.0 2.83680 73.0 2.87620 74.0 2.91560 75.0 2.95500 80.0 3.15200 85.0 3.34900 90.0 3.54600 100.0 3.94000 200.0 7.88000 400.0 15.76000 600.0 23.64000 800.0 31.52000 1000.0 39.40000 1200.0 47.28000 1600.0 63.04000 2000.0 78.80000 3200.0 126.08000 bar psi mmHg (torr) 10 145.0 7600 5 72.5 3800 2 29.0 1520 1 14.5 760 0.5 7.2 380 0.1 1.4 76 mbar psi torr (mmHg) 10 145.0 7600 5 72.5 3800 2 29.0 1520 1 14.5 760 0.5 7.2 380 0.1 1.4 76 25 Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 26 Notes Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors 27 Notes www.souriau.com FSOURIAUCLIPPERJANVIER2007E © Copyright SOURIAU - Réalisation En Toute Transparence. UTS Series Dynamic IP68/69K • UV Resistant • UL/IEC Compliant © 2011 – SOURIAU 3 How to read our catalogue ........................................ 06 UTS range overview ..................................................... 07 General technical characteristics ............................. 10 Cable assembly ............................................................... 14 2 contacts ....................................................................... 20 2 + ground contacts ................................................... 28 3 contacts ........................................................................ 36 3 + ground contacts .................................................... 52 4 contacts ........................................................................ 60 5 contacts ........................................................................ 72 6 contacts ........................................................................ 76 6 + ground contacts .................................................... 88 7 contacts ........................................................................ 92 8 contacts ........................................................................ 96 10 contacts ..................................................................... 104 12 contacts ...................................................................... 108 14 contacts ...................................................................... 116 15 contacts ...................................................................... 120 18 contacts ..................................................................... 124 19 contacts ..................................................................... 128 23 contacts ..................................................................... 132 32 contacts ..................................................................... 136 Contents UTS Series Overview Mechanics Description ...................................................................... 142 Contact plating selector guide .................................. 143 Contact selector guide ................................................ 144 Packaging ........................................................................ 144 Crimp contacts ............................................................... 145 #16 coaxial contacts ................................................... 147 PCB contacts .................................................................. 148 Fibre optic contacts ...................................................... 149 Contacts Tooling .............................................................................. 154 Assembly instruction .................................................... 156 Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ..................... 162 Extraction tools .............................................................. 162 Rated current & working voltage .............................. 163 UV resistance ................................................................. 164 UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................ 165 IEC 61984 with IP code explanation ...................... 168 What is NEMA rating ? ................................................ 170 Ethernet for the layman ............................................... 171 Technical information #16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices .................. 176 Glossary of terms .......................................................... 183 Discrimination/Keying methods ............................... 184 Part number Index.......................................................... 185 Appendices Appendices Technical information Contacts Mechanics Overview UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 5 Overview UTS Series How to read our catalog .............................................................................................................. 06 UTS range overview ...................................................................................................................... 07 General technical characteristics .............................................................................................. 10 6 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Overview SOURIAU is pleased to announce the arrival of a brand new catalog containing some signifi cant improvements to simplify the connector selection process and provide easy access to key information. In this version you can see all layouts at a glance, download 2D drawings and 3D models. Then, when your choice is made, you can click on the part number and buy online. Step 3 Step 2 Easy access to supporting material such as prints and CAD models. In just two pages you can gather together details of all accessories, contacts, tools etc required for your application. Interactive zones. Clearer understanding of the range. Step 1 © 2011 – SOURIAU 7 UTS range overview The UTS series is a plastic connector range but rugged enough to withstand industrial applications. The philosophy of the UTS series is built around three key elements: Dynamic IP68/69K UV Resistant UL/IEC Compliant In most applications, our connectors are exposed to extreme climatic conditions; it was therefore key for us to select the materials best able to cope with the targeted environment. Part of our product qualifi cation process involved subjecting connectors to a simulated fi ve years of exposure to various elements including Temperature, UV and Humidity. The results were positive in that there were no visible signs of weakness, such as cracking or crazing. The outmost priority for any electrical installation is to protect personnel from any shock hazard. In North America, Underwriters Laboratories insisted that connector manufacturers, depending of the application, respect their standards. The UTS series had thus been qualifi ed and is certifi ed by this organisation. In Europe and in Asia, IEC standards are better known and trusted by end users. Like its American equivalent, the IEC refers to safety rules. The UTS series was obviously designed to respect these rules. UTS series is rated at IP68/69K… even in dynamic conditions. This means that it remain sealed even when used continuously underwater or cleaned using a high pressure hose and cable is moving. This extreme level of performance is achievable with jacketed cable or discrete wires. If this same level of performance is required even when connectors are not mated, we have UTS Hi Seal; a product designed to remain watertight if an environmental cap is not fi tted or if the equipment is likely to get wet when cables have been disconnected. Screw termination version UTS series is a wide range... Based on multiple power & signal connectors and offers everything from box mounted receptacles and cable mounted plugs to cable mounted in-line and PCB mounted receptacles. Almost all ways to accommodate wires exist: Crimp, Solder, Screw termination. UTS Series Overview The bayonet coupling system makes it simple to use. With only a 1/3 twist of the coupling ring, connectors are mated with an audible and sensitive “click”. Overview 8 © 2011 – SOURIAU Just screw the wires to the connector ! No special tools required, use a standard screwdriver UTS screw termination UTS range UTS discrete wire sealing See page 9 Sealed: IP68/69K UV resistant UL/IEC compliant Corrosion-proof Plastic housing UTS Series Plug Corrosion-proof Plastic housing UTS Hi seal Sealed Unmated Sealed unmated: IP68/69K MIL-C-26482 compatible UV resistant UL/IEC compliant Screw termination contact Solder contact Crimp contact • machined • stamped and formed • coaxial • fibre optics UTS Series Overview © 2011 – SOURIAU 9 overview Metal hold down clips - to lock the connector easily on the PCB and to release stress on solder joints - suitable for soldering in a metalised hole Pre-assembled PCB contacts - machined or stamped versions available - different solder tails lengths possible - different plating options Low profi le housing to limit space between panel and PCB Stand-offs to allow cleaning after soldering UTS PCB contacts Receptacle No fi ller plug needed Grommet Containment ring Backnut or Easy handling backshell UTS discrete wire sealing Double Sealing UTS Series Overview Overview 10 © 2011 – SOURIAU General technical Mechanical • Durability: 250 matings & unmatings per MIL-C-26482 • Vibration resistance (all UTS versions except UTS Screw termination contacts): Sinusoidal vibrations per CEI 60512-4 - from 10 to 2000 Hz • Thermal shock: 5 cycles 30 min. from -40°C to 105°C per MIL-STD1344 method 1003 Environmental • Operating temperature: from -40°C to +105°C 40/100/21 per NFF 61-030 • Flammability rating: UL94-V0 (all UTS except the Hi seal) - see page 165 UL94-HB (UTS Hi seal only) - see page 165 I2F3 according to NFF 16101 and NFF 16102 • Salt spray: 500 hours • UV resistant: No mechanical degradation or important variation of colour after 5 years of exposure in natural environment (equivalence exposure to sun and moisture as per ISO4892) • Sealing: - UTS Standard: IP68/IP69K (mated) - UTS Hi seal: IP68/IP69K (mated and unmated) - UTS Discrete wire sealing: IP67/69K (up to IP68 with easy handling backshell) - UTS Screw termination contacts: IP68/IP69K Note: IPx8: 10m underwater during 1 week • Fluid resistance: - Gasoil - Mineral oil - Acid bath - Basic bath 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 UTS Series Overview © 2011 – SOURIAU 11 characteristics Material • Body connector + Backshell: Thermoplastic • Insert: - UTS Standard, UTS Discrete wire sealing, UTS Screw termination contacts: Thermoplastic - UTS Hi seal handsolder & UTS Hi seal with PC tails contacts: Elastomer • Contacts: See page 140 • Nut: Metal • Halogen free • RoHS compliant & conform to the Chinese standard SJ/T1166-2006 (Chinese RoHS equivalent) • In accordance with: - UL 1977: Certifi cat ECBT2 File number: E169916 - CSA C22.2 n°182.3: Certifi cat ECBT8 File number: E169916 Electrical • See each layout page 1 2 4 5 UTS Series Overview Overview UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 13 UTS Series Mechanics Cable assembly ................................................................................................. 14 2 contacts 8E2/8D2: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 20 12E2/12D2: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 24 2 contacts + ground 103: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 28 142G1: 40A 300V ............................................................................................ 32 3 contacts 8E3/8D3: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 36 8E3A/8E98 8D3A/8D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 40 8E33/8D3.: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 44 12E3/12D3: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 48 3 contacts + ground 124 - 12E4/12D4: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 52 183G1: 32A 300V ............................................................................................ 56 4 contacts 8E4/8D4: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 60 102W2: 25A 150V ............................................................................................ 64 104: 13A 150V ............................................................................................ 68 5 contacts 14E5/14D5: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 72 6 contacts 103W3: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 76 106 - 10E6/10D6: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 80 10E98/10D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 84 6 contacts + ground 147 - 14E7: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 88 7 contacts 10E7/10D7: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 92 8 contacts 128: 10A 80V ............................................................................................. 96 12E8/12D8: 6A 32V ............................................................................................. 100 10 contacts 1210 - 12E10/12D10: 6A 50V ............................................................................................. 104 12 contacts 1412: 10A 63V ............................................................................................. 108 14E12/14D12: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 112 14 contacts 12E14/12D14: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 116 15 contacts 14E15/14D15: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 120 18 contacts 14E18/14D18: 5A 50V ............................................................................................. 124 19 contacts 1419 - 14E19/14D19: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 128 23 contacts 1823: 9A 63V ............................................................................................. 132 32 contacts 1832: 4A 32V ............................................................................................. 136 14 © 2011 – SOURIAU OUTDOOR (black outer jacket) INDOOR Cable assembly Souriau provides connectors in various applications for more than 90 years in the most extreme environment. Being conscious about the diffi culty to fi nd a quick and a reliable harness manufacturer, we decided years ago to start in house cable assembly production. It allows customers to reduce the number of suppliers, and to take advantage of the "best in class" quality of the Souriau group. Overmoulding is a process that further enhances the sealing properties of the UTS range, especially over many years of use. Overmoulding provides the opportunity to change the cable exit from straight through 90 degrees and avoid any stress on the cable terminated to the connector. Also, as the wires are encapsulated inside the moulding, a barrier is created which prevents from any liquid from entering the equipment through the connector if the cable jacket is breached. UV resistance Ambient temperature PVC PUR PTFE FEP SILICON TPE 70°C Static installation Static installation Static installation Static installation Static installation Static or dynamic installation Wet Cleaner, Immerged chlorine 90°C 180°C 205°C 260°C Chemical agression How to choose the outer jacket material UTS Series Mechanics © 2011 – SOURIAU 15 Overmolding description Discrete connector Overmoulded connector Compound Thermoplastic insert O ring Overmolding adapter PVC or PUR overmolding ...water ingress unhampered, leading to damage. ...prevents water ingress via capillary action. If cable jacket is breached... If cable jacket is breached... UTS Series Mechanics Mechanics 16 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Mechanics Harnesses Overmoulded harnesses, straight ending Connector type Number of ways Voltage Current UL Current IEC Harmonised cable part number* Part number (length: 1m.) Male Female UTS standard 2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PST100 HAUTS0V142G1SST100 2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PST100 HAUTS0V103SST100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V103PEPST100 HAUTS0V103PESST100 3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PST100 HAUTS0V183G1SST100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPST100 HAUTS0V124PESST100 4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PST100 HAUTS0V104SST100 3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PST100 HAUTS0V103W3SST100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PST100 HAUTS0V106SST100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPST100 HAUTS0V147PESST100 8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PST100 HAUTS0V128SST100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PST100 HAUTS0V1210SST100 12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PST100 HAUTS0V1412SST100 19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PST100 HAUTS0V1419SST100 23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PST100 HAUTS0V1823SST100 32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PST100 HAUTS0V1832SST100 UTS Hi seal 2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PST100 HAUTS0V8E2SST100 2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PST100 HAUTS0V12E2SST100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PST100 HAUTS0V8E3SST100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APST100 HAUTS0V8E3ASST100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PST100 HAUTS0V8E33SST100 3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PST100 HAUTS0V12E3SST100 4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PST100 HAUTS0V8E4SST100 5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PST100 HAUTS0V14E5SST100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PST100 HAUTS0V10E6SST100 6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PST100 HAUTS0V10E98SST100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPST100 HAUTS0V14E7PESST100 7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PST100 HAUTS0V10E7SST100 8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PST100 HAUTS0V12E8SST100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PST100 HAUTS0V12E10SST100 12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PST100 HAUTS0V14E12SST100 14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PST100 HAUTS0V12E14SST100 15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PST100 HAUTS0V14E15SST100 18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PST100 HAUTS0V14E18SST100 19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PST100 HAUTS0V14E19SST100 * see page 18 3 m & 5 m version available on demand Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300 5m HAUTS0V...500 © 2011 – SOURIAU 17 UTS Series Mechanics Harnesses Overmoulded harnesses, right angle ending Connector type Number of ways Voltage Current UL Current IEC Harmonised cable part number* Part number (length: 1m.) Male Female UTS standard 2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PRA100 HAUTS0V142G1SRA100 2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PRA100 HAUTS0V103SRA100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100 3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPRA100 HAUTS0V124PESRA100 4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PRA100 HAUTS0V104SRA100 3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PRA100 HAUTS0V103W3SRA100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PRA100 HAUTS0V106SRA100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPRA100 HAUTS0V147PESRA100 8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PRA100 HAUTS0V128SRA100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PRA100 HAUTS0V1210SRA100 12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PRA100 HAUTS0V1412SRA100 19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PRA100 HAUTS0V1419SRA100 23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PRA100 HAUTS0V1823SRA100 32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PRA100 HAUTS0V1832SRA100 UTS Hi seal 2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PRA100 HAUTS0V8E2SRA100 2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PRA100 HAUTS0V12E2SRA100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PRA100 HAUTS0V8E3SRA100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APRA100 HAUTS0V8E3ASRA100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PRA100 HAUTS0V8E33SRA100 3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PRA100 HAUTS0V12E3SRA100 4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PRA100 HAUTS0V8E4SRA100 5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PRA100 HAUTS0V14E5SRA100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PRA100 HAUTS0V10E6SRA100 6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PRA100 HAUTS0V10E98SRA100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPRA100 HAUTS0V14E7PESRA100 7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PRA100 HAUTS0V10E7SRA100 8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PRA100 HAUTS0V12E8SRA100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PRA100 HAUTS0V12E10SRA100 12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PRA100 HAUTS0V14E12SRA100 14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PRA100 HAUTS0V12E14SRA100 15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PRA100 HAUTS0V14E15SRA100 18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PRA100 HAUTS0V14E18SRA100 19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PRA100 HAUTS0V14E19SRA100 * see page 18 3 m & 5 m version available on demand Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300 5m HAUTS0V...500 Mechanics 18 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Mechanics Standardization of European cable - DIN VDE 0281/DIN VDE 0282/DIN VDE 0292 1. Basic type 2. Working voltage 3. Insulating 4. Sheathcladding material 5. Special features 6. Conductor types 7. Number of conductors 8. Protective conductor 9. Conductor crosssectional H: Harmonized Type 03: 300/300 V. V: PVC V: PVC H: Ribbon cable, separable U: Single wire X: Without protective conductor Area specifi ed in mm2 A: National Type 05: 300/500 V. R: Rubber R: Rubber H2: Ribbon cable non-separable R: Multi-wire G: With protective conductor 07: 450/750 V. S: Silicone Rubber N: Cloroprene Rubber K: Fine wire (permanently installed) J: Glass-fi lament braiding F: Fine wire (fl exible) T: Textile braiding H: Super fi ne wire Y: Tinsel strand 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Harmonized wire coding system Example: Harmonized type, 300/500V, PVC insulating, PVC sheath- cladding, Fine wire, 3x1.5 cross-sectional: H05VVF3x1.5 Cable information Range of temperature: Occasional fl exing: -5°C up to +70°C Fixed installation: -40°C up to +80°C Rated voltage: U0/U: 300/500 V Wire section : Arrangement with #16 contact: wire section 1.5 mm² Arrangement with #20 contact: wire section 0.5 mm² Harmonized reference: H05 VVF XX © 2011 – SOURIAU 19 UTS Series Mechanics Standardization of American cable Nomenclature Key Defi nitions of Cable Types S: Service Grade (also means extra hard service when not followed by J, V, or P) J: Hard Service V: Vacuum cleaner cord (also light duty cable) P: Parallel cord (also known as zip cord) – Always light duty E: Thermoplastic Elastomer (UL/NEC designation ONLY) O: Oil Resistant* T: Thermoplastic W: Outdoor-includes sunlight resistant jacket and wet location rated conductors (formerly "W-A") H: Heater cable VW-1: Flame retardant FT2: Flame retardant SVT: Thermoplastic insulated vacuum cleaner cord, with or without 3rd conductor for grounding purposes; 300V. (PVC) SJT: Junior hard service, thermoplastic insulated conductors and jacket. 300V. (PVC) SJTW: Same as SJT except outdoor rated. (PVC) SJTO: Same as SJT but oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC) SJTOW: Same as SJTO except outdoor rated. (PVC) ST: Hard service cord with all thermoplastic construction, 600V. (PVC) STW: Same as ST except outdoor rated. (PVC) STO: Same as ST but with oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC) STOW: Same as STO except outdoor rated. (PVC) Mechanics 20 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH Layout Specifi cations UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E2P UTS08E2S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E2P UTS68E2S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E2P UTS6JC8E2S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E2P UTS78E2S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D2P UTS08D2S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D2P32 UTS78D2S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and withouthold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D2P UTS78D2S Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 21 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 7.5 7.8 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Plug - UTS6 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 Mated connector length 61.1 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 1.5 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.5 Panel cut out 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Mechanics 2 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 22 © 2011 – SOURIAU Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 UTS 8E2/8D2 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket Current use Limited use Not recommended use © 2011 – SOURIAU 23 UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Mechanics 24 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR Layout UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS012E2P UTS012E2S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS612E2P UTS612E2S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC12E2P UTS6JC12E2S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E2P UTS712E2S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS012D2P UTS012D2S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS712D2P32 UTS712D2S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS712D2P UTS712D2S Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 25 UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 2 contacts 16A/150V per IEC 61984 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 26.4 Ø19 Ø19 20.8 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 7.5 7.8 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 66.7 75.3 81.7 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø30.1 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 2.3 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.3 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 18 18 Ø19 Ø19 Ø19 3.5 3.5 3.5 3 3 3 4.2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Mechanics 26 © 2011 – SOURIAU Metal terminal UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Accessories Metal terminal 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 20 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Electrical characteristics UL 13A 650V UL94 HB CSA 13A 650V UL94 HB IEC 16A 150V 2.5kV 3 UTS 12E2/12D2 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use © 2011 – SOURIAU 27 UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Mechanics 28 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH Layout UTS Series 103 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 31 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103P UTS1JC103S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6103P UTS6103S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103P UTS6JC103S PCB contacts supply separately see page 31 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7103P UTS7103S © 2011 – SOURIAU 29 UTS Series 103 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 2 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Mated connector length - UTS7 77.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 4 18.3 12.3 27.2 22.5 Ø15.1 3.5 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 2.6 2.6 1.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 63.2 25.3 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Mechanics 30 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 103 Accessories and tooling Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Jam nut sealing caps Metal terminal Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES © 2011 – SOURIAU 31 Contacts UTS Series 103 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 16A 300V 4kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 103 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 2 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 32 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR OR UTS Series 142G1 Specifi cations Layout Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supplied separately see page 35 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig. 1) UTS0142G1P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig. 6) UTS1JC142G1P UTS1JC142G1S Plug Without (Fig. 3) UTS6142G1P UTS6142G1S Cable gland (Fig. 4) UTS6JC142G1P UTS6JC142G1S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig. 2) UTS7142G1P UTS7142G1S NPT threaded receptacle Without (Fig. 5) UTS7142G1SNPT © 2011 – SOURIAU 33 UTS Series 142G1 NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 3 Fig. 4 33 70 25.3 Ø31.5 Ø35.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø31.5 Fig. 6 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 2 18 1.6 35.1 30.4 Ø22.3 3.5 Panel cut out Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.15 25.55 Drilling pattern 3.6 3.6 2.1 4.2 Fig. 5 25.4 25.4 35.3 Ø22.3 23.1 NPT - 1/2˝ 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 Fig. 1 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view Mechanics 2 + ground 40A/300V per IEC 61984 34 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 142G1 Accessories and tooling Jam nut sealing caps Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Hand tool Part number M317 Positioner + locator setting Part number VGE10078A Extraction tool Part number 51060210936 Plug sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red © 2011 – SOURIAU 35 UL 44A 600V UL94 V-0 CSA 30A 600V UL94 V-0 IEC 40A 300V 4kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 142G1 derating curves Current use Limited use Not recommended use UTS Series 142G1 Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 8.37mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 5 Contacts #8 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) - 6.5 14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) - 12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) - 10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) - 8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 Mechanics 2 + ground 40A/300V per IEC 61984 36 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E3P UTS08E3S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E3P UTS68E3S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E3P UTS6JC8E3S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E3P UTS78E3S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D3P UTS08D3S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D3P32 UTS78D3S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D3P UTS78D3S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 37 UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 3 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Plug - UTS6 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 Mated connector length 61.1 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.6 1.9 0.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Mechanics 38 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS 8E3/8D3 derating curves UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use © 2011 – SOURIAU 39 UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Mechanics 40 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E3AP UTS08E3AS UTS08E98P UTS08E98S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E3AP UTS68E3AS UTS68E98P UTS68E98S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E3AP UTS6JC8E3AS UTS6JC8E98P UTS6JC8E98S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E3AP UTS78E3AS UTS78E98P UTS78E98S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D3AP UTS08D3AS UTS08D98P UTS08D98S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D3AP32 UTS78D3AS32 UTS78D98P32 UTS78D98S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D3AP UTS78D3AS UTS78D98P UTS78D98S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 41 UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3 18 Ø12 3.5 3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.6 1.9 0.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 61.1 Mechanics 3 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 42 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 UTS 8E3A/98 - 8D3A/98 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² © 2011 – SOURIAU 43 UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 Mechanics 44 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 8E33/8D33 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E33P UTS08E33S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E33P UTS68E33S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E33P UTS6JC8E33S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E33P UTS78E33S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D33P UTS08D33S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D33P32 UTS78D33S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D33P UTS78D33S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 45 UTS Series 8E33/8D33 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 54 61.1 66.6 Fig. 7 UTS7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.6 1.9 0.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Mechanics 3 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 46 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 8E33/8D33 UTS 8E33/8D33 de-rating curves Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 © 2011 – SOURIAU 47 UTS Series 8E33/8D33 Mechanics 48 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E3/12D3 OR WITH Specifi cations OR Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E3P UTS012E3S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS612E3P UTS612E3S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E3P UTS6JC12E3S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E3P UTS712E3S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D3P UTS012D3S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS712D3P32 UTS712D3S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS712D3P UTS712D3S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 49 UTS Series 12E3/12D3 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø19 3.5 3 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 2.3 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.3 2.8 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 7 Mechanics 3 contacts 16A/150V per IEC 61984 50 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E3/12D3 Metal terminal Accessories Metal terminal Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Electrical characteristics UL 13A 650V UL94 HB CSA 13A 650V UL94 HB IEC 16A 150V 2.5kV 3 UTS 12E3/12D3 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 20 © 2011 – SOURIAU 51 UTS Series 12E3/12D3 Mechanics 52 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 55 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS0124P Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS7124P UTS7124S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124P UTS1JC124S Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS6124P UTS6124S Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124P UTS6JC124S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS012E4P UTS012E4S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.10) UTS712E4P UTS712E4S Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS612E4P UTS612E4S Plug Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC12E4P UTS6JC12E4S Screw contacts loaded Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7 & 8) UTS7124PSCR UTS7124SSCR Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS6124PSCR UTS6124SSCR Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124PSCR UTS6JC124SSCR Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124PSCR PCB contacts supply separately see page 55 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS0124P Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS7124P UTS7124S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS012D4P UTS012D4S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P UTS712D4S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P32 UTS712D4S32 Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 53 UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Hold down clip Male Female Fig. 6 Fig. 8 Fig. 10 Front view Fig. 5 Fig. 7 Fig. 9 31.9 18 18 18 27.2 Ø19 Ø19 Ø19 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.4 2.4 4.2 3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 11.7 11.7 11.7 Ø19 Ø19 Ø19 20.8 26.4 2.4 2.4 4 2.4 7.5 9.1 7.5 Ø3.2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Front view Fig. 2 Fig. 1 7.5 7.8 Free hanging - UTS1 / Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 74 66.7 Fig. 13 Fig. 11 Fig. 12 Ø30.1 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Front mounting Ø18.3 Ø3.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 3.1 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Mechanics 3 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 54 © 2011 – SOURIAU Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 55 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 16A 300V 4kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 20 18 15 13 28 25 23 8 5 3 Contacts Electrical characteristics UTS 124 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 3 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 56 © 2011 – SOURIAU WITH Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 59 NPT threaded receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS7183G1SNPT Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6183G1P Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC183G1P Layout UTS Series 183G1 © 2011 – SOURIAU 57 Dimensions UTS Series 183G1 Note: all dimensions are in mm NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7 17.3 14.5 31.8 NPT - 3/4˝ Ø28.6 Ø19.6 Fig. 1 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 37.5 81.3 Ø42 Ø42 Mated connector length - UTS6JC 90.5 Drilling pattern 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 Mechanics 3 + ground 32A/300V per IEC 61984 58 © 2011 – SOURIAU Accessories and tooling Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red UTS Series 183G1 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Hand tool Part number M317 Positioner + locator setting Part number VGE10078A Extraction tool Part number 51060210936 Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005590A 85005599 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Plug sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG © 2011 – SOURIAU 59 UL 23A 600V UL94 V-0 CSA 23A 600V UL94 V-0 IEC 32A 300V 4kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 183G1 derating curves Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 8.37mm² UTS Series 183G1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Contacts #8 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) - 6.5 14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) - 12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) - 10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) - 8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 Mechanics 3 + ground 32A/300V per IEC 61984 60 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH UTS Series 8E4/8D4 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E4P UTS08E4S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E4P UTS68E4S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E4P UTS6JC8E4S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E4P UTS78E4S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D4P UTS08D4S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D4P32 UTS78D4S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D4P UTS78D4S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 61 UTS Series 8E4/8D4 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 61.1 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.4 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Mechanics 4 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 62 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 8E4/8D4 UTS 8E4/8D4 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 63 UTS Series 8E4/8D4 Mechanics 64 © 2011 – SOURIAU WITH UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 67 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC102W2P UTS1JC102W2S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6102W2P UTS6102W2S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC102W2P UTS6JC102W2S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7102W2P UTS7102W2S Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 65 UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3 33 63.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 3 3 3 3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7 Fig. 4 18.3 27.2 22.5 Ø15.1 3.5 2.4 77.3 Mechanics 4 contacts 25A/150V per IEC 61984 66 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Accessories and tooling Crimp tooling #20 Crimp tooling #12 Part number TOOLKIT Part number extraction tool 51060210924 (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 148 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Part number SHANDLES Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Part number positioner + locator setting VGE10078A Part number hand tool M317 © 2011 – SOURIAU 67 UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Contacts #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max insulator Ø Male Female Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 1) E l f l ti f th l ti #12 Crimp Machined 22 82911457NA 82911456A 4.9 20 82911459NA 82911458A 18 82911461NA 82911460A 16 82911463NA 82911462A 14 82911465NA 82911464A 12 82911467NA 82911466A UL 20A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 18A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 25A 150V 2.5kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 102W2 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Mechanics 4 contacts 25A/150V per IEC 61984 68 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 104 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contact supply separately see next page 71 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS0104P UTS0104S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.2) UTS1GJC104P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN104P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC104P UTS1JC104S Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6104P UTS6104S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.5) UTS6GJC104S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN104S Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC104P UTS6JC104S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS7104P UTS7104S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GJC104P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN104P Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 69 UTS Series 104 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 11.5 70 40.9 Ø15.1 Ø15.1 20.8 24 2.4 10.5 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view Fig. 3 Fig. 2 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 33 63.2 32.5 25.3 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 3 3 3 3 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length Fig. 7 Fig. 9 Fig. 8 18.3 18.3 41 70.7 Ø15.1 Ø15.1 3.5 3.5 2.4 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 Mechanics 4 contacts 13A/150V per IEC 61984 70 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 104 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 71 UTS Series 104 Contacts UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 13A 150V 2.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 104 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 4 contacts 13A/150V per IEC 61984 72 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E5/14D5 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E5P UTS014E5S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E5P UTS614E5S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E5P UTS6JC14E5S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E5P UTS714E5S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014D5P UTS014D5S Jam nut receptacle with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D5P32 UTS714D5S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D5P UTS714D5S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 73 UTS Series 14E5/14D5 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Mated connector length 75 82 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Fig. 6 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 7.8 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 4 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.3 3.7 0.6 2.5 22° Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mechanics 5 contacts 16A/150V per IEC 61984 74 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E5/14D5 UTS 14E5/14D5 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 12A 650V UL94 HB CSA 12A 650V UL94 HB IEC 16A 150V 2.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red © 2011 – SOURIAU 75 UTS Series 14E5/14D5 Mechanics 76 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 79 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103W3P UTS1JC103W3S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6103W3P UTS6103W3S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103W3P UTS6JC103W3S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S PCB contacts supply separately see page 79 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S OR WITH OR Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 77 UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3 33 63.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7 Fig. 4 18.3 27.2 22.5 Ø15.1 3.5 2.4 77.3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 3 2.5 2.5 0.7 0.8 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Mechanics 6 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 78 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) Accessories and tooling Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RCM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RCM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RCM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contac © 2011 – SOURIAU 79 UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 5A 32V 1.5kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 103W3 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Contacts 120 (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - plating L SM20ML1 #20 Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - Mechanics 6 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 80 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Specifi cations OR OR WITH OR Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 83 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC106P UTS1JC106S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6106P UTS6106S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC106P UTS6JC106S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.9) UTS010E6P UTS010E6S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS610E6P UTS610E6S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC10E6P UTS6JC10E6S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS710E6P UTS710E6S PCB contacts supply separately see page 83 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS010D6P UTS010D6S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.6) UTS710D6P32 UTS710D6S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.7) UTS710D6P UTS710D6S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 81 UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 6 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 63.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 22.5 27.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 12.3 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 4 4.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 2.8 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 3.3 1.6 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Fig. 9 Fig. 8 11.7 Ø15.1 2.3 16.2 20.8 24 Ø3.2 Front view Mated connector length 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 7.5 Mechanics 82 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 83 UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Contacts #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 106 - 10E6/10D6 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) UTS 106 UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 UTS 10E6/10D6 UL 6A 250V UL94 HB CSA 6A 250V UL94 HB Mechanics 6 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 84 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS010E98P UTS010E98S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS610E98P UTS610E98S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E98P UTS6JC10E98S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS710E98P UTS710E98S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS010D98P UTS010D98S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS710D98P32 UTS710D98S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS710D98P UTS710D98S Layout UTS Series 10E98/10D98 Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 85 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm UTS Series 10E98/10D98 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 18.3 Ø15.1 2.3 16.2 20.8 24 Ø3.2 Front view 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 3.3 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 Ø4 2.8 3.3 Panel cut out 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 22.4 27.2 18.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 Ø15.1 7.5 30° Ø3.1 68° 22° Mechanics 6 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 86 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 10E98/10D98 UTS 10E98/10D98 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug protective cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket UL 6A 250V UL94 HB CSA 6A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 87 UTS Series 10E98/10D98 Mechanics 88 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR OR OR UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 91 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS0147P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GJC147P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.4) UTS1GN147P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147P UTS1JC147S Plug Without (Fig.5) UTS6147P UTS6147S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GJC147S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.7) UTS6GN147S Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147P UTS6JC147S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147P UTS7147S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.10) UTS7GJC147P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN147P Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS014E7P UTS014E7S Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC14E7P UTS6JC14E7S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.11) UTS714E7P UTS714E7S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS014D7P UTS014D7S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and hold down clips Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P32 UTS714D7S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P UTS714D7S Jam nut receptacle With stand off and hold down clip (Fig.11) UTS7147PSEK9 Screw contacts loaded Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147PSCR UTS7147SSCR Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147PSCR Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147PSCR UTS6JC147SSCR Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 89 UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 33 70 32 23.5 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 11 Fig. 10 Fig. 8 Fig. 9 18 18 49 70.7 Ø31.8 Ø22.3 3.5 3.5 1.6 4.2 3 Mated connector length 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 6.4 3.2 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 Ø4 Ø3.1 5.2 Panel cut out 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 11.3 Ø22.3 23.2 28.8 2.3 29.1 22 Ø3.2 Fig. 2 Front view Fig. 1 78.5 43 Ø22.3 Fig. 4 Fig. 3 Mechanics 6 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 90 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 91 Contacts #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 16A 300V 4kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 147 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 5 3 8 10 20 18 15 13 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 6 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 Mechanics 92 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 10E7/10D7 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS010E7P UTS010E7S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS610E7P UTS610E7S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E7P UTS6JC10E7S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS710E7P UTS710E7S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS010D7P UTS010D7S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS710D7P32 UTS710D7S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS710D7P UTS710D7S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 93 UTS Series 10E7/10D7 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 22.4 27.2 18.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 Ø15.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø15.1 2.3 16.2 7.5 20.8 24 Ø3.2 Front view Mated connector length 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 2.8 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 3.3 1.6 Panel cut out 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Mechanics 7 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 94 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 10E7/10D7 UTS 10E7/10D7 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket UL 6A 250V UL94 HB CSA 6A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 2 4 8 © 2011 – SOURIAU 95 UTS Series 10E7/10D7 Mechanics 96 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 128 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 99 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS0128P UTS0128S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.2) UTS1GJC128P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN128P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC128P UTS1JC128S Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6128P UTS6128S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.5) UTS6GJC128S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN128S Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC128P UTS6JC128S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7128P UTS7128S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.10) UTS7GJC128P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN128P PCB contacts loaded Jam nut receptacle With stand off and hold down clip (Fig.11) UTS7128PSEK9 Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 97 UTS Series 128 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 11.7 Ø19.1 20.8 26.4 2.3 10.5 18.1 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view 74.5 40.9 Ø19.1 Fig. 3 Fig. 2 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 33 65.7 33 25.3 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 Drilling pattern 4.4 3.4 2 4.5 4 2.8 0.9 Panel cut out 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Mated connector length 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 11 Fig. 10 Fig. 8 Fig. 9 18 18 49.1 74.5 Ø19.1 Ø19.1 3.5 3.5 1.6 4.2 3 Mechanics 8 contacts 10A/80V per IEC 61984 98 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 128 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 99 UTS Series 128 Contacts UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 10A 80V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 128 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 8 contacts 10A/80V per IEC 61984 100 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 12E8/12D8 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E8P UTS012E8S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS612E8P UTS612E8S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E8P UTS6JC12E8S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E8P UTS712E8S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D8P UTS012D8S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS712D8P32 UTS712D8S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS712D8P UTS712D8S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 101 UTS Series 12E8/12D8 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø19 3.5 3 18 Ø19 3.5 3.1 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 4.3 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 3 1.6 3 4.3 1.1 3.9 22° Mechanics 8 contacts 6A/32V per IEC 61984 102 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E8/12D8 UTS 12E8/12D8 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB IEC 6A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 103 UTS Series 12E8/12D8 Mechanics 104 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page107 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1210P UTS1JC1210S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61210P UTS61210S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1210P UTS6JC1210S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71210P UTS71210S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E10P UTS012E10S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS612E10P UTS612E10S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC12E10P UTS6JC12E10S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS712E10P UTS712E10S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D10P UTS012D10S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.6) UTS712D10P32 UTS712D10S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.7) UTS712D10P UTS712D10S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 105 UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6 74 Ø19.1 Fig. 1 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19.1 3.5 3 12.3 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 4 4.2 18 Ø19.1 3.5 3 18 Ø19.1 3.5 3.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19.1 2.3 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 3.3 1.6 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 22° 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 4.9 3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Mechanics 10 contacts 6A/50V per IEC 61984 106 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 107 UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Contacts IEC 6A 50V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1210 - 12E10/12D10 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use UTS 1210 UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 UTS 12E10/12D10 UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 10 contacts 6A/50V per IEC 61984 108 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR OR WITH OR Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 111 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.2) UTS1GJC1412P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN1412P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1412P UTS1JC1412S Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS61412P UTS61412S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.5) UTS6GJC1412S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN1412S Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC1412P UTS6JC1412S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GJC1412P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN1412P PCB contacts supply separately see page 111 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S Layout UTS Series 1412 © 2011 – SOURIAU 109 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm UTS Series 1412 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 33 70 32 25.3 Ø31.5 Ø31.5 Ø31.5 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length Fig. 7 Fig. 9 Fig. 8 18 18 49 70.7 Ø22.3 Ø22.3 3.5 3.5 1.6 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 2.2 0.7 3.8 5.8 5.1 2 1.4 1 2.2 4.5 5.9 1 0.3 2.9 5.5 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 78.5 43 Ø22.3 Fig. 3 11.3 Fig. 2 Ø22.3 23.2 28.8 2.3 10.5 21.9 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view Female Male Mechanics 12 contacts 10A/63V per IEC 61984 110 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1412 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 111 UTS Series 1412 Contacts UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 10A 63V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1412 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 12 contacts 10A/63V per IEC 61984 112 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E12P UTS014E12S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E12P UTS614E12S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E12P UTS6JC14E12S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E12P UTS714E12S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014D12P UTS014D12S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D12P32 UTS714D12S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D12P UTS714D12S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 113 UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 7.8 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Fig. 6 Front view 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 23.2 Panel cut out 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Drilling pattern 4.5 4.1 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 Ø30.5 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 1.6 4.5 2.3 6.7 22° 1 Mechanics 12 contacts 4A/50V per IEC 61984 114 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) UTS 14E12/14D12 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB IEC 4A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 115 UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) Mechanics 116 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 12E14/12D14 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E14P UTS012E14S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS612E14P UTS612E14S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E14P UTS6JC12E14S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E14P UTS712E14S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D14P UTS012D14S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS712D14P32 UTS712D14S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS712D14P UTS712D14S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 117 UTS Series 12E14/12D14 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 14 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø19 3.5 3 18 Ø19 3.5 3.1 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 4.4 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.7 2 4.7 3.8 1.8 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Mechanics 118 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E14/12D14 UTS 12E14/12D14 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB IEC 5A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 119 UTS Series 12E14/12D14 Mechanics 120 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E15/14D15 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E15P UTS014E15S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E15P UTS614E15S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E15P UTS6JC14E15S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E15P UTS714E15S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS014D15P UTS014D15S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D15P32 UTS714D15S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D15P UTS714D15S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 121 UTS Series 14E15/14D15 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view 7.8 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 30° 68° 22° 3.2 5.5 2.5 2.7 6.1 5.1 5.3 6.2 2.8 0.3 5.7 1.9 1 3.5 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Mechanics 15 contacts 4A/50V per IEC 61984 122 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E15/14D15 UTS 14E15/14D15 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 12A 650V UL94 HB CSA 12A 650V UL94 HB IEC 4A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 0 5 3 8 10 20 18 15 13 23 25 28 30 © 2011 – SOURIAU 123 UTS Series 14E15/14D15 Mechanics 124 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E18/14D18 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E18P UTS014E18S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E18P UTS614E18S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E18P UTS6JC14E18S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E18P UTS714E18S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS014D18P UTS014D18S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D18P32 UTS714D18S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D18P UTS714D18S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 125 UTS Series 14E18/14D18 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view 7.8 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 1.6 3.3 6.1 Ø22 Ø26.2 Ø30.5 22° 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 4.9 2.8 5.7 6.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Mechanics 18 contacts 5A/50V per IEC 61984 126 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E18/14D18 UTS 14E18/14D18 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 4A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4A 250V UL94 HB IEC 5A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 0 6 4 2 8 10 © 2011 – SOURIAU 127 UTS Series 14E18/14D18 Mechanics 128 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 131 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1419P UTS1JC1419S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61419P UTS61419S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1419P UTS6JC1419S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S PCB contacts supply separately see page 131 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS014E19P UTS014E19S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS614E19P UTS614E19S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC14E19P UTS6JC14E19S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS714E19P UTS714E19S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.9) UTS014D19P UTS014D19S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.6) UTS714D19P32 UTS714D19S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.7) UTS714D19P UTS714D19S Layout Sealed unmated Square fl ange receptacle © 2011 – SOURIAU 129 UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 8 Fig. 9 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 78 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6 78.5 Ø22.3 Fig. 1 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 3.5 3 12.3 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 4 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 1.6 4.9 Ø22 Ø26.2 Ø30.5 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 3.3 6.6 2.8 5.7 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Mechanics 19 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 130 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 131 UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Contacts IEC 5A 32V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1419 - 14E19/14D19 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use UTS 1419 UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 UTS 14E19/14D19 UL 4A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4A 250V UL94 HB 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 19 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 132 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR WITH UTS Series 1823 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 135 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1823P UTS1JC1823S Plug Without (Fig.3) UTS61823P UTS61823S Plug Cable gland (Fig.4) UTS6JC1823P UTS6JC1823S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S PCB contacts supply separately see page 135 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S Layout 134 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1823 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS18DCG Part number UTS18DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS618DCG Part number UTS18DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 8500-5590A 8500-5599 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD16B Gasket Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 135 UTS Series 1823 Contacts 120 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 9A 63V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1823 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 23 contacts 9A/63V per IEC 61984 136 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 1832 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contact supply separately see page 139 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1832P UTS1JC1832S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61832P UTS61832S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1832P UTS6JC1832S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S PCB contacts supply separately see page 139 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S Layout 138 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1832 Metal terminal Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS18DCG Part number UTS18DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS618DCG Part number UTS18DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 8500-5590A 8500-5599 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD16B Gasket Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 139 UTS Series 1832 Contacts UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 IEC 4A 32V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1832 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 32 contacts 4A/32V per IEC 61984 UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 141 Contacts UTS Series Description ....................................................................................................................................... 142 Contact plating selector guide ................................................................................................... 143 Contact selector guide ................................................................................................................. 144 Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 144 Crimp contacts ................................................................................................................................ 145 #16 coaxial contacts .................................................................................................................... 147 PCB contacts ................................................................................................................................... 148 Fibre optic contacts ....................................................................................................................... 149 142 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Contacts Contacts Description The UTS series is delivered with (solder and PCB versions) or without contact (crimp version). When contacts are not loaded, this series offers the unique possibility to use the same contact in any layout as long as it receives the same active part size. Thus it is possible to buy only one contact reference and equip all connectors even if housings are different. The main benefit is the standardisation which means reduction of inventory cost. Bearing in mind that any additional tool or complicated assembly process should be avoided, our contacts are based on a snap-in principle which avoid the use of an insertion tool. Crimp contacts are available in different versions: In addition, UTS series can obviously be equipped with solder contacts, PCB contacts, screw termination. • machined • stamped & formed • coaxial • fiber optic © 2011 – SOURIAU 143 UTS Series Contacts Contact plating selector guide As soon as you know what contact size you need, you next have to decide on which type to use. Souriau proposes mainly two different types of electrical contacts: - Machined - Stamped & formed Machined contacts are generally chosen for low quantities purpose as well as a better solution for power applications. Stamped & formed contacts offer the ability to be crimped automatically which makes them more suitable for high volume production applications. Then comes the question: What plating should I choose ? Hereunder is a graph with criteria to guide you: NB: do not mix different plating (e.g. tin plated pin contact with gold plated socket contact). 250 100 0.4μm of gold min Gold fl ash Silver Tin 5mA 5mV Contact size #20 #12 #16 #8 Vibration Number of cycles Current / Voltage Contacts 144 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Contacts Electrical characteristics: contact resistance #20 Ø1mm Machined < 6m Stamped & formed < 15m #16 Ø1.6mm Machined < 3m Stamped & formed < 6m #12 Ø2.4mm Machined < 5m #8 Ø3.6mm Machined < 5m Available platings (contact supply separately) A 2μ Ni + 2μ Ag J Gold fl ash over 2μ Ni K Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni S31 Active part: Gold fl ash over Ni Crimp area: Nickel S18 Active part: 0.75μ gold min over 2μ Ni Crimp area: 1.3μ tin over Ni Other: Nickel S25 S26 Active part: 0.75μ Au over Ni Crimp area: fl ash Au over Ni T T: 2μm Ni mini all over + 3 to 5 μm Sn all over TK6 2-5μ Sn pre-plated Conscious of the wide variety of applications, contact packaging has been considered for small series (bulk packaging) and high volume production (reeled contacts): Size contacts #20 & #16 • 100 pieces bulk packing (stamped & formed contacts) Electrical characteristics: contact resistance #20 Ø1mm Machined < 4m #16 Ø1.6mm Machined < 3m Available platings (contact preloaded) Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni Contact preloaded Contact supply separately • 50 pieces bulk packing (machined contacts) • 25 pieces bulk packing (stamped & formed contacts) • 1000 pieces bulk packing (machined contacts) • 5000 pieces reeled (machined contacts) • 3000 pieces reeled (stamped & formed contacts) Size contacts #12 & #8 Contact selector guide Packaging © 2011 – SOURIAU 145 UTS Series Contacts Crimp contacts (1) contact reeled (2) loose contact Exemple: RM24W3K - Size #20, Machined, AWG24 wire. Contact size Type Wire size Part number Max wire Ø Max insulator Ø Plating AWG mm² Male Female available #20 Ø1 mm Machined 26-24 0.13-0.20 RM24W3K RC24W3K 1.58 max K Stamped & Formed 26-24 0.13-0.25 SM24W3-(1) SC24W3-(1) 0.89-1.58 TK6 S25 (female) SM24WL3-(2) SC24WL3-(2) S26 (male) Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20W3K RC20W3K 1.58 max K Stamped & Formed 22-20 0.35-0.5 SM20W3-(1) SC20W3-(1) 1.17-2.08 TK6 S25 (female) SM20WL3-(2) SC20WL3-(2) S26 (male) Machined 20-18 0.50-0.93 RM18W3K RC18W3K 2.10 max K #16 Ø1.6 mm Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1- RC28M1- 0.55 1.1 K, J, T Machined 26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9- RC24M9- 0.8 1.6 K, J, T Stamped & Formed 26-24 0.13-0.25 SM24M1-(1) SM24ML1-(2) SC24M1-(1) SC24ML1-(2) 0.89-1.28 Insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20M13- RC20M13- 1.18 1.8 K, J, T RM20M12- RC20M12- 2.2 Stamped & Formed 22-20 0.35-0.5 SM20M1-(1) SM20ML1-(2) SC20M1-(1) SC20ML1-(2) 1.17-2.08 Insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Machined 20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23- RC16M23- 1.8 3.2 K, J, T Stamped & Formed 18-16 0.8-1.5 SM16M1-(1) SM16ML1-(2) SC16M1-(1) SC16ML1-(2) 3.0 No insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Stamped & Formed 18-16 0.8-1.5 SM16M11-(1) SM16ML11-(2) SC16M11-(1) SC16ML11-(2) 2.0-3.0 Insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50- RC14M50- 2.05 3.2 K, J, T Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30- RC14M30- 2.28 3.2 K, J, T Stamped & Formed 14 2.0-2.5 SM14M1-(1) SM14ML1-(2) SC14M1-(1) SC14ML1-(2) 3.2 No insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 #12 Ø2.4 mm Machined 22 0.13-0.4 82911457NA 82911456A - 4.9 A, K 20 0.5 82911459NA 82911458A 18 0.75-1.0 82911461NA 82911460A 16 1.5 82911463NA 82911462A 14 2.5 82911465NA 82911464A 12 4 82911467NA 82911466A #8 Ø3.6 mm Machined 16 1.5 82913601A 82913600A - 6.5 A 14 2.5 82913603A 82913602A 12 4 82913605A 82913604A 10 6.0 82913607A 82913606A 8 10.0 82913609A 82913608A Standard version Contacts 146 © 2011 – SOURIAU Contact 1 Contact 2 Standard male contact Standard female contact Longer male contact Standard male contact Standard female contact FMLB Shorter female contact LMFB UTS Series Contacts Crimp contacts Exemple: RM16M3GE1K - Size #16, Machined, Longer male, AWG16 wire. First Mate Last Break contacts should be chosen only if the cavity is not marked with the earth symbol. For cavities marked with the earth symbol, standard contacts will fulfi ll the same role as a fi rst mate, last break contact used in a standard cavity. Ground symbol How to make FMLB / LMFB connection First Mate Last Break contacts Contact size Type Wire size Part number Max wire Ø Max insulator Ø Color band Plating available AWG mm² Male Female Front Rear #16 Ø1.6 mm Longer male contact (+1mm) Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1GE1□ - 0.55 1.1 - Red □ = K, J or T 26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9GE1□ 0.8 1.6 Red Red 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20M13GE1□ 1.18 1.8 Black Red RM20M12GE1□ 2.2 Blue Red 20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23GE1□ 1.8 3.2 - Red 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50GE1□ 2.05 - - Red 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30GE1□ 2.28 - - Red #16 Ø1.6 mm Shorter female contact (-0.7mm) Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 - RC28M1GE7□ 0.55 1.1 - Blue □ = K, J or T 26-24 0.13-0.2 RC24M9GE7□ 0.8 1.6 Red Blue 22-20 0.32-0.52 RC20M13GE7□ 1.18 1.8 Black Blue RC20M12GE7□ 2.2 Blue Blue 20-16 0.52-1.5 RC16M23GE7□ 1.8 3.2 - Blue 16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M50GE7□ 2.05 - - Blue 16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M30GE7□ 2.28 - - Blue ont Re © 2011 – SOURIAU 147 UTS Series Contacts #16 coaxial contacts We provide 2 types of coaxial contacts suitable for 50 or 75, coaxial cable or twisted pair cable. Monocrimp coaxial contact • The monocrimp one-piece coaxial contacts offer high reliability plus the economic advantage of a 95% reduction in installation time over conventional assembly methods. • This economy is achieved by simultaneously crimping both the inner conductor and outer braid or drain wire. Multipiece crimp coaxial contact • The inner conductor and outer braid is crimped individually. • The thermoplastic insulating bushing in the outer body is designed to accept and permanently retain the inner contact. • An outer ferrule is used to connect the braid to the outer contact and provide cable support to ensure against bending and vibration. Suitable for Coaxial cable or Twisted cable • For jacket diameter from 1.78 to 3.05mm Inner conductor up to 2.44mm diameter • For jacket diameter from 0.64 to 1.45mm Inner conductor from AWG30 to AWG24 Contacts for coaxial cable summary Contact type Contact range Contact part number with cable combination Cabling notice Male contact Female contact Multipiece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 See page 176 See pages 180 & 181 Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 182 Contacts for twisted pairs cable summary Contact type Contact range Contact part number with cable combination Cabling notice Male contact Female contact Multipiece RMDXK10D28 + YORK090 RCDXK1D28 + YORK090 See page 177 See page 178 Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 179 Coaxial contact range Contacts 148 © 2011 – SOURIAU PCB contacts PCB contacts PCB soldering UTS range can be carried out with a wave soldering process, but not refl ow soldering process. All high temperature processes are prohibited. Nominal length (G) Dimension of dipsolder contacts out of connector (contacts to be ordered separately). Contact size Type Part number Plating Male Female #20 Ø1mm Short version RMW50A7K RCW50A7K K Long version RMW5016K RCW5016K #16 Ø1.6mm Short version RM20M12E8□ RC20M12E8□ □=K or T Long version RM20M12E83□ RC20M12E83□ RC20M12E84□ Exemple: RM50A7K - Size #20, Short version, male. UTS Series Contacts G * Plating indication: see plating table Connector size Pin contact Socket contact RM20M12E8*□ RM20M12E83*□ RC20M12E8*□ RC20M12E83*□ RC20M12E84*□ 10 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 12 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 14 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 16 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 Connector size Pin contact Socket contact RM20M 12E8*□ RM20M 12E83*□ RMW 50A7K RMW 5016K RC20M 12E8*□ RC20M 12E83*□ RCW 50A7K RCW 5016K 10 4.1 9.2 9.51 10.41 4.65 8.5 2.4 3.04 12 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04 14 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04 16 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04 UTS0 UTS7 © 2011 – SOURIAU 149 Fibre optic contacts Size 16 Fibre optic contacts for TRIM TRIO® connectors Size 16 Fibre optic contacts are optical contacts designed for the integration of optical links in all TRIM TRIO® cable connectors. The Fibre optic contacts are designed to accommodate: • Plastic Optical Fibre (POF) 1 mm core and 2.2 mm jacket • Plastic Clad Fibre (PCF) 230μm core and 2.2 mm jacket Typical features and benefits are: • Socket contact is spring loaded to avoid any air gap between the two optical faces. • Low insertion loss is provided by high precision pieces. • Single jumpers, multiway harness and active device housings can be supplied regarding customer requirement. Performance • Fibre type: ................................................................................................................................POF • Wave length: ........................................................................................................................650 nm • Optical insertion loss (typ.): ..........................................................................................2 dB max. • Jacketed external diameter: ............................................................................................2.2mm • Temperature range: ....................................................................................................-25°C to +70°C • Cable retention: ..................................................................................................................... 49N • Mating cycles without cleaning: .........................................................................................50 • Max. mating cycles: ...............................................................................................................500 Construction • Contact body: Copper alloy Connector accommodation Any TRIM TRIO® size 16 contact can be used in any contact position in any connector in the TRIM TRIO® size 16 interconnection system : UTP, UTS, UTG, UTO. UTS Series Contacts Description Technical characteristics Contacts 150 © 2011 – SOURIAU Fibre optic contacts UTS Series Contacts POF Contact (Plastic Optical Fibre) Ordering information Part numbers Descriptions 80WD0005 Stripping tool 80WD0025 Automatic stripping tool for Ø 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm & 3.8 mm 80WM0006 Ruler 80WP0005 Polishing plate 80WP0013 Non slip base (to hold the polishing plate) 80WP0014 Polishing disk (grain size 9μm) 80WP0018 Polishing tool 80WP0019 Polishing disk (grain size 30μm) 80WS0002 Crimping plier STANDARD TOOLING KIT - P/N 80MS0004 The standard tooling kit is made of the part numbers below that can be ordered separately as well. Part numbers Descriptions 80WG0010 Needle 80WG0015 Capsule 80WG0016 Syringe 80WN0005 Dry air spray 80WN0006 Optical paper 80WN0012 Dropping bottle 80WN0008 Wiping solvent SPECIFIC TOOLING LIST - can be ordered only separately POF Contacts (Plastic Optical Fibre) Male contact ................................................RMPOF1000 Female contact ......................................... RCPOF1000B © 2011 – SOURIAU 151 UTS Series Contacts Contacts UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 153 Technical information UTS Series Tooling ............................................................................................................................................... 154 Assembly intruction ....................................................................................................................... 156 Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ...................................................................................... 162 Extraction tools ............................................................................................................................... 162 Rated current & working voltage ............................................................................................... 163 UV resistance .................................................................................................................................. 164 UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................................................................................. 165 IEC 61984 & IP codes explained ............................................................................................. 168 What is NEMA rating ? ................................................................................................................. 170 Ethernet for the layman ................................................................................................................ 171 154 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Technical information Souriau has been working in partnership with Mecal for a good number of years. With sales offi ces located in all major industrial regions of the world, the combined strengths of both organisations has resulted in a truly global solution to all your production tooling needs. Mecal sales network: Mecal is leader in manufacturing tooling for crimping terminals over a stripped wire. Established in 1976, Mecal has become one of the world's leading companies dedicated to the design and manufacture of semi automatic production tools for strip fed, open barrel crimp terminals, serving the Automotive, Telecom and Datacomm industry. The extreme environment interconnect specialist “from deep sea to deep space”. Souriau designs manufactures and markets high performance interconnect solutions for severe environments dedicated to the aerospace, defence, light and heavy industry markets. Mini Applicator Stripper Presses Tooling www.mecal.net/eng/retevendita.php Automatic crimping tools © 2011 – SOURIAU 155 UTS Series Technical information Contact size Part number Head Handles #20 1mm RM/RC 24W3 - S20RCM SHANDLES RM/RC 20W3 - RM/RC 18W3 - SM 24W3S-(1) SC 24W3S-(1) S20SCM20 SM 24WL3S-(2) SC 24WL3S-(2) SM/SC 20W3S-(1) SM/SC 20WL3S-(2) #16 1.6mm RM/RC 28M1- S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9- RM/RC 20M13- RM/RC 20M12- RM/RC 16M23- S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50- S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30- S16RCM14 SM/SC 24M1- SM/SC 24ML1- S16SCM20 SM/SC 20M1- SM/SC 20ML1- SM/SC 16M1- SM/SC 16ML1- S16SCML1 SM/SC 14M1- SM/SC 14ML1- SM/SC 16M11- SM/SC 16ML11- S16SCML11 Specifi c contacts Contact size Part number Tool with separate locator Extraction tools Hand tool Positioner + locator setting #12 2.4mm 8291 1457N- / 8291 1456- M317 VGE10077A 1-2 5106020924 8291 1459N- / 8291 1458- 2 8291 1461N- / 8291 1460- 2 8291 1463N- / 8291 1462- 3 8291 1465N- / 8291 1464- 3 8291 1467N- / 8291 1466- 4 #8 3.6mm 8291 3601A / 8291 3600A M317 VGE10078A 3 51060210936 8291 3603A / 8291 3602A 3 8291 3605A / 8291 3604A 4 8291 3607A / 8291 3606A 5 8291 3609A / 8291 3608A 6/7 Contact size Part number Hand tools (SHANDLES) head Tool with separate locator Extraction tools Hand tool Positioner + locator setting #16 Ø 1.6mm Longer RM contact RM28M1GE1- S16RCM20 RX2025GE1 RM24M9GE1- RM20M13GE1- RM16M23 GE1- S16RCM16 MH860 MH86186 6/8 RM14M50 GE1- S16RCM1450 M317 UH25 3 RM14M30 GE1- S16RCM14 #16 Ø 1.6mm Shorter RC contact RC28M1GE7- S16RCM20 MH860 MH86164G 4/6 RC24M9GE7- 5/6 RC20M13GE7- RC20M12GE7- 5/7 RC16M23GE7- S16RCM16 6/8 RC14M50GE7- S16RCM1450 M317 UH25 3 RC14M30GE7- S16RCM14 Standard contacts Coaxial contacts See cabling notice chapter Appendices, pages 178 to 182. (1) contact reeled (2) loose contact Note: endurance of SHANDLES tool = 5 000 cycles. 51060210924 51060210936 SHANDLES Crimptooling table Technical information 156 © 2011 – SOURIAU Assembly instruction Part number Stripping length L Male Female (mm) Machined contact #16 RM28M1- / RM24M9- RM20M13- / RM20M12- RC28M1- / RC24M9- RC20M13- / RC20M12- 4.8 RM16M23- / RM14M50- RM14M30- RC16M23- / RC14M50- RC14M30- 7.1 #20 RM24W3- / RM20W3- RM18W3- RC24W3- / RC20W3- RC18W3- 4.8 Stamped & formed #16 SM24M1- / SM24ML1- SM20M1- / SM20ML1 SC24M1- / SC24ML1- SC20M1- / SC20ML1- 4 SM16M11- / SM16ML11- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 4.65 SM16M1- / SM16ML1- SC16M1- / SC16ML1- 6.35 SM14M1- / SM14ML1- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 6.35 Screw contacts Power contacts #12 8291 1457- / 8291 1459- / 8291 1461- / 8291 1463- / 8291 1465- / 8291 1467- 8291 1456- / 8291 1458- / 8291 1460- /8291 1462- / 8291 1464- / 8291 1466 - 7 to 8 Power contacts #8 8291 3601- / 8291 3603- / 8291 3605- 8291 3607- / 8291 3609- 8291 3600- / 8291 3602- / 8291 3604- / 8291 3606- / 8291 3608- 6.5 to 7.5 Contact delivered with connector 5.8 Part number Stripping length L Male Female (mm) Machined contact #16 & #20 5 L L L L Without insulation support With insulation support L UTS Series Technical information Wire stripping crimp version Wire stripping solder version © 2011 – SOURIAU 157 One of the key factors which affects the performance of a connector, is the way contacts are terminated. Crimped connections are nowadays seen as the best solution to ensure quality throughout the lifetime of the product. Here are some reasons why we recommend this method of termination for UTS connectors: Advantages (Extract from the IEC 60352-2): - Effi cient processing of connections at each production level - Processing by fully-automatic or semi- automatic crimping machines, or with hand operated tools - No cold-soldered joints - No degradation of the spring characteristic of female contacts by the soldering temperature - No health risk from heavy metal and fl ux steam - Preservation of conductor fl exibility behind the crimped connection - No burnt, discolored and overheated wire insulation - Good connections with reproducible electrical and mechanical performances - Easy production control. To ensure that the crimp tooling is performing according tooriginal specifi cations, it is important to carry out regular checks. A common way to check the performance of tooling is with a simple pull test, ideally using a dedicated electric pull tester. Minimum recommended full forces are indicated in the tables below: Active contact part Contact type Die location on heads Wire section range Section (mm²) Tensile straight test (mini) Height (Mm) H (±0.075) Width (Mm) W (±0.075) Head's P/N Machined contacts size 20 RM/RC 24W3* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 0.95 1.27 S20RCM AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N RM/RC 20W3* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.26 1.78 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N RM/RC 18W3* 20/18 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N 1.35 1.86 AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N S & F contacts size 20 SM/SC 24WL3TK6* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 0.80 1.49 S20SCM20 AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N SM/SC 20WL3TK6* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.01 1.53 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N Machined contacts size 16 RM/RC 28M1K* 30/28 AWG 30 0.05 min 11 N 1.14 1.41 S16RCM20 AWG 28 0.08 max 11 N RM/RC 24M9K* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 1.15 1.41 AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N RM/RC 20M13K* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.26 1.76 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N RM/RC 20M12K* AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N RM/RC 16M23K* 20 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N 1.66 2.18 18 AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N 1.80 2.28 S16RCM16 16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.96 2.43 RM/RC 14M30K* 16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.10 2.68 S16RCM14 14 AWG 14 2.50 min 230 N 2.30 2.78 RM/RC 14M50K* 16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.09 2.59 S16RCM1450 14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 2.26 2.71 S & F contacts size 16 SM/SC 24ML1TK6* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 0.84 1.50 S16SCM20 AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N SM/SC 20ML1TK6* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.02 1.54 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N SM/SC 16ML11TK6* 18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.32 2.09 S16SCML11 16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.36 2.10 SM/SC 16ML1TK6* 18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.49 2.02 16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.7 2.05 S16SCML1 SM/SC14ML1TK6* 14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 1.79 2.58 (1): example of plating, for other plating see page 143 W W H H Machined contact Stamped & Formed contact UTS Series Technical information Crimping Technical information 158 © 2011 – SOURIAU • Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts • Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only) • Place receptacle in the panel cut-out, with optional gasket • Secure receptacle with screws (not supplied) Gasket (optional) Gasket (optional) Front mounting : Crimp version Rear mounting : Crimp version Optional coding ring Optional coding ring Panel thickness: 2.5mm max Panel Receptacle fl ange Receptacle fl ange 3mm max 3mm max Pa Gasket (optional) Optional coding ring Optional coding ring Front mounting : Solder version Rear mounting : Solder version Gasket (optional) UTS Series Technical information UTS 0 assembly (mounting suggestion) © 2011 – SOURIAU 159 Shell size Nut tightening torque (Nm) Ø Wire 10 1 from 1.7 mm to 3.0 mm 12 1.5 14 1.5 Nut Grommet + Compression ring Optional coding ring • Slide accessories on the cable (make sure to keep compression ring on the grommet) • Strip wires and crimp contacts • Insert fi rst contact into the grommet (fi rst contact in cavity A, use male contact to pierce the grommet, no tool is required), then insert the contact in the connector cavity A (insert manually or use tool RTM205) • Place the grommet and compression ring on the insulator • Insert the other contacts • Tighten nut (recommended torque: see note) Shell size Jam nut torque (Nm) Tool tightening Ø Wire Standard version Discrete wire sealing 8 1.5 19.05 3.2 mm max. from 1.7 mm to 3.0 mm 10 3 22.25 12 4 27.15 14 5 30.19 18 5 36.5 • Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts • Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only) • Seat o-ring, place receptacle in the panel cut-out • Tighten jam nut O-ring O-ring Jam nut Jam nut Panel thickness: 3.2mm max Panel thickness: 3.2mm max Optional coding ring Optional coding ring Crimp version Solder version Finally UTS Series Technical information UTS 7 assembly (mounting suggestion) UTS 6 GN / UTS 7 GN assembly Technical information 160 © 2011 – SOURIAU • Slide accessories on the cable • Strip external cable jacket • Strip wires and crimp contacts • Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert manually or use tool RTM205) • Tight adapter with plug, choose right seal (waste the other seal), tight nut with adapter (recommended torque values to be applied according to the table - right) • Caution: only one of both delivered gasket should be used ! Shell size Recommended jacket strip length (mm) Adapter tightening torque (Nm) Nut tightening torque (Nm) Ø Cable range Standard seal Ø Cable range Reducing seal Ø Wire Male Female 10 21 29 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0 3.2 mm max. 12 25 33 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0 14 29 36 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0 18 37 45 4 3.5 9.0/18.0 7.0/16.0 Coding ring Nut Adapter + mounted gasket Make sure the seal is positioned as shown. • Slide accessories on the cable • Strip external cable jacket • Strip wires and solder contacts • Tight adapter with plug, choose right seal (waste the other seal), tight nut with adapter (recommended torque values to be applied according to the table - right) • Caution: only one of both delivered gasket should be used ! Shell size Recommended jacket strip length (mm) Adapter tightening torque (Nm) Nut tightening torque (Nm) Ø Cable range Standard seal Ø Cable range Reducing seal Ø Wire Male 8 17 1 0.75 2.5/6.5 1.5/5.0 3.2 mm max. 10 21 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0 12 25 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0 14 29 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0 Make sure the seal is positioned as shown. Assembly instruction Coding ring Nut Adapter + mounted gasket UTS Series Technical information UTS 1 JC / UTS 6 JC assembly: Crimp version UTS 6 JC assembly: Solder version © 2011 – SOURIAU 161 Shell size UTS0 + UTS6 EN JC & CJC UTS0 + UTS6 EN GN UTS7 + UTS6 EN JC & CJC UTS7 + UTS6 EN GN A max B max C max D max 8 61.1 - 66.6 - 10 73.2 39.6 77.3 43.7 12 77.6 39.4 81.7 43.5 14 83.5 40 87.6 44.1 18 93.1 - 97.2 - UTS0 + UTS6 A B UTS7 + UTS6 C D • Slide accessories on the cable (make sure to keep compression ring on the grommet) • Strip external cable jacket • Strip wires and crimp contacts • Insert fi rst contact into the grommet (fi rst contact in cavity A, the contact pierces the grommet, no tool is required), then insert the contact in the connector cavity A (insert manually or use tool RTM205) • Place the grommet and compression ring on the insulator • Insert the other contacts • Tight adapter with plug, choose right seal (waste the other seal), tight nut with adapter (recommended torque values to be applied according to the table - right). Nut Adapter + mounted gasket Grommet + Compression ring Optional coding ring Shell size Recommended jacket strip length (mm) Adapter tightening torque (Nm) Nut tightening torque (Nm) Ø Cable range Standard seal Ø Cable range Reducing seal Ø Wire Male Female 10 21 29 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0 from 1.7 mm to 3.0 mm 12 25 33 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0 14 29 36 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0 UTS Series Technical information UTS 1 GJC / UTS 6 GJC assembly Mated connector length Note: all dimensions are in mm Technical information 162 © 2011 – SOURIAU Extraction: Place the tool into the cavity from front face of the connector, push on the handle, then remove the contact.. Special case with the tool RX2025GE1: A - When setting up in the cell, keep fi rmly the tool by the hexagonal metallic part and insert tool in cavity. B - Push the tool by the handle to extract the contact. UTS Series Technical information 51060210924 51060210936 RX2025GE1 Contact size Extractor #20 RX20D44 #16 RX2025GE1 #12 51060210924 #8 51060210936 L L1 Shell size UTS0 UTS7 L max L1 max L2 max L3 max L max L1 max L2 max L3 max 8 42.8 36.8 80.7 57.2 46.8 36.8 85.8 57.2 10 55.8 50.3 98.6 92 60.5 50.3 102.7 92 12 57.1 51.4 99.3 93.7 61.4 51.4 106.4 93.7 14 62.5 56.3 100.3 94.6 67.6 56.3 104.8 94.6 L2 L3 Dimensions overmoulded harnesses Extraction tools Extraction tools instruction for size 16 RX20D44 © 2011 – SOURIAU 163 Rated current & working voltage The current carrying capacity of a connector is limited by the thermal properties of materials used in it's construction. The amount of current that can be handled depends on the size of cable used, the ambient temperature and the heat that is generated inside the connector. Part 3 of the IEC 60512 standard determines through a derating curve, the maximum current permissible, which varies from one layout to another (Fig.1 & Fig.2). Wire size plays an important role as well, since they help to dissipate heat and avoid overheating (Fig.1 & Fig.3). Please note that the curve should be adjusted when dealing with potential hot spots, which can occur as a result of unequal loading of current across a number of contacts. As a general rule, it is best to avoid locating power handling contacts in the middle of the connector; try to locate them towards the edge where heat can be dissipated more effectively. Eventually you should fi nd a level which represents the permissible operating range: The rated current is defi ned as uninterrupted continuous current that a connector can take when all contacts are energized simultaneously without exceeding the maximum limit of temperature. The earth contact is never loaded. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Fig.1: UTS 12-4 – 1.5mm² wires 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Fig.2: UTS 12-8 – 1.5mm² wires Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Fig.3: UTS 12-4 – 2.5mm² wires 33 35 UTS Series Technical information Current carrying capacity Technical information 164 © 2011 – SOURIAU Solar radiation affects all materials, but plastics can be susceptible to extreme degradation over time. The choice of materials for the UTS series was therefore a critical consideration. All over the world we are not exposed to the same amount of energy given by the sun. The chart shown here clearly illustrates this. So we performed test according to the ISO 4892-2 and simulated 5 years exposure to outdoor environments (temperature, humidity, etc...) After this period there was no signifi cant colour variation, no crazing, no cracking and no major variation of mechanical properties. Yearly mean of daily irradiation in UV (280-400 nm) on horizontal plane (J/cm²) (1990-2004) 90° 60° 30° 0° - 30° - 90° - 60° - 180° - 150° - 120° - 90° - 60° - 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180° J/cm² 0 10 20 30 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 150 160 170 180 190 40 140 UTS Series Technical information UV resistance © 2011 – SOURIAU 165 There are two main standards for industrial connectors: UL94 & UL1977 UL94 This standard is dedicated to plastics fl ammability. It characterises how the material burns in various orientation and thicknesses. The UTS series has been rated at V-0 & HB. Procedure: A specimen is supported in a vertical or horizontal position and a fl ame is applied to the bottom of the specimen. The fl ame is applied for ten seconds and then removed until fl aming stops, at which time the fl ame is reapplied for another ten seconds and then removed. Two sets of fi ve specimens are tested. The two sets are conditioned under different conditions. V-0 Vertical burning: • Specimens must not burn with fl aming combustion for more than 10 seconds after either test fl ame application. • Total fl aming combustion time must not exceed 50 seconds for each set of 5 specimens. • Specimens must not burn with fl aming or glowing combustion up to the specimen holding clamp. • Specimens must not drip fl aming particles that ignite the cotton. • No specimen can have glowing combustion remain for longer than 30 seconds after removal of the test fl ame. ~~ 5’’ 12’’ 45° Cotton Material Underwriter Laboratories HB Horizontal burning: • A material classed HB shall not have a burning rate exceeding 40 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens having a thickness of 3.0 to 13 mm. • A material classed HB shall not have a burning rate exceeding 75 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens having a thickness less than 3.0 mm. • A material classed HB shall cease to burn before the 100 mm reference mark. 45° 45° Material 100±1mm 25±1mm 10±1mm Wire gauze Wire gauze UTS Series Technical information Technical information 166 © 2011 – SOURIAU Underwriter Laboratories UL1977 There are several standards which deal with plug and receptacle. Each of them is only for a small area of applications. It could be telecommunication, Etc. The UL 1977 covers single and multipole connectors intended for factory assembly. Requirements apply to devices in taking into account intensity and voltage. There a categories as follows: Type 0 Type 1A Tybe 1B Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 0 0 8.3 A 31 A 200 A 1000 A 600 V 30 V (42 V peak) According to above table, the level of performance that has to be reached could be different. Most of them are explained in the following page. Assembly: Connector has to be keyed to prevent any mismating that can damage the machine or hurt the user. In the same way, plugs and sockets have to be equipped to protect persons against contact with live parts. Finally the identifi ed grounding contact shall be located so that the corresponding electrical continuity has to be completed before any other contact. Insulating materials: Material uses for electrical insulation, as a minimum, have to comply with the characteristics shown below: • Minimum ratings for polymeric materials Type Flame rating Relative thermal index (RTI) Electrical/mechanical w/o impact */** 0 - 50/50 1A HB 50/50 1B HB 50/50 2 HB 50/50 3 HB 50/50 4 HB 50/50 * The RTI of the material shall not be lower than the temperature measured during the Temperature Test. ** For a thickness less than that for which a value has been established, the RTI of the minimum thickness with an established value shall be used. UTS Series Technical information © 2011 – SOURIAU 167 Underwriter Laboratories UL1977 Spacing: For a 250V max connector, distance through air or over material shall be 1.2mm whereas from 250V to 600V connector the spacing is 3.2 minimum. These distances have to be taken between uninsulated live parts as shown in the matrix below: An alternative way to determine voltage rating is with the Dielectric-Withstand test. If during one minute there is no arc-over or breakdown the rated voltage is given as given below: a) 500 volts for a type 1B device b) 1000 volts plus twice rated voltage for types 1A, 2, 3 and 4 devices. • Applicability of spacing requirements Type Uninsulated live part - uninsulated live part of opposite polarity Uninsulated live part - uninsulated grounded metal part Uninsulated live part - exposed dead metal part 0 No No No 1A Yes Yes Yes 1B Yes Yes No 2 Yes Yes Yes 3 Yes Yes Yes 4 Yes Yes Yes Marking: A device shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's trade name, trade mark, or other descriptive marking by which the organisation responsible for the product may be identifi ed. (Exception: If the device is too small, or where the legibility would be diffi cult to attain, the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive marking may appear on the smallest unit container or carton) The following shall be marked on the device or on the smallest unit container or carton or on a stuffer sheet in the smallest unit container or carton: a) The catalogue number or an equivalent designation b) The electrical rating in both volts and amperes, if assigned c) Whether ac or dc, if restricted d) Flammability class, if identifi ed Example - Marking for the arrangement 10-3: 10A 500V UL94 V-0 UTS Series Technical information Technical information 168 © 2011 – SOURIAU The norm is dedicated to connectors with rated voltage above 50V and up to 1000V and rated currents up to 125A per contact. But depending of your application connectors should be compliant with another standard. This has to be double checked with the customer. There are lot of constructional requirements and performances specifi ed in that standard. Most of them are illustrated in greater details hereafter. Provisions for earthing: The UTS connector is intended to be used on Class II systems. Even if the purpose of our connector is not to interrupt current, we often see a need to add a protective earth contact. Then this one shall be a “First mate, last break” style. Critically, among all of the normal assumptions we make in designing a connector, this contact has to be considered as a live part and must be protected against electric shock by double or reinforced insulation. IP Code: IP is a coding system defi ned by the IEC 60529 to indicate the degrees of protection provided by an enclosure. The aim of this is to give information regarding the accessibility of live parts against ingress of water and other foreign bodies. 1st digit Degree of protection 2nd digit Degree of protection 0 No protection against accidental contact. No protection against solid foreign bodies. 0 No protection against water. 1 Protection against contacts with any large area by hand and against large solid foreign bodies with a diameter bigger than 50 mm. 1 Drip-proof. Protection against vertical water drips. 2 Protection against contacts with the fi ngers. Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter bigger than 12 mm. 2 Drip-proof. Protection against water drips up to a 15° angle. 3 Protection against tools, wires or similar objects with a diameter bigger than 2.5 mm. Protection against small solid bodies with a diameter bigger than 2.5 mm. 3 Spray-proof. Protection against diagonal water drips up to a 60° angle. 4 As 3 however diameter is bigger than 1 mm. 4 Splash-proof. Protection against splashed water from all directions. 5 Full protection against contacts. Protection against interior injurious dust deposits. 5 Hose-proof. Protection against water (out of a nozzle) from all directions. 6 Total protection against contacts. Protection against penetration of dust. 6 Protection against temporary fl ooding. 7 Protection against temporary immersions. 8 Protection against water pressure. Pressure to be specifi ed by supplier. 9K High pressure hose-proof. Protection against high pressure water (out of a nozzle) from all directions. IP 6 8 First digit (foreign bodies protection) Second digit (water protection) Code letters (international Protection) UTS offers high sealing performance IP68 / 69K… Even in dynamic situations. In addition to the IEC 60529 we conjointly use the DIN 40050 part 9 which are dedicated to road vehicles. The main differences are: • First digit: 5 replaced by 5K, 6 by 6K. In the DIN the tested equipment is not depressurized as it is in the IEC. • Second digit: 5K and 6K has been added and are equivalent respectively to 5 and 6 but with higher pressure. 9K which represents the High pressure cleaning. IEC 61984 ed.2.0 “Copyright © 2008 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch" IEC 60664-1 ed.2.0 “Copyright © 2007 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch” UTS Series Technical information IEC 61984 © 2011 – SOURIAU 169 Overvoltage UTS connectors are qualifi ed to be used on systems rated at Overvoltage category III Per the IEC 60664-1 (formely VDE 0110) each category is linked to the end application and where the device will be implemented: • Category IV (primary overcurrent protection equipment): Origin of the installation • Category III (Any fi xed installation with a permanent connection) Fixed installation and equipment and for cases where the reliability and the availability is subject to special requirements • Category II (Domestic applicances): Energy consuming equipment to be supplied from the fi xed installation • Category I (Protected electronic circuit): For connection to circuit in which measures are taken to limit transient overvoltage. Pollution degree Per the IEC 60664-1 (formerly VDE 0110) the environment affects the performance of the insulation. Particles can build a bridge between two metal parts. As a rule dust mixed with water can be conductive and more generally speaking metal dust is conductive. Finally, the standard defi nes 4 levels of pollution: • Degree 1 (Air conditioned dry room): No pollution or only dry, non conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no infl uence. • Degree 2 (Personal computer in a residential area): Only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected. • Degree 3 (Machine tools): Conductive pollution occurs or dry non-conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation which is to be expected. • Degree 4 (Equipments on roof, locomotives): Continuous conductivity occurs due to conductive dust, rain or other wet conditions. Finally, the harsher the environment is, the longer clearance and creepage distances should be. Nonetheless, according the IEC 61984, enclosure rated at IP54 or higher can be dimensioned for a lower pollution degree. This applies to mated connectors disengaged for test and maintenance. Marking The marking should give enough details to the user to know what the main characteristics are and without going deep in technical documentation. Below examples identify the suitability of the connector: • Example 1: Marking of a connector with rated current 16A, rated voltage 400V, rated impulse voltage 6kV and pollution degree 3, 2 and 1 for use in any system, preferably unearthed or delta-earthed systems: 16A 400V 6kV 3 • Example 2: Marking of a connector with rated current 16A, rated insulation voltages line-to-earth 250V, line-to-line 400V, rated impulse voltage 4kV and pollution degree 3, 2 and 1 for use in earthed systems: 1166AA 225500VV 440000VV 44kkVV 33 16A 400V 6kV 3 UTS Series Technical information IEC 61984 Technical information 170 © 2011 – SOURIAU Enclosure rating IP20 IP22 IP55 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67 Type 1 • Type 3 • Type 3R • Type 3S • Type 4 • Type 4X • Type 6 • Type 12 • Type 13 • • indicates compliance 6 IP67 Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hosedirected water, the entry of water during occasional temporary submersion at a limited depth and damage from external ice formation. 6P IP67 Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hose-directed water, the entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth and damage from external ice formation. Type 6 rating can be either Type 6 or Type 6P - please see below: • NEMA ratings vs IP ratings Whereas IP ratings only consider protection against ingress of foreign bodies - first digit - and ingress of water (second digit), NEMA ratings consider these but also verify protection from external ice, corrosive materials, oil immersion, etc. The correlation between NEMA & IP being limited only to dust and water, we can state that a NEMA type is equivalent to an IP rating but it is not possible to say the contrary. Below a list of some NEMA standards: UTS Series Technical information What is NEMA rating ? © 2011 – SOURIAU 171 Ethernet Basics Ethernet is a widely used communications protocol that is used to transmit data packets (datagrams) between network devices. Imagine a highway in a large metropolitan area six lanes wide at rush hour. The vehicles on the highway need rules to follow so that they get to their destination without crashing into each other. In an Ethernet network link, there could be 100 million bits of information transmitted in one second. In the Ethernet standard, there exist rules to govern packet structure, transmission requirements, error correction, communication with end equipment, etc. Examining the differences between 100Mhz, 100 Base TX, Cat5e; what does it all mean? When discussing connectors and Ethernet, there are a few key details to be aware of: • 100Mhz is a measurement of Frequency for the signal - Comparable to the Speed Limit of a highway • 100BaseTX (or Fast Ethernet) is an Ethernet link standard and identifi es available link bandwidth The bandwidth is measured in units of MBits/S (megabits per second) - Comparable to the number of cars that pass a point in one second • Cat5e is an EIA/TIA standard for performance and physical characteristics for cables and connectors - Comparable to performance specifi cations of the car and highway In connectors and cables, Fast Ethernet uses 2 pairs, one for transmit, one for receive. This, way data traffi c can fl ow in both directions simultaneously. In order to explain basic Ethernet theory, we can use a functional comparison to a busy city with highways, buildings, and cars. To illustrate this, the table below provides correlation between the different components/pieces/links that encompass Ethernet network connectivity, and the larger scale infrastructure of a metropolitan city. • City: The network itself • Buildings: End equipment, PC, server, etc. • Roads: Ethernet cabling • Cars: Data packets, datagrams, bits, bytes, etc. • Tolls: Firewalls • Bridges: Connectors • Traffi c laws: Protocol/communication specifi cations UTS Series Technical information Ethernet for the layman Technical information 172 © 2011 – SOURIAU Souriau offering: UTS Hi seal size 8, 4 contacts 1 (Pair 1) ‹ A 2 (Pair 1) ‹ C 3 (Pair 2) ‹ B 4 (Pair 2) ‹ D UTS size 10, 6 contacts 1 (Pair 1) ‹ A 2 (Pair 1) ‹ B 3 (Pair 2) ‹ E 4 (Pair 2) ‹ D UTS size 12, 10 contacts 1 (Pair 1) ‹ C 2 (Pair 1) ‹ B 3 (Pair 2) ‹ G 4 (Pair 2) ‹ H Standard solutions. 8E4/8D4 4 Ø 1 (#20) 106/10E6/10D6 6 Ø 1 (#20) 1210/12E10/12D10 10 Ø 1 (#20) What about using coax contacts ? Ethernet twisted pairs carry a symmetrical (balanced) signal. Once terminated into a coax contact, the inner core will be protected by a shield - but not the outer contact. Because of EMI issues, the signal will no longer be balanced. Conclusion - it does not work and is not recommended. Conclusion To carry 100Mb/s data signal, 100BaseTX or Fast Ethernet recommends the use of Cat5e connectors as well as Cat5e cable with the support of a 100MHz signal. Nevertheless, a 100Mb/s signal can be transmitted in certain conditions (short distance, only one connector, lower frequency but a different code) thru many other connection materials - not necessarily Cat5e rated. What about using Quadrax contacts ? The Quadrax contact is used in railway applications because of the use of quad cable. In this specifi c market, the standard Ethernet twisted pairs wires cannot be offered, they are too thin and often solid (not stranded). In the rest of industry, UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pairs) cables are widely used. The Quadrax contact is not designed to terminate them. And thus, are not advised for industrial applications. Shielding continuity done in cavity C&F. Note: Shielding can be replaced by DC power. UTS Series Technical information Ethernet for the layman © 2011 – SOURIAU 173 UTS Series Technical information Technical information UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 175 Appendices UTS Series #16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices ................................................................................... 176 Glossary of terms ........................................................................................................................... 183 Discrimination/Keying methods ................................................................................................ 184 Part number Index ......................................................................................................................... 185 176 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Appendices #16 coaxial contacts Cable type Impedance Contact type Ø over jacket Ø over dielectric Inner cond size Ø outer braid Male contact kit for coaxial cable Female contact kit for coaxial cable inch mm inch mm Ext. Ø mm inch mm RG161/U 75 Multi piece 0.09 2.29 0.057 1.45 RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 RG179A/U 75 0.105 2.67 0.063 1.6 0.3 0.084 2.13 max RG179B/U 75 0.105 2.67 0.063 1.6 0.3 0.084 2.13 max RG187/U 75 0.11 2.79 max 0.06 1.52 0.3 RG188/U 50 0.11 2.79 max 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RG174/U 50 0.11 2.92 0.06 1.52 0.48 0.088 2.24 max AMPHENOL 21-598 50 0.105 2.67 0.06 1.52 0.48 RG196/U 50 0.08 2.03 max 0.034 0.086 0.3 RG178A/U 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RG/188A/U 50 Mono crimp 0.110 2.79 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 KX21TVT (europe) RG178 B/U 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RMDX6034D28 RCDX6034D28 RG178 / BU 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 RG174/U 50 0.115 2.92 0.06 1.52 0.48 0.088 2.24 max RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 RG188A/U 50 0.11 2.79 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 RG316/U 50 0.107 2.72 0.6 1.52 0.51 0.078 2.05 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 raychem 5024A3111 50 0.12 3.05 0.083 2.11 0.64 0.097 2.46 RMDX6052D28 RCDX6052D28 raychem 5026e1614 50 0.083 2.11 0.05 1.27 0.48 0.067 1.7 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 surprenant pn 8134 - Multi piece 0.1 2.54 0.058 1.47 0.3 RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 PRD PN 247ASC1123- 001 - Mono crimp 0.103 2.62 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 PRD PN 247AS-C1251 - 0.092 2.34 0.05 1.27 0.64 0.067 1.7 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 JUDD C15013010902 - 0.087 2.13 0.05 1.27 0.48 0.066 1.67 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 CDC PIN22939200 - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 0.064 1.63 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28 CDC PIN22939200 - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 0.064 1.63 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 CDC PIN245670000 - 0.104 2.64 0.067 1.7 0.3 0.083 2.11 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 ampex - 0.114 2.9 0.075 1.91 0.38 0.09 1.29 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 TI PN 920580 - 0.7 1.78 0.038 0.96 0.48 0.054 1.37 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 Honeywell PN 58000062 - 0.12 3.05 0.077 1.96 0.41 solid 0.096 2.44 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 - - 0.104 2.64 0.067 1.7 0.3 2.11 RMDX6050D28 - - - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 1.63 RMDX6050D28 - - - 0.114 2.9 0.075 1.91 0.38 1.29 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 - - 0.07 1.78 0.038 0.96 0.48 1.37 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 - - 0.12 3.05 0.077 1.96 0.41 2.44 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 Coaxial cable - Contact monocrimp and multipiece © 2011 – SOURIAU 177 UTS Series Appendices Cable type Contact type Inner AWG cond Ø over jacket (single wire) Inner cond size Ø outer braid Male contact kit for coaxial cable Female contact kit for coaxial cable inch mm Stranded defi nition Ext. Ø mm inch mm 2#24 stranded mil w 16878 type B Multi piece 24 0.049 1.24 max 7/.008 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 2 #24 solid mil-w-76 type LW 24 0.047 1.12 max 1/.0201 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 2 #26 stranded mil w 76 type LW or mil w16878 type b&e 26 0.043 1.09 max 7/.0063 0.16 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 2 #28 solid mil-w-81822/3 28 0.028 0.71 max - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 TWISTED PAIR 1/.201 SOLID MIL w 76 TYPE lw or MIL W 16878 26 0.044 1.12 max 1/.0201 0.511 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 twisted pair solid mil w 81822/3 28 0.028 0.71 max 1/.0126 0.32 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 #28 7/.0036 per Hitachi spec ec-711 (13-2820) Mono crimp - 0.046 1.17 7/.0036 - - - RMDX6031D28 + YORX090 RCDX6031D28 + YORX090 20218201 - 0.028 0.71 - - - - RMDX6031D28 + YORX090 RCDX6031D28 + YORX090 #30 solid - 0.025 0.64 - - - - RMDX6015D28 + YORX090 RCDX6015D28 + YORX090 #26 7/.0063 26 0.028 0.71 7/.063 0.16 - - RMDX6031D28 + YORX090 RCDX6031D28 + YORX090 #26 19/.004 26 0.049 1.24 19/.004 - - - RMDX6019D28 + YORX090 RCDX6019D28 + YORX090 #24 7/.008 24 0.049 1.24 7/.008 - - - RMDX6019D28 + YORX090 RCDX6019D28 + YORX090 #24 19/.005 24 0.057 1.45 19/.005 - - - RMDX6019D28 + YORX090 RCDX6019D28 + YORX090 - 26 - 1.25 - - - 19x0.1 RMDX6019D28 + YORX090 RCDX6019D28 + YORX090 - 24 - 1.25 - - - 7x0.2 RMDX6019D28 + YORX090 RCDX6019D28 + YORX090 - 24 - 1.45 - - - 19x0.13 RMDX6019D28 + YORX090 RCDX6019D28 + YORX090 - 26 - 0.7 - - - 7x0.16 RMDX6031D28 + YORX090 RCDX6031D28 + YORX090 Twisted cable - Contact monocrimp and multipiece Appendices 178 © 2011 – SOURIAU Twisted pair cable multipiece contact cabling UTS Series Appendices #16 coaxial contacts Cable reference Contact type Male contact Female contact Crimp tool Die set Stop bushing Cable strip length Inner conductor crimp Braid crimp A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim 2#24 stranded mil w 16878 type B Multi piece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 M10S1J - - See assembly notice 2 #24 solid mil-w-76 type LW 2 #26 stranded mil w 76 type LW or mil w16878 type B & E 2 #28 solid mil-w-81822/3 twisted pair 1/.201 solid mil w 76 type LW or mil w 16878 twisted pair solid mil w 81822/3 Male contact Outer male contact RMDX60-2 Inner socket RFD26L-1 Outer hyring YOC074 Inner supporting sleeve RMDXB-055-3 Twisted pair adapter YORK-090 Conductor "Y" Conductor "Z" Strip lengths of cable 7.95±0.41 15.54±0.41 7.95±0.41 Inner supporting Outer hyring sleeve Twisted pair adapter Locking louver typical Grounding louver typical Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: 7.54 0.25±0.05 5.94±0.41 7.54±0.41 15.54±0.41 7.95±0.41 When using solid wire fl atten conductor "X" and "Z" using N24FL-1 die as shown Female contact Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Outer hyring Supporting sleeve Twisted pair adapter Conductor "W" Conductor "X" Strip lengths of cable 6.35±0.41 13.49±0.41 7.95±0.41 Outer female contact RCDX60-2 Inner pin RMD26L-1 Outer hyring YOC074 Inner supporting sleeve RCDXB-055-1 Twisted pair adapter YORK-090 Note : all dimensions are in mm © 2011 – SOURIAU 179 Twisted pair cable monocrimp contact cabling UTS Series Appendices Cable reference Contact type Male contact Female contact Crimp tool Die set Stop bushing Cable strip length Inner conductor crimp Braid crimp A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim #28 7/.0036 per Hitachi spec ec-711 (13-2820) Mono crimp RMDX6031D28 + YORX090 RCDX6031D28 + YORX090 M10S1J S80 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.32 1.30 to 1.12 1.4 to 1.22 2.97 to 2.84 3.07 to 2.9 20218204 S80 SL105 3.94 6.1 3.16 1.30 to 1.17 1.4 to 1.22 2.97 to 2.84 3.07 to 2.79 #30 solid S83 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.06 1.22 to 1.12 1.35 to 1.22 2.97 to 2.84 3.12 to 2.95 #26 7/.0063 S80 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.06 1.30 to 1.17 1.4 to 1.22 2.97 to 2.84 3.07 to 2.9 #26 19/.004 M10SG8 ASSY'Y TOOL DIE SET STOP BUSHING M10S1J TOOL 4.7 6.1 4.06 1.22 to 1.17 1.35 to 1.22 2.84 to 2.79 3.12 to 2.97 #24 7/.008 4.7 6.1 4.06 1.22 to 1.17 1.35 to 1.22 2.84 to 2.79 3.12 to 2.97 #24 19/.005 4.7 6.1 4.06 1.22 to 1.17 1.35 to 1.22 2.84 to 2.79 3.12 to 2.97 AWG26 (19x0.1) M10SG8 crimping kit 4.7 6 4 AWG24 (7x0.2) AWG24 (19x0.13) AWG26 (7x0.16) S80 SL150 G G Braid crimp (G) to be measured with die set fully closed Inner conductor crimp (G) to be measured with die set fully closed RCDX60 Female coax contact RMDX60 Male coax contact See cable strip lengths Cable strip length A B C 16 min. • Select appropriate monocrimp coax twisted pair contact and cable combination. • Select appropriate crimp tooling (hand tool, S-die set, stop bushing). • Strip the twisted pair cable to the designated wire strip lengths. • Insert the stripped cable into the contact. One cable is to be inserted into the inside diameter of hyring, and pushed forwaerd into the inner contact. The second cable is to be inserted between the outside diameter of hyring and the inside diameter of the outer contact body. • Crimp the contact. Note : all dimensions are in mm Appendices 180 © 2011 – SOURIAU Multipiece male contact with coax cable UTS Series Appendices Multipiece kit details RMDXK10D28 includes RMDX602D28 Outer contact RFD26L1D28 Inner contact YOC074 Outer hyring RMDXB0553 Inner supporting sleeve Cable stip length A B C Dielectric diameter Contact assembly with dielectric diameter over 1.4mm - without inner supporting sleeve Outer male contact RMDX60-2 Inner socket RFD26L-1 Outer hyring YOC074 Strip lengths of cable 15.88±0.41 4.37±0.41 7.95±0.41 Step 1: - Assemble outer hyring onto cable - Assemble inner socket to inner conductor and crimp Step 2: - Insert the assembly into the outer male contact until the inner socket snaps into place - The cable braid (shield) should now cover the barrel of the outer male contact as shown Step 3: - Slide outer hyring forward against spring and crimp in place as shown Locking louver typical Grounding louver typical Contact assembly with dielectric diameter under 1.4mm - with inner supporting sleeve Outer male contact RMDX60-2 Inner socket RFD26L-1 Outer hyring YOC074 Strip lengths of cable 17.53±0.41 7.54±0.41 Inner supporting 9.12±0.41 sleeve RMDXB-055-3 Step 1: - Assemble outer hyring onto cable - Assemble supporting sleeve over dielectric and under braid - Assemble inner socket to inner conductor, push back against sleeve and crimp Supporting sleeve Outer hyring Step 2: - Insert the assembly into the outer male contact until the inner socket snaps into place - The cable braid (shield) should now cover the barrel of the outer male contact as shown Step 3: - Slide outer hyring forward against spring and crimp in place as shown Locking louver typical Grounding louver typical Note : all dimensions are in mm #16 coaxial contacts Cable reference Contact Hyring complementary compoments Outer contact crimp tool Inner contact crimp tool Crimp tool M10S1J Crimp tool M10S1J Cable strip length Die set Stop bushing Die set Stop bushing A B C RG161U Male: RMDXK10D28 YOC074 S221 SL471 S23D2 SL46D2 4.37 7.95 15.88 RG179 4.37 7.95 15.88 RG187U 4.37 7.95 15.88 RG188/U S26D2 4.37 7.95 15.88 RG174/U 4.37 7.95 15.88 RG178A/U YOC074 + RMDXB0553 S23D2 7.54 9.12 17.53 RG196U 7.54 9.12 17.53 AMPHENOL 21-598 YOC074 - 4.37 7.95 15.88 surprenant pn 8134 - 4.37 7.95 15.88 © 2011 – SOURIAU 181 Multipiece female contact with coax cable UTS Series Appendices Contact assembly with dielectric diameter over 1.4mm - without inner supporting sleeve Outer female contact RCDX60-2 Inner pin RMD26L-1 Outer hyring YOC074 Strip lengths of cable 11.13±0.41 4.37±0.41 Step 1: - Assemble outer hyring onto cable - Assemble inner pin to inner conductor and crimp Step 2: - Insert the assembly into the outer female contact until the inner pin snaps into place - The cable braid (shield) should now cover the barrel of the outer female contact as shown Step 3: - Slide outer hyring forward against spring and crimp in place as shown Contact assembly with dielectric diameter under 1.4mm - with inner supporting sleeve Outer female contact RCDX60-2028 Inner pin RMD26L-1 Outer hyring YOC074 Strip lengths of cable 11.13±0.41 6.35±0.41 Supporting sleeve RCDXB-055-1 Supporting Outer hyring sleeve Step 1: - Assemble outer hyring onto cable - Assemble supporting sleeve over dielectric and under braid - Assemble inner pin to inner conductor, push back against sleeve and crimp Step 2: - Insert the assembly into the outer female contact until the inner pin snaps into place - The cable braid (shield) should now cover the barrel of the outer female contact as shown Step 3: - Slide outer hyring forward against spring and crimp in place as shown RCDXK1D28 includes RCDX602D28 Outer contact RMD26L1D28 Inner contact YOC074 Outer hyring RCDXB0553 Inner supporting sleeve Multipiece kit details Cable stip length A B C Dielectric diameter Cable reference Contact Hyring complementary compoments Outer contact crimp tool Inner contact crimp tool Crimp tool M10S1J Crimp tool M10S1J Cable strip length Die set Stop bushing Die set Stop bushing A B C RG161U Female: RCDXK1D28 YOC074 S221 SL471 S23D2 SL46D2 4.37 - 11.13 RG179 4.37 11.13 RG187U 4.37 11.13 RG188/U S26D2 4.37 11.13 RG174/U 4.37 11.13 RG178A/U YOC074 + RMDXB0553 S23D2 6.35 11.13 RG196U 6.35 11.13 AMPHENOL 21-598 YOC074 - 4.37 11.13 surprenant pn 8134 - 4.37 11.13 Note : all dimensions are in mm Appendices 182 © 2011 – SOURIAU Coax cable with monocrimp contact cabling UTS Series Appendices RCDX60 Female coax contact RMDX60 Male coax contact See cable strip lengths Cable strip length A B C • Select appropriate cable and contact combination. • Select appropriate crimp tooling (hand tool, S-die set, stop bushing). • Strip coax cable to the designated wire strip lengths. • Insert the stripped coax into the rear of the contact. • Crimp the contact. #16 coaxial contacts Cable reference Male contact Female contact Crimp tool Die set Stop bushing Cable strip length Inner conductor crimp Braid crimp A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim CDC PIN22939200 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28 M10S1J S80 SL105 4.19 5.97 8.51 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84 CDC PIN22939200 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28 S87 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84 CDC PIN245670000 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95 KX21TVT (europe) RG178 B/U RMDX6034D28 RCDX6034D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.32/1.17 2.84/2.74 3.07/2.9 RG178 / BU RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 S87 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84 ampex RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95 TI PN 920580 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.35/1.19 1.42/1.27 2.87/2.74 3.07/2.9 RG174/U RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95 Honeywell PN 58000062 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.35/1.19 1.42/1.27 2.87/2.74 3.07/2.9 RG188A/U RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95 RG316/U RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95 PRD PN 247AS-C1123-001 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 M10SG8 ASSY'Y TOOL DIE SET STOP BUSHING M10S1J TOOL 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97 PRD PN 247AS-C1251 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97 raychem 5024A3111 RMDX6052D28 RCDX6052D28 S88 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.37/1.27 1.45/1.32 2.92/2.79 raychem 5026e1614 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 M10SG8 ASSY'Y TOOL DIE SET STOP BUSHING M10S1J TOOL 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97 JUDD C15013010902 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97 inner cond. #30, braid diam 2.64 RMDX6050D28 - S80 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - - inner cond. #30, braid diam 2.29 RMDX6050D28 - S87 SL105 4.2 6.35 8.5 - - - - inner cond. #28, braid diam 2.9 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.1 6.35 11.7 - - - - inner cond. #26, braid diam 1.78 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 S82 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - - inner cond. #26, braid diam 3.05 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 S82 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - - Note : all dimensions are in mm © 2011 – SOURIAU 183 Glossary of terms UTS Series Appendices • Clearance Per the IEC 60664-1 it is the shortest distance between two conductive parts even over the air. • Creepage distance Per the IEC 60664-1 it represents the shortest distance along the surface of the insulating material between two conductive parts. • Working voltage Per the IEC 60664-1 it is the highest r.m.s. value of A.C. or D.C. voltage across any particular insulation which can occur when the equipment is supplied at rated voltage. • Rated impulse voltage Impulse withstands voltage value assigned by the manufacturer to the equipment or to a part of it characterizing the specifi ed withstand capability of its insulation against transient overvoltage. • Working current It is the maximum continuous and not interrupted current able to be carried by all contacts without exceeding the maximum temperature of the insulating material. • Transient voltage Extract from the IEC 60664-1: Short duration overvoltage of a few millisecond or less, oscillatory or non-oscillatory, usually highly damped. • CTI (Comparative Tracking Index) The CTI value is commonly used to characterize the electrical breakdown properties of an insulating material. It allows users to know the tendency to create creepage paths. This value represents the maximum voltage after 50 drops of ammonium chloride solution without any breakdown. • RTI (Relative temperature Index): Extract from ULs website: “Maximum service temperature for a material, where a class of critical property will not be unacceptably compromised through chemical thermal degradation, over the reasonable life of an electrical product, relative to a reference material having a confi rmed, acceptable corresponding performance defi ned RTI. - RTI Elec: Electrical RTI, associated with critical electrical insulating properties. - RTI Mech Imp: Mechanical Impact RTI, associated with critical impact resistance, resilience and fl exibility properties. - RTI Mech Str: Mechanical Strength (Mechanical without Impact) RTI, associated with critical mechanical strength where impact resistance, resilience and fl exibility are not essential” Air gap Creepage distance Appendices 184 © 2011 – SOURIAU Discrimination/Keying methods UTS Series Appendices N (Normal) Note: Insert rotated in body (viewed from front face of male insert) In applications where similar connectors are used next to each other, mismatching can be a reason for disturbances, system failure or even danger to operating personnel. To eliminate mismatching, all TRIM TRIO® connectors can be equipped with discrimination keys, which offer unlimited possibilities for an error avoiding interconnection system. The other way around is to rotate the insert into the shell. Connectors with rotated inserts can be ordered by adding the suffix W, X, Y or Z to the standard part number. e.g. UTS6JC104S (N key) UTS6JC104SW (W key) Other keys Shell size Layout Discrimination keys degrees W X Y Z 8 8E2 58° 122° 8E3 8E3A 60° 210° 8E4 45° 8E33 90° 10 102W2 103 104 106 10E6 10E7 90° 10E98 90° 180° 240° 270° 12 12E2 12E3 180° 124 128 12E8 90° 112° 203° 292° 1210 12E10 60° 155° 270° 295° 12E14 45° 14 14E5 40° 92° 184° 273° 142G1 147 1412 60° 14E12 43° 90° 14E15 17° 110° 155° 234° 14E18 15° 90° 180° 270° 1419 30° 165° 315° 14E19 30° 165° 315° 18 18E11 62° 119° 241° 340° 1823 158° 270° 18E30 180° 193° 285° 350° 1832 18E32 85° 138° 222° 265° © 2011 – SOURIAU 185 UTS Series Appendices Part number Index Mechanics UTS0104P................... P. 68 UTS0104S................... P. 68 UTS010D6P.................. P. 68 UTS010D6S.................. P. 68 UTS010D7P.................. P. 68 UTS010D7S.................. P. 68 UTS010D98P................. P. 84 UTS010D98S................. P. 84 UTS010E6P.................. P. 80 UTS010E6S.................. P. 80 UTS010E7P.................. P. 92 UTS010E7S.................. P. 92 UTS010E98P................. P. 84 UTS010E98S................. P. 84 UTS0124P................... P. 52 UTS0128P................... P. 96 UTS0128S................... P. 96 UTS012D10P................. P. 104 UTS012D10S................. P. 104 UTS012D14P................. P. 116 UTS012D14S................. P. 116 UTS012D2P.................. P. 24 UTS012D2S.................. P. 24 UTS012D3P.................. P. 48 UTS012D3S.................. P. 48 UTS012D4P.................. P. 68 UTS012D4S.................. P. 68 UTS012D8P.................. P. 100 UTS012D8S.................. P. 100 UTS012E10P................. P. 104 UTS012E10S................. P. 104 UTS012E14P................. P. 116 UTS012E14S................. P. 116 UTS012E2P.................. P. 24 UTS012E2S.................. P. 24 UTS012E3P.................. P. 48 UTS012E3S.................. P. 48 UTS012E4P.................. P. 52 UTS012E4S.................. P. 52 UTS012E8P.................. P. 100 UTS012E8S.................. P. 100 UTS01412P.................. P. 108 UTS01412S.................. P. 108 UTS0147P................... P. 88 UTS014D12P................. P. 112 UTS014D12S................. P. 112 UTS014D15P................. P. 120 UTS014D15S................. P. 120 UTS014D18P................. P. 124 UTS014D18S................. P. 124 UTS014D5P.................. P. 120 UTS014D5S.................. P. 120 UTS014E12P................. P. 112 UTS014E12S................. P. 112 UTS014E15P................. P. 120 UTS014E15S................. P. 120 UTS014E18P................. P. 124 UTS014E18S................. P. 124 UTS014E19P................. P. 128 UTS014E19S................. P. 128 UTS014E5P.................. P. 120 UTS014E5S.................. P. 120 UTS014E7P.................. P. 88 UTS014E7S.................. P. 88 UTS01823P.................. P. 132 UTS01823S.................. P. 132 UTS08D2P................... P. 20 UTS08D2P................... P. 20 UTS08D2S................... P. 20 UTS08D2S................... P. 20 UTS08D33P.................. P. 44 UTS08D33P.................. P. 44 UTS08D33S.................. P. 44 UTS08D33S.................. P. 44 UTS08D3AP.................. P. 36 UTS08D3AS.................. P. 36 UTS08D3P................... P. 36 UTS08D3P................... P. 36 UTS08D3S................... P. 36 UTS08D3S................... P. 36 UTS08D4P................... P. 60 UTS08D4P................... P. 60 UTS08D4S................... P. 60 UTS08D4S................... P. 60 UTS08D98P.................. P. 40 UTS08D98S.................. P. 40 UTS08E2P................... P. 20 UTS08E2S................... P. 20 UTS08E33P.................. P. 44 UTS08E33S.................. P. 44 UTS08E3AP.................. P. 40 UTS08E3AS.................. P. 40 UTS08E3P................... P. 36 UTS08E3S................... P. 36 UTS08E4P................... P. 60 UTS08E4S................... P. 60 UTS08E98P.................. P. 40 UTS08E98S.................. P. 40 UTS1GJC104P................ P. 68 UTS1GJC128P................ P. 96 UTS1GJC1412P............... P. 108 UTS1GJC147P................ P. 88 UTS1GN104P................. P. 68 UTS1GN128P................. P. 96 UTS1GN1412P................ P. 108 UTS1GN147P................. P. 88 UTS1JC102W2P............... P. 64 UTS1JC102W2S............... P. 64 UTS1JC103P................. P. 40 UTS1JC103S................. P. 40 UTS1JC103W3P............... P. 40 UTS1JC103W3S............... P. 40 UTS1JC104P................. P. 68 UTS1JC104S................. P. 68 UTS1JC106P................. P. 80 UTS1JC106S................. P. 80 UTS1JC1210P................ P. 104 UTS1JC1210S................ P. 104 UTS1JC124P................. P. 52 UTS1JC124PSCR.............. P. 52 UTS1JC124S................. P. 52 UTS1JC128P................. P. 96 UTS1JC128S................. P. 96 UTS1JC1412P................ P. 108 UTS1JC1412S................ P. 108 UTS1JC1419P................ P. 128 UTS1JC1419S................ P. 128 UTS1JC142G1P............... P. 32 UTS1JC142G1S............... P. 32 UTS1JC147P................. P. 88 UTS1JC147PSCR.............. P. 88 UTS1JC147S................. P. 88 UTS1JC1823P................ P. 132 UTS1JC1823S................ P. 132 UTS1JC1832P................ P. 136 UTS1JC1832S................ P. 136 UTS6102W2P................. P. 64 UTS6102W2S................. P. 64 UTS6103P................... P. 40 UTS6103S................... P. 40 UTS6103W3P................. P. 40 UTS6103W3S................. P. 40 UTS6104P................... P. 68 UTS6104S................... P. 68 UTS6106P................... P. 80 UTS6106S................... P. 80 UTS610E6P.................. P. 80 UTS610E6S.................. P. 80 UTS610E7P.................. P. 92 UTS610E7S.................. P. 92 UTS610E98P................. P. 84 UTS610E98S................. P. 84 Appendices 186 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Appendices UTS61210P.................. P. 104 UTS61210S.................. P. 104 UTS6124P................... P. 52 UTS6124S................... P. 52 UTS6128P................... P. 96 UTS6128S................... P. 96 UTS612E10P................. P. 104 UTS612E10S................. P. 104 UTS612E14P................. P. 116 UTS612E14S................. P. 116 UTS612E2P.................. P. 24 UTS612E2S.................. P. 24 UTS612E3P.................. P. 48 UTS612E3S.................. P. 48 UTS612E4P.................. P. 52 UTS612E4S.................. P. 52 UTS612E8P.................. P. 100 UTS612E8S.................. P. 100 UTS61412P.................. P. 108 UTS61412S.................. P. 108 UTS61419P.................. P. 128 UTS61419S.................. P. 128 UTS6142G1P................. P. 32 UTS6142G1S................. P. 32 UTS6147P................... P. 88 UTS6147S................... P. 88 UTS614E12P................. P. 112 UTS614E12S................. P. 112 UTS614E15P................. P. 120 UTS614E15S................. P. 120 UTS614E18P................. P. 124 UTS614E18S................. P. 124 UTS614E19P................. P. 128 UTS614E19S................. P. 128 UTS614E5P.................. P. 72 UTS614E5S.................. P. 72 UTS61823P.................. P. 132 UTS61823S.................. P. 132 UTS61832P.................. P. 136 UTS61832S.................. P. 136 UTS6183G1P................. P. 56 UTS68E2P................... P. 20 UTS68E2S................... P. 20 UTS68E33P.................. P. 44 UTS68E33S.................. P. 44 UTS68E3AP.................. P. 40 UTS68E3AS.................. P. 40 UTS68E3P................... P. 36 UTS68E3S................... P. 36 UTS68E4P................... P. 60 UTS68E4S................... P. 60 UTS68E98P.................. P. 40 UTS68E98S.................. P. 40 UTS6GJC104S................ P. 68 UTS6GJC128S................ P. 96 UTS6GJC1412S............... P. 108 UTS6GJC147S................ P. 88 UTS6GN104S................. P. 68 UTS6GN128S................. P. 96 UTS6GN1412S................ P. 108 UTS6GN147S................. P. 88 UTS6JC102W2P............... P. 64 UTS6JC102W2S............... P. 64 UTS6JC103P................. P. 40 UTS6JC103S................. P. 40 UTS6JC103W3P............... P. 40 UTS6JC103W3S............... P. 40 UTS6JC104P................. P. 68 UTS6JC104S................. P. 68 UTS6JC106P................. P. 80 UTS6JC106S................. P. 80 UTS6JC10E6P................ P. 80 UTS6JC10E6S................ P. 80 UTS6JC10E7P................ P. 92 UTS6JC10E7S................ P. 92 UTS6JC10E98P............... P. 84 UTS6JC10E98S............... P. 84 UTS6JC1210P................ P. 104 UTS6JC1210S................ P. 104 UTS6JC124P................. P. 52 UTS6JC124PSCR.............. P. 52 UTS6JC124S................. P. 52 UTS6JC124SSCR.............. P. 52 UTS6JC128P................. P. 96 UTS6JC128S................. P. 96 UTS6JC12E10P............... P. 104 UTS6JC12E10S............... P. 104 UTS6JC12E14P............... P. 116 UTS6JC12E14S............... P. 116 UTS6JC12E2P................ P. 24 UTS6JC12E2S................ P. 24 UTS6JC12E3P................ P. 48 UTS6JC12E3S................ P. 48 UTS6JC12E4P................ P. 52 UTS6JC12E4S................ P. 52 UTS6JC12E8P................ P. 100 UTS6JC12E8S................ P. 100 UTS6JC1412P................ P. 108 UTS6JC1412S................ P. 108 UTS6JC1419P................ P. 128 UTS6JC1419S................ P. 128 UTS6JC142G1P............... P. 32 UTS6JC142G1S............... P. 32 UTS6JC147P................. P. 88 UTS6JC147PSCR.............. P. 88 UTS6JC147S................. P. 88 UTS6JC147SSCR.............. P. 88 UTS6JC14E12P............... P. 112 UTS6JC14E12S............... P. 112 UTS6JC14E15P............... P. 120 UTS6JC14E15S............... P. 120 UTS6JC14E18P............... P. 124 UTS6JC14E18S............... P. 124 UTS6JC14E19P............... P. 128 UTS6JC14E19S............... P. 128 UTS6JC14E5P................ P. 72 UTS6JC14E5S................ P. 72 UTS6JC14E7P................ P. 88 UTS6JC14E7S................ P. 88 UTS6JC1823P................ P. 132 UTS6JC1823S................ P. 132 UTS6JC1832P................ P. 136 UTS6JC1832S................ P. 136 UTS6JC183G1P............... P. 56 UTS6JC8E2P................. P. 20 UTS6JC8E2S................. P. 20 UTS6JC8E33P................ P. 44 UTS6JC8E33S................ P. 44 UTS6JC8E3AP................ P. 40 UTS6JC8E3AS................ P. 40 UTS6JC8E3P................. P. 36 UTS6JC8E3S................. P. 36 UTS6JC8E4P................. P. 60 UTS6JC8E4S................. P. 60 UTS6JC8E98P................ P. 40 UTS6JC8E98S................ P. 40 UTS7102W2P................. P. 64 UTS7102W2S................. P. 64 UTS7103P................... P. 40 UTS7103S................... P. 40 UTS7103W3P................. P. 40 UTS7103W3S................. P. 40 UTS7104P................... P. 68 UTS7104S................... P. 68 UTS7106P................... P. 80 UTS7106S................... P. 80 UTS710D6P.................. P. 80 UTS710D6P32................ P. 80 UTS710D6S.................. P. 80 UTS710D6S32................ P. 80 UTS710D7P.................. P. 92 UTS710D7P32................ P. 92 UTS710D7S.................. P. 92 © 2011 – SOURIAU 187 UTS Series Appendices UTS710D7S32................ P. 92 UTS710D98P................. P. 84 UTS710D98P32............... P. 84 UTS710D98S................. P. 84 UTS710D98S32............... P. 84 UTS710E6P.................. P. 80 UTS710E6S.................. P. 80 UTS710E7P.................. P. 92 UTS710E7S.................. P. 92 UTS710E98P................. P. 84 UTS710E98S................. P. 84 UTS71210P.................. P. 104 UTS71210S.................. P. 104 UTS7124P................... P. 52 UTS7124PSCR................ P. 52 UTS7124S................... P. 52 UTS7124SSCR................ P. 52 UTS7128P................... P. 96 UTS7128PSEK9............... P. 96 UTS7128S................... P. 96 UTS712CCRG................. P. 26 UTS712CCRR................. P. 26 UTS712CCRY................. P. 26 UTS712D10P................. P. 104 UTS712D10P32............... P. 104 UTS712D10S................. P. 104 UTS712D10S32............... P. 104 UTS712D14P................. P. 116 UTS712D14P32............... P. 116 UTS712D14S................. P. 116 UTS712D14S32............... P. 116 UTS712D2P.................. P. 24 UTS712D2P32................ P. 24 UTS712D2S.................. P. 24 UTS712D2S32................ P. 24 UTS712D3P.................. P. 48 UTS712D3P32................ P. 48 UTS712D3S.................. P. 48 UTS712D3S32................ P. 48 UTS712D4P.................. P. 52 UTS712D4P32................ P. 52 UTS712D4S.................. P. 52 UTS712D4S32................ P. 52 UTS712D8P.................. P. 100 UTS712D8P32................ P. 100 UTS712D8S.................. P. 100 UTS712D8S32................ P. 100 UTS712E10P................. P. 104 UTS712E10S................. P. 104 UTS712E14P................. P. 116 UTS712E14S................. P. 116 UTS712E2P.................. P. 24 UTS712E2S.................. P. 24 UTS712E3P.................. P. 48 UTS712E3S.................. P. 48 UTS712E4P.................. P. 52 UTS712E4S.................. P. 52 UTS712E8P.................. P. 100 UTS712E8S.................. P. 100 UTS71412P.................. P. 108 UTS71412S.................. P. 108 UTS71419P.................. P. 128 UTS71419S.................. P. 128 UTS7142G1P................. P. 32 UTS7142G1S................. P. 32 UTS7142G1SNPT.............. P. 32 UTS7147P................... P. 88 UTS7147PSCR................ P. 88 UTS7147PSEK9............... P. 88 UTS7147S................... P. 88 UTS7147SSCR................ P. 88 UTS714D12P................. P. 112 UTS714D12P32............... P. 112 UTS714D12S................. P. 112 UTS714D12S32............... P. 112 UTS714D15P................. P. 120 UTS714D15P32............... P. 120 UTS714D15S................. P. 120 UTS714D15S32............... P. 120 UTS714D18P................. P. 124 UTS714D18P32............... P. 124 UTS714D18S................. P. 124 UTS714D18S32............... P. 124 UTS714D19P................. P. 128 UTS714D19P32............... P. 128 UTS714D19S................. P. 128 UTS714D19S32............... P. 128 UTS714D5P.................. P. 120 UTS714D5P32................ P. 120 UTS714D5S.................. P. 120 UTS714D5S32................ P. 120 UTS714E12P................. P. 112 UTS714E12S................. P. 112 UTS714E15P................. P. 120 UTS714E15S................. P. 120 UTS714E18P................. P. 124 UTS714E18S................. P. 124 UTS714E19P................. P. 128 UTS714E19S................. P. 128 UTS714E5P.................. P. 72 UTS714E5S.................. P. 72 UTS714E7P.................. P. 88 UTS714E7S.................. P. 88 UTS71823P.................. P. 132 UTS71823S.................. P. 132 UTS71832P.................. P. 136 UTS71832S.................. P. 136 UTS7183G1SNPT.............. P. 56 UTS78D2P................... P. 20 UTS78D2P32................. P. 20 UTS78D2S................... P. 20 UTS78D2S32................. P. 20 UTS78D33P.................. P. 44 UTS78D33P32................ P. 44 UTS78D33S.................. P. 44 UTS78D33S32................ P. 44 UTS78D3AP.................. P. 40 UTS78D3AP32................ P. 40 UTS78D3AS.................. P. 40 UTS78D3AS32................ P. 40 UTS78D3P................... P. 36 UTS78D3P32................. P. 36 UTS78D3S................... P. 36 UTS78D3S32................. P. 36 UTS78D4P................... P. 60 UTS78D4P32................. P. 60 UTS78D4S................... P. 60 UTS78D4S32................. P. 60 UTS78D98P.................. P. 40 UTS78D98P32................ P. 40 UTS78D98S.................. P. 40 UTS78D98S32................ P. 40 UTS78E2P................... P. 20 UTS78E2S................... P. 20 UTS78E33P.................. P. 44 UTS78E33S.................. P. 44 UTS78E3AP.................. P. 40 UTS78E3AS.................. P. 40 UTS78E3P................... P. 36 UTS78E3S................... P. 36 UTS78E4P................... P. 60 UTS78E4S................... P. 60 UTS78E98P.................. P. 40 UTS78E98S.................. P. 40 UTS7GJC104P................ P. 68 UTS7GJC128P................ P. 96 UTS7GJC1412P............... P. 108 UTS7GJC147P................ P. 88 UTS7GN104P................. P. 68 UTS7GN128P................. P. 96 UTS7GN1412P................ P. 108 UTS7GN147P................. P. 88 Appendices 188 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Appendices Accessories 85005585A.................. P. 22 85005586A.................. P. 30 85005587A.................. P. 26 85005588A.................. P. 34 85005590A.................. P. 134 85005594................... P. 22 85005595................... P. 30 85005596................... P. 26 85005597................... P. 34 85005599................... P. 134 UT610CCRG.................. P. 30 UT610CCRR.................. P. 30 UT610CCRY.................. P. 30 UT612CCRG.................. P. 26 UT612CCRR.................. P. 26 UT612CCRY.................. P. 26 UT614CCRG.................. P. 34 UT614CCRR.................. P. 34 UT614CCRY.................. P. 34 UTFD11B.................... P. 22 UTFD12B.................... P. 30 UTFD13B.................... P. 26 UTFD14B.................... P. 34 UTFD16B.................... P. 134 UTS10DCG................... P. 30 UTS10DCGE.................. P. 30 UTS10DCGR.................. P. 30 UTS12DCG................... P. 26 UTS12DCGE.................. P. 26 UTS12DCGR.................. P. 26 UTS14DCG................... P. 34 UTS14DCGE.................. P. 34 UTS14DCGR.................. P. 34 UTS18DCG................... P. 134 UTS18DCGE.................. P. 134 UTS18DCGR.................. P. 134 UTS610DCG.................. P. 30 UTS612DCG.................. P. 26 UTS614DCG.................. P. 34 UTS618DCG.................. P. 134 UTS68C..................... P. 22 UTS710CCRG................. P. 30 UTS710CCRR................. P. 30 UTS710CCRY................. P. 30 UTS712CCRG................. P. 26 UTS712CCRR................. P. 26 UTS712CCRY................. P. 26 UTS714CCRG................. P. 34 UTS714CCRR................. P. 34 UTS714CCRY................. P. 34 UTS8DCG.................... P. 22 UTS8DCGE................... P. 22 UTS8DCGR................... P. 22 Contacts 82911456K.................. P. 145 82911457NK................. P. 145 82911458K.................. P. 145 82911459NK................. P. 145 82911460K.................. P. 145 82911461NK................. P. 145 82911462K.................. P. 145 82911463NK................. P. 145 82911464K.................. P. 145 82911465NK................. P. 145 82911466K.................. P. 145 82911467NK................. P. 145 82913600A.................. P. 145 82913601A.................. P. 145 82913602A.................. P. 145 82913603A.................. P. 145 82913604A.................. P. 145 82913605A.................. P. 145 82913606A.................. P. 145 82913607A.................. P. 145 82913608A.................. P. 145 82913609A.................. P. 145 RC14M30GE7K................ P. 146 RC14M30K................... P. 145 RC14M50GE7K................ P. 146 RC14M50K................... P. 145 RC16M23GE7K................ P. 146 RC16M23K................... P. 145 RC18W3K.................... P. 145 RC20M12E83K................ P. 148 RC20M12E84K................ P. 145 RC20M12E8K................. P. 145 RC20M12GE7K................ P. 146 RC20M12K................... P. 145 RC20M13GE7K................ P. 146 RC20M13K................... P. 145 RC20W3K.................... P. 145 RC24M9GE7K................. P. 146 RC24M9K.................... P. 145 RC24W3K.................... P. 145 RC28M1GE7K................. P. 146 RC28M1K.................... P. 145 RCDX6016D28................ P. 182 RCDX6019D28................ P. 182 RCDX6024D28................ P. 182 RCDX6026D28................ P. 182 RCDX602D28................. P. 181 RCDX6032D28................ P. 182 RCDX6036D28................ P. 182 RCDX6052D28................ P. 182 RCDXK1D28.................. P. 181 RCPOF1000B................. P. 150 RCW5016K................... P. 145 RCW50A7K................... P. 148 RM14M30GE1K................ P. 146 RM14M30K................... P. 145 RM14M50GE1K................ P. 146 RM14M50K................... P. 148 RM16M23GE1K................ P. 146 RM16M23K................... P. 145 RM18W3K.................... P. 145 RM20M12E83K................ P. 145 RM20M12E8K................. P. 145 RM20M12GE1k................ P. 146 RM20M12K................... P. 145 RM20M13GE1k................ P. 146 RM20M13K................... P. 145 RM20W3K.................... P. 145 RM24M9GE1k................. P. 146 RM24M9K.................... P. 145 RM24W3K.................... P. 145 RM28M1GE1k................. P. 146 RM28M1K.................... P. 145 RMDX6019D28................ P. 177 RMDX6024D28................ P. 176 RMDX6026D28................ P. 176 RMDX602D28................. P. 182 RMDX6031D28................ P. 179 RMDX6032D28................ P. 182 RMDX6036D28................ P. 182 RMDX6050D28................ P. 182 RMDXK10D28................. P. 178 RMPOF1000.................. P. 150 RMW5016K................... P. 148 RMW50A7K................... P. 148 SC14M1TK6.................. P. 145 SC14ML1TK6................. P. 145 SC16M11TK6................. P. 145 SC16M1TK6.................. P. 145 SC16ML11TK6................ P. 145 SC16ML1TK6................. P. 145 SC20M1TK6.................. P. 145 SC20ML1TK6................. P. 145 SC20W3TK6.................. P. 145 SC20WL3TK6................. P. 145 © 2011 – SOURIAU 189 UTS Series Appendices SC24M1TK6.................. P. 145 SC24ML1TK6................. P. 145 SC24W3TK6.................. P. 145 SC24WL3TK6................. P. 145 SM14M1TK6.................. P. 145 SM14ML1TK6................. P. 145 SM16M11TK6................. P. 145 SM16M1TK6.................. P. 145 SM16ML11TK6................ P. 145 SM16ML1TK6................. P. 145 SM20M1TK6.................. P. 145 SM20ML1TK6................. P. 145 SM20W3TK6.................. P. 145 SM20WL3TK6................. P. 145 SM24M1TK6.................. P. 145 SM24ML1TK6................. P. 145 SM24W3TK6.................. P. 145 SM24WL3TK6................. P. 145 Tooling 51060210924................ P. 155 51060210936................ P. 155 M10S1J..................... P. 178 M10SG8..................... P. 179 M317....................... P. 155 MH860...................... P. 155 MH86164G................... P. 155 MH86186.................... P. 155 RX2025GE1.................. P. 155 RX20D44.................... P.162 S16RCM14................... P. 155 S16RCM1450................. P. 155 S16RCM16................... P. 155 S16SCM20................... P. 155 S16SCML1................... P. 155 S16SCML11.................. P. 155 S20RCM..................... P. 155 S16SCM20................... P. 155 S20SCM20................... P. 155 S221....................... P. 180 S23D2...................... P. 180 S80........................ P. 179 S82........................ P. 182 S83........................ P. 179 S87........................ P. 182 S88........................ P. 182 SHANDLES................... P. 155 SL105...................... P. 179 sl46D2..................... P. 180 sl471...................... P. 180 UH25....................... P. 155 VGE10077A.................. P. 155 VGE10078A.................. P. 155 Appendices INDUTSCA07EN © Copyright SOURIAU June 2011 - All information in this document presents only general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. All rights reserved to SOURIAU for changes without prior notifi cation or public announcement. Any duplication is prohibited, unless approved in writing. www.souriau.com www.souriau-industrial.com contactindustry@souriau.com Tiva™ C Series TM4C1294 Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Kit EK-TM4C1294XL User's Guide Literature Number: SPMU365A March 2014–Revised March 2014 Contents 1 Board Overview ................................................................................................................... 4 1.1 Kit Contents................................................................................................................... 5 1.2 Using the Connected LaunchPad ......................................................................................... 5 1.3 Features....................................................................................................................... 5 1.4 BoosterPacks................................................................................................................. 6 1.5 Energīa........................................................................................................................ 6 1.6 Specifications................................................................................................................. 6 2 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................... 7 2.1 Functional Description ...................................................................................................... 7 2.1.1 Microcontroller....................................................................................................... 7 2.1.2 Ethernet Connectivity............................................................................................... 8 2.1.3 USB Connectivity ................................................................................................... 8 2.1.4 Motion Control....................................................................................................... 8 2.1.5 User Switches and LED's.......................................................................................... 8 2.1.6 BoosterPacks and Headers ....................................................................................... 9 2.2 Power Management........................................................................................................ 17 2.2.1 Power Supplies .................................................................................................... 17 2.2.2 Low Power Modes ................................................................................................ 18 2.2.3 Clocking ............................................................................................................ 18 2.2.4 Reset................................................................................................................ 18 2.3 Debug Interface............................................................................................................. 18 2.3.1 In-Circuit Debug Interface (ICDI) ................................................................................ 18 2.3.2 External Debugger ................................................................................................ 19 2.3.3 Virtual COM Port .................................................................................................. 19 3 Software Development ........................................................................................................ 20 3.1 Software Description....................................................................................................... 20 3.2 Source Code ................................................................................................................ 20 3.3 Tool Options ................................................................................................................ 20 3.4 Programming the Connected LaunchPad............................................................................... 21 4 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials ....................................................................... 22 4.1 References .................................................................................................................. 22 4.2 Component Locations ..................................................................................................... 23 4.3 Bill of Materials ............................................................................................................. 24 5 Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 26 6 Revision History................................................................................................................. 27 2 Contents SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com List of Figures 1-1. Tiva C Series Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board ............................................................... 4 2-1. Tiva Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board Block Diagram ........................................................ 7 2-2. Default Jumper Locations ................................................................................................. 17 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Dimensions and Component Locations ..................................................... 23 List of Tables 1-1. EK-TM4C1294XL Specifications........................................................................................... 6 2-1. BoosterPack 1 GPIO and Signal Muxing ................................................................................. 9 2-2. BoosterPack 2 GPIO and Signal Muxing ............................................................................... 11 2-3. X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing .......................................... 13 2-4. X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing ......................................... 15 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Bill of Materials ................................................................................. 24 6-1. Revision History ............................................................................................................ 27 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 List of Figures 3 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 1 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Board Overview The Tiva™ C Series TM4C1294 Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board (EK-TM4C1294XL) is a low-cost evaluation platform for ARM® Cortex™-M4F-based microcontrollers. The Connected LaunchPad design highlights the TM4C1294NCPDT microcontroller with its on-chip 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY, USB 2.0, hibernation module, motion control pulse-width modulation and a multitude of simultaneous serial connectivity. The Connected LaunchPad also features two user switches, four user LEDs, dedicated reset and wake switches, a breadboard expansion option and two independent BoosterPack XL expansion connectors. The pre-programmed quickstart application on the Connected LaunchPad also enables remote monitoring and control of the evaluation board from an internet browser anywhere in the world. The web interface is provided by 3rd party, Exosite. Each Connected LaunchPad is enabled on the Exosite platform allowing users to create and customize their own Internet-of-Things applications. Figure 1-1 shows a photo of the Connected LaunchPad with key features highlighted. Figure 1-1. Tiva C Series Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board Tiva is a trademark of Texas Instruments. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 4 Board Overview SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Kit Contents 1.1 Kit Contents The Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Kit contains the following items: • Tiva™ C Series TM4C1294 Evaluation Board (EK-TM4C1294XL) • Retractable Ethernet cable • USB Micro-B plug to USB-A plug cable • README First document 1.2 Using the Connected LaunchPad The recommended steps for using the Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Kit are: 1. Follow the README First document included in the kit. The README First helps you get the Connected LaunchPad up and running in minutes. Within just a few minutes you can be controlling and monitoring the Connected LaunchPad through the internet using Exosite and the pre-programmed quickstart application. 2. Experiment with BoosterPacks. This evaluation kit conforms to the latest revision of the BoosterPack pinout standard. It has two independent BoosterPack connections to enable a multitude of expansion opportunities. 3. Take the first step towards developing your own applications. The Connected LaunchPad is supported by TivaWare for C Series. After installing TivaWare, look in the installation directory for examples\boards\ek-tm4c1294xl. You can find pre-configured example applications for this board as well as for this board with selected BoosterPacks. Alternately, use Energīa for a wiring frameworkbased cross-platform, fast-prototyping environment that works with this and other TI LaunchPads. See Chapter 3 of this document for more details about software development. TivaWare can be downloaded from the TI website at http://www.ti.com/tool/sw-tm4c. Energīa can be found at http://energia.nu. 4. Customize and integrate the hardware to suit your end application. This evaluation kit can be used as a reference for building your own custom circuits based on Tiva C microcontrollers or as a foundation for expansion with your custom BoosterPack or other circuit. This manual can serve as a starting point for this endeavor. 5. Get Trained. You can also download hours of written and video training materials on this and related LaunchPads. Visit the Tiva C Series LaunchPad Workshop Wiki for more information. 6. More Resources. See the TI MCU LaunchPad web page for more information and available BoosterPacks. (http://www.ti.com/tiva-c-launchpad) 1.3 Features Your Connected LaunchPad includes the following features: • Tiva TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller • Ethernet connectivity with fully integrated 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY Motion Control PWM • USB 2.0 Micro A/B connector • 4 user LEDs • 2 user buttons • 1 independent hibernate wake switch • 1 independent microcontroller reset switch • Jumper for selecting power source: – ICDI USB – USB Device – BoosterPack • Preloaded Internet-of-Things Exosite quickstart application • I/O brought to board edge for breadboard expansion • Two independent BoosterPack XL standard connectors featuring stackable headers to maximize expansion through BoosterPack ecosystem SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Board Overview 5 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated BoosterPacks www.ti.com – For a complete list of BoosterPacks, see the TI MCU LaunchPad web page: http://www.ti.com/launchpad 1.4 BoosterPacks The Connected LaunchPad provides an easy and inexpensive way to develop applications with the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller. BoosterPacks are add-on boards that follow a pin-out standard created by Texas Instruments. The TI and third-party ecosystem of BoosterPacks greatly expands the peripherals and potential applications that you can easily explore with the Connected LaunchPad. You can also build your own BoosterPack by following the design guidelines on TI’s website. Texas Instruments even helps you promote your BoosterPack to other members of the community. TI offers a variety of avenues for you to reach potential customers with your solutions. 1.5 Energīa Energīa is an open-source electronics prototyping platform started in January of 2012 with the goal of bringing the Wiring and Arduino framework to the TI LaunchPad community. Energīa includes an integrated development environment (IDE) that is based on Processing. Together with Energīa, LaunchPads can be used to develop interactive objects, taking inputs from a variety of switches or sensors, and controlling a variety of lights, motors, and other physical outputs. LaunchPad projects can be stand-alone (only run on the target board, i.e. your LaunchPad), or they can communicate with software running on your computer (Host PC). Energīa projects are highly portable between supported LaunchPad platforms. Projects written for your Connected LaunchPad can be run on other LaunchPads with little or no modifications. More information is available at http://energia.nu. 1.6 Specifications Table 1-1 summarizes the specifications for the Connected LaunchPad. Table 1-1. EK-TM4C1294XL Specifications Parameter Value 4.75 VDC to 5.25 VDC from one of the following sources: • Debug USB U22 (ICDI) USB Micro-B cable connected to PC or other compatible power source. • Target USB (U7) USB Micro-B cable connected to PC or other compatible power Board Supply Voltage source. • BoosterPack 1 (X8-4) • BoosterPack 2 (X6-4) • Breadboard expansion header (X11-2 or X11-97). See schematic symbol JP1 for power input selection. Dimensions 4.9 in x 2.2 in x .425 in (12.45 cm x 5.59 cm x 10.8 mm) (L x W x H) • 5 VDC to BoosterPacks, current limited by TPS2052B. Nominal rating 1 Amp. Board input power supply limitations may also apply. Break-out Power Output • 3.3 VDC to BoosterPacks, limited by output of TPS73733 LDO. This 3.3-V plane is shared with on-board components. Total output power limit of TPS73733 is 1 Amp. RoHS Status Compliant 6 Board Overview SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 2 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description The Connected LaunchPad includes a TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller with an integrated 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY. This advanced ARM® Cortex™ M4F MCU has a wide range of peripherals that are made available to users via the on-board accessories and the BoosterPack connectors. This chapter explains how those peripherals operate and interface to the microcontroller. Figure 2-1 provides a high-level block diagram of the Connected LaunchPad. Figure 2-1. Tiva Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board Block Diagram 2.1 Functional Description 2.1.1 Microcontroller The TM4C1294NCPDTI is a 32-bit ARM Cortex-M4F based microcontroller with 1024-kB Flash memory, 256-kB SRAM, 6-kB EEPROM, and 120 MHz operation; integrated 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY; integrated USB 2.0 connectivity with external high-speed USB 3.0 PHY capability; a hibernation module, a multitude of serial connectivity and motion control PWM; as well as a wide range of other peripherals. See the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller data sheet for more complete details. Most of the microcontroller’s signals are routed to 0.1-in (2.54-mm) pitch headers or through-hole solder pads. An internal multiplexor allows different peripheral functions to be assigned to each of these GPIO pads. When adding external circuitry, consider the additional load on the evaluation board power rails. The TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller is factory-programmed with a quickstart demo program. The quickstart program resides in on-chip Flash memory and runs each time power is applied, unless the quickstart application has been replaced with a user program. The quickstart application automatically connects to http://ti.exosite.com when an internet connection is provided through the RJ45 Ethernet jack on the evaluation board. SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 7 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Description www.ti.com 2.1.2 Ethernet Connectivity The Connected LaunchPad is designed to connect directly to an Ethernet network using RJ45 style connectors. The microcontroller contains a fully integrated Ethernet MAC and PHY. This integration creates a simple, elegant and cost-saving Ethernet circuit design. Example code is available for both the uIP and LwIP TCP/IP protocol stacks. The embedded Ethernet on this device can be programmed to act as an HTTP server, client or both. The design and integration of the circuit and microcontroller also enable users to synchronize events over the network using the IEEE1588 precision time protocol. When configured for Ethernet operation, it is recommended that the user configure LED D3 and D4 to be controlled by the Ethernet MAC to indicate connection and transmit/receive status. 2.1.3 USB Connectivity The Connected LaunchPad is designed to be USB 2.0 ready. A TPS2052B load switch is connected to and controlled by the microcontroller USB peripheral, which manages power to the USB micro A/B connector when functioning in a USB host. When functioning as a USB device, the entire Connected LaunchPad can be powered directly from the USB micro A/B connector. Use JP1 to select the desired power source. USB 2.0 functionality is provided and supported directly out of the box with the target USB micro A/B connector. High-speed USB 3.0 functionality can be enabled by adding an external USB PHY. The USB external PHY control and data signals are provided on the breadboard expansion header X11. 2.1.4 Motion Control The Connected LaunchPad includes the Tiva C Series Motion Control PWM technology, featuring a PWM module capable of generating eight PWM outputs. The PWM module provides a great deal of flexibility and can generate simple PWM signals – for example, those required by a simple charge pump – as well as paired PWM signals with dead-band delays, such as those required by a half-H bridge driver. Three generator blocks can also generate the full six channels of gate controls required by a 3-phase inverter bridge. A quadrature encoder interface (QEI) is also available to provide motion control feedback. See the BoosterPacks and Headers section of this document for details about the availability of these signals on the BoosterPack interfaces. 2.1.5 User Switches and LED's Two user switches are provided for input and control of the TM4C1294NCPDTI software. The switches are connected to GPIO pins PJ0 and PJ1. A reset switch and a wake switch are also provided. The reset switch initiates a system reset of the microcontroller whenever it is pressed and released. Pressing the reset switch also asserts the reset signal to the BoosterPack and Breadboard headers. The wake switch is one way to bring the device out of hibernate mode. Four user LEDs are provided on the board. D1 and D2 are connected to GPIOs PN1 and PN0. These LEDs are dedicated for use by the software application. D3 and D4 are connected to GPIOs PF4 and PF0, which can be controlled by user’s software or the integrated Ethernet module of the microcontroller. A power LED is also provided to indicate that 3.3 volt power is present on the board. 8 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Functional Description 2.1.6 BoosterPacks and Headers 2.1.6.1 BoosterPack 1 The Connected LaunchPad features two fully independent BoosterPack XL connectors. BoosterPack 1, located around the ICDI portion of the board, is fully compliant with the BoosterPack standard with the single exception of GPIO pin PA6 (X8-16), which does not provide analog capability. PA6 is located near the bottom of the inner left BoosterPack XL header. I2C is provided in both the original BoosterPack standard configuration as well as the updated standard location. Use of I2C on the bottom left of the BoosterPack connections per the updated standard is highly encouraged whenever possible. Motion control advanced PWM connections are provided on the inner right connector for motion control applications. Table 2-1 provides a complete listing of the BoosterPack pins and the GPIO alternate functions available on each pin. The TM4C1294NCPDTI GPIO register GPIOPCTL values are shown for each configuration. The headers in this table are labeled from left to right in ten pin columns. ‘A’ and ‘D’ make up the outer BoosterPack standard pins, ‘B’ and ‘C’ make up the inner BoosterPack XL standard pins. Table 2-1. BoosterPack 1 GPIO and Signal Muxing Standard MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 A1 1 +3.3 volts 3.3V A1 2 Analog PE4 123 AIN9 U1RI - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT0 A1 3 UART RX PC4 25 C1- U7Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S7 A1 4 UART TX PC5 24 C1+ U7Tx - - - - RTCCLK - - - - EPI0S6 A1 5 GPIO PC6 23 C0+ U5Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S5 A1 6 Analog PE5 124 AIN8 - - - - - - - - - - SSIXDAT1 A1 7 SPI CLK PD3 4 AIN12 - I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI2CLk A1 8 GPIO PC7 22 C0- U5Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S4 A1 9 I2C SCL PB2 91 - - I2C0SCL T5CCP0 - - - - - - USB0STP EPI0S27 A1 10 I2C SDA PB3 92 - - I2C0SDA T5CCP1 - - - - - - USB0CLK EPI0S28 B1 1 +5 volts 5V B1 2 ground GND B1 3 Analog PE0 15 AIN3 U1RTS - - - - - - - - - - B1 4 Analog PE1 14 AIN2 U1DSR - - - - - - - - - - B1 5 Analog PE2 13 AIN1 U1DCD - - - - - - - - - - B1 6 Analog PE3 12 AIN0 U1DTR - - - - - - - - - - B1 7 Analog PD7 128 AIN4 U2CTS - T4CCP1 USB0PFLT - - NMI - - - SSI2XDAT2 B1 8 Analog PA6 40 - U2Rx I2C6SCL T3CCP0 USB0EPEN - - - - SSI0XDAT2 - EPI0S8 B1 9 A out PM4 74 TMPR3 U0CTS - T4CCP0 - - - - - - - - B1 10 A out PM5 73 TMPR2 U0DCD - T4CCP1 - - - - - - - - SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 9 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Description www.ti.com Table 2-1. BoosterPack 1 GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued) Standard MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 C1 1 PWM PF1 43 - - - - EN0LED2 M0PWM1 - - - - SSI3XDAT0 TRD1 C1 2 PWM PF2 44 - - - - - M0PWM2 - - - - SSI3Fss TRD0 C1 3 PWM PF3 45 - - - - - M0PWM3 - - - - SSI3Clk TRCLK C1 4 PWM PG0 49 - - I2C1SCL - EN0PPS M0PWM4 - - - - - EPI0S11 C1 5 Capture PL4 85 - - - T0CCP0 - - - - - - USB0D4 EPI0S26 C1 6 Capture PL5 86 - - - T0CCP1 - - - - - - USB0D5 EPI0S33 C1 7 GPIO PL0 81 - - I2C2SDA - - M0FAULT3 - - - - USB0D0 EPI0S16 C1 8 GPIO PL1 82 - - I2C2SCL - - PhA0 - - - - USB0D1 EPI0S17 C1 9 GPIO PL2 83 - - - - C0o PhB0 - - - - USB0D2 EPI0S18 C1 10 GPIO PL3 84 - - - - C1o IDX0 - - - - USB0D3 EPI0S19 D1 1 ground GND D1 2 PWM PM3 75 - - - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S12 D1 3 GPIO PH2 31 - U0DCD - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2 D1 4 GPIO PH3 32 - U0DSR - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3 D1 5 reset RESET D1 6 SPI MOSI PD1 2 AIN14 - I2C7SDA T0CCP1 C1o - - - - - - SSI2XDAT0 D1 7 SPI MISO PD0 1 AIN15 - I2C7SCL T0CCP0 C0o - - - - - - SSI2XDAT1 D1 8 GPIO PN2 109 - U1DCD U2RTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S29 D1 9 GPIO PN3 110 - U1DSR U2CTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S30 D1 10 GPIO PP2 103 - U0DTR - - - - - - - - USB0NXT EPI0S29 10 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Functional Description 2.1.6.2 BoosterPack 2 The second BoosterPack XL interface is located near the middle of the board. This interface is fully compliant with the BoosterPack standard, and adds features not covered by the BoosterPack standard that enable operation with additional BoosterPacks. An additional analog signal is provided on the outer left header (X6-9). This signal can be used to monitor the touch panel on the popular Kentec EB-LM4F120-L35 BoosterPack. Using the jumpers JP4 and JP5, Controller Area Network (CAN) digital receive and transmit signals can be optionally routed to the BoosterPack 2 interface. The location of these signals is consistent with the CAN interface on the Tiva C Series TM4C123G LaunchPad and the Stellaris LM4F120 LaunchPad. In the default configuration, UART0 is used for the ICDI virtual UART and CAN is not present on the BoosterPack headers. In this configuration, the ROM serial bootloader can be used over the ICDI virtual UART. When the jumpers are configured for CAN on the BoosterPack, then UART4 must be used for the ICDI virtual UART. To comply with both the original and the new BoosterPack standard, I2C is provided on both sides of the BoosterPack connection. Use of I2C on the bottom left of the BoosterPack connection is highly encouraged where possible, to be in compliance with the new BoosterPack standard. To provide I2C capability on the right side of the connector, per the original standard, two zero-ohm resistors (R19 and R20) are used to combine the SPI and I2C signals. These signals are not shared with any other pins on the LaunchPad and therefore removal of these zero-ohm resistors should not be required. Software should be certain that unused GPIO signals are configured as inputs. Table 2-2 provides a complete listing of the BoosterPack pins and the GPIO alternate functions available at each pin. The TM4C1294NCPDT GPIO register GPIOPCTL values are shown for each configuration. The headers in this table are labeled from left to right in ten pin columns. ‘A’ and ‘D’ make up the outer BoosterPack standard pins, ‘B’ and ‘C’ make up the inner BoosterPack XL standard pins. Table 2-2. BoosterPack 2 GPIO and Signal Muxing Standard MCU Digital Function (FPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 A2 1 3.3V A2 2 Analog PD2 3 AIN13 - I2C8SCL T1CCP0 C2o - - - - - - SSI2Fss A2 3 UART RX PP0 118 C2+ U6Rx - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT2 A2 4 UART TX PP1 119 C2- U6Tx - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT3 GPIO PD4 125 AIN7 U2Rx - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT2 A2 5 (See JP4) PA0 33 - U0Rx I2C9SCL T0CCP0 - - CANORx - - - - - Analog PD5 126 AIN6 U2Tx - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3 A2 6 (See JP5) PA1 34 - U0Tx I2C9SDA T0CCP1 - - CAN0Tx - - - - - A2 7 SPI CLK PQ0 5 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Clk EPI0S20 A2 8 GPIO PP4 105 - U3RTS U0DSR - - - - - - - USB0D7 - A2 9 I2C SCL PN5 112 - U1RI U3CTS I2C2SCL - - - - - - - EPIO0S35 A2 10 I2C SDA PN4 111 - U1DTR U3RTS I2C2SDA - - - - - - - EPIO0S34 B2 1 5V B2 2 GND B2 3 Analog PB4 121 AIN10 U0CTS I2C5SCL - - - - - - - - SSI1Fss SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 11 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Description www.ti.com Table 2-2. BoosterPack 2 GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued) Standard MCU Digital Function (FPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 B2 4 Analog PB5 120 AIN11 U0RTS I2C5SDA - - - - - - - - SSI1Clk B2 5 Analog PK0 18 AIN16 U4Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0 B2 6 Analog PK1 19 AIN17 U4Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1 B2 7 Analog PK2 20 AIN18 U4RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2 B2 8 Analog PK3 21 AIN19 u4CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3 B2 9 A out PA4 37 - U3Rx I2C7SCL T2CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT0 B2 10 A out PA5 38 - U3Tx I2C7SDA T2CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT1 C2 1 PWM PG1 50 - - I2C1SDA - - M0PWM5 - - - - - EPI0S10 C2 2 PWM PK4 63 - - I2C3SCL - EN0LED0 M0PWM6 - - - - - EPI0S32 C2 3 PWM PK5 62 - - I2C3SDA - EN0LED2 M0PWM7 - - - - - EPI0S31 C2 4 PWM PM0 78 - - - T2CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S15 C2 5 Capture PM1 77 - - - T2CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S14 C2 6 Capture PM2 76 - - - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S13 C2 7 GPIO PH0 29 - U0RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0 C2 8 GPIO PH1 30 - U0CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1 C2 9 GPIO PK6 61 - - I2C4SCL - EN0LED1 M0FAULT1 - - - - - EPI0S25 C2 10 GPIO PK7 60 - U0RI I2C4SDA - RTCCLK M0FAULT2 - - - - - EPI0S24 D2 1 GND D2 2 PWM PM7 71 TMPR0 U0RI - T5CCP1 - - - - - - - - D2 3 GPIO PP5 106 - U3CTS I2C2SDL - - - - - - - USB0D6 - D2 4 GPIO PA7 41 - U2Tx I2C6SDA T3CCP1 USB0PFLT - - - USB0EPEN SSI0XDAT3 - EPI0S9 D2 5 RESET SPI MOSI PQ2 11 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT0 EPI0S22 D2 6 I2C PA3 36 - U4Tx I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0Fss SPI MISO PQ3 27 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT1 EPI0S23 D2 7 I2C PA2 35 - U4Rx I2C8SCL T1CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0Clk D2 8 GPIO PP3 104 - U1CTS U0DCD - - - - - - - USB0DIR EPI0S30 D2 9 GPIO PQ1 6 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Fss EPI0S21 D2 10 GPIO PM6 72 TMPR1 U0DSR - T5CCP0 - - - - - - - - 12 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Functional Description 2.1.6.3 Breadboard Connection The breadboard adapter section of the board is a set of 98 holes on a 0.1 inch grid. Properly combined with a pair of right angle headers, the entire Connected LaunchPad can be plugged directly into a standard 300 mil (0.3 inch) wide solder-less breadboard. The right angle headers and breadboard are not provided with this kit. Suggested part numbers are Samtec TSW-149-09-L-S-RE and TSW-149-08-L-S-RA right angle pin headers and Twin industries TW-E40-1020 solder-less breadboard. Samtec TSW-149-09-F-S-RE and TSW-149-09-F-S-RA may be substituted. A detailed explanation of how to install the headers is available on the TI LaunchPad Wiki or at http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~valvano/EE345L/Labs/Fall2011/LM3S1968soldering.pdf. Nearly all microcontroller signals are made available at the breadboard adapter holes (X11). These signals are grouped by function where possible. For example, all EPI signals are grouped on one side of the connector. Many of the analog signals are grouped near VREF, and UART, SSI and I2C signals are grouped by peripheral to make expansion and customization simpler. Table 2-3 and Table 2-4 show the GPIO pin and signal muxing for the X11 breadboard adapter pads. Table 2-3. X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 1 3V3 3 GND 5 PB4 121 AIN10 U0CTS I2C5SCL - - - - - - - - SSI1Fss 7 PB5 120 AIN11 U0RTS I2C5SDA - - - - - - - - SSI1Clk 9 PH0 29 - U0RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0 11 PH1 30 - U0CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1 13 PH2 31 - U0DCD - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2 15 PH3 32 - U0DSR - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3 17 PC7 22 C0- U5Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S4 19 PC6 23 C0+ U5Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S5 21 PC5 24 C1+ U7Tx - - - - RTCCLK - - - - EPI0S6 23 PC4 25 C1- U7Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S7 25 PA6 40 - U2Rx I2C6SCL T3CCP0 USB0EPEN - - - - SSI0XDAT2 - EPI0S8 27 PA7 41 - U2Tx I2C6SDA T3CCP1 USB0PFLT - - - USB0EPEN SSI0XDAT3 - EPI0S9 29 PG1 50 - - I2C1SDA - - M0PWM5 - - - - - EPI0S10 31 PG0 49 - - I2C1SCL - EN0PPS M0PWM4 - - - - - EPI0S11 33 PM3 75 - - - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S12 35 GND 37 PM2 76 - - - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S13 39 PM1 77 - - - T2CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S14 41 PM0 78 - - - T2CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S15 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 13 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Description www.ti.com Table 2-3. X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued) MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 43 PL0 81 - - I2C2SDA - - M0FAULT3 - - - - USB0D0 EPI0S16 45 PL1 82 - - I2C2SCL - - PhA0 - - - - USB0D1 EPI0S17 47 PL2 83 - - - - C0o PhB0 - - - - USB0D2 EPI0S18 49 PL3 84 - - - - C1o IDX0 - - - - USB0D3 EPI0S19 51 PQ0 5 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Clk EPI0S20 53 PQ1 6 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Fss EPI0S21 55 PQ2 11 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT0 EPI0S22 57 PQ3 27 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT1 EPI0S23 59 PK7 60 - U0RI I2C4SDA - - - - - - EPI0S24 61 GND 63 PK6 61 - - I2C4SCL - EN0LED1 M0FAULT1 - - - - - EPI0S25 65 PL4 85 - - - T0CCP0 - - - - - - USB0D4 EPI0S26 67 PB2 91 - - I2C0SCL T5CCP0 - - - - - - USB0STP EPI0S27 69 PB3 92 - - I2C0SDA T5CCP1 - - - - - - USB0CLK EPI0S28 71 PP2 103 - U0DTR - - - - - - - - USB0NXT EPI0S29 73 PP3 104 - U1CTS U0DCD - - - RTCCLK - - - USB0DIR EPI0S30 75 PK5 62 - - I2C3SDA - EN0LED2 M0PWM7 - - - - - EPI0S31 77 PK4 63 - - I2C3SCL - EN0LED0 M0PWM6 - - - - - EPI0S32 79 PL5 86 - - - T0CCP1 - - - - - - USB0D5 EPI0S33 81 PN4 111 - U1DTR U3RTS I2C2SDA - - - - - - - EPI0S34 83 PN5 112 - U1RI U3CTS I2C2SCL - - - - - - - EPI0S35 85 PN0 107 - U1RTS - - - - - - - - - - 87 PN1 108 - U1CTS - - - - - - - - - - 89 PN2 109 - U1DCD U2RTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S29 91 PN3 110 - U1DSR U2CTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S30 93 PQ4 102 - U1Rx - - - - - DIVSCLK - - - - 95 WAKE 97 5V 14 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Functional Description Table 2-4. X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 2 5V 4 GND 6 PA2 35 - U4Rx I2C8SCL T1CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0Clk 8 PA3 36 - U4Tx I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0Fss 10 PA4 37 - U3Rx I2C7SCL T2CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT0 12 PA5 38 - U3Tx I2C7SDA T2CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT1 14 PE0 15 AIN3 U1RTS - - - - - - - - - - 16 PE1 14 AIN2 U1DSR - - - - - - - - - - 18 PE2 13 AIN1 U1DCD - - - - - - - - - - 20 PE3 12 AIN0 U1DTR - - - - - - - - - - 22 PE4 123 AIN9 U1RI - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT0 24 PE5 124 AIN8 - - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT1 26 PK0 18 AIN16 U4Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0 28 PK1 19 AIN17 U4Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1 30 PK2 20 AIN18 U4RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2 32 PK3 21 AIN19 U4CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3 34 VREF 36 GND 38 PD5 126 AIN6 U2Tx - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3 40 PD4 125 AIN7 U2Rx - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT2 42 PD7 128 AIN4 U2CTS - T4CCP1 USB0PFLT - - NMI - - - SSI1XDAT2 44 PD6 127 AIN5 U2RTS - T4CCP0 USB0EPEN - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3 46 PD3 4 AIN12 - I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI2Clk 48 PD1 2 AIN14 - I2C7SDA T0CCP1 C1o - - - - - - SSI1XDAT0 50 PD0 1 AIN15 - I2C7SCL T0CCP0 C0o - - - - - - SSI1XDAT1 52 PD2 3 AIN13 - I2C8SCL T1CCP0 C2o - - - - - - SSI2Fss 54 PP0 118 C2+ U6Rx - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT2 56 PP1 119 C2- U6Tx - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3 58 PB0 95 USB0ID U1Rx I2C5SCL T4CCP0 - - CAN1Rx - - - - - 60 PB1 96 USB0VBUS U1Tx I2C5SDA T4CCP1 - - CAN1Tx - - - - - 62 GND 64 PF4 46 - - - - EN0LED1 M0FAULT0 - - - - SSI3XDAT2 TRD3 66 PF0 42 - - - - EN0LED0 M0PWM0 - - - - SSI3XDAT1 TRD2 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 15 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Description www.ti.com Table 2-4. X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued) MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15 68 PF1 43 - - - - EN0LED2 M0PWM1 - - - - SSI3XDAT0 TRD1 70 PF2 44 - - - - - M0PWM2 - - - - SSI3Fss TRD0 72 PF3 45 - - - - - M0PWM3 - - - - SSI3Clk TRCLK 74 PA0 33 - U0Rx I2C9SCL T0CCP0 - - CAN0Rx - - - - - 76 PA1 34 - U0Tx I2C9SDA T0CCP1 - - CAN0Tx - - - - - 78 PP4 105 - U3RTS U0DSR - - - - - - - USB0D7 - 80 PP5 106 - U3CTS I2C2SCL - - - - - - - USB0D6 - 82 PJ0 116 - U3Rx - - - - - - - - - 84 PJ1 117 - U3Tx - - - - - - - - - - 86 PM7 71 TMPR0 U0RI - T5CCP1 - - - - - - - - 88 PM6 72 TMPR1 U0DSR - T5CCP0 - - - - - - - - 90 PM5 73 TMPR2 U0DCD - T4CCP1 - - - - - - - - 92 PM4 74 TMPR3 U0CTS - T4CCP0 - - - - - - - - 94 RESET 96 GND 98 3V3 16 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Power Management 2.1.6.4 Other Headers and Jumpers JP1 is provided to select the power input source for the Connected LaunchPad. The top position is for BoosterPack power; this position also disconnects both USB voltages from the board’s primary 5-volt input. In the top position, the TPS2052B does not limit current so additional care should be exercised. The middle position draws power from the USB connector on the left side of the board near the Ethernet jack. The bottom position is the default, in which power is drawn from the ICDI (Debug) USB connection. JP2 separates the MCU 3.3-volt power domain from the rest of the 3.3-volt power on the board allowing an ammeter to be used to obtain more accurate measurements of microcontroller power consumption. JP3 isolates the output of the TPS73733 LDO from the board’s 3.3-V power domain. JP4 and JP5 are used to configure CAN signals to the BoosterPack 2 interface. In the default horizontal configuration, CAN is not present on the BoosterPack. UART 4 goes to the BoosterPack and UART 0 goes to the ICDI virtual serial port to provide ROM serial bootloader capability. In the vertical CAN-enabled configuration, UART 4 goes to the ICDI virtual serial port and CAN signals are available on the BoosterPack. The ROM serial bootloader is not available to the ICDI virtual serial port while the jumpers are in the CAN position. Figure 2-2 shows the default configuration and relative location of the jumpers on the board. Figure 2-2. Default Jumper Locations 2.2 Power Management 2.2.1 Power Supplies The Connected LaunchPad can be powered from three different input options: • On-board ICDI USB cable (Debug, Default) • Target USB cable • BoosterPack or Breadboard adapter connection The JP1 power-select jumper is used to select one of the power sources. In addition, the JP3 power jumper can be used to isolate the 3.3-volt output of the TPS73733 from the board’s 3.3-volt rail. A TPS2052B load switch is used to regulate and control power to the Target USB connector when the microcontroller is acting in USB host mode. This load switch also limits current to the BoosterPack and Breadboard adapter headers when the JP1 jumper is in the ICDI position. SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 17 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Power Management www.ti.com 2.2.2 Low Power Modes The Connected LaunchPad demonstrates several low power microcontroller modes. In run mode, the microcontroller can be clocked from several sources such as the internal precision oscillator or an external crystal oscillator. Either of these sources can then optionally drive an internal PLL to increase the effective frequency of the system up to 120 MHz. In this way, the run mode clock speed can be used to manage run mode current consumption. The microcontroller also provides sleep and deep sleep modes and internal voltage adjustments to the flash and SRAM to further refine power consumption when the processor is not in use but peripherals must remain active. Each peripheral can be individually clock gated in these modes so that current consumption by unused peripherals is minimized. A wide variety of conditions from internal and external sources can trigger a return to run mode. The lowest power setting of the microcontroller is hibernation, which requires a small amount of supporting external circuitry available on the Connected LaunchPad. The Connected LaunchPad can achieve microcontroller current consumption modes under 2 micro-Amps using hibernate VDD3ON mode. Hibernation with VDD3ON mode is not supported on this board. The Connected LaunchPad can be woken from hibernate by several triggers including the dedicated wake button, the reset button, an internal RTC timer and a subset of the device GPIO pins. The hibernation module provides a small area of internal SRAM that can preserve data through a hibernate cycle. 2.2.3 Clocking The Connected LaunchPad uses a 25 MHz crystal (Y1) to drive the main TM4C1294NCPDTI internal clock circuit. Most software examples use the internal PLL to multiply this clock to higher frequencies up to 120 MHz for core and peripheral timing. The 25-MHz crystal is required when using the integrated Ethernet MAC and PHY. The Hibernation module is clocked from an external 32.768-KHz crystal (Y3). 2.2.4 Reset The RESET signal to the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller connects to the RESET switch, BoosterPack connectors, Breadboard adapter and to the ICDI circuit for a debugger-controller reset. External reset is asserted (active low) under the following conditions: • Power-on reset (filtered by and R-C network) • RESET switch is held down. • By the ICDI circuit when instructed by the debugger (this capability is optional, and may not be supported by all debuggers) • By an external circuit attached to the BoosterPack or Breadboard connectors. 2.3 Debug Interface 2.3.1 In-Circuit Debug Interface (ICDI) The Connected LaunchPad comes with an on-board ICDI. The ICDI allows for the programming and debugging of the TM4C1294NCPDTI using LM Flash Programmer and/or any of the supported tool chains. Note that ICDI only supports JTAG debugging at this time. It is possible to use other JTAG emulators instead of the on board ICDI, by connecting to U6. When the ICDI detects an external debug adapter connection on the JTAG connector U6 and disables the ICDI outputs to allow the external debug adapter to drive the debug circuit. For more information, see Section 2.3.2. Debug out of the ICDI is possible by removing resistors R6, R7, R8, R10, R11, R15, R16 and R40 from the Connected LaunchPad and use the ICDI to drive JTAG signals out on U6 for the purpose of programming or debugging other boards. To restore the connection to the on-board TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller, install jumpers from the odd to even pins of X1 or re-install the resistors. Removal of R40 disables the detection of an attached external debugger. R40 must be installed to use an external debug adapter to program or debug the Connected LaunchPad. 18 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Debug Interface 2.3.2 External Debugger The connector U6 is provided for the attachment of an external debug adapter such as the IAR J-Link or Keil ULINK. This connector follows the ARM standard 10-pin JTAG pinout. This interface can use either JTAG or SWD if supported by the external debug adapter. 2.3.3 Virtual COM Port When plugged into a USB host, the ICDI enumerates as both a debugger and a virtual COM port. JP4 and JP5 control the selection of which UART from the TM4C1294NCPDTI is connected to the virtual COM port. In the default configuration, UART0 maps to the virtual COM port of the ICDI. In the CAN jumper configuration, UART4 maps to the virtual COM port of the ICDI. SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 19 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 3 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Software Development This chapter provides general information on software development as well as instructions for flash memory programming. 3.1 Software Description The TivaWare software provides drivers for all of the peripheral devices supplied in the design. The Tiva C Series Peripheral Driver Library is used to operate the on-chip peripherals as part of TivaWare. TivaWare includes a set of example applications that use the TivaWare Peripheral Driver Library. These applications demonstrate the capabilities of the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller, as well as provide a starting point for the development of the final application for use on the Connected LaunchPad evaluation board. Example applications are also provided for the Connected LaunchPad when paired with selected BoosterPacks. 3.2 Source Code The complete source code including the source code installation instructions are provided at http://www.ti.com/tool/sw-tm4c. The source code and binary files are installed in the TivaWare software tree. 3.3 Tool Options The source code installation includes directories containing projects, makefiles, and binaries for the following tool-chains: • Keil ARM RealView® Microcontroller Development System • IAR Embedded Workbench for ARM • Sourcery Codebench • Generic GNU C Compiler • Texas Instruments' Code Composer Studio™ IDE Download evaluation versions of these tools from the Tools & Software section of www.ti.com/tiva. Due to code size restrictions, the evaluation tools may not build all example programs. A full license is necessary to re-build or debug all examples. For detailed information on using the tools, see the documentation included in the tool chain installation or visit the website of the tools supplier. 20 Software Development SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Programming the Connected LaunchPad 3.4 Programming the Connected LaunchPad The Connected LaunchPad software package includes pre-built binaries for each of the example applications. If you installed the TivaWare™ software to the default installation path of C:\ti\TivaWare_C_Series_, you can find the example applications in C:\ti\TivaWare_C_Series- \examples\boards\ek-tm4c129xl. The on-board ICDI is used with the LM Flash Programmer tool to program applications on the Connected LaunchPad. Follow these steps to program example applications into the Connected LaunchPad evaulation board using the ICDI: 1. Install LM Flash Programmer on a PC running Microsoft Windows. 2. Place JP1 into the ICDI position on the Connected LaunchPad. 3. Connect the USB-A cable plug in to an available USB port on the PC and plug the Micro-B plug to the Debug USB port (U22) on the Connected LaunchPad. 4. Verify that LED D0 at the top of the board is illuminated. 5. Install Windows ICDI and Virtual COM Port drivers if prompted. Installation instructions can be found at http://www.ti.com/lit/pdf/spmu287. 6. Run the LM Flash Programmer application on the PC. 7. In the Configuration tap, use the Quick Set control to select “TM4C1294XL LaunchPad”. 8. Move to the Program tab and click the Browse button. Navigate to the example applications directory (the default location is C:\ti\TivaWare_C_Series_\examples\boards\ek-tm4c1294xl\) 9. Each example application has its own directory. Navigate to the example directory that you want to load and then into the sub-directory for one of the supported tool chains which contains the binary (*.bin) file. Select the binary file and click Open. 10. Set the Erase Method to Erase Necessary Pages, check the Verify After Program box, and check Reset MCU After Program. The example program starts execution once the verify process is complete. SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Software Development 21 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 4 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials 4.1 References In addition to this document the following references are available for download at www.ti.com. • TivaWare for C Series (http://www.ti.com/tool/sw-tm4c) • TivaWare Peripheral Driver Library Users' Guide (literature number SPMU298) • EK-TM4C1294XL Getting Started Guide (literature number SPMZ858) • LM Flash Programmer Tool (http://www.ti.com/lmflashprogrammer) • TPS73733 Low-Dropout Regulator with Reverse Current Protection (http://www.ti.com/product/tps79733) • Texas Instruments Code Composer Studio website (http://www.ti.com/ccs) • Tiva C Series TM4C1294NCPDT Microcontroller Data Sheet (http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tm4c1294ncpdt) • Build Your Own BoosterPack information regarding the BoosterPack standard (http://www.ti.com/byob) • ICDI Driver Installation Guide (literature number SPMU287) Additional Support: • Keil RealView MDK-ARM (http://www.keil.com/arm/mdk.asp) • IAR Embedded Workbench for ARM (http://iar.com/ewarm/) • Sourcery CodeBench development tools (http://www.mentor.com/embedded-software/sourcerytools/ sourcery-codebench/overview) • Exosite (http://ti.exosite.com) 22 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Component Locations 4.2 Component Locations Figure 4-1 is a dimensioned drawing of the Connected LaunchPad. This figure shows the location of selected features of the board as well as the component locations. Figure 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Dimensions and Component Locations SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials 23 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Bill of Materials www.ti.com 4.3 Bill of Materials Table 4-1 is the Connected LaunchPad bill of materials list. Table 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Bill of Materials Item Ref Qty Description Mfg Part Number 1 C1 1 Capacitor, 1000pF, 2kV, Kemet C1210C102MGRACTU 20%, X7R, 1210 C3, C4, C5, C10, C11, C12, C13, C16, C17, C18, C19, Capacitor, 0.1uF 16V, 2 C21, C22, C23, C24, C25, 26 10%,0402 X7R Taiyo Yuden EMK105B7104KV-F C26, C27, C28, C29, C30, C40, C41, C42, C43, C46 3 C31 1 Capacitor, 4700pF, 2kV, AVX 1812GC472KAT1A 10%,X7R, 1812 4 C32, C33 2 Capacitor, 3300pF, 50V, TDK C1608X7R1H332K 10%, X7R, 0603 5 C6, C14 2 Capacitor, 1uF , X5R, 10V, Johanson 100R07X105KV4T Low ESR, 0402 Dielectrics Inc 6 C7, C15, C20 3 Capacitor, 2.2uF, 16V, Murata GRM188R61C225KE15D 10%, 0603, X5R 7 C8, C9, C44, 6 Capacitor, 12pF, 50V, Murata GRM1555C1H120JZ01D C45, C47, C48 5%, 0402, COG 8 D0, D1, D2, D3, D4 5 Green LED 0603 Everlight 19-217/G7C-AL1M2B/3T J1, J2, J3, Jumper, 0.100, Gold, 3M 969102-0000-DA 9 J4, J5, J6, J7 7 Black, Open Kobiconn 151-8000-E Header, 2x3, 0.100, T-Hole, 10 JP1 1 Vertical Unshrouded, FCI 67996-206HLF 0.230 Mate, gold Header, 1x2, 0.100, T-Hole, 3M 961102-6404-AR 11 JP2, JP3 2 Vertical Unshrouded, 0.220 FCI 68001-102HLF Mate Anyone 1x2-head Header, 2x2, 0.100, T-Hole, FCI 67997-104HLF 12 JP4, JP5 2 Vertical Unshrouded, 0.230 Mate 4UCON 00998 13 R1, R2, R3, R4, 8 Resistor, 10k ohm, 1/10W, Yageo RC0402FR-0710KL R5, R29, R35, R44 5%, 0402 Thick Film 14 R17, R26, R36 3 100k 5% 0402 resistor smd Rohm MCR01MRTJ104 15 R18, R51 2 Resistor 0402 100 ohm 5% Rohm MCR1MRTJ101 16 R23, R21, R22, R24 4 Resistor 49.9 ohm 0402. 1 % Rohm MCR01MRTF49R9 17 R25 1 Resistor 4.87k 1% 0402 smd Rohm MCR01MRTF4871 18 R28 1 Resistor, 5.6k ohm, Panasonic ERJ-2GEJ562X 1/10W, 5%, 0402 19 R32, R43, R45, R46 4 resistor 75 ohm 0402 5% Rohm MCR01MRTJ750 20 R34, R52 2 Resistor, 1M OH, Panasonic ERJ-3GEYJ105V 1/10W, 5% 0603 SMD 21 R38 1 Resistor, 51 ohm, Panasonic ERJ-2GEJ510X 1/10W, 5%, 0402 22 R42 1 Resistor, 1M Ohm, Rohm MCR01MRTF1004 1/10W, 5%, 0402 23 R47 1 RES 1M OHM 5% 1206 TF Panasonic ERJ-8GEYJ105V 24 R49, R50 2 Resistor, 2.0k ohm, Panasonic ERJ-3GEYJ202V 1/10W, 5%, 0402 R6, R7, R8, R10, R11, Resistor, 0 ohm, 25 R15, R16, R19, R20, R39, 12 1/10W, 5%, 0402 Panasonic ERJ-2GE0R00X R40, R41 26 R9, R27, R30, R31, R33 5 Resistor, 330 ohm, Yageo RC0402FR-07330RL 1/10W, 5%, 0402 24 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Bill of Materials Table 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Bill of Materials (continued) Item Ref Qty Description Mfg Part Number 27 RESET, USR_SW1, 4 Switch, Tact 6mm SMT, Omron B3S-1000 USR_SW2, WAKE 160gf Tiva, MCU TM4C1294NCPDT Texas Instruments TM4C1294NCPDT 28 U1 1 128 QFP with Ethernet MAC + PHY Texas Instruments XM4C1294NCPDT 29 U10 1 Transformer, ethernet, 1 to 1. Pulse Electronics HX1198FNL SOIC 16 30 U13 1 Diode, 8 chan, +/-15KV, ESD Semtech SLVU2.8-4.TBT Protection Array, SO-8 31 U14 1 Connector, RJ45 NO MAG, TE Connectivity 1-406541-5 shielded THRU HOLE 32 U2, U3 2 IC 4CH ESD SOLUTION Texas Instruments TPD4S012DRYR W/CLAMP 6SON 33 U20 1 Stellaris TIVA MCU Texas Instruments TM4C123GH6PMI TM4C123GH6PMI 34 U22 1 USB Micro B receptacle FCI 10118194-0001LF right angle with guides 35 U4 1 Fault protected power switch, Texas Instruments TPS2052BDRBR dual channel, 8-SON 36 U5 1 3.3V LDO TI TPS73733DRV Texas Instruments TPS73733DRV fixed out 5V in Samtec SHF-105-01-S-D-SM 37 U6 1 Header 2x5, 0.050, SM, Vertical Shrouded Don Connex C44-10BSA1-G Electronics USB Micro AB receptacle. 38 U7 1 Right angle with through Hirose ZX62D-AB-5P8 guides Samtec SSW-110-23-S-D 39 X6, X7, X8, X9 4 Header, 2x10, T-Hole Vertical unshrouded stacking Major League SSHQ-110-D-08-F-LF Electronics 40 Y1 1 Crystal 25 MHz 3.2 x 2.5 mm NDK nx3225ga-25.000m-std-crg-2 41 Y2 1 Crystal 16 MHz 3.2 x 2.5 mm NDK NX3225GA-16.000M-STD-CRG-2 4 pin 42 Y3 1 Crystal, 32.768 KHz Radial Citizen Finetech CMR200T-32.768KDZY-UT Can Miyota PCB Do Not Populate List (Shown for information only) 43 C2 1 Capacitor, 0.1uF 16V, Taiyo Yuden EMK105B7104KV-F 10%, 0402 X7R Screw, #4 x 0.625" Pan 44 H1, H4, H6 3 Head, Sheet Metal, McMaster 90077A112 Phillips/Slotted (for fan) 45 R12, R13, R14 3 Resistor, 5.6k ohm, Panasonic ERJ-2GEJ562X 1/10W, 5%, 0402 46 R48 1 Resistor 0402 1% 52.3k Rohm TRR01MZPF5232 TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4, TP5, 47 TP6, TP7, TP8, TP9, 17 Terminal, Test Point Miniature Keystone 5000 TP10, TP11, TP12, TP13, Loop, Red, T-Hole TP14, TP15, TP16, TP17 Header, 2x7, 0.100, T-Hole, 48 X1 1 Vertical, Unshrouded, 0.230 FCI 67997-114HLF Mate Valvano style bread board 49 X11A 1 connect. Right Angle Samtec TSW-149-09-F-S-RE extended, 1 x 49 0.100 pitch. 50 X11B 1 valvano style breadboard Samtec TSW-149-08-F-S-RA header. SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials 25 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 5 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Schematic This section contains the complete schematics for the Tiva C Series TM4C1294 Connected LaunchPad. • Microcontroller, USB, Buttons, and LED's • BoosterPack connectors • Breadboard connector • Ethernet and Ethernet LED's • Power • In-Circuit Debug Interface 26 Schematic SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated GND 330 GND GND SWITCH_TACTILE SWITCH_TACTILE GND 330 GND TPD4S012_DRY_6 GND GND 100 1M 3300pF TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 D1 R33 USR_SW1 USR_SW2 D2 R27 D+ 1 D- 2 GND 4 ID 3 N.C. 5 VBUS 6 U2 R18 DM P2 DP P3 GND P5 ID P4 VBUS P1 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17 PA0 P$33 PA1 P$34 PA2 P$35 PA3 P$36 PA4 P$37 PA5 P$38 PA6 P$40 PA7 P$41 PB0 P$95 PB1 P$96 PB2 P$91 PB3 P$92 PB4 P$121 PB5 P$120 PC0 P$100 PC1 P$99 PC2 P$98 PC3 P$97 PC4 P$25 PC5 P$24 PC6 P$23 PC7 P$22 PD0 P$1 PD1 P$2 PD2 P$3 PD3 P$4 PD4 P$125 PD5 P$126 PD6 P$127 PD7 P$128 PE0 P$15 PE1 P$14 PE2 P$13 PE3 P$12 PE4 P$123 PE5 P$124 PF0 P$42 PF1 P$43 PF2 P$44 PF3 P$45 PF4 P$46 PG0 P$49 PG1 P$50 PH0 P$29 PH1 P$30 PH2 P$31 PH3 P$32 PJ0 P$116 PJ1 P$117 PK0 P$18 PK1 P$19 PK2 P$20 PK3 P$21 PK4 P$63 PK5 P$62 PK6 P$61 PK7 P$60 PL0 P$81 PL1 P$82 PL2 P$83 PL3 P$84 PL4 P$85 PL5 P$86 PL6 P$94 PL7 P$93 PM0 P$78 PM1 P$77 PM2 P$76 PM3 P$75 PM4 P$74 PM5 P$73 PM6 P$72 PM7 P$71 PN0 P$107 PN1 P$108 PN2 P$109 PN3 P$110 PN4 P$111 PN5 P$112 PP0 P$118 PP1 P$119 PP2 P$103 PP3 P$104 PP4 P$105 PP5 P$106 PQ0 P$5 PQ1 P$6 PQ2 P$11 PQ3 P$27 PQ4 P$102 R52 C32 GPIO PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA5 PA6 PA7 PA4 PB0 PB0/3.2C TARGET_VBUS/3.2C TARGET_VBUS/3.2C TARGET_VBUS/3.2C PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PF0 PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PG0 PG1 PH0 PH1 PH2 PJ0 PH3 PJ0/3.2D PJ1 PJ1/3.2D PK0 PK1 PK2 PK3 PK4 PK5 PK6 PK7 PL0 PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 USBD_P USBD_P USBD_P USBD_N USBD_N USBD_N PM0 PM1 PM2 PM3 PM4 PM5 PM6 PM7 PP0 PP1 PP2 PP3 PP4 PP5 PN0 PN0/3.4D PN1 PN1/3.4D PN2 PN3 PN4 PN5 PQ0 PQ1 PQ2 PQ3 PQ4 TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/6.1A TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/6.1A TARGET_TDI/6.1E TARGET_TDO/SWO/6.1E TARGET_ID TARGET_ID A B C D E A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 U7G$1 U1G$1 TM4C1294NCPDT See PF0 and PF4 for additional LED's used for Ethernet or user application NOTE: TPD4S012 all protection circuits are identical. Connections chosen for simple routing. convienence test points for ground TSW-110-02-S-D TSW-110-02-S-D TSW-110-02-S-D TSW-110-02-S-D 0 0 +3V3 +3V3 +5V +5V 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF GND GND GND GND X6-1 X6-2 X6-3 X6-4 X6-5 X6-6 X6-7 X6-8 X6-9 X6-10 X6-11 X6-12 X6-13 X6-14 X6-15 X6-16 X6-17 X6-18 X6-19 X6-20 X7-1 X7-2 X7-3 X7-4 X7-5 X7-6 X7-7 X7-8 X7-9 X7-10 X7-11 X7-12 X7-13 X7-14 X7-15 X7-17 X7-16 X7-19 X7-18 X7-20 X8-1 X8-2 X8-3 X8-4 X8-5 X8-6 X8-7 X8-8 X8-9 X8-10 X8-11 X8-12 X8-13 X8-14 X8-15 X8-16 X8-17 X8-18 X8-19 X8-20 X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5 X9-6 X9-7 X9-8 X9-9 X9-10 X9-11 X9-13 X9-12 X9-15 X9-14 X9-17 X9-16 X9-19 X9-18 X9-20 R19 R20 JP4 1 2 3 4 JP5 1 2 3 4 C23 C24 C25 C26 PB2 PB3 PL0 PP2 PH2 GND/1.6B GND/1.6B GND/1.6B GND/1.6B TARGET_RESET/3.2D TARGET_RESET/3.2D PA0/3.2C BP2_A2.5 BP2_A2.5 TARGET_RXD/6.1D TARGET_TXD/6.1D PA1/3.2C BP2_A2.6 BP2_A2.6 PE4 PE5 PC5 PC4 PM3 PM4 PM5 PL4 PD5/1.4B PC6 PD3 PC7 PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PD4/1.4B PD7 PF1 PF2 PF3 PG0 PL5 PL1 PL2 PL3 PH3 PD1 PD0 PN2 PN3 PD2 PP0 PP1 PQ0 PP4 PN5 PN4 PB4 PB5 PK0 PK1 PK2 PK3 PA4 PA5 PG1 PK4 PK5 PM0 PM1 PM2 PH0 PH1 PK6 PK7 PM7 PA7 PA3 PA2 PQ3 PQ2 PP3 PQ1 PM6 PP5 PA6 BoosterPack 2 Interface BoosterPack 1 Interface A B C D E A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 JP4 and JP5 CAN and ICDI UART Selection: Populate Jumpers from 1-2 and 3-4 for Default Mode This enables ROM UART boot loader. UART 0 to ICDI Populate from 1-3 and 2-4 for controller area network on the boosterpack. UART2 is then availabe to ICDI. R19 and R20 can be populated to enable I2C on Right side of BP2 interface. This is for legacy support and the Sensor Hub BoosterPack. I2C and SSI are available on the corresponding BoosterPack 1 interface pins without modification to the board. PA6 and PA7 are also used by the onboard radio. Configure the radio to tri-state these GPIO before using them on the boosterpack interface. TSW-149-02-S-D +3V3 +3V3 +5V +5V 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF GND GND GND GND X11-2 X11-1 X11-4 X11-3 X11-6 X11-5 X11-8 X11-7 X11-10 X11-9 X11-12 X11-11 X11-14 X11-13 X11-16 X11-15 X11-18 X11-17 X11-20 X11-19 X11-22 X11-21 X11-24 X11-23 X11-26 X11-25 X11-28 X11-27 X11-30 X11-29 X11-32 X11-31 X11-34 X11-33 X11-36 X11-35 X11-38 X11-37 X11-40 X11-39 X11-42 X11-41 X11-44 X11-43 X11-46 X11-45 X11-48 X11-47 X11-50 X11-49 X11-52 X11-51 X11-54 X11-53 X11-56 X11-55 X11-58 X11-57 X11-60 X11-59 X11-62 X11-61 X11-64 X11-63 X11-66 X11-65 X11-68 X11-67 X11-70 X11-69 X11-72 X11-71 X11-74 X11-73 X11-76 X11-75 X11-78 X11-77 X11-80 X11-79 X11-82 X11-81 X11-84 X11-83 X11-86 X11-85 X11-88 X11-87 X11-90 X11-89 X11-92 X11-91 X11-94 X11-93 X11-96 X11-95 X11-98 X11-97 C28 C27 C29 C30 VREF+/5.5B TARGET_RESET/2.4D GND/2.3C GND/2.3C GND/4.1A GND/2.3C GND/4.1A PB4 PB5 PH0 PH1 PH2 PH3 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PA6 PA7 PG1 PM3 PM2 PM1 PM0 PL0 PL2 PL3 PQ0 PQ1 PK7 PK6 PL4 PB2 PB3 PP2 PP3 PK5 PK4 PL5 PN4 PN5 PG0 PL1 PQ2 PQ3 PN0 PN1 PN2 PN3 PQ4 WAKE/5.5A PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PK0 PK1 PK2 PK3 PD5 PD4 PD7 PD6 PD3 PD1 PD0 PD2 PP0 PP1 PB0 TARGET_VBUS/1.6B PF4 PF0 PF1 PF2 PF3 PA0 PA1 PP4 PP5 PJ0 PJ1 PM7 PM6 PM5 PM4 A B C D E A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTE: PB0 and PB1 are used in some configurations with 5V signals especially in USB Host or OTG mode. Be aware the 5V may be present on these pins depending on system jumper configuration These pins are only 5V tolerant when configured for USB mode applications. This is the breadboard connection header. Samtec TSW-149-08-F-S-RA and TSW-149-09-F-S-RE can be used together to create a breadboard connector see the Users Manual for more information. 49.9 49.9 49.4 49.9 330 GND 330 GND 0.1uF 0.1uF GND GND 0.1uF 0.1uF 75 75 GND GND 75 75 GND 4700pF 1M 1000pF R21 R22 R23 R24 D4 R30 D3 R31 C17 C16 C22 C18 P$1 P$1 P$2 P$2 P$3 P$3 P$6 P$6 P$7 P$7 P$8 P$8 P$9 P$9 P$10 P$10 P$11 P$11 P$14 P$14 P$15 P$15 P$16 P$16 P$1 1 P$2 2 P$3 3 P$4 4 P$5 5 P$6 6 P$7 7 P$8 8 R32 R43 CHASSIS 9 CHASSIS 10 RX+ 3 RX- 6 TERM1A 4 TERM1B 5 TERM2A 7 TERM2B 8 TX+ 1 TX- 2 R45 R46 C31 R47 C1 EN0RXI_N/5.3B EN0RXI_P/5.3B EN0TXO_N/5.3B EN0TXO_P/5.3B PF4/3.2C PF0/3.2C MCU_3V3/5.2A A B C D E A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 U10 U13 U14 For Ethernet example Applications: LED4 is default configured as Ethernet Link OK LED3 is default configured as Ethernet TX/RX activity User may re-configure these pins / LED's for any application usage. Place pull up resistors and C16-C17 near TM4C MCU. Place C18 and C22 near pin 2 and pin 7 of U$10 U10 May be populated with either HX1188FNL or HX1198FNL. HX1198FNL preferred for best Ethernet performance. +3V3 +5V GND 0.1uF 2.2uF 0.1uF GND 330 GND 100k 4.87k 1% GND GND 0.1uF 1.0uF 2.2uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF GND 0 0 GND 1M SWITCH_TACTILE 12pF 12pF 10k 0.1uF 12pF 12pF SWITCH_TACTILE GND MOUNT-HOLE3.2 MOUNT-HOLE3.2 GND GND GND GND GND TPS2052B_DRB_8 +5V 10k 100k GND 51 0.1uF GND +3V3 100k TPS73733_DRV_6 OMIT 2k MOUNT-HOLE3.2 100 CRYATL_32K_SMD C19 C20 C21 D0 R9 R17 TP3 R25 C4 C14 C15 C40 C41 C42 C43 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 R39 TP13 R41 R42 RESET C44 C45 NC2 P$2 NC4 P$4 OSC0 P$1 OSC1 P$3 R44 C46 C47 C48 WAKE H4 H6 *EN1 3 *EN2 4 *OC1 8 *OC2 5 EPAD 9 GND 1 IN 2 OUT1 7 OUT2 6 VIA V VIA V_2 VIA V_3 VIA V_4 VIA V_5 VIA V_6 U4 JP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 JP2 1 2 JP3 1 2 R35 R36 TP8 R38 C3 R26 EN 4 EPAD 7 GND 3 IN 6 NC 5 NR/FB 2 OUT 1 VIA V VIA V_2 U5 R48 R49 H1 R51 HIB P$65 RESET P$70 WAKE P$64 EN0RXIN P$53 EN0RXIP P$54 EN0TXON P$56 EN0TXOP P$57 GND P$17 GND P$48 GND P$55 GND P$58 GND P$80 GND P$114 GNDA P$10 OSC0 P$88 OSC1 P$89 RBIAS P$59 VBAT P$68 VDD P$7 VDD P$16 VDD P$26 VDD P$28 VDD P$39 VDD P$47 VDD P$51 VDD P$52 VDD P$69 VDD P$79 VDD P$90 VDD P$101 VDD P$113 VDD P$122 VDDA P$8 VDDC P$87 VDDC P$115 VREFA+ P$9 XOSC0 P$66 XOSC1 P$67 P$1 P$1 P$2 P$2 Y3 TARGET_VBUS/3.2C TARGET_VBUS/3.2C DEBUG_VBUS/6.4A EN0RXI_N EN0RXI_P EN0TXO_N EN0TXO_P RBIAS WAKE/3.3D MCU_3V3/6.2A MCU_3V3/4.1A VBUS VBUS VBUS PQ4/3.4D PD6/3.2B TARGET_RESET/3.2D A B C D E A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y1 25Mhz U1G$2 Power Control Jumper: 1) To power from Debug install jumper on pins 5 - 6 2) To power from Target USB install jumper on pins 3 - 4 3) To power from BoosterPack 5V install jumper on pins 1 - 2 This is also the off position if BoosterPack does not supply power When powered from BoosterPack TPS2052B does not provide current limit protection. When powered by BoosterPack, USB host mode does not supply power to connected devices Primary 3.3V regulator Disconnect JP3 to power device from 3V3 BoosterPack JP2 can be used to measure MCU current consumption with a multi-meter. TPS2052B provides current limit for main 5V power. Also provides power switching for USB host/OTG modes For Host/OTG: PD6 configured as USB0EPEN peripheral function. PQ4 configure as individual pin interrupt. Indicates power fault on the USB bus. USB0PFLT peipheral pin not available due to pin mux and use on BoosterPacks. USB Host mode does not supply power to devices when powered from a BoosterPack For Applications that do not use USB: Configure PD6 as input with internal pull-down enabled. Turns off power to TARGET_VBUS R38 and C3 Used to meet VBAT rise time requirements R41 may be removed and precision reference applied to TP13 OMIT TSW-107-02-S-D OMIT +3V3 10k 0.1uF OMIT 0.1uF 1.0uF 12pF 12pF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF +3V3 +3V3 2.2uF 5.6k OMIT 5.6k OMIT 5.6k OMIT 10k 10k 10k 10k +3V3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 0 +3V3 TPD4S012_DRY_6 5.6k 10k GND 2k GND 1M 3300pF GND TRST 9 GND 3 NC 5 RESET 10 RTCK 7 TCK 4 TDI 8 TDO 6 TMS 2 VTREF 1 U21 X1-2 X1-1 X1-4 X1-3 X1-6 X1-5 X1-8 X1-7 X1-10 X1-9 X1-12 X1-11 X1-14 X1-13 R3 C2 C5 C6 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 NC2 P$2 NC4 P$4 OSC0 P$1 OSC1 P$3 C7 R12 R13 R14 R1 R2 R4 R5 TP2 TP1 R6 R7 R8 R10 R11 R15 R16 EXTDBG P3 RESET P10 GND P5 GND1 P9 P$7 P7 TCK P4 TDI P8 TDO P6 TMS P2 VTARGET P1 R40 HIB P$33 RESET P$38 WAKE P$32 GND0 P$12 GND1 P$27 GND2 P$39 GND3 P$55 GNDA P$3 GNDX P$35 OSC0 P$40 OSC1 P$41 PA0 P$17 PA1 P$18 PA2 P$19 PA3 P$20 PA4 P$21 PA5 P$22 PA6 P$23 PA7 P$24 PB0 P$45 PB1 P$46 PB2 P$47 PB3 P$48 PB4 P$58 PB5 P$57 PB6 P$1 PB7 P$4 PC0/TCK P$52 PC1/TMS P$51 PC2/TDI P$50 PC3/TDO P$49 PC4 P$16 PC5 P$15 PC6 P$14 PC7 P$13 PD0 P$61 PD1 P$62 PD2 P$63 PD3 P$64 PD4 P$43 PD5 P$44 PD6 P$53 PD7 P$10 PE0 P$9 PE1 P$8 PE2 P$7 PE3 P$6 PE4 P$59 PE5 P$60 PF0 P$28 PF1 P$29 PF2 P$30 PF3 P$31 PF4 P$5 VBAT P$37 VDD0 P$11 VDD1 P$26 VDD2 P$42 VDD3 P$54 VDDA P$2 VDDC0 P$25 VDDC1 P$56 XOSC0 P$34 XOSC1 P$36 DM P2 DP P3 GND P5 ID P4 VBUS P1 D+ 1 D- 2 GND 4 ID 3 N.C. 5 VBUS 6 U3 R28 R29 R50 R34 C33 ICDI_TDI ICDI_TMS ICDI_TMS ICDI_TCK ICDI_TCK ICDI_TDO ICDI_TDO ICDI_RESET ICDI_RESET VCP_RXD VCP_RXD VCP_RXD VCP_TXD VCP_TXD VCP_TXD DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO DEBUG_PC2/TDI DEBUG_PC2/TDI DEBUG_PC2/TDI DEBUG_PC2/TDI DEBUG_RESET_OUT DEBUG_RESET_OUT DEBUG_RESET_OUT DEBUG_RESET_OUT EXTERNAL_DEBUG EXTERNAL_DEBUG ICDI_VDDC VERSION_1 VERSION_1 VERSION_2 VERSION_2 VERSION_0 VERSION_0 DEBUG_ACTIVE ICDI_USBD_N ICDI_USBD_N ICDI_USBD_P TARGET_TXD/2.5D ICDI_USBD_P TARGET_TXD/2.5D TARGET_RXD/2.5D TARGET_RXD/2.5D TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/1.2A TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/1.2A TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/1.2A TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/1.2B TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/1.2B TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/1.2B TARGET_TDI/1.2B TARGET_TDI/1.2B TARGET_TDO/SWO/1.2B TARGET_TDO/SWO/1.2B TARGET_RESET/5.2A TARGET_RESET/5.2A DEBUG_VBUS/5.1B DEBUG_VBUS/5.1B DEBUG_VBUS/5.1B DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK MCU_3V3/5.6B A B C D E A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y2 16M U6 JTAG_ARM_10PIN U20 TM4C123GH6PMI TM4C123xH6PMI U22G$1 PE4 ETM_ENn Leave Open use GPIO Internal weak pullup. PE5 LS_PRESENTn Leave Open use GPIO internal weak pullup VERSION RESISTOR TABLE: *use internal GPIO weak pullups. ALL OMITTED: Legacy mode. (Stellaris ICDI) ALL POPULATED: Everything enabled Version 0 populated: UART CTS/RTS and Analog inputs JTAG PULL-UPS Jumpers to bridge from ICDI to Target portion of LaunchPad EXTERNAL_DEBUG pull low to use external debugger to debug the target. Causes ICDI chip to tri-state the JTAG lines Use this for JTAG IN from external debugger. See X1 jumpers for information about debug out to an external target. R40 must be removed for debug out. R40 must be instaled for debug in. X1 omitted by default To debug out from ICDI to off board MCU remove 0 ohm jumper resistors. To go back from debug out to debugging the target MCU install X1 and place jumpers on all pins. Chapter 6 SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Revision History This history highlights the changes made to the SPMU365 user's guide to make it an SPMU365A revision. Table 6-1. Revision History SEE ADDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS/DELETIONS Table 2-3, X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing: • Updated/Changed Pin 1 from "5V" to "3V3" • Updated/Changed Pin 25 from "PC4" to "PA6" Section 2.1.6.3 • Updated/Changed Pin 27 from "PA6" to "PA7" Breadboard Connection • Updated/Changed Pin 29 from "PA7" to "PG1" • Updated/Changed Pin 61 from "EPI0S12" to "GND" Table 2-4, X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing: • Updated/Changed Pin 2 from "3V3" to "5V" SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Revision History 27 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated UTS Series Dynamic IP68/69K • UV Resistant • UL/IEC Compliant © 2011 – SOURIAU 3 How to read our catalogue ........................................ 06 UTS range overview ..................................................... 07 General technical characteristics ............................. 10 Cable assembly ............................................................... 14 2 contacts ....................................................................... 20 2 + ground contacts ................................................... 28 3 contacts ........................................................................ 36 3 + ground contacts .................................................... 52 4 contacts ........................................................................ 60 5 contacts ........................................................................ 72 6 contacts ........................................................................ 76 6 + ground contacts .................................................... 88 7 contacts ........................................................................ 92 8 contacts ........................................................................ 96 10 contacts ..................................................................... 104 12 contacts ...................................................................... 108 14 contacts ...................................................................... 116 15 contacts ...................................................................... 120 18 contacts ..................................................................... 124 19 contacts ..................................................................... 128 23 contacts ..................................................................... 132 32 contacts ..................................................................... 136 Contents UTS Series Overview Mechanics Description ...................................................................... 142 Contact plating selector guide .................................. 143 Contact selector guide ................................................ 144 Packaging ........................................................................ 144 Crimp contacts ............................................................... 145 #16 coaxial contacts ................................................... 147 PCB contacts .................................................................. 148 Fibre optic contacts ...................................................... 149 Contacts Tooling .............................................................................. 154 Assembly instruction .................................................... 156 Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ..................... 162 Extraction tools .............................................................. 162 Rated current & working voltage .............................. 163 UV resistance ................................................................. 164 UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................ 165 IEC 61984 with IP code explanation ...................... 168 What is NEMA rating ? ................................................ 170 Ethernet for the layman ............................................... 171 Technical information #16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices .................. 176 Glossary of terms .......................................................... 183 Discrimination/Keying methods ............................... 184 Part number Index.......................................................... 185 Appendices Appendices Technical information Contacts Mechanics Overview UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 5 Overview UTS Series How to read our catalog .............................................................................................................. 06 UTS range overview ...................................................................................................................... 07 General technical characteristics .............................................................................................. 10 6 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Overview SOURIAU is pleased to announce the arrival of a brand new catalog containing some signifi cant improvements to simplify the connector selection process and provide easy access to key information. In this version you can see all layouts at a glance, download 2D drawings and 3D models. Then, when your choice is made, you can click on the part number and buy online. Step 3 Step 2 Easy access to supporting material such as prints and CAD models. In just two pages you can gather together details of all accessories, contacts, tools etc required for your application. Interactive zones. Clearer understanding of the range. Step 1 © 2011 – SOURIAU 7 UTS range overview The UTS series is a plastic connector range but rugged enough to withstand industrial applications. The philosophy of the UTS series is built around three key elements: Dynamic IP68/69K UV Resistant UL/IEC Compliant In most applications, our connectors are exposed to extreme climatic conditions; it was therefore key for us to select the materials best able to cope with the targeted environment. Part of our product qualifi cation process involved subjecting connectors to a simulated fi ve years of exposure to various elements including Temperature, UV and Humidity. The results were positive in that there were no visible signs of weakness, such as cracking or crazing. The outmost priority for any electrical installation is to protect personnel from any shock hazard. In North America, Underwriters Laboratories insisted that connector manufacturers, depending of the application, respect their standards. The UTS series had thus been qualifi ed and is certifi ed by this organisation. In Europe and in Asia, IEC standards are better known and trusted by end users. Like its American equivalent, the IEC refers to safety rules. The UTS series was obviously designed to respect these rules. UTS series is rated at IP68/69K… even in dynamic conditions. This means that it remain sealed even when used continuously underwater or cleaned using a high pressure hose and cable is moving. This extreme level of performance is achievable with jacketed cable or discrete wires. If this same level of performance is required even when connectors are not mated, we have UTS Hi Seal; a product designed to remain watertight if an environmental cap is not fi tted or if the equipment is likely to get wet when cables have been disconnected. Screw termination version UTS series is a wide range... Based on multiple power & signal connectors and offers everything from box mounted receptacles and cable mounted plugs to cable mounted in-line and PCB mounted receptacles. Almost all ways to accommodate wires exist: Crimp, Solder, Screw termination. UTS Series Overview The bayonet coupling system makes it simple to use. With only a 1/3 twist of the coupling ring, connectors are mated with an audible and sensitive “click”. Overview 8 © 2011 – SOURIAU Just screw the wires to the connector ! No special tools required, use a standard screwdriver UTS screw termination UTS range UTS discrete wire sealing See page 9 Sealed: IP68/69K UV resistant UL/IEC compliant Corrosion-proof Plastic housing UTS Series Plug Corrosion-proof Plastic housing UTS Hi seal Sealed Unmated Sealed unmated: IP68/69K MIL-C-26482 compatible UV resistant UL/IEC compliant Screw termination contact Solder contact Crimp contact • machined • stamped and formed • coaxial • fibre optics UTS Series Overview © 2011 – SOURIAU 9 overview Metal hold down clips - to lock the connector easily on the PCB and to release stress on solder joints - suitable for soldering in a metalised hole Pre-assembled PCB contacts - machined or stamped versions available - different solder tails lengths possible - different plating options Low profi le housing to limit space between panel and PCB Stand-offs to allow cleaning after soldering UTS PCB contacts Receptacle No fi ller plug needed Grommet Containment ring Backnut or Easy handling backshell UTS discrete wire sealing Double Sealing UTS Series Overview Overview 10 © 2011 – SOURIAU General technical Mechanical • Durability: 250 matings & unmatings per MIL-C-26482 • Vibration resistance (all UTS versions except UTS Screw termination contacts): Sinusoidal vibrations per CEI 60512-4 - from 10 to 2000 Hz • Thermal shock: 5 cycles 30 min. from -40°C to 105°C per MIL-STD1344 method 1003 Environmental • Operating temperature: from -40°C to +105°C 40/100/21 per NFF 61-030 • Flammability rating: UL94-V0 (all UTS except the Hi seal) - see page 165 UL94-HB (UTS Hi seal only) - see page 165 I2F3 according to NFF 16101 and NFF 16102 • Salt spray: 500 hours • UV resistant: No mechanical degradation or important variation of colour after 5 years of exposure in natural environment (equivalence exposure to sun and moisture as per ISO4892) • Sealing: - UTS Standard: IP68/IP69K (mated) - UTS Hi seal: IP68/IP69K (mated and unmated) - UTS Discrete wire sealing: IP67/69K (up to IP68 with easy handling backshell) - UTS Screw termination contacts: IP68/IP69K Note: IPx8: 10m underwater during 1 week • Fluid resistance: - Gasoil - Mineral oil - Acid bath - Basic bath 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 UTS Series Overview © 2011 – SOURIAU 11 characteristics Material • Body connector + Backshell: Thermoplastic • Insert: - UTS Standard, UTS Discrete wire sealing, UTS Screw termination contacts: Thermoplastic - UTS Hi seal handsolder & UTS Hi seal with PC tails contacts: Elastomer • Contacts: See page 140 • Nut: Metal • Halogen free • RoHS compliant & conform to the Chinese standard SJ/T1166-2006 (Chinese RoHS equivalent) • In accordance with: - UL 1977: Certifi cat ECBT2 File number: E169916 - CSA C22.2 n°182.3: Certifi cat ECBT8 File number: E169916 Electrical • See each layout page 1 2 4 5 UTS Series Overview Overview UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 13 UTS Series Mechanics Cable assembly ................................................................................................. 14 2 contacts 8E2/8D2: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 20 12E2/12D2: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 24 2 contacts + ground 103: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 28 142G1: 40A 300V ............................................................................................ 32 3 contacts 8E3/8D3: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 36 8E3A/8E98 8D3A/8D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 40 8E33/8D3.: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 44 12E3/12D3: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 48 3 contacts + ground 124 - 12E4/12D4: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 52 183G1: 32A 300V ............................................................................................ 56 4 contacts 8E4/8D4: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 60 102W2: 25A 150V ............................................................................................ 64 104: 13A 150V ............................................................................................ 68 5 contacts 14E5/14D5: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 72 6 contacts 103W3: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 76 106 - 10E6/10D6: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 80 10E98/10D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 84 6 contacts + ground 147 - 14E7: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 88 7 contacts 10E7/10D7: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 92 8 contacts 128: 10A 80V ............................................................................................. 96 12E8/12D8: 6A 32V ............................................................................................. 100 10 contacts 1210 - 12E10/12D10: 6A 50V ............................................................................................. 104 12 contacts 1412: 10A 63V ............................................................................................. 108 14E12/14D12: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 112 14 contacts 12E14/12D14: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 116 15 contacts 14E15/14D15: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 120 18 contacts 14E18/14D18: 5A 50V ............................................................................................. 124 19 contacts 1419 - 14E19/14D19: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 128 23 contacts 1823: 9A 63V ............................................................................................. 132 32 contacts 1832: 4A 32V ............................................................................................. 136 14 © 2011 – SOURIAU OUTDOOR (black outer jacket) INDOOR Cable assembly Souriau provides connectors in various applications for more than 90 years in the most extreme environment. Being conscious about the diffi culty to fi nd a quick and a reliable harness manufacturer, we decided years ago to start in house cable assembly production. It allows customers to reduce the number of suppliers, and to take advantage of the "best in class" quality of the Souriau group. Overmoulding is a process that further enhances the sealing properties of the UTS range, especially over many years of use. Overmoulding provides the opportunity to change the cable exit from straight through 90 degrees and avoid any stress on the cable terminated to the connector. Also, as the wires are encapsulated inside the moulding, a barrier is created which prevents from any liquid from entering the equipment through the connector if the cable jacket is breached. UV resistance Ambient temperature PVC PUR PTFE FEP SILICON TPE 70°C Static installation Static installation Static installation Static installation Static installation Static or dynamic installation Wet Cleaner, Immerged chlorine 90°C 180°C 205°C 260°C Chemical agression How to choose the outer jacket material UTS Series Mechanics © 2011 – SOURIAU 15 Overmolding description Discrete connector Overmoulded connector Compound Thermoplastic insert O ring Overmolding adapter PVC or PUR overmolding ...water ingress unhampered, leading to damage. ...prevents water ingress via capillary action. If cable jacket is breached... If cable jacket is breached... UTS Series Mechanics Mechanics 16 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Mechanics Harnesses Overmoulded harnesses, straight ending Connector type Number of ways Voltage Current UL Current IEC Harmonised cable part number* Part number (length: 1m.) Male Female UTS standard 2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PST100 HAUTS0V142G1SST100 2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PST100 HAUTS0V103SST100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V103PEPST100 HAUTS0V103PESST100 3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PST100 HAUTS0V183G1SST100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPST100 HAUTS0V124PESST100 4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PST100 HAUTS0V104SST100 3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PST100 HAUTS0V103W3SST100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PST100 HAUTS0V106SST100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPST100 HAUTS0V147PESST100 8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PST100 HAUTS0V128SST100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PST100 HAUTS0V1210SST100 12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PST100 HAUTS0V1412SST100 19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PST100 HAUTS0V1419SST100 23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PST100 HAUTS0V1823SST100 32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PST100 HAUTS0V1832SST100 UTS Hi seal 2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PST100 HAUTS0V8E2SST100 2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PST100 HAUTS0V12E2SST100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PST100 HAUTS0V8E3SST100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APST100 HAUTS0V8E3ASST100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PST100 HAUTS0V8E33SST100 3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PST100 HAUTS0V12E3SST100 4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PST100 HAUTS0V8E4SST100 5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PST100 HAUTS0V14E5SST100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PST100 HAUTS0V10E6SST100 6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PST100 HAUTS0V10E98SST100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPST100 HAUTS0V14E7PESST100 7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PST100 HAUTS0V10E7SST100 8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PST100 HAUTS0V12E8SST100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PST100 HAUTS0V12E10SST100 12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PST100 HAUTS0V14E12SST100 14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PST100 HAUTS0V12E14SST100 15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PST100 HAUTS0V14E15SST100 18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PST100 HAUTS0V14E18SST100 19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PST100 HAUTS0V14E19SST100 * see page 18 3 m & 5 m version available on demand Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300 5m HAUTS0V...500 © 2011 – SOURIAU 17 UTS Series Mechanics Harnesses Overmoulded harnesses, right angle ending Connector type Number of ways Voltage Current UL Current IEC Harmonised cable part number* Part number (length: 1m.) Male Female UTS standard 2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PRA100 HAUTS0V142G1SRA100 2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PRA100 HAUTS0V103SRA100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100 3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100 3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPRA100 HAUTS0V124PESRA100 4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PRA100 HAUTS0V104SRA100 3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PRA100 HAUTS0V103W3SRA100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PRA100 HAUTS0V106SRA100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPRA100 HAUTS0V147PESRA100 8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PRA100 HAUTS0V128SRA100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PRA100 HAUTS0V1210SRA100 12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PRA100 HAUTS0V1412SRA100 19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PRA100 HAUTS0V1419SRA100 23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PRA100 HAUTS0V1823SRA100 32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PRA100 HAUTS0V1832SRA100 UTS Hi seal 2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PRA100 HAUTS0V8E2SRA100 2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PRA100 HAUTS0V12E2SRA100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PRA100 HAUTS0V8E3SRA100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APRA100 HAUTS0V8E3ASRA100 3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PRA100 HAUTS0V8E33SRA100 3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PRA100 HAUTS0V12E3SRA100 4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PRA100 HAUTS0V8E4SRA100 5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PRA100 HAUTS0V14E5SRA100 6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PRA100 HAUTS0V10E6SRA100 6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PRA100 HAUTS0V10E98SRA100 6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPRA100 HAUTS0V14E7PESRA100 7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PRA100 HAUTS0V10E7SRA100 8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PRA100 HAUTS0V12E8SRA100 10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PRA100 HAUTS0V12E10SRA100 12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PRA100 HAUTS0V14E12SRA100 14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PRA100 HAUTS0V12E14SRA100 15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PRA100 HAUTS0V14E15SRA100 18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PRA100 HAUTS0V14E18SRA100 19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PRA100 HAUTS0V14E19SRA100 * see page 18 3 m & 5 m version available on demand Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300 5m HAUTS0V...500 Mechanics 18 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Mechanics Standardization of European cable - DIN VDE 0281/DIN VDE 0282/DIN VDE 0292 1. Basic type 2. Working voltage 3. Insulating 4. Sheathcladding material 5. Special features 6. Conductor types 7. Number of conductors 8. Protective conductor 9. Conductor crosssectional H: Harmonized Type 03: 300/300 V. V: PVC V: PVC H: Ribbon cable, separable U: Single wire X: Without protective conductor Area specifi ed in mm2 A: National Type 05: 300/500 V. R: Rubber R: Rubber H2: Ribbon cable non-separable R: Multi-wire G: With protective conductor 07: 450/750 V. S: Silicone Rubber N: Cloroprene Rubber K: Fine wire (permanently installed) J: Glass-fi lament braiding F: Fine wire (fl exible) T: Textile braiding H: Super fi ne wire Y: Tinsel strand 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Harmonized wire coding system Example: Harmonized type, 300/500V, PVC insulating, PVC sheath- cladding, Fine wire, 3x1.5 cross-sectional: H05VVF3x1.5 Cable information Range of temperature: Occasional fl exing: -5°C up to +70°C Fixed installation: -40°C up to +80°C Rated voltage: U0/U: 300/500 V Wire section : Arrangement with #16 contact: wire section 1.5 mm² Arrangement with #20 contact: wire section 0.5 mm² Harmonized reference: H05 VVF XX © 2011 – SOURIAU 19 UTS Series Mechanics Standardization of American cable Nomenclature Key Defi nitions of Cable Types S: Service Grade (also means extra hard service when not followed by J, V, or P) J: Hard Service V: Vacuum cleaner cord (also light duty cable) P: Parallel cord (also known as zip cord) – Always light duty E: Thermoplastic Elastomer (UL/NEC designation ONLY) O: Oil Resistant* T: Thermoplastic W: Outdoor-includes sunlight resistant jacket and wet location rated conductors (formerly "W-A") H: Heater cable VW-1: Flame retardant FT2: Flame retardant SVT: Thermoplastic insulated vacuum cleaner cord, with or without 3rd conductor for grounding purposes; 300V. (PVC) SJT: Junior hard service, thermoplastic insulated conductors and jacket. 300V. (PVC) SJTW: Same as SJT except outdoor rated. (PVC) SJTO: Same as SJT but oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC) SJTOW: Same as SJTO except outdoor rated. (PVC) ST: Hard service cord with all thermoplastic construction, 600V. (PVC) STW: Same as ST except outdoor rated. (PVC) STO: Same as ST but with oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC) STOW: Same as STO except outdoor rated. (PVC) Mechanics 20 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH Layout Specifi cations UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E2P UTS08E2S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E2P UTS68E2S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E2P UTS6JC8E2S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E2P UTS78E2S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D2P UTS08D2S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D2P32 UTS78D2S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and withouthold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D2P UTS78D2S Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 21 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 7.5 7.8 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Plug - UTS6 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 Mated connector length 61.1 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 1.5 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.5 Panel cut out 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Mechanics 2 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 22 © 2011 – SOURIAU Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 UTS 8E2/8D2 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket Current use Limited use Not recommended use © 2011 – SOURIAU 23 UTS Series 8E2/8D2 Mechanics 24 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR Layout UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS012E2P UTS012E2S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS612E2P UTS612E2S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC12E2P UTS6JC12E2S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E2P UTS712E2S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS012D2P UTS012D2S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS712D2P32 UTS712D2S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS712D2P UTS712D2S Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 25 UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 2 contacts 16A/150V per IEC 61984 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 26.4 Ø19 Ø19 20.8 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 7.5 7.8 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 66.7 75.3 81.7 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø30.1 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 2.3 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.3 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 18 18 Ø19 Ø19 Ø19 3.5 3.5 3.5 3 3 3 4.2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Mechanics 26 © 2011 – SOURIAU Metal terminal UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Accessories Metal terminal 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 20 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Electrical characteristics UL 13A 650V UL94 HB CSA 13A 650V UL94 HB IEC 16A 150V 2.5kV 3 UTS 12E2/12D2 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use © 2011 – SOURIAU 27 UTS Series 12E2/12D2 Mechanics 28 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH Layout UTS Series 103 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 31 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103P UTS1JC103S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6103P UTS6103S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103P UTS6JC103S PCB contacts supply separately see page 31 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7103P UTS7103S © 2011 – SOURIAU 29 UTS Series 103 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 2 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Mated connector length - UTS7 77.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 4 18.3 12.3 27.2 22.5 Ø15.1 3.5 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 2.6 2.6 1.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 63.2 25.3 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Mechanics 30 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 103 Accessories and tooling Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Jam nut sealing caps Metal terminal Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES © 2011 – SOURIAU 31 Contacts UTS Series 103 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 16A 300V 4kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 103 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 2 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 32 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 142G1 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 35 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC142G1P UTS1JC142G1S Plug Without (Fig.3) UTS6142G1P UTS6142G1S Cable gland (Fig.4) UTS6JC142G1P UTS6JC142G1S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS7142G1P UTS7142G1S NPT threaded receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS7142G1SNPT Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 33 UTS Series 142G1 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 3 Fig. 4 33 70 25.3 Ø31.5 Ø35.1 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø31.5 Fig. 1 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 2 18 1.6 35.1 30.4 Ø22.3 3.5 Panel cut out Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 Drilling pattern 3.6 3.6 2.1 4.2 NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 5 35.3 25.4 25.4 Ø22.3 23.1 Mechanics 2 + ground 40A/300V per IEC 61984 34 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 142G1 Accessories and tooling Jam nut sealing caps Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Hand tool Part number M317 Positioner + locator setting Part number VGE10078A Extraction tool Part number 51060210936 Plug sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red © 2011 – SOURIAU 35 UL 44A 600V UL94 V-0 CSA 30A 600V UL94 V-0 IEC 40A 300V 4kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 142G1 derating curves Current use Limited use Not recommended use UTS Series 142G1 Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 8.37mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 5 Contacts #8 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) - 6.5 14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) - 12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) - 10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) - 8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 Mechanics 2 + ground 40A/300V per IEC 61984 36 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E3P UTS08E3S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E3P UTS68E3S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E3P UTS6JC8E3S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E3P UTS78E3S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D3P UTS08D3S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D3P32 UTS78D3S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D3P UTS78D3S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 37 UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 3 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Plug - UTS6 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 Mated connector length 61.1 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.6 1.9 0.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Mechanics 38 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS 8E3/8D3 derating curves UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use © 2011 – SOURIAU 39 UTS Series 8E3/8D3 Mechanics 40 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E3AP UTS08E3AS UTS08E98P UTS08E98S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E3AP UTS68E3AS UTS68E98P UTS68E98S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E3AP UTS6JC8E3AS UTS6JC8E98P UTS6JC8E98S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E3AP UTS78E3AS UTS78E98P UTS78E98S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D3AP UTS08D3AS UTS08D98P UTS08D98S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D3AP32 UTS78D3AS32 UTS78D98P32 UTS78D98S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D3AP UTS78D3AS UTS78D98P UTS78D98S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 41 UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3 18 Ø12 3.5 3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.6 1.9 0.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 61.1 Mechanics 3 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 42 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 UTS 8E3A/98 - 8D3A/98 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² © 2011 – SOURIAU 43 UTS Series 8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98 Mechanics 44 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 8E33/8D33 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E33P UTS08E33S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E33P UTS68E33S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E33P UTS6JC8E33S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E33P UTS78E33S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D33P UTS08D33S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D33P32 UTS78D33S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D33P UTS78D33S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 45 UTS Series 8E33/8D33 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 54 61.1 66.6 Fig. 7 UTS7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.6 1.9 0.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Mechanics 3 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 46 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 8E33/8D33 UTS 8E33/8D33 de-rating curves Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 16 2 4 8 © 2011 – SOURIAU 47 UTS Series 8E33/8D33 Mechanics 48 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E3/12D3 OR WITH Specifi cations OR Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E3P UTS012E3S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS612E3P UTS612E3S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E3P UTS6JC12E3S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E3P UTS712E3S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D3P UTS012D3S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS712D3P32 UTS712D3S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS712D3P UTS712D3S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 49 UTS Series 12E3/12D3 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø19 3.5 3 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 2.3 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.3 2.8 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 7 Mechanics 3 contacts 16A/150V per IEC 61984 50 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E3/12D3 Metal terminal Accessories Metal terminal Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Electrical characteristics UL 13A 650V UL94 HB CSA 13A 650V UL94 HB IEC 16A 150V 2.5kV 3 UTS 12E3/12D3 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 20 © 2011 – SOURIAU 51 UTS Series 12E3/12D3 Mechanics 52 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 55 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS0124P Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS7124P UTS7124S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124P UTS1JC124S Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS6124P UTS6124S Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124P UTS6JC124S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS012E4P UTS012E4S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.10) UTS712E4P UTS712E4S Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS612E4P UTS612E4S Plug Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC12E4P UTS6JC12E4S Screw contacts loaded Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7 & 8) UTS7124PSCR UTS7124SSCR Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS6124PSCR UTS6124SSCR Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124PSCR UTS6JC124SSCR Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124PSCR PCB contacts supply separately see page 55 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS0124P Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS7124P UTS7124S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS012D4P UTS012D4S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P UTS712D4S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P32 UTS712D4S32 Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 53 UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Hold down clip Male Female Fig. 6 Fig. 8 Fig. 10 Front view Fig. 5 Fig. 7 Fig. 9 31.9 18 18 18 27.2 Ø19 Ø19 Ø19 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.4 2.4 4.2 3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 11.7 11.7 11.7 Ø19 Ø19 Ø19 20.8 26.4 2.4 2.4 4 2.4 7.5 9.1 7.5 Ø3.2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Front view Fig. 2 Fig. 1 7.5 7.8 Free hanging - UTS1 / Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 74 66.7 Fig. 13 Fig. 11 Fig. 12 Ø30.1 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Front mounting Ø18.3 Ø3.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 3.1 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Mechanics 3 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 54 © 2011 – SOURIAU Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 55 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 16A 300V 4kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C UTS Series 124 - 12E4/12D4 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 20 18 15 13 28 25 23 8 5 3 Contacts Electrical characteristics UTS 124 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 3 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 56 © 2011 – SOURIAU WITH Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 59 NPT threaded receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS7183G1SNPT Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6183G1P Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC183G1P Layout UTS Series 183G1 © 2011 – SOURIAU 57 Dimensions UTS Series 183G1 Note: all dimensions are in mm NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7 17.3 14.5 31.8 NPT - 3/4˝ Ø28.6 Ø19.6 Fig. 1 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 37.5 81.3 Ø42 Ø42 Mated connector length - UTS6JC 90.5 Drilling pattern 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 Mechanics 3 + ground 32A/300V per IEC 61984 58 © 2011 – SOURIAU Accessories and tooling Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red UTS Series 183G1 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Hand tool Part number M317 Positioner + locator setting Part number VGE10078A Extraction tool Part number 51060210936 Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Plug sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG © 2011 – SOURIAU 59 UL 23A 600V UL94 V-0 CSA 23A 600V UL94 V-0 IEC 32A 300V 4kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 183G1 derating curves Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 8.37mm² UTS Series 183G1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Contacts #8 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) - 6.5 14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) - 12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) - 10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) - 8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 Mechanics 3 + ground 32A/300V per IEC 61984 60 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH UTS Series 8E4/8D4 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS08E4P UTS08E4S Plug Without (Fig.6) UTS68E4P UTS68E4S Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E4P UTS6JC8E4S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS78E4P UTS78E4S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS08D4P UTS08D4S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.5) UTS78D4P32 UTS78D4S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS78D4P UTS78D4S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 61 UTS Series 8E4/8D4 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 24.2 24.2 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 18 4.2 Ø12 3.5 3.4 18 Ø12 3.5 3.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front view 11.7 11.7 20.7 Ø12 Ø12 15.3 2.4 2.4 Ø3.2 7.5 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 7.5 7.8 Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length 25.3 54 Fig. 7 Fig. 6 Ø22.5 61.1 66.6 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 15.3 15.3 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 13.7 14.6 1.4 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø12.5 Rear mounting Ø14.5 Mechanics 4 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 62 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 8E4/8D4 UTS 8E4/8D4 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal IP40 Part number UTS8DCGE Part number UTS68C Metal terminal Part number UTS8DCG Part number UTS8DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005585A 85005594 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD11B Gasket UL 7A 250V UL94 HB CSA 7A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 63 UTS Series 8E4/8D4 Mechanics 64 © 2011 – SOURIAU WITH UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 67 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC102W2P UTS1JC102W2S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6102W2P UTS6102W2S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC102W2P UTS6JC102W2S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7102W2P UTS7102W2S Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 65 UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3 33 63.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 3 3 3 3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7 Fig. 4 18.3 27.2 22.5 Ø15.1 3.5 2.4 77.3 Mechanics 4 contacts 25A/150V per IEC 61984 66 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Accessories and tooling Crimp tooling #20 Crimp tooling #12 Part number TOOLKIT Part number extraction tool 51060210924 (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 148 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Part number SHANDLES Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Part number positioner + locator setting VGE10078A Part number hand tool M317 © 2011 – SOURIAU 67 UTS Series 102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20) Contacts #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max insulator Ø Male Female Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 1) E l f l ti f th l ti #12 Crimp Machined 22 82911457NA 82911456A 4.9 20 82911459NA 82911458A 18 82911461NA 82911460A 16 82911463NA 82911462A 14 82911465NA 82911464A 12 82911467NA 82911466A UL 20A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 18A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 25A 150V 2.5kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 102W2 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Mechanics 4 contacts 25A/150V per IEC 61984 68 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 104 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contact supply separately see next page 71 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS0104P UTS0104S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.2) UTS1GJC104P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN104P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC104P UTS1JC104S Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6104P UTS6104S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.5) UTS6GJC104S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN104S Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC104P UTS6JC104S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS7104P UTS7104S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GJC104P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN104P Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 69 UTS Series 104 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 11.5 70 40.9 Ø15.1 Ø15.1 20.8 24 2.4 10.5 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view Fig. 3 Fig. 2 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 33 63.2 32.5 25.3 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 3 3 3 3 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length Fig. 7 Fig. 9 Fig. 8 18.3 18.3 41 70.7 Ø15.1 Ø15.1 3.5 3.5 2.4 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 Mechanics 4 contacts 13A/150V per IEC 61984 70 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 104 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 71 UTS Series 104 Contacts UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 13A 150V 2.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 104 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 4 contacts 13A/150V per IEC 61984 72 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E5/14D5 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E5P UTS014E5S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E5P UTS614E5S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E5P UTS6JC14E5S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E5P UTS714E5S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014D5P UTS014D5S Jam nut receptacle with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D5P32 UTS714D5S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D5P UTS714D5S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 73 UTS Series 14E5/14D5 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Mated connector length 75 82 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Fig. 6 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 7.8 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 4 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.3 3.7 0.6 2.5 22° Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mechanics 5 contacts 16A/150V per IEC 61984 74 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E5/14D5 UTS 14E5/14D5 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 12A 650V UL94 HB CSA 12A 650V UL94 HB IEC 16A 150V 2.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red © 2011 – SOURIAU 75 UTS Series 14E5/14D5 Mechanics 76 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 79 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103W3P UTS1JC103W3S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6103W3P UTS6103W3S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103W3P UTS6JC103W3S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S PCB contacts supply separately see page 79 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S OR WITH OR Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 77 UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3 33 63.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7 Fig. 4 18.3 27.2 22.5 Ø15.1 3.5 2.4 77.3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 3 2.5 2.5 0.7 0.8 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Mechanics 6 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 78 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) Accessories and tooling Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RCM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RCM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RCM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contac © 2011 – SOURIAU 79 UTS Series 103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20) UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 5A 32V 1.5kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 103W3 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) Contacts 120 (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - plating L SM20ML1 #20 Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - Mechanics 6 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 80 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Specifi cations OR OR WITH OR Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 83 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC106P UTS1JC106S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6106P UTS6106S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC106P UTS6JC106S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.9) UTS010E6P UTS010E6S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS610E6P UTS610E6S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC10E6P UTS6JC10E6S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS710E6P UTS710E6S PCB contacts supply separately see page 83 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS010D6P UTS010D6S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.6) UTS710D6P32 UTS710D6S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.7) UTS710D6P UTS710D6S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 81 UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 6 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 Free hanging - UTS1 70 Ø15.1 Fig. 1 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 63.2 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 22.5 27.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 12.3 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 4 4.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 2.8 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 3.3 1.6 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Fig. 9 Fig. 8 11.7 Ø15.1 2.3 16.2 20.8 24 Ø3.2 Front view Mated connector length 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 7.5 Mechanics 82 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 83 UTS Series 106 - 10E6/10D6 Contacts #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 IEC 7A 32V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 106 - 10E6/10D6 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) UTS 106 UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 UTS 10E6/10D6 UL 6A 250V UL94 HB CSA 6A 250V UL94 HB Mechanics 6 contacts 7A/32V per IEC 61984 84 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS010E98P UTS010E98S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS610E98P UTS610E98S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E98P UTS6JC10E98S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS710E98P UTS710E98S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS010D98P UTS010D98S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS710D98P32 UTS710D98S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS710D98P UTS710D98S Layout UTS Series 10E98/10D98 Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 85 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm UTS Series 10E98/10D98 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 18.3 Ø15.1 2.3 16.2 20.8 24 Ø3.2 Front view 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 3.3 1.6 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 Ø4 2.8 3.3 Panel cut out 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 22.4 27.2 18.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 Ø15.1 7.5 30° Ø3.1 68° 22° Mechanics 6 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 86 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 10E98/10D98 UTS 10E98/10D98 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug protective cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket UL 6A 250V UL94 HB CSA 6A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 87 UTS Series 10E98/10D98 Mechanics 88 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR OR OR UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 91 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS0147P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GJC147P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.4) UTS1GN147P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147P UTS1JC147S Plug Without (Fig.5) UTS6147P UTS6147S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GJC147S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.7) UTS6GN147S Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147P UTS6JC147S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147P UTS7147S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.10) UTS7GJC147P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN147P Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS014E7P UTS014E7S Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC14E7P UTS6JC14E7S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.11) UTS714E7P UTS714E7S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS014D7P UTS014D7S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and hold down clips Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P32 UTS714D7S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P UTS714D7S Jam nut receptacle With stand off and hold down clip (Fig.11) UTS7147PSEK9 Screw contacts loaded Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147PSCR UTS7147SSCR Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147PSCR Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147PSCR UTS6JC147SSCR Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 89 UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 33 70 32 23.5 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 11 Fig. 10 Fig. 8 Fig. 9 18 18 49 70.7 Ø31.8 Ø22.3 3.5 3.5 1.6 4.2 3 Mated connector length 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 6.4 3.2 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 Ø4 Ø3.1 5.2 Panel cut out 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 11.3 Ø22.3 23.2 28.8 2.3 29.1 22 Ø3.2 Fig. 2 Front view Fig. 1 78.5 43 Ø22.3 Fig. 4 Fig. 3 Mechanics 6 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 90 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 91 Contacts #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 UTS Series 147 - 14E7/14D7 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 16A 300V 4kV 3 Temperature elevation: 50°C Electrical characteristics UTS 147 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 5 3 8 10 20 18 15 13 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 6 + ground 16A/300V per IEC 61984 Mechanics 92 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 10E7/10D7 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS010E7P UTS010E7S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS610E7P UTS610E7S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E7P UTS6JC10E7S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS710E7P UTS710E7S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS010D7P UTS010D7S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS710D7P32 UTS710D7S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS710D7P UTS710D7S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 93 UTS Series 10E7/10D7 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø26.2 Ø26.2 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 22.4 27.2 18.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 18.3 Ø15.1 3.5 3 Ø15.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø15.1 2.3 16.2 7.5 20.8 24 Ø3.2 Front view Mated connector length 70.9 77.3 UTS7 UTS0 Drilling pattern 2.8 Ø13.5 Ø22 Ø17.7 15° 15° Ø4 Ø3.1 3.3 1.6 Panel cut out 18.5 18.5 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 16.7 17.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø15.2 Rear mounting Ø17.9 Mechanics 7 contacts 7A/50V per IEC 61984 94 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 10E7/10D7 UTS 10E7/10D7 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS610DCG Part number UTS10DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS10DCG Part number UTS10DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005586A 85005595 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD12B Gasket UL 6A 250V UL94 HB CSA 6A 250V UL94 HB IEC 7A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 6 10 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 12 14 2 4 8 © 2011 – SOURIAU 95 UTS Series 10E7/10D7 Mechanics 96 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 128 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 99 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS0128P UTS0128S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.2) UTS1GJC128P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN128P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC128P UTS1JC128S Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6128P UTS6128S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.5) UTS6GJC128S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN128S Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC128P UTS6JC128S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7128P UTS7128S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.10) UTS7GJC128P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN128P PCB contacts loaded Jam nut receptacle With stand off and hold down clip (Fig.11) UTS7128PSEK9 Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 97 UTS Series 128 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 11.7 Ø19.1 20.8 26.4 2.3 10.5 18.1 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view 74.5 40.9 Ø19.1 Fig. 3 Fig. 2 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 33 65.7 33 25.3 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 Drilling pattern 4.4 3.4 2 4.5 4 2.8 0.9 Panel cut out 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Mated connector length 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Fig. 11 Fig. 10 Fig. 8 Fig. 9 18 18 49.1 74.5 Ø19.1 Ø19.1 3.5 3.5 1.6 4.2 3 Mechanics 8 contacts 10A/80V per IEC 61984 98 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 128 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 99 UTS Series 128 Contacts UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 10A 80V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 128 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 8 contacts 10A/80V per IEC 61984 100 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 12E8/12D8 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E8P UTS012E8S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS612E8P UTS612E8S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E8P UTS6JC12E8S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E8P UTS712E8S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D8P UTS012D8S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS712D8P32 UTS712D8S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS712D8P UTS712D8S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 101 UTS Series 12E8/12D8 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø19 3.5 3 18 Ø19 3.5 3.1 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 4.3 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 3 1.6 3 4.3 1.1 3.9 22° Mechanics 8 contacts 6A/32V per IEC 61984 102 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E8/12D8 UTS 12E8/12D8 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB IEC 6A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 103 UTS Series 12E8/12D8 Mechanics 104 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page107 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1210P UTS1JC1210S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61210P UTS61210S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1210P UTS6JC1210S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71210P UTS71210S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E10P UTS012E10S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS612E10P UTS612E10S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC12E10P UTS6JC12E10S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS712E10P UTS712E10S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D10P UTS012D10S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.6) UTS712D10P32 UTS712D10S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.7) UTS712D10P UTS712D10S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 105 UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6 74 Ø19.1 Fig. 1 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19.1 3.5 3 12.3 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 4 4.2 18 Ø19.1 3.5 3 18 Ø19.1 3.5 3.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19.1 2.3 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 3.3 1.6 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 22° 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 4.9 3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Mechanics 10 contacts 6A/50V per IEC 61984 106 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 107 UTS Series 1210 - 12E10/12D10 Contacts IEC 6A 50V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1210 - 12E10/12D10 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use UTS 1210 UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 UTS 12E10/12D10 UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 10 contacts 6A/50V per IEC 61984 108 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR OR WITH OR Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 111 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.2) UTS1GJC1412P Free hanging receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN1412P Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1412P UTS1JC1412S Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS61412P UTS61412S Plug Cable gland and grommet (Fig.5) UTS6GJC1412S Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN1412S Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC1412P UTS6JC1412S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S Jam nut receptacle Cable gland and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GJC1412P Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN1412P PCB contacts supply separately see page 111 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S Layout UTS Series 1412 © 2011 – SOURIAU 109 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm UTS Series 1412 Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 33 70 32 25.3 Ø31.5 Ø31.5 Ø31.5 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length Fig. 7 Fig. 9 Fig. 8 18 18 49 70.7 Ø22.3 Ø22.3 3.5 3.5 1.6 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 2.2 0.7 3.8 5.8 5.1 2 1.4 1 2.2 4.5 5.9 1 0.3 2.9 5.5 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 78.5 43 Ø22.3 Fig. 3 11.3 Fig. 2 Ø22.3 23.2 28.8 2.3 10.5 21.9 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view Female Male Mechanics 12 contacts 10A/63V per IEC 61984 110 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1412 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 111 UTS Series 1412 Contacts UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 10A 63V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1412 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 12 contacts 10A/63V per IEC 61984 112 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E12P UTS014E12S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E12P UTS614E12S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E12P UTS6JC14E12S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E12P UTS714E12S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014D12P UTS014D12S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D12P32 UTS714D12S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D12P UTS714D12S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 113 UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 7.8 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Fig. 6 Front view 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 23.2 Panel cut out 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Drilling pattern 4.5 4.1 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 Ø30.5 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 1.6 4.5 2.3 6.7 22° 1 Mechanics 12 contacts 4A/50V per IEC 61984 114 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) UTS 14E12/14D12 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB IEC 4A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 12 14 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 115 UTS Series 14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20) Mechanics 116 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 12E14/12D14 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS012E14P UTS012E14S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS612E14P UTS612E14S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E14P UTS6JC12E14S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS712E14P UTS712E14S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS012D14P UTS012D14S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS712D14P32 UTS712D14S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS712D14P UTS712D14S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 117 UTS Series 12E14/12D14 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm 14 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 27.2 31.9 18 Ø19 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø19 3.5 3 18 Ø19 3.5 3.1 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 66.7 Ø30.1 Ø30.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.7 Ø19 2.4 7.5 7.8 20.8 26.4 Ø3.2 Front view 75.3 81.7 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 20.8 20.8 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 21.4 22.7 4.4 Ø22 Ø30.5 Ø26.2 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 2.7 2 4.7 3.8 1.8 1.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø18.3 Rear mounting Ø22.3 Mechanics 118 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 12E14/12D14 UTS 12E14/12D14 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS612DCG Part number UTS12DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS12DCG Part number UTS12DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005587A 85005596 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD13B Gasket UL 4.5A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4.5A 250V UL94 HB IEC 5A 32V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 4 2 6 8 10 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) © 2011 – SOURIAU 119 UTS Series 12E14/12D14 Mechanics 120 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E15/14D15 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E15P UTS014E15S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E15P UTS614E15S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E15P UTS6JC14E15S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E15P UTS714E15S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS014D15P UTS014D15S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D15P32 UTS714D15S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D15P UTS714D15S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 121 UTS Series 14E15/14D15 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view 7.8 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 30° 68° 22° 3.2 5.5 2.5 2.7 6.1 5.1 5.3 6.2 2.8 0.3 5.7 1.9 1 3.5 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Mechanics 15 contacts 4A/50V per IEC 61984 122 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E15/14D15 UTS 14E15/14D15 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 12A 650V UL94 HB CSA 12A 650V UL94 HB IEC 4A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 0 5 3 8 10 20 18 15 13 23 25 28 30 © 2011 – SOURIAU 123 UTS Series 14E15/14D15 Mechanics 124 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 14E18/14D18 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.6) UTS014E18P UTS014E18S Plug Without (Fig.1) UTS614E18P UTS614E18S Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E18P UTS6JC14E18S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.3) UTS714E18P UTS714E18S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.7) UTS014D18P UTS014D18S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.4) UTS714D18P32 UTS714D18S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.5) UTS714D18P UTS714D18S Layout Sealed unmated © 2011 – SOURIAU 125 UTS Series 14E18/14D18 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Plug - UTS6 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 6 Fig. 7 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view 7.8 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 1.6 3.3 6.1 Ø22 Ø26.2 Ø30.5 22° 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 4.9 2.8 5.7 6.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Mechanics 18 contacts 5A/50V per IEC 61984 126 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 14E18/14D18 UTS 14E18/14D18 derating curves Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Accessories Electrical characteristics Metal terminal Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Metal terminal Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket UL 4A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4A 250V UL94 HB IEC 5A 50V 1.5kV 3 Current use Limited use Not recommended use Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Color coding rings * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 0 6 4 2 8 10 © 2011 – SOURIAU 127 UTS Series 14E18/14D18 Mechanics 128 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR WITH OR UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 131 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1419P UTS1JC1419S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61419P UTS61419S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1419P UTS6JC1419S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S PCB contacts supply separately see page 131 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S Handsolder electrical contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS014E19P UTS014E19S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS614E19P UTS614E19S Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC14E19P UTS6JC14E19S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS714E19P UTS714E19S PCB contacts loaded Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.9) UTS014D19P UTS014D19S Jam nut receptacle with stand off and with hold down clips Without (Fig.6) UTS714D19P32 UTS714D19S32 Jam nut receptacle with stand off and without hold down clip Without (Fig.7) UTS714D19P UTS714D19S Layout Sealed unmated Square fl ange receptacle © 2011 – SOURIAU 129 UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length Fig. 8 Fig. 9 11.3 Ø22.3 2.3 7.5 78 23.2 28.8 Ø3.2 Front view 75 82 UTS7 UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6 78.5 Ø22.3 Fig. 1 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 70 Ø35.1 Ø35.1 25.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Front view 30.4 35.1 18 3.5 3 12.3 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 4 4.2 18 Ø22.3 3.5 3 18 Ø22.3 Ø22.3 3.5 3 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 23.2 23.2 Ø3.3 1.6 4.9 Ø22 Ø26.2 Ø30.5 30° 68° 10 Ø3.1 3.3 6.6 2.8 5.7 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22° Front mounting Ø21.5 Rear mounting Ø25.1 Mechanics 19 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 130 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Metal terminal * Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red G for Green Y for Yellow R for Red Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS14DCG Part number UTS14DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS614DCG Part number UTS14DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 85005588A 85005597 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD14B Gasket Color coding rings Part numbers Receptacles Plugs UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 131 UTS Series 1419 - 14E19/14D19 Contacts IEC 5A 32V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1419 - 14E19/14D19 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use UTS 1419 UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 UTS 14E19/14D19 UL 4A 250V UL94 HB CSA 4A 250V UL94 HB 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 19 contacts 5A/32V per IEC 61984 132 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR OR OR WITH UTS Series 1823 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contacts supply separately see page 135 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1823P UTS1JC1823S Plug Without (Fig.3) UTS61823P UTS61823S Plug Cable gland (Fig.4) UTS6JC1823P UTS6JC1823S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S PCB contacts supply separately see page 135 Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 133 UTS Series 1823 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 3 Fig. 4 33 81.3 25.3 Ø42 Ø42 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1 89 Ø28.6 Fig. 2 11.3 Ø28.6 27.1 33.5 2.5 10.3 18.9 Ø3.2 Fig. 1 Front view Female Male Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length Front view 41.5 36.9 Fig. 5 18 12.3 Ø28.6 3.5 84.1 90.8 UTS7 UTS0 Panel cut out 27.1 27.1 Ø3.3 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 Drilling pattern 3.5 5 8.3 3.7 6.7 3.4 4.8 1.9 8.6 7.7 5.4 Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Front mounting Ø27.9 Rear mounting Ø31.9 Mechanics 23 contacts 9A/63V per IEC 61984 134 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1823 Accessories and tooling (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 Metal terminal Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 28M1K(1) Standard contacts #16 Ø 1.6mm S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20 RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14 SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20 SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1 SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11 RMDXK10D28K Coaxial contacts M10S-1J RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J RM/RC DXK10D28 + york090 M10S-1J RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS18DCG Part number UTS18DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS618DCG Part number UTS18DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 8500-5590A 8500-5599 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD16B Gasket Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 135 UTS Series 1823 Contacts 120 UL 10A 500V UL94 V-0 CSA 7A 500V UL94 V-0 IEC 9A 63V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1823 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 1.31mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23 25 28 30 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #16 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1 26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6 22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8 22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2 20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2 16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2 16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2 Stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 - 22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 - 18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 - 18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 - 14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 - PCB Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - - Coaxial Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - - Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 + york090 RCDXK1D28 + york090 - - Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - - Fiber optic POF contacts Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 23 contacts 9A/63V per IEC 61984 136 © 2011 – SOURIAU OR WITH OR UTS Series 1832 Specifi cations Contact type Connector type Backshell Part number Male insert Female insert Crimp contact supply separately see page 139 Free hanging receptacle Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1832P UTS1JC1832S Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61832P UTS61832S Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1832P UTS6JC1832S Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S PCB contacts supply separately see page 139 Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S Layout © 2011 – SOURIAU 137 UTS Series 1832 Dimensions Note: all dimensions are in mm Plug - UTS6 Female Male Fig. 2 Fig. 3 33 81.3 25.3 Ø42 Ø42 Free hanging - UTS1 89 Ø28.6 Fig. 1 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7 90.8 Front view 41.5 36.9 18 12.3 Ø28.6 3.5 Fig. 4 Panel cut out Drilling pattern Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 24.5 25.9 1.6 4.4 5.7 8.1 2.4 3.1 5.3 3.3 6.1 9.7 4.8 7.2 8.7 0.8 2.4 3.8 5.6 9.1 4.9 5.8 2.4 5.5 7.7 8.9 4 6.7 8.5 Mechanics 32 contacts 4A/32V per IEC 61984 138 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series 1832 Metal terminal Crimp tooling Contacts Contact size Part number of head RM/RC 24W3K(1) Standard contacts #20 Ø 1mm S20RM RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20 SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20 Jam nut sealing caps Part number UTS18DCG Part number UTS18DCGR Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap Part number UTS618DCG Part number UTS18DCGE Part numbers Receptacle cap Plug cap 8500-5590A 8500-5599 Plastic protective cap Part numbers / neoprene UTFD16B Gasket Handle Tool kit Part number TOOLKIT Part number SHANDLES (1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143 (2): contact reeled (3): loose contact Accessories and tooling Metal terminal © 2011 – SOURIAU 139 UTS Series 1832 Contacts UL 5A 250V UL94 V-0 CSA 4A 250V UL94 V-0 IEC 4A 32V 1.5kV 3 Electrical characteristics UTS 1832 derating curves Test conditions Contact used: Machined contacts Wires used: 0.518mm² Current use Limited use Not recommended use 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 Current (A) Ambient Operating Temperature (°C) 120 #20 Contact type AWG Part number Max wire Ø Max Male Female insulator Ø Crimp Machined 26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58 22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58 20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1 stamped & formed reeled contacts 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08 PCB Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - - (1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148 Mechanics 32 contacts 4A/32V per IEC 61984 UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 141 Contacts UTS Series Description ....................................................................................................................................... 142 Contact plating selector guide ................................................................................................... 143 Contact selector guide ................................................................................................................. 144 Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 144 Crimp contacts ................................................................................................................................ 145 #16 coaxial contacts .................................................................................................................... 147 PCB contacts ................................................................................................................................... 148 Fibre optic contacts ....................................................................................................................... 149 142 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Contacts Contacts Description The UTS series is delivered with (solder and PCB versions) or without contact (crimp version). When contacts are not loaded, this series offers the unique possibility to use the same contact in any layout as long as it receives the same active part size. Thus it is possible to buy only one contact reference and equip all connectors even if housings are different. The main benefit is the standardisation which means reduction of inventory cost. Bearing in mind that any additional tool or complicated assembly process should be avoided, our contacts are based on a snap-in principle which avoid the use of an insertion tool. Crimp contacts are available in different versions: In addition, UTS series can obviously be equipped with solder contacts, PCB contacts, screw termination. • machined • stamped & formed • coaxial • fiber optic © 2011 – SOURIAU 143 UTS Series Contacts Contact plating selector guide As soon as you know what contact size you need, you next have to decide on which type to use. Souriau proposes mainly two different types of electrical contacts: - Machined - Stamped & formed Machined contacts are generally chosen for low quantities purpose as well as a better solution for power applications. Stamped & formed contacts offer the ability to be crimped automatically which makes them more suitable for high volume production applications. Then comes the question: What plating should I choose ? Hereunder is a graph with criteria to guide you: NB: do not mix different plating (e.g. tin plated pin contact with gold plated socket contact). 250 100 0.4μm of gold min Gold fl ash Silver Tin 5mA 5mV Contact size #20 #12 #16 #8 Vibration Number of cycles Current / Voltage Contacts 144 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Contacts Electrical characteristics: contact resistance #20 Ø1mm Machined < 6m Stamped & formed < 15m #16 Ø1.6mm Machined < 3m Stamped & formed < 6m #12 Ø2.4mm Machined < 5m #8 Ø3.6mm Machined < 5m Available platings (contact supply separately) A 2μ Ni + 2μ Ag J Gold fl ash over 2μ Ni K Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni S31 Active part: Gold fl ash over Ni Crimp area: Nickel S18 Active part: 0.75μ gold min over 2μ Ni Crimp area: 1.3μ tin over Ni Other: Nickel S25 S26 Active part: 0.75μ Au over Ni Crimp area: fl ash Au over Ni TK6 2-5μ Sn pre-plated Conscious of the wide variety of applications, contact packaging has been considered for small series (bulk packaging) and high volume production (reeled contacts): Size contacts #20 & #16 • 100 pieces bulk packing (stamped & formed contacts) Electrical characteristics: contact resistance #20 Ø1mm Machined < 4m #16 Ø1.6mm Machined < 3m Available platings (contact preloaded) Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni Contact preloaded Contact supply separately • 50 pieces bulk packing (machined contacts) • 25 pieces bulk packing (stamped & formed contacts) • 1000 pieces bulk packing (machined contacts) • 5000 pieces reeled (machined contacts) • 3000 pieces reeled (stamped & formed contacts) Size contacts #12 & #8 Contact selector guide Packaging © 2011 – SOURIAU 145 UTS Series Contacts Crimp contacts (1) contact reeled (2) loose contact Exemple: RM24W3K - Size #20, Machined, AWG24 wire. Contact size Type Wire size Part number Max wire Ø Max insulator Ø Plating AWG mm² Male Female available #20 Ø1 mm Machined 26-24 0.13-0.20 RM24W3K RC24W3K 1.58 max K Stamped & Formed 26-24 0.13-0.25 SM24W3-(1) SC24W3-(1) 0.89-1.58 TK6 S25 (female) SM24WL3-(2) SC24WL3-(2) S26 (male) Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20W3K RC20W3K 1.58 max K Stamped & Formed 22-20 0.35-0.5 SM20W3-(1) SC20W3-(1) 1.17-2.08 TK6 S25 (female) SM20WL3-(2) SC20WL3-(2) S26 (male) Machined 20-18 0.50-0.93 RM18W3K RC18W3K 2.10 max K #16 Ø1.6 mm Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1- RC28M1- 0.55 1.1 K, J Machined 26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9- RC24M9- 0.8 1.6 K, J Stamped & Formed 26-24 0.13-0.25 SM24M1-(1) SM24ML1-(2) SC24M1-(1) SC24ML1-(2) 0.89-1.28 Insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20M13- RC20M13- 1.18 1.8 K, J RM20M12- RC20M12- 2.2 Stamped & Formed 22-20 0.35-0.5 SM20M1-(1) SM20ML1-(2) SC20M1-(1) SC20ML1-(2) 1.17-2.08 Insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Machined 20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23- RC16M23- 1.8 3.2 K, J Stamped & Formed 18-16 0.8-1.5 SM16M1-(1) SM16ML1-(2) SC16M1-(1) SC16ML1-(2) 3.0 No insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Stamped & Formed 18-16 0.8-1.5 SM16M11-(1) SM16ML11-(2) SC16M11-(1) SC16ML11-(2) 2.0-3.0 Insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50- RC14M50- 2.05 3.2 K, J Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30- RC14M30- 2.28 3.2 K, J Stamped & Formed 14 2.0-2.5 SM14M1-(1) SM14ML1-(2) SC14M1-(1) SC14ML1-(2) 3.2 No insulation grip S31, S18, TK6 #12 Ø2.4 mm Machined 22 0.13-0.4 82911457NA 82911456A - 4.9 A, K 20 0.5 82911459NA 82911458A 18 0.75-1.0 82911461NA 82911460A 16 1.5 82911463NA 82911462A 14 2.5 82911465NA 82911464A 12 4 82911467NA 82911466A #8 Ø3.6 mm Machined 16 1.5 82913601A 82913600A - 6.5 A 14 2.5 82913603A 82913602A 12 4 82913605A 82913604A 10 6.0 82913607A 82913606A 8 10.0 82913609A 82913608A Standard version Contacts 146 © 2011 – SOURIAU Contact 1 Contact 2 Standard male contact Standard female contact Longer male contact Standard male contact Standard female contact FMLB Shorter female contact LMFB UTS Series Contacts Crimp contacts Exemple: RM16M3GE1K - Size #16, Machined, Longer male, AWG16 wire. First Mate Last Break contacts should be chosen only if the cavity is not marked with the earth symbol. For cavities marked with the earth symbol, standard contacts will fulfi ll the same role as a fi rst mate, last break contact used in a standard cavity. Ground symbol How to make FMLB / LMFB connection First Mate Last Break contacts Contact size Type Wire size Part number Max wire Ø Max insulator Ø Color band Plating available AWG mm² Male Female Front Rear #16 Ø1.6 mm Longer male contact (+1mm) Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1GE1□ - 0.55 1.1 - Red □ = K, J 26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9GE1□ 0.8 1.6 Red Red 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20M13GE1□ 1.18 1.8 Black Red RM20M12GE1□ 2.2 Blue Red 20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23GE1□ 1.8 3.2 - Red 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50GE1□ 2.05 - - Red 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30GE1□ 2.28 - - Red #16 Ø1.6 mm Shorter female contact (-0.7mm) Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 - RC28M1GE7□ 0.55 1.1 - Blue □ = K, J 26-24 0.13-0.2 RC24M9GE7□ 0.8 1.6 Red Blue 22-20 0.32-0.52 RC20M13GE7□ 1.18 1.8 Black Blue RC20M12GE7□ 2.2 Blue Blue 20-16 0.52-1.5 RC16M23GE7□ 1.8 3.2 - Blue 16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M50GE7□ 2.05 - - Blue 16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M30GE7□ 2.28 - - Blue ont Re © 2011 – SOURIAU 147 UTS Series Contacts #16 coaxial contacts We provide 2 types of coaxial contacts suitable for 50 or 75, coaxial cable or twisted pair cable. Monocrimp coaxial contact • The monocrimp one-piece coaxial contacts offer high reliability plus the economic advantage of a 95% reduction in installation time over conventional assembly methods. • This economy is achieved by simultaneously crimping both the inner conductor and outer braid or drain wire. Multipiece crimp coaxial contact • The inner conductor and outer braid is crimped individually. • The thermoplastic insulating bushing in the outer body is designed to accept and permanently retain the inner contact. • An outer ferrule is used to connect the braid to the outer contact and provide cable support to ensure against bending and vibration. Suitable for Coaxial cable or Twisted cable • For jacket diameter from 1.78 to 3.05mm Inner conductor up to 2.44mm diameter • For jacket diameter from 0.64 to 1.45mm Inner conductor from AWG30 to AWG24 Contacts for coaxial cable summary Contact type Contact range Contact part number with cable combination Cabling notice Male contact Female contact Multipiece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 See page 176 See pages 180 & 181 Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 182 Contacts for twisted pairs cable summary Contact type Contact range Contact part number with cable combination Cabling notice Male contact Female contact Multipiece RMDXK10D28 + YORK090 RCDXK1D28 + YORK090 See page 177 See page 178 Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 179 Coaxial contact range Contacts 148 © 2011 – SOURIAU PCB contacts PCB contacts PCB soldering UTS range can be carried out with a wave soldering process, but not refl ow soldering process. All high temperature processes are prohibited. Nominal length (G) Dimension of dipsolder contacts out of connector (contacts to be ordered separately). Contact size Type Part number Plating Male Female #20 Ø1mm Short version RMW50A7K RCW50A7K K Long version RMW5016K RCW5016K #16 Ø1.6mm Short version RM20M12E8K RC20M12E8K K Long version RM20M12E83K RC20M12E83K RC20M12E84K Exemple: RM50A7K - Size #20, Short version, male. UTS Series Contacts G * Plating indication: see plating table Connector size Pin contact Socket contact RM20M12E8*□ RM20M12E83*□ RC20M12E8*□ RC20M12E83*□ RC20M12E84*□ 10 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 12 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 14 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 16 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1 Connector size Pin contact Socket contact RM20M 12E8*□ RM20M 12E83*□ RMW 50A7K RMW 5016K RC20M 12E8*□ RC20M 12E83*□ RCW 50A7K RCW 5016K 10 4.1 9.2 9.51 10.41 4.65 8.5 2.4 3.04 12 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04 14 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04 16 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04 UTS0 UTS7 © 2011 – SOURIAU 149 Fibre optic contacts Size 16 Fibre optic contacts for TRIM TRIO® connectors Size 16 Fibre optic contacts are optical contacts designed for the integration of optical links in all TRIM TRIO® cable connectors. The Fibre optic contacts are designed to accommodate: • Plastic Optical Fibre (POF) 1 mm core and 2.2 mm jacket • Plastic Clad Fibre (PCF) 230μm core and 2.2 mm jacket Typical features and benefits are: • Socket contact is spring loaded to avoid any air gap between the two optical faces. • Low insertion loss is provided by high precision pieces. • Single jumpers, multiway harness and active device housings can be supplied regarding customer requirement. Performance • Fibre type: ................................................................................................................................POF • Wave length: ........................................................................................................................650 nm • Optical insertion loss (typ.): ..........................................................................................2 dB max. • Jacketed external diameter: ............................................................................................2.2mm • Temperature range: ....................................................................................................-25°C to +70°C • Cable retention: ..................................................................................................................... 49N • Mating cycles without cleaning: .........................................................................................50 • Max. mating cycles: ...............................................................................................................500 Construction • Contact body: Copper alloy Connector accommodation Any TRIM TRIO® size 16 contact can be used in any contact position in any connector in the TRIM TRIO® size 16 interconnection system : UTP, UTS, UTG, UTO. UTS Series Contacts Description Technical characteristics Contacts 150 © 2011 – SOURIAU Fibre optic contacts UTS Series Contacts POF Contact (Plastic Optical Fibre) Ordering information Part numbers Descriptions 80WD0005 Stripping tool 80WD0025 Automatic stripping tool for Ø 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm & 3.8 mm 80WM0006 Ruler 80WP0005 Polishing plate 80WP0013 Non slip base (to hold the polishing plate) 80WP0014 Polishing disk (grain size 9μm) 80WP0018 Polishing tool 80WP0019 Polishing disk (grain size 30μm) 80WS0002 Crimping plier STANDARD TOOLING KIT - P/N 80MS0004 The standard tooling kit is made of the part numbers below that can be ordered separately as well. Part numbers Descriptions 80WG0010 Needle 80WG0015 Capsule 80WG0016 Syringe 80WN0005 Dry air spray 80WN0006 Optical paper 80WN0012 Dropping bottle 80WN0008 Wiping solvent SPECIFIC TOOLING LIST - can be ordered only separately POF Contacts (Plastic Optical Fibre) Male contact ................................................RMPOF1000 Female contact ......................................... RCPOF1000B © 2011 – SOURIAU 151 UTS Series Contacts Contacts UTS Series © 2011 – SOURIAU 153 Technical information UTS Series Tooling ............................................................................................................................................... 154 Assembly intruction ....................................................................................................................... 156 Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ...................................................................................... 162 Extraction tools ............................................................................................................................... 162 Rated current & working voltage ............................................................................................... 163 UV resistance .................................................................................................................................. 164 UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................................................................................. 165 IEC 61984 & IP codes explained ............................................................................................. 168 What is NEMA rating ? ................................................................................................................. 170 Ethernet for the layman ................................................................................................................ 171 154 © 2011 – SOURIAU UTS Series Technical information Souriau has been working in partnership with Mecal for a good number of years. With sales offi ces located in all major industrial regions of the world, the combined strengths of both organisations has resulted in a truly global solution to all your production tooling needs. Mecal sales network: Mecal is leader in manufacturing tooling for crimping terminals over a stripped wire. Established in 1976, Mecal has become one of the world's leading companies dedicated to the design and manufacture of semi automatic production tools for strip fed, open barrel crimp terminals, serving the Automotive, Telecom and Datacomm industry. The extreme environment interconnect specialist “from deep sea to deep space”. Souriau designs manufactures and markets high performance interconnect solutions for severe environments dedicated to the aerospace, defence, light and heavy industry markets. Mini Applicator Stripper Presses Tooling www.mecal.net/eng/retevendita.php Automatic crimping tools © 2011 – SOURIAU 155 UTS Series Technical information Contact size Part number Head Handles #20 1mm RM/RC 24W3 - S20RCM SHANDLES RM/RC 20W3 - RM/RC 18W3 - SM 24W3S-(1) SC 24W3S-(1) S20SCM20 SM 24WL3S-(2) SC 24WL3S-(2) SM/SC 20W3S-(1) SM/SC 20WL3S-(2) #16 1.6mm RM/RC 28M1- S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9- RM/RC 20M13- RM/RC 20M12- RM/RC 16M23- S16RCM16 RM/RC 14M50- S16RCM1450 RM/RC 14M30- S16RCM14 SM/SC 24M1- SM/SC 24ML1- S16SCM20 SM/SC 20M1- SM/SC 20ML1- SM/SC 16M1- SM/SC 16ML1- S16SCML1 SM/SC 14M1- SM/SC 14ML1- SM/SC 16M11- SM/SC 16ML11- S16SCML11 Specifi c contacts Contact size Part number Tool with separate locator Extraction tools Hand tool Positioner + locator setting #12 2.4mm 8291 1457N- / 8291 1456- M317 VGE10077A 1-2 5106020924 8291 1459N- / 8291 1458- 2 8291 1461N- / 8291 1460- 2 8291 1463N- / 8291 1462- 3 8291 1465N- / 8291 1464- 3 8291 1467N- / 8291 1466- 4 #8 3.6mm 8291 3601A / 8291 3600A M317 VGE10078A 3 51060210936 8291 3603A / 8291 3602A 3 8291 3605A / 8291 3604A 4 8291 3607A / 8291 3606A 5 8291 3609A / 8291 3608A 6/7 Contact size Part number Hand tools (SHANDLES) head Tool with separate locator Extraction tools Hand tool Positioner + locator setting #16 Ø 1.6mm Longer RM contact RM28M1GE1- S16RCM20 RX2025GE1 RM24M9GE1- RM20M13GE1- RM16M23 GE1- S16RCM16 MH860 MH86186 6/8 RM14M50 GE1- S16RCM1450 M317 UH25 3 RM14M30 GE1- S16RCM14 #16 Ø 1.6mm Shorter RC contact RC28M1GE7- S16RCM20 MH860 MH86164G 4/6 RC24M9GE7- 5/6 RC20M13GE7- RC20M12GE7- 5/7 RC16M23GE7- S16RCM16 6/8 RC14M50GE7- S16RCM1450 M317 UH25 3 RC14M30GE7- S16RCM14 Standard contacts Coaxial contacts See cabling notice chapter Appendices, pages 178 to 182. (1) contact reeled (2) loose contact Note: endurance of SHANDLES tool = 5 000 cycles. 51060210924 51060210936 SHANDLES Crimptooling table Technical information 156 © 2011 – SOURIAU Assembly instruction Part number Stripping length L Male Female (mm) Machined contact #16 RM28M1- / RM24M9- RM20M13- / RM20M12- RC28M1- / RC24M9- RC20M13- / RC20M12- 4.8 RM16M23- / RM14M50- RM14M30- RC16M23- / RC14M50- RC14M30- 7.1 #20 RM24W3- / RM20W3- RM18W3- RC24W3- / RC20W3- RC18W3- 4.8 Stamped & formed #16 SM24M1- / SM24ML1- SM20M1- / SM20ML1 SC24M1- / SC24ML1- SC20M1- / SC20ML1- 4 SM16M11- / SM16ML11- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 4.65 SM16M1- / SM16ML1- SC16M1- / SC16ML1- 6.35 SM14M1- / SM14ML1- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 6.35 Screw contacts Power contacts #12 8291 1457- / 8291 1459- / 8291 1461- / 8291 1463- / 8291 1465- / 8291 1467- 8291 1456- / 8291 1458- / 8291 1460- /8291 1462- / 8291 1464- / 8291 1466 - 7 to 8 Power contacts #8 8291 3601- / 8291 3603- / 8291 3605- 8291 3607- / 8291 3609- 8291 3600- / 8291 3602- / 8291 3604- / 8291 3606- / 8291 3608- 6.5 to 7.5 Contact delivered with connector 5.8 Part number Stripping length L Male Female (mm) Machined contact #16 & #20 5 L L L L Without insulation support With insulation support L UTS Series Technical information Wire stripping crimp version Wire stripping solder version © 2011 – SOURIAU 157 One of the key factors which affects the performance of a connector, is the way contacts are terminated. Crimped connections are nowadays seen as the best solution to ensure quality throughout the lifetime of the product. Here are some reasons why we recommend this method of termination for UTS connectors: Advantages (Extract from the IEC 60352-2): - Effi cient processing of connections at each production level - Processing by fully-automatic or semi- automatic crimping machines, or with hand operated tools - No cold-soldered joints - No degradation of the spring characteristic of female contacts by the soldering temperature - No health risk from heavy metal and fl ux steam - Preservation of conductor fl exibility behind the crimped connection - No burnt, discolored and overheated wire insulation - Good connections with reproducible electrical and mechanical performances - Easy production control. To ensure that the crimp tooling is performing according tooriginal specifi cations, it is important to carry out regular checks. A common way to check the performance of tooling is with a simple pull test, ideally using a dedicated electric pull tester. Minimum recommended full forces are indicated in the tables below: Active contact part Contact type Die location on heads Wire section range Section (mm²) Tensile straight test (mini) Height (Mm) H (±0.075) Width (Mm) W (±0.075) Head's P/N Machined contacts size 20 RM/RC 24W3* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 0.95 1.27 S20RCM AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N RM/RC 20W3* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.26 1.78 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N RM/RC 18W3* 20/18 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N 1.35 1.86 AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N S & F contacts size 20 SM/SC 24WL3TK6* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 0.80 1.49 S20SCM20 AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N SM/SC 20WL3TK6* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.01 1.53 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N Machined contacts size 16 RM/RC 28M1K* 30/28 AWG 30 0.05 min 11 N 1.14 1.41 S16RCM20 AWG 28 0.08 max 11 N RM/RC 24M9K* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 1.15 1.41 AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N RM/RC 20M13K* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.26 1.76 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N RM/RC 20M12K* AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N RM/RC 16M23K* 20 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N 1.66 2.18 18 AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N 1.80 2.28 S16RCM16 16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.96 2.43 RM/RC 14M30K* 16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.10 2.68 S16RCM14 14 AWG 14 2.50 min 230 N 2.30 2.78 RM/RC 14M50K* 16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.09 2.59 S16RCM1450 14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 2.26 2.71 S & F contacts size 16 SM/SC 24ML1TK6* 26/24 AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N 0.84 1.50 S16SCM20 AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N SM/SC 20ML1TK6* 22/20 AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N 1.02 1.54 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N SM/SC 16ML11TK6* 18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.32 2.09 S16SCML11 16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.36 2.10 SM/SC 16ML1TK6* 18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.49 2.02 16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.7 2.05 S16SCML1 SM/SC14ML1TK6* 14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 1.79 2.58 (1): example of plating, for other plating see page 143 W W H H Machined contact Stamped & Formed contact UTS Series Technical information Crimping Technical information 158 © 2011 – SOURIAU • Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts • Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only) • Place receptacle in the panel cut-out, with optional gasket • Secure receptacle with screws (not supplied) Gasket (optional) Gasket (optional) Front mounting : Crimp version Rear mounting : Crimp version Optional coding ring Optional coding ring Panel thickness: 2.5mm max Panel Receptacl
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 17:08 951K 
